YASKAWA AC Drive T1000V: Technical Manual

YASKAWA AC Drive T1000V
AC Drive for Textile Applications

Technical Manual
Type: CIMR-TAV , CIMR-TBV
CIMR-TTV
Models: 200 V Class, Three-Phase Input: 0.1 to 18.5 kW
200 V Class, Single-Phase Input: 0.1 to 3.0 kW
400 V Class, Three-Phase Input: 0.2 to 18.5 kW
To properly use the product, read this manual thoroughly and retain
for easy reference, inspection, and maintenance. Ensure the end user
receives this manual.
Receiving 1
Mechanical Installation 2
Electrical Installation 3
Start-Up Programming &
Operation 4
Parameter Details
5
Troubleshooting 6
Periodic Inspection &
Maintenance 7
Peripheral Devices &
Options 8
Specifications A
Parameter List B
MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communications C
Standards Compliance D
MANUAL NO. SIEP C710606 38B Quick Reference Sheet E
Copyright © 2008 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of Yaskawa. No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information
contained herein. Moreover, because Yaskawa is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the
information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in
the preparation of this manual. Yaskawa assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any
liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.
2 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710606 38B YASKAWA AC Drive - T1000V Technical Manual
◆ Quick Reference
Replace the Drive
The removable terminal block with parameter backup function allows the transfer of parameter settings after drive replacement.
Refer to Replacing the Drive on page 295.
Drive a Synchronous PM Motor
The T1000V drive can operate synchronous PM motors. Refer to Subchart A3: Operation with Permanent Magnet Motors on
page 92.
Perform Auto-Tuning
Automatic tuning sets motor parameters. Refer to Auto-Tuning on page 94.
Check the Maintenance Period Using Drive Monitors

The maintenance period of fans and capacitors can be checked with drive monitors. Refer to Performance Life Monitors on page 290.
Drive or Motor Faults are Displayed on a Digital Operator

Refer to Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions on page 249 and Refer to Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions on page 261.
Standards Compliance
Refer to European Standards on page 422 and Refer to UL Standards on page 427.
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710606 38B YASKAWA AC Drive - T1000V Technical Manual 3
Table of Contents
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
I. PREFACE & GENERAL SAFETY ....................................................................... 13

i.1 Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Applicable Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Terms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
i.2 General Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Supplemental Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Application Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Notes on Motor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Drive Label Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1. RECEIVING .......................................................................................................... 23
1.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.2 Model Number and Nameplate Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.3 Drive Models and Enclosure Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.4 Component Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Single-Phase AC200 V CIMR-TBV0001 to 0003
Three-Phase AC200 V CIMR-T2V0001 to 0006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Single-Phase AC200 V CIMR-TBV0006 to 0012
Three-Phase AC200 V CIMR-T2V0008 to 0020
Three-Phase AC400 V CIMR-T4V0001 to 0011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Three-Phase AC400 V CIMR-T4V0018 to 0038 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Front Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2. MECHANICAL INSTALLATION .......................................................................... 33

2.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.2 Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Installation Environment (Heatsink-Cooled Drive, Finless Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Installation Orientation (Heatsink-Cooled Drive, Finless Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Installation to an External Heatsink (Finless Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Drive Heatsink Plate Installation Screw Size and Tightening Torque (Finless Drive) . 42
Heatsink Plate Temperature (Finless Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Selecting an External Heatsink (Finless Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ............................................................................ 47
3.1 Section Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
3.2 Standard Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
3.3 Main Circuit Connection Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Single-Phase 200 V Class (CIMR-TBV0001 to 0012) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Three-Phase 200 V Class (CIMR-T2V0001 to 0069);
Three-Phase 400 V Class (CIMR-T4V0001 to 0038) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
3.4 Terminal Block Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
3.5 Protective Covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Removing the Protective Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
3.6 Main Circuit Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Main Circuit Terminal Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Main Circuit Terminal Power Supply and Motor Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
3.7 Control Circuit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Control Circuit Terminal Block Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Terminal Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Wiring Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
3.8 I/O Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Sinking/Sourcing Mode Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
3.9 Main Frequency Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
DIP Switch S1 Analog Input Signal Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
3.10 MEMOBUS/Modbus Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
3.11 Braking Resistor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
3.12 Wiring Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
4. START-UP PROGRAMMING & OPERATION .................................................... 75

4.1 Section Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
4.2 Using the Digital LED Operator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Keys, Displays, and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Digital Text Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
LED Screen Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
LO/RE LED and RUN LED Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Menu Structure for Digital LED Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
4.3 The Drive and Programming Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Navigating the Drive and Programming Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Changing Parameter Settings or Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Verifying Parameter Changes: Verify Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Switching Between LOCAL and REMOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Parameters Available in the Setup Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
4.4 Start-up Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Flowchart A: Basic Start-up and Motor Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Subchart A1: Simple Motor Setup with Energy Savings or
Speed Search Using V/f Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Subchart A2: High Performance Operation Using
Open Loop Vector Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Subchart A3: Operation with Permanent Magnet Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
4.5 Powering Up the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Powering Up the Drive and Operation Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
4.6 Auto-Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Types of Auto-Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Before Auto-Tuning the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Auto-Tuning Interruption and Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Performing Auto-Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Auto-Tuning Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Input Data for Auto-Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
4.7 No-Load Operation Test Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
No-Load Operation Test Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
4.8 Test Run with Load Connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Test Run with the Load Connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
4.9 Verifying Parameter Settings and Backing Up Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Backing Up Parameter Values: o2-03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Parameter Access Level: A1-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Password Settings: A1-04, A1-05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Copy Function (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
4.10 Test Run Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
5. PARAMETER DETAILS..................................................................................... 107

5.1 A: Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
A1: Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
A2: User Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
5.2 b: Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
b1: Operation Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
b2: DC Injection Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
b3: Speed Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
b4: Delay Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
b5: PID Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
b6: Dwell Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
b8: Energy Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
5.3 C: Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
C1: Acceleration and Deceleration Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
C2: S-Curve Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
C3: Slip Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
C4: Torque Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
C5: Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
C6: Carrier Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
5.4 d: Reference Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
d1: Frequency Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
d2: Frequency Upper/Lower Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
d7: Offset Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
5.5 E: Motor Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
E1: V/f Pattern for Motor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
E2: Motor 1 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
E3: V/f Pattern for Motor 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
E4: Motor 2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
E5: PM Motor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
5.6 F: Option Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
F1: PG Speed Control Card Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
F6: Communication Option Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
CC-Link Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
MECHATROLINK Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
PROFIBUS-DP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
CANopen Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
DeviceNet Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
5.7 H: Terminal Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
H1: Multi-Function Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
H2: Multi-Function Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
H3: Multi-Function Analog Input Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
H4: Multi-Function Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
H5: MEMOBUS/Modbus Serial Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
H6: Pulse Train Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
5.8 L: Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
L1: Motor Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
L2: Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
L3: Stall Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
L4: Speed Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
L5: Fault Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
L6: Torque Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
L7: Torque Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
L8: Drive Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
5.9 n: Special Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
n1: Hunting Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
n2: Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
n3: Overexcitation Deceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
n8: PM Motor Control Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
n9: Hardware Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
5.10 o: Operator Related Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
o1: Digital Operator Display Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
o2: Digital Operator Keypad Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
o3: Copy Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
o4: Maintenance Monitor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
5.11 S: Functions for Textile Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
S1: Disturb Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
S2: Frequency Reference Gain Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
S3: Braking Transistor and V/f Ratio Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
S4: KEB Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
S5: KEB Accel/Decel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
S6: Power KEB Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
T: Motor Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
5.12 U: Monitor Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
U1: Operation Status Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
U2: Fault Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
U3: Fault History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
U4: Maintenance Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
U5: PID Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
U6: Control Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
U9: KEB Voltage Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
6. TROUBLESHOOTING........................................................................................ 239
6.1 Section Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
6.2 Motor Performance Fine Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
V/f Motor Control Method Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Open Loop Vector (OLV) Motor Control Method Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Motor Hunting and Oscillation Control Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
6.3 Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Types of Alarms, Faults, and Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Alarm and Error Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
6.4 Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
6.5 Alarm Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
6.6 Operator Programming Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
oPE Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
6.7 Auto-Tuning Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Auto-Tuning Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
6.8 Diagnosing and Resetting Faults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Fault Occurs Simultaneously with Power Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
If the Drive Still has Power After a Fault Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Viewing Fault Trace Data After Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Fault Reset Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
6.9 Troubleshooting without Fault Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Cannot Change Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Motor Does Not Rotate Properly after Pressing RUN Button or
after Entering External Run Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
oPE02 Error Occurs When Lowering the Motor Rated Current Setting . . . . . . . . . . . 277
7. PERIODIC INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE ................................................... 285

7.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
7.2 Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Recommended Daily Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Recommended Periodic Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
7.3 Periodic Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
7.4 Drive Cooling Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Cooling Fan Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
7.5 Drive Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Serviceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Terminal Board Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Replacing the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
8. PERIPHERAL DEVICES & OPTIONS .............................................................. 299

8.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
8.2 Drive Options and Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
8.3 Connecting Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
8.4 Installing Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Installing a Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) or
Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Installing an Input-side Magnetic Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Connecting an AC or DC Reactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Connecting a Surge Absorber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Connecting a Noise Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
External Heatsink Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
EMC Filter Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Zero-Phase Reactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Installing a Motor Thermal Overload (oL) Relay on the Drive Output . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
8.5 Communication Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
A. SPECIFICATIONS.............................................................................................. 315
A.1 Heavy Duty and Normal Duty Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
A.2 Single/Three-Phase 200 V Class Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
A.3 Three-Phase 400 V Class Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
A.4 Drive Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
A.5 Drive Watt Loss Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
A.6 Drive Derating Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Carrier Frequency Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Temperature Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
B. PARAMETER LIST............................................................................................. 327
B.1 Understanding the Parameter Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
B.2 Parameter Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
B.3 Parameter Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
A: Initialization Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
b: Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
C: Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
d: References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
E: Motor Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
F: Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
H Parameters: Multi-Function Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
L: Protection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
n: Advanced Performance Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
o: Operator Related Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
S: Functions for Textile Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
T: Motor Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
U: Operation Status Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
B.4 Control Mode Dependent Parameter Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
B.5 V/f Pattern Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
B.6 Defaults by Drive Model Selection (o2-04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
B.7 E5-01 (PM Motor Code Selection) Dependent Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Yaskawa SMRA Series SPM Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
SS5 Motor: Yaskawa SSR1 Series IPM Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
B.8 C6-02 (Carrier Frequency Selection) Dependent Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
C. MEMOBUS/MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS...................................................... 389

C.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
C.2 MEMOBUS/Modbus Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
C.3 Communication Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
C.4 Connecting to a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Network Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Connecting Multiple Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Wiring Diagram for Multiple Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
Network Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
C.5 MEMOBUS/Modbus Setup Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
MEMOBUS/Modbus Serial Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
C.6 Drive Operations by MEMOBUS/Modbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Observing the Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Controlling the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
C.7 Communications Timing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Command Messages from Master to Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Response Messages from Drive to Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
C.8 Message Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Message Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Slave Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Function Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Error Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
C.9 Message Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Reading Drive MEMOBUS/Modbus Register Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Loopback Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Writing to Multiple Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
C.10 MEMOBUS/Modbus Data Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Command Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Monitor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Broadcast Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Fault Trace Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Alarm Register Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
C.11 Enter Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Enter Command Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Enter Command Settings when Upgrading the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
C.12 Communication Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
MEMOBUS/Modbus Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Slave Not Responding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
C.13 Self-Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
D. STANDARDS COMPLIANCE ............................................................................ 419

D.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
D.2 European Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
EMC Guidelines Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
D.3 UL Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
UL Standards Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Drive Motor Overload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
D.4 Safe Disable Input Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Safe Disable Function Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
E. QUICK REFERENCE SHEET ............................................................................ 433

E.1 Drive and Motor Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Drive Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Motor Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
E.2 Basic Parameter Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
V/f Pattern Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Motor Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Multi-Function Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Pulse Train Input/Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Multi-Function Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Monitor Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
E.3 User Setting Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Index ............................................................................................................................ 444
i
Preface & General Safety
This section provides safety messages pertinent to this product that, if not heeded, may result
in fatality, personal injury, or equipment damage. Yaskawa is not responsible for the
consequences of ignoring these instructions.
I.1 PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
I.2 GENERAL SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
i.1 Preface
i.1 Preface
Yaskawa manufactures products used as components in a wide variety of industrial systems and equipment. The selection
and application of Yaskawa products remain the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer or end user. Yaskawa
accepts no responsibility for the way its products are incorporated into the final system design. Under no circumstances
should any Yaskawa product be incorporated into any product or design as the exclusive or sole safety control. Without
exception, all controls should be designed to detect faults dynamically and fail safely under all circumstances. All
systems or equipment designed to incorporate a product manufactured by Yaskawa must be supplied to the end user with
appropriate warnings and instructions as to the safe use and operation of that part. Any warnings provided by Yaskawa
must be promptly provided to the end user. Yaskawa offers an express warranty only as to the quality of its products in
conforming to standards and specifications published in the Yaskawa manual. NO OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED, IS OFFERED. Yaskawa assumes no liability for any personal injury, property damage, losses, or claims
arising from misapplication of its products.
This manual is designed to ensure correct and suitable application of Variable T1000V-Series Drives. Read this manual
before attempting to install, operate, maintain, or inspect a drive and keep it in a safe, convenient location for future
reference. Be sure you understand all precautions and safety information before attempting application.
◆ Applicable Documentation
The following manuals are available for the T1000V drive:
T1000V Series AC Drive Technical Manual

This manual is included on the CD-ROM packaged with the product (Yaskawa AC Drive T1000 Series
STOP
Manuals, TOBCC71060014). This manual provides detailed information on parameter settings, drive
T1000V
functions, and MEMOBUS/Modbus specifications. Use this manual to expand drive functionality and to take
advantage of higher performance features.
Freq Reference : (Hz)
FWD / REV Sel :
Output Freq : (Hz)
Output Current : (A)
Selected Monitor : (V)
Monitor :
Verify :
SetUpGuide :
T1000V Series AC Drive Quick Start Guide

Parameter Set :
Auto-Tuning :
WARNING Risk of electric shock.

Read manual before installing.
Wait 5 minutes for capacitor discharge after
disconnecting power supply.
This guide contains cautionary notes and warnings to ensure safe usage. For drive installation, wiring, and
To conform to requirements, make sure
to ground the supply neutral for 400V class.
Risque de décharge
AVERTISSEMENT électrique.
Lire le manuel avant l'installation.
operation, refer to the Technical Manual.

Attendre 5 minutes après la coupure de l'alimentation,
pour permettre la décharge des condensateurs.
Pour répondre aux exigences , s assurer que le
neutre soit relié à la terre, pour la série 400V.
◆ Symbols
Note: Indicates a supplement or precaution that does not cause drive damage.
TERMS Indicates a term or definition used in this manual.
◆ Terms and Abbreviations

TERMS
• Drive: Yaskawa AC Drive-T1000V Series
• PM motor: Synchronous motor (an abbreviation for IPM motor or SPM motor)
• IPM motor: Yaskawa’s SSR1 Series
• SPM motor: Yaskawa’s SMRA Series SPM Motor
• PG: Pulse Generator
i.2 General Safety
i.2 General Safety

◆ Supplemental Safety Information
General Precautions
• The diagrams in this manual may be indicated without covers or safety shields to show details. Restore covers or shields before
operating the drive and run the drive according to the instructions described in this manual.
• Any illustrations, photographs, or examples used in this manual are provided as examples only and may not apply to all products
to which this manual is applicable.
• The products and specifications described in this manual or the content and presentation of the manual may be changed without
notice to improve the product and/or the manual.
• When ordering a new copy of the manual due to damage or loss, contact your Yaskawa representative or the nearest Yaskawa sales
office and provide the manual number shown on the front cover.
• If nameplate becomes worn or damaged, order a replacement from your Yaskawa representative or the nearest Yaskawa sales
office.
WARNING
Read and understand this manual before installing, operating or servicing this drive. The drive must be installed
according to this manual and local codes.
The following conventions are used to indicate safety messages in this manual. Failure to heed these messages could
result in serious or possibly even fatal injury or damage to the products or to related equipment and systems.
DANGER
Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING! will also be indicated by a bold key word embedded in the text followed by an italicized safety message.
CAUTION
Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION! will also be indicated by a bold key word embedded in the text followed by an italicized safety message.
NOTICE
Indicates a property damage message.
NOTICE: will also be indicated by a bold key word embedded in the text followed by an italicized safety message.
i.2 General Safety
◆ Safety Messages
DANGER
Heed the safety messages in this manual.
Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.
The operating company is responsible for any injuries or equipment damage resulting from failure to heed the warnings
in this manual.
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on.
Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power
supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc. To prevent
electric shock, wait at least five minutes after all indicators are OFF and measure the DC bus voltage level to confirm
safe level.
WARNING
Sudden Movement Hazard
System may start unexpectedly upon application of power, resulting in death or serious injury.
Clear all personnel from the drive, motor and machine area before applying power. Secure covers, couplings, shaft
keys and machine loads before applying power to the drive.
Do not attempt to modify or alter the drive in any way not explained in this manual.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Yaskawa is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the user. This product must not be modified.
Do not allow unqualified personnel to use equipment.
Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar with
installation, adjustment and maintenance of AC drives.
Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the power is on.
Fire Hazard
Do not use an improper voltage source.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire.
Verify that the rated voltage of the drive matches the voltage of the incoming power supply before applying power.
Crush Hazard
Do not use this drive in lifting applications without installing external safety circuitry to prevent accidental
dropping of the load.
The drive does not possess built-in load drop protection for lifting applications.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from falling loads.
Install electrical and/or mechanical safety circuit mechanisms independent of drive circuitry.
i.2 General Safety
CAUTION
Crush Hazard
Do not carry the drive by the front cover.
Failure to comply may result in minor or moderate injury from the main body of the drive falling.
NOTICE
Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and circuit boards.
Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
Never connect or disconnect the motor from the drive while the drive is outputting voltage.
Improper equipment sequencing could result in damage to the drive.
Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the drive.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the sensitive devices within the drive.
Do not operate damaged equipment.
Failure to comply could result in further damage to the equipment.
Do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts.
Install adequate branch circuit short circuit protection per applicable codes.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive.
The drive is suitable for circuits capable of delivering not more than 30,000 RMS symmetrical Amperes, 240 Vac
maximum (200 V Class) and 480 Vac maximum (400 V Class).
Do not expose the drive to halogen group disinfectants.
Failure to comply may cause damage to the electrical components in the drive.
Do not pack the drive in wooden materials that have been fumigated or sterilized.
Do not sterilize the entire package after the product is packed.
◆ Application Notes
■ Selection
Installing a Reactor
An AC or DC reactor can be used for the following:
• to suppress harmonic current.
• to smooth peak current that results from capacitor switching.
• when the power supply is above 600 kVA.
• when the drive is running from a power supply system with thyristor converters.
Figure i.1
4000 Power supply harmonics

reactor required
Power Supply
Capacity (kVA)
600
Reactor
unnecessary
0
60 400
Drive Capacity (kVA)
Figure i.1 Installing a Reactor
i.2 General Safety
Drive Capacity
For specialized motors, make sure that the motor rated current is less than rated output current for the drive. When
running more than one motor in parallel from a single drive, the capacity of the drive should be larger than 1.1 times of
the total motor rated current.
Starting Torque
The overload rating for the drive determines the starting and accelerating characteristics of the motor. Expect lower
torque than when running from line power. To get more starting torque, use a larger drive or increase both the motor and
drive capacity.
Emergency Stop
When the drive faults out, the output is shut off. This, however, does not stop the motor immediately. Some type of
mechanical brake may be needed if it is necessary to halt the motor faster than the Fast Stop function is able to.
Options
The B1, B2, +1, +2, and +3 terminals are used to connect optional devices. Connect only T1000V-compatible devices.
■ Installation
Enclosure Panels
Keep the drive in a clean environment by either selecting an area free of airborne dust, lint, and oil mist, or install the
drive in an enclosure panel. Be sure to leave the required space between drives to provide for cooling, and that proper
measures are taken so that the ambient temperature remains within allowable limits. Keep flammable materials away
from the drive. If the drive must be used in an area where it is subjected to oil mist and excessive vibration, protective
designs are available. Contact Yaskawa or your Yaskawa agent for details.
Installation Direction
The drive should be installed upright as specified in the manual. For more information on installation, Refer to
Mechanical Installation on page 35.
■ Settings
Motor Code
If using OLV/PM designed for permanent magnet motors, make sure that the proper motor code has been set to
parameter E5-01 before performing a trial run.
Upper Limits
The drive is capable of running the motor up to 400 Hz. Due to the danger of accidentally of operating at high speed, be
sure to set the upper limit for the frequency. The default setting for the maximum output frequency is 60 Hz.
DC Injection Braking
Motor overheat can result if there is too much current used during DC Injection Braking, or if the time for DC Injection
Braking is too long.
Acceleration/Deceleration Times
Acceleration and deceleration times are affected by how much torque the motor generates, the load torque, and the inertia
moment ((GD2)/4). Set a longer accel/decel time when Stall Prevention is enabled. The accel/decel times are lengthened
for as long as the Stall Prevention function is operating. For faster acceleration and deceleration, install one of the
braking options available or increase the capacity of the drive.
■ Compliance with Harmonic Suppression Guidelines
T1000V conforms to strict guidelines in Japan covering harmonic suppression for power conversion devices. Defined in
JEM-TR201 and JEM-TR226 and published by the Japan Electrical Manufacturers’ Association, these guidelines define
the amount of harmonic current output acceptable for new installation. Instructions on calculation harmonic output are
available at www.e-mechatronics.com.
i.2 General Safety
■ General Handling
Wiring Check
Never connect the power supply lines to output terminals U/T1, V/T2, or W/T3. Doing so will destroy the drive. Be sure
to perform a final check of all sequence wiring and other connections before turning the power on. Make sure there are
no short circuits on the control terminals (+V, AC, etc.), as this could damage the drive.
Selecting a Circuit Breaker or Leakage Circuit Breaker
Yaskawa recommends installing an ELCB (Earth leakage Circuit Breaker) to the power supply side to protect drive
wiring and prevent other damage in the event of component failure. A MCCB (Molded Case Circuit Breaker) can also be
used if permitted by the power system.
The ELCB should be designed for use with an AC drive (e.g. Type B according to IEC60755). MCCB selection depends
on the power factor for the drive, determined by the power supply voltage, output frequency, and load. Installing a
Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) or Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB) on page 306. Note that a larger
capacity is needed when using a fully electromagnetic MCCB, as operation characteristics vary with harmonic current.
Magnetic Contactor Installation
Use a magnetic contactor (MC) to ensure that power to the drive can be completely shut off when necessary. The MC
should be wired so that it opens when a fault output terminal is triggered.
Avoid switching a magnetic contactor on the power supply side more frequently than once every 30 minutes. Frequent
switching can cause damage to the drive.
Inspection and Maintenance
Capacitors in the drive take time to discharge even after the power has been shut off. After shutting off the power, wait
for at least the amount of time specified on the drive before touching any components.
The heatsink can become quite hot during operation, and proper precautions should be taken to prevent burns. When
replacing the cooling fan, shut off the power and wait at least 15 minutes to be sure that the heatsink has cooled down.
Even when the power has been shut off for a drive running a PM motor, voltage continues to be generated at the motor
terminals while the motor coasts to stop. Take the precautions described below to prevent shock and injury:
• Applications where the machine can still rotate even though the drive has fully stopped should have a load switch
installed to the output side of the drive. Yaskawa recommends manual load switches from the AICUT LB Series by
AICHI Electric Works Co., Ltd.
• Do not allow an external force to rotate the motor beyond the maximum allowable speed, also when the drive has been
shut off.
• Wait for at least the time specified on the warning label after opening the load switch on the output side before
inspecting the drive or performing any maintenance.
• Do not open and close the load switch while the motor is running, as this can damage the drive.
• If the motor is coasting, make sure the power to the drive is turned on and the drive output has completely stopped
before closing the load switch.
Wiring
All wire ends should use ring terminals for UL/cUL compliance. Use only the tools recommended by the terminal
manufacturer for crimping.
Transporting the Drive
Never steam clean the drive.
During transport, keep the drive from coming into contact with salts, fluorine, bromine, phthalate ester, and other such
harmful chemicals.
i.2 General Safety
◆ Notes on Motor Operation

■ Using a Standard Motor
Low Speed Range
The cooling fan of a standard motor is usually designed to sufficiently cool the motor at the rated speed. As the self-
cooling capability of such a motor reduces with the speed, applying full torque at low speed will possibly damage the
motor. To prevent motor damage from overheat, reduce the load torque as the motor slows.
Figure i.2 shows the allowable load characteristics for a Yaskawa standard motor. A motor designed specifically for
operation with a drive should be used when 100% continuous torque is needed at low speeds.
Figure i.2
25% ED (or 15 min)

40% ED (or 20 min)
60% ED (or 40 min)
100
90
80
70
Torque 60
(%) 50
Continuous operation
3 6 20 60
Frequency (Hz) YEC

Figure i.2 Allowable Load Characteristics for a Yaskawa Motor
Insulation Tolerance
Consider voltage tolerance levels and insulation in applications with an input voltage of over 440 V or particularly long
wiring distances. Contact Yaskawa or your Yaskawa agent for consultation.
High Speed Operation
Problems may occur with the motor bearings and dynamic balance of the machine when operating a motor beyond its
rated speed. Contact the motor or machine manufacturer.
Torque Characteristics
Torque characteristics differ compared to operating the motor directly from line power. The user should have a full
understanding of the load torque characteristics for the application.
Vibration and Shock
T1000V lets the user choose between high carrier PWM control and low carrier PWM. Selecting high carrier PWM can
help reduce motor oscillation.
Take particular caution when using a variable speed drive for an application that is conventionally run from line power at
a constant speed. If resonance occurs shock-absorbing rubber should be installed around the base of the motor.
Audible Noise
Noise created during run varies by the carrier frequency setting. When using a high carrier frequency, audible noise from
the motor is comparable to the motor noise generated when running from line power. Operating above the rated r/min,
however, can create unpleasant motor noise.
■ Using a Synchronous Motor
• Contact Yaskawa or your Yaskawa agent if you plan to use any other synchronous motor not endorsed by Yaskawa.
• A single drive is not capable of running multiple synchronous motors at the same time. Use a standard induction motor
for such setups.
• At start, a synchronous motor may rotate slightly in the opposite direction of the Run command depending on
parameter settings and rotor position.
i.2 General Safety
• The amount of starting torque that can be generated differs by each control mode and by the type of motor being used.
Set up the motor with the drive after verifying the starting torque, allowable load characteristics, impact load tolerance,
and speed control range.
Contact Yaskawa or your Yaskawa agent if you plan to use a motor that does not fall within these specifications.
• In Open Loop Vector Control for PM motors, braking torque is less than 125% when running between 20% to 100%
speed, even with a braking resistor. Braking torque drops to less than half when running at less than 20% speed.
• In Open Loop Vector Control for PM motors, the allowable load inertia moment is approximately 50 times higher than
the motor inertia moment or less. Contact Yaskawa or your Yaskawa agent concerning applications with a larger inertia
moment.
• When using a holding brake in Open Loop Vector Control for PM motors, release the brake prior to starting the motor.
Failure to set the proper timing can result in speed loss. Not for use with conveyor, transport, or hoist type applications.
• To restart a coasting motor rotating at over 200 Hz while in the V/f control mode, use the Short Circuit Braking
function to first bring the motor to a stop. Short Circuit Braking requires a special braking resistor. Contact Yaskawa or
your Yaskawa agent for details.
Speed Search can be used to restart a coasting motor rotating slower than 200 Hz. If the motor cable is relatively long,
however, the motor should instead be stopped using Short Circuit Braking, which forces the motor to stop by creating a
short-circuit in the motor windings.
◆ Drive Label Warnings

Always heed the warning information listed in Figure i.3 in the position shown in Figure i.4.
Figure i.3

Figure i.3 Warning Information

Figure i.4
STOP
T1000V Freq Reference : (Hz)

FWD / REV Sel :
Output Freq : (Hz)
Monitor :
Verify :
SetUpGuide :
Parameter Set :
Auto-Tuning :

Risque de décharge
Warning
Label
Figure i.4 Warning Information Position
◆ Warranty Information
■ Warranty Period
This drive is warranted for 12 months from the date of delivery to the customer or 18 months from the date of shipment
from the Yaskawa factory, whichever comes first.
■ Scope of Warranty
Inspections
Customers are responsible for periodic inspections of the drive. Upon request, a Yaskawa representative will inspect the
drive for a fee. If the Yaskawa representative finds the drive to be defective due to Yaskawa workmanship or materials
and the defect occurs during the warranty period, this inspection fee will be waived and the problem remedied free of
charge.
i.2 General Safety
Repairs
If a Yaskawa product is found to be defective due to Yaskawa workmanship or materials and the defect occurs during the
warranty period, Yaskawa will provide a replacement, repair the defective product, and provide shipping to and from the
site free of charge.
However, if the Yaskawa Authorized Service Center determines that the problem with the drive is not due to defective
workmanship or materials, the customer will be responsible for the cost of any necessary repairs. Some problems that are
outside the scope of this warranty are:
Problems due to improper maintenance or handling, carelessness, or other reasons where the customer is determined to
be responsible.
Problems due to additions or modifications made to a Yaskawa product without Yaskawa's understanding.
Problems due to the use of a Yaskawa product under conditions that do not meet the recommended specifications.
Problems caused by natural disaster or fire.
After the free warranty period elapses.
Replenishment or replacement of consumables or expendables.
Defective products due to packaging or fumigation.
Other problems not due to defects in Yaskawa workmanship or materials.
Warranty service is only applicable within the country where the product was purchased. However, after-sales service is
available for customers outside the country where the product was purchased for a reasonable fee.
Contact your local Yaskawa representative for more information.
Exceptions
Any inconvenience to the customer or damage to non-Yaskawa products due to Yaskawa’s defective products whether
within or outside of the warranty period are NOT covered by warranty.
■ Restrictions
The T1000V was not designed or manufactured for use in devices or systems that may directly affect or threaten human
lives or health.
Customers who intend to use the product described in this manual for devices or systems relating to transportation, health
care, space aviation, atomic power, electric power, or in underwater applications must first contact their Yaskawa
representatives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office.
This product has been manufactured under strict quality-control guidelines. However, if this product is to be installed in
any location where failure of this product could involve or result in a life-and-death situation or loss of human life or in a
facility where failure may cause a serious accident or physical injury, safety devices must be installed to minimize the
likelihood of any accident.
1
Receiving
This chapter describes the proper inspections to perform after receiving the drive and
illustrates the different enclosure types and components.
1.1 SECTION SAFETY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

1.2 MODEL NUMBER AND NAMEPLATE CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.3 DRIVE MODELS AND ENCLOSURE TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.4 COMPONENT NAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1.1 Section Safety
1.1 Section Safety

CAUTION
Failure to comply may cause the main body of the drive to fall, resulting in minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE
A motor connected to a PWM drive may operate at a higher temperature than a utility-fed motor and the
operating speed range may reduce motor cooling capacity.
Ensure that the motor is suitable for drive duty and/or the motor service factor is adequate to accommodate the
additional heating with the intended operating conditions.
1.2 Model Number and Nameplate Check

Please perform the following tasks after receiving the drive:
• Inspect the drive for damage.
If the drive appears damaged upon receipt, contact the shipper immediately.
• Verify receipt of the correct model by checking the information on the nameplate.
• If you have received the wrong model or the drive does not function properly, contact your supplier.
◆ Nameplate
Figure 1.1
AC drive model MODEL : CIMR-TA2V0004BMA

Max applicable motor MAX APPLI. MOTOR : 0.75kW / 0.4kW REV : A
Input specifications INPUT : AC3PH 200-240V 50 / 60Hz 3.9A / 2.9A
IND.CONT.EQ.
Output specifications OUTPUT : AC3PH 0-240V 0-400Hz 3.5A / 3.0A 7J48 B
Mass MASS : 0.9 kg PRG : 6002 Software version
Lot number O/N :
Serial number S/N :
FILE NO : E131457 IP20

PASS
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN
Figure 1.1 Nameplate Information (Heatsink-Cooled Drive)

Figure 1.2
Receiving
1
AC drive model MODEL : CIMR-TA2V0004JMA

Output specifications OUTPUT : AC3PH 0-240V 0-400Hz 3.5A / 3.0A 7J48
Lot number O/N :
Serial number S/N :

PASS
Figure 1.2 Nameplate Information (Finless Drive)
CIMR- T A 2 V 0001 B M A
Drive T1000 Series Design Revision
Order
No. Region No. Voltage Class No. Enclosure No. Environmental

code B 1-phase, 200-240 Vac A IP00 Specification <2>
A Japan B IP20 B Humidity-and
2 3-phase, 200-240 Vac dust-resistant <3>
B China J Finless
4 3-phase, 380-480 Vac M Humidity-and
T Asia (IP20)
dust-resistant
L Finless
(IP00) <1>
■ Single-Phase 200 V
Normal Duty Heavy Duty
Max Motor Rated Output Max Motor Rated Output
No. No.
Capacity kW Current A Capacity kW Current A
0001 0.2 1.2 0001 0.1 0.8
0002 0.4 1.9 0002 0.2 1.6
0003 0.75 3.3 0003 0.4 3
0006 1.1 6 0006 0.75 5
0010 2.2 9.6 0010 1.5 8
0012 3.0 12 0012 2.2 11
■ Three-Phase 200 V

No. No.
0001 0.2 1.2 0001 0.1 0.8
0002 0.4 1.9 0002 0.2 1.6
0004 0.75 3.5 0004 0.4 3
0006 1.1 6 0006 0.75 5
0008 1.5 8.0 0008 1.1 6.9
0010 2.2 9.6 0010 1.5 8
0012 3.0 12 0012 2.2 11
0018 3.7 17.5 0018 3.0 14.0
0020 5.5 19.6 0020 3.7 17.5
0030 7.5 30 0030 5.5 25
0040 11 40 0040 7.5 33
0056 15 56 0056 11 47
0069 18.5 69 0069 15 60
■ Three-Phase 400 V

No. No.
0001 0.4 1.2 0001 0.2 1.2
0002 0.75 2.1 0002 0.4 1.8
0004 1.5 4.1 0004 0.75 3.4
0005 2.2 5.4 0005 1.5 4.8
0007 3.0 6.9 0007 2.2 5.5
0009 3.7 8.8 0009 3.0 7.2
0011 5.5 11.1 0011 3.7 9.2
0018 7.5 17.5 0018 5.5 14.8
0023 11 23 0023 7.5 18
0031 15 31 0031 11 24
0038 18.5 38 0038 15 31
<1> IP00 is available for CIMR-T2V0069 only.

<2> Drives with these specifications do not guarantee complete protection for the specified environmental conditions.
<3> The specification is for China localized drive only: CIMR-TBV
Receiving
1
1.3 Drive Models and Enclosure Types
1.3 Drive Models and Enclosure Types

The following table describes drive enclosures and models.
Table 1.1 Drive Models and Enclosure Types
Enclosure Type Enclosure Type
Voltage Class IP20/Heatsink-Cooled IP00/Heatsink-Cooled IP20/Finless Drive IP00/Finless Drive
Drive Drive CIMR-T CIMR-T
CIMR-T CIMR-T
BV0001B – BV0001J –
BV0002B – BV0002J –
BV0003B – BV0003J –
Single-Phase
BV0006B – BV0006J –
200 V Class
BV0010B – BV0010J –
BV0012B – BV0012J –
– – – –
2V0001B – 2V0001J –
2V0002B – 2V0002J –
2V0004B – 2V0004J –
2V0006B – 2V0006J –
2V0008B – 2V0008J –
2V0010B – 2V0010J –
Three-Phase
2V0012B – 2V0012J –
200 V Class
2V0018B – 2V0018J –
2V0020B – 2V0020J –
– 2V0030A 2V0030J –
– 2V0040A 2V0040J –
– 2V0056A 2V0056J –
– 2V0069A – 2V0069L
4V0001B – 4V0001J –
4V0002B – 4V0002J –
4V0004B – 4V0004J –
4V0005B – 4V0005J –
4V0007B – 4V0007J –
Three-Phase
4V0009B – 4V0009J –
400 V Class
4V0011B – 4V0011J –
– 4V0018A 4V0018J –
– 4V0023A 4V0023J –
– 4V0031A 4V0031J –
– 4V0038A 4V0038J –
1.4 Component Names
1.4 Component Names

This section illustrates the drive components as they are mentioned in this manual.
◆ Single-Phase AC200 V CIMR-TBV0001 to 0003

Last digit specifies the model design. Letter “B” indicates IP20/heatsink-cooled drive, while “J” indicates IP20/finless
drive.
Figure 1.3
L
B
K
H I
E
F
G
A – Fan cover <1> G – Front cover screw
Receiving
B – Mounting hole H – Front cover
C – Heatsink I – Comm port
D – Optional 24 V DC power supply J – LED operator Refer to Using the
connector cover Digital LED Operator on page 78 1
E – Terminal board Refer to Control K – Case
Circuit Terminal Block Functions on
page 61
F – Terminal cover L – Cooling fan <1>
<1> The following drives do not have a cooling fan or a cooling fan cover.
• CIMR-TBV0001B to 0003B
• CIMR-T2V0001B to 0004B
• CIMR-TBV0001J to 0003J
• CIMR-T2V0001J to 0006J
Figure 1.3 Drive Components (example of model CIMR-TA2V0006B)
1.4 Component Names
◆ Single-Phase AC200 V CIMR-TBV0006 to 0012

Last digit specifies the model design. Letter “B” indicates IP20/heatsink-cooled drive, while “J” indicates IP20/finless
drive.
Figure 1.4
B
L
K
C
J
I
H
D
E
F
G
A – Fan cover <1> H – Front cover

B – Mounting hole I – Terminal cover
C – Heatsink J – Bottom cover
D – Optional 24 V DC power supply K – LED operator Refer to Using the
connector cover Digital LED Operator on page 78
E – Comm port L – Case
F – Terminal board Refer to Control M – Cooling fan <1>
page 61
G – Front cover screw
<1> The following drives do not have a cooling fan or a cooling fan cover.
• CIMR-TBV0006B
• CIMR-T4V0001B to 0004B
• CIMR-TBV0006J to 0012J
Figure 1.4 Drive Components (example of model CIMR-TA2V0012B)
1.4 Component Names
◆ Three-Phase AC200 V CIMR-T2V0030 to 0069

Last digit specifies the model design. Letter “A” indicates IP00/heatsink-cooled drive, while “J” indicates IP20/finless
drive and "L" indicates IP00/finless drive.
Figure 1.5
M
C
L
D
J K
I E
H
F
A – Fan cover <1> H – Front cover screw

B – Cooling fan <1> I – Front cover
C – Mounting hole J – Terminal cover
Receiving
D – Heatsink K – Bottom cover
E – Optional 24 V DC power supply L – LED operator Refer to Using the
connector cover Digital LED Operator on page 78
F – Comm port M – Case 1
G – Terminal board Refer to Control
page 61
<1> The following drives do not have a cooling fan or a cooling fan cover
• CIMR-T2V0069L
Figure 1.5 Drive Components
(example of model CIMR-TA4V0018A)
1.4 Component Names
◆ Front Views
Figure 1.6
CIMR-T 2V0006 CIMR-T 2V0012

A
I
I A B
H
H B
C
C
D D
G G
E
E
F
F
A – Terminal board connector F – Ground terminal

B – DIP switch S1 Refer to DIP Switch S1 G – Terminal cover
Analog Input Signal Selection on
page 68
C – DIP switch S3 Refer to Sinking/ H – Option card connector
Sourcing Mode Switch on page 66
D – Control circuit terminal Refer to I – DIP switch S2 Refer to MEMOBUS/
Control Circuit Wiring on page 61 Modbus Termination on page 69
E – Main circuit terminal Refer to Wiring
the Main Circuit Terminal on page 60
Figure 1.6 Front Views of Drives
2
Mechanical Installation
This chapter explains how to properly mount and install the drive.
2.1 SECTION SAFETY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

2.2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.1 Section Safety
2.1 Section Safety

WARNING
Fire Hazard
Provide sufficient cooling when installing the drive inside an enclosed panel or cabinet.
Failure to comply could result in overheating and fire.
When multiple drives are placed inside the same enclosure panel, install proper cooling to ensure air entering the
enclosure does not exceed 50 °C.
CAUTION
Crush Hazard
NOTICE
Observe proper electrostatic discharge (ESD) procedures when handling the drive.
Failure to comply could result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
It may be difficult to perform maintenance on the cooling fans of drives installed in a vertical row inside an
enclosure.
Ensure adequate spacing at the top of the drive to perform cooling fan replacement when required.
Operating the motor in the low-speed range diminishes the cooling effects, increases motor temperature, and
may lead to motor damage by overheating.
Reduce the motor torque in the low-speed range whenever using a standard blower cooled motor. If 100% torque is
required continuously at low speed, consider using a special drive or vector motor. Select a motor that is compatible
with the required load torque and operating speed range.
Do not operate motors above the maximum rated RPM.
Failure to comply may lead to bearing or other mechanical motor failures.
The speed range for continuous operation differs according to the lubrication method and motor manufacturer.
If the motor is to be operated at a speed higher than the rated speed, consult with the manufacturer.
Continuously operating an oil-lubricated motor in the low-speed range may result in burning.
When the wiring distance is greater than 100 meters, pay special attention to the motor insulation voltage or use
a drive-rated motor.
Failure to comply could lead to motor winding failure.
The motor may require more acceleration torque with drive operation than with a commercial power supply.
Set a proper V/f pattern by checking the load torque characteristics of the machine to be used with the motor.
Do not use a drive for a single-phase motor.
Replace the motor with a three-phase motor.
If an oil-lubricated gearbox or speed reducer is used in the power transmission mechanism, oil lubrication will
be affected when the motor operates only in the low speed range.
The power transmission mechanism will make noise and experience problems with service life and durability if the
motor is operated at a speed higher than the rated speed.
2.2 Mechanical Installation

This section outlines specifications, procedures, and environment for proper mechanical installation of the drive.
◆ Installation Environment (Heatsink-Cooled Drive, Finless Drive)

To help prolong the optimum performance life of the drive, install the drive in the proper environment. The table below
provides a description of the appropriate environment for the drive.
Table 2.1 Installation Environment
Environment Conditions
Installation Area Indoors
-10 °C to +50 °C (Heatsink-Cooled Drive)
-10 °C to +50 °C (Finless Drive)
If using the finless drive in temperatures greater than 35 °C, either takes steps to ensure proper airflow around the
unit or derate drive capacity. Refer to Temperature Derating on page 324 for details.
Ambient Temperature
Drive reliability improves in environments without wide temperature fluctuations.
When using an enclosure panel, install a cooling fan or air conditioner in the area to ensure that the air temperature
inside the enclosure does not exceed the specified levels.
Do not allow ice to develop on the drive.
Humidity 95% RH or less and free of condensation
Storage Temperature -20 °C to +60 °C
• Install the drive in an area free from:
• oil mist and dust
• metal shavings, oil, water or other foreign materials
• radioactive materials
Surrounding Area • combustible materials (e.g., wood)
• harmful gases and liquids
• excessive vibration
• chlorides
• direct sunlight
Altitude 1000 m or lower
10 to 20 Hz at 9.8 m/s2
Vibration
20 to 55 Hz at 5.9 m/s2
Orientation Install the drive vertically to maintain maximum cooling effects.
Mechanical
Installation
NOTICE: Prevent foreign matter such as metal shavings or wire clippings from falling into the drive during installation and project
construction. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive. Place a temporary cover over the top of the drive during
installation. Remove the temporary cover before startup, as the cover will reduce ventilation and cause the drive to overheat.
NOTICE: Avoid placing drive peripheral devices, transformers, or other electronics near the drive as the noise created can lead to
erroneous operation. If such devices must be used in close proximity to the drive, take proper steps to shield the drive from noise. 2
◆ Installation Orientation (Heatsink-Cooled Drive, Finless Drive)
Install the drive upright as illustrated in Figure 2.1 to maintain proper cooling.
Figure 2.1
A B B
A – Correct B – Incorrect
Figure 2.1 Correct Installation Orientation
■ Space Requirements for Single Drive Installation (Heatsink-Cooled Drive, Finless Drive)
Figure 2.2 explains the required installation spacing to maintain sufficient space for airflow and wiring. Install the
heatsink against a closed surface to avoid diverting cooling air around the heatsink.
Figure 2.2
Side Clearance Top/Bottom Clearance

A A
C
A – 30 mm minimum C – 100 mm minimum

B – Airflow direction
Figure 2.2 Correct Installation Spacing
Note: Space requirements are the same for the heatsink-cooled drive and finless drive.
■ Space Requirements for Multiple Drives in an Enclosure Panel:

Side-by-Side Mounting with Heatsink (Heatsink-Cooled Drive)
When installing multiple drives into the same enclosure panel, mount the drives according to Figure 2.2. When
mounting drives with a minimum side-by-side clearance of 2 mm according to Figure 2.3, derating must be considered
and parameter L8-35 must be set. Refer to Parameter List on page 327.
Figure 2.3
A B 2 mm B
C
A – Line up the tops of the drives. C – 100 mm minimum

B – 30 mm minimum D – Airflow direction
Figure 2.3 Space Between Drives (Side-by-Side Mounting)
Note: 1. When installing drives of different heights in the same enclosure panel, the tops of the drives should line up. Leave space between the
top and bottom of stacked drives for cooling fan replacement if required. Using this method, it is possible to replace the cooling fans
later.
2. Do not install T1000V finless drive using the Side-by-Side method available in T1000V heatsink-cooled drive. Improper drive
cooling may result in damage to the drive. Install T1000V finless drive with a minimum side-by-side clearance of 30 mm (1.18 in).
◆ Exterior and Mounting Dimensions

Table 2.2 Drive Models and Types
Drive Model CIMR-T
Protective Design Single-Phase Three-Phase Three-Phase Page
200 V Class 200 V Class 400 V Class
2V0001B
BV0001B
2V0002B
BV0002B – 38
2V0004B
BV0003B
2V0006B
IP20/Heatsink-Cooled 4V0001B
Drive 2V0008B 4V0002B
BV0006B 2V0010B 4V0004B
BV0010B 2V0012B 4V0005B 38
BV0012B 2V0018B 4V0007B
2V0020B 4V0009B
4V0011B
2V0030A 4V0018A
IP00/Heatsink-Cooled 2V0040A 4V0023A
– 39
Drive 2V0056A 4V0031A
2V0069A 4V0038A
2V0001J
BV0001J
2V0002J
BV0002J – 39
2V0004J
BV0003J
2V0006J
4V0001J
4V0002J
2V0008J
BV0006J 4V0004J
2V0010J 40
BV0010J 4V0005J
IP20/Finless Drive 2V0012J
4V0007J
4V0009J
2V0018J
BV0012J 4V0011J 40
2V0020J
4V0018J
2V0030J
4V0023J
– 2V0040J 41
4V0031J
2V0056J
4V0038J
Mechanical
Installation
IP00/Finless Drive – 2V0069L – 41
Note: Refer to Specifications on page 315 for information on the amount of heat generated by the drive and appropriate cooling
methods.
2
■ Heatsink-Cooled Drive
Table 2.3 Heatsink-Cooled Drive
W1 2-M4 t1
H1
H
D1
H2
W
D
Drive Model Dimensions (mm)

Voltage Class CIMR-T W H D W1 H1 H2 D1 t1 Weight (kg)
BV0001B 68 128 76 56 118 5 6.5 3 0.6
Single-Phase 200 V BV0002B 68 128 76 56 118 5 6.5 3 0.6
Class
BV0003B 68 128 118 56 118 5 38.5 5 1.0
2V0001B 68 128 76 56 118 5 6.5 3 0.6
Three-Phase 200 V 2V0002B 68 128 76 56 118 5 6.5 3 0.6
Class 2V0004B 68 128 108 56 118 5 38.5 5 0.9
2V0006B 68 128 128 56 118 5 58.5 5 1.1
W1 4-M4
H1
H
t1
H2
W D1
D

Voltage Class CIMR-T W H D W1 H1 H2 D1 t1 Weight (kg)
BV0006B 108 128 137.5 96 118 5 58 5 1.7
Single-Phase 200 V BV0010B 108 128 154 96 118 5 58 5 1.8
Class
BV0012B 140 128 163 128 118 5 65 5 2.4
2V0008B 108 128 129 96 118 5 58 5 1.7
2V0010B 108 128 129 96 118 5 58 5 1.7
Three-Phase 200 V 2V0012B 108 128 137.5 96 118 5 58 5 1.7
Class
2V0018B 140 128 143 128 118 5 65 5 2.4
2V0020B 140 128 143 128 118 5 65 5 2.4
4V0001B 108 128 81 96 118 5 10 5 1.0
4V0002B 108 128 99 96 118 5 28 5 1.2
4V0004B 108 128 137.5 96 118 5 58 5 1.7
Three-Phase 400 V
Class 4V0005B 108 128 154 96 118 5 58 5 1.7
4V0007B 108 128 154 96 118 5 58 5 1.7
4V0009B 108 128 154 96 118 5 58 5 1.7
4V0011B 140 128 143 128 118 5 65 5 2.4

W1 4-d
H1
H2
H
t1
H4
W D1
D

Voltage Class CIMR-T W H D W1 H1 H2 H4 D1 t1 d Weight (kg)
2V0030A 140 247 140 122 248 234 13 55 5 M5 3.6
Three-Phase 200 V 2V0040A 140 247 140 122 248 234 13 55 5 M5 3.6
Class 2V0056A 180 285 163 160 284 270 15 75 5 M5 5.3
2V0069A 220 335 187 192 336 320 15 78 5 M6 9.2
4V0018A 140 247 140 122 248 234 13 55 5 M5 3.8
Three-Phase 400 V 4V0023A 140 247 140 122 248 234 13 55 5 M5 3.8
Class 4V0031A 180 285 143 160 284 270 15 55 5 M5 5.2
4V0038A 180 285 163 160 284 270 15 75 5 M5 5.5
■ Finless Drive
Table 2.6 Finless Drive
2-M4 t1
Mechanical
Installation
H1
H
2
W1
H2
D
W
Dimensions (mm)
Drive Model
Voltage Class Weight
CIMR-T W H D W1 H1 H2 t1 (kg)
BV0001J 68 128 71 56 118 5 3 0.6
Single-Phase BV0002J 68 128 71 56 118 5 3 0.6
200 V class
BV0003J 68 128 81 56 118 5 3 0.8
2V0001J 68 128 71 56 118 5 3 0.6
Three-Phase 2V0002J 68 128 71 56 118 5 3 0.6
200 V class 2V0004J 68 128 71 56 118 5 3 0.7
2V0006J 68 128 71 56 118 5 3 0.7
4-M4 t1
H1
H
H2
W1
W D
Dimensions (mm)
Drive Model
Single-Phase BV0006J 108 128 79.5 96 118 5 4 1.1
200 V class BV0010J 108 128 91 96 118 5 4 1.1
2V0008J 108 128 71 96 118 5 4 1.0
Three-Phase 2V0010J 108 128 71 96 118 5 4 1.0
200 V class
2V0012J 108 128 79.5 96 118 5 4 1.0
4V0001J 108 128 71 96 118 5 4 0.9
4V0002J 108 128 71 96 118 5 4 0.9
Three-Phase 4V0004J 108 128 79.5 96 118 5 4 1.0
400 V class 4V0005J 108 128 96 96 118 5 4 1.0
4V0007J 108 128 96 96 118 5 4 1.1
4V0009J 108 128 96 96 118 5 4 1.1
4-M4 t1
H1
H
H2
W1
W D
Dimensions (mm)
Drive Model
Single-Phase BV0012J 140 128 98 128 118 5 4 1.4
200 V class
Three-Phase 2V0018J 140 128 78 128 118 5 4 1.3
200 V class 2V0020J 140 128 78 128 118 5 4 1.3
Three-Phase 4V0011J 140 128 78 128 118 5 4 1.3
400 V class
4-d
t1
H5
H1
H3
H
H2
H4
W1
D
W
Dimensions (mm)
Drive Model
CIMR-T W H D W1 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 t1 d (kg)
2V0030J 140 260 145 122 248 6 234 13 5 5 M5 3.2
Three-Phase 2V0040J 140 260 145 122 248 6 234 13 5 5 M5 3.2
200 V class 2V0056J 180 300 147 160 284 8 270 15 5 5 M5 4.6
2V0069L 220 350 152 192 336 7 320 15 5 5 M6 7.0
4V0018J 140 260 145 122 248 6 234 13 5 5 M5 3.1
Three-Phase 4V0023J 140 260 145 122 248 6 234 13 5 5 M5 3.2
400 V class 4V0031J 180 300 147 160 284 8 270 15 5 5 M5 4.3
4V0038J 180 300 147 160 284 8 270 15 5 5 M5 4.6
◆ Installation to an External Heatsink (Finless Drive)

The mating surface shall have the following properties:
• Surface flatness shall not exceed 0.2 mm across the entire mating surface.
• Surface roughness shall not exceed 25 S.
Note: A surface roughness of 25 S means “Ra” (average roughness) is not greater than 6.3 a and “Ry” (maximum peak) is not greater
than 25 μm.
Mechanical
Installation
■ Thermal Compound
Apply a thermal compound between the heatsink plate and the mating surface. The thermal compound assists in drive
heat dissipation. 2
Yaskawa recommends the thermal compounds in Table 2.10.
Table 2.10 Recommended Heatsink Plate Thermal Compounds
Manufacturer Type Model Required Amount
Shin-Etsu Chemical Inc. Oil-based compound G746 100 to 250 μm (0.0039 to 0.0098 in)
Silicone compound for heat (Varies in accordance with the flatness of the metal
Dow Corning Toray Inc. SC4471CV
dissipation panel.)
Spread the required amount of thermal compound over the clean heatsink plate. Firmly press the T1000V finless drive
against the metal panel and hold it in place against the heatsink plate for a few seconds. Wipe away any excess thermal
compound from around the heatsink plate edges.
Figure 2.4
Metal panel
External heatsink
Thermal compound
Installation
screws
T1000V Finless Drive
Figure 2.4 Application of Thermal Compound

Note: Surface milling of the metal panel to within 0.05 mm (0.0019 in) flatness is required if use of less thermal compound is desired.
Ensure the T1000V finless drive is firmly pressed against the metal panel for a few seconds to ensure proper thermal transfer.
◆ Drive Heatsink Plate Installation Screw Size and Tightening Torque (Finless Drive)
Screw size and torque specifications for heatsink plate installation screws that hold the drive to a metal back panel are
listed in Table 2.11.
Table 2.11 Screw Size and Tightening Torque
Model Tightening Torque
Voltage Class Screw Size
CIMR-T Nxm (ft-lbf)
Single-Phase 200 V class BV0001 to BV0012 M4 1.0 to 1.3 (0.74 to 0.96)
2V0001 to 2V0020 M4 1.0 to 1.3 (0.74 to 0.96)
Three-phase 200V class 2V0030 to 2V0056 M5 2.0 to 2.5 (1.48 to 1.84)
2V0069 M6 4.0 to 5.0 (2.95 to 3.69)
4V0001 to 4V0011 M4 1.0 to 1.3 (0.74 to 0.96)
Three-phase 400V class
4V0018 to 4V0038 M5 2.0 to 2.5 (1.48 to 1.84)
NOTICE: Tighten all screws according to specified torques. Failure to do so may inhibit drive cooling and possible damage the drive.
◆ Heatsink Plate Temperature (Finless Drive)

The aluminum panel on the back of the drive is referred to as the “heatsink plate.” The heatsink plate temperature should
never exceed the following values:
CIMR-TBV, CIMR-T2V0001 to 0020, CIMR-T4V0001 to 0011: 90°C
CIMR-T2V0030 to 0069, CIMR-T4V0018 to 0038: 80°C
Standard replacement time for this product is ten years, provided the following conditions are met.
Table A.6 , Table A.7 and Table A.8 lists the thermal characteristics of the drive.
Use parameter U4-08 to check the temperature of the heatsink plate as described below.
NOTICE: The drive may be damaged if the temperature of the heatsink plate exceeds specified tolerance levels (90°C or 80°C,
depending on the model). Excessive heat can also shorten the performance life of various drive components.
■ Checking and Monitoring Heatsink Plate Temperature

Checking Heatsink Plate Temperature Using the LED Operator
Scroll to parameter U4-08 (heatsink plate temperature).
When the temperature of the heatsink plate is 89ºC, U4-08 will display:
Checking Heatsink Plate Temperature Using an Analog Output

Example: When using Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal AM, set the parameters shown in Table 2.12.
Table 2.12 Parameter Settings
No. Name Description
00408
H4-01 Analog Output Terminal AM Function Selection
(heatsink plate temperature)
H4-02 Analog Output Terminal AM Gain 100.0%
H4-03 Analog Output Terminal AM Bias 0.0%
Figure 2.5
Output Voltage㧔V㧕
10.0
9.0
5.0
0 50 90 100 Temperature（°C）
Figure 2.5 Output of Heatsink Plate Temperature by Analog Output

Note: 1. Accuracy of the temperature reading between 50ºC and 100ºC may vary ±5ºC.
2. The heatsink temperature is affected by the ambient temperature. Never exceed the allowable maximum heatsink plate temperature.
■ Drive Overheat Alarm (oH)

Set L8-02 to have the drive output an alarm when the heatsink plate exceeds a specified temperature.
L8-03 determines the action taken by the drive when an oH alarm is triggered.
◆ Selecting an External Heatsink (Finless Drive)

■ Data Required for Heatsink Selection
Table 2.13 shows the data needed to select a heatsink suitable for the drive and application.
Mechanical
Installation
Table 2.13 Data Required for Heatsink Selection
Symbol Description
Drive heat loss
PLoss
Refer to Drive Watt Loss Data on page 323 to check the amount of heat loss from the heatsink plate of the drive. 2
Maximum heatsink plate temperature
This is the temperature at the surface of the heatsink plate. It can be monitored with U4-08. The maximum allowable value
THSP_max depends on drive model.
CIMR-TBV, CIMR-T2V0001 to 0020, CIMR-T4V0001 to 0011: 90ºC
CIMR-T2V0030 to 0069, CIMR-T4V0018 to 0038: 80ºC
TAmb External heatsink ambient temperature (air temperature around heatsink)
Heatsink plate thermal resistance
RθHSP
This value is 0.05 K/W
Thermal resistance between the heatsink plate and the external heatsink.
Calculated as
dComp
RθHSP-EHS =
λcomp Ath
RθHSP-EHS Heat transfer area between drive heatsink plate and external heatsink.
Ath Note: Due to uneven heat generation across the heatsink plate (by arrangement of internal components) the effective area for heat
transfer is lower than 70% of the heatsink plate area. This must be considered when calculating the thermal resistance.
Refer to Figure 2.6 for values of H and W to calculate the area of the heatsink plate.
λComp Thermal conductivity of the heatsink thermal compound
dComp Thickness of the thermal compound
RθEHS Thermal resistance of the external heatsink
■ External Heatsink Selection

Figure 2.6 shows the heat transfer principle from the drive heatsink plate to the heatsink ambient air.
Figure 2.6
PLoss
Heatsink plate temperature THSP

Drive
Heatsink plate
Heatsink plate thermal resistance RθHSP
THSP
Thermal
compound
Thermal resistance between heatsink
External plate and external heatsink RθHSP-EHS
heatsink
External heatsink thermal resistance RθEHS
TAmb
TAmb
Figure 2.6 Thermal Equivalent Circuit

For a given ambient temperature, the heatsink plate temperature must not exceed the maximum allowable value. As the
RθHSP and RθHSP-EHS are essentially fixed, this condition must be satisfied by selecting an appropriate heatsink.
Select an External Heatsink by the Thermal Resistance
Use the formula below to calculate the maximum thermal resistance RθEHS_max.
THSP_max - TAmb
RθEHS_max = ( - RθHSP - RθHSP-EHS )
PLoss
Select a heatsink with a smaller thermal resistance than RθEHS_max.

The heatsink height and width should be close to the drive dimensions. Although the dimensions of a certain heatsink
may match the drive, the thermal resistance may be too high. Instead select a heatsink with a different shape (e.g., longer
fins or more fins) that has an appropriate thermal resistance. Compare the actual mounting conditions with the ones
mentioned for the RθEHS value in the heatsink specifications, applying reduction factors where necessary. Also remember
that ability of the heatsink to dissipate heat may be reduced over time due to the accumulation of dirt along the heatsink
surface.
NOTICE: If the heatsink height and width are much larger than the drive heatsink plate dimensions or if multiple drives are installed on
a single heatsink, it may be necessary to recalculate the thermal resistance value given in the heatsink specifications. Consult the
heatsink manufacturer.
Check the Feasibility of a Given Heatsink

Use the formula below to calculate the actual heatsink plate temperature if the selection of the heatsink is limited due to
certain installation conditions (space available etc.).
THSP = PLoss ࡮
RθHSP + RθHSP-EHS + RθEHS) + TAmb
If THSP is smaller than the maximum allowable heatsink plate temperature, then the heatsink can be used. To verify the
temperature, refer to Checking and Monitoring Heatsink Plate Temperature on page 42.
NOTICE: Due to uneven compound thickness, uneven heat generation across the heatsink plate, or other factors, the actual heatsink
plate temperature (monitored in U4-08) can be slightly different from the calculated value. An oH drive fault may occur if the heatsink
plate temperature exceeds the maximum allowable value.
■ Heatsink Selection Example

This example shows heatsink selection for a CIMR-T2V0006 drive in Normal Duty (ND) mode. The data required are
listed in the table below.
Item Value
PLoss 27.5 W
THSP_max 90ºC
TAmb 40ºC
RθHSP 0.05 K/W
H = 128 mm, D = 68 mm,
Ath
Ath = 0.7 x 0.128 m x 0.068 m = 6.1 x 10-3 m2
0.8 W/(mxK)
λComp
RθHSP-EHS Thermal conductivity of “Thermal Compound G746” (Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.)
dComp Recommended compound thickness: 100 μm
100 μm
RθHSP_EHS = = 0.02 K/W
0.8 W/(mK) × 6.1 × 10-3 m2
Heatsink Selection by Thermal Resistance

Substituting the example values into the formula gives:
90 ͠ - 40͠
RθEHS_max = ( 27.5 W
- 0.05 K/W - 0.02 K/W ) = 1.74 K/W
The heatsink must have a thermal resistance lower than 1.7 K/W. When selecting the heatsink, apply a safety margin to
the calculated value in order to ensure tripless drive operation, even if the installation conditions change (temporary
higher temperature, loss of cooling ability of the external heatsink due to dust, etc.).
Feasibility Check of a Selected Heatsink
For example, a heatsink with RθEHS = 1.6 K/W would have a heatsink temperature of:
THSP = 27.5 W ࡮
0.05 K/W + 0.02 K/W + 1.6 K/W) + 40͠= 85.9 ͠
The selected heatsink can be used, but considering that the heatsink area is probably larger than the drive footprint and
the ambient conditions could change (reduced heatsink cooling ability by dirt, etc.), a heatsink with a lower RθEHS should
Mechanical
Installation
be chosen (e.g., RθEHS = 1.1 K/W, resulting in THSP = 72.2ºC) .
3
Electrical Installation
This chapter explains proper procedures for wiring the control circuit terminals, motor and
power supply.
3.1 SECTION SAFETY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

3.2 STANDARD CONNECTION DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.3 MAIN CIRCUIT CONNECTION DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3.4 TERMINAL BLOCK CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.5 PROTECTIVE COVERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3.6 MAIN CIRCUIT WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3.7 CONTROL CIRCUIT WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3.8 I/O CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
3.9 MAIN FREQUENCY REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
3.10 MEMOBUS/MODBUS TERMINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
3.11 BRAKING RESISTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.12 WIRING CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
3.1 Section Safety
3.1 Section Safety

DANGER
WARNING
Do not operate equipment with covers removed.
The diagrams in this section may show drives without covers or safety shields to show details. Be sure to reinstall
covers or shields before operating the drives and run the drives according to the instructions described in this manual.
Always ground the motor-side grounding terminal.
Improper equipment grounding could result in death or serious injury by contacting the motor case.
Do not perform work on the drive while wearing loose clothing, jewelry or without eye protection.
Remove all metal objects such as watches and rings, secure loose clothing, and wear eye protection before beginning
work on the drive.
Do not allow unqualified personnel to perform work on the drive.
Installation, maintenance, inspection, and servicing must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar with
installation, adjustment, and maintenance of AC drives.
Do not touch any terminals before the capacitors have fully discharged.
Before wiring terminals, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the
power supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc. To
prevent electric shock, wait at least five minutes after all indicators are off and measure the DC bus voltage level to
confirm safe level.
Fire Hazard
Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque.
Loose electrical connections could result in death or serious injury by fire due to overheating of electrical connections.
Do not use improper combustible materials.
Attach the drive to metal or other noncombustible material.
3.1 Section Safety
NOTICE
Do not use unshielded cable for control wiring.
Failure to comply may cause electrical interference resulting in poor system performance. Use shielded, twisted-pair
wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the drive.
Do not allow unqualified personnel to use the product.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive or braking circuit.
Carefully review instruction manual TOBPC72060000 when connecting a braking option to the drive.
Check all the wiring to ensure that all connections are correct after installing the drive and connecting any other
devices.
Do not modify the drive circuitry.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive and will void warranty.
Use a thermal overload relay or an over-temperature contact whenever using a braking resistor.
Power to the drive should be interrupted when the relay is triggered.
3
3.2 Standard Connection Diagram

Connect the drive and peripheral devices as shown in Figure 3.1. It is possible to run the drive via the digital operator
without connecting digital I/O wiring. This section does not discuss drive operation; Refer to Start-Up Programming &
Operation on page 75 for instructions on operating the drive.
NOTICE: Inadequate branch short circuit protection could result in damage to the drive. Install adequate branch circuit short circuit
protection per applicable codes. The drive is suitable for circuits capable of delivering not more than 30,000 RMS symmetrical
amperes, 240 Vac maximum (200 V Class) and 440 Vac maximum (400 V Class).
NOTICE: When the wiring distance is greater than 100 meters, pay special attention to the motor insulation voltage or use a drive duty
motor. Failure to comply could lead to motor insulation breakdown.
NOTICE: Do not connect AC control circuit ground to drive enclosure. Improper drive grounding can cause control circuit malfunction.
NOTICE: The minimum load for the multi-function relay output MA-MB-MC is 10 mA. If a circuit requires less than 10 mA (reference
value), connect it to a photocoupler output (P1, P2, PC). Improper application of peripheral devices could result in damage to the
photocoupler output of the drive.
Figure 3.1
<8>
Terminals +1, +2, , B1, and B2
are for connecting options.
DC reactor <2>
Never connect power supply
(option) <1> Thermal relay
Braking resistor
lines to these terminals. (option) Motor
2 MCCB
<3> Jumper (option)
Cooling fan
For single phase 200 V r1 FU
r1
power supply, use +2 +1 - B1 B2 FV
R/L1 and S/L2. s1 s1 M
FW
1 MCCB MC
t1
T1000V t1
R/L1
Three phase R/L1 U
power supply S/L2 U/T1
S/L2 Main circuit V
200 to 240 V V/T2 M
T/L3 T/L3 W
Control circuit W/T3
<4>
Forward run/stop S1
2 MCCB THRX OFF ON MC
Ground
SA Reverse run/stop S2 10 or less (400 V class)
MC Option card
connector 100 or less (200 V class)
THRX External fault S3
Thermal relay for SA Fault reset S4 DIP switch S1 Digital output
motor cooling fan Multi-step V I 250 Vac, 10 mA to 1 A
TRX speed 1 30 Vdc, 10 mA to 1 A
main/aux switch S5 (default setting)
MC SA Multi-step
TRX speed 2 S6
MC MA
Fault relay Jog reference MA
S7 Fault
Digital inputs +24 V 8 mA MB Fault Digital output
(default setting) 24 V 5 to 48 Vdc
2 to 50 mA
<5> Sink MC (default setting)
DIP
switch S3 Source
SC
P1 During Run
Shield ground 0V (photocoupler 1)
terminal
P2 Frequency agree
(photocoupler 2)
Pulse train input
RP
(max. 32 kHz) PC Photocoupler
Setting power supply output common
+V
2k +10.5 max. 20 mA
MP Pulse train output
Main speed
A1 0 to +10 V (20 k ) 0 to 32 kHz <6>
frequency A2 0 to +10 V (20 k ) Analog monitor
AM
reference. (0)4 to 20 mA (250 ) + output
Multi-function AM
AC 0 to +10 Vdc
programmable AC - (2 mA)
Termination Comm.
DIP Monitor
resistor connector
switch output
Safety switch 120 , 1/2 W
S2 R+
Safe Disable HC
R-
Input Jumper <7> S+
H1 MEMOBUS/
S- Modbus comm.
RS-485/422
IG
Cable shield ground
shielded line twisted-pair shielded line

main circuit terminal control terminal
Figure 3.1 Drive Standard Connection Diagram

<1> Remove the jumper when installing an optional DC reactor.
<2> The MC on the input side of the main circuit should open when the thermal relay is triggered.
<3> Self-cooled motors do not require separate cooling fan motor wiring.
<4> Connected using sequence input signal (S1 to S7) from NPN transistor; Default: sink mode (0 V com).
<5> Use only a +24 V internal power supply in sinking mode; the source mode requires an external power supply
Refer to I/O Connections on page 66.
<6> Monitor outputs work with devices such as analog frequency meters, ammeters, voltmeters and wattmeters;
they are not intended for use as a feedback-type of signal.
<7> Disconnect the wire jumper between HC and H1 when utilizing the safety input. Refer to Wiring Procedure
on page 64 for details on removing the jumper. The wire length for the Safe Disable input should not exceed
30 m.
<8> When using the automatic fault restart function while the wiring is made to shut off the power supply when a
drive fault occurs, make sure the drive is set not to trigger a fault output during fault restart (L5-02 = 0,
default). Otherwise the fault restart function can not work properly.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Do not close the wiring for the control circuit unless the multifunction input terminal parameter
is properly set (S5 for 3-Wire; H1-05 = “0”). Improper sequencing of run/stop circuitry could result in death or serious injury from
moving equipment.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Ensure start/stop and safety circuits are wired properly and in the correct state before
energizing the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from moving equipment. When programmed for 3-Wire
control, a momentary closure on terminal S1 may cause the drive to start.
WARNING! When 3-Wire sequence is used, set the drive to 3-Wire sequence before wiring the control terminals and ensure
parameter b1-17 is set to 0 (drive does not accept a run command at power up (default). If the drive is wired for 3-Wire sequence but
set up for 2-Wire sequence (default) and if parameter b1-17 is set to 1 (drive accepts a Run command at power up), the motor will
rotate in reverse direction at power up of the drive and may cause injury.
Figure 3.2 illustrates an example of a 3-Wire sequence.

Figure 3.2
Drive
Stop relay (N.C.) Run relay (N.O.)
S1
Run command (run on momentary close)
S2
Stop command (stop on momentary open)
S5 Foward/reverse command
(multi-function input: H1-05 = 0)
SC
Sequence input common
Figure 3.2 3-Wire Sequence
3
3.3 Main Circuit Connection Diagram
3.3 Main Circuit Connection Diagram

Refer to diagrams in this section for the Main Circuit wiring connections. Connections may vary based on drive capacity.
The main circuit DC power supply powers the control circuit.
NOTICE: Do not use the negative DC bus terminal “-” as a ground terminal. This terminal is at high voltage DC potential. Improper
wiring connections could result in damage to the drive.
◆ Single-Phase 200 V Class (CIMR-TBV0001 to 0012)

Figure 3.3
DC reactor
(option) Braking Resistor
Jumper Unit (option)
+2 +1 B1 B2
R/L1 Drive
U/T1
V/T2 Motor
S/L2 W/T3
Single-phase
–
200 Vac
Figure 3.3 Connecting Single-Phase Main Circuit Terminals
NOTICE: Do not connect T/L3 terminal when using single-phase power supply input. Incorrect wiring may damage the drive.
◆ Three-Phase 200 V Class (CIMR-T2V0001 to 0069);

Three-Phase 400 V Class (CIMR-T4V0001 to 0038)
Figure 3.4
DC reactor Braking
(option) Resistor Unit
Jumper (option)
+2 +1 B1 B2
R/L1 Drive U/T1
S/L2 V/T2 Motor
T/L3 W/T3
Three phase 200 Vac
(400 Vac) —
Figure 3.4 Connecting Three-Phase Main Circuit Terminals
3.4 Terminal Block Configuration

The figures in this section provide illustrations of the main circuit terminal block configurations of the different drive
sizes.
Figure 3.5
Models： Models：
CIMR-TBV0001, CIMR-TBV0006, 0010, 0012
0002, 0003 CIMR-T2V0008, 0010, 0012, 0018, 0020
CIMR-T2V0001, CIMR-T4V0001, 0002, 0004, 0005, 0007,
0002, 0004, 0006 0009, 0011
Figure 3.5 Main Circuit Terminal Block Configurations

Figure 3.6
Models：
CIMR-T2V0030,
0040
CIMR-T4V0018,
0023
3
Figure 3.7
Models：
CIMR-T2V0056
CIMR-T4V0031,
0038

Figure 3.8
Model：
CIMR-T2V0069
3.5 Protective Covers
3.5 Protective Covers

Follow the procedure below to remove the protective covers before wiring the drive and to reattach the covers after
wiring is complete.
◆ Removing the Protective Covers

1. Loosen the screw that locks the front cover in place to remove.
Figure 3.9
Figure 3.9 Remove the Front Cover

2. Apply pressure to the tabs on each side of the terminal cover. Pull the terminal cover away from the drive while
pushing in on the tabs to pull the cover free.
Figure 3.10
Figure 3.10 Remove the Terminal Cover
■ Reattaching the Protective Covers

Properly connect all wiring and route power wiring away from control signal wiring. Reattach all protective covers when
wiring is complete. Apply only a small amount of pressure to lock the cover back into place.
Figure 3.11
3
Figure 3.11 Reattach the Protective Covers
3.6 Main Circuit Wiring

This section describes the functions, specifications, and procedures required to safely and properly wire the main circuit
of the drive.
NOTICE: Do not solder the ends of wire connections to the drive. Soldered wiring connections can loosen over time. Improper wiring
practices could result in drive malfunction due to loose terminal connections.
◆ Main Circuit Terminal Functions

Table 3.1 Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Terminal Type Function Reference
R/L1 Connects line power to the drive.
Main circuit power
S/L2 Drives with single-phase 200 V input power use terminals R/L1 and S/L2 only (T/L3 52
supply input
T/L3 must not be used).
U/T1
V/T2 Drive output Connects to the motor. 59
W/T3
B1
Braking resistor Available for connecting a braking resistor or the braking resistor unit option. 70
B2
+1 These terminals are shorted at shipment. Remove the shorting bar between +1 and +2
DC reactor connection 307
+2 when connecting a DC reactor to this terminal.
+1 DC power supply
For connecting a DC power supply. –
– input
Grounding Terminal
Ground For 200 V class: 100 Ω or less 59
(2 terminals)
For 400 V class: 10 Ω or less
◆ Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque

Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from Table 3.2 through Table 3.4.
Note: 1. Wire gauge recommendations based on drive continuous current ratings using 75 °C 600 Vac vinyl-sheathed wire assuming ambient
temperature within 30 °C and wiring distance less than 100 m.
2. Terminals +1, +2, –, B1 and B2 are for connecting optional devices such as a DC reactor or braking resistor. Do not connect other
non-specified devices to these terminals.
• Consider the amount of voltage drop when selecting wire gauges. Increase the wire gauge when the voltage drop is
greater than 2% of motor rated voltage. Ensure the wire gauge is suitable for the terminal block. Use the following
formula to calculate the amount of voltage drop:
• Line drop voltage (V) = 3 x wire resistance (Ω/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10-3
• Refer to instruction manual TOBPC72060000 for braking unit or braking resistor unit wire gauges.
• Refer to UL Standards Compliance on page 427 for information on UL compliance.
■ Single-Phase 200 V Class

Table 3.2 Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications
For Japan and Asia <1> For China <2>
Tightening
Model Applicable Recommended Applicable Recommended Screw
Terminal Torque
CIMR-TBV Gauge Gauge Gauge Gauge Size N•m (lb.in.)
mm2 (AWG) mm2 (AWG) mm2 (AWG) mm2 (AWG)
0001
R/L1, S/L2, U/T1, V/T2, W/ 0.75 to 2.0 2 0.75 to 2.5 2.5 0.8 to 1.0
0002 M3.5
T3, –, +1, +2, B1, B2, (18 to 14) (14) (18 to 14) (14) (7.1 to 8.9)
0003
R/L1, S/L2, U/T1, V/T2, W/ 2.0 to 5.5 2 2.5 to 6 2.5 1.2 to 1.5
0006 M4
T3, –, +1, +2, B1, B2, (14 to 10) (14) (14 to 10) (14) (10.6 to 13.3)
R/L1, S/L2, U/T1, V/T2, W/ 2.0 to 5.5 3.5 2.5 to 6.0 4 1.2 to 1.5
M4
T3, (14 to 10) (12) (14 to 10) (12) (10.6 to 13.3)
0010
2.0 to 5.5 5.5 2.5 to 6.0 6 1.2 to 1.5
–, +1, +2, B1, B2 M4
(14 to 10) (10) (14 to 10) (10) (10.6 to 13.3)
R/L1, S/L2, U/T1, V/T2, W/ 2.0 to 5.5 5.5 2.5 to 6 6 1.2 to 1.5
0012 M4
T3, –, +1, +2, B1, B2, (14 to 10) (10) (14 to 10) (10) (10.6 to 13.3)
<1> Gauges listed here are for use in Japan and Asia.
<2> Gauges listed here are for use in China.
■ Three-Phase 200 V Class

Tightening
Terminal Torque
CIMR-T2V Gauge Gauge Gauge Gauge Size N•m (lb.in.)
0001
0002 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, 0.75 to 2.0 2 0.75 to 2.5 2.5 0.8 to 1.0
M3.5
0004 W/T3, –, +1, +2, B1, B2, (18 to 14) (14) (18 to 14) (14) (7.1 to 8.9)
0006
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, 2.0 to 5.5 2 2.5 to 6 2.5 1.2 to 1.5
M4
0008 W/T3, –, +1, +2, B1, B2 (14 to 10) (14) (14 to 10) (14) (10.6 to 13.3)
0010 2.0 to 5.5 3.5 2.5 to 6 4 1.2 to 1.5
M4
(14 to 10) (12) (14 to 10) (12) (10.6 to 13.3)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, 2.0 to 5.5 3.5 2.5 to 6 4 1.2 to 1.5
0012 M4
W/T3, –, +1, +2, B1, B2, (14 to 10) (12) (14 to 10) (12) (10.6 to 13.3)
0018 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, 2.0 to 5.5 5.5 2.5 to 6 6 1.2 to 1.5
M4
0020 W/T3, –, +1, +2, B1, B2, (14 to 10) (10) (14 to 10) (10) (10.6 to 13.3)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, 5.5 to 14 8 6 to 16 10 1.2 to 1.5
M4
W/T3, -, +1, +2 (10 to 6) (8) (10 to 6) (8) (10.6 to 13.3)
2.0 to 5.5 5.5 2.5 to 6 6 1.2 to 1.5
0030 B1, B2
(14 to 10) (10) (14 to 10) (10)
M4
(10.6 to 13.3)
3
5.5 to 14 8 6 to 16 10 2 to 2.5
M5
(10 to 6) (8) (10 to 6) (8) (17.7 to 22.1)
M4
W/T3, -, +1, +2 (10 to 6) (6) (10 to 6) (6) (10.6 to 13.3)
2.0 to 5.5 5.5 2.5 to 6 6 1.2 to 1.5
0040 B1, B2 M4
(14 to 10) (10) (14 to 10) (10) (10.6 to 13.3)
5.5 to 14 8 6 to 16 10 2 to 2.5
M5
(10 to 6) (8) (10 to 6) (8) (17.7 to 22.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, 14 to 22 22 16 to 25 25 4 to 6
M6
W/T3, -, +1, +2 (6 to 4) (4) (6 to 4) (4) (35.4 to 53.1)
5.5 to 8 8 6 to 10 10 2 to 2.5
0056 B1, B2 M5
(10 to 8) (8) (10 to 8) (8) (17.7 to 22.1)
14 to 22 22 16 to 25 25 4 to 6
M6
(6 to 4) (4) (6 to 4) (4) (35.4 to 53.1)

Tightening
Terminal Torque
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, 8 to 38 38 10 to 35 35 9 to 11
M8
W/T3, -, +1, +2 (8 to 2) (2) (8 to 2) (2) (79.7 to 11.0)
8 to 14 14 10 to 16 16 2 to 2.5
0069 B1, B2 M5
(8 to 6) (6) (8 to 6) (6) (17.7 to 22.1)
8 to 22 22 10 to 25 25 4 to 6
M6
(8 to 4) (4) (8 to 4) (4) (35.4 to 53.1)
■ Three-Phase 400 V Class

Tightening
Terminal Torque
0001
0002
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, 2.0 to 5.5 2 2.5 to 6.0 2.5 1.2 to 1.5
0004 M4
W/T3, –, +1, +2, B1, B2, (14 to 10) (14) (14 to 10) (14) (10.6 to 13.3)
0005
0007
M4
W/T3, –, +1, +2, B1, B2 (14 to 10) (14) (14 to 10) (14) (10.6 to 13.3)
0009
2.0 to 5.5 3.5 2.5 to 6 4 1.2 to 1.5
M4
(14 to 10) (12) (14 to 10) (12) (10.6 to 13.3)
M4
W/T3, –, +1, +2, B1, B2 (14 to 10) (14) (14 to 10) (14) (10.6 to 13.3)
0011
2.0 to 5.5 3.5 2.5 to 6 4 1.2 to 1.5
M4
(14 to 10) (12) (14 to 10) (12) (10.6 to 13.3)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, 2.0 to 5.5 5.5 2.5 to 6 6 1.2 to 1.5
M4
W/T3, -, +1, +2, B1, B2 (14 to 10) (10) (14 to 10) (10) (10.6 to 13.3)
0018
5.5 to 14 5.5 6 to 16 6 2 to 2.5
M5
(10 to 6) (10) (10 to 6) (10) (17.7 to 22.1)
M4
W/T3, -, +1, +2 (10 to 6) (8) (10 to 6) (8) (10.6 to 13.3)
2.0 to 5.5 5.5 2.5 to 6 6 1.2 to 1.5
0023 B1, B2 M4
(14 to 10) (10) (14 to 10) (10) (10.6 to 13.3)
5.5 to 14 5.5 6 to 16 6 2 to 2.5
M5
(10 to 6) (10) (10 to 6) (10) (17.7 to 22.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, 5.5 to 14 8 6 to 16 10 2 to 2.5
M5
W/T3, -, +1, +2 (10 to 6) (8) (10 to 6) (8) (17.7 to 22.1)
5.5 to 8 8 6 to 10 10 2 to 2.5
0031 B1, B2 M5
(10 to 8) (8) (10 to 8) (8) (17.7 to 22.1)
5.5 to 14 8 6 to 16 10 4 to 6
M6
(10 to 6) (8) (10 to 6) (8) (35.4 to 53.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, 5.5 to 14 14 6 to 16 10 2 to 2.5
M5
W/T3, -, +1, +2 (10 to 6) (6) (10 to 6) (8) (17.7 to 22.1)
5.5 to 8 8 6 to 10 10 2 to 2.5
0038 B1, B2 M5
(10 to 8) (8) (10 to 8) (8) (17.7 to 22.1)
5.5 to 14 8 6 to 16 10 4 to 6
M6
(10 to 6) (8) (10 to 6) (8) (35.4 to 53.1)
◆ Main Circuit Terminal Power Supply and Motor Wiring

This section outlines the various steps, precautions, and checkpoints for wiring the main circuit terminals and motor
terminals.
NOTICE: When connecting the motor to the drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3, the phase order for the drive and motor
should match. Failure to comply with proper wiring practices may cause the motor to run in reverse if the phase order is backward.
NOTICE: Do not connect phase-advancing capacitors or LC/RC noise filters to the output circuits. Improper application of noise filters
could result in damage to the drive.
NOTICE: Do not connect the AC power line to the output motor terminals of the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious
injury by fire as a result of drive damage from line voltage application to output terminals.
■ Cable Length Between Drive and Motor

When the cable length between the drive and the motor is too long (especially at low frequency output), note that the
cable voltage drop may cause reduced motor torque. Drive output current will increase as the leakage current from the
cable increases. An increase in leakage current may trigger an overcurrent situation and weaken the accuracy of the
current detection.
Adjust the drive carrier frequency according to the following table. If the motor wiring distance exceeds 100 m because
of the system configuration, reduce the ground currents. Refer to C6-02: Carrier Frequency Selection on page 147.
Refer to Table 3.5 to set the carrier frequency to an appropriate level.
Table 3.5 Cable Length Between Drive and Motor
Cable Length 50 m or less 100 m or less Greater than 100 m
Carrier Frequency 15 kHz or less 5 kHz or less 2 kHz or less
Note: When setting carrier frequency, calculate the cable length as the total distance of wiring to all connected motors when running
multiple motors from a single drive.
■ Ground Wiring
Follow the precautions to wire the ground for one drive or a series of drives.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and
minimize the length of the ground wire. Improper equipment grounding may cause dangerous electrical potentials on equipment
chassis, which could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Be sure to ground the drive ground terminal. (200 V Class: Ground to 100 Ω or less, 400 V
Class: Ground to 10 Ω or less). Improper equipment grounding could result in death or serious injury by contacting ungrounded
electrical equipment.
NOTICE: Do not share the ground wire with other devices such as welding machines or large-current electrical equipment. Improper
equipment grounding could result in drive or equipment malfunction due to electrical interference.
NOTICE: When using more than one drive, ground multiple drives according to instructions. Improper equipment grounding could
result in abnormal operation of drive or equipment. 3
Refer to Figure 3.12 when using multiple drives. Do not loop the ground wire.
Figure 3.12
A A B
A – Correct B – Incorrect
Figure 3.12 Multiple Drive Wiring
■ Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal

WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Shut off the power supply to the drive before wiring the main circuit terminals. Failure to comply
may result in death or serious injury.
Note: A cover placed over the DC Bus and braking circuit terminals prior to shipment helps prevent miswiring. Cut away covers as
needed for terminals with a needle-nose pliers.
A – Protective Cover to Prevent Miswiring

Main Circuit Connection Diagram
Refer to Main Circuit Connection Diagram on page 52 for drive main power circuit connections.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. The braking resistor connection terminals are B1 and B2. Do not connect braking resistors to any other
terminals. Improper wiring connections could cause the braking resistor to overheat and cause death or serious injury by fire. Failure to
comply may result in damage to the braking circuit or drive.
3.7 Control Circuit Wiring

NOTICE: Do not solder the ends of wire connections to the drive. Soldered wire connections can loosen over time. Improper wiring
practices could result in drive malfunction due to loose terminal connections.
Figure 3.13
T1000V
<1> Control circuit
Forward run/stop S1
Reverse run/stop S2
Option card
connector
External fault S3
Fault reset S4 DIP switch S1 Digital output
Multi-step V I 250 Vac, 10 mA to 1 A
speed 1 30 Vdc, 10 mA to 1 A
main/aux switch S5 (default setting)
Multi-step
speed 2 S6
MA
Jog reference S7 Fault
MB
Fault Digital output
+24 V 8 mA MC
24 V 5 to 48 Vdc
Digital inputs 2 to 50 mA
(default setting) <2> Sink (default setting)
DIP
switch S3 Source
SC
P1 During Run
Shield ground 0V (photocoupler 1)
terminal
P2 Frequency agree
Pulse train input (photocoupler 2)
RP (max. 32 kHz)
PC Photocoupler
Setting power supply output common
+V +10.5 max. 20 mA
2k
MP Pulse train output
A1 0 to +10 V (20 k )
Main speed 0 to 32 kHz
frequency A2 0 to +10 V (20 k ) Analog monitor
(0)4 to 20 mA (250 ) AM + output
reference.
AC AM
Multi-function 0 to +10 Vdc
programmable AC - (2 mA)
Termination Comm.
DIP Monitor
resistor connector
switch output
Safety switch 120 , 1/2 W
S2 R+
Safe Disable HC
Input R-
Jumper
H1 S+ MEMOBUS/
S- Modbus comm.
RS-485/422
IG
Cable shield ground
shielded line twisted-pair shielded line
main circuit terminal control terminal
Figure 3.13 Control Circuit Connection Diagram

<1> Connected using sequence input signal (S1 to S7) from NPN transistor; Default: sink mode (0 V com)
<2> Use only the +24 V internal power supply in sinking mode; the source mode requires an external power
supply. Refer to I/O Connections on page 66. 3
◆ Control Circuit Terminal Block Functions
Drive parameters determine which functions apply to the multi-function digital inputs (S1 to S7), multi-function digital
outputs (MA, MB), multi-function pulse inputs and outputs (RP, MP) and multi-function photocoupler outputs (P1, P2).
The default is called out next to each terminal in Figure 3.13.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Always check the operation and wiring of control circuits after being wired. Operating a drive
with untested control circuits could result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE: Avoid switching a magnetic contactor on the power supply side more frequently than once every 30 minutes. Frequent
switching can damage capacitors and relays in the drive. It is therefore better for the longevity of the drive and components to use
standard operation procedures when starting and stopping the motor.
■ Input Terminals
Table 3.6 Control Circuit Input Terminals
Type No. Terminal Name (Function) Function (Signal Level) Default Setting
Multi-function input 1 (Closed: Forward run, Open:
S1
Stop)
Multi-function input 2 (Closed: Reverse run, Open: Photocoupler
S2
Stop) 24 Vdc, 8 mA
Multi- S3 Multi-function input 3 (External fault (N.O.) Note: Drive preset to sinking mode. When using source mode, set
Function
S4 Multi-function input 4 (Fault reset) DIP switch S3 to allow for a 24 Vdc (±10%) external power
Digital Inputs
S5 Multi-function input 5 (Multi-step speed reference 1) supply. Refer to Sinking/Sourcing Mode Switch on page 66.
S6 Multi-function input 6 (Multi-step speed reference 2)
S7 Multi-function input 7 (Jog reference)
SC Multi-function input common (Control common) Sequence common
HC Power supply for safe disable input +24 Vdc (max 10 mA allowed)
Open: Output disabled
Safe Disable
Closed: Normal operation
Input H1 Safe disable input
Note: Disconnect wire jumper between HC and H1 when using
the safe disable input. The wire length should not exceed 30 m.
Response frequency: 0.5 to 32 kHz
(Duty Cycle: 30 to 70%)
RP Multi-function pulse train input (frequency reference) (High level voltage: 3.5 to 13.2 Vdc)
(Low level voltage: 0.0 to 0.8 Vdc)
Main (input impedance: 3 kΩ)
Frequency +V Analog input power supply +10.5 Vdc (max allowable current 20 mA)
Reference
A1 Multi-function analog input 1 (frequency reference) Input voltage 0 to +10 Vdc (20 kΩ) resolution 1/1000
Input
Input voltage or input current (Selected by DIP switch S1 and H3-
A2 Multi-function analog input 2 (frequency reference) 01) 0 to +10 Vdc (20 kΩ), Resolution: 1/1000
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω) or 0 to 20 mA (250 Ω), Resolution: 1/500
AC Frequency reference common 0 Vdc
■ Output Terminals
Table 3.7 Control Circuit Output Terminals
Type No. Terminal Name (Function) Function (Signal Level) Default Setting
Multi- MA N.O. (fault)
Digital output
Function MB N.C. output (fault) 30 Vdc, 10 mA to 1 A; 250 Vac, 10 mA to 1 A
Digital Output
MC Digital output common Minimum load: 5 Vdc, 10 mA (reference value)
<1>
Multi- P1 Photocoupler output 1 (During run)

Function P2 Photocoupler output 2 (Frequency agree) Photocoupler output 48 Vdc, 2 to 50 mA <2>
Photocoupler
Output PC Photocoupler output common
MP Pulse train output (Output frequency) 32 kHz (max) <3> <4>
Monitor
AM Analog monitor output 0 to 10 Vdc (2 mA or less) Resolution: 1/1000
Output
AC Monitor common 0V
<1> Refrain from assigning functions to terminals MA and MB that involve frequent switching, as doing so may shorten relay performance life.
Switching life is estimated at 200,000 times (assumes 1 A, resistive load).
<2> Connect a fl ywheel diode as shown below when driving a reactive load such as a relay coil. Diode must be rated higher than the circuit voltage.
<3> When set for sourcing: use with load of 1.5 kΩ for an output of +5 V, 3.5 kΩ for an output of +8 V, and 10 kΩ for an output of +10 V.
<4> When set for sinking, the external power supply should be +12 Vdc, ±5% with 16 mA or less.
Connect a suppression diode as shown in Figure 3.14 when driving a reactive load such as a relay coil. Ensure the diode
rating is greater than the circuit voltage.
Figure 3.14
C
A D
A – External power, 48 V max. C – Coil

B – Suppression diode D – 50 mA or less
Figure 3.14 Connecting a Suppression Diode
■ Serial Communication Terminals

Table 3.8 Control Circuit Terminals: Serial Communications
Type No. Signal Name Function (Signal Level)
R+ Communications input (+) RS-485/422
R– Communications input (-) MEMOBUS/Modbus communication: Use MEMOBUS/Modbus
MEMOBUS/Modbus S+ Communications output (+) a RS-485 or RS-422 cable to connect the communication
Communication drive. protocol 115.2 kbps
S– Communications output (-) (max.)
IG Shield ground 0V
◆ Terminal Configuration
Figure 3.15
R+ R- S+ S- IG
P1 P2 PC A1 A2 +V AC AM AC MP
R+ R– S+ S– IG MA MB MC
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 HC SC H1 RP
MA MB MC
Figure 3.15 Removable Control Circuit Terminal Block
■ Wire Size and Torque Specifications 3

Select appropriate wire type and size from Table 3.9. For simpler and more reliable wiring, crimp ferrules to the wire
ends. Refer to Table 3.10 for ferrule terminal types and sizes.
Table 3.9 Wire Size and Torque Specifications (Same for All Models)
Bare Wire Terminal Ferrule-Type Terminal
Tightening Applicable wire
Screw Applicable wire
Terminal Torque Recomm. mm2 size Recomm. mm2 Wire Type
Size size
Nxm (AWG) mm2 (AWG)
mm2 (AWG) (AWG)
Stranded: 0.25 to
1.5 (24 to 16) 0.25 to 1.0
MA, MB, MC M3 0.5 to 0.6 0.75 (18) 0.5 (20)
Single: 0.25 to 1.5 (24 to 17)
(24 to 16)
Shielded line,
S1-S7, SC, RP,
Stranded: 0.25 to etc.
+V, A1, A2, AC,
1.0 (24 to 18) 0.25 to 0.5
HC, H1, P1, P2, M2 0.22 to 0.25 0.75 (18) 0.5 (20)
Single: 0.25 to 1.5 (24 to 20)
PC, MP, AM, AC,
(24 to 16)
S+, S-, R+, R-, IG
■ Ferrule-Type Wire Terminations

Crimp a ferrule to signal wiring to improve wiring simplicity and reliability. Use CRIMPFOX ZA-3, a crimping tool
manufactured by PHOENIX CONTACT.
Figure 3.16
d1
6 mm
L
d2
Figure 3.16 Ferrule Dimensions

Table 3.10 Ferrule Terminal Types and Sizes
Size mm2 (AWG) Type L (mm) d1 (mm) d2 (mm) Manufacturer
0.25 (24) AI 0.25-6YE 10.5 0.8 1.8
0.34 (22) AI 0.34-6TQ 10.5 0.8 1.8
0.5 (20) AI 0.5-6WH 12 1.1 2.5 PHOENIX CONTACT
0.75 (18) AI 0.75-6GY 12 1.3 2.8
1.0 AI 1-6RD 12 1.5 3.0
◆ Wiring Procedure
This section describes the proper procedures and preparations for wiring the control terminals.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not remove covers or touch the circuit boards while the power is on. Failure to comply could
result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE: Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, -, +1, +2) and
other high-power lines. Improper wiring practices could result in drive malfunction due to electrical interference.
NOTICE: Separate wiring for digital output terminals MA, MB and MC from wiring to other control circuit lines. Improper wiring
practices could result in drive or equipment malfunction or nuisance trips.
NOTICE: Use a class 2 power supply (UL standard) when connecting to the control terminals. Improper application of peripheral
devices could result in drive performance degradation due to improper power supply.
NOTICE: Insulate shields with tape or shrink tubing to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment. Improper wiring practices
could result in drive or equipment malfunction due to short circuit.
NOTICE: Connect the shield of shielded cable to the appropriate ground terminal. Improper equipment grounding could result in drive
or equipment malfunction or nuisance trips.
Wire the control terminals using Figure 3.17 as a guide. Prepare the ends of the control circuit wiring as shown in
Figure 3.18. Refer to Wire Size and Torque Specifications on page 63.
NOTICE: Do not tighten screws beyond the specified tightening torque. Failure to comply may damage the terminal block.
NOTICE: Use shielded twisted-pair cables as indicated to prevent operating faults. Improper wiring practices could result in drive or
equipment malfunction due to electrical interference.
Connect control wires as shown in the following figure:

Figure 3.17
D
Preparing wire
E
A terminal ends
B
A – Control terminal block D – Loosen screw to insert wire.

B – Avoid fraying wire strands when stripping E – Blade depth of 0.4 mm or less
insulation from wire. Strip length 5.5 mm. Blade width of 2.5 mm or less
C – Single wire or stranded wire
Figure 3.17 Terminal Board Wiring Guide
Figure 3.18
F C
A D
B E
A – Drive side D – Control device side

B – Connect shield to ground terminal of E – Shield sheath (Insulate with tape)
drive.
C – Insulation F – Shield
Figure 3.18 Preparing the Ends of Shielded Cables
When setting the frequency by analog reference from an external potentiometer, use shielded twisted-pair wires and
ground the shield of twisted-pair wires to the ground terminal of the drive.
NOTICE: The analog signal lines between the drive and the operator station or peripheral equipment should not exceed 50 meters
when using an analog signal from a remote source to supply the frequency reference. Failure to comply could result in poor system
performance.
Figure 3.19
B 3
RP C
2k
+V D
G A1 E
A2 F
AC
A – Drive E – (A1) Main speed frequency reference

0 to +10 Vdc (20 kΩ)
B – Ground terminal (shield connection) F – (A2) Multi-function analog input 0 to
+10 Vdc (20 kΩ) or 4 to 20 mA (250 Ω)/
0 to 20 mA (250 Ω)
C – (RP) Pulse train (maximum 32 kHz) G – Frequency setting potentiometer
D – (+V) Frequency setting power source
+10.5 Vdc maximum 20 mA
Figure 3.19 Wiring the Frequency Reference to the Control Circuit Terminals (External Reference)
3.8 I/O Connections
3.8 I/O Connections

◆ Sinking/Sourcing Mode Switch
Set the DIP switch S3 on the front of the drive to switch the digital input terminal logic between sinking mode and
sourcing mode; the drive is preset to sinking mode.
Table 3.11 Sinking/Sourcing Mode Setting
Set Value Details
SINK Sinking Mode (0 V common): default setting
SOURCE Sourcing Mode (+24 V common)
Figure 3.20
DIP Switch S3
SINK
SOURCE
Figure 3.20 DIP Switch S3
■ Transistor Input Signal Using 0 V Common/Sink Mode

When controlling the digital inputs by NPN transistors (0 V common/sinking mode), set the DIP switch S3 to SINK and
use the internal 24 V power supply.
Figure 3.21
SINK
Shielded cable Drive
S1
Forward run/stop
S2
Reverse run/stop
S3
Multi-function input
SOURCE
External fault N.O.
S4
Fault reset
S5
Multi-speed step 1
S6
Multi-speed step 2
S7
Jog reference
SINK
+24V
S3
SOURCE
SC
Figure 3.21 Sinking Mode: Sequence from NPN Transistor (0 V Common)
3.8 I/O Connections
■ Transistor Input Signal Using +24 V Common/Source Mode

When controlling digital inputs by PNP transistors (+24 V common/sourcing mode), set the DIP switch S3 to SOURCE
and use an external 24 V power supply.
Figure 3.22
SINK Shielded cable

Drive
Forward run / stop S1
Multi-function input
Reverse run / stop S2
SOURCE
External fault N.O. S3
Fault rest S4
External Multi-step speed 1 S5
power supply
+24 V Multi-step speed 2 S6
Jog frequency S7
SINK
+24V
S3
SOURCE
SC
Figure 3.22 Source Mode: Sequence from PNP Transistor (+24 V Common)
3
3.9 Main Frequency Reference
3.9 Main Frequency Reference

◆ DIP Switch S1 Analog Input Signal Selection
The main frequency reference can either be a voltage or current signal input. For voltage signals both analog inputs, A1
and A2, can be used, for current signals A2 must be used.
When using input A2 as a voltage input, set DIP switch S1 to “V” (left position) and program parameter H3-09 to “0” (0
to +10 Vdc with lower limit) or “1” (0 to +10 Vdc without lower limit).
To use current input at terminal A2, set the DIP switch S1 to "I" (default setting) and set parameter H3-09 = “2” or “3”
(4-20 mA or 0-20 mA). Set parameter H3-10 = “0” (frequency reference).
Note: If Terminals A1 and A2 are both set for frequency reference (H3-02 = 0 and H3-10 = 0), the addition of both input values builds
the frequency reference.
Table 3.12 Frequency Reference Configurations
Voltage Input Current Input
Drive Drive
+10.5 V
+V +10.5 V
20 mA current +V 20 mA current
0 to 10 V Main speed Main speed

A1 frequency reference 4 to 20 mA input A1 frequency reference
(voltage input) (voltage input)
or
Main speed 0 to 20 mA input Main speed
A2 frequency reference A2 frequency reference
(current input) (current input)
AC Frequency reference AC Frequency reference
common common
Figure 3.23
V I

Table 3.13 DIP Switch S1 Settings
Setting Value Description
V (left position) Voltage input (0 to 10 V)
I (right position) Current input (4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA): default setting
Table 3.14 Parameter H3-09 Details

Setting Default
No. Parameter Name Description Range Setting
Selects the signal level for terminal A2.
0: 0 to +10 V, unipolar input (with lower limit)
Frequency ref. (current)
H3-09 1: 0 to +10 V, bipolar input (no lower limit) 0 to 3 2
terminal A2 signal level selection
2: 4 to 20 mA
3: 0 to 20 mA
3.10 MEMOBUS/Modbus Termination
3.10 MEMOBUS/Modbus Termination

DIP switch S2 controls the terminal resistance as shown in Figure 3.24. The OFF position is the default of the
terminating resistor switch for MEMOBUS/Modbus communications. Turn the terminal resistor switch ON when the
drive is the last drive in a series of slave drives.
Table 3.15 MEMOBUS/Modbus Switch Settings
S2 Position Description
ON Internal terminal resistance ON
OFF Internal terminal resistance OFF (no terminal resistance); default setting
Figure 3.24
DIP Switch S2
OFF ON

Note: Refer to the MEMOBUS/Modbus communications manual for details on MEMOBUS/Modbus.
3
3.11 Braking Resistor

Dynamic braking (DB) helps bring the motor to a smooth and rapid stop when working with high inertia loads. As the
drive lowers the frequency of a motor with high inertia connected, regeneration occurs. This can cause an overvoltage
situation when the regenerative energy flows back into the DC bus capacitors. A braking resistor prevents these
overvoltage faults.
NOTICE: Do not allow unqualified personnel to use the product. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive or braking
circuit. Carefully review the braking resistor instruction manual when connecting a braking option to the drive.
Note: The braking circuit must be sized properly in order to dissipate the power required to decelerate the load in the desired time.
Ensure that the braking circuit can dissipate the energy for the set deceleration time prior to running the drive.
NOTICE: Use a thermal overload relay or an over-temperature contact to interrupt input power to the drive in the event the braking
resistor overheats. In the event of a possible thermal overload, the relay will trigger the input contactor and prevent the braking resistor
from burning up.
◆ Installation
WARNING! Fire Hazard. The braking resistor connection terminals are B1 and B2. Do not connect a braking resistor directly to any
other terminals. Improper wiring connections could result in death or serious injury by fire. Failure to comply may result in damage to
the braking circuit or drive.
NOTICE: Connect braking resistors to the drive as shown in the I/O wiring examples. Improperly wiring braking circuits could result in
damage to the drive or equipment.
Note: If using not the internal braking transistor but a CDBR-type braking resistor unit , wire terminal B1 to the positive terminal on
the braking resistor and the negative terminals together. Terminal B2 should not be used.
■ Installation Procedure
1. Disconnect all electrical power to the drive and wait at least five minutes before servicing the drive and any
connected components.
2. Remove drive front cover.
3. Use a voltmeter to verify that voltage is disconnected from incoming power terminals and that the DC bus no
longer holds a charge.
Figure 3.25
Thermal
relay Braking resistor
Power
supply MCCB MC
R/L1 B1 B2
S/L2 U/T1
T/L3 V/T2 Motor
W/T3
THRX OFF ON MC
Drive
SA
MC
THRX
SA
Thermal relay switch for
external braking resistor
MC TRX
SA
TRX
MA MC
Fault contact
Figure 3.25 Connecting a Braking Resistor

4. Follow manufacturer instructions to connect the resistor unit to the drive using proper wire gauge according to
local electrical codes.
Power leads for the remote mount resistors generate high levels of electrical noise; group these signal leads
separately.
5. Mount the resistor unit on a noncombustible surface. Maintain minimum side and top clearances according to
resistor manufacturer instructions.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Do not use improper combustible materials. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire.
Attach the drive or braking resistors to metal or other noncombustible material.
6. Reinstall drive covers and resistor covers, if provided.
7. Set parameter L3-04 = “0” or “3” to disable stall prevention during deceleration.
Set parameter L8-01 to “1” to enable overheat protection when using a heatsink-mounted braking resistor
option.
Set L8-01 = “0” for other braking resistor types.
Set parameter L3-04 = “3” to generate the shortest possible deceleration time.
Table 3.16 Braking Resistor Settings
Parameter Settings
0: Disabled. The drive will not provide overheat protection. Supply
L8-01: Internal Dynamic Braking Resistor Protection Selection separate means of overheat protection.
1: Enabled. Braking Resistor is protected from overheat.
0: Stall prevention disabled.
L3-04: Stall Prevention During Deceleration 3: Stall prevention enabled with a braking resistor
Note:Select either 0 or 3 Note: This setting cannot be used in OLV control for PM
motor.
8. Operate the system and verify the required deceleration rate is obtained during dynamic braking or stopping.
3
3.12 Wiring Checklist
No. Item Page

Drive, peripherals, option cards
1 Check drive model number to ensure receipt of correct model. 25
2 Check for correct braking resistors, DC reactors, noise filters, and other peripheral devices. 70
3 Check for correct option card model. 314
Installation area and physical setup
4 Ensure area surrounding the drive complies with specifications. 35
Power supply voltage, output voltage
5 The voltage from the power supply should fall within the input voltage specification range of the drive. 154
6 The voltage rating for the motor should match the drive output specifications. 25
Main circuit wiring
7 Confirm proper branch circuit protection exists per National and Local codes. 50
8 Properly wire the power supply to drive terminals R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3. 52
Properly wire the drive and motor together.
9 The motor lines and drive output terminals R/T1, V/T2 and W/T3 should match in order to produce the desired 59
phase order. If the phase order is incorrect, the drive will rotate in the opposite direction.
10 Use 600 Vac vinyl-sheathed wire for the power supply and motor lines. 56
Use the correct wire gauges for the main circuit. Refer to Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications on page 57,
11 56
Table 3.3, or Table 3.4.
• When using comparatively long motor cable, calculate the amount of voltage drop.
Motor rated voltage (V) x 0.02 ≥ 56
3 x voltage resistance (Ω/km) x cable length (m) x motor rated current (A) x 10-3
• If the cable between the drive and motor exceeds 50 m, adjust the carrier frequency (C6-02) accordingly. 59
12 Properly ground the drive. Review page 59. 59
Tightly fasten all terminal screws (control circuit terminals, grounding terminals).
13 56
Refer to Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications on page 57, Table 3.3, or Table 3.4.
Set up overload protection circuits when running multiple motors from a single drive.
Power supply Drive MC1 OL1

M1
MC2 OL2
14 M2 -
MCn OLn
Mn
MC1 - MCn ... magnetic contactor

OL 1 - OL n ... thermal relay
Note: Close MC1 through MCn before operating the drive.
If using a braking resistor or dynamic braking resistor unit, install a magnetic contactor. Properly install the
15 70
resistor, and ensure that overload protection shuts off the power supply.
16 Verify phase advancing capacitors are NOT installed on the output side of the drive. -
Control circuit wiring
17 Use twisted-pair cables for all drive control circuit wiring. 61
18 Ground the shields of shielded wiring to the GND terminal. 64
If using a 3-Wire sequence, properly set parameters for multi-function contact input terminals S1 through S7,
19 51
and properly wire control circuits.
20 Properly wire any option cards. 305
Check for any other wiring mistakes.
21 -
Only use a multimeter to check wiring.
Properly fasten the control circuit terminal screws in the drive.
22 56
Refer to Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications on page 57, Table 3.3, or Table 3.4.
No. Item Page
23 Pick up all wire clippings. -

24 Ensure that no frayed wires on the terminal block are touching other terminals or connections. -
25 Properly separate control circuit wiring and main circuit wiring. -
26 Analog signal line wiring should not exceed 50 m. -
27 Safe Disable Input wiring should not exceed 30 m. -
3
4
Start-Up Programming & Operation
This chapter explains the control modes available for the drive, how to work the LED
operator, and provides instructions on Auto-Tuning.
4.1 SECTION SAFETY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

4.2 USING THE DIGITAL LED OPERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
4.3 THE DRIVE AND PROGRAMMING MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.4 START-UP FLOWCHARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
4.5 POWERING UP THE DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
4.6 AUTO-TUNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
4.7 NO-LOAD OPERATION TEST RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
4.8 TEST RUN WITH LOAD CONNECTED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
4.9 VERIFYING PARAMETER SETTINGS AND BACKING UP CHANGES . . . . . . . . 102
4.10 TEST RUN CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
4.1 Section Safety
4.1 Section Safety

DANGER
WARNING
The diagrams in this section may include drives without covers or safety shields to illustrate details. Be sure to reinstall
confirm safe level.
work on the drive.
Fire Hazard
4.1 Section Safety
NOTICE
Failure to comply may cause electrical interference resulting in poor system performance. Use shielded twisted-pair
devices.
Start-Up Programming
& Operation
4
4.2 Using the Digital LED Operator

Use the LED operator to enter run and stop commands, display data, edit parameters, as well as display fault and alarm
information.
◆ Keys, Displays, and LEDs
12 13
1 11
5
15
3
14
STOP
7 8
10
4 6
STOP
T1000V Freq Reference : (Hz)

FWD / REV Sel :
Output Freq : (Hz)
Monitor :
Verify :
SetUpGuide :
Parameter Set :
Auto-Tuning :

Risque de décharge
Table 4.1 Keys and Displays on the LED Operator

No. Display Name Function
1 Data Display Area Displays the frequency reference, parameter number, etc.
2 ESC Key Returns to the previous menu.
Moves the cursor to the right.

3 RESET Key
Resets the drive to clear a fault situation.
4 RUN Key Starts the drive.
5 Up Arrow Key Scrolls up to select parameter numbers, setting values, etc.
6 Down Arrow Key Scrolls down to select parameter numbers, setting values, etc.
Stops the drive.

Note: Stop priority circuit. A fast-stop is available by pressing the STOP key when
7 STOP STOP Key the drive detects a danger even if the drive is running by a signal from the multi-
function contact input terminal (REMOTE is set). To avoid stoppage by using the
STOP key, set o2-02 (STOP Key Function Selection) to 0 (Disabled).
Selects all modes, parameters, settings, etc.
8 ENTER Key
Selects a menu item to move from one display screen to the next.
No. Display Name Function

Switches drive control between the operator (LOCAL) and the control circuit
terminals (REMOTE).
Note: LOCAL/REMOTE key effective during stop in drive mode. If the digital
9 LO/RE Selection Key
operator could change from REMOTE to LOCAL by incorrect operation, set o2-01
(LOCAL/REMOTE Key Function Selection) to “0” (disabled) to disable LOCAL/
REMOTE key.
10 RUN Light Lit while the drive is operating the motor.
11 LO/RE Light Lit while the operator (LOCAL) is selected to run the drive.
12 ALM LED Light
13 REV LED Light

Refer to LED Screen Displays on page 80.
14 DRV LED Light
15 FOUT LED Light
◆ Digital Text Display

Text appears on the LED Operator as shown below. This section explains the meaning of text as it appears on the display
screen.
Lit Flashing
Table 4.2 Digital Text Display

Text LED Text LED Text LED Text LED
0 9 I R
1 A J S
2 B K T
3 C L U
4 D M V
<1>
& Operation
5 E N W
<1>
6 F O X none
7 G P Y 4
8 H Q Z none
<1> Displayed in two digits.
◆ LED Screen Displays

Display Lit Flashing Off
• When an alarm occurs
• oPE detected
When the drive detects an alarm or error Normal state (no fault or alarm)
• When a fault or error occurs during
Auto-Tuning
Motor is rotating in reverse — Motor is rotating forward
Drive Mode
— Programming Mode
Auto-Tuning
Displays output frequency (Hz) — —
As illustrated in
this manual
◆ LO/RE LED and RUN LED Indications

LED Lit Flashing Flashing Quickly <1> Off
When run command is Run command is selected from
selected from LED operator — — device other than LED operator
(LOCAL) (REMOTE)
• During deceleration at a
• During deceleration to stop fast-stop.
During run • When a run command is input • During deceleration During stop
and frequency reference is 0 • During stop by interlock
operation <2>
As shown
<1> Refer to Figure 4.1 for the difference between “flashing” and “flashing quickly”.
<2> Refer to U4-21 on page 373 to check the operation interlock status.
Figure 4.1
1s
ON ON
Flashing
Flashing ON ON ON ON
quickly
Figure 4.1 RUN LED Status and Meaning

Figure 4.2
Drive output frequency

during stop RUN STOP RUN
STOP
/ 6 Hz
0 Hz
Frequency setting
RUN LED OFF ON OFF OFF
Flashing
Figure 4.2 RUN LED and Drive Operation
◆ Menu Structure for Digital LED Operator

Figure 4.3
Description of Key Operations
:
Turn the power on
<1>
Pressing RUN will start the motor.
Forward Selection Reverse Selection

DRIVE MODE
:
DRV light is on.
:
Output Frequency
Output Current
Note: “XX” characters are shown in this manual.

The drive will display the actual setting values.
Output Voltage
XX
Monitor Display
XX
XX XX XX
& Operation
Verify Menu
PROGRAMMING MODE
Drive cannot operate the motor.
XX XX XX
DRV light is off.
XX XX XX
Set Up Mode
4
XX XX XX
XX
Parameter Setting Mode
XX
Auto-Tuning
XX RUN
Figure 4.3 Digital LED Operator Screen Structure

<1> Reverse can only be selected when LOCAL is set.
4.3 The Drive and Programming Modes

The drive functions are divided into two main groups accessible via the Digital LED Operator:
Drive Mode: The Drive mode allows motor operation and parameter monitoring. Parameter settings cannot be changed
when accessing functions in the Drive Mode (Table 4.3).
Programming Mode: The Programming Mode allows access to setup/adjust, verify parameters and Auto-Tuning. The
drive prohibits changes in motor operation such as start/stop when the Digital LED Operator is accessing a function in
the Programming Mode.
Table 4.3 illustrates the different functions visible as the “Up arrow” is scrolled immediately after powering up the drive.
Note: When b1-08 (Run Command Selection while in Programming Mode) is set to 1 (enabled), the drive can run even if the mode is
switched to the programming mode. When setting b1-08 to 0 (disabled), the mode cannot be switched to the programming mode
while the drive is running.
Table 4.3 Summary of Modes
Mode Group Description Key Press LED Digital Operator Display
Frequency Reference Display (Initial
power-up state)
Forward/Reverse
Output Frequency Display

Drive Mode Functions
(Motor operation and monitoring)
Output Current Display
Output Voltage Reference
Monitor Display
Verify Function
Set up Mode (Setup Group Parameters)

Programming Mode Functions
(Changing parameters) Parameter Setting Mode (All
Parameters)
Auto-Tuning
◆ Navigating the Drive and Programming Modes

The drive is set to operate in Drive Mode when it is first powered up. Switch between display screens by using the
and keys.
Frequency Reference
This display screen allows the user to monitor and set the frequency reference while the
drive is running. Refer to The Drive and Programming Modes on page 82.
Power Up
Note: The user can select items to display when the drive is first powered up by setting
STOP parameter o1-02.
Default Setting
: Motor rotates forward.

: Motor rotates in reverse.
Note: For applications that should not run in reverse, set parameter b1-04 = “1” to prohibit
the motor from rotating in reverse. This sequence also puts the drive in LOCAL mode.
Forward/Reverse
Switching to reverse:
The LED is lit when

LOCAL is selected
Output Frequency Display

Monitors the frequency output by the drive.
Drive Mode
Output Current Display

Monitors the output current of the drive.
Output Voltage Reference
& Operation
(Default setting) Scroll through o1-01 (User Monitor Selection) until the desired contents appear. Refer
to Parameter List on page 327
4
Monitor Display
Monitor parameters (U parameters) are displayed.
Verify Function
Programing Lists all parameters that have been edited or changed from default settings. Refer to
Mode Verifying Parameter Changes: Verify Menu on page 86.
Setup
A select list of parameters necessary to get the drive operational quickly. Refer to The
Setup Group within the Programming Mode on page 85.
Parameter Setting
Allows the user to access and edit all parameter settings. Refer to Parameter List on
page 327.
Programming
Mode
Auto-Tuning
Motor parameters are calculated and set automatically. Refer to Auto-Tuning on
page 94.
Frequency Reference
Drive Mode Returns to the frequency reference display screen.
■ Drive Mode Details

The following actions are possible in the Drive Mode:
• Run and stop the drive.
• Monitor the operation status of the drive (frequency reference, output frequency, output current, output voltage, etc.).
• View information on an alarm.
• View a history of alarms that have occurred.
Note: Select "Drive Mode" when running. The mode can be switched to any mode (program mode, etc.) other than drive mode while
the drive is stopped. However, the drive cannot be operated in other modes. Return the mode to "Drive Mode" after completing
periodic inspection.
Figure 4.4 illustrates changing the default frequency reference of F 0.00 (0 Hz) to F 6.00 (6 Hz) while in Drive Mode.
This example assumes the drive is set to LOCAL.
Figure 4.4
Frequency reference
display at power up
STOP
Press to select LOCAL Press to select the
digit to the right
Press until the frequency

reference becomes 6 Hz
Figure 4.4 Setting the Frequency Reference while in Drive Mode

Note: The drive will not accept a frequency reference set value unless the ENTER key is pressed after the frequency reference is
entered. This feature prevents accidental setting of the frequency reference. By setting o2-05 (Frequency Reference Setting
Method Selection) to 1 (Enabled), the drive will accept the frequency reference while it is being adjusted on the digital operator.
■ Programming Mode Details

The following actions are possible in the programming mode:
• Verify Function: Verify parameter setting changes from original default values.
• Setup Group: Access a list of commonly used parameters to simplify setup.
• Parameter Setting Mode: Access and edit all parameter settings.
• Auto-Tuning: Automatically calculates and sets motor parameters for Open Loop or PM Vector control to optimize
the drive for the motor characteristics.
The Setup Group within the Programming Mode
In Setup Group, the user can access the minimum group of parameters required to operate the application.
Note: Setup Group parameters are listed in Table 4.4.
Figure 4.5 illustrates the keys to press to enter the Setup Group.
In this example, the source of the frequency reference is changed from the control circuit terminals to the LED Operator
(i.e., b1-01 is changed from 1 to 0).
Figure 4.5
Frequency reference
appears when powered up
STOP Press until

appears
<1>
Parameter Display Control Circuit

Terminal Select digit
to edit
<2>
LED Operator Parameter Display
<1> Move to the right to change parameter settings. Scroll

down to view and check settings in the Setup Mode.
<2> To return to the Top Menu, press . To view or edit
other parameters, press and .
& Operation
Figure 4.5 Setup Group Example
4
◆ Changing Parameter Settings or Values
This example explains changing C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) from 10.0 seconds (default) to 20.0 seconds.
Step Display/Result
1. Turn on the power to the drive. The initial display appears.
2. Press the key until the Setup Mode Screen appears.
3.
Press the key to view the parameter setting display.
4.
Scroll through parameters by pressing the key until C1-01 appears.
Step Display/Result
5.
Press to view the current setting value (10.0). (Number farthest to the left flashes)
6.
Press until the desired number is selected. (“1” flashes)
7. Press the key and enter 0020.0.
8.
Press and the drive will confirm the change.
9. The display automatically returns to the screen shown in Step 4.
10. Press the key until back at the initial display.
◆ Verifying Parameter Changes: Verify Menu

Any parameters setting that have been changed from their original default values by the user or by the Auto-Tuning
process are listed in the Verify Menu. The Verify Menu helps determine which settings have been changed, and is
particularly useful when replacing a drive. If no settings have been changed the Verify Menu will read . The
Verify menu also allows users to access and re-edit edited parameters.
Note: The Verify Menu will not display parameters from the A1 group (except for A1-02) even if those parameters have been changed
from default settings.
The following example is a continuation of the steps beginning on page 85. Here, parameter C1-01 is accessed using the
Verify Menu and is changed again to 20.0 s.
To check the list of edited parameters:
Step Display/Result
2.
Press until the display shows the “Verify” representation.
Press to enter the list of parameters that have been edited from their original
3. default settings.
Scroll through the list by pressing the key.
4.
Press the key until C1-01 appears.
5.
Press the key to access the setting value. (number farthest to the left flashes)
◆ Switching Between LOCAL and REMOTE

Entering the run command using the LED operator is referred to as LOCAL, while entering the run command from an
external device via the control circuit terminals or network option card is referred to as REMOTE.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. The drive may start unexpectedly if the Run command is already applied when switching from
LOCAL mode to REMOTE mode when b1-07 = 1, resulting in death or serious injury. Be sure all personnel are clear of rotating
machinery and electrical connections prior to switching between LOCAL mode and REMOTE mode.
There are two ways to switch between LOCAL and REMOTE.

Note: 1. After selecting LOCAL, the LO/RE light will remain lit.
2. The drive will not allow the user to switch between LOCAL and REMOTE during run.
■ Using the LO/RE Key on the LED Operator
Step Display/Result
Press . The LO/RE light will light up. The drive is now in Local.
2.
STOP
To set the drive for REMOTE operation, press the key again.
■ Using Input Terminals S1 through S7 to Switch between LO/RE

Switch between LOCAL and REMOTE using one of the digital input terminals S1 through S7 (set the corresponding
parameter H1-01 through H1-07 to “1”).
Follow the example below to set the digital input terminals.
Note: 1. For a list of digital input selections, Refer to Parameter List on page 327.
2. Setting a multi-function input terminal to a value of 1 disables the LO/RE key on the LED operator.
◆ Parameters Available in the Setup Group

■ Setup Mode (STUP)
Parameters used for this drive are classified into A to U. To simplify the drive setup, frequently used parameters are
selected and input into Setup Mode.
1. To set a parameter, the Setup Mode must be displayed first. Press the Up/Down key until
& Operation
is displayed.
2. Select the parameter and change the setting. Table 4.4 lists parameters available in the Setup group. If the
desired parameter cannot be set in the Setup mode, use the Parameter Setting mode.
Note: When parameter A1-02 (Control Method Selection) is changed, some parameter set values are also changed automatically.
Note: Use the “Par” menu in the Programming mode to access parameters not listed in the Setup Group.
4
Table 4.4 Setup Group Parameters
Parameter Name Parameter Name
A1-02 Control Method Selection E1-01 Input Voltage Reference
b1-01 Frequency Reference Source 1 E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection
b1-02 Run Command Source 1 E1-04 Maximum Output Frequency
b1-03 Stop Method Selection E1-05 Maximum Voltage
C1-01 Acceleration Time 1 E1-06 Base Frequency
C1-02 Deceleration Time 1 E1-09 Minimum Output Frequency
C6-01 Duty Selection E1-13 Base Voltage
C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection E2-01 Motor Rated Current
d1-01 Frequency Reference 1 E2-04 Number of Motor Poles
d1-02 Frequency Reference 2 E2-11 Motor Rate Capacity
d1-03 Frequency Reference 3 H4-02 Terminal AM Gain Setting
d1-04 Frequency Reference 4 L1-01 Motor Protection Function Selection
d1-17 Jog Frequency Reference L3-04 Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration
4.4 Start-up Flowcharts

The flowcharts in this section summarize basic steps required to start the drive. Use the flowcharts to determine the most
appropriate start-up method for a given application. The charts are intended as a quick reference to help familiarize the
user with start-up procedures.
Flowchart Subchart Objective Page

A Basic startup procedure and motor tuning. 89
A-1 Simple motor setup with Energy Savings or Speed Search using V/f mode. 90
A-2 High-performance operation using Open Loop Vector (OLV) motor control. 91
A-3 Operation with Permanent Magnet (PM) motors. 92
◆ Flowchart A: Basic Start-up and Motor Tuning

Figure 4.6, Flowchart A, describes basic start-up sequence for the drive and motor system. This sequence varies slightly
depending on application. Use drive default parameter settings in simple applications that do not require high precision.
Figure 4.6
START
Install and wire the drive as explained in Chapters 1, 2, and 3
Apply main power on to the drive

Adhere to safety messages concerning application of power
Set the control mode in parameter A1-02.
Set the basic parameters

* b1-01 and b1-02 for frequency reference and run command source selection
* H1-,H2-,H3-,H4-,H6- for I/O terminal setting
* d1- for multi-speed references if used
* C1- and C2- for accel./decel. and S-curve time settings
* C6-01 for heavy/normal duty mode selection
* L3-04 if braking options are used
0: V/f control Control Mode 5: Open Loop Vector for PM motors

A1-02 =
To To 2: Open Loop To
Flowchart A-1 Flowchart A-2 Vector control Flowchart A-3
From Flowchart A-1, A-2, or A-3
Run the motor without load; check the rotation direction and operation.
Verify external signal commands to the drive work as desired.
Couple the load or machine to the motor. Run the machine and check for desired operation.
Fine tune parameters. Adjust application settings (PID, ...) if necessary.
Check the machine operation and verify parameter settings.
Drive is ready to run the application.
Figure 4.6 Basic Start-up and Motor Tuning
& Operation
4
◆ Subchart A1: Simple Motor Setup with Energy Savings or Speed Search Using V/f
Mode
Figure 4.7, Flowchart A1, describes simple motor setup for V/f control. This procedure illustrates using Energy Savings
and Speed Estimation Speed Search. V/f control can be used where rotational auto-tuning cannot be performed.
Figure 4.7
From
Flowchart
A
Set or verify the V/f pattern settings E1-.
Energy Savings
(b8-01=1)
or
Speed Estimation
Speed Search (b3-24=1)
NO
enabled ? YES
Is the motor cable

longer than 50 m? Perform Rotational Auto-Tuning
for V/f Control
(T1-01 = 3)
YES
NO
Perform Stationary Auto-Tuning for
terminal resistance (T1-01 = 2)
Return to
Flowchart
A
Figure 4.7 Simple Motor Set-Up with Energy Savings or Speed Search Using V/f Mode
◆ Subchart A2: High Performance Operation Using Open Loop Vector Motor Control
Figure 4.8, Flowchart A2, describes Open Loop Vector Control for high-performance motor operation. This is
appropriate for applications requiring high starting torque, torque limits, and improved speed regulation.
Figure 4.8
From
Flowchart
A
NO Possible for motor to

YES
rotate during tuning? <1>
NO <1> Rotational tuning should

Motor test report/ data be performed with the
sheet available?
load disconnected
YES
Calculate necessary E2-

Enter the data from the motor data Perform Rotating Auto-
parameter data using the
sheet to E2- parameters. Tuning (T1-01 = 0)
nameplate information.
Is the motor cable

YES
longer than 50 m?
Perform Stationary Auto-Tuning for

NO terminal resistance (T1-01 = 2)
Return to
Flowchart
A
Figure 4.8 Flowchart A2: High Performance Operation Using Open Loop Vector Motor Control
& Operation
4
◆ Subchart A3: Operation with Permanent Magnet Motors

Figure 4.9, Flowchart A3, describes tuning for PM motors in Open Loop Vector Control. PM motors can be used for
energy savings in reduced or variable torque applications.
Figure 4.9
From
Flowchart
A
Motor code is known ?

For parameter E5-01 NO
(for Yaskawa PM Motors)
YES Enter “FFFF” to parameter

E5-01
Set the motor code to Enter the motor data into

parameter E5-01 parameters E5-02 to E5-24
Return to
Flowchart
A
Figure 4.9 Operation with Permanent Magnet Motors
4.5 Powering Up the Drive
4.5 Powering Up the Drive

◆ Powering Up the Drive and Operation Status Display
■ Powering Up the Drive
Review the following checklist before turning the power on.
Item to Check Description

Ensure the power supply voltage is correct:
200 V class: single-phase 200 to 240 Vac 50/60 Hz
200 V class: 3-phase 200 to 240 Vac 50/60 Hz
Power supply voltage 400 V class: 3-phase 380 to 480 Vac 50/60 Hz
Properly wire the power supply input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3).
(for single-phase 200 V class models, wire only R/L1 and S/L2)
Check for proper grounding of drive and motor.
Drive output terminals and
Properly wire drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 with motor terminals U, V, and W.
motor terminals
Control circuit terminals Check control circuit terminal connections.
Drive control terminal status Open all control circuit terminals (off).
Status of the load and
Uncouple the motor from the load.
connected machinery
■ Status Display
When the power supply to the drive is turned on, the LED operator lights will appear as follows:
No. Name Description
Normal
The data display area displays the frequency reference. is lit.
Operation
Data displayed varies by the type of fault. Refer to Fault Displays, Causes, and
Fault Possible Solutions on page 249 for more information and possible solution. and
are lit.
Main circuit low voltage (ex)
Note: Display will very depending on drive settings.
& Operation
4
4.6 Auto-Tuning
4.6 Auto-Tuning
◆ Types of Auto-Tuning
There are three types of Auto-Tuning. Select the best type of Auto-Tuning for the application. Refer to Auto-Tuning
Procedure on page 96.
Type Setting Application Conditions and Benefits Control Mode

Rotational Auto- • Assumes the motor can rotate during the Auto-Tuning process
Open Loop Vector
Tuning for OLV T1-01 = 0 • Achieves high-performance motor control and should be performed whenever
Control
Control Open Loop Vector Control is used
Stationary Auto- For use when:
Tuning for Line- • The motor cable exceeds 50 m
V/f Control, Open Loop
to-Line Resistance T1-01 = 2 • The motor cable length has been modified after Auto-Tuning has been previously
Vector Control
(V/f and OLV performed
Control) • When motor capacity and drive capacity differ
• Assumes the motor can rotate during the Auto-Tuning process
Rotational • Improves torque compensation, slip compensation, energy savings, and Speed
Auto-Tuning for T1-01 = 3 Search performance V/f Control
V/f Control • Should be performed when Speed Estimation Type Speed Search or Energy Saving
is used in V/f Control
Note: Auto-Tuning cannot be performed on permanent magnet motors (IPM, SPM, etc.).
◆ Before Auto-Tuning the Drive

Check the items below before Auto-Tuning the drive.
■ Basic Auto-Tuning Preparations
• Auto-Tuning automatically determines the electrical characteristics of the motor. This is fundamentally different from
other types of Auto-Tuning features used in servo systems.
• Auto-Tuning requires the user to input data from the motor nameplate. Make sure the information written on the
nameplate is available before Auto-Tuning the drive.
• For best performance, be sure the drive input supply voltage equals or exceeds the motor rated voltage.
Note: Performance can be enhanced by using a motor with a base voltage that is 20 V (40 V for 400 V class models) lower than the
input supply voltage. This may be of special importance when operating the motor above 90% of base speed, where high torque
precision is required.
• Auto-Tuning is not possible with permanent magnet motors.
• To cancel Auto-Tuning, press the STOP key on the LED operator.
• Table 4.5 describes digital input and output terminal status during Auto-Tuning.
Table 4.5 Digital Input and Output Operation During Auto-Tuning
Auto-Tuning Type Digital Input Digital Output
Rotational Auto-Tuning for OLV Control Not available Functions the same as during normal operation
Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance Not available Maintains the status at the start of Auto-Tuning
Rotational Auto-Tuning for V/f Control Not available Functions the same as during normal operation
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Do not release the mechanical brake during stationary Auto-Tuning. Inadvertent brake
release may cause damage to equipment or injury to personnel. Ensure that the mechanical brake release circuit is not controlled by
the drive multi-function digital outputs.
Note: It is recommended that Rotational Auto-Tuning is performed with the load disconnected. Failure to comply could result in
improper drive operation. If Rotational Auto-Tuning is performed for a motor coupled to a load, the motor constants will be
inaccurate and the motor may exhibit abnormal operation. Disconnect or decouple the motor from the load.
4.6 Auto-Tuning
■ Notes on Rotational Auto-Tuning

• For optimal performance, Auto-Tuning should only be done with the motor uncoupled from the load for applications
requiring high performance over a wide speed range.
• If motor and load can not be uncoupled, the load should be lower than 30% of the rated load. Performing Rotational
Auto-Tuning with a higher load will set motor parameters incorrectly, and can cause irregular motor rotation.
• Ensure the motor-mounted brake is fully released if installed.
• Connected machinery should be allowed to rotate the motor.
■ Notes on Stationary Auto-Tuning for Terminal Resistance Only
• If the motor cable lead length has been significantly modified after Auto-Tuning has already been performed, perform
Stationary Auto-Tuning with the new cables.
• Perform when using motor cables longer than 50 m with V/f Control.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. When executing stationary Auto-Tuning for line-to-line resistance only, the motor does not rotate,
however, power is applied. Do not touch the motor until Auto-Tuning is completed. Failure to comply may result in injury from electrical
shock.
◆ Auto-Tuning Interruption and Fault Codes

If tuning results are abnormal or the STOP key is pressed before completion, Auto-Tuning will be interrupted and a fault
code will be displayed on the digital operator.
Figure 4.10
A B
A – Normal Auto-Tuning Display B – Auto-Tuning Interrupted

Figure 4.10 Auto-Tuning Interruption Display
& Operation
4
4.6 Auto-Tuning
◆ Performing Auto-Tuning
■ Auto-Tuning Procedure
Auto-Tuning should generally be performed in the following steps.
1. Refer to Before Auto-Tuning the Drive on page 94.
2. Determine which type of Auto-Tuning best fits the application requirements following Figure 4.11.
Figure 4.11
START
Select the Motor Control Mode A1-02
V/f Control Open Loop Vector PM Open Loop Vector Control

A1-02 = 0 A1-02 = 2 A1-02 = 5
Use E1-04 (E3-04) through Select the motor code

E1-13 (E3-13) to define (E5-01) or set motor data
manually in E5-
NO Is the total
Can the load be connected load
Will the application expected to be less
allow motor rotation disconnected from than 30% of the motor
for Auto-Tuning? the motor? rating?
YES YES NO
NO
YES NOTICE: Auto-Tuning with
Is the cable a connected load is possible,
between the motor but may result in less than
and drive longer optimum performance.
than 50 m?
V/f Rotational
Auto-Tuning YES NO
(T1-01 = 3)
Rotational Use V/f control (A1-02 =
Auto-Tuning 0) or set motor
Stationary Auto-Tuning for (T1-01 = 0)
Line-to-Line Resistance parameters manually if
(T1-01 = 2) OLV control is needed
Run the motor without the load.

Fine tune parameters if needed.
Connect the load and run the motor.

Fine tune parameters if needed.
Verify system operates as required.
The drive is now ready to operate the motor.
Figure 4.11 Auto-Tuning Selection

3. Enter the type of Auto-Tuning to parameter T1-01.
4. Enter the motor nameplate data.
5. Start the Auto-Tuning process when prompted by the drive.
6. If Auto-Tuning was successfully performed, do a test run without the load and make any necessary parameter
adjustments.
7. If the test run was successful, do a test run with the load connected and make parameter adjustments if necessary.
◆ Auto-Tuning Example
The following example illustrates how to perform Rotational Auto-Tuning for Open Loop Vector Control (A1-02 = 2).
■ Set the Selected Type of Auto-Tuning
Step Display/Result
2. Press the key until the Auto-Tuning display appears.
3. Press to begin setting parameters.
4.6 Auto-Tuning
Step Display/Result
4. Press to display the value for T1-01.
5. Press to select the digit to edit.
6. Press and set the drive to perform Rotational Auto-Tuning (00).
7. Save the setting by pressing .
8. The display automatically returns to the display shown in Step 3.
■ Enter Data from the Motor Nameplate

After selecting the type of Auto-Tuning, enter the data required from the motor nameplate.
Note: These instructions continue from Step 8 in “Set the Selected Type of Auto-Tuning”.
Step Display/Result
1. Press to access the motor output power parameter T1-02.
2. Press to view the default setting.
3. Press to select the digit to edit.
4. Press and enter the motor power nameplate data in kW.
5. Press to save the setting.
6. The display automatically returns to the display in Step 1.
Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to set the following parameters:

• T1-03, Motor Rated Voltage
• T1-04, Motor Rated Current
7.
• T1-05, Motor Rated Frequency
• T1-06, Number of Motor Poles
• T1-07, Motor Rated Speed
Note: 1. For the details on each setting, Refer to Input Data for Auto-Tuning on page 98.
2. For Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line resistance only, set T1-02 and T1-04.
& Operation
■ Starting Auto-Tuning
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. The drive and motor may start unexpectedly during Auto-Tuning, which could result in death
or serious injury. Ensure the area surrounding the drive motor and load are clear before proceeding with Auto-Tuning.
4
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. High voltage will be supplied to the motor when Stationary Auto-Tuning is performed even with
the motor stopped, which could result in death or serious injury. Do not touch the motor until Auto-Tuning has been completed.
NOTICE: Rotational Auto-Tuning will not function properly if a holding brake is engaged on the load. Failure to comply could result in
improper operation of the drive. Ensure the motor can freely spin before beginning Auto-Tuning.
NOTICE: Never perform Rotational Auto-Tuning for a motor connected to a load. Failure to comply could result in improper drive
operation. If Rotational Auto-Tuning is performed for a motor coupled to a load, the motor parameters will be inaccurate and the motor
may exhibit abnormal operation. Disconnect or decouple the motor from the load.
Enter the required information from the motor nameplate. Press to proceed to the Auto-Tuning start display.
Note: These instructions continue from Step 7 in “Enter Data from the Motor Nameplate”.
4.6 Auto-Tuning
Step Display/Result
1. After setting T1-07 as illustrated in the previous section, press and confirm the
display is as described below:
Press to activate Auto-Tuning. flashes.
2. Note: The first digit indicates which motor is undergoing Auto-Tuning (motor 1 or
motor 2). The second digit indicates the type of Auto-Tuning being performed.
3. Auto-Tuning finishes in approximately one to two minutes.
◆ Input Data for Auto-Tuning

The T1- parameters are used to set the Auto-Tuning input data.
Note: 1. Shutting off the power after using the T1 parameters to perform Auto-Tuning will reset the parameter values that were set during
Auto-Tuning.
2. For motors that are to be operated in the field weakening range, first perform the Auto-Tuning with the base data, i.e. the frequency at
which the motor is operating with its rated voltage (base frequency). After Auto-Tuning is complete, change the maximum frequency
E1-04 to the desired value.
■ T1-00: Motor 1/Motor 2 Selection

Selects the motor to be tuned when motor 1/2 switching is enabled, i.e., a digital input is set for function H1- = 16.
This parameter is not displayed if motor 1/2 switching is disabled.
No. Name Setting Range Default

T1-00 Motor 1/2 Selection 1 or 2 1
Setting 1: Motor 1
Auto-Tuning automatically sets parameters E1- and E2- for motor 1.
Setting 2: Motor 2
Auto-Tuning automatically sets parameters E3- and E4- for motor 2. Make sure that motor 2 is connected to the
drive for Auto-Tuning.
■ T1-01: Tuning Mode Selection
Sets the type of Auto-Tuning to be used. Refer to Types of Auto-Tuning on page 94 for details on different types of
Auto-Tuning.

T1-01 Auto-Tuning Mode Selection 0, 2 (OLV) 2, 3 (V/f) 0 (OLV) 2 (V/f)
Setting 0: Rotating Auto-Tuning for Open Loop Vector Control
Setting 2: Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance
Setting 3: Rotating Auto-Tuning for V/f Control
■ T1-02: Motor Rated Power
Used to set the motor rated power according to the motor nameplate value. For optimal performance, the motor rated
power should be between 50 and 100% of the drive rating.

Determined by o2-
T1-02 Motor Rated Power 0.00 to 650.00 kW
04 and C6-01
■ T1-03: Motor Rated Voltage (T1-01 = 0 or 3)

Used to set the motor rated voltage according to the motor nameplate value. If the motor is used above its base speed,
enter the voltage at base speed here.
For higher tuning precision and better control performance, enter the motor no-load voltage here if known. The motor
no-load voltage is referred as to the voltage needed to operate the motor under no-load condition at its rated speed. Refer
to the motor data sheet.
4.6 Auto-Tuning

T1-03 <1> Motor Rated Voltage 0.0 to 255.5 V 200.0 V
<1> Values shown here are for 200 V class drives. Double values when using a 400 V class unit.
■ T1-04: Motor Rated Current

Used to set the motor rated current according to the motor nameplate value. For optimal performance in OLV, the motor
rated current should be between 50 and 100% of the drive rating. Enter the current at the motor base speed.

10 to 200% of drive rated Determined by
T1-04 Motor Rated Current
current o2-04 and C6-01
■ T1-05: Motor Rated Frequency (T1-01 = 0 or 3)

Used to set the motor rated frequency according to the motor nameplate value. If a motor with an extended speed range is
used or the motor is used in the field weakening area, enter the base frequency here.
For higher tuning precision and better control performance, enter the motor no-load frequency here if known. The “no-
load frequency” refers to the frequency needed to operate the motor under no-load condition at its rated speed. Refer to
the motor data sheet.

T1-05 Motor Rated Frequency 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 60.0 Hz <1>
<1> Regional default settings
Setting 60.0 Hz: Japan (Model code: CIMR-TAV) and Asia (Model code: CIMR-TTV)
Setting 50.0 Hz: China (Model code: CIMR-TBV)
■ T1-06: Number of Motor Poles (T1-01 = 0 or 3)

Used to set the number of motor poles according to the motor nameplate value.

T1-06 Number of Motor Poles 2 to 48 4
■ T1-07: Motor Rated Speed (T1-01 = 0 or 3)
Used to set the motor rated speed according to the motor nameplate value. If a motor with an extended speed range is
used or the motor is used in the field weakening area, enter the speed at base frequency here.
& Operation
T1-07 Motor Rated Speed 0 to 24000 r/min 1750 r/min <1>
<1> Regional default settings 4
Setting 1750 r/min: Japan (Model code: CIMR-TAV) and Asia (Model code: CIMR-TTV)
Setting 1450 r/min: China (Model code: CIMR-TBV)
■ T1-11: Motor Iron Loss (T1-01 = 3)

Provides iron loss information for determining the Energy Saving coefficient. If E2-10 has been changed and the power
has been cycled, the value set to E2-10 will appear as the default in T1-11. If the value of T1-02 is not changed during
Auto-Tuning data input, the drive will select a value that is typical for the motor power entered to T1-02.

Determined by o2-
T1-11 Motor Iron Loss 0 to 65535 W
04 and C6-01
4.7 No-Load Operation Test Run
4.7 No-Load Operation Test Run

◆ No-Load Operation Test Run
This section explains how to operate the drive with the motor uncoupled from the load during a test run.
■ Before Starting the Motor
Check the following items before operation:
• Ensure the area around the motor is safe.
• Ensure external emergency stop circuitry is working properly and other safety precautions have been taken.
■ During Operation
Check the following items during operation:
• The motor should rotate smoothly (i.e., no abnormal noise or oscillation).
• The motor should accelerate and decelerate smoothly.
■ No-Load Operation Instructions
The following example illustrates a test run procedure using the digital operator.
Note: Before starting the motor, set the frequency reference d1-01 to 6 Hz.
Step Display/Result
2. Press the key to select LOCAL. The LO/RE LED will turn on. STOP
3. Press to give the drive a Run command. RUN will light and the motor will STOP
rotate at 6 Hz.
Off On
Motor
4. Ensure the motor is rotating in the correct direction and no faults or alarms occur.
Forward
If there is no error in step 4, press to increase the frequency reference. Increase

5. the frequency in 10 Hz increments verifying smooth operation results at all speeds. For
each frequency, monitor the drive output current (U1-03) through the LED operator to
confirm the current is well below the motor rated current. Example: 6 Hz → 60 Hz.
6. The drive should operate normally. Press STOP to stop the motor. RUN flashes until STOP
the motor comes to a complete stop.
Flashing Off
4.8 Test Run with Load Connected
4.8 Test Run with Load Connected

◆ Test Run with the Load Connected
After performing a no-load test run connect the motor and proceed to run the motor and load together.
■ Notes on Connected Machinery
• Clear the area around the motor.
• The motor should come to a complete stop without problems.
• Connect the machinery.
• Fasten all installation screws properly. Check that the motor and connected machinery are held in place.
• Confirm that the Fast-stop circuit or mechanical safety measures operate correctly.
• Be ready to press the STOP button in case of emergency.
■ Checklist Before Operation
• The motor should rotate in the proper direction.
• The motor should accelerate and decelerate smoothly.
■ Operating the Motor under Loaded Conditions
Test run the application similarly to the no-load test procedure when connecting the machinery to the motor.
• Check monitor parameter U1-03 to ensure there is no overcurrent.
• If the application permits running the load in the reverse direction, try changing motor direction and the frequency
reference while watching for abnormal motor oscillation or vibration.
• Correct any problems that occurs with hunting, oscillation, or other control-related issues.
& Operation
4
4.9 Verifying Parameter Settings and Backing Up Changes

Check changes to parameter settings as a result of Auto-Tuning using the Verify function. Refer to Verifying Parameter
Changes: Verify Menu on page 86.
Save the verified parameter settings. Change the access level or set a password to the drive to prevent accidental
modification of parameter settings.
◆ Backing Up Parameter Values: o2-03

Performing the following procedure stores all parameters settings to drive memory where they can later be recalled if
necessary. Set o2-03 to “1” to save parameter changes. This saves all parameter settings, and then returns o2-03 to 0. The
drive can now “recall” the saved parameters by performing a “user-initialization” (A1-03 = 1110).
Parameter Setting Default

No. Description
Name Range Setting
Allows storing of parameter settings as a User Initialization Selection.
0: Saved/Not set
User Parameter 1: Set Defaults - Saves current parameter settings as user default settings.
o2-03 0 to 2 0
Default Value 2: Clear All - Clears the currently saved user settings. After saving the user parameter
set value, the items of 1110 (User Parameter Initialize) are displayed in A1-03 (User
Parameter Default Value).
Selects a method to initialize the parameters.
0: No Initialize
1110: User Initialize (The user must first program and store desired settings using
Initialize
A1-03 parameter o2-03) 0 to 5550 0
Parameters
2220: 2-Wire Initialization (parameter initialized prior to shipment)
3330: 3-Wire Initialization
5550: oPE4 Fault reset
◆ Parameter Access Level: A1-01

Setting the Access Level for “Operation only” (A1-01 = 0) allows the user to access parameters A1- and U-
only. Other parameters are not displayed.
Setting the Access Level for “User Parameters” (A1-01 = 1) allows the user to access parameters that have been
previously saved as User Parameters. This is helpful when displaying only the relevant parameters for a specific
application.
Parameter Setting
No. Description Default
Name Range
Selects which parameters are accessible via the digital operator.
0: Operation only (A1-01 and A1-04 can be set and monitored. U parameters can be monitored)
Access Level
A1-01 1: User Parameters (Only those recently changed among application parameters A2-01 to A2- 0 to 2 2
Selection
16 and A2-17 to A2-32 can be set and monitored)
2: Advanced Access Level (All parameters can be set and monitored)
Parameters selected by the user are stored to the User Parameter menu. This includes recently
viewed parameters or parameters specifically selected for quick access.
A2-01 User
If parameter A2-33 is set to 1, recently viewed parameters will be listed between A2-17 and b1-01 to
to Parameters 1 –
A2-32. Parameters A2-01 through A2-16 must be manually selected by the user. o2-08
A2-32 to 32
If A2-33 is set to 0, then recently viewed parameters will not be saved to the User Parameter
group. The entire A2 parameter group is now available for manual programming.
User 0: Parameters A2-01 through A2-32 are reserved for the user to create a list of User Parameters.
Parameter 1: Save history of recently viewed parameters. Recently edited parameters will be saved to A2-
A2-33 0, 1 1
Automatic 17 through A2-32 for quick access. The most recently changed parameter is registered in A2-
Selection 17. The second most recently changed parameter is registered in A2-18.
◆ Password Settings: A1-04, A1-05

The user can set a password to the drive to restrict access. The password is selected via parameter A1-05. The selected
password must be entered in parameter A1-04 to unlock parameter access (i.e., parameter setting A1-04 must match the
value programmed into A1-05). The following parameters cannot be viewed or edited until the value programmed into
A1-04 correctly matches the value as programmed in parameter A1-05: A1-01, A1-02, A1-03 and A2-01 through A2-33.
Note: Parameter A1-05 is hidden from view. To display A1-05, access parameter A1-04 and simultaneously depress the key and
the key.
◆ Copy Function (Optional)

Parameter settings can be copied to another drive to simplify parameter restoration or multiple drive setup. The drive
supports the following options:
■ USB/Copy Unit (JVOP-181)
The copy unit is an external option connected to the drive to copy parameter settings to another drive. It includes a USB
adapter to connect the drive to a PC.
■ LCD Operator (JVOP-180)
The LCD operator supports copying, importing, and verifying parameter settings. Refer to o3: Copy Function on
page 222 for details.
Note: The LCD operator is available from software versions 6000 or later.
■ LED Operator (JVOP-182)

The LED also supports copying, importing, and verifying parameter settings. Refer to o3: Copy Function on page 222
for details.
Note: The LED operator is available from software versions 6000 or later.
■ Drive Wizard
Drive Wizard is a PC software tool for parameter management, monitoring, and diagnosis. Drive Wizard can load, store,
and copy drive parameter settings. For details, refer to Help in the Drive Wizard software.
& Operation
4
4.10 Test Run Checklist

Review the checklist before performing a test run. Check each item that applies.
No. Checklist Page
1 Thoroughly read the manual before performing a test run. —

2 Turn the power on. 93
3 Set the voltage for the power supply to E1-01. 154
Check the items that correspond to the control mode being used.
WARNING! Ensure start/stop and safety circuits are wired properly and in the correct state before energizing the drive. Failure to
comply could result in death or serious injury from moving equipment. When programmed for 3-Wire control, a momentary closure on
terminal S1 may cause the drive to start.
No. Checklist Page
V/f Control (A1-02 = 0)

4 Perform Auto-Tuning for Energy Savings if using Energy Saving functions. 94
Open Loop Vector Control (A1-02 = 2)
5 Uncouple the load from the motor when performing Rotational Auto-Tuning. 94
6 Perform Rotational Auto-Tuning. 94
The following data entered during Auto-Tuning should match the information written on the motor nameplate:
• motor rated output power (kW) → T1-02
• rated voltage (V) → T1-03
7 • rated current (A) → T1-04 98
• base frequency (Hz) → T1-05
• number of motor poles → T1-06
• motor rotations per minutes (r/min) → T1-07
PM Open Loop Vector Control (A1-02 = 5)
8 Set permanent motor parameters E5-01 through E5-24 92
Proceed to the following checklist after checking items 4 through 9.
No. Checklist Page
9 The should illuminate after giving a run command. —

To give a run command and frequency reference from the LED Digital Operator, press to set to
10 87
LOCAL. The LO/RE key lights while LOCAL is displayed.
If the motor rotates in the opposite direction during the test run, switch two of the drive output terminals (U/
11 93
T1, V/T2, W/T3).
12 Select the correct duty rating (C6-01) for the application. —
Set the correct values for the motor rated current (E2-01) and the motor protection selection (L1-01) to ensure
13 —
motor thermal protection.
If the run command and frequency reference are provided via the control circuit terminals, set the drive for
14 87
REMOTE and be sure the LO/RE light is out.
If the control circuit terminals should supply the frequency reference, select the correct voltage input signal
15 87
level (0 to 10 V) or the correct current input signal level (4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA).
16 Set the proper voltage to terminal A1 and/or A2. (0 to 10 V). 113
17 Set the proper current to terminal A2. (4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA). 113
18 When current input is used, set H3-09 to “2” (4 to 20 mA) or “3” (0 to 20 mA) and set H3-10 to “0”. —
19 When current input is used, switch the drive built-in DIP switch S1 from the V-side (OFF) to I-side (ON). —
No. Checklist Page
Set the minimum and maximum frequency references to the desired values. Make the following adjustments if
the drive does not operate as expected:
Gain adjustment: Set the maximum voltage/current signal and adjust the analog input gain (H3-03 for input
20 —
A1, H3-11 for input A2) until the frequency reference value reaches the desired value.
Bias adjustment: Set the minimum voltage/current signal and adjust the analog input bias (H3-04 for input A1,
H3-12 for input A2) until the frequency reference value reaches the desired minimum value.
& Operation
4
5
Parameter Details
5.1 A: INITIALIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

5.2 B: APPLICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
5.3 C: TUNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
5.4 D: REFERENCE SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
5.5 E: MOTOR PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
5.6 F: OPTION SETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
5.7 H: TERMINAL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
5.8 L: PROTECTION FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
5.9 N: SPECIAL ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
5.10 O: OPERATOR RELATED SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
5.11 S: FUNCTIONS FOR TEXTILE APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
5.12 U: MONITOR PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
5.1 A: Initialization
The initialization group contains parameters associated with initial setup of the drive. Parameters involving the display
language, access levels, initialization, and password are located in this group.
◆ A1: Initialization
■ A1-00: Language Selection
Selects the display language for the digital operator.
Note: This parameter is not reset when the drive is initialized using parameter A1-03.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default

A1-00 Language Selection 0 to 7 0 <1>
Setting 0: Japan (Model code: CIMR-TAV) and Asia (Model code: CIMR-TTV)
Setting 7: China (Model code: CIMR-TBV)
Setting 0: English
Setting 1: Japanese
Setting 2: German
Setting 3: French
Setting 4: Italian
Setting 5: Spanish
Setting 6: Portuguese
Setting 7: Chinese
■ A1-01: Access Level Selection
Allows or restricts access to drive parameters.

A1-01 Access Level Selection 0 to 9999 2
Setting 0: Operation Only

Access is restricted to parameters A1-01, A1-04, and all U monitor parameters.
Setting 1: User Parameters
Access to only a specific list of parameters set to A2-01 through A2-32. These User Parameters can be accessed using the
Setup mode of the digital operator.
Setting 2: Advanced Access Level (A) and Setup Access Level (S)
All parameters can be viewed and edited.
Notes on Parameter Access
• If the drive parameters are password protected by A1-04 and A1-05, parameters A1-00 through A1-03, and all A2
parameters cannot be modified.
• If a digital input programmed for Program Lockout (H1- = 1B) is enabled, parameter values can not be modified,
even though the A1-01 is set to 1 or 2.
• If parameters are changed via serial communication the parameters can not be changed from the digital operator until
an Enter command is received from the serial communication.
■ A1-02: Control Mode Selection
Selects the Control Method of the drive.
Note: 1. Auto-Tuning must be performed on the motor when A1-02 = 2, 5.
2. This parameter is not reset when the drive is initialized using parameter A1-03.

A1-02 Control Method Selection 0, 2, 5 0
Setting 0: V/f Control

• For general-purpose and multiple motor applications.
• For use when the motor parameters are unknown and Auto-tuning can not be performed.
Setting 2: Open Loop Vector
• For general, variable-speed applications.
• For applications requiring precise speed control, quick response, and higher torque at low speeds.
Setting 5: PM Open Loop Vector
For operating SPM, IPM, and various permanent magnet motors. Takes advantage of Energy Saving features when
operating with derated torque.
■ A1-03: Initialize Parameters
Resets parameter settings back to their original default values. After the initialization the parameter automatically returns
to 0.

A1-03 Initialize Parameters 0, 1110, 2220, 3330, 5550 0
Setting 0: No Initialize
Setting 1110: User Initialize
The modified drive parameters are returned to the values selected as user settings. User settings are stored when
parameter o2-03 = “1: Set Defaults”.
Note: A “user-initialization” resets all parameters to a user-defined set of default values that were previously saved to the drive. To
clear the user-defined default values, set parameter o2-03 to “2”.
Setting 2220: 2-Wire Initialization
Resets all parameters back to their original default settings with digital inputs S1 and S2 configured as forward run and
reverse run, respectively. A 2-wire sequence assigns functions to input terminals S1 and S2. Refer to page 172 for more
information.
Setting 3330: 3-Wire Initialization
The drive parameters are returned to factory default values with digital inputs S1, S2, and S5 configured as run, stop, and
forward/reverse respectively. A 3-wire sequence assigns functions to terminals S1, S2, and S5. Refer to page 167 for
more information.
Setting 5550: oPE04 Reset
If parameters on a certain drive have been edited and then a different terminal block is installed with different settings
saved in its built-in memory, an oPE04 error will appear on the display. To use the parameter settings saved to the
Parameter Details
terminal block memory, set A1-02 to “5550”.
Notes on Parameter Initialization
The parameters shown in Table 5.1 will not be reset when the drive is initialized by setting A1-03 = 2220 or 3330. The
fault history will not be reset when the drive is initialized by A1-03 = 2220 or 3330. The control mode in A1-02 is not
reset when A1-03 is set to 2220 or 3330. 5
Table 5.1 Parameters not Changed by Drive Initialization
No. Parameter Name
A1-00 Language Selection
A1-02 Control Method Selection
E5-01 PM Motor Code Selection
E5-02 Motor Rated Capacity (for PM motors)
E5-03 Motor Rated Current (for PM motors)
E5-04 Motor Poles (for PM motors)
E5-05 Motor Armature Resistance (for PM motors)
E5-06 Motor d Axis Inductance (for PM motors)
E5-07 Motor q Axis Inductance (for PM motors)
E5-09 Motor Induction Voltage Constant 1 (for PM motors)
No. Parameter Name

E5-24 Motor Induction Voltage Constant 2 (for PM motors)
o2-04 Drive/kVA Selection
L8-35 Installation Selection
■ A1-04, A1-05: Password and Password Setting

A1-04 is for entering the password when the drive is locked. A1-05 is a hidden parameter used to set the password.

A1-04 Password
0 to 9999 0
A1-05 Password Setting
How to use the Password

The user can set a password for the drive to restrict access. The password is set to A1-05 and must be entered to A1-04 to
unlock parameter access. Until the correct password is entered, the following parameters cannot be viewed or edited: A1-
01, A1-02, A1-03, and A2-01 through A2-33.
The instructions below demonstrate how to set a new password. Here, the password set is “1234”. An explanation
follows on how to enter the password to unlock the parameters.
Table 5.2 Setting the Password for Parameter Lock
Step Display/Result
2. Scroll to the Parameter Setup display and press .
3. Scroll to the right by pressing .
4. Select the flashing digits by pressing .
5. Select A1-04 by pressing .
Press the key while holding down at the same time. A1-05 will appear.
6. Note: A1-05 is normally hidden, but can be displayed by following the directions listed
here. “05” flashes
7. Press the key.
8. Use , and to enter the password.
9. Press to save what was entered.
10. The display automatically returns to the display shown in step 5.
Table 5.3 Check to see if A1-01 is locked (continuing from step 10 above)
Step Display/Result
1. Press to display A1-01.

“01” flashes
2. Press to display the value set to A1-01.
3. Press and , making sure that the setting values cannot be changed.
4. Press to return to the first display.
Table 5.4 Enter the Password to Unlock Parameters (continuing from step 4 above)
Step Display/Result
1. Press to enter the parameter setup display.
2. Press to select the flashing digits as shown.

“01” flashes
3. Press to scroll to A1-04.
4. Enter the password “1234”.
5. Press to save the new password.
6. Drive returns to the parameter display.
7. Press and scroll to A1-01.
8. Press to display the value set to A1-01. If the first "0" blinks, parameter settings
are unlocked.
9. Use and to change the value if desired. This is not typical.
10. Press to save the setting, or to return to the previous display without saving
changes.
11. The display automatically returns to the parameter display.
Note: Parameter settings can be edited after entering the correct password. Performing a 2-Wire or 3-Wire initialization resets the
password to “0000”. Reenter the password to parameter A1-05 after drive initialization.
◆ A2: User Parameters

■ A2-01 to A2-32: User Parameters 1 to 32
The user can select 32 parameters and assign them to A2-01 through A2-32. This saves time later scrolling through the
parameter menu. The list of User Parameters can also track the most recently edited settings and save those parameters to
this list.
Parameter Details
A2-01 to A2-32 User Parameters 1 to 32 A1-00 to o2-08 –
Saving User Parameters

To save specific parameters to A2-01 to A2-32, first set the access level to allow access to all parameters (A1-02 = 2).
Next assign the parameter number to the User Parameters list by entering it into one of the A2- parameters. By then
setting A1-01 to “1”, the access level can be restricted so that users can only set and reference the specific parameters 5
saved as User Parameters.
■ A2-33: User Parameter Automatic Selection
A2-33 determines whether or not parameters that have been edited are saved to the User Parameters (A2-17 to A2-32) for
quick, easy access.

A2-33 User Parameter Automatic Selection 0 or 1 1
Setting 0: Do not save list of recently viewed parameters.

To manually select the parameters listed in the User Parameter group, set A2-33 to “0”.
Setting 1: Save history of recently viewed parameters.

By setting A2-33 to 1, all parameters that were recently edited will be automatically saved to A2-17 through A2-32. A
total of 16 parameters are saved in order with the most recently edited parameter set to A2-17. User parameters can be
accessed using the Setup mode of the digital operator.
5.2 b: Application
5.2 b: Application
Application parameters configure the source of the frequency reference, the Run command, DC Injection Braking, Speed
Search, various timer functions, PID control, the Dwell function, Energy Savings and a variety of other application-
related settings.
◆ b1: Operation Mode Selection

■ b1-01: Frequency Reference Source 1
Use parameter b1-01 to select the frequency reference source 1 for the REMOTE mode.
Note: 1. If a Run command is input to the drive but the frequency reference entered is 0 or below the minimum frequency, the RUN indicator
LED on the digital operator will light and the STOP indicator will flash.
2. Press the LO/RE key to set the drive to LOCAL and use the operator keypad to enter the frequency reference.

b1-01 Frequency Reference Source 1 0 to 4 1
Setting 0: Operator Keypad

Using this setting, the frequency reference can be input by:
• Switching between the multi-speed references in the d1- parameters.
• Entering the frequency reference on the operator keypad.
Setting 1: Terminals (Analog Input Terminals)
Using this setting, an analog frequency reference can be entered from:
• Terminal A1 using a 0 to 10 Vdc signal.
• Terminal A2 using either a 0 to 10 Vdc or a 0/4 to 20 mA signal.
Note: Terminal A2 supports voltage and current input. The input signal type must be set up by setting DIP switch S1 and adjusting
parameter H3-09. Refer to H3-09: Terminal A2 Signal Level Selection on page 186.
Entering only the main frequency reference:

Using Control Circuit Terminal A1 (0 to 10 Vdc voltage input):
Use a circuit such as the one shown in Figure 5.1 or an external 0 to 10 Vdc voltage source like a PLC analog output and
set the input level selection for A1 in parameter H3-02 as desired. Refer to H3-02: Terminal A1 Function Selection on
page 185.
Figure 5.1
Parameter Details
Figure 5.1 Setting the Frequency Reference by Voltage Input

• Using Control Circuit Terminal A2 (0 to 10 Vdc voltage input)
Use the same connection like explained for terminal A1 for terminal A2. Make sure that switch S1 is set to “V” and
set the appropriate signal level for terminal A2 by entering 0 or 1 into parameter H3-09. The terminal A2 function
must be set to frequency bias by entering 0 into parameter H3-10 (Refer to H3-10: Terminal A2 Function Selection
on page 187).
5.2 b: Application
• Using Control Circuit Terminal A2 (0/4 to 20 mA current input)

Connect input A2 to an external current source such as the one shown in Figure 5.2. Make sure that switch S1 is set
to “I” and set the appropriate signal level for terminal A2 by entering 2 (4 to 20 mA) or 3 (0 to 20 mA) into parameter
H3-09. The terminal A2 function must be set to frequency bias by entering 0 into parameter H3-10 (Refer to H3-10:
Terminal A2 Function Selection on page 187).
Figure 5.2
DIP switch S1
V I Drive
+V (+10.5 V, 20 mA power supply)
A1 Frequency reference
0 or 4 to 20 mA input
A2 Frequency reference bias
AC Analog common
Figure 5.2 Setting the Frequency Reference by Current Input

Switching between Main/Auxiliary Frequency References
The frequency reference input can be switched between terminal A1 (main) and terminal A2 (auxiliary). When using this
function:
• Make sure that b1-01 is set to “1” (Frequency reference from analog input terminal A1, A2).
• Set the terminal A2 function to auxiliary frequency (H3-10 = 2).
• Set one digital input to multi-speed 1 (H1- = 3, default for S5).
The frequency reference value is read from
• Terminal A1 when the digital input set for multi-speed 1 is open.
• Terminal A2 when the digital input set for multi-speed 1 is closed.
Figure 5.2 shows a wiring example for main/auxiliary reference switching using digital input S5.
Figure 5.3
Figure 5.3 Switching between Analog Reference 1 and 2

Setting 2: MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications
This setting requires that the frequency reference is entered via the RS-485/422 serial communications port (control
terminals R+, R-, S+, S-, Protocol: MEMOBUS/Modbus). For instructions, Refer to MEMOBUS/Modbus
Configuration on page 392.
5.2 b: Application
Setting 3: Option Card

This setting requires that the frequency reference is entered via an option board plugged into connector CN2 on the drive
control board. Consult the manual supplied with the option board for instructions on integrating the drive with the
communication system.
Note: If the frequency reference source is set for an option PCB (b1-01 = 3) but an option board is not installed in CN2, an oPE05
Programming Error will be displayed on the digital operator and the RUN command will not be accepted.
Setting 4: Pulse Train Input
If b1-01 is set to 4 the frequency reference must be provided by a pulse train signal at terminal RP that complies with the
following specification.
Pulse Train Input Specifications

Response Frequency 0.5 to 32 kHz
Duty Cycle 30 to 70%
High Level Voltage 3.5 to 13.2 V
Low Level Voltage 0.0 to 0.8 V
Input Impedance 3 kΩ
Verifying Pulse Train is Working Properly

• Make sure that b1-04 is set to 4 and H6-01 is set to 0.
• Set the pulse input scaling H6-02 to the pulse train frequency value that equals 100% frequency reference.
• Enter a pulse train signal to terminal RP and check if the correct frequency reference is displayed. Try also with
different pulse train input frequencies.
■ b1-02: Run Command Source 1
Parameter b1-02 determines the Run and Stop command source 1 in the REMOTE mode.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Clear personnel, secure equipment, and check sequence and safety circuitry before starting
the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from moving equipment.

b1-02 Run Command Source 1 0 to 3 1
Setting 0: Operator
Using this setting, the RUN and STOP keys on the operator keypad will start and stop the motor. The LED in the LO/RE
key will be on to indicate that the Run command is assigned to the operator. The example below shows how the drive can
be operated if b1-02 is set to 0.
Parameter Details
Step Display/Result
2. Set the frequency reference to F6.00 (6 Hz).

5
3. Press the key to start the motor. The RUN indicator LED will light and the motor STOP
will begin rotating at 6 Hz.
off on
4. Press the key to stop the motor. The RUN light will flash until the motor comes to a
complete stop. flashing off
5.2 b: Application
Setting 1: Control Circuit Terminal

This setting requires that the Run and Stop commands are entered from the digital input terminals. The following
sequences can be used:
• 2-Wire sequence 1:
Two inputs (FWD/Stop-REV/Stop). Initializing the drive by setting A1-01 = 2220, presets the terminals S1 and S2 to
these functions. This is the default setting of the drive. Refer to Setting 40/41: Forward Run/Reverse Run Command
for 2-Wire Sequence on page 172.
• 2-Wire sequence 2:
Two inputs (Start/Stop-FWD/REV). Refer to Setting 42/43: Run and Direction Command for 2-Wire Sequence 2 on
page 173.
• 3-Wire sequence:
Inputs S1, S2, S5 (Start-Stop-FWD/REV). Initialize the drive by setting A1-01 = 3330 presets the terminals S1, S2 and
S5 to these functions. Refer to Setting 0: 3-Wire Sequence on page 167.
Setting 2: MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications
To issue a Run command via serial communications, set b1-02 to “2” and connect the RS-485/422 serial communication
cable to R+, R-, S+, and S- on the removable terminal block. Refer to MEMOBUS/Modbus Configuration on page 392.
Setting 3: Option Card
To issue the Run command via the communication option board, set b1-02 to “3” and plug a communication option board
into the CN2 port on the control PCB. Refer to the manual supplied with the option board for instructions on integrating
the drive into the communication system.
Note: If b1-01 is set to 3, but an option board is not installed in CN2, an oPE05 operator programming error will be displayed on the
digital operator and the drive will not run.
■ b1-03: Stopping Method Selection

Select how the drive stops the motor when a Stop command is entered or when the Run command is removed.

b1-03 Stopping Method Selection 0 to 3 0
Setting 0: Ramp to Stop

When a Stop command is issued or the Run command is removed, the drive will decelerate the motor to stop. The
deceleration rate is determined by the active deceleration time. The default deceleration time is set to parameter C1-02.
DC Injection braking (for IM control) or Short Circuit Braking (PM Open Loop Vector) can be applied at the end of the
ramp in order to completely stop high inertia loads. Refer to b2: DC Injection Braking on page 120 for details.
Figure 5.4
Run Command
ON OFF
Maximum
Output Frequency
Decelerates according to the

specified deceleration time
Zero Speed Level
(b2-01)
Decel Time
(C1-02, etc.)
DC Injection
Current (b2-02)
DC Braking Time at Stop (b2-04)
Figure 5.4 Ramp to Stop

Setting 1: Coast to Stop
When a Stop command is issued or the Run command is removed, the drive will shut off its output and the motor will
coast (uncontrolled deceleration) to stop where the stopping time is determined by the inertia and the friction in the
driven system.
5.2 b: Application
Figure 5.5
Run
Command ON OFF
Output
Frequency
Drive output frequency is shut off
Motor rpm
Figure 5.5 Coast to Stop

Note: After a stop is initiated, any subsequent Run command that is entered will be ignored until the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-
03) has expired. Do not attempt to start the motor again until it has come to a complete stop. To start the motor before it has
stopped completely, use DC Injection at start (Refer to b2-03: DC Injection Braking Time at Start on page 121) or Speed Search
(Refer to b3: Speed Search on page 122).
Setting 2: DC Injection Braking to Stop
When the Run command is removed, the drive will baseblock (turn off its output) for the minimum baseblock time (L2-
03). Once the minimum baseblock time has expired, the drive will brake the motor by injecting DC current into the motor
windings. The stopping time will be reduced as compared to coast to stop. The level of DC Injection current is set by
parameter b2-02 (default = 50%).
Note: This function is not available when using PM Open Loop Vector.
Figure 5.6
Run Command
ON OFF
Output Frequency
Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)
DC Injection Braking DC Braking

Time at Stop Current (b2-02)
Motor Speed (b2-04)*
Figure 5.6 DC Injection Braking to Stop
Parameter Details
The time for DC Injection Braking is determined by the value set to b2-04 and by the output frequency at the time the
Run command is removed. It can be calculated by:
b2-04 • 10 • Output frequency

DC Injection brake time = Max. output frequency (E1-04)
Figure 5.7 5
DC Injection braking time
b2-04× 10
b2-04
Output frequency when 100%

10%
Stop command was entered (Maximum output
frequency)
Figure 5.7 DC Injection Braking Time Depending on Output Frequency

Note: If an overcurrent (oC) fault occurs during DC Injection Braking to stop, lengthen the minimum baseblock time (L2-03) until the
fault no longer occurs.
5.2 b: Application
Setting 3: Coast to Stop with Timer

When the Run command is removed, the drive will turn off its output and the motor will coast to stop. If a Run command
is input before the operation wait time t expires, the drive will not rotate the motor and the Run command will need to be
cycled before operation can occur.
Figure 5.8
Run Command
ON OFF ON OFF ON
Output Frequency
Drive output voltage

interrupted
Operation Wait Time t
Figure 5.8 Coast to Stop with Timer

The operation wait time t is determined by the output frequency when the Run command is removed and by the active
deceleration time.
Figure 5.9
Operation wait time t
Selected
decel time
Minimum
Baseblock Time
(L2-03)
Min. output Output frequency 100%

frequency when Stop command (Max. output
is entered frequency)
Figure 5.9 Operation Wait Time Depending on Output Frequency
■ b1-04: Reverse Operation Selection

Setting parameter b1-04 to 1 instructs the drive to ignore any Reverse run commands.

b1-04 Reverse Operation Selection 0 or 1 0
Setting 0: Reverse Operation Enabled

Possible to operate the motor in both forward and reverse directions.
Setting 1: Reverse Operation Disabled
Drive disregards a Reverse run command or a negative frequency reference.
■ b1-07: LOCAL/REMOTE Run Selection
The drive has the following three separate control sources that can be switched using digital inputs or the LO/RE key on
the digital operator (for details Refer to Setting 1: LOCAL/REMOTE Selection on page 167, Refer to Setting 2:
External Reference 1/2 Selection on page 167 and Refer to o2-01: LO/RE (LOCAL/REMOTE) Key Function
Selection on page 220):
• LOCAL - The digital operator is used to set the reference and the Run command.
• REMOTE - Reference 1: The settings of b1-01 and b1-02 determine where the frequency reference and Run command
are input from.
• REMOTE - Reference 2: The settings of b1-15 and b1-16 determine where the frequency reference and Run command
are input from.
5.2 b: Application
When switching from LOCAL to REMOTE, or between Reference 1 and Reference 2, the Run command may already be
present at the location the source was switched to. Parameter b1-07 can be used to determine how the Run command is
treated in this case.

b1-07 LOCAL/REMOTE Run Selection 0 or 1 0
Setting 0: Run Command Must Be Cycled

If the Run command is issued differently in the old and new control source (e.g. old - terminals, new - serial
communications) and it is active at the new source when switching takes place, the drive will either not start or it will
stop if it was running before. The Run command has to be cycled to start from the new control source.
Setting 1: Continue Running
If the Run command is active at the new control source, the drive starts or continues running. There is no need to cycle
the Run command.
WARNING! The drive may start unexpectedly if switching control sources when b1-07 = 1. Clear all personnel away from rotating
machinery and electrical connections prior to switching control sources. Failure to comply may cause death or serious injury.
■ b1-08: Run Command Selection while in Programming Mode

As a safety precaution, the drive will not normally respond to a Run input when the digital operator is being used to
adjust parameters in the Programming Mode (Verify Menu, Setup Mode, Parameter Settings Mode, and Auto-Tuning). If
required by the application b1-08 can be used to changed this functionality.

b1-08 Run Command Selection while in Programming Mode 0 to 2 0
Setting 0: Disabled
A Run command is not accepted while the digital operator is in Programming Mode.
Setting 1: Enabled
A Run command is accepted in any digital operator mode.
Setting 2: Prohibit Programming During Run
It is not possible to enter the Programming Mode as long as the drive output is active.
■ b1-14: Phase Order Selection
Sets the phase order for drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3.
Parameter Details
b1-14 Phase Order Selection 0 or 1 0
Setting 0: Standard Phase Order

Setting 1: Switched Phase Order 5
■ b1-15: Frequency Reference Source 2
This frequency reference is enabled when one of the multi-function inputs set for External Reference 1/2 (H1-= 2)
closes. Refer to Setting 1: LOCAL/REMOTE Selection on page 167 for instructions on using an external frequency
reference. Refer to b1-01: Frequency Reference Source 1 on page 113 for details on the frequency reference selection
as governed by parameter b1-01.

b1-15 Frequency Reference Source 2 0 to 4 0
■ b1-16: Run Command Source 2

This Run command source is enabled when one of the multi-function inputs set for External Reference 1/2 (H1- = 2)
closes. Refer to Setting 2: External Reference 1/2 Selection on page 167 for instructions on using an external frequency
5.2 b: Application
reference. Refer to b1-02: Run Command Source 1 on page 115 for details on the Run and Stop command source as
governed by parameter b1-02.

b1-16 Run Command Source 2 0 to 3 0
■ b1-17: Run Command at Power Up

This parameter is used to determine whether an external Run command that is active during power up of the drive will
start the drive or not.

b1-17 Run Command at Power Up 0 or 1 0
Setting 0: Run Command at Power Up is not Issued

The Run command has to be cycled to start the drive.
Note: For safety reasons, the drive is initially set up not to accept a Run command at power up (b1-17 = "0"). If a Run command is
issued at power up, the RUN indicator LED will flash quickly. Change parameter b1-17 to 1 if a Run command active at power
up shall be accepted by the drive.
Setting 1: Run Command and Power Up is Issued
An external Run command active during power up is issued and the drive starts to operate the motor as soon as it gets
ready for operation (i.e. once the internal start up process is complete).
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. If b1-17 is set to 1 and an external Run command is active during power up, the motor will
begin rotating as soon as the power is switched on. Proper precautions must be taken to ensure that the area around the motor is safe
prior to powering up the drive. Failure to comply may cause serious injury.
◆ b2: DC Injection Braking

These parameters determine how the DC Injection Braking/Short Circuit Braking feature operates. Parameters involving
the starting frequency, current level, braking time are located here. The current level for DC Injection at start and stop is
determined by either b2-02 or b2-10, whichever value is greater.
■ b2-01: DC Injection Braking Start Frequency
Active when “Ramp to Stop” is selected as the stopping method (b1-03 = 0). Sets the starting frequency for:
• DC Injection Braking at stop in V/f and OLV control.
• Short Circuit Braking at stop in PM OLV control.

b2-01 DC Injection Braking Start Frequency 0.0 to 10.0 Hz 0.5 Hz
When the output frequency while ramping to stop drops below b2-01, the drive begins DC Injection/Short Circuit
Braking in order to completely stop the motor at the end of deceleration. If b2-01 < E1-09 (Minimum Frequency), then
DC Injection/Short Circuit Braking begins at the frequency set to E1-09.

Determined by A1-02 and on E5-01 in OLV for
E1-09 Minimum Output Frequency 0.0 to 400.0 Hz <1>
PM.
<1> The upper limit for the setting range is determined by E1-04.
Figure 5.10
b2-01 start frequency
output braking time

frequency
b2-04
Figure 5.10 DC Injection Braking during Deceleration
5.2 b: Application
■ b2-02: DC Injection Braking Current

Sets the DC Injection Braking current as a percentage of the drive rated current. If set to larger than 50%, the carrier
frequency is automatically reduced to 1 kHz.

b2-02 DC Injection Braking Current 0 to 75% 50%
The level of DC Injection Braking current affects the strength of the magnetic field attempting to lock the motor shaft.
Increasing the current level will increase the amount of heat generated by the motor windings. This parameter should
only be increased to the level necessary to hold the motor shaft.
■ b2-03: DC Injection Braking Time at Start
Sets the time of DC Injection Braking at start. It can be used to stop a coasting motor before restarting it or to apply a
braking torque at start. Disabled when set to 0.00 s.

b2-03 DC Injection Braking Time at Start 0.00 to 10.00 s 0.00 s <1>
<1> Default setting depends on the control mode selection in parameter A1-02. The value shown here is for V/f Control.
Note: Before starting an uncontrolled rotating motor (e.g. a fan motor driven by windmill effect), DC Injection or Speed Search should
be used to either stop the motor or detect its speed before starting it. Otherwise motor stalling and other faults can occur.
■ b2-04: DC Injection Braking Time at Stop

This parameter works in combination with b2-01, and sets the DC Injection Braking time at stop. Used to completely
stop a motor with high inertia load after ramp down. Increase the setting if the motor tends to coast by inertia after a stop.

b2-04 DC Injection Braking Time at Stop 0.00 to 10.00 s 0.5 s
■ b2-08: Magnetic Flux Compensation Value

Sets the magnetic flux compensation as a percentage of the no-load current value (E2-03) and can be used to increase the
motor flux when the motor is started up.

b2-08 Magnetic Flux Compensation Value 0 to 1000% 0%
Parameter Details
This parameter allows the magnetizing motor flux to be boosted when starting the motor and thereby facilitate a quick
ramp-up of the torque reference and magnetizing current reference in order to reduce motor slip during start. This flux
level will be applied below the minimum output frequency set to E1-09 until the DC Injection time at start (b2-03)
expires. It may be used to compensate for reduced starting torque due to motor circuit inefficiencies.
■ b2-10: DC Injection Braking Current 2
5
Set as a percentage of the drive rated current. If b2-10 is greater than 50%, the carrier frequency is automatically changed
to 1 kHz. Note that the motor rated current limits the amount of current that can be used for DC Injection Braking.
If one of the multi-function input terminals is set for DC Injection Braking 2 (H1- = 60) and that terminal is
activated, then the drive will use the current level set in b2-10 to perform DC Injection Braking.

b2-10 DC Injection Braking Current 2 0 to 100% 50%
■ b2-12: Short Circuit Brake Time at Start

Short-Circuit braking can be used in Open Loop Vector for PM motors. By shorting all three motor phases it produces a
braking torque in the motor and can be used to stop a coasting motor before starting it.
Parameter b2-12 sets the time for Short-Circuit Brake operation at start. Disabled when set to 0.00 s.
5.2 b: Application

b2-12 Short Circuit Brake Time at Start 0.00 to 25.50 s 0.00 s
■ b2-13: Short Circuit Brake Time at Stop

The Short-Circuit braking described for parameter b2-12 can also be applied at the end of deceleration in order to
completely stop high inertia loads. Short circuit braking is initiated when the output frequency falls below the higher of
the values b2-01 and E1-09.
Parameter b2-13 sets the time for Short-Circuit brake operation at stop. Disabled when set to 0.00 s.

b2-13 Short Circuit Brake Time at Stop 0.00 to 25.50 s 0.50 s
◆ b3: Speed Search

The Speed Search function allows the drive to detect the speed of a rotating motor shaft that is driven by external forces
(e.g. fan rotating by windmill effect or motor driven by load inertia). The motor operation can be directly started from the
speed detected without needing to stop the machine before.
Example: When a momentary loss of power occurs, the drive output shuts off. This results in a coasting motor. When
power returns, the drive can find the speed of the coasting motor and restart it directly.
The drive offers two types of Speed Search, Speed Estimation and Current Detection. Both methods are explained below
followed by a description of all relevant parameters.
■ Speed Estimation Type Speed Search (b3-24 = 1)
This method can be used for a single motor connected to a drive. It should not be utilized if the motor is one or more
frame sizes smaller than the drive, at motor speeds above 130 Hz, or when using a single drive to operate more than one
motor.
The Speed Estimation type distinguishes two kinds of operation, Back EMF voltage estimation and DC current injection.
Back EMF Voltage Estimation
This method is used by Speed Search after short Baseblock (e.g. a power loss where the drives CPU kept running and the
Run command was kept active). Here the drive estimates the motor speed by analyzing the back EMF voltage. It outputs
the estimated frequency and increases the voltage using the time constant set in parameter L2-04. After that the motor is
accelerated or decelerated to the frequency reference starting from the detected speed.
Figure 5.11
AC power
supply ON OFF Selected
Starts at the speed frequency
that was detected reference
Output
frequency
Output
current
Several miliseconds
Min. Baseblock Time

b3 -05 <1>
(L2-03)
Figure 5.11 Speed Search after Baseblock

<1> Once AC power is restored, the drive will wait for at least the time set to b3-05. If the power interruption is
longer than the Minimum Baseblock Time L2-03, the drive will wait for b3-05 after the power has returned
before starting Speed Search.
Current Injection
This method is used when there is no detectable back EMF, e.g. after longer power losses, when Speed Search is applied
with the Run command (b3-01 = 1) or if an External Search command is used. It injects the DC current set in b3-06 to the
5.2 b: Application
motor and detects the speed by measuring the current feedback. The drive outputs the detected frequency and increases
the voltage using the time constant set in parameter L2-04. If the resulting current is higher than the level in b3-02 the
output frequency is reduced. When the current becomes lower than b3-02 the motor speed is assumed to be found and the
drive starts to accelerate or decelerate to the frequency reference.
Figure 5.12
Decelerates at the Speed Waits twice as long as L2-04

Search decel time set to b3-03
OFF ON
Run command Frequency reference
set to the drive
Starts at the speed
speed that was detected
Output
frequency
b3-02
Output
current 1.0 s
Min. Baseblock Time (L2-03) <1>
Figure 5.12 Speed Search at Start

<1> The wait time for Speed Search (b3-05) determines the lower limit.
Note: If the Run command is quickly switched off and then back on again when the drive is set to “Coast to stop” as the stopping
method, Speed Search will operate as shown in Figure 5.11.
Notes on Using Speed Estimation Type Speed Search

• Auto-Tuning needs to be first performed if you plan to use Speed Estimation. Perform Auto-Tuning again if the there is
a change in the cable length between the drive and motor.
• Use Current Detection to search for speeds beyond 130 Hz or if the application is running multiple motors from the
same drive, or if the motor is considerably smaller than the capacity of the drive.
• Speed Estimation may have trouble finding the actual speed if the motor cable very long. Current Detection should be
used in such situations.
• Use Current Detection instead of Speed Estimation when operating motors smaller than 1.5 kW. Speed Estimation can
end up stopping smaller motors as it might not be able to detect the speed or rotation direction of such small motors.
• Use Short circuit Braking instead of Speed Estimation when using Open Loop Vector Control for PM motors along
with a fairly long motor cable.
• Use Short circuit Braking instead of Speed Estimation if attempting to find the speed of a motor coasting faster than
120 Hz in Open Loop Vector Control for PM motors.
Parameter Details
■ Current Detection Type Speed Search (b3-24 = 0)
Current Detection Speed Search can be applied to any motor. Be aware that sudden acceleration may occur when using
Current Detection with relatively light loads.
This method detects the motor speed by reducing the output frequency and measuring the current. The frequency
reduction starts from the maximum output frequency or from the set frequency reference. As long as the output 5
frequency is higher than the rotor speed, the slip will cause a high current. The closer the output frequency comes to the
rotor speed, the lower the current draw will be. When the output current drops below the level as set in b3-02, the output
frequency stops decreasing and normal operation resumes.
5.2 b: Application
The following time chart illustrates how Current Detection Speed Search operates after a momentary power loss:
Figure 5.13
Output frequency before Decel time

Waits for twice
momentary power loss set to b3-03
as long as L2-04
AC power
supply ON OFF
Selected
Output frequency
reference
frequency
Speed Search operation
current set to b3-02
Output
current
Min. Baseblock Time (L2-03) b3-05
Figure 5.13 Current Detection Speed Search after Power Loss

Note: After power is restored, the drive waits until the time set to b3-05 has passed before performing Speed Search. Thereby the Speed
Search may start not at the end of L2-03 but even later.
When Speed Search is applied using an external Search command or automatically with the Run command, the drive
waits for the minimum baseblock time L2-03 before Speed Search is started. If L2-03 is smaller than the time set in
parameter b3-05, b3-05 is used as the wait time.
Figure 5.14
Decel time set Waits for twice

set to b3-03 as long as L2-04
OFF ON
Run command
Max. output frequency Selected
or the specified frequency
frequency reference reference
Output
frequency
b3-02
Output current
Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)
Figure 5.14 Current Detection Speed Search at Start or external Speed Search
Note: When the Run command is set the drive waits until the Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05) before Speed Search is performed, even
if the Minimum Baseblock Time is set to smaller values than b3-05.
Notes on Using Current Detection Type Speed Search

• Increase the voltage recovery ramp time set to L2-04 if a Uv1 fault occurs when performing Current Detection Speed
Search.
• Shorten the Speed Search deceleration time set to b3-03 if an oL1 fault occurs while performing Current Detection
Speed Search.
• Current Detection Speed Search is not available when using Open Loop Vector Control for PM motors.
• Increase the minimum baseblock time set to L2-03 if an overcurrent fault occurs when performing Speed Search after
power is restored following a momentary power loss.
■ Activation of Speed Search
Speed Search can be activated as described below. Independent of the activation method the Speed Search type must be
selected in parameter b3-24.
1. Automatically at every Run command (Refer to b3-01: Speed Search Selection at Start on page 125). With this
setting external Speed Search commands are disregarded.
2. By digital inputs:
The following input functions for H1- can be used.
5.2 b: Application
Table 5.5 Speed Search Activation by Digital Inputs

Setting Description b3-24 = 0 b3-24 = 1
Closed: Activate Current Detection Speed
External Search
61 Search from the maximum output frequency
Command 1
(E1-04). Activate Speed Estimation Speed Search
External Search Closed: Activate Current Detection Speed
62
Command 2 Search from the frequency reference.
To activate Speed Search by a digital input the input must always be set together with the Run command.
3. After automatic fault restart
Set the number of maximum fault restarts in parameter L5-01 higher than 0.
4. After momentary power loss
The following parameter settings are necessary:
• Enable Power Loss Ride-Thru selection by setting L2-01 to 1 (enabled) or 2 (enabled during CPU operation). Refer to
L2-01: Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection on page 196.
• Set the number of maximum fault restarts in parameter L5-01 higher than 0.
5. After baseblock is released
The drive will resume the operation starting with Speed Search if the Run command is present and the output
frequency is above the minimum frequency when the Baseblock command (H1- = 8 or 9, N.O. and N.C.,
respectively) is released.
■ b3-01: Speed Search Selection at Start
Selects if Speed Search is automatically performed when a Run command is issued.

b3-01 Speed Search Selection at Start 0 or 1 0
Setting 0: Disabled
Speed Search is not automatically performed. It can be activated using a digital input.
Setting 1: Enabled
Speed Search is performed with every Run command.
■ b3-02: Speed Search Deactivation Current
Sets Speed Search operating current as a percentage of the drive rated current. If the current falls below this level while
performing Current Detection Speed Search then Speed Search will be finished and normal operation will resume.
Normally there is no need to change this setting. If the drive won’t run after a restart, lower this value.
Parameter Details
b3-02 Speed Search Deactivation Current 0 to 200% 120% <1>
<1> Default setting depends on the control mode selection in parameter A1-02. The value shown here is for V/f Control. Refer to Control Mode
Dependent Parameter Default Values on page 375.
■ b3-03: Speed Search Deceleration Time

5
Parameter b3-03 sets the output frequency reduction ramp used by Current Detection Speed Search (b3-24 = 0) and by
the Current Injection Method of Speed Estimation (b3-24 = 1). The time entered into b3-03 will be the time to decelerate
from maximum frequency (E1-04) to minimum frequency (E1-09).

b3-03 Speed Search Deceleration Time 0.1 to 10.0 s 2.0 s
5.2 b: Application
■ b3-04: V/f Gain During Speed Search

In order to lower the output current when performing Speed Search, this parameter determines what percentage the V/f
ratio should be reduced. The output voltage during Speed Search becomes V/f x b3-04.

b3-04 V/f Gain During Speed Search 10 to 100% 100%
■ b3-05: Speed Search Delay Time

In cases where an output contactor is used between the drive and the motor, the contactor must be closed before Speed
Search can be performed. For Speed Search after a momentary power loss, parameter b3-05 can be used to delay the
Speed Search start providing enough time to operate the contactor.
When Speed Search at start is used, b3-05 will serve as the lower limit of the minimum baseblock time (L2-03).

b3-05 Speed Search Delay Time 0.0 to 100.0 s 0.2 s
■ b3-06: Output Current 1 During Speed Search

Sets the current injected to the motor at the beginning of Estimation Type Speed Search as a factor related to motor rated
current set in E2-01 and E4-01. If the motor speed is relatively slow when the drive starts to perform Speed Search after
a long period of baseblock, it may be helpful to increase the setting value. The output current during Speed Search is
automatically limited by the drive rated current. This function has no influence when Current Detection Speed Search is
used (b3-24 = 0).

Determined by
b3-06 Output Current 1 during Speed Search 0.0 to 2.0
o2-04 and C6-01
Note: If Speed Estimation is not working correctly even after adjusting b3-06, try using Current Detection Speed Search instead.
■ b3-10: Speed Search Detection Compensation Gain

This parameter sets the gain for the detected motor speed of the Speed Estimation Speed Search. The drive will start the
motor at the estimated speed multiplied by b3-10. The setting should be increased if an overvoltage fault occurs when the
drive restarts the motor. This function has no influence when Current Detection Speed Search is used (b3-24 = 0).

b3-10 Speed Search Detection Compensation Gain 1.00 to 1.20 1.05
Note: Increase this value if overvoltage occurs when performing Speed Search at start after a relatively long period of baseblock.
■ b3-14: Bi-Directional Speed Search Selection

Sets how the drive determines the motor rotation direction when performing Speed Estimation Speed Search. The setting
has no influence on Current Detection Speed Search (b3-24 = 0).

b3-14 Bi-Directional Speed Search Selection 0 or 1 0
Setting 0: Disabled
The drive uses the frequency reference to determine the direction of motor rotation in order to restart the motor.
Setting 1: Enabled
The drive detects the motor rotation direction in order to restart the motor.
5.2 b: Application
■ b3-17: Speed Search Restart Current Level

If there is a fairly large difference between the estimated frequency and the actual motor speed when performing Speed
Estimation, a large current can flow. This parameter sets the current level at which Speed Estimation is restarted, thus
avoiding overcurrent and overvoltage problems. The parameter is set as a percentage of the drive rated current. This
function has no influence when Current Detection Speed Search is used (b3-24 = 0).

b3-17 Speed Search Restart Current Level 0 to 200% 150%
■ b3-18: Speed Search Restart Detection Time

Sets the time the current must be above the level set in b3-17 before Speed Search is restarted. This function has no
influence when Current Detection Speed Search is used (b3-24 = 0)

b3-18 Speed Search Restart Detection Time 0.00 to 1.00 s 0.10 s
■ b3-19: Number of Speed Search Restarts

Sets the number of times the drive should attempt to find the speed and restart the motor using Speed Estimation Speed
Search. This function has no influence when Current Detection Speed Search is used (b3-24 = 0).

b3-19 Number of Speed Search Restarts 0 to 10 3
■ b3-24: Speed Search Method Selection

Sets the Speed Search method used.
Note: For explanations of the Speed Search methods, Refer to Current Detection Type Speed Search (b3-24 = 0) on page 123 and
Refer to Speed Estimation Type Speed Search (b3-24 = 1) on page 122.

b3-24 Speed Search Method Selection 0 or 1 0
Setting 0: Current Detection Speed Search

Setting 1: Speed Estimation Speed Search
■ b3-25: Speed Search Wait Time
Sets the wait time between Speed Search restarts.
Parameter Details
b3-25 Speed Search Wait Time 0.0 to 30.0 s 0.5 s
◆ b4: Delay Timers 5

The timer function is independent of the drive operation and can be used to delay the switching of a digital output
triggered by a digital input signal. An On-delay and Off-delay can be separately set. The delay timer can help to get rid of
chattering switch noise from sensors.
To enable the timer function, a multi-function input must be set to “Timer input” (H1-=18) and a multi-function
output must be set to “Timer output” (H2-=12). One timer can be used only.
■ b4-01, b4-02: Timer Function On-Delay, Off-Delay Time
b4-01 sets the On-delay time for switching the timer output. b4-02 sets the Off-delay time for switching the timer output.

b4-01 Timer Function On-Delay Time 0.0 to 300.0 s 0.0 s
b4-02 Timer Function Off-Delay Time 0.0 to 300.0 s 0.0 s
5.2 b: Application
■ Timer Function Operation

When the timer function input closes for longer than the value set in b4-01, the timer output switches on. When the timer
function input is open for longer than the value set in b4-02, the timer output function switches off. The following
diagram demonstrates the timer function operation.
Figure 5.15
Multi-function Contact On (Closed)

Input: Timer Function ON ON
Off (Open)
Multi-function Contact
Output: Timer Function ON ON On (Closed)
Off (Open)
b4-01 b4-02 b4-01 b4-02
Figure 5.15 Timer Operation
◆ b5: PID Control

The drive has a built in PID (Proportional + Integral + Derivative) controller that can be used for closed loop control of
system variables such as pressure, temperature etc. The difference between the target and the feedback value (deviation)
is fed into the PID controller. The PID controller adjusts the drive output frequency in order to minimize the deviation,
providing an accurate control of the system variables.
■ P Control
The output of P control is the product of the deviation and the P gain so that it follows the deviation directly and linearly.
With P control only an offset between the target and feedback remains.
■ I Control
The output of I control is the integral of the deviation. It minimizes the offset between target and feedback value that
typically remains when pure P control is used. The integral time (I-time) constant determines how fast the offset is
eliminated.
■ D Control
D control predicts the deviation signal by multiplying its derivative (slope of the deviation) with a time constant and
adding this to the PID input. This way the D portion of a PID controller provides a braking action to the controller
response and can reduce the tendency of oscillations and overshoot.
Be aware that D control tends to amplify noise on the deviation signal, which can result in control instability. D control
should therefore only be used when necessary.
■ PID Operation
To better demonstrate how PID works, the diagram below shows how the PID output changes when the PID input
(deviation) jumps from 0 to a constant level.
Figure 5.16
PID input
Time
PID output
I control
PID Output D control
P control
Time
Figure 5.16 PID Operation
5.2 b: Application
■ Using PID Control

Applications for PID control are listed in the table below.
Application Description Sensors Used

Machinery speed is fed back and adjusted to meet the target value. Synchronous control
Speed Control Tachometer
is performed using speed data from other machinery as the target value
Pressure Maintains constant pressure using pressure feedback. Pressure sensor
Fluid Control Keeps flow at a constant level by feeding back flow data. Flow rate sensor
Temperature Thermocoupler,
Maintains a constant temperature by controlling a fan with a thermostat.
Control Thermistor
■ PID Setpoint Input Methods

When the PID control parameter b5-01 is set to 1 or 2, the frequency reference in b1-01 (or b1-15) becomes the PID
setpoint. If b5-01 is set to 3 or 4, then the PID setpoint can be input from one of the sources in the following table.
Table 5.6 PID Setpoint Sources
PID Setpoint Source Settings
Analog Input A1 Set H3-02 = C
Analog Input A2 Set H3-10 = C
MEMOBUS/Modbus Register 0006H Set Bit 1 in register 000FH to 1 and input the setpoint to register 0006H
Pulse Input RP Set H6-01 = 2
Parameter b5-19 Set parameter b5-18 = 1 and input the PID setpoint to b5-19
Note: A duplicate allocation of the PID setpoint input will result in an OPE alarm.
■ PID Feedback Input Methods

Either one feedback signal can be input for normal PID control or two feedback signals can be input for controlling a
differential process value.
Normal PID Feedback
The PID feedback can be input from one of the sources listed below.
Table 5.7 PID Feedback Sources
PID Feedback Source Settings
Analog Input A1 Set H3-02 = B
Analog Input A2 Set H3-10 = B
Parameter Details
Pulse Input RP Set H6-01 = 1
Note: A duplicate allocation of the PID feedback input will result in an OPE alarm.
Differential Feedback
The second PID feedback signal for differential feedback can come from the sources listed below. The differential
feedback function is automatically enabled when a differential feedback input is assigned.
5
Table 5.8 PID Differential Feedback Sources
PID Differential Feedback Source Settings
Analog Input A1 Set H3-02 = 16
Analog Input A2 Set H3-10 = 16
Note: A duplicate allocation of the PID differential feedback input will result in an OPE alarm.
■
Figure 5.17
130
Frequency Reference
Frequency
Reference PID disable when:
b1-01 - b5-01=0
5.2 b: Application
Frequency Reference 1 to 8 - a JOG Command is Input

0
d1-01 to d1-08 - PID Disable by Digital Input Enabled
RUN
1 + b5-16 On/Off
Analog Input A1/A2 -
PID Block Diagram
2 Delay
Serial Comm Timer
3 b5-15
Option Card
Sleep Level
Pulse Input 4
Sleep Function
Disabled
PID Mode + Output
b5-01 = 1/2 b5-01 = 3/4 + Enabled Frequency
SFS
C1-
PID Target
Upper Limit
b5-18=1 PID Ouput
b5-19 not 1 Fmax x109%
(U5-03)
PID Set Point 0
H3-02/10=C not C
Analog Input A1/A2 PID SFS Cancel DI (U5-04) b5-11
H1-=34 Lower Limit 0 1
H6-01=2 not 2 On
Pulse Input
Enable / Disable Reverse
Off Upper Limit
Reg. 0Fh, bit 1 Operation when PID
MEMOBUS Reg. 0006h Fmax x109%
1 0 Output is Negative
Always 1 when
PID Input b5-01 = 3/4
PID Soft (U5-02) Lower Limit
Starter b5-17 Fmax x109%
Figure 5.17 PID Block Diagram

Proportional I - limit
PID Feedback Gain PID Delay
0 I-time b5-04
b5-02 Time
b5-03 0
+
+ 0 0 + + + 0
Pulse Input not 1 P 1/s b5-08 b5-10
H6-01=1 - 1 + 1 + +
-1 -1
PID Input 1 1 PID Output
Analog Input A1/A2 not B PID Output
H3-02/10=B Limit PID Input Z-1 Gain
Adjusted Integral Hold Integral Reset Upper/Lower b5-07
PID Feedback b5-35 Characteristic H1-=31 Limit PID Output
PID Feedback H1-=30 Characteristic
0 (U5-01) H1-=35 b5-06 / b5-34 PID Offset
(U5-06) b5-09
not 16 + 1 or 3
- +
+ +
b5-05
Analog Input A1/A2
H3-02/10 Derivative + Derivative b5-01
2 or 4
= 16 + Time 2 or 4 Time
b5-05 Z-1
+
PID Differential b5-01
1 or 3
Feedback Z-1
(U5-05)
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710606 38B YASKAWA AC Drive - T1000V Technical Manual
5.2 b: Application
■ b5-01: PID Function Setting

Enables or disables the PID operation and selects the PID operation mode.

b5-01 PID Function Setting 0 to 4 0
Setting 0: PID disabled

Setting 1: Output Frequency = PID Output 1
The PID controller is enabled and the PID output builds the frequency reference. The PID input is D controlled.
Setting 2: Output Frequency = PID Output 2
The PID controller is enabled and the PID output builds the frequency reference. The PID feedback is D controlled.
Setting 3: Output Frequency = Frequency Reference + PID Output 1
The PID controller is enabled and the PID output is added to the frequency reference. D control is applied to the
difference of the feedback value (U5-02) and the setpoint.
Setting 4: Output Frequency = Frequency Reference + PID Output 2
The PID controller is enabled and the PID output is added to the frequency reference. D control is applied to the feedback
value (U5-06).
■ b5-02: Proportional Gain Setting (P)
Sets the P gain that is applied to the PID input. A large value will tend to reduce the error, but may cause instability
(oscillations) if too high. A small value may allow too much offset between the setpoint and feedback.

b5-02 Proportional Gain Setting (P) 0.00 to 25.00 1.00
■ b5-03: Integral Time Setting (I)

Sets the time constant that is used to calculate the integral of the PID input. The smaller the integral time set to b5-03, the
faster the offset will be eliminated. If set too short, it can cause overshoot or oscillations. To turn off the integral time, set
b5-03 = 0.00.

b5-03 Integral Time Setting (I) 0.0 to 360.0 s 1.0 s
Figure 5.18
Parameter Details
No Intregral With Intregral
PID
feedback Setpoint Setpoint Zero
Offset offset with
integral action
Feedback Feedback 5
Time Time
Figure 5.18 Offset Elimination by Integral Operation
■ b5-04: Integral Limit Setting

Sets the maximum output possible from the integral block. Set as a percentage of the maximum frequency (E1-04).

b5-04 Integral Limit Setting 0.0 to 100.0% 100.0%
Note: In case of rapidly varying loads, the output of the PID function may show a fair amount of oscillation. To suppress this
oscillation, a limit can be applied to the integral output by programming b5-04.
5.2 b: Application
■ b5-05: Derivative Time (D)

Sets the time the drive predicts the PID input/PID feedback signal based on the derivative of the PID input/PID feedback.
Longer time settings will improve the response but can cause vibrations. Shorter settings will reduce the overshoot but
also reduce the controller responsiveness. D control is disabled by setting b5-05 to zero seconds.

b5-05 Derivative Time (D) 0.00 to 10.00 s 0.00 s
■ b5-06: PID Output Limit

Sets the maximum output possible from the entire PID controller. Set as a percentage of the maximum frequency (E1-
04).

b5-06 PID Output Limit 0.0 to 100.0% 100.0%
■ b5-07: PID Offset Adjustment

Sets the offset added to the PID controller output. Set as a percentage of the maximum frequency.

b5-07 PID Offset Adjustment -100.0 to 100.0% 0.0%
■ b5-08: PID Primary Delay Time Constant

Sets the time constant for the filter applied to the output of the PID controller. Normally, change is not required.

b5-08 PID Primary Delay Time Constant 0.00 to 10.00 s 0.00 s
Note: Effective in preventing oscillation when there is a fair amount of oscillation or when rigidity is low. Set to a value larger than the
cycle of the resonant frequency. Increasing this time constant reduces the responsiveness of the drive.
■ b5-09: PID Output Level Selection

Normally, the output of the PID function increase whenever the PID input is negative (feedback below setpoint). Using
b5-09 the PID controller can be set up for applications that require opposite operation.

b5-09 PID Output Level Selection 0 or 1 0
Setting 0: Normal Output

A negative PID input causes an increase in the PID output (direct acting).
Setting 1: Reverse Output
A negative PID input causes a decrease in the PID output (reverse acting).
■ b5-10: PID Output Gain Setting
Applies a gain to the PID output and can be helpful when the PID function is used to trim the frequency reference (b5-01
= 3 or 4). Increasing b5-10 causes the PID function to have a greater regulating effect on the frequency reference.

b5-10 PID Output Gain Setting 0.00 to 25.00 1.00
■ b5-11: PID Output Reverse Selection

Determines whether a negative PID output reverses the drive operation direction or not. When the PID function is used to
trim the frequency reference (b5-01 = 3 or 4), this parameter has no effect and the PID output will not be limited (same as
b5-11 = 1).
5.2 b: Application

b5-11 PID Output Reverse Selection 0 or 1 0
Setting 0: Reverse Disabled

Negative PID output will be limited to 0 and the drive output will be stopped.
Setting 1: Reverse Enabled
Negative PID output will cause the drive to run in the opposite direction.
■ PID Feedback Loss Detection
The PID Feedback Loss Detection function can detect broken sensors or broken sensor wiring. It should be used
whenever PID control is enabled to prevent critical machine conditions (e.g. acceleration to max. frequency) caused by a
feedback loss.
Feedback loss can be detected in two ways:
• Feedback Low Detection:
Detected when the feedback falls below a certain level for longer than the specified time.
• Feedback High Detection:
Detected when the feedback rises beyond a certain level for longer than the specified time.
The following figure explains the working principle of feedback loss detection when the feedback signal is too low.
Feedback high detection works in the same way.
Figure 5.19
PID feedback value
PID
Feedback
Detection
Loss Level
(b5-13)
time
no FbL
detection
FbL detection
PID Feedback PID Feedback

Loss Detection Time Loss Detection Time
(b5-14) (b5-14)
Figure 5.19 PID Feedback Loss Detection

The parameters necessary to set up the feedback loss detection are explained below.
Parameter Details
■ b5-12: PID Feedback Loss Detection Selection
Enables or disables the feedback loss detection and sets the operation when a feedback loss is detected.

b5-12 PID Feedback Loss Detection Selection 0 to 5 0 5
Setting 0: Digital Output Only
A digital output set for “PID feedback low” (H2- = 3E) will be triggered if the PID feedback value is below the
detection level set to b5-13 for the time set to b5-14 or longer. A digital output set for “PID feedback high” (H2- =
3F) will be triggered if the PID feedback value is beyond the detection level set to b5-36 for the time set to b5-37 or
longer. Neither a fault nor an alarm is displayed on the digital operator. The drive will continue operation. When the
feedback value leaves the loss detection range, the output is reset.
Setting 1: Feedback Loss Alarm
If the PID feedback value falls below the level set to b5-13 for longer than the time set to b5-14, a “FBL - Feedback
Low” alarm will be displayed and a digital output set for “PID feedback low” (H2- = 3E) will be triggered. If the
PID feedback value exceeds the level set to b5-36 for longer than the time set to b5-37, a “FBH - Feedback High” alarm
will be displayed and a digital output set for “PID feedback high” (H2- = 3F) will be triggered. Both events trigger
5.2 b: Application
an alarm output (H1- = 10). The drive will continue operation. When the feedback value leaves the loss detection
range, the alarm and outputs are reset.
Setting 2: Feedback Loss Fault
If the PID feedback value falls below the level set to b5-13 for longer than the time set to b5-14, a “FBL - Feedback
Low” fault will be displayed. If the PID feedback value exceeds the level set to b5-36 for longer than the time set to b5-
37, a “FBH - Feedback High” fault will be displayed. Both events trigger a fault output (H1- = E) and cause the drive
to stop the motor.
Setting 3: Digital Output Only, Even if PID is Disabled by Digital Input
Same as b5-12 = 0. Detection is still active even if PID is disabled by a digital input (H1- = 19).
Setting 4: Feedback Loss Alarm, Even if PID is Disabled by Digital Input
Setting 5: Feedback Loss Fault, Even if PID is Disabled by Digital Input
■ b5-13: PID Feedback Low Detection Level
Sets the feedback level used for PID feedback low detection. The PID feedback has to fall below this level for longer
than the time b5-14 before feedback loss is detected.

b5-13 PID Feedback Low Detection Level 0 to 100% 0%
■ b5-14: PID Feedback Loss Detection Time

Sets the time that the PID feedback has to fall below b5-13 before feedback loss is detected.

b5-14 PID Feedback Loss Detection Time 0.0 to 25.5 s 1.0 s
■ b5-36: PID Feedback High Detection Level

Sets the feedback level used for PID feedback high detection. The PID feedback has to exceed this level for longer than
the time b5-37 before feedback loss is detected.

b5-36 PID Feedback High Detection Level 0 to 100% 100%
■ b5-37: PID Feedback High Detection Time

Sets the time for that the PID feedback has to exceed b5-36 before feedback loss is detected.

b5-37 PID Feedback High Detection Time 0.0 to 25.5 s 1.0 s
5.2 b: Application
■ PID Sleep
The PID Sleep function stops the drive when the PID output or the frequency reference falls below the PID Sleep
operation level for a certain time. The drive will resume operating once the PID output or frequency reference rises above
the PID Sleep operation level for the specified time. The operation is explained in the figure below.
Figure 5.20
PID Output
PID Sleep Level ( b5-15)
Sleep Delay Time
Internal Run b5-16 b5-16 Sleep Delay Time

command Run Stop
External Run Run command enabled
command Continues to output “During Run”
During Run
Figure 5.20 PID Sleep Operation

Notes on using the PID Sleep function:
• The PID Sleep function is always active, even if PID control is disabled.
• The method the Sleep function uses to stop the motor is defined by parameter b1-03.
• The parameters necessary to set up the PID Sleep function are explained below.
■ b5-15: PID Sleep Function Start Level
Sets the level used for PID Sleep.
The drive goes into Sleep mode if the PID output or frequency reference is smaller than b5-15 for longer than the time set
in b5-16. It resumes the operation when the PID output or frequency reference is above b5-15 for longer than the time set
in b5-16.

b5-15 PID Sleep Function Start Level 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 0.0 Hz
■ b5-16: PID Sleep Delay Time

Sets the delay time to activate or deactivate the PID Sleep function.

b5-16 PID Sleep Delay Time 0.0 to 25.5 s 0.0 s
Parameter Details
■ b5-17: PID Accel/Decel Time
The PID acceleration/deceleration time is applied on the PID setpoint value.
As the normal acceleration times C1- are applied after the PID output, they reduce the responsiveness of the system
and can cause hunting or over- and undershooting when the setpoint changes quickly. Using the PID acceleration/
deceleration time instead helps to avoid such problems.
5
The PID acceleration/deceleration time can be canceled using a digital input programmed for “PID SFS cancel” (H1-
= 34).

b5-17 PID Accel/Decel Time 0 to 255 s 0s
■ b5-18: PID Setpoint Selection

Enables or disables parameter b5-19 for PID setpoint.

b5-18 PID Setpoint Selection 0 or 1 0
5.2 b: Application
Setting 0: Disabled
Parameter b5-19 is not used as the PID setpoint. The setpoint must be entered via an analog input, pulse input, or
MEMOBUS/Modbus register 06H.
Setting 1: Enabled
Parameter b5-19 is used as PID setpoint.
■ b5-19: PID Setpoint Value
Used to adjust the PID setpoint if parameter b5-18 = 1.

b5-19 PID Setpoint Value 0.00 to 100.00% 0.00%
■ b5-20: PID Setpoint Scaling

Determines the units that the PID setpoint (b5-19) is set in and displayed. Also determines the units for monitors U5-01
and U5-04.

b5-20 PID Setpoint Scaling 0 to 3 1
Setting 0: Hz
The setpoint and PID monitors are displayed in Hz with a resolution of 0.01 Hz.
Setting 1: %
The setpoint and PID monitors are displayed as a percentage with a resolution of 0.01%.
Setting 2: r/min
The setpoint and PID monitors are displayed in r/min with a resolution of 1 r/min.
Setting 3: User Defined
The setpoint b5-19 and PID monitors U1-01 and U1-04 are displayed with the unit and resolution defined by parameters
b5-38 and b5-39.
■ b5-34: PID Output Lower Limit
Sets the minimum possible PID controller output as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04). The lower
limit is disabled when set to 0.00%

b5-34 PID Output Lower Limit -100.0 to 100.0% 0.00%
■ b5-35: PID Input Limit

Sets the maximum allowed PID input as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1–04). Parameter b5-35 acts
as a bipolar limit.

b5-35 PID Input Limit 0 to 1000.0% 1000.0%
■ b5-38, b5-39: PID Setpoint User Display, PID Setpoint Display Digits
When parameter b5-20 is set to 3, the parameters b5-38 and b5-39 can be used to set a user defined display for the PID
setpoint (b5-19) and feedback monitors (U5-01 and U5-04).
Parameter b5-38 determines the display value when the maximum frequency is output. Parameter b5-39 determines the
number of digits. The setting value is equal to the number of decimal places.
5.2 b: Application

Determined by
b5-38 PID Setpoint User Display 0 to 60000
b5-20
Determined by
b5-39 PID Setpoint Display Digits 0 to 3
b5-20
■ b5-40: Frequency Reference Monitor Content During PID

Sets the content of the frequency reference monitor display (U1-01) when PID control is active.
Setting 0: Frequency Reference after PID
Monitor U1-01 displays the frequency reference increased or reduced for the PID output.

b5-40 Frequency Reference Monitor Content During PID 0 or 1 0
Setting 1: Frequency Reference

Monitor U1-01 displays the frequency reference value.
◆ b6: Dwell Function

The reference hold or Dwell function is used to temporarily hold the output frequency at a set reference value, for a set
time, and then continue to ramp up or stop.
The Dwell at start function can be used when driving a permanent magnet motor in V/f Control, or a motor with a heavy
starting load. The pause in acceleration allows the PM motor rotor to align with the stator field of the motor, thus
reducing the starting current.
Dwell works as shown in the figure below.
Note: Using the Dwell function requires that the stopping method for the drive be set to “Ramp to Stop” (b1-03 = 0).
Figure 5.21
OFF ON OFF
Run Command
b6-01 b6-03
Output Frequency
Parameter Details
b6-02 b6-04
Figure 5.21 Dwell Function at Start and Stop
■ b6-01, b6-02: Dwell Reference, Time at Start

b6-01 sets the frequency that is kept for the time set in b6-02 during acceleration.
5
b6-01 Dwell Reference at Start 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 0.0 Hz
b6-02 Dwell Time at Start 0.0 to 10.0 s 0.0 s
■ b6-03, b6-04: Dwell Reference, Time at Stop

Parameter b6-03 sets the frequency that is kept for the time set in b6-04 during deceleration.

b6-03 Dwell Reference at Stop 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 0.0 Hz
b6-04 Dwell Time at Stop 0.0 to 10.0 s 0.0 s
5.2 b: Application
◆ b8: Energy Saving

The Energy Saving feature improves overall system operating efficiency by operating the motor at its most efficient
level. This is accomplished by continuously monitoring the motor load and controlling the motor so that it always
operates near its rated slip frequency.
Note: Energy Saving is mainly designed for applications with variable torque (Normal Duty) but is not appropriate for applications
where the load may suddenly increase.
■ b8-01: Energy Saving Control Selection

Enables or disables the Energy Saving function.

b8-01 Energy Saving Control Selection 0 or 1 0
Setting 0: Disabled
Setting 1: Enabled
■ b8-02: Energy Saving Gain (OLV only)
Sets the gain that is used to for magnetizing current reduction during Energy Saving. A higher value results in lower
magnetization of the motor and thereby less energy consumption. However, if b8-02 is too high the motor might stall.

b8-02 Energy Saving Gain 0.00 to 10.0 0.7 s
■ b8-03: Energy Saving Control Filter Time Constant (OLV only)

Parameter b8-03 sets the response time for Energy Saving. Although lowering this value allows for a quicker response,
instability may result if it is too low.

b8-03 Energy Saving Control Filter Time Constant 0.00 to 10.00 s 0.50 s
■ b8-04: Energy Saving Coefficient Value (V/f Control)

Parameter b8-04 is used to fine tune the Energy Saving control. The default setting depends on the capacity of the drive.
The value can be optimized in small amounts while viewing the output power monitor (U1-08) and running the drive.
A smaller value results in less output voltage and less energy consumption, but a too small value will cause the motor to
stall.

Determined by
b8-04 Energy Saving Coefficient Value 0.00 to 655.00 C6-01, E2-11, and
o2-04
Note: This default value changes if the motor rated capacity set to E2-11 is changed. The Energy Saving coefficient is set automatically
when Auto-Tuning for Energy Saving is performed (Refer to T: Motor Tuning on page 235).
■ b8-05: Power Detection Filter Time (V/f Control only)

The Energy Saving function continuously searches out the lowest output voltage in order to achieve minimum output
power. Parameter b8-05 determines how often the output power is measured and the output voltage is adjusted.

b8-05 Power Detection Filter Time 0 to 2000 ms 20 ms
5.2 b: Application
■ b8-06: Search Operation Voltage Limit (V/f Control only)

Sets the voltage limit for the optimal output voltage detection of Speed Search as a percentage of the maximum output
voltage. During the search operation the drive will keep the output voltage above this level to prevent motor stalling.
Note: If set too low, the motor may stall with a sudden increase to the load. Disabled when b8-06 = 0. Setting this value to 0 does not
disable Energy Saving.

b8-06 Search Operation Voltage Limit 0 to 100% 0%
■ Parameters Related to the Energy Saving Function

Open Loop Vector Control

E2-02 <1> Motor Rated Slip 0.00 to 20.00 <2>, <3>
<1> Automatically set when Rotational Auto-Tuning is performed.

<2> Default setting is determined by drive capacity (o2-04).
<3> Default setting is determined by C6-01.
V/f Control

E2-11 <1> Motor Rated Capacity 0.00 to 650.00 kW <2>, <3>
<1> Automatically set when Auto-Tuning is performed.

<2> Default setting is determined by drive capacity (o2-04).
<3> Default setting is determined by C6-01.
Parameter Details
5.3 C: Tuning
5.3 C: Tuning
C parameters are used to set the acceleration and deceleration characteristics, as well as S-curves. Other parameters in
this group cover settings for slip compensation, torque compensation, and carrier frequency.
◆ C1: Acceleration and Deceleration Times

■ C1-01 to C1-08: Accel, Decel Times 1 to 4
Four different sets of acceleration and deceleration times can be set in the drive. They can be selected by digital inputs,
by the motor selection, or can be switched automatically. Acceleration time parameters always set the time to accelerate
from 0 to the maximum output frequency (E1-04). Deceleration time parameters always set the time to decelerate from
maximum output frequency to 0. C1-01 and C1-02 are the default active accel/decel settings.

C1-01 Acceleration Time 1
C1-02 Deceleration Time 1
C1-03 Acceleration Time 2
C1-04 Deceleration Time 2
0.0 to 6000.0 s <1> 10.0 s
C1-05 Acceleration Time 3 (Motor 2 Accel Time 1)
C1-06 Deceleration Time 3 (Motor 2 Decel Time 1)
C1-07 Acceleration Time 4 (Motor 2 Accel Time 2)
C1-08 Deceleration Time 4 (Motor 2 Accel Time 2)
<1> The setting range for the acceleration and deceleration times is determined by C1-10 (Accel/Decel Time Setting Units). For example, if the
time is set in units of 0.01 s (C1-10 = 0), the setting range becomes 0.00 to 600.00 s.
Switching Acceleration Times by Digital Input

Accel/decel times 1 are active by default if no input is set. The accel/decel times 2, 3 and 4 can be activated by digital
inputs (H1-= 7 and 1A) as explained in Table 5.9.
Table 5.9 Accel/Decel Time Selection by Digital Input
Accel/Decel Time Sel. 1 Accel/Decel Time Sel. 2 Active Times

H1- = 7 H1- = 1A Acceleration Deceleration
0 0 C1-01 C1-02
1 0 C1-03 C1-04
0 1 C1-05 C1-06
1 1 C1-07 C1-08
Figure 5.22 shows an operation example for changing accel/decel. times. The example below requires that the stopping
method be set for "Ramp to Stop" (b1-03 = 0).
Figure 5.22
Decel Time 1 Decel Time 3

(C1-02) Decel Time 2 Decel Time 4
Accel Time 3 (C1-06)
Accel Time 1 Accel Time 2 (C1-04) (C1-05) (C1-08)
Output (C1-01) (C1-03) Accel Time 4 Decel Time 1
frequency (C1-07)
Decel Time 1 (C1-02)
(C1-02)
Time
ON OFF ON ON OFF ON
FWD (REV)
Run command
ON OFF ON
Accel/Decel Time Selection 1
(Terminals S3 to S8, H1- = “7”)
ON
Accel/Decel Time Selection 2
(Terminals S3 to S8, H1- = “1A”)
Figure 5.22 Timing Diagram of Accel/Decel Time Change
5.3 C: Tuning
Switching Accel/decel Times by a Frequency Level

The drive can automatically switch from accel/decel times 4 (C1-07 and C1-08) to the default accel/decel times (C1-01
and C1-02 for motor 1, C1-05 and C1-06 for motor 2) when the output frequency exceeds the frequency level set in
parameter C1-11. When it falls below this level, the accel/decel times are switched back. Figure 5.23 shows an operation
example.
Note: Acceleration and deceleration times selected by digital inputs have priority over the automatic switching by a frequency level.
For example, if accel/decel time 2 is selected, the drive will use this time only and not switch from accel/decel time 4 to the
selected one.
Figure 5.23
Output Frequency
C1-11
Accel/Decel Time
Switch Frequency
C1-07 C1-01 C1-02 C1-08

setting setting setting setting
When the output frequency≥C1-11, drive uses Accel/Decel Time 1 (C1-01 and C1-02)
When the output frequency<C1-11, drive uses Accel/Decel Time 2 (C1-07 and C1-08)
Figure 5.23 Accel/Decel Time Switching Frequency

Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Times by Motor Selection
When switching between motor 1 and 2 using a digital input (H1- = 16) parameters C1-01 to C1-04 become accel/
decel time 1/2 for motor 1 and C1-05 to C1-08 become accel/decel time 1/2 for motor 2. In this case the digital input
“Accel/Decel Time 2 Selection” can not be used.
Table 5.10 explains the activation of accel/decel times depending on the motor selection and accel/decel time selection.
Table 5.10 Motor Switching and Accel/Decel Time Combinations
Motor 1 Selected Motor 2 Selected
Accel/Decel Time 1 (H1- = 7)
Accel Decel Accel Decel
Open C1-01 C1-02 C1-05 C1-06
Closed C1-03 C1-04 C1-07 C1-08
■ C1-09: Fast Stop Time

Parameter C1-09 will set a special deceleration that is used when certain faults occur or that can be operated by closing a
digital input configured as H1- = 15 (N.O. input) or H1- = 17 (N.C. input). The input does not have to be closed
continuously, even a momentary closure will trigger the Fast-stop operation.
Unlike standard deceleration, once the Fast-stop operation is initiated, the drive cannot be restarted until the deceleration
is complete, the Fast-stop input is cleared, and the Run command is cycled.
Parameter Details
A digital output programmed for “During Fast-stop” (H2-01, H2-02, H2-03 = 4C) will be closed as long as Fast-stop is
active.

C1-09 Fast Stop Time 0.0 to 6000.0 s <1> 10.0 s
<1> The setting range for the acceleration and deceleration times is determined by C1-10 (Accel/Decel Time Setting Units). For example, if the
5
time is set in units of 0.01 s (C1-10 = 0), the setting range becomes 0.00 to 600.00 s
NOTICE: Rapid deceleration can trigger an overvoltage fault. When faulted, the drive output shuts off, and the motor coasts. To avoid
this uncontrolled motor state and to ensure that the motor stops quickly and safely, set an appropriate Fast-stop time to C1-09.
■ C1-10: Accel/Decel Time Setting Units

Determines the units for the acceleration and deceleration times set to C1-01 through C1-09 using parameter C1-10.

C1-10 Accel/Decel Time Setting Units 0 or 1 1
Setting 0: 0.01 s Units

The accel/decel. times are set in 0.01 s units. The setting range will be 0.00 to 600.00 s. If any of the parameters C1-01 to
C1-09 is set to 600.1 seconds or more, then C1-10 cannot be set to 0.
5.3 C: Tuning
Setting 1: 0.1 s Units

The accel/decel. times are set in 0.1 s units. The setting range will be 0.0 to 6000.0 s.
■ C1-11: Accel/Decel Switching Frequency
Sets the switching frequency for automation accel/decel. time change over. Refer to Switching Accel/decel Times by a
Frequency Level on page 141.

C1-11 Accel/Decel Switching Frequency 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 0.0 Hz
Note: Setting C1-11 to 0.0 Hz disables this function.
◆ C2: S-Curve Characteristics

Use S-curve characteristics to smooth acceleration and deceleration and to minimize abrupt shock to the load. Set S-
curve characteristic time during acceleration/deceleration at start and acceleration/deceleration at stop. If a STo fault
(Hunting Detection 2) occurs when starting a PM motor, try increasing the value set to C2-01.
■ C2-01 to C2-04: S-Curve Characteristics
C2-01 through C2-04 set separate S-curves for each section of the acceleration or deceleration.

C2-01 S-Curve Characteristic at Accel Start 0.20 s <1>
C2-02 S-Curve Characteristic at Accel End
0.00 to 10.00 s 0.20 s
C2-03 S-Curve Characteristic at Decel Start
C2-04 S-Curve Characteristic at Decel End 0.00 s
Figure 5.24 explains how S-curves are applied.

Figure 5.24
FWD run
REV run
C2-02 C2-04
C2-03
Output
frequency C2-01
C2-01 C2-04
C2-02 C2-03
Figure 5.24 S-Curve Timing Diagram - FWD/REV Operation
Setting the S-curve will increase the acceleration and deceleration times.
Actual accel time = accel time setting + (C2-01 + C2-02)/2
Actual decel time = decel time setting + (C2-03 + C2-04)/2
◆ C3: Slip Compensation

The Slip Compensation function prevents motor speed loss due to an increase in load.
Note: Before making changes to the Slip Compensation parameters, make sure the motor parameters and V/f pattern are set properly or
perform Auto-Tuning.
5.3 C: Tuning
■ C3-01: Slip Compensation Gain

This parameter sets the gain for the motor slip compensation function. Although this parameter rarely needs to be
changed, adjustments might be needed under the following situations:
• If the speed at constant frequency reference is lower than the frequency reference, increase C3-01.
• If the speed at constant frequency reference is higher than the frequency reference, decrease C3-01.

C3-01 Slip Compensation Gain 0.0 to 2.5 0.0 <1>
Note: This parameter is disabled when using V/f Control with Simple PG Feedback (H6-01 = 3).
■ C3-02: Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time

Adjusts the filter on the output of the slip compensation function. Although this parameter rarely needs to be changed,
adjustments might be needed under the following situations:
• Decrease the setting when the slip compensation response is too slow.
• Increase this setting when the speed is not stable.

C3-02 Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time 0 to 10000 ms 2000 ms <1>
Note: This function is not available when using V/f Control with Simple PG Feedback.
■ C3-03: Slip Compensation Limit

Sets the upper limit for the slip compensation function as a percentage of the motor rated slip (E2-02).

C3-03 Slip Compensation Limit 0 to 250% 200%
The slip compensation limit is constant throughout the constant torque range. In the constant power range it is increased
based on C3-03 and the output frequency as shown in the following diagram.
Note: This parameter is disabled when using V/f Control with Simple PG Feedback Control (H6-01 = 3).
Figure 5.25
Parameter Details
E1-04
E1-06 × C3-03
C3-03
output frequency
E1-06
Base
E1-04
Maximum
5
Frequency Frequency
Figure 5.25 Slip Compensation Limit
■ C3-04: Slip Compensation Selection during Regeneration

When the slip compensation during regeneration function has been activated and regenerative load is applied, it might be
necessary to use a braking option (braking resistor, braking resistor unit, or braking unit).
Even if enabled, this function does not operate when the output frequency is too low.

C3-04 Slip Compensation Selection during Regeneration 0 or 1 0
5.3 C: Tuning
Setting 0: Disabled
Slip compensation is not provided. Depending on the load and operation mode (motoring or regenerative) the actual
motor speed will be lower or higher than the frequency reference.
Setting 1: Enabled
Slip compensation is enabled during regenerative operation. It will not be active at output frequencies below 6 Hz.
■ C3-05: Output Voltage Limit Operation Selection
Determines if the motor flux reference is automatically reduced when output voltage reaches the saturation range.

C3-05 Output Voltage Limit Operation Selection 0 or 1 0
Setting 0: Disabled
Setting 1: Enabled
◆ C4: Torque Compensation

The torque compensation function compensates for insufficient torque production at start-up or when a load is applied.
Note: Before making changes to the torque compensation parameters make sure the motor parameters and V/f pattern are set properly
or perform Auto-Tuning.
■ C4-01: Torque Compensation Gain

Sets the gain for the torque compensation function.

C4-01 Torque Compensation Gain 0.00 to 2.50 1.00 <1>
Torque Compensation in V/f Control:

The drive calculates the motor primary voltage loss using the output current and the terminal resistance value (E2-05)
and then adjusts the output voltage to compensate insufficient torque at start or when load is applied. The effect of this
voltage compensation can be increased or decreased using parameter C4-01.
Torque Compensation in Open Loop Vector Control:
The drive controls the motor excitation current and torque producing current separately. Torque compensation affects the
torque producing current only. C4-01 works as a factor of the torque reference value that builds the torque producing
current reference.
Adjustment
Although this parameter rarely needs to be adjusted, small changes in increments of 0.05 may help in the following
situations:
• Increase this setting when using a long motor cable.
• Decrease this setting when motor oscillation occurs.
Adjust C4-01 so that the output current does not exceed the drive rated current.
■ C4-02: Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time 1
Sets the delay time used for applying torque compensation.

C4-02 Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time 1 0 to 60000 ms 200 ms <1>
5.3 C: Tuning
Adjustment
Although C4-02 rarely needs to be changed, adjustments may help in the following situations:
• If the motor vibrates, increase C4-02.
• If the motor responds too slowly to changes in the load, decrease C4-02.
■ C4-03: Torque Compensation at Forward Start (OLV only)
Sets the amount of torque at start in the forward direction in order to improve motor performance during start with heavy
load. Compensation is applied using the time constant set in parameter C4-05. A setting of 0.0% disables this feature.

C4-03 Torque Compensation at Forward Start 0.0 to 200.0% 0.0%
■ C4-04: Torque Compensation at Reverse Start (OLV only)

Sets the amount of torque reference at start in the reverse direction in order to improve motor performance during start
with heavy load. Compensation is applied using the time constant set in parameter C4-05. A setting of 0.0% disables this
feature.

C4-04 Torque Compensation at Reverse Start -200.0 to 0.0% 0.0%
■ C4-05: Torque Compensation Time Constant (OLV only)

This parameter is the time constant for applying the torque compensation at start set in parameters C4-03 and C4-04.

C4-05 Torque Compensation Time Constant 0 to 200 ms 10 ms
■ C4-06: Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time 2 (OLV only)

This time constant is used during Speed Search or during regenerative operation when the actual motor slip is higher than
50% of the rated slip. Adjust the value if an overvoltage fault occurs with sudden changes in the load or at the end of
acceleration with high inertia load.

C4-06 Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time 2 0 to 10000 ms 150 ms
Note: 1. If C4-06 is set to a relatively large value, be sure to also increase the setting in n2-03 (AFR Time Constant 2) proportionally.
Parameter Details
2. C4-06 will not be active if L3-04 is 0, 3 or 4, the output frequency is below 5 Hz, or Speed Search after momentary power loss is
active.
◆ C5: Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR)

The ASR is a PI controller that adjusts the output frequency in order to compensate the motor slip when load is applied.
It is active only when V/f Control is used in combination with a speed feedback signal connected to the drive pulse input 5
RP (V/f Control with Simple Speed Feedback).
The pulse input provides one track only and can not detect the direction of motor rotation. A separate motor speed
direction signal must therefore be input to the ASR by:
1. Using a Digital Input
This method is automatically enabled when a digital input is programmed for “Forward/Reverse direction” (H1-=
7E). If the input is closed, the drive assumes reverse rotation. If open, then the drive assumes that the motor is rotating
forwards.
When a 2 track encoder is used, an external unit that converts the 2 tracks into 1 track and a digital direction signal can
be used.
2. Using the Frequency Reference Direction
When no digital input is set for “Forward/Reverse direction” (H1-≠ 7E), ASR uses the direction of the frequency
reference.
5.3 C: Tuning
Figure 5.26 illustrates the ASR function when using V/f with Simple Speed Feedback.
Figure 5.26
Motor speed
(sold separately)
Figure 5.26 Speed Control with ASR in V/f with Simple Speed Feedback
To activate V/f Control with PG feedback:
1. Set the drive to V/f Control (A1-02 = 0).
2. Connect the motor speed pulse signal to the pulse input RP, set H6-01 = 3, and set the pulse signal frequency that is
equal to the maximum speed to H6-02 (pulse input scaling). Make sure the pulse input bias (H6-04) is 0% and the gain
(H6-03) is 100%.
3. Decide the signal used for detecting the direction. If a digital input is used set H1- = 7F.
4. Use the ASR gain and integral time parameters described below for adjusting the ASR responsiveness.
Note: 1. C5 parameters will appear only when using V/f Control (A1-02 = 0) and when the pulse input RP function is set for PG feedback in
V/f Control (H6-01 = 3).
2. V/f Control with PG feedback can be used for motor 1 only.
ASR Tuning Parameters

ASR provides two sets of gain and integral time. Set 1 is active at the maximum output frequency, set 2 is active at the
minimum output frequency. The settings are changed linearly depending on the output frequency as shown in
Figure 5.27.
Figure 5.27
P gain and I time

P = C5-01
I = C5-02
P = C5-03
I = C5-04
Motor Speed
0 E1-09 E1-04
Minimum Maximum
Output Output
Frequency Frequency
Figure 5.27 Adjusting ASR Proportional Gain and Integral Time
■ C5-01, C5-02: ASR Proportional Gain 1, ASR Integral Time 1

These parameters determine the responsiveness of ASR at maximum output frequency.
• Increase the gain and/or reduce the integral time if the response is slow at maximum output frequency.
• Reduce the gain and/or increase the integral time when vibrations occur at the maximum output frequency.
• When adjusting ASR always first adjust the P gain, then adjust the integral time.

C5-01 ASR Proportional Gain 1 0.00 to 300.00 0.20
C5-02 ASR Integral Time 1 0.000 to 10.000 s 0.200 s
5.3 C: Tuning
■ C5-03, C5-04: ASR Proportional Gain 2, ASR Integral Time 2

These parameters determine the responsiveness of ASR at the minimum output frequency. Use the same setting rules as
described for C5-01 and C5-02

C5-03 ASR Proportional Gain 2 0.00 to 300.00 0.20
C5-04 ASR Integral Time 2 0.000 to 10.000 s 0.500 s
■ C5-05: ASR Limit

Sets the ASR output limit as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04). If the motor slip is high, the setting
might need to be increased to provide proper slip compensation. Use the ASR output monitor U6-04 to determine if ASR
is working at the limit and make settings if necessary. If ASR is operating at the ASR limit, check the pulse signal and the
pulse input settings prior to changes in C5-05.

C5-05 ASR Limit 0.0 to 20.0% 5.0%
◆ C6: Carrier Frequency

■ C6-01: Drive Duty Mode Selection
The drive has two different duty modes from which to select based on the load characteristics. The drive rated current,
overload capacity, carrier frequency, and maximum output frequency will change depending upon the duty mode
selection. Use parameter C6-01 (Duty Cycle) to select Heavy Duty (HD) or Normal Duty (ND). The default setting is
ND. Refer to Heavy Duty and Normal Duty Ratings on page 316 for details about the rated current.

C6-01 Duty Mode Selection 0 or 1 1
Table 5.11 Differences between Heavy and Normal Duty

Mode Heavy Duty Rating (HD) Normal Duty Rating (ND)
C6-01 0 1
Overload
150 % Overload
120 %
Rated Load
Rated Load 100 %
100 %
Characteristics
Parameter Details
0 Motor Speed 100 % 0 Motor Speed 100 %
Use Heavy Duty Rating for applications requiring a high Use Normal Duty Rating for applications in which the
Application
overload tolerance with constant load torque. torque requirements drop along with the speed.
Over load capability (oL2) 150% of drive rated Heavy Duty current for 60 s 120% of drive rated Normal Duty current for 60 s 5
L3-02 Stall Prevention
150% 120%
during Acceleration
L3-06 Stall Prevention
150% 120%
during Run
Default Carrier Frequency 8/10 kHz 2 kHz
Note: By changing the Duty Mode the drive maximum applicable motor power changes and the E2- and E4-parameters are
automatically set to appropriate values.
■ C6-02: Carrier Frequency Selection

Parameter C6-02 sets the switching frequency of the drive’s output transistors. It can be changed in order to reduce
audible noise and also reduce leakage current.
5.3 C: Tuning
Note: The drive rated current is reduced when the carrier frequency is set higher than the default value. Refer to Rated Current
Depending on Carrier Frequency on page 149.

Determined by A1-02 and o2-04.
C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection 1 to 6, F
Reset when C6-01 is changed.
Settings:
C6-02 Carrier Frequency C6-02 Carrier Frequency

1 2.0 kHz 5 12.5 kHz
2 5.0 kHz 6 15.0 kHz
3 8.0 kHz
F User defined (C6-03 to C6-05)
4 10.0 kHz
Guidelines for Carrier Frequency Parameter Setup
Symptom Remedy
Speed and torque are unstable at low speeds.
Noise from the drive is affecting peripheral devices.
Lower the carrier frequency.
Excessive leakage current from the drive.
Wiring between the drive and motor is too long. <1>
Audible motor noise is too loud. Increase the carrier frequency.
<1> The carrier frequency may need to be lowered if the motor cable is too long. Refer to the table below.
Wiring Distance Up to 50 m Up to 100 m Greater than 100 m

C6-02 (Carrier Frequency Selection) 1 to 6, F (15 kHz) 1 to 4 (5 kHz) 1 (2 kHz)
■ C6-03, C6-04, C6-05: Carrier Frequency Upper Limit/Lower Limit/Proportional Gain

Use these parameters to set a user defined or a variable carrier frequency. To set the upper and lower limits, first set C6-
02 to “F”.

C6-03 Carrier Frequency Upper Limit 1.0 to 15.0 kHz
Determined by
C6-04 Carrier Frequency Lower Limit (V/f Control only) 1.0 to 15.0 kHz
C6-02
C6-05 Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain (V/f Control only) 0 to 99
<1> The default value is determined by the control method (A1-02) as well as the drive capacity (o2-04), and is reinitialized when the value set to
C6-01 is changed.
Setting a Fixed User Defined Carrier Frequency

A carrier frequency between the fixed selectable values can be entered in parameter C6-03 when C6-02 is set to “F”. In
V/f Control, parameter C6-04 must also be adjusted to the same value as C6-03.
Setting a Variable Carrier Frequency (V/f Control only)
In V/f Control, the carrier frequency can be set up to change linearly with the output frequency. In this case the upper and
lower limits for the carrier frequency and the carrier frequency proportional gain (C6-03, C6-04, C6-05) have to be set as
shown in Figure 5.28.
Figure 5.28
Carrier Frequency
C6-03
Output
C6-04 Frequency x C6-05 x K*
Output Frequency
E1-04
Max Output Frequency
Figure 5.28 Carrier Frequency Changes Relative to Output Frequency
5.3 C: Tuning
K is a coefficient determined by the value of C6-03:

• 10.0 kHz > C6-03 ≥ to 5.0 kHz: K = 2
• 5.0 kHz > C6-03: K = 1
• C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K = 3
Note: 1. A carrier frequency error (oPE11) will occur when the carrier frequency proportional gain is greater than 6 while C6-03 is less than
C6-04.
2. When C6-05 is set lower than 7, C6-04 is disabled and the carrier frequency will be fixed to the value set in C6-03.
■ C6-06 PWM Method

Determines how the drive should perform pulse width modulation. Enabled only when parameter C6-02 is set to F.

C6-06 PWM Method 0 to 2 Determined by C6-02
■ Rated Current Depending on Carrier Frequency

The tables below show the drive output current depending on the carrier frequency settings. The 2 kHz value is equal to
the Normal Duty rated current, the 8/10 kHz value is equal to the Heavy Duty rated current. The carrier frequency
determines the output current linearly. Use the data below to calculate output current values for carrier frequencies not
listed in the tables.
Note: In Heavy Duty mode the maximum rated output current is equal to the 8/10 kHz value, even if the carrier frequency is reduced.
Table 5.12 Drives with Heavy Duty Default Carrier Frequency of 10 kHz
200 V Single Phase Units 200 V Three Phase Units
Rated Current [A] Rated Current [A]
Model T Model T
2 kHz 10 kHz 15 kHz 2 kHz 10 kHz 15 kHz
BV0001 1.2 0.8 0.6 BV0001 1.2 0.8 0.6
BV0002 1.9 1.6 1.3 BV0002 1.9 1.6 1.3
BV0003 3.5 3.0 2.4 BV0004 3.5 3.0 2.4
BV0006 6.0 5.0 4.0 BV0006 6.0 5.0 4.0
Table 5.13 Drives with Heavy Duty Default Carrier Frequency of 8 kHz
200 V Single Phase Units 200 V Three Phase Units 400 V Three Phase Units
Rated Current [A] Rated Current [A] Rated Current [A]
Model T Model T Model T
2 kHz 8 kHz 15 kHz 2 kHz 8 kHz 15 kHz 2 kHz 8 kHz 15 kHz
BV0010 9.6 8.0 6.4 2V0008 8.0 6.9 5.5 4V0001 1.2 1.2 0.7
BV0012 12.0 11.0 8.8 2V0010 9.6 8.0 6.4 4V0002 2.1 1.8 1.1
Parameter Details
– – – – 2V0012 12.0 11.0 8.8 4V0004 4.1 3.4 2.0
– – – – 2V0018 17.5 14.0 11.2 4V0005 5.4 4.8 2.9
– – – – 2V0020 19.6 17.5 14.0 4V0007 6.9 5.5 3.3
– – – – 2V0030 30.0 25.0 20.0 4V0009 8.8 7.2 4.3
– – – – 2V0040 40.0 33.0 26.4 4V0011 11.1 9.2 5.5
– – – – 2V0056 56.0 47.0 37.6 4V0018 17.5 14.8 8.9
– – – – 2V0069 69.0 60.0 48.0 4V0023 23.0 18.0 10.8
5
– – – – – – – – 4V0031 31.0 24.0 14.4
– – – – – – – – 4V0038 38.0 31.0 18.6
5.4 d: Reference Settings

The drive offers various ways of entering the frequency reference. The figure below gives an overview of the reference
input, selections, and priorities.
Figure 5.29
standard 2 wire sequence selected.

Memobus Register 0001h, bit 4 if
Frequency
selection of each comm. option card

Reference
Determined by the NetRef function

Option Card
Signal is Off
1 ComRef
FJOG (=12), RJOG (=13)

Digital Input (H1-)
Jog Reference (=6)
0
0
1
NetRef
Multi-Step Speed
0
1
d2-03 (Frequency Reference Lower Limit)
MS 1
MS 2
MS 3
MS 4
MS 7
MS 8
Jog
H3-10 = 2
H3-10 ≠ 2
When programmed for
auxiliary frequency
d1-02
d1-03
d1-02
d1-07
d1-08
d1-17
Terminal A2
Remote
Jog Frequency
Local
3 through 8
Frequency
Reference
0
1
Digital Input
H1- = 2
(Frequency Reference Source 1)
(Frequency Reference Source 2)

b1-01
b1-15
=4
=3
=2
=1
=0
=4
=3
=2
=1
=0
MEMOBUS comm.
MEMOBUS comm.
Pulse Train Input
Pulse Train Input
Terminal A1/A2
Terminal A1/A2
(Freq.Ref. 1)
Option Card
(Freq.Ref 1)
Option Card
d1-01
d1-01
Figure 5.29 Frequency Reference Setting Hierarchy
◆ d1: Frequency Reference

■ d1-01 to d1-08, d1-17: Frequency Reference 1 to 8 and Jog Frequency Reference
Up to 9 preset references (including Jog reference) can be programmed in the drive. The references can be switched
during Run by digital inputs. The acceleration/deceleration to the new reference is performed using the active
acceleration/deceleration time.
The Jog frequency must be selected by a separate digital input and has priority over the references 1 to 8.
The multi-speed references 1 and 2 can be provided by analog inputs.

d1-01 to d1-08 Frequency Reference 1 to 8 0.00 to 400.00 Hz <1> 0.00 Hz
d1-17 Jog Frequency Reference 0.00 to 400.00 Hz <1> 6.00 Hz
<1> The upper limit is determined by the maximum output frequency (E1-04) and upper limit for the frequency reference (d2-01).
Multi-Step Speed Selection

Depending on how many speeds are used, some digital inputs have to be programmed for Multi-Step Speed Selection 1,
2, and 3 (H1- = 3, 4, 5). For the Jog reference a digital input must be set to H1- = 6.
Notes on using analog inputs as multi-speed 1 and 2:
• If the frequency reference source is assigned to analog input A1 (b1-01 = 1), then this input will be used for Frequency
Reference 1 instead of d1-01. If the reference source is assigned to the digital operator (b1-01 = 0), then d1-01 will be
used as Frequency Reference 1.
• When the analog input A2 function is set to “Auxiliary Frequency” (H3-10 = 2), then the value input to terminal A2
will be used as the Multi-Step Speed 2 instead of the value set to parameter d1-02. When H3-10 does not equal 2, then
d1-02 becomes the reference for Multi-Step Speed 2.
The different speed references can be selected as shown in Table 5.14. Figure 5.30 illustrates the multi-step speed
selection.
Table 5.14 Multi-Step Speed Reference and Terminal Switch Combinations
Multi-Step Multi-Step Multi-Step Jog Reference
Reference Speed Speed 2 Speed 3 H1-=6
H1-=3 H1-=4 H1-=5
Frequency Reference 1 (d1-01/A1) OFF OFF OFF OFF
Frequency Reference 2 (d1-02/A2) ON OFF OFF OFF
Frequency Reference 3 (d1-03) OFF ON OFF OFF
Frequency Reference 4 (d1-04) ON ON OFF OFF
Frequency Reference 5 (d1-05) OFF OFF ON OFF
Frequency Reference 6 (d1-06) ON OFF ON OFF
Frequency Reference 7 (d1-07) OFF ON ON OFF
Frequency Reference 8 (d1-08) ON ON ON OFF
Jog Frequency Reference (d1-17) <1> − − − ON
<1> The Jog frequency overrides the frequency reference being used.
Figure 5.30
Frequency
reference
d1-08
d1-07
d1-06
d1-05
d1-04
d1-03
d1-02
(A2)
Parameter Details
d1-01
(A1) d1-17
FWD (REV) Run/Stop Time

ON
ON ON ON ON
Multi-step Speed Ref. 1
Multi-step Speed Ref. 2 ON ON
Multi-step Speed Ref. 3 ON

5
Jog Reference ON
Figure 5.30 Preset Reference Timing Diagram
◆ d2: Frequency Upper/Lower Limits

By entering upper or lower frequency limits, the drive programmer can prevent operation of the drive above or below
levels that may cause resonance and or equipment damage.
■ d2-01: Frequency Reference Upper Limit
Sets the upper limit for the frequency reference value that is input from frequency reference source 1 (b1-01). The limit
applies to any source selected in parameter b1-01. The value is set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
Even if the frequency reference is set to a higher value, the drive internal frequency reference will not exceed this value.

d2-01 Frequency Reference Upper Limit 0.0 to 110.0% 100.0%
■ d2-02: Frequency Reference Lower Limit

Sets the lower limit for the frequency reference value that is input from frequency reference source 1 (b1-01). The limit
If a lower reference than this value is input, the drive will run at the d2-02 level. If the drive is started with a lower
reference than d2-02, it will accelerate up to d2-02.

d2-02 Frequency Reference Lower Limit 0.0 to 110.0% 0.0%
Figure 5.31
Internal frequency
reference
d2-01
Frequency Reference Upper Limit
Operating
range
Frequency Reference Lower Limit

d2-02
Set frequency reference

Figure 5.31 Frequency Reference: Upper and Lower Limits
■ d2-03: Master Speed Reference Lower Limit

Unlike frequency reference lower limit (d2-02 and d2-05) which will affect the frequency reference no matter where it is
sourced from (i.e., analog input, preset speed, Jog speed, etc.), the master speed lower limit (d2-03) sets a lower limit that
will only affect the analog input (terminals A1 and A2) that is the active master speed frequency.
Set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
Note: The lower limits for the Jog frequency, multi-step speed settings, and 2-step speed settings do not change. When lower limits are
set to both the frequency reference (d2-02 and d2-05) and the main frequency reference (d2-03), the drive uses the greater of
those two values as the lower limit.

d2-03 Master Speed Reference Lower Limit 0.0 to 110.0% 0.0%
■ d2-04: Frequency Reference 2 Upper Limit

Sets the upper limit for the frequency reference value that is input from frequency reference source 2 (b1-15). The limit
Even if the frequency reference is set to a higher value, the drive internal frequency reference will not exceed this value.

d2-04 Frequency Reference 2 Upper Limit 0.0 to 110.0% 100.0%
■ d2-05: Frequency Reference 2 Lower Limit

Sets the lower limit for the frequency reference value that is input from frequency reference source 2 (b1-15). The limit
If a lower reference than this value is input, the drive will run at the d2-05 level. If the drive is started with a lower
reference than d2-05, it will accelerate up to d2-05.

d2-05 Frequency Reference 2 Lower Limit 0.0 to 110.0% 0.0%
◆ d7: Offset Frequency

■ d7-01 to d7-03: Offset Frequency 1 to 3
Three different offset values can be added to the frequency reference. They can be selected using digital inputs
programmed for Offset frequency 1, 2 and 3 (H1- = 44, 45, 46). The selected offset values are added if two or all
three inputs are closed at the same time.
Note: This function can be used to replace the “Trim Control” function (H1- = 1C/1D) of earlier Yaskawa drives.

d7-01 Offset Frequency 1 -100.0 to 100.0% 0%
Figure 5.32 illustrates the Offset Frequency Function.

Figure 5.32
Frequency
Frequency SFS reference after
reference
soft starter
Multi-function
input (44) = on
Offset Frequency 1 [d7-01]
(Signed)
Multi-function
input (45) = on
(Signed)
Multi-function
input (46) = on
(Signed)
Figure 5.32 Offset Frequency Operation
Parameter Details
5.5 E: Motor Parameters

E parameters cover V/f pattern and motor data settings.
◆ E1: V/f Pattern for Motor 1

■ E1-01: Input Voltage Setting
Set the input voltage parameter to the nominal voltage of the AC power supply. This parameter adjusts the levels of some
protective features of the drive (overvoltage, Stall Prevention, etc.).
NOTICE: Set parameter E1-01 to match the input voltage of the drive. Drive input voltage (not motor voltage) must be set in E1-01 for
the protective features of the drive to function properly. Failure to comply could result in improper drive operation.

E1-01 <1> Input Voltage Setting 155 to 255 V 200 V
<1> The setting range and default value shown here are for 200 V class drives. Double this for 400 V class units.
E1-01 Related Values

The input voltage setting determines the over-/undervoltage detection level and the operation levels of the braking
transistor as well as the KEB function and the overvoltage suppression function.
(Approximate Values)
Setting Value of ov Suppression /
Voltage ov Detection BTR Operation Uv Detection KEB Target Voltage Stall Prevention
E1-01
Level Level Level (L2-05) (S4-11) Level
(L3-17)
190 V
200 V Class all settings 410 V 394 V (single-phase = 160 240 V 370 V
V)
setting ≥ 400 V 820 V 788 V 380 V 480 V 740 V
400 V Class
setting < 400 V 740 V 708 V 350 V 440 V 660 V
Note: The braking transistor operation levels are valid for the drive internal braking transistor. If an external CDBR braking chopper is
used, refer to the instruction manual TOBPC72060000.
■ V/f Pattern Settings

The drive utilizes a set V/f pattern to determine the appropriate output voltage level for each relative to the frequency
reference.
One custom V/f pattern can be set up by programming parameters E1-04 through E1-13.
V/f Pattern Setup
1. Set the input voltage for the drive. Refer to E1-01: Input Voltage Setting on page 154.
2. To set up a V/f pattern, E1-04 through E1-13 must be adjusted manually. Refer to V/f Pattern Settings E1-04 to
E1-13 on page 154.
■ E1-03: V/f Pattern Selection

This parameter can only be set to “F”.

E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection F F
■ V/f Pattern Settings E1-04 to E1-13

Using parameters E1-04 through E1-13, the user can either monitor the V/f pattern values if set up a custom V/f pattern
as shown in Figure 5.33.

E1-04 Maximum Output Frequency 40.0 to 400.0 Hz 60.0 Hz <1> <2> <4>

E1-05 Maximum Voltage 0.0 to 255.0 V <3> 200.0 V <1> <2>
E1-06 Base Frequency 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 60.0 Hz <1> <2> <4>
E1-07 Middle Output Frequency 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 3.0 Hz <1> <4>
E1-08 Middle Output Frequency Voltage 0.0 to 255.0 V <3> 16.0 V <1>
E1-09 Minimum Output Frequency 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 1.5 Hz <1> <2> <4>
E1-10 Minimum Output Frequency Voltage 0.0 to 255.0 V <3> 12.0 V <1>
E1-11 Middle Output Frequency 2 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 0.0 Hz <1>
E1-12 Middle Output Frequency Voltage 2 0.0 to 255.0 V <3> 0.0 V <1>
E1-13 Base Voltage <5> 0.0 to 255.0 V 0.0 V <1>
<2> When using OLV/PM control mode, the default setting is determined by the motor code set to E5-01.
<4> The default value shown here is for the following localized drives: Japan (Model code: CIMR-TAV), Asia (Model code: CIMR-TTV) For
default value of China localized drive (Model code: CIMR-TBV), Refer to Default Values of the China Localized Drive: CIMR-TBV on
page 376.
<5> When E1-13 = 0.0 V, the drive uses the value set in E1-05 to control the voltage.
Figure 5.33
Output Voltage (V)
Frequency (Hz)
Figure 5.33 V/f Pattern
Note: 1. The following condition must be true when setting up the V/f pattern: E1-09 ≤ E1-07 ≤ E1-06 ≤ E1-11 ≤ E1-04
2. To make the V/f pattern a straight line set E1-09 = E1-07. In this case the E1-08 setting is disregarded.
3. E1-03 is unaffected whe15n the drive is initialized using parameter A1-03, but the settings for E1-04 through E1-13 are returned to
their default values.
◆ E2: Motor 1 Parameters
Parameter Details
These parameters contain the most important motor data needed for optimal motor control. They are set automatically
when Auto-Tuning is performed. If Auto-Tuning can not be performed, then these parameters can be set manually.
■ E2-01: Motor Rated Current
Set E2-01 to the full load amps (FLA) stamped on the motor nameplate. During Auto-Tuning the value must be entered 5
to parameter T1-04. If Auto-Tuning completes successfully, the value entered will automatically be saved to E2-01.

10% to 200% of the drive
Determined by
E2-01 Motor Rated Current rated current.
C6-01 and o2-04
(unit: 0.01 A)
Note: 1. Setting units vary by the maximum allowable motor capacity, which is determined by C6-01 and o2-04. Drives up to 11 kW display a
two-digit value, while drives 11 kW and larger display a single-digit value.
2. Change E2-01 only after changing the value set to E2-03. If E2-01< E2-03, then parameter setting error oPE02 will occur.
■ E2-02: Motor Rated Slip

Sets the motor rated slip in Hz. This value is automatically set during Rotational Auto-Tuning.

Determined by
E2-02 Motor Rated Slip 0.00 to 20.00 Hz
C6-01 and o2-04
If Auto-Tuning can not be performed calculate the motor rated slip using the information written on the motor nameplate
and the formula below:
E2-02 = f - (n x p)/120
(f: rated frequency (Hz), n: rated motor speed (r/min), p: number of motor poles)
■ E2-03: Motor No-Load Current
Set E2-03 to the motor no-load current at rated voltage and rated frequency. If Rotational Auto-Tuning completes
successfully, this value is automatically calculated. If Auto-Tuning can not be performed, contact the motor manufacturer
for information about the no-load current.

0 to [E2-01] Determined by
E2-03 Motor No-Load Current
(unit: 0.01 A) C6-01 and o2-04
Note: Setting units vary by the maximum allowable motor capacity, which is determined by C6-01 and o2-04. Drives up to 11 kW
display a two-digit value, while drives 11 kW and larger display a single-digit value.
■ E2-04: Number of Motor Poles

Set the number of motor poles to E2-04. This value must be entered during Auto-Tuning, and will automatically be saved
to E2-04 if Auto-Tuning completes successfully.

E2-04 Number of Motor Poles 2 to 48 poles 4 poles
■ E2-05: Motor Line-to-Line Resistance

Sets the line-to-line resistance of the motor stator winding. If the Auto-Tuning completes successfully, this value is
automatically calculated. Remember this value must be entered as line-line and not line-neutral.

Determined by
E2-05 Motor Line-to-Line Resistance 0.000 to 65.000 Ω
C6-01 and o2-04
Note: The setting range becomes 0.00 to 130.00 when using TABV0002, TA2V0002, TA4V0001 and smaller.
If Auto-Tuning is not possible, then contact the motor manufacturer to find out the line-to-line resistance or measure it
manually. When using the manufacturer Motor Test Report, calculate E2-05 by the formulas below.
• E-type insulation: Multiply 0.92 times the resistance value (Ω) listed on the Test Report at 75 °C
• B-type insulation: Multiply 0.92 times the resistance value (Ω) listed on the Test Report at 75 °C.
• F-type insulation: Multiply 0.87 times the resistance value (Ω) listed on the Test Report at 115 °C.
■ E2-06: Motor Leakage Inductance
Sets the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage of motor rated voltage.

Determined by
E2-06 Motor Leakage Inductance 0.0 to 40.0%
C6-01 and o2-04
■ E2-07: Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient 1

This parameter sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 50% of the magnetic flux. If Rotational Auto-Tuning
completes successfully, then this value is automatically calculated.

E2-07 Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient 1 0.00 to 0.50 0.50

This parameter sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 75% of the magnetic flux. If Rotational Auto-Tuning
completes successfully, then this value is automatically calculated.

E2-08 Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient 2 E2-07 to 0.75 0.75
■ E2-09: Motor Mechanical Loss

This parameter sets to the motor mechanical loss as a percentage of motor rated power (kW) capacity.

E2-09 Motor Mechanical Loss 0.0 to 10.0% 0.0%
Adjust this setting when there is a large amount of torque loss due to motor bearing friction.
The setting for the mechanical loss is added to the torque.
■ E2-10: Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation
This parameter sets the motor iron loss in watts.

Determined by
E2-10 Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation 0 to 65535 W
C6-01 and o2-04
■ E2-11: Motor Rated Power

This parameter sets the motor rated power in kW. During Auto-Tuning the value must entered to parameter T1-02. If
Auto-Tuning completes successfully, the value entered will automatically be saved to E2-11.
Parameter Details
Determined by
E2-11 Motor Rated Power 0.00 to 650.00 kW
C6-01 and o2-04

This parameter sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 130% of the magnetic flux.
5
E2-12 Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient 3 1.30 to 5.00 1.30
◆ E3: V/f Pattern for Motor 2

These parameters set the V/f pattern used for motor 2. Refer to Setting 16: Motor 2 Selection on page 171 for details on
switching motors.
■ E3-01: Motor 2 Control Mode Selection
Selects the control mode for motor 2. Motor 2 can not be used with OLV for PM.

E3-01 Motor 2 Control Mode Selection 0 or 2 0
Setting 0: V/f Control

Setting 2: Open Loop Vector Control
■ E3-04 to E3-13
Parameters E3-04 through E3-13 set up the V/f pattern used for motor 2 like shown in Figure 5.34.

E3-04 Motor 2 Max Output Frequency 40.0 to 400.0 Hz 60.0 Hz <2> <3>
200.0 V
E3-05 Motor 2 Max Voltage 0.0 to 255.0 V <1>
<1> <2>
E3-06 Motor 2 Base Frequency 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 60.0 Hz <2> <3>

E3-07 Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 3.0 Hz <2> <3>
E3-08 Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency Voltage 0.0 to 255.0 V <1> 16.0 V <2>
E3-09 Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 1.5 Hz <2> <3>
E3-10 Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency Voltage 0.0 to 255.0 V <1> 9.0 V <2>
E3-11 Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency 2 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 0.0 Hz
E3-12 Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency Voltage 2 0.0 to 255.0 V <1> 0.0 V
E3-13 Motor 2 Base Voltage 0.0 to 255.0 V <1> 0.0 V
<1> Values shown here are for 200 V class drives. Multiply voltage values by 1.15 for U-spec drives. Double the value when using a 400 V class
drive.
<2> Default setting is determined by the control mode for motor 2.
page 376.
Figure 5.34
Output (V)
E3-05
E3-12
E3-13
E3-08
E3-10
E3-09 E3-07 E3-06 E3-11 E3-04

Frequency (Hz)
Figure 5.34 V/f Pattern for Motor 2

Note: 1. The following condition must be true when setting up the V/f pattern: E3-09 ≤ E3-07 ≤ E3-06 ≤ E3-11 ≤ E3-04
2. To make the V/f pattern a straight line set E3-09 = E3-07. In this case the E3-08 setting is disregarded.
◆ E4: Motor 2 Parameters

E4 parameters contain the motor data for motor 2. These parameters are usually set automatically during the Auto-
Tuning process. They may need to be set manually if there is a problem performing Auto-Tuning.
■ E4-01: Motor 2 Rated Current
Set E4-01 to the full load amps (FLA) stamped on the nameplate of motor 2. During Auto-Tuning the value must be
entered to parameter T1-04. If Auto-Tuning completes successfully, the value entered will automatically be saved to E4-
01.

10 to 200% of the drive Determined by
E4-01 Motor 2 Rated Current
rated current. C6-01 and o2-04
■ E4-02: Motor 2 Rated Slip

This parameter sets the motor 2 rated slip frequency. The drive calculates this value automatically during Rotational
Auto-Tuning.
For information on calculating the motor rated slip, see the description for E2-02.

Determined by
E4-02 Motor 2 Rated Slip 0.00 to 20.00 Hz
C6-01 and o2-04
■ E4-03: Motor 2 Rated No-Load Current

Set E4-03 to the motor no-load current at rated voltage and rated frequency. If Rotational Auto-Tuning completes
successfully, this value is automatically calculated. If Auto-Tuning can not be performed contact the motor manufacturer
for information about the no-load current.

Determined by
E4-03 Motor 2 Rated No-Load Current 0 to [E4-01]
C6-01 and o2-04
Parameter Details
■ E4-04: Motor 2 Motor Poles
Set the pole number of motor 2 to E4-04. During Auto-Tuning the value must entered to parameter T1-06. If Auto-
Tuning completes successfully, the entered value will automatically be saved to E4-04.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default 5

E4-04 Motor 2 Motor Poles 2 to 48 4
■ E4-05: Motor 2 Line-to-Line Resistance

Sets the line-to-line resistance of motor 2 stator winding. If the Auto-tuning completes successfully, this value is
automatically calculated. Remember this value must be entered as line-line and not line-neutral.

Determined by
E4-05 Motor 2 Line-to-Line Resistance 0.000 to 65.000 Ω
C6-01 and o2-04
Note: The setting range is 0.00 to 130.00 when using a drive capacity of 0.2 kW or less.
Refer to E2-05: Motor Line-to-Line Resistance on page 156 to manually enter this parameter setting.
■ E4-06: Motor 2 Leakage Inductance

Sets the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance of motor 2. The value is set as a percentage of the rated voltage.

Determined by
E4-06 Motor 2 Leakage Inductance 0.0 to 40.0%
C6-01 and o2-04
■ E4-10: Motor 2 Iron Loss

Sets the motor 2 iron loss in watts.

Determined by
E4-10 Motor 2 Iron Loss 0 to 65535 W
C6-01 and o2-04
■ E4-11: Motor 2 Rated Power

Sets the motor 2 rated power. During Auto-Tuning the value must entered to parameter T1-02. If Auto-Tuning completes
successfully, the entered value will automatically be saved to E4-11.

Determined by
E4-11 Motor 2 Rated Power 0.00 to 650.00 kW
C6-01 and o2-04
■ E4-14: Motor 2 Slip Compensation Gain

Instead of C3-01 the value of E4-14 is used as gain for slip compensation when motor 2 is selected. Refer to C3-01: Slip
Compensation Gain on page 143 for details and setting instructions.

Determined by
E4-14 Motor 2 Slip Compensation Gain 0.0 to 2.50
E3-01
■ E4-15: Motor 2 Torque Compensation Gain

Instead of C4-01 the value of E4-15 is used as gain for torque compensation when motor 2 is selected. Refer to C4-01:
Torque Compensation Gain on page 144 for details and setting instructions.

E4-15 Motor 2 Torque Compensation Gain 0.0 to 2.50 1.00
◆ E5: PM Motor Settings

These parameters set the motor data of a PM motor used in OLV for PM (A1-02 = 5).
When Yaskawa motors are used, entering the motor code written on the motor nameplate will set up the E5-
parameters. For all other PM motors, the data must be entered manually.
■ E5-01: PM Motor Code Selection
Set the motor code for the PM motor being used. Depending on the motor code entered, the drive automatically sets
several parameters to appropriate values. Refer to E5-01 (PM Motor Code Selection) Dependent Parameters on
page 385 for details on the supported motor codes and their parameter settings.

Determined by
E5-01 PM Motor Code Selection 0000 to FFFF
o2-04
Note: 1. This parameter is not reset when the drive is initialized using parameter A1-03.
2. The default setting is for a Yaskawa SMRA Series SPM Motor with a speed rating of 1800 r/min.
3. Changing the motor code setting resets all E5- settings to their default values.
4. Set to “FFFF” when using a non-Yaskawa PM motor or one that is not supported by the motor code settings.
Figure 5.35 explains the motor code setting.

Figure 5.35
0000
Motor Voltage Class
and Capacity
0: Pico Motor 0: 1800 r/min Series

(SMRA Series) 1: 3600 r/min Series
1: Derated Torque for IPM 2: 1750 r/min Series
Motors 3: 1450 r/min Series
(SSR 1 Series) 4: 1150 r/min Series
F: Special Motor
Figure 5.35 PM Motor Code
■ E5-02: Motor Rated Power (PM OLV)

Sets the rated power of the motor.

Determined by
E5-02 Motor Rated Power 0.10 to 18.50 kW
E5-01
Note: This parameter is not reset when the drive is initialized using A1-03.
■ E5-03: Motor Rated Current (PM OLV)

Sets the motor rated current in amps.

10 to 200% of drive rated Determined by
E5-03 Motor Rated Current
current E5-01
Note: 1. Setting units vary by the maximum allowable motor capacity, which is determined by C6-01 and o2-04. Drives up to 11 kW display a
two-digit value, while drives 11 kW and larger display a single-digit value.
2. This parameter is not reset when the drive is initialized using A1-03.
■ E5-04: Number of Motor Poles (PM OLV)

Sets the number of motor poles.

Determined by
E5-04 Number of Motor Poles 2 to 48
E5-01
E5-05: Motor Stator Resistance (PM OLV)
Parameter Details
■
Set the resistance for each motor phase (not line-to-line resistance). When measuring the resistance manually make sure
to enter the resistance of one phase into E5-05.

Determined by 5
E5-05 Motor Stator Resistance 0.000 to 65.000 Ω
E5-01
■ E5-06: Motor d-Axis Inductance (PM OLV)

Sets the d axis inductance in units of 0.01 mH.

Determined by
E5-06 Motor d-Axis Inductance 0.00 to 300.00 mH
E5-01
■ E5-07: Motor q-Axis Inductance (PM OLV)

Sets the q axis inductance in units of 0.01 mH.

Determined by
E5-07 Motor q-Axis Inductance 0.00 to 600.00 mH
E5-01
■ E5-09: Motor Induction Voltage Constant 1 (PM OLV)

Set the induced phase peak voltage in units of 0.1 mV/(rad/s) [electrical angle]. Set this parameter when using an SSR1
series IPM motor with derated torque or an SST4 series motor with constant torque.
When E5-01 is set to “FFFF” use either E5-09 or E5-24 for setting the voltage constant.

Determined by
E5-09 Motor Induction Voltage Constant 1 0.0 to 2000.0 mV/(rad/s)
E5-01
Note: 1. Ensure that E5-24 = 0 when setting parameter E5-09. An alarm will be triggered, however, if both E5-09 and E5-24 are set 0, or if
neither parameter is set to 0.
■ E5-24: Motor Induction Voltage Constant 2 (PM OLV)

Set the induced phase-to-phase rms voltage in units of 0.1 mV/(r/min) [mechanical angle]. When using an SMRA Series
SPM Motor, E5-09 should be set to 0.
When E5-01 is set to “FFFF” use either E5-09 or E5-24 for setting the voltage constant.

Determined by
E5-24 Motor Induction Voltage Constant 2 (PM OLV) 0.0 to 2000.0 mV/(r/min)
E5-01
Note: 1. If both E5-09 and E5-24 are set to 0, or if neither is set to 0, then parameter setting error OPE08 will occur. If the motor rated current
(E5-03) is set to 0, however, then an error message will not be displayed if both E5-09 and E5-24 are both set to 0 at the same time.
5.6 F: Option Settings

◆ F1: PG Speed Control Card Settings
A one-track pulse signal can be connected to the drive pulse train input RP as speed feedback. Using this signal for slip
compensation improves the speed control accuracy. This function is only available for motor 1.
The F1 parameters determine how the error detection for the speed feedback signal works. Refer to C5: Automatic Speed
Regulator (ASR) on page 145 for details on how to activate and tune the function.
■ Operation at PG Fault Detection
The drive lets the user select from one of four possible operations when a fault occurs with the PG encoder. The operation
can be set up separately for each fault using parameters F1-02, F1-03, and F1-04. The table below list the stopping
methods and the parameter setting values.
Table 5.15 Stopping Methods for PGo, oS, dEv Detection
Description Setting
Ramp to Stop (uses the deceleration time set to C1-02) 0
Coast to Stop 1
Fast-stop (uses the Fast-stop time set to C1-09) 2
Alarm only 3
NOTICE: Setting = 3: Alarm only will provide an alarm only while continuing to run the motor during abnormal PG fault conditions. This
may cause damage to machinery. Use caution when selecting this setting.
■ F1-02: Operation Selection at PG Open Circuit (PGo)

Sets the stopping method when a PG open circuit fault (PGo) occurs. Refer to Table 5.15 for setting explanations.

F1-02 Operation Selection at PG Open Circuit (PGo) 0 to 3 1
■ F1-03: Operation Selection at Overspeed

Sets the stopping method when an overspeed (oS) fault occurs. Refer to Table 5.15 for setting explanations.

F1-03 Operation Selection at Overspeed (oS) 0 to 3 1
F1-04: Operation Selection at Deviation
Parameter Details
■
Sets the stopping method when a speed deviation (dEv) fault occurs. Refer to Table 5.15 for setting explanations.

F1-04 Operation Selection at Deviation (dEv) 0 to 3 3
5
■ F1-08, F1-09: Overspeed Detection Level, Delay Time
F1-08 sets the detection level for an overspeed (oS) fault as a percentage of the maximum output frequency. The speed
feedback has to exceed this level for longer than the time set in F1-09 before a fault is detected.

F1-08 Overspeed Detection Level 0 to 120% 115%
F1-09 Overspeed Detection Delay Time 0.0 to 2.0 s 1.0 s
■ F1-10, F1-11: Excessive Speed Deviation Detection Level, Delay Time

F1-10 sets the detection level for a speed deviation (dEv) fault as a percentage of the maximum output frequency. The
speed feedback has to exceed this level for longer than the time set in F1-11 before a fault is detected. Speed deviation is
the difference between actual motor speed and the frequency reference command.

F1-10 Excessive Speed Deviation Detection Level 0 to 50% 10%
F1-11 Excessive Speed Deviation Detection Delay Time 0.0 to 10.0 s 0.5 s
■ F1-14: PG Open-Circuit Detection Time

Sets the time required to detect PGo if no pulse signal is present at terminal RP.

F1-14 PG Open-Circuit Detection Time 0.0 to 10.0 s 2.0 s
◆ F6: Communication Option Card

These parameters are to configure communication option cards and communication fault detection methods.
■ F6-01: Communications Error Operation Selection
Determines drive operation if a communication error occurs.

F6-01 Communications Error Operation Selection 0 to 3 1
Setting 0: Ramp to Stop Using Current Accel/Decel Time

Setting 2: Fast-stop Using C1-09
Setting 3: Alarm Only, Continue Operation
■ F6-02: External Fault from Comm. Option Detection Selection
Determines the detection method of an external fault initiated by a communication option (EF0).

F6-02 External Fault from Comm. Option Detection Selection 0 or 1 0
Setting 0: Always Detected

Setting 1: Detection During Run Only
■ F6-03: External Fault from Comm. Option Operation Selection
Determines the operation when an external fault is initiated by a communication option (EF0).

F6-03 External Fault from Comm. Option Operation Selection 0 to 3 1

■ F6-07: NetRef/ComRef Function Preselection Capability
Selects how multi-step speed inputs are treated when the NetRef command is set.

F6-07 NetRef/ComRef Function Preselection Capability 0, 1 0
Setting 0: Multi-step speed operation disabled

If the NetRef command is selected, multi-step speed input frequency references are disabled (like Yaskawa F7 drives).
Setting 1: Multi-step speed operation enabled
Even if the NetRef command is selected, multi-step speed inputs are still active and can override the frequency reference
from the communications option (like Yaskawa V7 drives).
■ F6-08: Reset Communication Parameters
Determines whether communication-related parameters (F6-) are reset when the drive is initialized using parameter
A1-03.

F6-08 Reset Communication Parameters 0, 1 0
Setting 0: Do not reset parameters F6- when the drive is initialized with A1-03
Setting 1: Reset F6- when the drive is initialized with A1-03
Note: F6-08 is not reset when the drive is initialized, but does determine whether initializing the drive with A1-03 resets the other
communication parameters F6-.
■ F6-64 to F6-71: Dynamic Assembly Parameters (Reserved)

F6-64 to F6-71 Dynamic Assembly Parameters (Reserved) 0 to FFFFH 0
◆ CC-Link Parameters
Parameters F6-04, F6-10, F6-11, and F6-14 set up the drive to operate on a CC-Link network.
For details on parameter settings, refer to the YASKAWA AC Drive-Option Card CC-Link Installation Manual and
Technical Manual.
◆ MECHATROLINK Parameters
Parameters F6-20 through F6-26 set up the drive to operate on a MECHATROLINK network.
For details on parameter settings, refer to the YASKAWA AC Drive-Option Card MECHATROLINK-II Installation
Manual and Technical Manual.
◆ PROFIBUS-DP Parameters
Parameter Details
Parameters F6-30 through F6-32 set up the drive to operate on a PROFIBUS-DP network.
For details on parameter settings, refer to the YASKAWA AC Drive-Option Card PROFIBUS-DP Installation Manual
and Technical Manual.
◆ CANopen Parameters
5
Parameters F6-35 and F6-36 set up the drive to operate on a CANopen network.
For details on parameter settings, refer to the YASKAWA AC Drive-Option Card CANopen Installation Manual and
Technical Manual.
◆ DeviceNet Parameters
Parameters F6-50 through F6-63 set up the drive to operate on a DeviceNet network.
For details on parameter settings, refer to the YASKAWA AC Drive-Option Card DeviceNet Installation Manual and
Technical Manual.
5.7 H: Terminal Functions

H parameters are used to assign functions to the external terminals.
◆ H1: Multi-Function Digital Inputs

■ H1-01 to H1-07: Functions for Terminals S1 to S7
These parameters assign functions to the multi-function digital inputs. The settings 0 to 9F determine function for each
terminal and are explained below.
Note: If not using an input terminal or if using the through-mode, set that terminal to “F”.
Setting
No. Parameter Name Default
Range
H1-01 Multi-Function Digital Input S1 Terminal Function Selection 1 to 7E 40 (F): Forward Run Command (2-wire sequence)
H1-02 Multi-Function Digital Input S2 Terminal Function Selection 1 to 7E 41 (F): Reverse Run Command (2-wire sequence)
H1-03 Multi-Function Digital Input S3 Terminal Function Selection 0 to 7E 24: External Fault
H1-04 Multi-Function Digital Input S4 Terminal Function Selection 0 to 7E 14: Fault Reset
H1-05 Multi-Function Digital Input S5 Terminal Function Selection 0 to 7E 3 (0) <1>: Multi-Step Speed Reference 1
H1-06 Multi-Function Digital Input S6 Terminal Function Selection 0 to 7E 4 (3) <1>: Multi-Step Speed Reference 2
H1-07 Multi-Function Digital Input S7 Terminal Function Selection 0 to 7E 6 (4) <1>: Jog Reference Selection
<1> Number appearing in parenthesis is the default value after performing a 3-Wire initialization.
Table 5.16 Digital Multi-Function Input Settings

Setting Function Page Setting Function Page
0 3-Wire Sequence 167 30 PID Integral Reset 172
1 LOCAL/REMOTE Selection 167 31 PID Integral Hold 172
2 External Reference 1/2 167 34 PID Soft Starter Cancel 172
3 Multi-Step Speed Reference 1 35 PID Input Level Selection 172
4 Multi-Step Speed Reference 2 168 40 Forward Run/Stop (2-wire sequence)
172
5 Multi-Step Speed Reference 3 41 Reverse Run/Stop (2-wire sequence)
6 Jog Reference Selection 168 42 Run/Stop (2-Wire sequence 2)
173
7 Accel/Decel Time 1 168 43 FWD/REV (2-Wire sequence 2)
8 Baseblock Command (N.O.) 44 Offset Frequency 1 Addition
168
9 Baseblock Command (N.C.) 45 Offset Frequency 2 Addition 173
A Accel/Decel Ramp Hold 168 46 Offset Frequency 3 Addition
B Drive Overheat Alarm (oH2) 168 47 <1> Node Setup 173
C Terminal A1/A2 Enable/Disable 168 50 Disturb Function Cancel 173
F Not used/Through Mode 169 51 Synchronous Accel/Decel 173
10 Up Command 53 Energy Saving On/Off 173
169
11 Down Command 59 DC Injection Braking 1 173
12 Forward Jog 60 DC Injection Braking 2 174
170
13 Reverse Jog 61 External Speed Search command 1 174
14 Fault Reset 170 62 External Speed Search command 2 174
15 Fast-Stop (N.O.) 170 65 KEB 1 (N.C.)
174
16 Motor 2 Selection 171 66 KEB 1 (N.O.)
17 Fast-stop (N.C.) 170 67 Communications Test Mode 174
18 Timer Function Input 171 7C Short-Circuit Braking (N.O.)
174
19 PID Disable 171 7D Short-Circuit Braking (N.C.)
Forward/Reverse Detection (V/f Control with
1A Accel/Decel Time Selection 2 171 7E 175
Simple PG Feedback)
1B Program Lockout 171 7E 175
Simple PG Feedback)
20 to 2F External Fault 172 7E 175
Simple PG Feedback)
<1> This setting is valid from software versions 6000 or later.
Setting 0: 3-Wire Sequence

When one of the digital inputs is programmed for 3-Wire control, that input becomes a forward/reverse directional input,
S1 becomes the Run command input, and S2 becomes the Stop command input.
The drive will start the motor when the Run input S1 is closed for longer than 50 ms. The drive will stop the operation
when the Stop input S2 is released for a brief moment. Whenever the input programmed for 3-Wire sequence is open, the
drive will be set for forward direction. If the input is closed, the drive is set for reverse direction.
Note: When 3-Wire sequence is selected the Run and Stop command must be input at S1 and S2.
Figure 5.36
Stop Switch Run Switch DRIVE

(N.C.) (N.O.)
S1
Run Command (Runs when Closed)
S2
Stop Command (Stops when Open)
S5
FWD/REV (Multi-Function Input)
(H1-05 = 0)
SC
Sequence Input Common
Figure 5.36 3-Wire Sequence Wiring Diagram

Figure 5.37
50 ms min.
Can be either ON or OFF

Run command
Stop command OFF (stopped)
Forward/reverse OFF (forward) ON (reverse)

command
Motor speed
TIME
Stop Forward Reverse Stop Foward
Figure 5.37 3-Wire Sequence

Note: 1. The Run and Stop command must be open/closed for a short moment only to start and stop the drive.
2. If the Run command is active at power up and b1-17 = 0 (Run command at power up not accepted), the Run LED will flash to
indicate that protective functions are operating. If required by the application, set b1-17 to “1” to have the Run command issued
automatically as soon as the drive is powered up.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. The drive may start unexpectedly in reverse direction after power up if it is wired for 3-Wire
sequence but set up for 2-Wire sequence (default). When using 3-Wire sequence first set the drive properly (H1- = 0) and then
connect the control wires. Make sure b1-17 is set to “0” (drive does not accept Run command active at power up). When initializing the
drive use 3-Wire initialization. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from moving equipment.
Parameter Details
Setting 1: LOCAL/REMOTE Selection
This setting allows the input terminal to determine if the drive will run in LOCAL mode or REMOTE mode.
Status Description
Closed LOCAL: Frequency reference and Run command are input from the digital operator. 5
REMOTE: Frequency reference and Run command are input from the selected external reference. (b1-01 and b1-02) If no input
Open is set to H1- = 2 the settings in parameters b1-01and b1-02 are valid. If a digital input set to H1- = 2, the source selected
by this input will be valid.
Note: 1. If one of the multi-function input terminals is set to for LOCAL/REMOTE, then the LO/RE key on the operator will be disabled.
2. When the drive is set to LOCAL, the LO/RE LED will light.
3. The default setting of the drive is not to allow switching between LOCAL and REMOTE during run. to Refer to b1-07: LOCAL/
REMOTE Run Selection on page 118 if this feature is required by the application.
Setting 2: External Reference 1/2 Selection
The external reference 1/external reference 2 selection function allows the user to switch between the frequency
reference and Run command source between external reference 1 and 2.
Status Description
Open External reference 1 is used (defined by parameters b1-01 and b1-02)
Closed External reference 2 is used (defined by parameters b1-15 and b1-16)
Note: The default setting of the drive is not to allow switching between external reference 1 and 2 during run. Refer to b1-07: LOCAL/
REMOTE Run Selection on page 118 if this feature is required by the application.
Setting 3 to 5: Multi-Step Speed Reference 1 to 3
Used to switch Multi-Step Speed frequency references d1-01 to d1-08 by digital inputs. Refer to d1-01 to d1-08, d1-17:
Frequency Reference 1 to 8 and Jog Frequency Reference on page 150 for details.
Setting 6: Jog Frequency Reference Selection
Used to select the Jog frequency set in parameter d1-17 as active frequency reference. Refer to d1-01 to d1-08, d1-17:
Frequency Reference 1 to 8 and Jog Frequency Reference on page 150 for details.
Setting 7: Accel/Decel Time Selection 1
Used to switch between accel/decel times 1 and 2. Refer to C1-01 to C1-08: Accel, Decel Times 1 to 4 on page 140 for
details.
Setting 8/9: External Baseblock (N.O.) and External Baseblock (N.C.)
Setting 8 or 9 assign the Baseblock command to digital input terminals. When the drive receives a Baseblock command,
the output transistor stop switching and the motor coasts to stop. During this time, the alarm “bb” will flash on the LED
operator to indicate baseblock. For more information on alarms, Refer to Alarm Detection on page 261. When baseblock
ends and a Run command is active, the drive performs Speed Search to get the motor running again (Refer to b3: Speed
Search on page 122 for details).
Inputs
Operation
Setting 8 (N.O.) Setting 9 (N.C.)
Normal operation Open Closed
Baseblock (Interrupt output) Closed Open
Figure 5.38
OFF ON
Run command
Baseblock
ON release
Baseblock input
Frequency
reference
Begin Speed Search from the
previous frequency reference
Output frequency
Output off, motor coasts
Figure 5.38 Baseblock Operation During Run

Setting A: Accel/Decel Ramp Hold
When the digital input programmed for the Accel/Decel Ramp Hold function closes, the drive will lock ("hold") the
output frequency. All acceleration or deceleration will cease, and the drive will hold the current speed. Acceleration or
deceleration will resume once the input is opened again.
Setting B: Drive Overheat Alarm (oH2)
Triggers an oH2 alarm when the contact closes. Because this is an alarm, drive operation is not affected.
Setting C: Analog Inputs A1/A2 Enable
If a digital input programmed for this function is open, both analog inputs A1 and A2 are disabled. Close the input to
enable the inputs.
Setting F: Not Used/Through Mode

Any digital input that is not used should be set to F. When set to “F”, an input does not trigger any function in the drive.
Setting F, however, still allows the input status to be read out by a PLC via a communication option or MEMOBUS/
Modbus communications (through mode). This way external sensors can be connected to unused drive digital inputs,
thus reducing the need for separate PLC I/O units.
Setting 10/11: Up/Down Command
Using the Up/Down function allows the frequency reference to be set by two push buttons. One digital input must be
programmed as the Up input (H1-= 10) to increase the frequency reference, the other one must be programmed as
the Down input (H1-= 11) to decrease the frequency reference.
The Up/Down function has priority over the frequency references digital operator, analog inputs, and pulse input (b1-01
= 0, 1, 4). If the Up/Down function is used, then references provided by these sources will be disregarded.
The inputs operate as shown in the table below.
Status
Description
Up (10) Down (11)
Open Open Hold current frequency reference
Closed Open Increase frequency reference
Open Closed Decrease frequency reference
Closed Closed Hold current frequency reference
Note: 1. An oPE03 alarm will occur when only one of the functions Up/Down is programmed for a digital input.
2. An oPE03 alarm will occur if the Up/Down function is assigned to the terminals while another input is programmed for the Accel/
Decel Ramp Hold function. For more information on alarms, Refer to Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors on page 245.
3. The Up/Down function can only be used for external reference 1. Consider this when using Up/Down and the external reference
switching function (H1- = 2).
Using the Up/Down Function with Frequency Reference Limits

The upper frequency reference limit is determined by parameter d2-01.
The value for the lower frequency reference limit can be set by an analog input or parameter d2-02. When a Run
command is applied, the lower limits work as follows:
• If the lower limit is set by parameter d2-02 only, the drive will accelerate to this limit as soon as a Run command is
entered.
• If the lower limit is determined by an analog input only, the drive will accelerate to the limit as long as the Run
command and an Up or Down command are active. It will not start running if only the Run command is on.
• If the lower limit is set by both an analog input and d2-02, and the analog limit is higher than the d2-02 value, the drive
will accelerate to the d2-02 value when a Run command is input. Once the d2-02 value is reached, it will continue
Parameter Details
acceleration to the analog limit only if an Up or Down command is set.
Figure 5.39 shows an Up/Down function example with a lower frequency reference limit set by d2-02 and the frequency
reference hold function enabled/disabled.
Figure 5.39
Output frequency
upper limit
Accelerates to
lower limit
Lower limit
FWD run/stop ON
ON
Up command
ON Frequency
reference
reset
Down command
ON ON
Power supply
Figure 5.39 Up/Down Command Operation

Setting 12/13: FJOG/RJOG Reference
Digital inputs programmed as Forward Jog (H1- = 12) and Reverse Jog (H1- = 13) will be Jog inputs that do not
require a Run command. Closing the terminal set for Forward Jog input will cause the drive to ramp to the Jog Frequency
Reference (d1-17) in the forward direction. The Reverse Jog will cause the same action in the reverse direction. The
Forward Jog and Reverse Jog command can be set independently.
Note: The Forward Jog and Reverse Jog commands override all other frequency references. However, if the drive is set to prohibit
reverse rotation (b1-04 = 1), then activating Reverse Jog will have no effect. If both the Forward Jog and Reverse Jog are input
simultaneously for 500 ms or more, an external fault will occur and the drive will ramp to stop.
Figure 5.40
d1-17
Output
Frequency
d1-17
ON
FJOG
ON
RJOG
Figure 5.40 FJOG/RJOG Operation

Setting 14: Fault Reset
Whenever the drive detects a fault condition, the fault output contact will close and the drive’s output will shut off. The
motor then coasts to stop (specific stopping methods can be selected for some faults such as L1-04 for motor overheat).
Once the Run command is removed, the fault can be cleared by either the RESET key on the digital operator or by
closing a digital input configured as a Fault Reset (H1- = 14).
Note: Fault Reset commands are ignored as long as the Run command is present. To reset a fault, first remove the Run command.
Setting 15/17: Fast-stop (N.O./N.C.)
The Fast-stop function operates much like an emergency stop input to the drive. If a Fast-stop command is input while
the drive is running, the drive will decelerate to a stop by the deceleration time set to C1-09 (Refer to C1-09: Fast Stop
Time on page 141). The drive can only be restarted after is has come to a complete stop, the Fast-stop input is off, and the
Run command has been switched off.
• To trigger the Fast-stop function with a N.O. switch, set H1- = 15
• To trigger the Fast-stop function with a N.C. switch, set H1- = 17
Figure 5.41 shows an operation example of Fast-stop.

Figure 5.41
Run/Stop
ON ON
Fast-Stop
H1- = 17 ON ON
Decelerates at C1-09
Output Frequency
TIME
Figure 5.41 Fast-stop Sequence
NOTICE: Rapid deceleration can trigger an overvoltage fault. When faulted, the drive output shuts off, and the motor coasts. To avoid
this uncontrolled motor state and to ensure that the motor stops quickly and safely, set an appropriate Fast-stop time to C1-09.
Setting 16: Motor 2 Selection

The drive has the capability to control two motors independently. A second motor may be selected using a multi-function
digital input (H1- = 16) as shown in Figure 5.42.
Figure 5.42
Drive M Motor 1
Motor switch input
M Motor 2
Figure 5.42 Motor Selection

Motor 2 is selected when the input set for Motor 2 Selection closes. When operating motor 2,
• E3- and E4- become valid for motor control. Refer to E3: V/f Pattern for Motor 2 on page 158 and Refer to
E4: Motor 2 Parameters on page 159 for details.
• Accel/decel times set in parameters C1-05, C1-06, C1-07, and C1-08 are activated (Refer to C1-01 to C1-08: Accel,
Decel Times 1 to 4 on page 140 for details).
• E4-14 is used as gain for slip compensation instead of C3-01.
• E4-15 is used as gain for torque compensation instead of C4-01.
Parameter Details
• A digital output programmed for “Motor 2 Selection” (H2-01, H2-02, H2-03 = 1C) will be switched on.
Note: 1. When using 2 motors, the motor overload protection selection (oL1) set to L1-01 applies to both motor 1 and motor 2.
2. It is not possible to switch between motor 1 and motor 2 during run. Doing so will trigger a "rUn" alarm.
Setting 18: Timer Function Input
This setting configures a digital input terminal as the input for the timer function. Refer to b4: Delay Timers on page 127 5
for details.
Setting 19: PID Control Cancel
When the PID Function has been enabled by b5-01 (PID Mode Selection), it can be indefinitely disabled by closing a
digital input configured as a PID Disable (H1- = 19). When the input is released, the drive resumes PID operation.
Refer to PID Block Diagram on page 130 for more information on this function.
Setting 1A: Accel/Decel Time Selection 2
Used to select accel/decel times 3 and 4 in combination with the Accel/Decel Time Selection 1 command. Refer to C1-01
to C1-08: Accel, Decel Times 1 to 4 on page 140 for details.
Setting 1B: Program Lockout
When an input is programmed for Program Lockout, parameters values can be monitored but not changed as long as this
input is open.
Setting 20 to 2F: External Fault

By using the External Fault function, the drive can be stopped when problems occur with external devices.
To use the external fault function, set one of the multi-function digital inputs to any value between 20 to 2F. The operator
will display EF where is the number of the terminal (terminal S) to which the external fault signal is assigned.
For example, if an external fault signal is input to terminal S3, “EF3” will be displayed.
Select the value to be set in H1- from a combination of any of the following three conditions:
• Signal input level from peripheral devices (N.O./N.C.)
• External fault detection method
• Operation after external fault detection
The following table shows the relationship between the conditions and the value set to H1-:
Terminal Status <1> Detection Method <2> Stopping Method

Setting Detected Alarm Only
Always Ramp to Stop Coast to Stop Fast-stop
N.O. N.C. during Run (continue
Detected (fault) (fault) (fault)
only running)
20 O O O
21 O O O
22 O O O
23 O O O
24 O O O
25 O O O
26 O O O
27 O O O
28 O O O
29 O O O
2A O O O
2B O O O
2C O O O
2D O O O
2E O O O
2F O O O
<1> Determine the terminal status for each fault, i.e., whether the terminal is normally open or normally closed.
<2> Determine whether detection for each fault should be enabled only during run or always detected.
Setting 30: PID Integral Reset

By configuring one of the digital inputs as an Integral Reset Input, (H1- = 30), the value of the integral component of
PID control can be reset to 0 whenever the configured input is closed. The integral component of PID control will be held
at 0 as long as the configured digital input is held closed. Refer to PID Block Diagram on page 130 for details.
Setting 31: PID Integral Hold
By configuring a digital input for Integral Hold (H1-0 = 31), the value of the integral component of the PID control is
locked as long as the input is active. The PID controller resumes integral operation from the hold value as soon as the
integral hold input is released. Refer to PID Block Diagram on page 130 for details.
Setting 34: PID SFS Cancel
A digital input configured as a PID SFS Cancel input (H1-0 = 34) can be used to enable or disable the PID soft starter
and thereby canceling the Accel/Decel time b5-17. Refer to PID Block Diagram on page 130 for details.
Setting 35: PID Input Level Selection
An input programmed for this function can be used to switch the sign of the PID input. Refer to PID Block Diagram on
page 130 for more information on this function.
Setting 40/41: Forward Run/Reverse Run Command for 2-Wire Sequence
Sets the drive for 2-Wire sequence.
When the input set to 40 is closed, the drive operates in the forward direction. When the input set for 41 is closed, the
drive will operate in reverse. Closing both inputs at the same time will result in an external fault.
Note: 1. This function can not be used simultaneously with settings 42 and 43.
2. These functions are assigned to the terminals S1 and S2 when the drive is initialized for 2-Wire sequence.
Figure 5.43
Drive
Forward Run
S1
Reverse Run
S2
SC Digital Input Common
Figure 5.43 Example Wiring Diagram for 2-Wire Sequence

Setting 42/43: Run and Direction Command for 2-Wire Sequence 2
Sets the drive for 2-Wire sequence 2.
When the input programmed for 42 is closed, the drive will operate in the selected direction. When the input opens, the
drive will stop. The input programmed for 43 selects the direction. If it is open, forward direction is selected; if it is
closed, reverse direction is selected.
Note: This function can not be used simultaneously with settings 40 and 41.
Setting 44/45/46: Offset Frequency 1/2/3 Addition
These inputs can be used to add offset frequencies d7-01, d7-02, and d7-03 to the frequency reference. Refer to d7-01 to
d7-03: Offset Frequency 1 to 3 on page 153 for details.
Setting 47: Node Setup
When using the CANopen comm. option card SI-S3/T, the drive will set up the node address if this terminal closes.
Note: This setting is valid from software versions 6000 or later.
Setting 50: Disturb Function Cancel
When enabled, a terminal set to "50" cancels the Disturb function. The Disturb waveform is generated as long as the
terminal remains open. For more information, refer to S1: Disturb Function on page 225 .
Setting 51: Synchronous Accel/Decel
If this input is enabled the drive uses the accel/decel time setting as the time to accel/decel to the set frequency reference
(not maximum frequency). In this way, motors in a line system can be accelerated or decelerated synchronously.
Setting 53: Energy Saving On/Off
Parameter Details
This terminal can enable and disable the Energy Saving feature in the drive, regardless of what parameter b8-01 is set to.
For description of Energy Saving, see b8: Energy Saving on page 138.
Setting 59: DC Injection Braking 1
When this function is activated, the drive performs DC Injection Braking for as long as the input terminal is closed. The
drive uses the DC Injection Braking current level set in parameter b2-02. A Run command is not required to activate this 5
function. If the DC Injection 1 command is entered during run, the drive will perform DC Injection Braking.
Output Frequency
b2-02 (DC Injection

Braking Current)
b2-01 (Zero Speed Level)
E1-09 (Min. Frequency)
0 Hz
Run Command
ON OFF
H1- = 59
(DC Injection Braking 1
Command) ON OFF
Note: If b2-01 is set to a smaller value than parameter E1-09 (minimum frequency), then DC Injection Braking will begin as soon as
the frequency falls to the value set to E1-09.
Setting 60: DC Injection Braking 2

This function can be used to warm up the motor before starting it, and to keep the motor warm when stopped. The DC
Injection 2 command can be activated using a digital input (H1- = 60). A Run command is not necessary to use this
function.
Frequency Reference
Output Frequency b2-03 (DC Injection

Braking Time at Start)
b2-01 (Zero Speed Level)
E1-09 (Min. Frequency)
0 Hz
b2-10 (DC Injection b2-02 (DC Injection

Braking Current 2) Braking Current)
Run Command
ON OFF
H1- = 60
(DC Injection Braking 2 ON OFF
Command)
Note: 1. If a Run command is input while DC Injection 2 is active, then DC Injection 1 will be performed for the time set in b2-03.
Acceleration will not start until the time set in b2-03 has passed.
2. If the frequency reference is kept at zero after a Run command has been entered and the time b2-03 has passed, then the drive will
continue to perform DC Injection 2 until the digital input is released.
3. A Run command has priority over the DC Injection 2 command.
4. If b2-01 is set to a smaller value than parameter E1-09 (minimum frequency), then DC Injection Braking will begin as soon as the
frequency falls to the value set to E1-09.
Setting 61, 62: External Speed Search command 1, 2
These input functions can be used to enable Speed Search even if parameter b3-01 = 0 (no Speed Search at start). Refer
to b3-01: Speed Search Selection at Start on page 125 for details on how to use the input signals. Refer to b3: Speed
Search on page 122 for more about Speed Search.
Note: Operator error oPE03 will result if both Speed Search 1 and Speed Search 2 are set to the input terminals at the same time.
Setting 65/66: KEB 1 (N.C.)/2 (N.O.)
A digital input programmed for this function can be used to activate the KEB 1 function and detect power supply return.
If KEB 1 is activated, the drive uses the method selected in parameter S4-01 to perform KEB.
Digital Inputs
Description
Setting 65 (N.C.) Setting 66 (N.O.)
KEB 1 deceleration Open Closed
Normal operation Closed Open
Refer to S4: KEB Mode Selection on page 227 for details on how to use these input settings.
Setting 67: Communication Test Mode
The drive has a built-in function for self-diagnosing the serial communications operation. The test involves wiring the
send and receive terminals of the RS-485/422 port together. The drive transmits data and then confirms the
communications are received normally. Refer to Self-Diagnostics on page 418 for details on how to use this function.
Setting 7C/7D: Short Circuit Braking (N.O./N.C.) (PM OLV only)
An input programmed for this function can be used to activate Short Circuit Braking in Open Loop Vector Control for
PM motors. By linking all three phases of a PM motor it creates a braking torque in a rotating motor and can be used to
stop a rotating motor or prevent a motor from coasting by external forces.
Digital Inputs
Description
Setting 7C (N.O.) Setting 7D (N.C.)
Normal operation Open Closed
Short-Circuit Braking Closed Open
Setting 7E: Forward Reverse Detection (V/f Control with Simple PG Feedback)
When a digital input is programmed for this function, the input determines the direction of the speed feedback signal for
V/f Control with PG feedback. If the input is open, the speed feedback signal is considered to be forward, if the input is
closed, it is considered to be in reverse. Refer to C5: Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR) on page 145 for details.
◆ H2: Multi-Function Digital Outputs

■ H2-01 to H2-03: Terminal MA, MB and MC P1-PC and P2-PC Function Selection
The drive has three multi-function output terminals. Set parameters H2-01 to H2-03 between 0 and 192 to assign
functions to these terminals. Default values are listed in the following table.

H2-01 Terminal MA, MB and MC Function Selection (relay) 0 to 152 E: Fault
H2-02 Terminal P1-PC Function Selection (open-collector) 0 to 152 0: During Run
H2-03 Terminal P2-PC Function Selection (open-collector) 0 to 152 2: Speed Agree 1
Note: If not using an input terminal or if using it in the through-mode, be sure to set that terminal to “F”.
Table 5.17 Multi-Function Output Terminal Settings
0 During Run 175 1A During Reverse Operation 182
1 Zero Speed 176 1B During Baseblock (N.C.) 182
2 Speed Agree 1 176 1C Motor 2 Selection 182
3 User Set Speed Agree 1 176 1E Restart Enabled 182
4 Frequency Detection 1 177 1F Motor Overload Alarm (oL1) 182
5 Frequency Detection 2 177 20 Heatsink Overheat Pre alarm (oH) 182
6 Drive Ready 178 30 During Torque Limit 182
7 DC Bus Undervoltage 178 37 During Frequency Output 182
8 During Baseblock (N.O.) 178 39 Watt Hour Pulse Output 183
9 Frequency Reference Source 178 3C LOCAL/REMOTE Status 183
A Run Command Source 178 3D During Speed Search 183
B Torque Detection 1 (N.O.) 179 3E PID Feedback Low 183
C Frequency Reference Loss 179 3F PID Feedback High 183
D Braking Resistor Fault 179 4A During KEB Operation 183
E Fault 179 4B During Short-Circuit Braking 183
F Not used/Through Mode 179 4C During Fast-stop 183
10 Alarm 179 50 Disturb Function Up 183
Parameter Details
11 Reset Command Active 179 51 Disurb Function Enabled/Disabled 183
12 Timer Output 179 52 Uv during KEB 184
13 Speed Agree 2 179 100 to 10D Inverse Output of Setting 0 to D
14 User Set Speed Agree 2 180 10F to 11B Inverse Output of Setting F to 1B
15 Frequency Detection 3 180 11E to 120 Inverse Output of Setting 1E to 20
184
16 Frequency Detection 4 181 137, 138 Inverse Output of Setting 37 and 38 5
17 Torque Detection 1 (N.C.) 13C to 14C Inverse Output of Setting 3C to 4C
179
18 Torque Detection 2 (N.O.) 14F to 152 Inverse Output of Setting 14F to 152
19 Torque Detection 2 (N.C.) 179
Setting 0: During Run

Output closes when the drive is outputting a voltage.
Status Description
Open Drive is stopped.
Closed A Run command is input or the drive is during deceleration or during DC injection.
Figure 5.44
Run command OFF ON
Baseblock OFF ON
command
Output
frequency
During Run OFF ON
Figure 5.44 During Run Time Chart

Setting 1: Zero Speed
Terminal closes whenever the output frequency falls below the minimum output frequency set to E1-09.
Status Description
Open Output frequency is above the minimum output frequency set to E1-09
Closed Output frequency is less than the minimum output frequency set to E1-09
Figure 5.45
Output frequency
or
motor speed E1-09 (Max. Output Frequency)
OFF ON
Zero Speed
Figure 5.45 Zero-Speed Time Chart
Setting 2: Speed Agree 1 (fref/fout Agree 1)

Closes whenever the actual output frequency is within the Speed Agree Width (L4-02) of the current frequency reference
regardless of the direction.
Status Description
Open Output frequency does not match the frequency reference while the drive is running.
Closed Output frequency is within the range of frequency reference ± L4-02.
Note: Detection works in both directions, forward and reverse.

Figure 5.46
Frequency
reference
Output L4-02
frequency
L4-02
Speed agree 1 OFF ON
Figure 5.46 Speed Agree 1 Time Chart

Refer to L4-01, L4-02: Speed Agreement Detection Level and Detection Width on page 202 for details on setting the
detection width.
Setting 3: User Set Speed Agree 1 (fref/fset Agree 1)
Closes whenever the actual output frequency and the frequency reference are within the Speed Agree Width (L4-02) of
the programmed Speed Agree Level (L4-01).
Status Description
Open Output frequency or frequency reference are outside the range of L4-01 ± L4-02.
Closed Output frequency and the frequency reference are both with in the range of L4-01 ± L4-02.
Note: The detection works in both forward and reverse. The value of L4-01 will be used as the detection level for both directions.
Figure 5.47
Output
frequency
Frequency L4-01 Output

reference frequency
+/- L4-02
L4-01
Frequency
reference +/- L4-02
User Set
OFF ON OFF ON
Speed Agree 1
Figure 5.47 User Set Speed Agree 1 Time Chart

detection width.
Setting 4: Frequency Detection 1
Output is closed as long as the output frequency is below the detection level set in L4-01 plus the hysteresis set in L4-02.
It closes when the output frequency falls below L4-01.
Status Description
Open Output frequency exceeded L4-01 + L4-02.
Closed Output frequency is below L4-01 or has not exceeded L4-01 + L4-02.
Figure 5.48
Output
frequency L4-02
L4-01
L4-01
L4-02
Parameter Details
Frequency
ON OFF
detection 1
Figure 5.48 Frequency Detection 1 Time Chart

Refer to L4-01, L4-02: Speed Agreement Detection Level and Detection Width on page 202 for details on setting the 5
detection width.
Output closes whenever the output frequency is equal to or above the detection level set in L4-01. The output opens when
the output frequency falls below L4-01 minus the hysteresis set in L4-02.
Status Description
Open Output frequency is below L4-01 minus L4-02 or has not exceeded L4-01.
Closed Output frequency exceeded L4-01.
Figure 5.49
Output
frequency L4-02
L4-01
L4-01
L4-02
Frequency
OFF ON
Detection 2
Figure 5.49 Frequency Detection 2 Time Chart

detection width.
Setting 6: Drive Ready
Output closes whenever the drive is ready to operate the motor.
Status Description
Open During power up, initialization, fault or in Programming Mode (while b1-08 = 0 or 2).
Closed Drive is ready for operation.
Refer to b1-08: Run Command Selection while in Programming Mode on page 119 for details on the setting of b1-08.
Setting 7: DC Bus Undervoltage
Output closes whenever the DC bus voltage or control circuit power supply drops below the trip level. The undervoltage
trip level is determined by L2-05. A fault in the DC bus charge circuit will also cause the DC Bus Undervoltage output to
close.
Status Description
Open DC bus voltage is above the level set to L2-05
Closed DC bus voltage has fallen below the trip level set to L2-05.
Setting 8: During Baseblock (N.O.)

Output closes to indicate that the drive is in a baseblock state. While Baseblock is executed, output transistors are not
switched and no voltage will be output.
Status Description
Open Drive is not in a baseblock state.
Closed Baseblock is being executed.
Setting 9: Frequency Reference Source

A digital output programmed for this function shows the frequency reference source that is currently selected.
Status Description
Open Frequency reference is provided from External Reference 1 (b1-01) or 2 (b1-15)
Closed Frequency reference is being sourced from the digital operator.
Setting A: Run Command Source

A digital output programmed for this function shows the Run command source that is currently selected.
Status Description
Open Run command is provided from External Reference 1 (b1-02) or 2 (b1-16)
Closed Run command is being sourced from the digital operator.
Setting B/17/18/19: Torque Detection 1 (N.O./N.C.) and Torque Detection 2 (N.O./N.C.)

These digital output functions can be used to signal an overtorque or undertorque situation to an external device.
Set up the torque detection and select the output function from the table below. Refer to L6: Torque Detection on
Setting Status Description

Torque Detection 1 (N.O.):
B Closed Output current/torque exceeds (overtorque detection) or is below (undertorque detection) the torque value set in
parameter L6-02 for longer than the time specified in parameter L6-03.
Torque Detection 1 (N.C.):
17 Open Output current/torque exceeds (overtorque detection) or is below (undertorque detection) the torque value set in
Torque Detection 2 (N.O.):
18 Closed Output current/torque exceeds (overtorque detection) or is below (undertorque detection) the torque value set in
Torque Detection 2 (N.C.):
19 Open Output current/torque exceeds (overtorque detection) or is below (undertorque detection) the torque value set in
Setting C: Frequency Reference Loss

An output set for this function will be closed if frequency reference loss is detected. Refer to L4-05: Frequency
Reference Loss Detection Selection on page 202 for details.
Setting D: Dynamic Braking Resistor Overheat
An output programmed for this function will close when the dynamic braking resistor (DB) overheats or the braking
transistor is in a fault condition.
Setting E: Fault
The Fault configured digital output will close whenever the drive experiences a fault.
Setting F: Not Used
Use this setting when the terminal is not used or when using the terminal as a throughput.
When set to “F”, the output is not set by any drive function but it can be switched by a PLC via a communication option
or MEMOBUS/Modbus communications (through mode).
Setting 10: Minor Fault
Output closes when a minor fault condition is present.
Setting 11: Reset Command Active
Parameter Details
Output closes whenever there is an attempt to reset a fault situation from the control circuit terminals, via serial
communications, or using a communications option card.
Setting 12: Timer Output
This setting configures a digital output terminal as output for the timer function. Refer to b4: Delay Timers on page 127
for details. 5
Setting 13: Speed Agree 2 (fref /fout Agree 2)
Closes whenever the actual output frequency is within the Speed Agree Width (L4-04) of the current frequency reference
regardless of the direction.
Status Description
Open Output frequency does not match the frequency reference while the drive is running
Closed Output frequency is within the range of frequency reference ± L4-04
Note: The detection works in both forward and reverse.
Figure 5.50
Frequency
reference
Output L4-04
frequency
L4-04
Speed Agree 2 OFF ON
Figure 5.50 Speed Agree 2 Time Chart

Refer to L4-03, L4-04: Speed Agreement Detection Level and Detection Width (+/–) on page 202 for details on setting
the detection width.
Setting 14: User Set Speed Agree 2 (fref /fset Agree 2)
Closes whenever the actual output frequency and the frequency reference are within the Speed Agree Width (L4-04) of
the programmed Speed Agree Level (L4-03). As the detection level L4-03 is a signed value, detection works in the
specified direction only.
Status Description
Open Output frequency or frequency reference are outside the range of L4-03 ± L4-04
Closed Output frequency and the frequency reference are both with in the range of L4-03 ± L4-04
Figure 5.51
Output
frequency
Frequency L4-03 Output

reference frequency
+/- L4-04
Frequency
reference
User Set
OFF ON
Speed Agree 2
Figure 5.51 User Set Speed Agree 2 Example with Positive L3-04 Value
Output is closed as long as the output frequency is below the detection level set in L4-03 plus the hysteresis set in L4-04.
It closes when the output frequency falls below L4-03. As the detection level L4-03 is a signed value, the detection works
in the specified direction only.
Status Description
Open Output frequency exceeded L4-03 plus L4-04.
Closed Output frequency is below L4-03 or has not exceeded L4-03 plus L4-04 yet.
Figure 5.52
Output
frequency L4-04
L4-03
Frequency
ON OFF
detection 3
Figure 5.52 Frequency Detection 3 Example with Positive L3-04 Value

Output closes whenever the output frequency is equal to or above the detection level set in L4-03. The output opens when
the output frequency falls below L4-03 minus the hysteresis set in L4-04. As the detection level L4-03 is a signed value,
the detection works in the specified direction only.
Status Description
Open Output frequency is below L4-03 minus L4-04 or has not exceeded L4-03 yet.
Closed Output frequency exceeded L4-03.
Figure 5.53
Output
frequency L4-04
L4-03
Frequency
OFF ON
Detection 4
Figure 5.53 Frequency Detection 4 Example with Positive L3-04 Value
Parameter Details
Setting 1A: During Reverse

The During Reverse digital output will close whenever the drive is turning the motor in the reverse direction.
Status Description
Open Motor is driven in the forward direction or stopped.
Closed Motor is driven in reverse.
Figure 5.54
Output frequency
FWD Run command
REV Run command
OFF ON
During Reverse
time
Figure 5.54 Reverse Direction Output Example Time Chart

Setting 1B: During Baseblock (N.C.)
Output opens to indicate that the drive is in a baseblock state. While Baseblock is executed, output transistors are not
switched and no voltage is output.
Status Description
Open Baseblock is being executed.
Closed Drive is not in a baseblock state.
Setting 1C: Motor 2 Selected

This output function shows the motor 1/2 selection status. Refer to Setting 16: Motor 2 Selection on page 171 for details
on switching motors.
Status Description
Open Motor 1 is selected.
Closed Motor 2 is selected.
Setting 1E: Restart Enabled

The Restart Enabled output will be closed once the fault restart function becomes active and will remain closed until a
successful restart is accomplished or the number of Auto Restart attempts as specified by L5-01 is reached. Refer to L5:
Fault Restart on page 204 for details on automatic fault restart.
Setting 1F: Motor Overload Alarm oL1
An output programmed for this function will be closed when the motor overload level estimated by the oL1 fault
detection exceeds 90% of the oL1 detection level. Refer to L1-01: Motor Overload Protection Selection on page 192 for
details.
Setting 20: Heatsink Overheat Pre-alarm (oH)
Output closes whenever the drive heatsink temperature reaches the level specified by parameter L8-02. Refer to L8-02:
Overheat Alarm Level on page 208 for details on drive overheat detection.
Setting 30: During Torque Limit
Output closes when the motor is operating at the torque limit specified by the L7- parameters or an analog input.
This setting is only valid when using Open Loop Vector Control (A1-02 = 2). Refer to L7-01 to L7-04: Torque Limits on
Setting 37: During Frequency Output
Output closes when the drive is outputting a frequency.
Status Description
Open Drive is stopped or one of the following functions is being performed: baseblock, DC Injection Braking, Short-Circuit Braking.
Closed Drive is outputting frequency.
Figure 5.55
run command OFF ON
baseblock OFF ON
command
output
frequency
during run OFF ON
during frequency OFF ON

output
Figure 5.55 During Frequency Output Time Chart
Setting 39: Watt Hour Pulse Output
Outputs a pulse to indicate the watt hours. Refer to H2-06: Watt Hour Output Unit Selection on page 184 for details.
Setting 3C: LOCAL/REMOTE Status
Output terminal closes while the drive is set for LOCAL and opens when in REMOTE.
Status Description
REMOTE: The selected external reference (b1-01 and b1-02, or b1-15 and b1-16) is used as frequency reference and Run
Open
command source
Closed LOCAL: The digital operator is used as frequency reference and Run command source
Setting 3D: During Speed Search

Output terminal closes while Speed Search is being performed. Refer to b3: Speed Search on page 122 for details on the
Speed Search function.
Setting 3E: PID Feedback Low
Output terminal closes when a PID feedback loss is detected. The feedback is considered to be lost if it falls below the
level set to b5-13 for longer than the time set to b5-14. Refer to PID Feedback Loss Detection on page 133 for details.
Setting 3F: PID Feedback High
Output terminal closes when a PID feedback loss is detected. The feedback is considered to be lost if it rises beyond the
Parameter Details
level set to b5-36 for longer than the time set to b5-37. Refer to PID Feedback Loss Detection on page 133 for details.
Setting 4A: During KEB Operation
Output closes to indicate KEB is being executed. If the acceleration time set to S5-05 for when power is restored is 0.0 s,
then this terminal will close as soon as KEB begins, and remain closed until the frequency hold time set to S4-12 has
passed. 5
If S5-05 is set greater than 0.0 s, then an output terminal set to 4A will remain closed only for the time set to S5-05.
Setting 4B: During Short Circuit Braking
Closes the output terminal while Short Circuit Braking is being executed.
Setting 4C: During Fast-stop
Output terminal closes when a Fast-stop is being executed. C1-09: Fast Stop Time on page 141 for details.
Setting 50: Disturb Function Up
Output terminal closes if the motor accelerates when the Disturb waveform is being output. For more information, see
S1: Disturb Function on page 225.
Setting 51: Disurb Function Enabled/Disabled
Indicates that the Disturb function is activated by closing whenever the Disturb waveform is output. For more
information, see S1: Disturb Function on page 225.
Setting 52: Uv during KEB

Terminal closes if the DC bus voltage falls below the level set to L2-05 during KEB.
Setting 100 to 152: Reverse Switching for Functions 0 to 52
These settings reverse the switching status of the specified function. Set as 1, where the last two digits specify the
setting number of the function to be reversed.
Examples:
• To reverse the output for “8: During Baseblock”, set “108”.
• To reverse the output for “4A: During KEB” set “14A”.
■ H2-06: Watt Hour Output Unit Selection
When one of the multi-function terminals is set to output the number of watt hours (H2-01, H2-02, H2-03 = 39),
parameter H2-06 determines the units for the output signal.
The output is intended to drive a watt hour meter or a PLC input by a 200 ms pulse signal. A pulse is output according to
the kWh unit selected in H2-06.

0: 0.1 kWh units
1: 1 kWh units
H2-06 Watt Hour Output Unit Selection 2: 10 kWh units 0
3: 100 kWh units
4: 1000 kWh units
◆ H3: Multi-Function Analog Input Terminals

The drive is equipped with 2 multi-function analog input terminals, A1 and A2. The user can assign functions to these
terminals by setting parameters H3-02 and H3-10 between 0 and 31.
■ H3-01: Terminal A1 Signal Level Selection
Selects the input signal level for analog input A1.

H3-01 Terminal A1 Signal Level Selection 0 to 1 0
Setting 0: 0 to 10 Vdc with Limit

The input level is 0 to 10 Vdc. Negative input values will be limited to 0.
Example: Terminal A1 is set to supply the frequency reference, and the bias (H3-04) is set to -100%. The frequency
reference can be set from 0 to 100% with an analog input of 5 to 10 V. The frequency reference will be zero when the
analog input is between 0 and 5 V.
Figure 5.56
100%
Analog input
value
0 10 V
Analog input
voltage
-100% Negative input is limited to 0
Figure 5.56 Analog Input with Limit (Bias Setting -100%)
Setting 1: 0 to 10 Vdc without Limit

The input level is 0 to 10 Vdc. Negative input values will be accepted.
Example: Terminal A1 is set to supply the frequency reference, and the bias (H3-04) is set to -100%. The frequency
reference can be set from 0 to 100% with an analog input of 5 to 10 V. With an input of 0 to 5 V, the frequency reference
can be set from -100% to 0%. The drive reverses the motor rotation with negative input.
Figure 5.57
100%
Analog input
value
0V 10 V
Analog input
voltage
-100%
Figure 5.57 Analog Input without Limit (Bias Setting -100%)
■ H3-02: Terminal A1 Function Selection

Determines the function assigned to analog input terminal A1. Refer to Multi-Function Analog Input Terminal Settings
on page 187 for a list of functions and descriptions.

H3-02 Terminal A1 Function Selection 0 to 1F 0
Note: If not using an input terminal or if using it in the through-mode, be sure to set that terminal to “F”.
■ H3-03, H3-04: Terminal A1 Gain and Bias Settings

Parameter H3-03 sets the level of the selected input value that is equal to 10 Vdc input at terminal A1 (Gain).
Parameter H3-04 sets the level of the selected input value that is equal to 0 V input at terminal A1.
Both can be used to adjust the analog input A1 characteristics.
Parameter Details
H3-03 Terminal A1 Gain Setting -999.9 to 999.9% 100.0%
H3-04 Terminal A1 Bias Setting -999.9 to 999.9% 0.0%
Default Settings
Using the factory default settings for the analog input’s function, gain, and bias, the 0 to 10 Vdc signal at the analog input
will yield a 0 to 100% frequency reference span. 5
Figure 5.58
Gain = 100 %
Frequency
reference
Bias = 0 %
0V 10 V
Figure 5.58 Analog Input A1 Default Characteristics

Setting Examples
• Gain H3-03 = 200%, A1 as frequency reference input:
An input 10 Vdc will be equivalent to a 200% frequency reference and 5 Vdc will be equivalent to a 100% frequency
reference. Since the drive output is limited by the maximum frequency parameter (E1-04), the frequency reference will
be equal to E1-04 above 5 Vdc.
Figure 5.59
Gain = 200 %
Frequency
reference
100 %
E1-04
Bias = 0 %
0V 5V 10 V
Figure 5.59 Frequency Reference Setting by Analog Input with Increased Gain
• Bias H3-04 = -25%, A1 as frequency reference input
An input of 0 Vdc will be equivalent to a -25% frequency reference.
When parameter H3-01 = 0 the minimum frequency reference is 0% between 0 and 2.5 Vdc input. An analog input of
2.5 to 10 Vdc will now be the same as 0 to 100% of the frequency reference span.
When parameter H3-01 = 1, the motor will rotate in reverse between 0 and 2.5 Vdc input.
Figure 5.60
Gain = 100 %
Frequency H3-01 = 0
reference
0
2.0 V 10 V
Bias = -25%
H3-01 = 1
Figure 5.60 Frequency Reference Setting by Analog Input with Negative Bias
• Gain = 0%, Bias = 100%, A1 as frequency reference input
This setting leads to an inverse-acting frequency reference. The minimum analog input level (0 Vdc) will produce a
100% frequency reference and the maximum analog input level (10 Vdc) will produce a 0% frequency reference.
Figure 5.61
Bias = 100 %
Frequency
reference
Gain = 0 %
0V 10 V
Figure 5.61 Frequency Reference Setting by Analog Input with Inverse Gain and Bias Settings
■ H3-09: Terminal A2 Signal Level Selection

Selects the input signal level for analog input A2. Be sure to also set DIP switch S1 on the terminal board accordingly for
a voltage input or current input.

H3-09 Terminal A2 Signal Level Selection 0 to 3 2
Setting 0: 0 to 10 Vdc with Lower Limit

The input level is 0 to 10 Vdc. Negative input values will be limited to 0. Refer to the explanation of H3-01, Setting 0.
Refer to Setting 0: 0 to 10 Vdc with Limit on page 184
Setting 1: 0 to 10 Vdc without Lower Limit
The input level is 0 to 10 Vdc. Negative input values will be accepted. Refer to the explanation of H3-01, Setting 1. Refer
to Setting 1: 0 to 10 Vdc without Limit on page 185
Setting 2: 4 to 20 mA Current Input

The input level is 4 to 20 mA. Negative input values by negative bias or gain settings will be limited to 0 (like setting 0).
Setting 3: 0 to 20 mA Current Input
The input level is 0 to 20 mA. Negative input values by negative bias or gain settings will be limited to 0 (like setting 0).
■ H3-10: Terminal A2 Function Selection
Determines the function assigned to analog input terminal A2. Refer to Multi-Function Analog Input Terminal Settings
on page 187 for a list of functions and descriptions.

H3-10 Terminal A2 Function Selection 0 to 1F 0
■ H3-11, H3-12: Terminal A2 Gain and Bias Setting

Parameter H3-11 sets the level of the selected input value that is equal to 10 Vdc/20 mA input at terminal A2 (Gain).
Parameter H3-12 sets the level of the selected input value that is equal to 0 Vdc/4 mA/0 mA input at terminal A2.
Both can be used to adjust the analog input A2 characteristics. The setting works in the same way as parameters H3-03
and H3-04 for analog input A1.

H3-11 Terminal A2 Gain Setting -999.9 to 999.9% 100.0%
H3-12 Terminal A2 Bias Setting -999.9 to 999.9% 0.0%
■ H3-13: Analog Input Filter Time Constant

Parameter H3-13 sets the time constant for a first order filter that will be applied to both analog inputs A1 and A2.

H3-13 Analog Input Filter Time Constant 0.00 to 2.00 s 0.03 s
An analog input filter can be used to prevent erratic drive control when a “noisy” analog reference is used. The drive
operation becomes more stable the longer the time programmed, but it becomes less responsive to rapidly changing
analog signals.
■ Multi-Function Analog Input Terminal Settings
This section describes the various functions that can be assigned to terminal A1 and A2 by setting H3-02 and H3-10.
Parameter Details
Note: The scaling of all input functions depends on the gain and bias settings for the analog inputs. Set these to appropriate values
when selecting and adjusting analog input functions.

0 Frequency Bias 187 F Not used/Through Mode 188
1 Frequency Gain 188 10 Forward Torque Limit
2 Auxiliary Frequency Reference 188 11 Reverse Torque Limit
5
189
4 Output Voltage Bias 188 12 Regenerative Torque Limit
7 Overtorque/Undertorque Detection Level 188 15 General Torque Limit
B PID Feedback 188 16 Differential PID Feedback 189
C PID Set Point 188 1F Not used/Through Mode 188
E Motor Temperature (PTC input) 188
Setting 0: Frequency Bias

The input value of an analog input set to this function will be added to the analog frequency reference value. Use this
setting also when only one analog input is used to supply the frequency reference.
By default both analog inputs A1 and A2 are set for this function. Using both A1 and A2 at the same time increases the
frequency reference by the total of both inputs.
Example: If the analog frequency reference by analog input A1 is 50% and a bias of 20% is applied by analog input A2,
the resulting frequency reference will be 70% of the maximum output frequency.
Setting 1: Frequency Gain
The input value of an analog input set to this function will be multiplied with the analog frequency reference value.
Example: If the analog frequency reference from analog input A1 is 80% and a gain of 50% is applied from analog input
A2, the resulting frequency reference will be 40% of the maximum output frequency.
Setting 2: Auxiliary Reference
Sets the auxiliary frequency reference when Multi-Step Speed operation is selected. Refer to Multi-Step Speed Selection
on page 151 for details.
Setting 4: Voltage Bias
Voltage bias boosts the output voltage of the V/f curve as a percentage of the maximum output voltage (E1-05). Available
only when using V/f Control.
Setting 7: Overtorque/Undertorque Level
Overtorque level sets the overtorque/undertorque detection level using the analog input. This works with Torque
Detection Selection 1 (L6-01) and will take the place of the torque detection level set to L6-02. For general Open Loop
Vector Control, this function is based on 100% of the motor rated torque. For V/f Control and PM Open Loop Vector, this
function is based on 100% of the drive rated current. Refer to L6: Torque Detection on page 205 for details on torque
detection.
Setting B: PID Feedback
An input set for this function supplies the PID feedback value. This setting requires PID operation to be enabled in b5-01.
Refer to PID Feedback Input Methods on page 129.
Setting C: PID Set Point
An input set for this function supplies the PID set point value. The frequency reference selected in parameter b1-01 no
longer becomes the PID set point. This setting requires PID operation to be enabled in b5-01. Refer to PID Setpoint
Input Methods on page 129.
Setting E: Motor Temperature
In addition to or in place of the oL1 (motor overload) fault detection, it is possible to use a PTC (Positive Temperature
Coefficient) thermistor for motor insulation protection. Refer to Motor Protection Using a Positive Temperature
Coefficient (PTC) on page 194 for detailed explanations.
Setting F/1F: Not Used/Through Mode
Any analog input that is not used should be set to F. When set to “F”, an input does not affect any drive function but the
input level can be read out by a PLC via a communication option or MEMOBUS/Modbus communications (through
mode). This way drive analog inputs can be used to read out external sensor values if there is a lack of PLC analog
inputs.
Setting 10/11/12/15: Positive/Negative/Regenerative/General Torque Limit (OLV only)

These functions make it possible to limit the torque reference with an analog input. The limit can either be set as a
general value for all operation conditions (setting 15) or can be programmed separately for each operation condition
(quadrants 1, 2, 3, and 4). Figure 5.62 shows which limit is applied in each quadrant. The lowest of the values will
always be used as the limit. The value is set as a percentage of the motor rated torque. Refer to L7: Torque Limit on
page 207 for information how torque limits work.
Figure 5.62
positive torque reference
REV run regenerative FWD run motoring
10: Positive Torque Limit 10: Positive Torque Limit

12: Regenerative Torque Limit 15: Torque Limit
15: Torque Limit Parameter L7-01
Parameter L7-04
quadrant 2 quadrant 1
REV motor rotation FWD motor rotation
quadrant 3 quadrant 4
11: Negative Torque Limit
11: Negative Torque Limit 12: Regenerative Torque Limit
15: Torque Limit 15: Torque Limit
Parameter L7-03 Parameter L7-02
REV run motoring FWD run regenerative
negative torque reference
Figure 5.62 Analog Input Torque Limits

Setting 16: Differential PID Feedback
If an analog value is set for this function, the PID controller is set for differential feedback. The subtraction of the PID
feedback input value and the differential feedback input value builds the feedback value that is used to calculate the PID
input. Refer to PID Feedback Input Methods on page 129.
◆ H4: Multi-Function Analog Outputs

These parameters assign a function to analog output terminal AM for monitoring a specific aspect of drive performance.
■ H4-01: Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal AM Monitor Selection
Sets the desired drive monitor parameter U- to output as an analog value via terminal AM. Refer to U: Operation
Status Monitors on page 368 for a list of all monitors. The “Analog Output Level” columns indicates if a monitor can be
applied for analog output.
Example: Enter “103” for U1-03.
Parameter Details
H4-01 Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal AM Monitor Selection 000 to 999 102
A setting of 031 or 000 applies no drive monitor to the analog output. With this setting the terminal AM output level can
be set by a PLC via a communication option or MEMOBUS/Modbus communications (through mode).
■ H4-02, H4-03: Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal AM Gain and Bias
5
Parameter H4-02 sets the output voltage that is equal to 100% of the monitor value. Parameter H4-03 sets the voltage
added to the monitor output.
Both values are set as a percentage of 10 V. The minimum output voltage for terminal AM is 0 V, the maximum is 10
Vdc. Figure 5.63 illustrates the function of the gain and bias settings.

H4-02 Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal AM Gain -999.9 to 999.9% 100.0%
H4-03 Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal AM Bias -999.9 to 999.9% 0.0%
Figure 5.63
10 V 10 V
Gain 150%
Terminal AM Terminal AM Bias 30%
Bias 0%
output output Gain 100%
voltage voltage
Gain 100%
5V Bias 0% Bias 0%
3V Gain 100%
Gain 50%
Bias 0%
0V 0V
0% Monitor value 100% 0% Monitor value 100%
Figure 5.63 Analog Output Gain/Bias Setting

When viewing the settings for H4-02, terminal AM will output a voltage that is equal to 100% of the monitor value
(taking the present gain and bias into consideration). When viewing the settings for H4-03, terminal AM will output a
voltage that is equal to 0% of the monitor value.
◆ H5: MEMOBUS/Modbus Serial Communication

Through the drives built in RS-422/485 port (terminals R+, R-, S+, S-), serial communication can be performed with
programmable logic controllers (PLCs) or similar devices using the MEMOBUS/Modbus protocol.
The H5- parameters are used to set up the drive for MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications. Refer to MEMOBUS/
Modbus Serial Communication on page 398 for detailed descriptions of the H5- parameters.
◆ H6: Pulse Train Input/Output

A one track pulse train signal with a maximum frequency of 32 kHz can be input to the drive at terminal RP. This pulse
train signal can be used as the frequency reference, for PID functions, or as the speed feedback signal in V/f Control.
The pulse output monitor terminal MP, which can be used in sinking or sourcing mode, can output drive monitors values
as a pulse train signal with a maximum frequency of 32 kHz.
Use parameters H6- to scale and set up the function for the pulse input terminal RP and pulse output terminal MP.
■ H6-01: Pulse Train Input Terminal RP Function Selection
Selects the function of pulse train input terminal RP.

H6-01 Pulse Train Input Terminal RP Function Selection 0 to 4 0
Setting 0: Frequency Reference

If the pulse input is set for this function and the frequency reference source is set to pulse input (b1-01 and b1-15 = 4), the
drive reads the frequency value from terminal RP.
Setting 1: PID Feedback Value
Using this setting, the feedback value for PID control can be supplied as a pulse signal at terminal RP. Refer to b5: PID
Control on page 128 for details on PID control.
Setting 2: PID Setpoint Value
Using this setting, the setpoint value for PID control can be supplied as a pulse signal at terminal RP. Refer to b5: PID
Control on page 128 for details on PID control.
Setting 3: Speed Feedback for V/f Control (V/f Control only, Motor 1 only)
This setting enables simple speed feedback for V/f Control. A pulse signal can be used to input the motor speed to the
drive and thereby improve the speed control accuracy. Note that this speed feedback can only be a one track signal that
can not be used for direction detection. The drive needs a separate motor rotation direction signal. Refer to C5:
Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR) on page 145 for details on using Simple V/f Control with Speed Feedback.
■ H6-02: Pulse Train Input Scaling

The pulse train input scaling parameter sets the terminal RP input frequency that is equal to 100% of the signal selected
as the input value in parameter H6-01.

H6-02 Pulse Train Input Scaling 100 to 32000 Hz 1440 Hz
■ H6-03: Pulse Train Input Gain

Sets the level of the value selected in H6-01 when a pulse train signal with the frequency set in H6-02 is input to terminal
RP.

H6-03 Pulse Train Input Gain 0.0 to 1000.0% 100.0%
■ H6-04: Pulse Train Input Bias

Sets the level of the value selected in H6-01 when a 0 Hz signal is input to terminal RP.

H6-04 Pulse Train Input Bias -100.0 to 100.0% 0.0%
■ H6-05: Pulse Train Input Filter Time

Sets the pulse train input filter time constant in seconds.
The pulse train input filter time is useful for preventing noise interference from causing erroneous operation when
operating the drive with the pulse train signal. The longer the filter time is, the more effective the noise prevention is,
although this increasingly slows drive response time.

H6-05 Pulse Train Input Filter Time 0.00 to 2.00 s 0.10 s
■ H6-06: Pulse Train Monitor Selection

Selects the pulse train monitor output terminal MP function. The set value is equal to the numerals in U- of
the selected monitor. Refer to U: Operation Status Monitors on page 368 for a complete list of monitors. Selectable
monitor items are listed below.

000, 031, 101, 102, 105,
H6-06 Pulse Train Monitor Selection 116, 501, 502, 702 to 711, 102
Parameter Details
801 to 809
■ H6-07: Pulse Train Monitor Scaling

Pulse train monitor scaling sets the output frequency at terminal MP when the monitor item is 100%. Set H6-06 to 102
and H6-07 to 0 to make the pulse train monitor output synchronous to the output frequency.
5
H6-07 Pulse Train Monitor Scaling 0 to 32000 Hz 1440 Hz
■ H6-08: Pulse Train Input Minimum Frequency

Sets the minimum output frequency that can be detected by the pulse train input. Decreasing this setting reduces the time
the drive needs to react to changes in the input signal.
• If the pulse input frequency falls below this level, the pulse input value will be 0.
• Enabled when H6-01 = 0, 1, or 2.
• When simple speed feedback in V/f Control is set as the function for terminal RP (H6-01 = 3), the minimum frequency
becomes the detection time for PG disconnect (F1-14).

H6-08 Pulse Train Input Minimum Frequency 0.1 to 1000.0 Hz 0.5 Hz
5.8 L: Protection Functions

◆ L1: Motor Protection Functions
■ L1-01: Motor Overload Protection Selection
The drive has an electronic overload protection function that estimates the motor overload level based on output current,
output frequency, thermal motor characteristics, and time. An oL1 fault will be triggered when motor overload is
detected.
L1-01 sets the overload protection function characteristics according to the motor being used.

L1-01 Motor Overload Protection Selection 0 to 4 1 <1>
Note: 1. When the motor protection function is enabled (L1-01 is not set to zero), an oL1 alarm can be output through one of the multi-
function outputs by setting H2-01 to 1F. The output will close when the motor overload level reaches 90% of the oL1 detection level.
2. Select a method to protect the motor from overheat by setting L1-01 between 1 and 4 when running a single motor from the drive. An
external thermal relay is not needed.
Setting 0: Disabled - Motor Overload Protection is not Provided
This setting should be used if no motor overheat protection is desired or if multiple motors are connected to one drive. In
this case it is recommended that you install a thermal relay for each motor as show in Figure 5.64
Figure 5.64
Drive
Power M1
supply MC1 L10
M2
MC2 L20
MC1, MC2: Magnetic contactors

L10, L20: Thermal relays
Figure 5.64 Example of Protection Circuit Design for Multiple Motors

NOTICE: Protect each motor with individual thermal overloads when multiple motors are connected to one drive. Failure to comply
could result in motor damage. Disable the electronic overload protection of the drive (L1-01 = “0: Disabled”) and protect each motor
with individual motor thermal overloads.
Setting 1: General Purpose Motor (standard self-cooled)

Because the motor is self-cooled, the overload tolerance drops when the motor speed is lowered. The drive appropriately
adjusts the electrothermal trigger point according to the motor overload characteristics, protecting the motor from
overheat throughout the entire speed range.
Overload Characteristics
Overload Tolerance Cooling Capability
at 100% Motor Load
A: Max. speed for 200LJ

B: Max. speed for 160MJ
C: Max. speed for 132MJ
Continuous operation at less than line
Motor designed to operate from line power.
power frequency with 100% load can
Motor cooling is most effective when
trigger motor overload protection (oL1). A
running at rated nameplate base frequency
fault is output and the motor will coast to
(check the motor specifications).
stop.
Setting 2: Drive Dedicated Motor (constant torque, 1:10)

Use this setting when operating a drive duty motor with a torque ratio of 1:10. This motor type is allowed to run with
100% load from 10% up to 100% speed. Running slower speeds with full load can trigger an overload fault.
at 100% Motor Load
150
Rated Speed=100% Speed
60 s
A: Max. speed for 200LJ
B: Max. speed for 160MJ
Torque (%)
100 C: Max. speed for 132MJ
Motor is designed to effectively cool itself Continuous operation with 100% load from
even at low speeds (as lower as 6 Hz). 6 Hz to 50/60 Hz.
55
50
Continuous A
B
C
0 110 100120 167 200

Speed (%)
Setting 3: Vector Motor (constant torque, 1:100)

Use this setting when operating a drive dedicated motor with a torque ratio of 1:100. This motor type is allowed to run
with 100% load from 1% up to 100% speed. Running slower speeds with full load can trigger an overload fault.
Overload Tolerance Cooling Capability at 100% Motor Load
150
Rated Speed=100% Speed
60 s A: Max. speed for 200LJ an
B: Max. speed for 160MJ to
100 C: Max. speed for 132MJ a
Torque (%)
90
Motor is designed to effectively cool itself Continuous operation with 100% load from
at ultra-low speeds (about 0.6 Hz). 0.6 Hz to 50/60 Hz.
50 Continuous
A
B
C
0 1 100120 167 200
Speed (%)
Parameter Details
Setting 4: PM Motor for Derated Torque
This setting is for operating a PM motor for derated torque. This motor has a self-cooling design, so the overload
tolerance drops as the motor slows. Electronic thermal overload is triggered in accordance with the motor overload
characteristics, providing overheat protection across the entire speed range.
5
at 100% Motor Load
150
120 60 s Reaching 100% when operating at below
Torque (%)
100 Motor is designed to produce 100% torque

the base frequency will cause a motor
80 at base speed. Built with effective cooling
Continuous overload fault (oL1). The drive fault output
50 capabilities.
closes and the motor coasts to stop.
0.0 10 33 100
Motor Speed (%)
■ L1-02: Motor Overload Protection Time

Sets the time it takes the drive to detect motor overheat due to overload. This setting rarely requires adjustment, but
should correlate with the motor overload tolerance protection time for performing a hot start.

L1-02 Motor Overload Protection Time 0.1 to 5.0 min 1.0 min
• Defaulted to operate with an allowance of 150% overload operation for one minute.
• Figure 5.65 shows an example of the electrothermal protection operation time using a general-purpose motor
operating at 60 Hz with L1-02 set to one minute.
Figure 5.65
Operation time (minutes)
10
7
3
Cold start
0.4
Hot start
0.1
Motor current (%)
0 100 150 200 E2-01 = 100% m o t o r c u r r e n t
Figure 5.65 Motor Protection Operation Time
■ Motor Protection Using a Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC)

A motor PTC can be connected to an analog input of the drive. This input is used by the drive for motor overheat
protection.
When the motor overheat alarm level is reached, an oH3 alarm will be triggered and the drive will continue operation as
selected in L1-03. When the overheat fault level is reached an oH4 fault is triggered, a fault signal will be output and the
drive will stop the motor using the stop method determined in L1-04.
Figure 5.66 shows a PTC connection example for analog input A2. If using analog input A2, make sure to set DIP switch
S1 on the terminal board for voltage input when using this function.
Figure 5.66
Multi-function input Drive

DIP switch S1
V I
MA
+V Multi-function
MB output (contact)
(+10.5V, 20 mA)
MC
Branch
resistor
12 k P1
A2 (0-10 V)
PTC P2 Multi-function
thermistor output (photocoupler)
AC
PC
Figure 5.66 Connection of a Motor PTC
The PTC must have the following characteristics for one motor phase. Normally a motor is protected by three PTCs
connected in series.
Figure 5.67
Tr’
Figure 5.67 Motor PTC Characteristics

Overheat detection using a PTC can be set up by parameters L1-03, L1-04, and L1-05 as explained below.
■ L1-03: Motor Overheat Alarm Operation Selection (PTC input)
Determines what action the drive should take when the PTC input signal reaches the motor overheat alarm level (PTC
input level: Tr-5 °C).

L1-03 Motor Overheat Alarm Operation Selection (PTC input) 0 to 3 3

The drive stops the motor using the active deceleration time.
The drive output is switched off and the motor coasts to stop.
Setting 2: Fast-stop
The drive stops the motor using the Fast-stop time set in parameter C1-09.
Setting 3: Alarm Only
The operation is continued and an oH3 alarm is displayed on the digital operator.
■ L1-04: Motor Overheat Fault Operation Selection (PTC input)
Parameter Details
Determines what action the drive should take when the PTC input signal reaches the motor overheat alarm level (PTC
input level: Tr-5 °C).

L1-04 Motor Overheat Fault Operation Selection (PTC input) 0 to 2 1
5
The drive stops the motor using the active deceleration time.
The drive output is switched off and the motor coasts to stop.
The drive stops the motor using the Fast-stop time set in parameter C1-09.
■ L1-05: Motor Temperature Input Filter Time (PTC input)
Used to set a filter on the PTC signal in order to prevent a motor overheat fault from being mistakenly detected.

L1-05 Motor Temperature Input Filter Time (PTC input) 0.00 to 10.00 s 0.20 s
■ L1-13: Continuous Electrothermal Operation Selection

Determines whether or not to hold the current value of the electrothermal motor protection (L1-01) when the power
supply is interrupted.

L1-13 Continuous Electrothermal Operation Selection 0 or 1 1
Setting 0: Disabled
Setting 1: Enabled
◆ L2: Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru

■ L2-01: Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection
When a momentary power loss occurs (DC bus voltage falls below the level set in L2-05), the drive can be set to
automatically return to the operation it was performing when the power went out based on certain conditions.

L2-01 Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection 0 to 2 0
Setting 0: Disabled (default)

If power is not restored within 15 ms, a Uv1 fault will result and the drive will stop the motor.
Setting 1: Enabled, Recover Within L2-02
When a momentary power loss occurs, the drive will attempt to restart and perform Speed Search if power is restored
within the period of time set to parameter L2-02. If power is not restored within the time set to L2-02 (i.e. DC bus voltage
level remains below Uv1 detection level L2-05), then a Uv1 fault is triggered and the drive output will be shut off.
Setting 2: Recover as Long as CPU has Power
Drive will try to restart as long as the CPU still has power. This allows for a longer ride-through time than setting L2-01
to 1. A Uv1 fault is not triggered.
Note: 1. The amount of time the drive is capable of recovering after a power loss is determined by the capacity of the drive. Drive capacity
determines the upper limit for L2-02.
2. A Momentary Power Loss Unit is available to allow for a longer momentary power loss ride through time in a 0.4 to 7.5 kW drive
(200 or 400 V class). This option makes it possible to continue running after up to two seconds of power loss.
3. When L2-01 is set to 1 or 2, and a magnetic contactor between motor and drive is used, be sure that the magnetic contactor is kept
close as long as the drive attempts to restart.
4. When L2-01 is set to 1 or 2, “Uv” will flash on the operator while the drive is attempting to recover from a momentary power loss. A
fault signal is not output at this time.
■ L2-02: Momentary Power Loss Time Ride-Thru

Set the time in which the power has to return before a Uv fault is tripped. This parameter is valid only if L2-01 = 1.

Determined by
L2-02 Momentary Power Loss Time Ride-Thru 0.0 to 25.5 s
o2-04
■ L2-03: Momentary Power Loss Minimum Baseblock Time

Sets the minimum baseblock time when power is restored following a momentary power loss. This determines the time it
takes for the leftover voltage in the motor to dissipate. Increase this setting if overcurrent or overvoltage occur at the
beginning of Speed Search after a power loss or DC Injection Braking. If L2-03 > L2-02, then the drive will restart after
the time set to L2-03 has passed from the beginning of the power loss.

Determined by
L2-03 Momentary Power Loss Minimum Baseblock Time 0.1 to 5.0 s
o2-04 and C6-01
■ L2-04: Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time

Sets the time constant used to ramp up the voltage during Speed Search. The setting value determines the time for a
change from zero to the maximum voltage.

Determined by
L2-04 Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time 0.0 to 5.0 s
o2-04 and C6-01
■ L2-05: Undervoltage Detection Level (Uv1)

Determines the voltage at which a Uv1 fault is triggered.

Determined by
L2-05 <1> Undervoltage Detection Level 150 to 210 V
o2-04 <2>
<1> Values are for 200 V class drives and must be doubled for 400 V class drives.
<2> This value is initialized when E1-01 is changed.
This setting rarely needs to be changed.

When setting L2-05 is lower than the default setting, be sure to install an AC reactor option to the input side of the power
supply to prevent damage to drive circuitry.
◆ L3: Stall Prevention

When the load is too high or acceleration and deceleration times are too short, the motor may be unable to keep up with
the frequency reference, resulting in excessive slip. This “stalling” makes it impossible to decelerate or accelerate. The
drive can prevent the motor from stalling and still reach the desired speed without the user needing to change the
acceleration or deceleration time settings. The Stall Prevention function can be set separately for acceleration, operating
at constant speeds, and deceleration.
■ L3-01: Stall Prevention Selection during Acceleration
Stall Prevention during acceleration is used when the motor loses speed during acceleration due to a relatively large load.
It prevents overcurrent and motor overload (oL1) from occurring.
This parameter sets the Stall Prevention method for acceleration.

L3-01 Stall Prevention Selection during Acceleration 0 to 2 <1> 1
Parameter Details
<1> Setting 2 is not available for PM OLV.
Setting 0: Disabled
No Stall Prevention is provided. If the acceleration time setting is too short, the drive may not be able to accelerate within
the set time and the motor may stall.
Setting 1: Enabled
5
Enables Stall Prevention during acceleration. The operation depends on the selected control mode.
• V/f or Open Loop Vector Control:
When the output current exceeds 85% of the level set in parameter L3-02, the acceleration rate is reduced. The
acceleration is stopped when the current exceeds L3-02. Acceleration continues when the current falls below L3-02.
The Stall Prevention level is automatically reduced in the field weakening area. Refer to L3-03: Stall Prevention Limit
during Acceleration on page 199.
Figure 5.68
Output current
Stall Prevention Level

During Acceleration
L3-02
L3-02
-15%
Time
Output frequency
Controls the output frequency

to prevent the motor from stalling
Time
Figure 5.68 Stall Prevention During Acceleration for Induction Motors

• Open Loop Vector Control for PM:
Acceleration is stopped when the output current reaches the level set in parameter L3-02, and after 100 ms the drive
decelerates using the deceleration time set in parameter L3-22 (Refer to L3-22: Deceleration Time at Stall Prevention
during Acceleration on page 199). When the current falls below 85% of L3-02, deceleration is stopped. The drive will
attempt to reaccelerate again after 100 ms.
Figure 5.69
Output current
L3-02 15 % of L3-02
Time
Output frequency
100 ms
100 ms
Time
Deceleration
using L3-22
Figure 5.69 Stall Prevention During Acceleration for Permanent Magnet Motors
Setting 2: Intelligent Stall Prevention
When L3-02 = 2, the drive will disregard the selected acceleration time and try to accelerate in the minimum time. The
acceleration rate is adjusted so that the current does not exceed the value set in parameter L3-02.
■ L3-02: Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration
Sets the output current level at which the Stall Prevention during acceleration is activated.

L3-02 Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration 0 to 150% <1> <1>
<1> The upper limit and default value is determined by the duty rating and the carrier frequency derating selection (C6-01 and L8-38 respectively).
• If stalling occurs with L3-02 set to its default value when using a motor that is relatively small compared to the drive,
try lowering L3-02.
• When operating the motor in the constant power range, also set parameter L3-03.
■ L3-03: Stall Prevention Limit during Acceleration

The Stall Prevention level is automatically reduced when the motor is operated in the constant power range. L3-03 sets
the lower limit for this reduction as a percentage of the drive rated current.

L3-03 Stall Prevention Limit during Acceleration 0 to 100% 50%
Figure 5.70
Stall Prevention level during Acceleration
L3-02
L3-03
Output frequency
E1-06
Base frequency
Figure 5.70 Stall Prevention Level and Limit During Acceleration
■ L3-22: Deceleration Time at Stall Prevention during Acceleration

Sets the brief deceleration time used when stalling occurs while accelerating a PM motor. When set to 0, this function is
disabled and the drive will decelerate at the selected deceleration time when stalling occurs.
The function is effective only in Open Loop Vector Control for PM motors and if parameter L3-01 is set to 1.

L3-22 Deceleration Time at Stall Prevention during Acceleration 0 to 6000.0 s 0.0 s
■ L3-04: Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration

Stall Prevention during deceleration can control the deceleration based on the DC bus voltage and prevent an overvoltage
fault caused by high inertia or rapid deceleration.
Selects the Stall Prevention method during deceleration.

L3-04 Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration 0 to 4 <1> 1
<1> Settings 3 and 4 are not available in Open Loop Vector Control for PM motors.
Parameter Details
Setting 0: Disabled
When this setting is used, the drive decelerates according to the set deceleration time. With high inertia loads or rapid
deceleration, an overvoltage (ov) fault may occur. In this case use braking options or switch to another L3-04 selection.
Note: Use this setting or set L3-04 to 3 whenever a Dynamic Braking Resistor or another braking option is used.
Setting 1: General Purpose Stall Prevention 5
With this setting the drive tries to decelerate in the set deceleration time. When the DC bus voltage exceeds the Stall
Prevention level, the drive pauses deceleration. Deceleration continues as soon as the DC bus voltage drops below that
level. Stall Prevention may be triggered repeatedly to avoid an overvoltage fault. The DC bus voltage level for Stall
Prevention depends on the input voltage setting E1-01.
Drive Input Voltage Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration

200 V Class Vdc = 380 V
E1-01 ≥ 400 V Vdc = 760 V
400 V Class
E1-01 < 400 V Vdc = 660 V
Note: 1. This setting should not be used in combination with a Dynamic Braking Resistor or other braking options. If Stall Prevention during
deceleration is enabled, it will be triggered before the braking resistor option can operate.
2. This method may lengthen the total deceleration time compared to the set value.
Figure 5.71 illustrates the function of Stall Prevention during deceleration.

Figure 5.71
Output Frequency
Deceleration characteristics
when Stall Prevention was
triggered during deceleration
Time
Specified deceleration time
Figure 5.71 Stall Prevention During Deceleration

Setting 2: Intelligent Stall Prevention
With this setting the drive adjusts the deceleration rate so that the DC bus voltage is kept at the level set in parameter L3-
17. This way the shortest possible deceleration time is achieved while the motor is protected from stalling. The
deceleration time that has been selected is disregarded.
Setting 3: Stall Prevention with Braking Option
Enables the Stall Prevention function while using a braking resistor. Use this setting if overvoltage occurs with L3-04
disabled when using a braking resistor. This makes it possible to reduce the deceleration time.
Setting 4: Overexcitation Deceleration
Enables overexcitation deceleration. Overexcitation Deceleration (increasing the motor flux) shortens the deceleration
time compared to deceleration with no Stall Prevention (L3-04 = 0). Repetitive or long overexcitation deceleration can
result in motor overheat. In such situations, either shorten the deceleration time setting or use a braking resistor option.
Use parameters n3-13 and n3-23 for fine-tuning this function.
Note: Because the allowable flux level for overexcitation varies based on the flux saturation characteristics of the motor, set the proper
overexcitation level by adjusting the excitation gain in parameter n3-13. Motor characteristics and inertia of the machine
influence the deceleration time during overexcitation deceleration.
■ L3-05: Stall Prevention Selection during Run

Stall Prevention During Run can prevent a motor from stalling by automatically reducing the speed when a transient
overload occurs while the motor is running at constant speed.
This parameter selects the Stall Prevention During Run method.

L3-05 Stall Prevention Selection during Run 0 to 2 1
Note: 1. This function is not available in Open Loop Vector Control. Use the torque limit function instead.
2. When output frequency is 6 Hz or less, Stall Prevention During Run is disabled regardless of the setting in L3-05 and L3-06.
Setting 0: Disabled
Drive runs at the set frequency reference. A heavy load may cause the motor to stall and trip the drive with an oC or oL
fault.
Setting 1: Decelerate Using C1-02
If the current exceeds the Stall Prevention level set in parameter L3-06, the drive decelerates at Decel Time 1 (C1-02).
Once the current level drops below the value of L3-06 minus 2% for 100 ms it accelerates back to the frequency
reference at the active acceleration time.
Setting 2: Decelerate Using C1-04
Same as setting 1 except the drive decelerates at decel time 2 (C1-04).
■ L3-06: Stall Prevention Level during Run
Sets the current level for Stall Prevention During Run. Depending on the setting of parameter L3-23 the level is
automatically reduced in the constant power range (speed beyond base speed).

L3-06 Stall Prevention Level during Run 30 to 150 <1> <1>
<1> The upper limit and default for this setting is determined by C6-01 and L8-38.
■ L3-23: Automatic Reduction Selection for Stall Prevention during Run

This function reduces the Stall Prevention during run level in the constant power range.

Automatic Reduction Function Selection for Stall Prevention
L3-23 0 or 1 0
during Run
Setting 0: Disabled
The level set in L3-06 is used throughout the entire speed range.
Setting 1: Enabled
The Stall Prevention level during run is reduced in the constant power range. The lower limit will be 40% of L3-06.
■ Overvoltage Suppression Function
This function suppresses overvoltage faults by slightly increasing the output frequency when the DC bus voltage rises. It
can be used to drive loads with cyclic regenerative operation, such as punch presses or other applications that involve
repetitive crank movements.
The output frequency is adjusted during ov suppression so that the DC bus voltage does not exceed the level set in
parameter L3-17.
Note: 1. The motor speed will exceed the frequency reference when overvoltage suppression is triggered. Consequently, overvoltage
suppression is not appropriate in applications that require a perfect match between the frequency reference and the actual motor
speed.
2. Disable overvoltage suppression when using a braking resistor.
3. Overvoltage may still occur if there is a sudden increase to a regenerative load.
4. This function is enabled only when operating just below the maximum frequency. Overvoltage suppression does not increase the
output frequency beyond the maximum frequency. If this is required by the application increase the maximum frequency and change
the base frequency setting.
■ L3-10: Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration

Sets the level of Stall Prevention during deceleration as a percentage of the overvoltage trip level. If the DC bus voltage
exceeds the level set in L3-10 while the drive is decelerating, the drive will stop.
Parameter Details
L3-10 Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration 80 to 95% 92%
Note: 1. Default setting is determined by the Input Voltage set to E1-01.

2. This parameter is valid only if L3-04 ≠ 2.
■ L3-11: Overvoltage Suppression Function Selection

5
Enables or disables the overvoltage suppression function.

L3-11 Overvoltage Suppression Function Selection 0 or 1 0
Setting 0: Disabled
The output frequency is not adjusted. A regenerative load may trip the drive with an overvoltage fault. Use this setting if
braking options are installed.
Setting 1: Enabled
When the DC bus voltage rises due to regenerative load, an overvoltage fault is prevented by increasing the output
frequency.
■ L3-17: Target DC Bus Voltage for Overvoltage Suppression and Stall Prevention
Sets the target DC bus voltage target level used by the overvoltage suppression function (L3-11 = 1) and Intelligent Stall
Prevention during deceleration (L3-04 = 2).

Target DC Bus Voltage for Overvoltage Suppression and Stall
L3-17 150 to 400 <1> 370 V <1> <2>
Prevention
<1> Values are for 200 V class drives and must be doubled for 400 V class drives.
<2> This value is initialized when E1-01 is changed.
◆ L4: Speed Detection

These parameters set up the speed agree and speed detection functions which can be assigned to the multi-function
output terminals.
■ L4-01, L4-02: Speed Agreement Detection Level and Detection Width
Parameter L4-01 sets the detection level for the digital output functions “Speed Agree 1,” “User Set Speed Agree 1,”
“Frequency Detection 1,” and “Frequency Detection 2.”
Parameter L4-02 sets the hysteresis level for these functions.

L4-01 Speed Agreement Detection Level –400.0 to 400.0 Hz 0.0 Hz
L4-02 Speed Agreement Detection Width 0.0 to 20.0 Hz 2.0 Hz
Refer to H2-01 to H2-03: Terminal MA, MB and MC P1-PC and P2-PC Function Selection on page 175, Settings 2, 3,
4, and 5.
■ L4-03, L4-04: Speed Agreement Detection Level and Detection Width (+/–)
Parameter L4-03 sets the detection level for the digital output functions “Speed Agree 2,” “User Set Speed Agree 2,”
“Frequency Detection 3,” and “Frequency Detection 4.”
Parameter L4-04 sets the hysteresis level for these functions.

L4-03 Speed Agreement Detection Level (+/–) –400.0 to 400.0 Hz 0.0 Hz
L4-04 Speed Agreement Detection Width (+/–) 0.0 to 20.0 Hz 2.0 Hz
Refer to H2-01 to H2-03: Terminal MA, MB and MC P1-PC and P2-PC Function Selection on page 175, Settings 13,
14, 15, and 16.
■ L4-05: Frequency Reference Loss Detection Selection
The drive can detect a loss of an analog frequency reference from input A1 or A2. Reference loss is detected when the
frequency reference value reduces for 90% within 400 ms.
Figure 5.72
Analog 100%
frequency 80%
reference 10%
400ms
Loss of
Reference OFF ON
output
time
Figure 5.72 Loss of Reference Function

To have a fault output trigger when frequency reference loss occurs, set H2-01, H2-02, or H2-03 to “C”. Refer to Setting
C: Frequency Reference Loss on page 179 for details on setting the output function.
Parameter L4-05 selects the operation when a frequency reference loss is detected.

L4-05 Frequency Reference Loss Detection Selection 0 or 1 0
Setting 0: Stop
The drive will stop the motor.
Setting 1: Continue Operation with Reduced Frequency Reference
The drive will continue operation at the frequency reference value set in parameter L4-06. When the external frequency
reference value is restored, the operation is continued with the frequency reference.
■ L4-06: Frequency Reference at Reference Loss
Sets the frequency reference level the drive runs with when L4-05 = 1 and a reference loss was detected. The value is set
as a percentage of the frequency reference before the loss was detected.

L4-06 Frequency Reference at Reference Loss 0.0 to 100.0% 80.0%
■ L4-07: Speed Agreement Detection Selection

Determines when frequency detection is active using parameters L4-01 through L4-04.

L4-07 Speed Agreement Detection Selection 0 or 1 0
Setting 0: No Detection During Baseblock

Setting 1: Detection Always Enabled
■ Notes on Controlling the Brake for the Hoist Application
• The frequency detection function is used for controlling the brake.
When an external Baseblock command is present while a Run command is active, the frequency reference will be kept
as long as the Run command is active. To avoid improper brake operation make sure that frequency detection is set so
that the brake does not open during Baseblock (L4-07 = “0”, default).
Brake Open/Close Brake Activation Level

Function Parameter Signal Parameter
Frequency
Detection L4-07 = 0 Frequency Detection Level L4-01 = 2.0 to 3.0 Hz <1>
Conditions
Parameter Details
Frequency
H2-01 = 5 Frequency Detection Width 2.0 Hz (fixed)
Detection 2
<1> If the load slips during stop, make it greater than E1-09 or 2.0 Hz until the load no longer slips.
Figure 5.73
L4-01
2.0 Hz (fixed) 5
Output
Frequency Time
ON OFF
Frequency
Dectection 2
Figure 5.73 Frequency Detection 2

• The braking sequence should be designed as follows:
• A normally open signal (N.O.) should be used to control the brake so that it is released when terminal MA-MC
closes.
• An external circuit should be added to ensure the brake is fully applied in case of a fault or emergency condition.
• An additional external circuit should also be added to ensure the brake releases properly when an Up/Down
Command is entered.
• When changing the speed using an analog signal, make sure that the source of the frequency reference is assigned to
the control circuit terminals (b1-01 = 1).
• A sequence to open and close the holding brake appears in the diagram below.
Figure 5.74
OFF ON
S1-SC UP
b6-02
d1-01 (Enabled when b1-01 = 0)
d1-03
Output frequency
L4-01 b6-01 b4-01
0
Time
Output DC Injection braking
Frequency Detection 2
(H2-01=5) ON OFF
MA-MC
Holding brake
Closed Open Closed
Figure 5.74 Holding Brake Time Chart
◆ L5: Fault Restart

The drive can be set up to perform a self-diagnostic check and resume the operation after a fault has occurred. If the self-
check is successful and the cause of the fault has disappeared, the drive restarts by performing Speed Search (Refer to
b3: Speed Search on page 122 for details).
The drive can attempt to restart itself following the faults listed below.
Fault Name Fault Name

GF (Ground Fault) oL4 (Overtorque 2)
LF (Output Open Phase) ov (DC Bus Overvoltage)
oC (Overcurrent) PF (Input Phase Loss)
oH1 (Drive Overheat) rH (Braking Resistor Fault)
oL1 (Motor Overload) rr (Braking Transistor Fault)
oL2 (Drive Overload) Uv1 (DC Bus Undervoltage) <1>
oL3 (Overtorque 1)
<1> When L2-01 is set to 1 or 2 (continue operation during momentary power loss)
Use parameters L5-01 to L5-05 to set up automatic fault restart.

To output a signal during fault restart, set H2-01, H2-02, or H2-03 to 1E.
■ L5-01: Number of Auto Restart Attempts
Sets the number of times that the drive may attempt to restart itself.

L5-01 Number of Auto Restart Attempts 0 to 10 0
The method of incrementing the restart counter is determined by the setting of parameter L5-05. When the counter
reaches the number set in L5-01 the operation stops and the fault has to be reset manually after correcting the cause.
The restart counter is incremented at each restart attempt, regardless of whether the attempt was successful. When the
counter reaches the number set in L5-01 the operation stops and the fault has to be reset manually after correcting the
cause.
The number of fault restarts is reset back to zero when:
• The drive operates normally for ten minutes following a fault restart.
• A fault is cleared manually after protective functions are triggered.
• The power supply is cycled.
■ L5-02: Auto Restart Fault Output Operation Selection
Selects if the fault output (H2-01, H2-02, H2-03 = E) is set when the drive attempts to restart.

L5-02 Auto Restart Fault Output Operation Selection 0 or 1 0
Setting 0: No Fault Output

Setting 1: Fault Output is Set
■ L5-04: Fault Reset Interval Time
Determines the amount of time to wait between attempts to restart the drive when parameter L5-05 is set to 1.

L5-04 Fault Reset Interval Time 0.5 to 600.0 s 10.0 s
■ L5-05: Fault Reset Operation Selection

L5-05 Fault Reset Operation Selection 0 or 1 0
Setting 0: Count Successful Restarts

The drive will continuously attempt to restart. If a restart trial is successful, the restart counter is increased. This
operation is repeated each time a fault occurs until the counter reaches the value set in L5-01.
Setting 1: Count Restart Attempts
The drive will try to restart using the time interval set in parameter L5-04. Each attempt is counted, whether it was
successful or not.
◆ L6: Torque Detection

The drive provides two independent torque detection functions that trigger an alarm or fault signal when the load is too
heavy (oL), or suddenly drops (UL). They are set up using the L6- parameters. To indicate the underload or overload
condition to an external device, digital outputs should be programmed as shown below.
H2-01, H2-02, H2-03

Setting Description
Torque detection 1, N.O.
B
(output close when over-/underload is detected)
Torque detection 1, N.C.
17
(output opens when over-/underload is detected)
18 Torque detection 2, N.O. (output close when over-/underload is detected)
19 Torque detection 2, N.C. (output opens when over-/underload is detected)
Figure 5.75 and Figure 5.76 show the function of overtorque and undertorque detection.
Parameter Details
Figure 5.75
Motor current / torque

10 % hysteresis 10 % hysteresis
L6-02 and L6-05
L6-03 and L6-06 L6-03 and L6-06

5
Torque detection 1 (NO)
or
Torque detection 2 (NO) ON ON
Figure 5.75 Overtorque Detection Operation
Figure 5.76
Motor current / torque 10 % hysteresis
L6-02 and L6-05
L6-03 and L6-06 L6-03 and L6-06

Torque detection 1 (NO)
or
Torque detection 2 (NO) ON ON
Figure 5.76 Undertorque Detection Operation

Note: 1. The torque detection function uses a hysteresis of 10% of the drive rated output current/motor rated torque.
2. In V/f Control and Open Loop Vector Control for PM, the level is set as a percentage of the drive rated output current. In Open Loop
Vector, it is set as a percentage of the motor rated torque.
Note: When overtorque occurs in the application, the drive may stop due to overcurrent (oC) or overload (oL1). To prevent this, an
overload situation should be indicated to the controller before oC or oL1 occur in the drive. Use the torque detection for this
purpose. Use undertorque detection to discover application problems like a torn belt, a pump shutting off, or other similar
trouble.
■ L6-01, L6-04: Torque Detection Selection 1, 2

The torque detection function is triggered when the current/torque exceeds the levels set in parameter L6-02 and L6-05
for longer than the time set in L6-03 and L6-06. The parameters L6-01 and L6-04 select the detection condition and the
operation at detection.

L6-01 Torque Detection Selection 1 0 to 8 0
L6-04 Torque Detection Selection 2 0 to 8 0
Setting 0: Disabled
Setting 1: oL3/oL4 at Speed Agree - Alarm
Overtorque detection is active only when the output speed is equal to the frequency reference, i.e., no detection during
acceleration and deceleration. The operation continues after detection and an oL3/oL4 alarm is triggered.
Setting 2: oL3/oL4 at Run - Alarm
Overtorque detection works whenever a Run command is active. The operation continues after detection and an oL3/oL4
alarm is triggered.
Setting 3: oL3/oL4 at Speed Agree - Fault
Overtorque detection is active only when the output speed is equal to the frequency reference, i.e., no detection during
acceleration and deceleration. The operation is stopped and an oL3/oL4 fault is triggered.
Setting 4: oL3/oL4 at Run - Fault
Overtorque detection works whenever a Run command is active. The operation is stopped and an oL3/oL4 fault is
triggered.
Setting 5: UL3/UL4 at Speed Agree - Alarm
Undertorque detection is active only when the output speed is equal to the frequency reference, i.e., no detection during
acceleration and deceleration. The operation continues after detection and a UL3/UL4 alarm is triggered.
Setting 6: UL3/UL4 at Run - Alarm
Undertorque detection works whenever a Run command is active. The operation continues after detection and a UL3/
UL4 alarm is triggered.
Setting 7: UL3/UL4 at Speed Agree - Fault
Undertorque detection is active only when the output speed is equal to the frequency reference, i.e., no detection during
acceleration and deceleration. The operation is stopped and a UL3/UL4 fault is triggered.
Setting 8: UL3/UL4 at Run - Fault
Undertorque detection works whenever a Run command is active. The operation is stopped a UL3/UL4 fault is triggered.
■ L6-02, L6-05: Torque Detection Level 1, 2

These parameters the detection levels for the torque detection functions 1 and 2.

L6-02 Torque Detection Level 1 0 to 300% 150%
L6-05 Torque Detection Level 2 0 to 300% 150%
Note: 1. The torque detection level 1 (L6-02) can also be supplied by an analog input set to H3-02 and H3-10 = 7. In this case the analog value
has priority and the setting L6-02 is disregarded. Torque detection level 2 (L6-05) can not be set by an analog input.
2. The detection levels for overtorque and undertorque are set as a percentage of the drive rated current when using V/f or OLV/PM
control mode. When using OLV control mode, the drive sets torque detection as a percentage of the motor rated torque.
■ L6-03, L6-06: Torque Detection Time 1, 2

These parameters set the time that the levels set in L6-02 and L6-05 have to be exceeded before an alarm/fault is
triggered.

L6-03 Torque Detection Time 1 0.0 to 10.0 s 0.1 s
L6-06 Torque Detection Time 2 0.0 to 10.0 s 0.1 s
◆ L7: Torque Limit

The torque limit function can be used to limit the torque in each of the four quadrants individually and thereby protect the
machinery. It can be used in the Open Loop Vector Control mode. A digital output programmed for “During Torque
Limit” (H2-01, H2-02, H2-03 = 30) can be switched when the drive is operating at the torque limit.
■ L7-01 to L7-04: Torque Limits
These parameters set the torque limits in each operation mode.

L7-01 Forward Torque Limit 0 to 300% 200%
L7-02 Reverse Torque Limit 0 to 300% 200%
L7-03 Forward Regenerative Torque Limit 0 to 300% 200%
L7-04 Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit 0 to 300% 200%
Note: If the multi-function analog input is programmed for “10: Positive Torque Limit”, “11: Negative Torque Limit”, “12:
Regenerative Torque Limit”, or “15: General Torque Limit”, the drive uses the lower value of either L7-01 through L7-04, or
Parameter Details
analog input torque limit. Refer to Setting 10/11/12/15: Positive/Negative/Regenerative/General Torque Limit (OLV only) on
page 189 for details on using analog torque limits.
■ L7-06: Torque Limit Integral Time Constant

Sets the integral time constant for the torque limit function.
5
L7-06 Torque Limit Integral Time Constant 5 to 10000 ms 200 ms
■ L7-07: Torque Limit Control Method Selection during Accel/Decel

Selects the function of torque limit during acceleration and deceleration.

Torque Limit Control Method Selection during Acceleration/
L7-07 0 or 1 0
Deceleration
Setting 0: Proportional Control

The torque limit function works with P-control during acceleration and deceleration and switches to I-control at constant
speed. Use this setting when acceleration or deceleration to the desired speed has priority over torque limitation during
speed changes.
Setting 1: Integral Control
The torque limit function always uses I-control. Use this setting when high accuracy torque limitation is required even
during speed changes. Using this function may increase the acceleration time, or may prevent the motor speed from
reaching the frequency reference when the torque limit is reached before.
◆ L8: Drive Protection

■ L8-01: Internal Dynamic Braking Resistor Protection Selection (ERF type)
This parameter selects the dynamic braking resistor protection when using an optional heatsink mounted braking resistor
(ERF type, 3% ED).

Internal Dynamic Braking Resistor Protection Selection
L8-01 0 or 1 0
(ERF type)
Setting 0: Disabled
Disables the braking resistor protection. Use this setting for any braking option other than the Yaskawa ERF Type
resistor.
Setting 1: Enabled
Enables the protection for ERF type resistors.
■ L8-02: Overheat Alarm Level
Sets the heatsink overheat alarm (oH) detection level.
The drive will output an alarm when the heatsink temperature exceeds the alarm level set in parameter L8-02. If the
operation when this alarm occurs is set for continued operation (L8-03 = 3) and the temperature reaches the overheat
fault level, the drive will trigger an oH1 fault and stop the operation.
When an output terminal is set for the oH pre-alarm (H2-01, H2-02, H2-03 = 20), the switch will close when the heatsink
temperature rises above L8-02.

Determined by
L8-02 Overheat Alarm Level 50 to 130 °C
o2-04
■ L8-03: Overheat Pre-Alarm Operation Selection

Sets the operation when a heatsink overheat pre-alarm is detected.

L8-03 Overheat Pre-Alarm Operation Selection 0 to 3 3

If a heatsink overheat alarm occurs, the drive decelerates to stop using the selected deceleration time. If a digital output is
programmed for “fault” (H2-01, H2-02, H2-03 = E), this output will be triggered.
If a heatsink overheat alarm occurs, the drive switches off the output and the motor coasts to stop. If a digital output is
If an overheat alarm occurs, the drive decelerates to stop using the Fast-stop time (C1-09). If a digital output is
Setting 3: Alarm Only
If an overheat alarm occurs, an alarm is output and the drive continues operation.
■ L8-05: Input Phase Loss Protection Selection
Enables or disables the input phase loss detection.

L8-05 Input Phase Loss Protection Selection 0 or 1 0 <1>
Setting 0: Disabled
Setting 1: Enabled
Enables the input phase loss detection. As detection is performed by measuring the DC bus ripple, a phase loss fault (PF)
can also be triggered by power supply voltage imbalance or main circuit capacitor deterioration. Detection is disabled
when:
• The drive is decelerating.
• No Run command is active.
• Output current is less than or equal to 30% of the drive rated current.
■ L8-07: Output Phase Loss Protection Selection
Enables or disables the output phase loss detection, which is triggered when the output current falls below 5% of the
drive rated current.
Note: Output phase loss detection can mistakenly be triggered if the motor rated current is very small compared to the drive rating.
Disable this parameter in such cases.

L8-07 Output Phase Loss Protection Selection 0 to 2 0
Setting 0: Disabled
Setting 1: Fault when One Phase is Lost
An output phase loss fault (LF) is triggered when one output phase is lost. The output shuts off and the motor coasts to
Parameter Details
stop.
Setting 2: Fault when Two Phases are Lost
An output phase loss fault (LF) is triggered when two output phases are lost. The output shuts off and the motor coasts to
stop.
■ L8-09: Output Ground Fault Detection Selection
5
Enables or disables the output ground fault detection.

Determined
L8-09 Output Ground Fault Detection Selection 0 or 1
by o2-04
Setting 0: Disabled
Ground faults are not detected.
Setting 1: Enabled
A ground fault (GF) is triggered when high leakage current or a ground short circuit occurs in one or two output phases.
■ L8-10: Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Selection

Selects the heatsink cooling fan operation.

L8-10 Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Selection 0 or 1 0
Setting 0: Run with Timer

The fan is switched on when a Run command is active. It is switched off with the delay set in parameter L8-11 after the
Run command has been released. Using this setting extends the fan lifetime.
Setting 1: Run always
The fan runs whenever power is supplied to the drive.
■ L8-11: Heatsink Cooling Fan Off-Delay Time
Sets the cooling fan switch off delay time if parameter L8-10 is set to 0.

L8-11 Heatsink Cooling Fan Off-Delay Time 0 to 300 s 60 s
■ L8-12: Ambient Temperature Setting

If the temperature where the drive is mounted is above the specified values, the drive rated current must be reduced for
optimal performance life. By setting the ambient temperature to parameter L8-12 and adjusting the installation method
setting in , the drive rating automatically adapts to safe values.

L8-12 Ambient Temperature Setting -10 to +50 °C 40 °C
■ L8-15: oL2 Characteristics Selection at Low Speed

Selects whether the drive overload capability (oL fault detection level) is reduced at low speeds in order to prevent
premature output transistor failures.

L8-15 oL2 Characteristics Selection at Low Speed 0 or 1 1
Setting 0: Disabled
The overload protection level is not reduced. Frequently operating the drive with high output current at low speed can
lead to premature drive faults.
Setting 1: Enabled
The overload protection level (oL2 fault detection level) is automatically reduced at speeds below 6 Hz.
■ L8-18: Software Current Limit Selection
The Software Current Limit (CLA) is a drive protection function that prevents output transistor failures caused by high
current. Parameter L8-18 enables or disables this function.
Note: This setting should not be changed unless absolutely necessary. For proper drive protection and operation leave the Software
CLA function enabled.

L8-18 Software Current Limit Selection 0 or 1 1 <1>
Setting 0: Disabled
The drive may trip on an oC fault if the load is too heavy or the acceleration is too short.
Setting 1: Enabled
When the soft CLA current level is reached, the drive reduces the output voltage in order to reduce the current. If the
current level drops below the Software CLA level, then normal operation will continue.
■ L8-29: Current Unbalance Detection (LF2)
Current unbalance can heat up a PM motor and lead to demagnetization of the magnets from heat. The current imbalance
detection function prevents such motor damage by monitoring output currents and triggering a LF2 fault in case of
current unbalance.

L8-29 Current Unbalance Detection (LF2) 0 or 1 1
Setting 0: Disabled
The drive does not protect the motor.
Setting 1: Enabled
When an output current imbalance is detected, a LF2 fault is triggered, the output is switched off, and the motor coasts to
stop.
■ L8-35: Installation Method Selection
Selects the type of installation and changes the drive overload (oL2) limits accordingly.
Note: 1. This parameter is not reset when the drive is initialized.
2. The value is preset to the appropriate value when the drive is shipped. Change the value only when using Side-by-Side installation or
when mounting a heatsink-cooled drive with the heatsink outside the cabinet.

Determined by
L8-35 Installation Method Selection 0 to 3
o2-04
Setting 0: Heatsink-Cooled Drive

Must be selected if IP20/IP00 heatsink-cooled drives are installed with minimal 30 mm space to the next drive or a
cabinet wall.
Setting 1: Side-by-Side Mounting
Must be selected if drives are Side-by-Side mounted with a minimum space of 2 mm.
Setting 2: IP20/NEMA Type 1 Drive
Must be selected if the drive has a IP20/NEMA Type 1 enclosure.
Parameter Details
Setting 3: Finless Drive or External Heatsink Installation
Must be selected for finless drives or if a heatsink-cooled drive is mounted with the heatsink outside the cabinet.
■ L8-38: Carrier Frequency Reduction Selection
The drive can reduce the carrier frequency when the output current exceeds a certain level. This temporarily increases the 5
overload capability (oL2 detection) and the drive can run through transient load peaks without tripping.
L8-38 selects the operation of the carrier frequency reduction function.
Note: This function cannot be used in Open Loop Vector for PM motors.

Determined by
L8-38 Carrier Frequency Reduction Selection 0 to 2
o2-04
Setting 0: Disabled
No carrier frequency reduction at high current.
Setting 1: Enabled for Output Frequencies below 6 Hz

The carrier frequency is reduced at speeds below 6 Hz when the current exceeds 100% of the drive rated current. The
drive returns to its normal carrier frequency when the current falls below 88% or the output frequency exceeds 7 Hz.
Setting 2: Enabled for Entire Frequency Range
The carrier frequency is reduced at the following speeds:
• Below 6 Hz when the current exceeds 100% of the drive rated current.
• Above 7 Hz when the current exceeds 112% of the drive rated current.
The drive uses the delay time set in parameter L8-40 and a hysteresis of 12% when switching the carrier frequency back
to the set value.
■ L8-40: Carrier Frequency Reduction Off-Delay Time
Sets the delay time which is used to switch back to the normal carrier frequency. The carrier frequency reduction function
is disabled if this value is 0 s.

L8-40 Carrier Frequency Reduction Off-Delay Time 0.00 or 2.00 s 0.50 s
■ L8-41: High Current Alarm Selection

The drive can be set to trigger a high current alarm (HCA) when the output current rises too high.

L8-41 High Current Alarm Selection 0 or 1 0
Setting 0: Disabled
No alarm is output.
Setting 1: Enabled
An alarm is triggered when the output current exceeds 150% of the drive rated current. A digital output indicating an
alarm (H2-01, H2-02, H2-03 = 10) can be programmed.
■ L8-46: AVR Function Selection
Enables or disabled the AVR function. If enabled AVR adjusts the PWM to have the output voltage at the desired level
even if the DC bus voltage changes.

L8-46 AVR Function Selection 0, 1 1
Setting 0: Disabled
Setting 1: Enabled
5.9 n: Special Adjustments

The n parameters handle a variety of specialized adjustments and functions, including Hunting Prevention, AFR Control,
Overexcitation Deceleration, resistance between motor lines, and PM motor control functions.
◆ n1: Hunting Prevention

Hunting Prevention keeps the drive from hunting as a result of low inertia and operating with light load. It is available in
V/f Control only.
■ n1-01: Hunting Prevention Selection
Enables or disables the Hunting Prevention function.
Note: This function is available only when using V/f Control. Hunting Prevention should be disabled when drive response is need over
suppressing motor oscillation. This function can also be disabled without any problems in applications with high inertia loads or
relatively heavy loads.
n1-01 Hunting Prevention Selection 0 or 1 1
Setting 0: Disabled
Setting 1: Enabled
■ n1-02: Hunting Prevention Gain Setting
Sets the gain for the Hunting Prevention Function.

n1-02 Hunting Prevention Gain Setting 0.00 to 2.50 1.00
Normally, n1-02 does not need to be changed, but adjustment may help under the following conditions:
• If the motor vibrates while lightly loaded and n1-01 = 1, increase the gain by 0.1 until vibration ceases.
• If the motor stalls while n1-01 = 1, decrease the gain by 0.1 until the stalling ceases.
■ n1-03: Hunting Prevention Time Constant
Determines how responsive the Hunting Prevention function is (affects the primary delay time for Hunting Prevention).

Determined by
n1-03 Hunting Prevention Time Constant 0 to 500 ms
o2-04
Parameter Details
■ n1-05: Hunting Prevention Gain while in Reverse
This parameter is the same as n1-02, except that it is used when the motor rotates in reverse. See the setting instructions
for n1-02.
Note: When set to 0 ms, n1-02 is enabled even when the drive is operating in reverse.
No. Name Setting Range Default 5
n1-05 Hunting Prevention Gain while in Reverse 0.00 to 2.50 0.00
◆ n2: Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Tuning

These parameters are used to achieve speed stability when a load is suddenly applied or removed by calculating changes
in the torque current feedback and then compensating the output frequency.
Note: Before making changes to the AFR parameters, make sure the motor parameters are set properly or perform Auto-Tuning.
■ n2-01: Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Gain

Sets the internal speed feedback detection control gain in the AFR.

n2-01 Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Gain 0.00 to 10.00 Determined by o2-04
Normally there is no need to adjust n2-01 from the default setting. Make adjustments in the following cases:
• If hunting occurs, increase the set value in steps of 0.05 while checking the response.
• If response is low, decrease the set value in steps of 0.05 while checking the response.
■ n2-02, n2-03: Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Time Constant 1, 2
Parameter n2-02 sets the time constant normally used by AFR.
Parameter n2-03 sets the time constant during Speed Search or when during regenerative operation the actual motor slip
exceeds 50% of the rated slip.

n2-02 Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Time Constant 1 0 to 2000 ms 50 ms
n2-03 Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Time Constant 2 0 to 2000 ms 750 ms
Note: Parameter n2-02 cannot be set higher than n2-03 or an oPE08 error will result.
These parameters rarely need to be changed. Adjust settings only under the following conditions.
• If hunting occurs, increase n2-02. If response is low, decrease it.
• Increase the setting of n2-03 if overvoltage (ov) failures occur with high inertia loads at the end of acceleration or when
the load changes radically.
• When increasing n2-02, make sure to increase C4-02 (Torque Compensation Delay Time Constant 1) proportionally.
• When increasing n2-03, make sure to increase C4-06 (Torque Compensation Delay Time Constant 2) proportionally.
◆ n3: Overexcitation Deceleration

Overexcitation Deceleration (V/f Control and Open Loop Vector)
Overexcitation deceleration increases the flux during deceleration and allows shorter deceleration time settings than with
normal deceleration without the use of a braking resistor. Enabled by setting L3-04 = 4.
Notes on Overexcitation Deceleration
• As regenerative energy is mainly dissipated as heat in the motor, the motor temperature will rise if overexcitation
deceleration is applied frequently. In such cases, make sure the motor temperature does not exceed the maximum
allowable value or consider using a braking resistor option instead.
• The drive decelerates at the active deceleration time. Verify the deceleration time setting to avoid trouble with
overvoltage.
• When a Run command is entered during overexcitation deceleration, overexcitation operation is cancelled and the
drive will reaccelerate to the specified speed.
• Do not use overexcitation deceleration in combination with a braking resistor option.
• Overexcitation deceleration can not be used in Open Loop Vector for PM motors.
Use parameters n3-13 through n3-23 for adjusting overexcitation deceleration.
■ n3-13: Overexcitation Deceleration Gain
Applies a gain to the V/f pattern output value during overexcitation deceleration, thereby determining the level of
overexcitation. The drive returns to the normal V/f value after the motor has stopped or when it is accelerating to the
frequency reference.

n3-13 Overexcitation Deceleration Gain 1.00 to 1.40 1.10
The optimum setting for n3-13 depends on the motor flux saturation characteristics.
• Increase the gain by 1.25 to 1.30 to improve the breaking power of overexcitation.
• Reduce the value when the motor slip gets too high, which can trigger overcurrent (oC), motor overload (oL1), or drive
overload (oL2) faults. Alternatively reduce n3-21.
■ n3-21: Overslip Suppression Current Level

If overcurrent, oL1, or oL2 occur during overexcitation deceleration, reduce the overslip suppression current level. Set as
a percentage of the drive rated current.
Reduce this setting if the current during overexcitation deceleration exceeds the overslip suppression current set in n3-21
as a result of flux saturation and excessive slip. Alternatively reduce the overexcitation gain n3-13.

n3-21 Overslip Suppression Current Level 0 to 150% 100%
■ n3-23: Overexcitation Operation Selection

Determines which direction overexcitation can be used in. However, parameter L3-04 must be set to 4 in order for n3-23
to be enabled.

n3-23 Overexcitation Operation Selection 0 to 2 0
Setting 0: Enabled in Both Directions

Setting 1: Enabled in Forward Direction Only
Setting 2: Enabled in Reverse Direction Only
◆ n8: PM Motor Control Tuning

These parameters are available when using the special Open Loop Vector Control for permanent magnet motors and can
be used to adjust the control performance.
■ n8-45: Speed Feedback Detection Control Gain (for PM OLV)
Sets the gain for internal speed feedback detection control. Although this setting rarely needs to be changed, adjustment
may be necessary under the following conditions:
• Increase this setting if motor oscillation or hunting occurs.
• Decrease this setting in increments of 0.05 to decrease the drive responsiveness.
n8-45 Speed Feedback Detection Control Gain 0.00 to 10.00 0.80
■ n8-47: Pull-In Current Compensation Time Constant (for PM OLV)

Sets the time constant for making the actual current and the pull-in current agree.
Parameter Details
Although this setting rarely needs to be changed, adjustment may be necessary under the following conditions:
• Increase this setting when it takes too long for the reference value for the pull-in current to match the target value.
• Decrease this setting if motor oscillation occurs.
n8-47 Pull-In Current Compensation Time Constant 0.0 to 100.0 s 5.0 s 5
■ n8-48: Pull-In Current (for PM OLV)
Tells the drive the amount of d-axis current to be provided to the motor during no-load operation at a constant speed. Set
as a percentage of the motor rated current.
• Increase this setting when hunting occurs or the motor speed is unstable while running at a constant speed.
• If there is too much current when driving a light load at a constant speed, then reduce this level slightly.
n8-48 Pull-In Current <1> 30 %
<1> Setting range varies by the software version the drive is running. Software versions 6002 or later disable pull-in current when n8-48 = 0, and
allow the pull-in current to be changed during run.
Software versions 6002 or later: 0%, 20 to 200%
Software versions 6001 or earlier: 20 to 200%
■ n8-49: d Axis Current for High Efficiency Control (for PM OLV)

Sets the amount of d axis current when using Energy Saving control as a percentage of the motor rated current.
Although this setting seldom needs to be changed, please note the following:
• If motor operation is unstable when driving heavy loads, try increasing this setting (towards 0).
• If motor parameters (E5) have been changed, this value will be reset to 0 and has to be readjusted.

n8-49 d Axis Current for High Efficiency Control <1> 50 %
<1> Sestting range varies by the software version the drive is running. Software versions 6002 or later allow n8-49 to be changed during run
Software versions 6002 or later: -200.0 to 200.0%
Software versions 6001 or earlier: -200.0 to 0.0%.
■ n8-51: Acceleration/Deceleration Pull-In Current (for PM OLV)

Sets the d-axis current during acceleration and deceleration as a percentage of the motor rated current (E5-03).
Adjustments to this setting may help in the following situations:
• Increase this setting when a large amount of starting torque is required.
• Lower this setting if there is excessive current during acceleration and deceleration.

n8-51 Acceleration/Deceleration Pull-In Current 0 to 200% 50 %
■ n8-54: Voltage Error Compensation Time Constant (for PM OLV)

Sets the time constant for voltage error compensation. Make changes to this parameter under the following conditions:
• Adjust the value when hunting occurs at low speed.
• Increase the value in steps of 0.1 when hunting occurs with sudden load changes. Try to disable the compensation by
setting n8-51 = 0 if increasing does not help.
• Increase the value when oscillations occur at start.

n8-54 Voltage Error Compensation Time Constant 0.00 to 10.00 s 1.00 s
■ n8-55: Load Inertia (for PM OLV)

Sets the ratio between motor inertia and the inertia of the connected machinery. If this value is set too low, the motor may
not start very smoothly, and a STo fault (Motor Step-Out) might occur.

n8-55 Load Inertia 0 to 3 0
Setting 0: Below 1:10

The inertia ratio between the motor and the load is just less than 1:10.
Setting 1: Between 1:10 and 1:30
The inertia ratio between the motor and the load is between 1:10 and 1:30. Set n8-55 to 1 if a STo fault occurs as a result
of impact load or sudden acceleration/deceleration when n8-55 = 0.
Setting 2: Between 1:30 and 1:50
The inertia ratio between the motor and the load is between 1:30 and 1:50. Set n8-55 to 2 if a STo fault occurs as a result
of impact load or sudden acceleration/deceleration when n8-55 = 1.
Setting 3: Beyond 1:50
The inertia ratio between the motor and the load is higher than 1:50. Set n8-55 to 3 if a STo fault occurs as a result of
impact load or sudden acceleration/deceleration when n8-55 = 2.
■ n8-62: Output Voltage Limit (for PM OLV)

Sets the output voltage limit to prevent output voltage saturation. This value should not be set higher than the actual input
voltage.

n8-62 <1> Output Voltage Limit 0.0 to 230.0 Vac 200 Vac
■ n8-63/ n8-68: Output Voltage Limit Gain 1/2

n8-63 determines the gain level applied to the input voltage set in units of 0.01.
n8-68 determines a second gain level applied to the input voltage.
These parameters rarely need to be changed.
Note: These parameters are valid form the software versions 6002 or later.

n8-63 Output Voltage Limit Gain 1 0.00 to 100.00 1.00
n8-68 Output Voltage Limit Gain 2 0.50 to 1.50 0.95
■ n8-65: Speed Feedback Detection Control Gain during ov Suppression (OLV/PM)

Sets the gain for internal speed feedback detection control when overvoltage suppression is active. Although this setting
rarely needs to be changed, adjustment may be necessary under the following conditions:
• Increase this setting if motor oscillation or hunting occurs when ov suppression is active.
• Decrease this setting in increments of 0.05 to decrease the drive responsiveness during ov suppression.

n8-65 Speed Feedback Detection Control Gain during ov Suppression 0.00 to 10.00 1.50
■ n8-87: Output Voltage Limit Selection

Sets how the output voltage limit should be used. This setting is rarely needs to be changed.
Note: This parameter is valid from software version 6002 or later.

n8-87 Output Voltage Limit Selection 0, 1 0
0: Feedback type
Parameter Details
1: Feed Forward type
■ n8-88: Output Voltage Limit Switch Current Level
Sets the current level to switch the output voltage limit sequence. Set as a percentage of the motor rated current (E5-03).
This setting is rarely needs to be changed.
5

n8-88 Output Voltage Limit Switch Current Level 0 to 400% 400%
■ n8-89: Output Voltage Limit Switch Hysteresis Width

Sets hysteresis used for the current level that switches the output voltage limit sequence. Set as a percentage of the motor
rated current (E5-03). This setting is rarely needs to be changed.

n8-89 Output Voltage Limit Switch Hysteresis Width 0 to n8-88 3%
■ n8-90: Output Voltage Limit Switch Speed

Sets the speed level for switching the output voltage limit sequence. Set as a percentage of the maximum output
frequency (E1-04). This setting is rarely needs to be changed.

n8-90 Output Voltage Limit Switch Speed 0 to 200% 200%
■ n8-91: Output Voltage Limit ld Limit

Sets the limit value for the ld operation of the feedback type output voltage limitation. This setting is available only at n8-
87 = 0.

n8-91 Output Voltage Limit ld Limit 0 to -200% -50%
◆ n9: Hardware Settings

Using these parameters, the drive output voltage can be adjusted.
■ n9-10: AVR Time Constant
Sets the delay time constant that is used to adjust the output voltage when the DC bus voltage changes.

n9-10 AVR Time Constant 0.0 to 100.0 ms 1.0 ms
■ n9-12: On-Delay Compensation Time

Sets the time value used for IGBT On-delay compensation.

Determined by
n9-12 On-Delay Compensation Time 0.00 to 20.00 ms
o2-04
■ n9-62: On-Delay Compensation Derating Start Frequency

Sets the frequency at which the drive begins to compensate the output voltage for the IGBT On-Delay.

n9-62 On-Delay Compensation Derating Start Frequency 0.0 to [E1-04] Hz 0.0 Hz
■ n9-63: On-Delay Compensation Disable Frequency

When operating a high-speed motor at low speeds, n9-62 sets the frequency at which the drive stops compensating the
switching delay in the DC bus.

n9-63 On-Delay Compensation Disable Frequency 0.0 to [E1-04] Hz 0.0 Hz
5.10 o: Operator Related Settings

These parameters concern the various functions and features of the digital operator.
◆ o1: Digital Operator Display Selection

These parameters determine how data is shown on the operator display.
■ o1-01: Drive Mode Unit Monitor Selection
When the drive is powered up, the monitor selected in parameter o1-02 appears first on the display. If o1-02 is set to 5,
o1-01 can be used to change the content of this monitor.
When using an LED operator, pressing the up arrow key will display the following data: speed reference → rotational
direction → output speed → output current → o1-01 selection.
Parameter o1-01 lets the user select the content of the last monitor in this sequence. There is no effect like this on an LCD
operator.

104 to 903
o1-01 Drive Mode Unit Monitor Selection 106 (U1-06)
(U1-04 to U9-03) <1> <2>
<1> U2- and U3- parameters cannot be selected.
<2> Setting range varies by the software version the drive is running. Software versions 6002 or later allow o1-01 to be changed during run.
Software versions 6002 or later: 104 to 903 (U1-04 to U9-03)
Software versions 6001 or earlier: 104 to 621 (U1-04 to U6-21)
To select a monitor parameter, set the three numeric digits that make up that monitor. This is done by entering the -
part of U-. For a list of monitors, Refer to U: Monitor Parameters on page 236.
■ o1-02: User Monitor Selection after Power Up
Selects which monitor parameter will be displayed upon power up. Defaulted to show the frequency reference when the
drive is first turned on.

o1-02 User Monitor Selection after Power Up 1 to 5 1
Setting 1: Frequency Reference (U1-01)

Setting 2: Forward/Reverse
Setting 3: Output Frequency (U1-02)
Parameter Details
Setting 4: Output Current (U1-03)
Setting 5: User Selected Monitor (set by o1-01)
■ o1-03: Digital Operator Display Selection
Sets the units used to display the frequency reference and output frequency. Set o1-03 to 3 for user-set units, then set
parameters o1-10 and o1-11. 5
o1-03 Digital Operator Display Selection 0 to 3 0
Setting 0: 0.01 Hz units

Setting 1: 0.01% units (100% = max. output frequency)
Setting 2: r/min units (calculated by the max output frequency and the no. of motor poles)
Setting 3: User-set units (use o1-10, o1-11)
Set the value use for the maximum frequency reference to o1-10. The placement of the decimal point in this number
should be set to o1-11.
For example, to have the maximum output frequency displayed as “100.00”, set the o1-10 = 1000 and o1-11 = 2 (i.e.,
1000 with 2 decimal points).
Note: 1. Parameter o1-03 allows the programmer to change the units used in the following parameters and monitors:
x U1-01: frequency reference
x U1-02: output frequency
x U1-05: motor speed
x U1-16: output frequency after softstarter (accel/decel ramp generator)
x d1-01 to d1-17: frequency references
2. Setting o1-03 to 2 requires that the number of motor poles be entered to E2-04, E4-04, and E5-04.
■ o1-10: User-Set Display Units Maximum Value

Determines the display value that is equal to the maximum output frequency. The decimal number is defined by
parameter o1-11.
Note: This setting changes automatically when o1-03 is changed. o1-10 can only be adjusted when o1-03 is set to 3.
Determined by
o1-10 User-Set Display Units Maximum Value 1 to 60000
o1-03
■ o1-11: User-Set Display Units Decimal Display

Determines the number of digits for user-set display if o1-03 is set to 3. The setting value is equal to the number of
decimal places. The maximum display value is defined by o1-10.
Note: This setting changes automatically when o1-03 is changed. o1-11 can only be adjusted when o1-03 is set to 3.
Determined by
o1-11 User-Set Display Units Decimal Display 0 to 3
o1-03
◆ o2: Digital Operator Keypad Functions

These parameters determine the functions assigned to the operator keys.
■ o2-01: LO/RE (LOCAL/REMOTE) Key Function Selection
Parameter o2-01 determines whether the LO/RE key on the digital operator will be enabled or not for switching between
LOCAL and REMOTE.

o2-01 LO/RE Key Function Selection 0 or 1 1
Setting 0: Disabled
The LO/RE key is disabled.
Setting 1: Enabled
The LO/RE switches between LOCAL and REMOTE operation. Switching is possible during stop only. When LOCAL
is selected, the LED indicator on the LO/RE key will light up.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. The drive may start unexpectedly if the Run command is already applied when switching from
LOCAL mode to REMOTE mode when b1-07 = 1, resulting in death or serious injury. Be sure all personnel are clear of rotating
machinery and electrical connections prior to switching between LOCAL mode and REMOTE mode.
■ o2-02: STOP Key Function Selection

Selects if the STOP key on the digital operator can be used to stop the operation when the drive is controlled from a
remote source (i.e., not from digital operator).

o2-02 STOP Key Function Selection 0 or 1 1
Setting 0: Disabled
The STOP key has no function when the drive is controlled by a source other than the digital operator. The drive can only
be stopped from the Run command source that has been selected.
Setting 1: Enabled
The STOP key can be used to terminate the operation, even if the Run command source is not assigned to the digital
operator. If operation has been interrupted by pressing the STOP key, the Run command must be cycled to restart the
drive.
■ o2-03: User Parameter Default Value
Once drive parameters are set up completely, the values set can be saved as “User Initialization Values” by setting
parameter o2-03. Once this has been done, the “Initialize Parameters” parameter (A1-03) will offer the choice of “1110:
User Initialize”. Choosing A1-03 = “1110: User Initialized”, will reset all parameters to the values saved as “User
Initialization Values”. Refer to A1-03: Initialize Parameters on page 109 for details on drive initialization.

o2-03 User Parameter Default Value 0 to 2 0
Setting 0: No Change
All “User Initialization Values” are kept as they are.
Setting 1: Set User Initialization Values
The current parameter settings are saved as “User Initialization Values”. Once o2-03 is set to 1 and the ENTER key is
pressed, the values are saved and the display returns to 0.
Setting 2: Clear User Initialization Values
All “User Initialization Values” are cleared. Once o2-03 is set to 2 and the ENTER key is pressed, the values are erased
and the display returns to 0.
■ o2-04: Drive Model Selection
Parameter o2-04 matches the control board to the drive hardware. Proper setting of o2-04 is important for optimal
performance and proper protection for the drive hardware. This parameter is configured at the factory and does not
normally require adjustment in the field. It is available primarily to accommodate control board replacement in the event
of damage.

Depending on drive
o2-04 Drive Model Selection -
size
Note: 1. Refer to Defaults by Drive Model Selection (o2-04) on page 377 for a list of o2-04 settings and parameters that change depending on
the drive model selection.
2. Drive performance will suffer if the correct drive capacity is not set to o2-04, and protective functions will fail to operate properly.
Parameter Details
3. This parameter is not reset when the drive is initialized using parameter A1-03.
■ o2-05: Frequency Reference Setting Method Selection

Determines if the ENTER key must be used to input a frequency reference from the digital operator.

o2-05 Frequency Reference Setting Method Selection 0 or 1 0
Setting 0: ENTER Key Required

Every change in the frequency reference setting on the digital operator has to be finalized by pressing the ENTER key
before it becomes effective.
Setting 1: ENTER Key Not Required
The output frequency changes immediately when the reference is changed by the up and down arrow keys on the digital
operator. The ENTER key does not need to be pressed. The frequency reference is saved five seconds after the up arrow
or down arrow key has been released. If undervoltage error Uv occurs within 5 s of having pressed the ENTER key, then
the frequency reference will not be saved to memory.
■ o2-06: Operation Selection when Digital LCD Operator is Disconnected

Determines if the drive will stop when an external LCD operator is removed in LOCAL mode or with b1-02 set to 0.
Note: An LCD operator is available as an option. This setting is not applicable to the standard LED operator that comes with the drive.
o2-06 Operation Selection when Digital Operator is Disconnected 0 or 1 0
Setting 0: Continue Operation

The operation is continued.
Setting 1: Trigger a Fault
The operation is stopped and an “oPr” fault is triggered. The motor coasts to stop.
■ o2-07: Motor Direction at Power Up when Using Operator
Determines the direction the motor will rotate after the drive is powered up when the Run command is set to be given
from the digital operator.
Note: This parameter is effective only when the Run command is set to be given from the digital operator (b1-02 and b1-16 = 0).
o2-07 Motor Direction at Power Up when Using Operator 0 or 1 0
Setting 0: Forward
Setting 1: Reverse
◆ o3: Copy Function

Use o3 parameters to Read, Copy, and Verify the parameter settings to and from the drive.
■ o3-01 Copy Function Selection
This parameter controls the copying of parameters to and from the LED operator (option). The copy function will change
certain parameter default settings depending on the regional specification of the drive.

o3-01 Copy Function Selection 0 or 1 0
0: COPY SELECT (no function)

1: INV --> OP READ
All parameters are copied from the drive to the LED operator.
2: OP --> INV WRITE
All parameters are copied from the LED operator to the drive.
3: OP<-->INV VERIFY
Parameter settings in the drive are compared to those in the LED operator.
Note: When using the copy function, the drive model number (o2-04) and the software number (U1-14) must match or an error will
occur.
■ o3-02 Copy Allowed Selection

Enables and disables the digital operator copy functions.

o3-02 Copy Allowed Selection 0, 1 0
0: Disabled
No digital operator copy functions are allowed
1: Enabled
Copying allowed
◆ o4: Maintenance Monitor Settings

■ o4-01: Cumulative Operation Time Setting
Parameter o4-01 sets the cumulative operation time and allows the user to set the starting value of the accumulated
operation time displayed in monitor U4-01.
Note: The value in o4-01 is set in 10 h units. For example, a setting of 30 will set the cumulative operation time counter to 300 h. 300 h
will also be displayed in monitor U4-01.

o4-01 Cumulative Operation Time Setting 0 to 9999 0
■ o4-02: Cumulative Operation Time Selection

Selects the conditions for what is to be considered “accumulated operation time.” Accumulated operation time is
displayed in U4-01.

o4-02 Cumulative Operation Time Selection 0 or 1 0
Setting 0: Power On Time

The drive logs the time it is connected to a power supply, no matter if the motor is running or not.
Setting 1: Run Time
The drive logs the time that the output is active, i.e., whenever a Run command is active (even if the motor is not
rotating) or a voltage is output.
■ o4-03: Cooling Fan Operation Time Setting
Sets the value of the cooling fan operation time counter displayed in monitor U4-03. Parameter o4-03 also sets the base
value used for the cooling fan maintenance value displayed in U4-04. Be sure to reset this parameter back to 0 if the
cooling fan is replaced.
Note: 1. The value in o4-03 is set in 10 h units. For example, a setting of 30 will set the cooling fan operation time counter to 300 h. “300” will
be displayed in monitor U4-03.
2. The actual maintenance time depends on the environment the drive is used in.

o4-03 Cooling Fan Operation Time Setting 0 to 9999 0
■ o4-05: Capacitor Maintenance Setting
Parameter Details
Sets value of the maintenance monitor for the DC bus capacitors displayed in U4-05 as a percentage of the total expected
performance life. This value should be reset to 0 when the DC bus capacitors have been replaced.
Note: The actual maintenance time will depend on the environment the drive is used in.

o4-05 Capacitor Maintenance Setting 0 to 150% 0%
■ o4-07: DC Bus Pre-charge Relay Maintenance Setting

Sets the value of the softcharge bypass relay maintenance time displayed in U4-06 as a percentage of the total expected
performance life. This value should be reset to 0 when the relay has been replaced.
Note: The maintenance actual time depends on the environment the drive is used in.

o4-07 DC Bus Pre-charge Relay Maintenance Setting 0 to 150% 0%
■ o4-09: IGBT Maintenance Setting

Sets the value of the IGBT maintenance time displayed in U4-07 as a percentage of the total expected performance life.
This value should be reset to 0 when the IGBTs have been replaced.
Note: The actual maintenance time depends on the environment the drive is used in.

o4-09 IGBT Maintenance Setting 0 to 150% 0%
■ o4-11: U2, U3 Initialization

When the drive is initialized, the fault trace and fault history monitors (U2- and U3-) are not reset. Parameter
o4-11 can be used to initialize them.

o4-11 U2, U3 Initialization 0 or 1 0
Setting 0: No Action
The drive keeps a record of the fault trace and fault history.
Setting 1: Reset Fault Data
Resets the data for the U2- and U3- monitors. Once o4-11 is set to 1 and the ENTER key is pressed, the fault
data are erased and the display returns to 0.
■ o4-12: kWh Monitor Initialization
The kWh monitors U4-10 and U4-11 are not initialized when the power is cycled or the drive is initialized. o4-12 can be
used to manually reset them.

o4-12 kWh Monitor Initialization 0 or 1 0
The kWh data are kept as they are.
Setting 1: Reset kWh Data
Resets the kWh counter. The monitors U4-10 and U4-11 will show 0. Once o4-12 is set to 1 and the ENTER key is
pressed, the kWh data are erased and the display returns to 0.
■ o4-13: Number of Run Commands Counter Initialization
The Run command counter displayed in U4-02 is not reset when the power is cycled or the drive is initialized. Using o4-
13 it can be manually reset to 0.

o4-13 Number of Run Commands Counter Initialization 0 or 1 0
The Run command data are kept as they are.
Setting 1: Reset kWh Data
Resets the Run command counter. The monitor U4-02 will show 0. Once o4-13 is set to 1 and the ENTER key is pressed,
the counter value is erased and the display returns to 0.
5.11 S: Functions for Textile Applications

These parameters are designed specifically for textile applications. They are used to set and adjust the Disturb function,
gain levels for the frequency reference, braking transistor characteristics, and certain aspects of the KEB function.
◆ S1: Disturb Function

The S1 parameter group determines how the Disturb function operates.
■ Disturb Function
The Disturb function changes the frequency reference in periodic intervals. These changes in the frequency reference
make it possible to wind the line more evenly. Below Figure 5.77 shows how the Disturb function operates.
Figure 5.77
Frequency E
S1-03 (Disturd Step)

A
L4-02
C S1-02 (Disturb Function
(Speed Agreement
Amplitude)
Detection Width) F
Frequency Reference
D
B
Output Frequency
Disturb Start Disturb Decel <3> Disturb Accel <4>
<2>
0 Hz
Time
S1-04 S1-05
(Disturb Deceleration (Disturb Acceleration
Start <1> Time) Time)
Run Command ON
Speed Agree 1 Closed

(H2- = 2)
Closed Closed
Disturb Function
(H1- = 50)
During Disturb
Closed
Function Output
(H2- = 51)
<1> Once the Run command is entered, the drive speeds up to the frequency reference within the specified acceleration time (using the Accel
times 1 through 4). If triggered, the Disturb waveform is generated.
<2> When the conditions to trigger the Disturb waveform arise, the drive outputs the Disturb waveform from the soft-starter output up to the
Disturb frequency (point A) within the Disturb acceleration time set to S1-05. The drive then immediately decelerates to point C as
specified by the Disturb step (S1-03).
<3> The drive slows from point C to point B within the Disturb deceleration time set to S1-04, then immediately accelerates up to point D as
Parameter Details
<4> The drive accelerates from point D up to point E within the acceleration time set to S1-05, then immediately decelerates to point F as
Figure 5.77 Disturb Function Operation
Note: 1. The top of the Disturb frequency indicated by point A is limited to the maximum output frequency set to E1-04.
2. The bottom of the Disturb frequency indicated by point B is limited to the minimum frequency reference.
5
Conditions Activating the Disturb Function
• The Disturb function must be enabled (S1-01 = 1 or 2).
• The Disturb function amplitude (S1-02), the Disturb deceleration time (S1-04), and the Disturb acceleration time (S1-
05) must be set to a value greater than zero.
• The Disturb function cannot be executed during KEB.
• The Disturb function cannot be executed when power loss has been detected.
• A multi-function input terminal set for the Disturb command (H1- = 50) must be open.
• The drive must use V/f Control to run the motor (A1-02 = 0).
Conditions that Stop the Disturb Function
Any one of the conditions below will stop the Disturb function.
• The multi-function input terminal set to activate the Disturb command (H1- = 50) closes.
• KEB is triggered.
• The drive detects power loss.
■ S1-01: Disturb Function Selection

Enables or disables the Disturb function. If enabled, the Disturb waveform is generated when the frequency reference
and output frequency match (referred to as "speed agree").

S1-01 Disturb Function Selection 0 to 2 0
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2: Enabled, Outputs the Disturb Waveform During Accel/Decel
■ S1-02: Disturb Function Amplitude
Sets the amplitude of the Disturb waveform as a percentage of the frequency reference.

S1-02 Disturb Function Amplitude 0.00 to 20.00% 0.00%
■ S1-03: Disturb Step

Sets the step applied at the end of disturb acceleration or deceleration as a percentage of the Disturb amplitude in S1-02.

S1-03 Disturb Step 0 to 50% 0%
■ S1-04: Disturb Deceleration Time

Sets the deceleration time for the Disturb function.

S1-04 Disturb Deceleration Time 0. to 120.0 s 0.0 s
■ S1-05: Disturb Acceleration Time

Sets the acceleration time for the Disturb function.

S1-05 Disturb Acceleration Time 0.0 to 120.0 s 0.0 s
◆ S2: Frequency Reference Gain Settings

Independent of the frequency reference source selected, this function applies a gain to the frequency reference value.
A gain change ramp can be used in order to avoid speed steps when the gain value in S2-02 is modified.
■ S2-01: Frequency Reference Gain
Determines how much to reduce or amplify the frequency reference. Note that the frequency reference cannot exceed the
upper limit set to d2-01, regardless of how high S2-01 is set.

S2-01 Frequency Reference Gain 0.00 to 1000.00% 100.00%
■ S2-02: Frequency Reference Gain Change Ramp

Determines the time the drive uses to change the frequency reference gain. Set as the time to change the gain from 0 to 100%.

S2-02 Frequency Reference Gain Change Ramp 0.0 to 600.0 s 0.0 s
◆ S3: Braking Transistor and V/f Ratio Gain

■ S3-01: Braking Transistor Operation Selection
Determines when the drive built-in braking transistor is enabled.

S3-01 Braking Transistor Operation Selection 0, 1 0
0: During run only

1: Always enabled
■ S3-02: Braking Transistor Operation Voltage Level
Sets the voltage level that triggers the drive built-in braking transistor.

S3-02 Braking Transistor Operation Voltage Level 300 to 400 Vdc 380 Vdc
Note: This value is for 200 V drives. Double this setting when using a 400 V class drive.
■ S3-03: V/f Gain Enable/Disable

Enables and disables the V/f gain setting in MEMOBUS register 03H.

S3-03 V/f Gain Enable/Disable 0, 1 0
0: Disable
1: Enable
■ S3-04: V/f Gain Change Time
Sets the drive uses to change the V/f gain set in MEMOBUS register 03H.

S3-04 V/f Gain Change Time 0.0 to 10.0 s 0.5 s
◆ S4: KEB Mode Selection

S4 parameters define the conditions for how the KEB function operates.
Parameter Details
■ KEB
Short for Kinetic Energy Backup, the KEB function helps the drive through power loss. Once power loss is detected,
KEB quickly decelerates the motor, using regenerative energy to maintain voltage levels in the DC bus. This keeps the
drive running through a momentary loss in power. Once power is restored, the drive continues operating as before.
There are three ways that KEB can be performed. Parameter S4-01 determines which method is used. Refer to S4-01: 5
KEB Mode Selection on page 230.
Conditions that Trigger KEB
When KEB is enabled (i.e., S4-01 is not set to 0), it will be triggered by any one of the following conditions:
• A multi-function input terminal set for KEB 1 is activated (H1- = 65 or 66).
• Voltage in the DC bus has fallen below the level that trips KEB (set in S4-03).
• Voltage fluctuation in the DC bus exceeded the level that trips KEB (set to S4-04).
• Phase loss was detected as defined by the phase loss detection level (S4-08) and the detection time (S4-10).
Conditions that Stop KEB

While KEB is being executed, any one of the following conditions will stop the KEB process.
• All the conditions that trigger KEB are no longer present, the minimum time for KEB (S4-13) has passed, and the DC
bus voltage is greater than the level required for KEB to complete (S4-06) for longer than the time set in S4-07.
Note: KEB cannot complete until the time set to S4-07 has passed, even if all other conditions to stop KEB have been met.
• Once power is restored, the input terminal set for KEB 1 (H1- = 65 or 66) that triggered KEB is released.
Note: When an input terminal is programmed to trigger KEB, the operation of KEB depends on the opening and closing of that
terminal.
DC Bus Voltage Control (KEB 1), Power KEB (KEB 3)
Below Figure 5.78 demonstrates how KEB 1 and KEB 3 operate.
The KEB function is triggered when one of the previously explained conditions becomes true. The KEB function starts
by immediately applying a frequency gain in order to bring the motor into a regenerative state, then quickly decelerates
the motor.
The deceleration is performed for at least the time set in parameter S4-13. The drive controls the deceleration so that the
energy needed to keep the DC bus voltage at the level set in S4-11 is fed from the rotating system back into the drive.
KEB 1 (S4-01 = 1) uses the deceleration times set in S5-01 and S5-02 as a base, and adjusts the deceleration rate
depending on the DC bus voltage. KEB 3 (S4-01 = 3) uses motor and machine inertia data only to calculate the optimal
deceleration rate. The deceleration time settings have no effect during KEB 3.
The KEB function ends when one of the previously explained conditions becomes true. At the end of KEB, the drive
holds the output frequency for the time set in parameter S4-12, then accelerates back to the frequency reference. The
acceleration time is defined by parameter S5-05. If S5-05 is set to 0, then the drive uses the acceleration times set in C1-
01, C1-03, C1-05, and C1-07.
Note: Make sure that the Run command remains enabled during power loss. If the Run command is released, then the drive will not be
able to accelerate back up to the frequency reference once power is restored.
Figure 5.78
Power Loss Power Restored
Main Power Supply
0V
S4-03 (KEB Start Voltage)
S4-04 (KEB Start dv/dt Level)
DC Bus Voltage S4-10 (KEB 1Phase Loss
Detection Time)
S4-06 (KEB End Voltage)
S4-11 (KEB Target Voltage)
0V
S5-07 (Frequency Gain at KEB Start during Constant Speed)
S5-08 (Frequency Gain at KEB Start during Acceleration)
S5-09 (Frequency Gain at KEB Start during Deceleration)
Output Frequency
S4-12 (KEB
Hold Time)
S5-05 (KEB 1 Synchronous
Acceleration Time) or
Deceleration using C1-01, C1-03, C1-05, C1-07
S5-01 and S5-02 or Power KEB (Acceleration Time 1, 2, 3, 4)
S4-07 (KEB End
Detection Time)
0 Hz
Figure 5.78 KEB Function when S4-01 = 1 or 3
Synchronous Accel/Decel (KEB 2)

Synchronous KEB can be used when multiple drives have to be decelerated during power loss while keeping the speed
ratio between the drives constant.
KEB 2 begins when one of the conditions that triggers the KEB function becomes true. To have multiple drives remain in
sync with one another while accelerating and decelerating during KEB 2, Yaskawa recommends setting a multi-function
input to "KEB 1" (H1- = 65 or 66) to activate the synchronous accel/decel provided by KEB 2.
KEB 2 decelerates the drive using the deceleration time set in S5-01 and S5-02. This deceleration time is referred as the
time needed to decelerate from the active frequency reference to stop.
When the power returns the drive accelerates back to the frequency reference using the time set in S5-05. This
acceleration time is referred as the time needed to accelerate from the current output frequency to the frequency
reference.
Figure 5.79
Power Loss Power Restored
H1- = 65 ON
OFF OFF
(KEB 1)
S5-05 (KEB 1 Synchronous

Acceleration Time)
Drive 1,
Output Frequency
Drive 2,
Output Frequency
Drive 3,
Output Frequency

0 Hz
S5-01 (KEB Decel Time 1)

Figure 5.79 S4-01 = 2 (Synchronous accel/decel (KEB 2))
Figure 5.80 shows a wiring diagram when assigning an input terminal to trigger KEB 1 (H1- = 65 or 66).
Figure 5.80
Braking Resistor
Parameter Details
Option
B1 B2
L1 R/L1 U/T1
L2 S/L2 V/T2 M
L3 T/L3 W/T3
5
UV Detection
Relay
S6 - KEB 1, 2
S1 - Run Command
SC
Figure 5.80 KEB Terminal Wiring Example

Note: 1. Make sure that the Run command remains enabled during power loss. If the Run command is released, then the drive will not be able
to accelerate back up to the frequency reference once power is restored.
2. A braking resistor option is needed when using the synchronous accel/decel feature offered by KEB 2 (S4-01 = 1) while S5-10 is set
to 0.
■ S4-01: KEB Mode Selection

Determines which of the three types of KEB to use.
To have the drive perform KEB itself (i.e., using its own independent deceleration rate), then use KEB 1 or KEB 3 by
setting S4-01 to either 1 or 3.
For drives running on a line system in a textile application, it may be beneficial to synchronize the deceleration rate for
all drives on the line. Use KEB 2 (S4-01 = 2) to have all drive decelerate together.

S4-01 KEB Mode Selection 0 to 3 0
0: KEB Disabled
Drive will not use KEB when power loss occurs.
1: DC Bus Voltage Control (KEB 1)
When KEB is triggered, the drive observes the DC bus voltage and holds the frequency if the voltage rises. The
deceleration rate is adjusted in accordance with the KEB decel times set to S5-01 and S5-02. This selection is
recommended when a braking resistor option is not installed.
Note: A braking resistor option must be installed when using KEB in a line system in which synchronous accel/decel is required.
Frequency hold should also be disabled when decelerating during KEB (S5-10 = 0) in such applications.
2: Synchronous Accel/Decel (KEB 2)
KEB decelerates the motor according to the times set in S5-01 and S5-02, regardless of the DC bus voltage level. A
braking resistor should be used to prevent problems with overvoltage.
3: Power KEB (KEB 3)
Using inertia data of the machine the drive calculates the optimal deceleration rate in order to keep the DC bus voltage at
the target level set in parameter S4-11.
■ S4-02: KEB Start/End Voltage Setting Mode
Determines how the KEB start and end voltage in parameters S4-03 and S4-06 are set.

S4-02 KEB Start/End Voltage 0, 1 0
0: Set as a Percentage of E1-01

1: Set as a Percentage of the DC Bus Voltage Before KEB was Triggered
■ S4-03: KEB Start Voltage
Determines the voltage level in the DC bus that will trigger KEB. Sets the minimum operation time for KEB once it is
triggered. The setting value depends on the selection in parameter S4-02. A setting of 200.0% essentially disables S4-03.

S4-03 KEB Start Voltage 0.0 to 200.0% 200.0%
■ S4-04: KEB Start dv/dt Level

Sets the level of voltage fluctuation in the DC bus that triggers KEB. If set to 0, this parameter will not trigger KEB.

S4-04 KEB Start dv/dt Level 0 to 10000 Vdc/s 0 Vdc/s
■ S4-05: KEB Start dv/dt Filter

Sets the time required for the voltage fluctuation level defined in S4-04 to trigger KEB.

S4-05 KEB Start dv/dt Filter 0 to 50 ms 20 ms
■ S4-06: KEB End Voltage

Sets the DC bus voltage level at that the drive assumes the power supply has returned. If this level is exceeded for longer
than S4-07 the drive starts reaccelerating to the set frequency reference. The setting value depends on the selection in
parameter S4-02.

S4-06 KEB End Voltage 0.0 to 200.0% 200.0%
Note: 1. This parameter is disregarded by the drive is an input terminal is set for KEB 1 (H1- = 65 or 66).
2. S4-06 must be set to higher value than S4-11.
■ S4-07: KEB End Detection Time

Sets the time for that the DC bus voltage must exceed the level set in S4-06 in order to end the KEB function and
reaccelerate to the set frequency reference.

S4-07 KEB End Detection Time 0 to 2000 ms 0 ms
Note: This parameter is disregarded by the drive is an input terminal is set for KEB 1 (H1- = 65 or 66).
■ S4-08: KEB 1 Phase Loss Detection Level

Defines the DC bus voltage ripple that indicates input a one loss, thus triggering the KEB function. A setting of 0 V will
keep the KEB function from being triggered when one phase loss occurs.

S4-08 KEB 1 Phase Loss Detection Level 0 to 800 V 0V
■ S4-09: KEB 1 Phase Loss Sampling Time

Sets the sampling time used to detect one input phase loss.

S4-09 KEB 1 Phase Loss Sampling Time 0 to 3000 ms 0 ms
■ S4-10: KEB 1 Phase Loss Detection Time

Sets the time that the ripple in the DC bus voltage must exceed the level set in S4-08 to trigger one phase loss detection.
Parameter Details
S4-10 KEB 1 Phase Loss Detection Time 0 to 10 ms 10 ms
■ S4-11: KEB Target Voltage

When KEB 1 or KEB 3 has been selected and S4-02 is set to 0, the drive attempts to keep the DC bus voltage at the target
voltage defined in S4-11 multiplied by E1-01.
5
S4-11 KEB Target Voltage 0.80 to 1.50 1.35
Note: 1. This parameter is disabled when KEB 2 is enabled.

2. S4-06 must be set to higher value than S4-11.
■ S4-12: KEB Hold Time

Once KEB is complete, S4-12 sets the time to hold the frequency reference before reacceleration.

S4-12 KEB Hold Time 0.0 to 10.0 s 0.0 s
■ S4-13: KEB Minimum Operation Time

Sets the minimum period of time the KEB must operate for once it has been triggered. Even if the conditions that
triggered KEB may no longer be present, KEB will still continue until the time set to S4-13 has passed.

S4-13 KEB Minimum Operation Time 0 to 2000 ms 50 ms
■ S4-14: KEB Reacceleration Prohibit Frequency

Sets the frequency level to prohibit re-acceleration after the power returned. If the drive output frequency fell below S4-
14 during KEB operation the drive will decelerate the motor to stop, even if the power returns.
A setting of 0.0 essentially disables this parameter.

S4-14 KEB Reacceleration Prohibit Frequency 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0%
◆ S5: KEB Accel/Decel Settings

S5 parameters governs acceleration and deceleration for KEB 1 and KEB 3 (S4-01 = 1 or 2).
■ KEB Decel Time Switching
The KEB 1 and KEB 2 functions can be used with an automatic switch over between two deceleration times. After the
KEB function starts, the drive decelerates the motor according to KEB Decel Time 1 (S5-01). When the output frequency
reaches the switching level set to S5-03 it changes the deceleration time over to KEB Decel Time 2 (S5-02) within the
time set in S5-04.
Figure 5.81
Output Frequency
S5-04 (KEB Decel Time

Switching Time)
S5-03 (KEB Decel Time
Switching Frequency)
0 Hz
Figure 5.81 KEB Decel Time Switching

S5-01 KEB Decel Time 1 0.0 to 200.0 sec 0.0 sec
S5-02 KEB Decel Time 2 0.0 to 200.0 sec 0.0 sec
S5-03 KEB Decel Time Switching Frequency 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0%
S5-04 KEB Decel Time Switching Time 0.0 to 10.0 sec 0.0 sec
Note: 1. S5-01 is enabled as long as the output frequency is greater than S5-03. When the output frequency is less than or equal to S5-03, the
drive uses the deceleration time set to S5-02.
2. S5-03 is set as a percentage of the output frequency just before the KEB function is triggered. It determines the point at which the
drive switches between deceleration times while the KEB function is executed.
■ S5-05: KEB Synchronous Acceleration Time

Sets time to accelerate from the frequency after KEB to the set frequency reference. This setting can be used to let
multiple drives accelerate synchronously back to the set speed after power loss.

S5-05 KEB Synchronous Acceleration Time 0.0 to 200.0 s 0.0 s
Note: If S5-05 is set to 0.0, the drive will use the normal acceleration times (C1-01, C1-03, C1-05, C1-07) to accelerate back up to
speed once power is restored.
■ S5-06: S-Curve at KEB Deceleration Start

Sets the S-curve time when KEB begins deceleration. Increase this setting if overvoltage trouble occurs.
Decreases if undervoltage occurs right after power loss deceleration.

S5-06 S-Curve at KEB Deceleration Start 0.00 to 2.50 s 0.20 s
■ S5-07: Frequency Gain at KEB Start during Constant Speed

Sets the output frequency reduction step applied when power loss is detected during constant speed operation and then
KEB starts.
Percent of frequency reduction = (slip frequency just before KEB) × S5-07 × 2
Increases if Uv is detected right after power loss deceleration.

S5-07 Frequency Gain at KEB Start during Constant Speed 0 to 300% 100%
■ S5-08: Frequency Gain at KEB Start during Acceleration

Sets the output frequency reduction step applied when power loss is detected during acceleration and then KEB starts.

S5-08 Frequency Gain at KEB Start during Acceleration 0 to 300% 100%
■ S5-09: Frequency Gain at KEB Start during Deceleration

Sets the output frequency reduction step applied when power loss is detected during deceleration and then KEB starts.
Parameter Details

S5-09 Frequency Gain at KEB Start during Deceleration 0 to 300% 100%
■ S5-10: Synchronous Deceleration ov Prevention

5
Enables or disables overvoltage prevention during synchronous KEB operation (S4-01 = 2). If S5-10 is enabled the drive
will temporary halt the deceleration if the DC bus voltage rises too high in order to avoid overvoltage trips.

S5-10 Synchronous Deceleration ov Prevention 0, 1 0
0: Disabled (reguires a braking option)

1: Enabled
◆ S6: Power KEB Function

S6 parameters determine how the Power KEB type of KEB operates. Power KEB is enabled when S4-01 is set to 3. It
uses machine inertia data for determining the deceleration rate needed to keep the DC bus voltage level at the value set in
parameter S4-11.
■ S6-01: DC Bus Capacity
Enter the size of any external capacitors that have been added to the drive to S6-01.

S6-01 DC Bus Capacity 0 to 65000 μF 1.00 <1>
■ S6-02: Motor Acceleration Time

Enter the time required for the motor the drive is running to accelerate from zero up to the maximum frequency at the
rated torque. If setting in parameter E2-11 is changed by the user or by performing Auto-Tuning, then S6-02 will
automatically be set to the motor acceleration time of a standard Yaskawa 4-pole motor.

Determined by
S6-02 Motor Acceleration Time 0.001 to 10.000 s o2-04, E2-11,
and E5-01
The motor acceleration time can be calculated using the formula below.
2π × J × Nr
S6-02 =
60 × T100
2
J㧦 GD [Kgm2]㧘P㧦Rated output [kW]㧘Nr㧦Rated speed [r/min]㧘T100㧦Rated torque [Nm]
4
Use the following formula to find the rated torque.
60 × P × 103
T100 =
2π × Nr
■ S6-03: Load/Inertia Ratio

Enter the ratio between the inertia of the load and the inertia of the motor the drive is running. This parameter also adjusts
the functions, Stall Prevention during deceleration (L3-04 = 2), and overvoltage suppression (L3-11 = 1).

S6-03 Load/Inertia Ratio 0.0 to 1000.0 1, 0
If S6-03 is set to the wrong value, a large current ripple may appear during Power KEB and during overvoltage
suppression. Problems may occur with overvoltage or undervoltage in the DC bus, and overcurrent.
The load/inertia ratio can be calculated using the following formula:
Machine inertia (excluding motor)
Load inertia ratio =
Rotor inertia
■ S6-04: DC Bus Adjustment Gain
Sets the gain to keep the voltage in the DC bus at the target level. If overvoltage or undervoltage is a problem at the start
of Power KEB, gradually increasing S6-04 in increments of 0.1 may help.

S6-04 DC Bus Adjustment Gain 0.00 to 5.00 1.00 <1>
DC Bus Gain Adjustment for Power KEB and Intelligent Stall Prevention
• If overvoltage or undervoltage is a problem at the start of Power KEB or when the “intelligent” method of Stall
Prevention during deceleration (L3-04 = 2) is performed, then gradually increasing S6-04 in increments of 0.1.
• Setting S6-04 too high can result in a large speed or current ripple.
DC Bus Gain Adjustment for Overvoltage Suppression
• For sudden increases in a regenerative load resulting in overvoltage, trying gradually increasing S6-04 in increments of
0.1.
• Setting S6-04 too high can result in a large speed or current ripple.
■ S6-05: Accel/Decel Calculation Gain
Sets the gain used to calculate the acceleration and deceleration rates used for Power KEB, overvoltage suppression, and
“intelligent” method of Stall Prevention during deceleration (L3-04 = 2).

S6-05 Accel/Decel Calculation Gain 0.00 to 200.00 1.00 <1>
Adjusting Calculation Gain for Power KEB and Intelligent Stall Prevention
• If speed or current ripple is a problem at the start of Power KEB or when the “intelligent” method of Stall Prevention
during deceleration (L3-04 = 2) is performed, then gradually reduce S6-05 in steps of 0.05
• For problems with overvoltage or overcurrent, reduce the value set to S6-05.
• If the calculation gain set to S6-05 is too low, the drive may be sluggish in suppressing DC bus voltage, and
deceleration times may take longer than is optimal.
Adjusting Calculation Gain for Overvoltage Suppression
• If the overvoltage suppression function is enabled (L3-11 = 1) but cannot handle the amount of regenerative energy
coming back from the motor, try gradually increasing S6-05 in increments of 0.1.
• If speed ripple is a problem while the overvoltage suppression function is enabled (L3-11 = 1), try gradually decreasing
S6-05 in steps of 0.05.
◆ T: Motor Tuning
Auto-Tuning automatically sets and tunes parameters required for optimal motor performance.
Refer to Auto-Tuning on page 94 for details on Auto-Tuning parameters.
Parameter Details
5.12 U: Monitor Parameters

Monitor parameters let the user view various aspects of drive performance as it is shown on the operator display.
Some monitors can be output from terminal AM by assigning the specific monitor parameter number to H4-01. Refer to
H4-01: Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal AM Monitor Selection on page 189 for details on assigning functions
to the analog output.
◆ U1: Operation Status Monitors

Status monitors display drive status like output frequency, current etc. Refer to U1: Operation Status Monitors on
page 368 for a complete list of U1- monitors and descriptions.
◆ U2: Fault Trace

These monitor parameters are used to view the status of various drive aspects when a fault occurs. This information is
helpful for finding out why a fault occurred. Refer to U2: Fault Trace on page 370 for a complete list of U2-
monitors and descriptions.
U2- monitors are not reset when the drive is initialized. Refer to o4-11: U2, U3 Initialization on page 224 for
instructions to initialize the fault trace.
◆ U3: Fault History

These parameters display faults that have occurred during operation as well as the drive operation time when those faults
occurred. Refer to U3: Fault History on page 370 for a complete list of U3- monitors and descriptions.
U3- monitors are not reset when the drive is initialized. Refer to o4-11: U2, U3 Initialization on page 224 for
instructions to initialize the fault trace.
◆ U4: Maintenance Monitors

Maintenance monitors show:
• Runtime data of the drive and cooling fans, and number of Run commands issued.
• Maintenance data and replacement information for various drive components.
• kWh data.
• Highest peak current that has occurred and output frequency at the time the peak current occurred.
• Motor overload status information.
• Detailed information about the present Run command and frequency reference source selection.
Refer to U4: Maintenance Monitors on page 371 for a complete list of U4- monitors and descriptions.
◆ U5: PID Monitors

These monitors display various aspects of PID control. Refer to PID Block Diagram on page 130 for a description of
where each monitor is located in the PID control block.
Refer to U5: PID Monitors on page 373 for a complete list of U5- monitors and descriptions.
◆ U6: Control Monitors

Control monitors show:
• Reference data for the output voltage and vector control.
• ASR monitors. Refer to C5: Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR) on page 145 for details and an illustration that shows
where in the ASR block the monitors are located.
• The offset value added to the frequency reference by the Frequency Offset function. Refer to Setting 44/45/46: Offset
Frequency 1/2/3 Addition on page 173.
Refer to U6: Operation Status Monitors on page 373 for a complete list of U6- monitors and descriptions.
Note: Fixed monitors U6-80 to U6-99 for comm. options
Monitor content will vary based on the communication option card connected to the drive. For more information, refer to the
instruction manual included with the option card or to the Technical Manual.
◆ U9: KEB Voltage Monitors

These parameters allow the user to monitor the voltage levels used for KEB function start and end. For more information
on the U9 monitor parameter monitors, see U9: KEB Voltage Monitors on page 374.
Parameter Details
6
Troubleshooting
This chapter provides descriptions of the drive faults, alarms, errors, related displays, and
possible solutions. This chapter can also serve as a reference guide for tuning the drive during
a trial run.
6.1 SECTION SAFETY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

6.2 MOTOR PERFORMANCE FINE TUNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
6.3 DRIVE ALARMS, FAULTS, AND ERRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
6.4 FAULT DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
6.5 ALARM DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
6.6 OPERATOR PROGRAMMING ERRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
6.7 AUTO-TUNING FAULT DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
6.8 DIAGNOSING AND RESETTING FAULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
6.9 TROUBLESHOOTING WITHOUT FAULT DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
6.1 Section Safety
6.1 Section Safety

DANGER
WARNING
The diagrams in this section may illustrate drives without covers or safety shields to display details. Be sure to reinstall
Do not touch terminals before the capacitors have fully discharged.
drive input power is turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc.
To prevent electric shock, wait at least five minutes after all indicators are off and measure the DC bus voltage level to
confirm safe level.
Installation, maintenance, inspection and servicing must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar with
Do not perform work on the drive while wearing loose clothing, jewelry, or without eye protection.
Remove all metal objects such as watches and rings, secure loose clothing and wear eye protection before beginning
work on the drive.
Fire Hazard
Verify that the rated voltage of the drive matches the voltage of the incoming drive input power before applying power.
6.1 Section Safety
WARNING
NOTICE
Yaskawa is not responsible for modification of the product made by the user.
Check all the wiring after installing the drive and connecting other devices to ensure that all connections are
correct.
Troubleshooting
6.2 Motor Performance Fine Tuning

This section offers helpful information for counteracting oscillation, hunting, or other faults that occur while performing
a trial run. Refer to the section below that corresponds to the motor control method used.
Note: This section describes parameters that are commonly edited. Consult Yaskawa for more information on detailed settings and
fine-tuning the drive.
◆ V/f Motor Control Method Tuning

Table 6.1 Parameters for Tuning the Drive in V/f Motor Control Method
Default Suggested
Problem Parameter No. Corrective Action Value Setting
• If insufficient motor torque relative to the size of the load
causes hunting, reduce the setting.
• When motor hunting and oscillation occur with a light
• Motor hunting and oscillation Hunting Prevention
load, increase the setting. 1.00 0.10 to 2.00
at speeds between 10 and 40 Hz Gain (n1-02)
• Lower this setting if hunting occurs when using a motor
with a relatively low inductance, such as a high-frequency
motor or a motor with a larger frame size.
• If the motor noise is too loud, increase the carrier
frequency.
• Motor noise • When motor hunting and oscillation occur at speeds up to Determined
Carrier Frequency
• Motor hunting and oscillation 40 Hz, lower the carrier frequency. by o2-04 1 to 6
Selection (C6-02)
at speeds up to 40 Hz • The default setting for the carrier frequency depends on and C6-01
the drive capacity (o2-04) and the Drive Duty Selection
(C6-01).
Torque • If motor torque and speed response are too slow, decrease
• Poor torque or speed response Compensation the setting.
200 ms <1> 100 to 1000 ms
• Motor hunting and oscillation Primary Delay Time • If motor hunting and oscillation occur, increase the
(C4-02) setting.
• If motor torque is insufficient at speeds below 10 Hz,
• Poor motor torque at speeds Torque
increase the setting.
below 10 Hz Compensation Gain 1.00 0.50 to 1.50
• If motor hunting and oscillation with a relatively light
• Motor hunting and oscillation (C4-01)
load, decrease the setting.
• If torque is insufficient at speeds below 10 Hz, increase E1-08:
Mid Output Voltage the setting. 16.0 V
• Poor motor torque at low
A (E1-08) • If motor instability occurs at motor start, decrease the
speeds Initial value ±5 V
Minimum Output setting. E1-10:
• Motor instability at motor start
Voltage (E1-10) Note: The recommended setting value is for 200 V class 12.0 V
drives. Double this value when using a 400 V class drive. <1>
• After setting the motor-rated current (E2-01), motor-

Slip Compensation
• Poor speed precision rated slip (E2-02) and motor no-load current (E2-03), - 0.5 to 1.5
Gain (C3-01)
adjust the slip compensation gain (C3-01).
<1> The default value is determined by the control mode (A1-02). The value shown here is the default when using V/f Control.
Note: Use slip compensation to improve speed precision in V/f Control. First make sure that the proper values have been set for the
motor rated current to E2-01, motor rated slip (E2-02), and motor no-load current (E2-03). Next, adjust the slip compensation
gain set to C3-01 so that it is between 0.5 to 1.5.
◆ Open Loop Vector (OLV) Motor Control Method Tuning

Table 6.2 Parameters for Tuning the Drive in OLV Motor Control Method
Suggested
Problem Parameter No. Corrective Action Default Value Setting
• Poor motor torque and speed
• If motor torque and speed response are too slow,
response
AFR Gain gradually decrease the setting by 0.05.
• Control motor hunting and 1.00 0.50 to 2.00
(n2-01) • If motor hunting and oscillation occur, gradually
oscillation at speeds between 10
increase the setting by 0.05.
and 40 Hz.
Suggested
Problem Parameter No. Corrective Action Default Value Setting
• To improve motor torque speed response,
gradually reduce this setting by 10 ms and check
the performance.
• If motor hunting and oscillation occur as a result
response
AFR Time Constant 1 of load inertia, gradually increase the setting by
• Control motor hunting and 50 ms 50 to 2000 ms
(n2-02) 50 ms and check the performance.
oscillation at speeds between 10
Note: Ensure that n2-02 ≤ n2-03. When making
and 40 Hz.
adjustments to n2-02, set C4-02 (Torque
Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant 1)
accordingly.
• If overvoltage trips occur, gradually increase this
setting by 50 ms.
• If response is slow, gradually reduce this setting
AFR Time Constant 2 by 10 ms.
750 ms 750 to 2000 ms
(n2-03) Note: Ensure that n2-02 ≤ n2-03. When making
adjustments to n2-03, increase the value of C4-06
• Overvoltage trips when (Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time 2)
accelerating, decelerating, or proportionally.
during sudden speed or load • If overvoltage trips occur, gradually increase this
changes. setting by 10 ms and check the performance.
• If response is slow, gradually reduce this setting
Torque Compensation
by 2 ms and check the performance.
Primary Delay Time 150 ms 150 to 750 ms
Note: Ensure that C4-02 ≤ C4-06. When changing
Constant 2 (C4-06)
C4-06 (Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time
Constant 2), increase the value of n2-03
proportionally.
• To improve motor torque speed response,
gradually reduce this setting by 2 ms and check
Torque Compensation the performance.
Primary Delay Time • If motor hunting and oscillation occur, gradually
response 20 ms <1> 20 to 100 ms
Constant 1 increase this setting by 10 ms.
• Motor hunting and oscillation.
(C4-02) Note: Ensure that C4-02 ≤ C4-06. When making
adjustments to C4-02, increase n2-02 (AFR Time
Constant) proportionally.
• If response is slow, gradually decrease the setting
Slip Compensation
• Poor speed response and by 10 ms.
Primary Delay Time 200 ms <1> 100 to 500 ms
stability • If speed is unstable, gradually increase the setting
Constant (C3-02)
by 10 ms.
• If speed is too slow, gradually increase the setting
Slip Compensation by 0.1 ms.
• Poor speed precision 1.0 <1> 0.5 to 1.5
Gain (C3-01) • If speed is too fast, gradually decrease the setting
by 0.1 ms.
• If there is too much motor noise, the carrier
Troubleshooting
frequency is too high.
• Motor noise
• If motor hunting and oscillation occur at low Determined by
• Control motor hunting and Carrier Frequency 0 to the default
speeds, reduce the carrier frequency. o2-04 and
oscillation occur at speeds below Selection (C6-02) setting
• The default setting for the carrier frequency C6-01
10 Hz.
depends on the drive capacity (o2-04) and Drive
Duty Selection (C6-01).
• If motor torque and speed response are too slow, 6
increase the setting.
• If the motor exhibits excessive instability at start-
Mid Output Voltage A E1-08: 12.0 V
• Poor motor torque at low speeds up, reduce the setting.
(E1-08) <1>
• Poor speed response Note: The default value is for 200 V class units. Initial ±2 V
Minimum Output E1-10: 2.5 V
• Motor instability at motor start. Double this value when using a 400 V class drive.
Voltage (E1-10) <1>
When working with a relatively light load,
increasing this value too much can create an
excessively high of a torque reference.
<1> The default value is determined by the control mode (A1-02). The value shown here is the default when using V/f Control.
When using OLV Motor Control, leave the torque compensation gain (C4-01) at its default setting of 1.00. To increase
speed precision during regeneration in OLV Motor Control, enable slip compensation during regeneration (C3-04 = “1”).
◆ Motor Hunting and Oscillation Control Parameters

In addition to the parameters discussed on page 154, the following parameters indirectly affect motor hunting and
oscillation.
Table 6.3 Parameters that Affect Control Performance in Applications
Name (Parameter No.) Application
Prevents motor speed loss by maintaining the output frequency when working with heavy loads or
Dwell Function (b6-01 through b6-04)
when there is powerful backlash on the machine side.
Adjusting accel and decel times will affect the torque presented to the motor during acceleration or
Accel/Decel Time (C1-01 through C1-09)
deceleration.
S-Curve Characteristics (C2-01 through
Prevents shock at the beginning and end of acceleration and deceleration.
C2-04)
Analog Filter Time Constant (H3-13) Prevents fluctuation in the analog input signal due to noise.
• Prevents motor speed loss and overvoltage. Used when the load is too heavy and also during
Stall Prevention (L3-01 through L3-06, L3- sudden acceleration/deceleration.
11) • Adjustment is not normally required because Stall Prevention is enabled as a default. Disable
Stall Prevention during deceleration (L3-04 = “0”) when using a braking resistor.
• Sets the maximum torque for Open Loop Vector Control.
Torque Limits (L7-01 through L7-04, L7-
• Ensure that the drive capacity is greater than the motor capacity when increasing this setting. Be
06, L7-07)
careful when reducing this value because motor speed loss may occur with heavy loads.
6.3 Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors

◆ Types of Alarms, Faults, and Errors
Check the LED operator for information about possible faults if the drive or motor fails to operate. Refer to Using the
Digital LED Operator on page 78.
If problems occur that are not covered in this manual, contact the nearest Yaskawa representative with the following
information:
• Drive model
• Software version
• Date of purchase
• Description of the problem
Table 6.4 contains descriptions of the various types of alarms, faults, and errors that may occur while operating the drive.
Contact Yaskawa in the event of drive failure.
Table 6.4 Types of Alarms, Faults, and Errors
Type Drive Responses to Alarms, Faults, and Errors
When the drive detects a fault:
• The digital operator displays text that indicates the specific fault and the ALM indicator LED remains lit until the fault
is reset.
• The fault interrupts drive output and the motor coasts to a stop.
Faults
• Depending on the setting, the drive and motor may stop via different methods than listed.
• If a digital output is programmed for fault output (H2- = E), it will close if a fault occurs.
When the drive detects a fault, it will remain inoperable until that fault has been reset. Refer to Fault Reset Methods on
page 274.
When the drive detects an alarm or a minor fault:
• The digital operator displays text that indicates the specific alarm or minor fault and the ALM indicator LED flashes.
• The motor does not stop.
Minor Faults and
• One of the multi-function contact outputs closes if set to be tripped by a minor fault (H2- = 10), but not by an
Alarms
alarm.
• The digital operator displays text indicating a specific alarm and ALM indicator LED flashes.
Remove the cause of an alarm or minor fault to automatically reset.
When parameter settings conflict with one another or do not match hardware settings (such as with an option card), it
results in an operation error.
When the drive detects an operation error:
Operation Errors • The digital operator displays text that indicates the specific error.
• Multi-function contact outputs do not operate.
When the drive detects an operation error, it will not operate the motor until the error has been reset. Correct the settings
that caused the operation error to reset.
Tuning errors occur while performing Auto-Tuning.
When the drive detects a tuning error:
Troubleshooting
• The digital operator displays text indicating the specific error.
Tuning Errors
• Multi-function contact outputs do not operate.
• Motor coasts to stop.
• Remove the cause of the error and repeat the Auto-Tuning process.
◆ Alarm and Error Displays 6

■ Faults
When the drive detects a fault, the ALM indicator LEDs remain lit without flashing. If the LEDs flash, the drive has
detected a minor fault or alarm. Refer to Minor Faults and Alarms on page 247 for more information. Conditions such
as overvoltage or external faults can trip both faults and minor faults, therefore it is important to note whether the LEDs
remain lit or if the LEDs flash.
Table 6.5 Fault Displays

LED Operator Display Name Page LED Operator Display Name Page
bUS Option Communication Error 249 LF2 Current Imbalance 253
MEMOBUS/Modbus
CE 249 nSE <1> CANopen Node Setup Error 253
Communication Error
CF Control Fault 249 oC Overcurrent 253
CoF Current Offset Fault 250 oFA00 Option Card Fault (Port A) 254
CPF02 A/D Conversion Error 250 oFA01 Option Card Fault 254
CPF03 PWM Data Fault 250 oFA03 Option Card Fault (Port A) 254
Drive specification mismatch
CPF06 during Terminal Board or 250 oFA04 Option Card Fault (Port A) 254
Control Board replacement
Terminal Board oFA30 to

CPF07 250 Option Card Fault (Port A) 254
Communication Fault oFA43
to
EEPROM Serial
CPF08 250 oH Heatsink Overheat 255
Communications Fault
CPF11 RAM Fault 250 oH1 Heatsink Overheat 255
CPF12 FLASH Memory Fault 250 oH3 Motor Overheat 1 (PTC input) 255
CPF13 Watchdog Circuit Exception 250 oH4 Motor Overheat 2 (PTC input) 255
CPF14 Control Circuit Fault 250 oL1 Motor Overload 256
CPF16 Clock Fault 251 oL2 Drive Overload 256
CPF17 Timing Fault 251 oL3 Overtorque Detection 1 257
CPF18 Control Circuit Fault 251 oL4 Overtorque Detection 2 257
CPF19 Control Circuit Fault 251 oPr Operator Connection Fault 257
Overspeed (for Simple V/f with
RAM Fault 251 oS 257
PG)
or CPF20 or FLASH Memory Fault 251 ov Overvoltage 257

CPF21 Watchdog Circuit Exception 251 PF Input Phase Loss 258
PG Disconnect (for Simple V/f
Clock Fault 251 PGo 258
with PG)
CPF22 A/D Conversion Error 251 rH Dynamic Braking Resistor 259
CPF23 PWM Feedback Data Fault 251 rr Dynamic Braking Transistor 259
Too Many Speed Search
CPF24 Drive Capacity Signal Fault 251 SEr 259
Restarts
Excessive Speed Deviation (for
dEv 251 STO Pull-Out Detection 259
Simple V/f with PG)
EF0 Option Card External Fault 262 UL3 Undertorque Detection 1 259
EF1 to External Fault (input terminal
to 252 UL4 Undertorque Detection 2 260
EF7 S1 to S7)
FbH Excessive PID Feedback 252 Uv1 Undervoltage 260
Control Power Supply
FbL PID Feedback Loss 252 Uv2 260
Undervoltage
GF Ground Fault 253 Uv3 Soft Charge Circuit Fault 260
LF Output Phase Loss 253

<1> This fault is valid from software version 6000 or later.
Note: Errors Uv1 and Uv2 are not saved to the drive's fault history.
■ Minor Faults and Alarms

When a minor fault or alarm occurs, the ALM LED flashes and the text display shows an alarm code. A fault has
occurred if the text remains lit and does not flash. Refer to Alarm Detection on page 261. An overvoltage situation, for
example, can trigger both faults and minor faults. It is therefore important to note whether the LEDs remain lit or if the
LEDs flash.
Table 6.6 Minor Fault and Alarm Displays
Minor Fault Output
LED Operator Display Name Page
(H2- = 10)
bb Drive Baseblock No output 261
bUS Option Card Communication Error YES 261
CALL Serial Communication Transmission Error YES 261

CE MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error YES 262
CrST Can Not Reset YES 262
dEv Excessive Speed Deviation (for Simple V/f with PG) YES 262
EF Run Command Input Error YES 262
to EF1 to EF7 External Fault (input terminal S1 to S7) YES 263

FbH Excessive PID Feedback YES 263
FbL PID Feedback Loss YES 263
Hbb Safe Disable Signal Input YES 264

HbbF Safe Disable Signal Input YES 264
HCA Current Alarm YES 264
oH Heatsink Overheat YES 264
oH2 Drive Overheat YES 265
oH3 Motor Overheat YES 265
oL3 Overtorque 1 YES 265
oL4 Overtorque 2 YES 265
oS Overspeed (for Simple V/f with PG) YES 265
ov Overvoltage YES 266
PASS MEMOBUS/Modbus Test Mode Complete No output 266
PGo PG Disconnect (for Simple V/f with PG) YES 266 Troubleshooting
rUn During Run 2, Motor Switch Command Input YES 266
SE MEMOBUS/Modbus Test Mode Fault YES 266

6
UL3 Undertorque 1 YES 267
UL4 Undertorque 2 YES 267
Uv Undervoltage YES 267
■ Operation Errors
Table 6.7 Operation Error Displays
oPE01 Drive Unit Setting Error 268
oPE02 Parameter Setting Range Error 268
oPE03 Multi-Function Input Setting Error 268
oPE04 Terminal Board Mismatch Error 269
oPE05 Run Command Source Error 269
oPE07 Multi-Function Analog Input Selection Error 269
oPE08 Parameter Selection Error 269
oPE09 PID Control Selection Error 270
oPE10 V/f Data Setting Error 270
oPE11 Carrier Frequency Setting Error 270
oPE13 Pulse Train Monitor Selection Error 270
■ Auto-Tuning Errors
Table 6.8 Auto-Tuning Error Displays
End1 Excessive V/f Setting 271
End2 Motor Iron Core Saturation Coefficient Error 271
End3 Rated Current Setting Alarm 271
Er-01 Motor Data Error 271
Er-02 Alarm 271
Er-03 STOP button Input 272
Er-04 Line-to-Line Resistance Error 272
Er-05 No-Load Current Error 272
Er-08 Rated Slip Error 272
Er-09 Acceleration Error 272
Er-11 Motor Speed Error 272
Er-12 Current Detection Error 272
6.4 Fault Detection
6.4 Fault Detection

◆ Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions
Table 6.9 Detailed Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions
LED Operator Display Fault Name
Option Communication Error
bUS • After establishing initial communication, the connection was lost.
• Only detected when the run command frequency reference is assigned to an option card.
Cause Possible Solution
No signal received from the PLC. • Check for faulty wiring.
The communication cable is faulty or a • Correct the wiring.
short circuit exists. • Check for loose wiring and short circuits. Repair as needed.
• Check the various options available to minimize the effects of noise.
• Counteract noise in control circuit, main circuit, and ground wiring.
• Ensure that other equipment such as switches or relays do not cause noise and use surge
A communications data error occurred due suppressors if required.
to noise. • Use cables recommended by Yaskawa or another type of shielded line. Ground the shield on the
controller side or on the drive input power side.
• Separate all wiring for communications devices from drive input power lines. Install an EMC noise
filter to the input side of the drive input power.
The option card is damaged. • Replace the option card if there are no problems with the wiring and the error continues to occur.
• The connector pins on the option card are not properly lined up with the connector pins on the
The option card is not properly connected to
drive.
the drive.
• Reinstall the option card.
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error
CE
Control data was not received for the CE detection time set to H5-09.
• Check for faulty wiring.
Faulty communications wiring, or a short
• Correct the wiring.
circuit exists.
• Check for loose wiring and short circuits. Repair as needed.
• Check the various options available to minimize the effects of noise.
• Counteract noise in control circuit, main circuit, and ground wiring.
• Use Yaskawa-recommended cables, or another type of shielded line. Ground the shield on the
A communications data error occurred due controller side or on the drive input power side.
to noise. • Ensure that other equipment such as switches or relays do not cause noise and use surge
suppressors if required.
• Separate all wiring for communications devices from drive input power lines. Install an EMC noise
filter to the input side of the drive input power.
Control Fault
Troubleshooting
CF A torque limit was reached continuously for three seconds or longer during a ramp to stop while in
Open Loop Vector Control.
Motor parameters are not set properly. Check the motor parameter settings and repeat Auto-Tuning.
Torque limit is too low. Set the torque limit to the most appropriate setting (L7-01 through L7-04).
• Adjust the deceleration time (C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, C1-08). 6
Load inertia is too big. • Set the frequency to the minimum value and interrupt the run command when the drive finishes
decelerating.
Current Offset Fault
CoF The current detection circuit is damaged, or there was residual induction voltage in the motor (such
as during sudden deceleration or when coasting) when the drive attempted to start the motor.
While the drive automatically adjusted the
• Create a motor restart sequence that allows enough time for residual induction voltage to dissipate.
current offset, the calculated value
• Perform External Speed Search 1/2 (H1- = 61, 62) using the external terminals.
exceeded the allowable setting range. This
• Enable Speed Search at start (b3-01 = 1).
problem may occur when attempting to
Note: When using a PM motor, both External Speed Search 1 and 2 perform the same operation.
restart a coasting PM motor.
6.4 Fault Detection

A/D Conversion Error
CPF02
An A/D conversion error occurred.
Control circuit is damaged. Cycle power to the drive. If the problem continues, replace the drive.
• Check for wiring errors along the control circuit terminals.
Control circuit terminals have shorted out • Correct the wiring.
(+V, AC).
Check the resistance of the speed potentiometer and related wiring.
Control terminal input current has exceeded • Check the input current.
allowable levels. • Reduce the current input to control circuit terminal (+V) to 20 mA.
PWM Data Error
CPF03
There is a problem with the PWM data.
Drive hardware is damaged. Replace the drive.
EEPROM Data Error
CPF06
There is an error in the data saved to EEPROM.
Control circuit is damaged.
• Cycle power to the drive. If the problem continues, replace the drive.
The power supply was switched off when • Reinitialize the drive (A1-03).
parameters were written (e.g., using a • Replace the drive if CPF06 still occurs after reinitializing the drive (A1-03).
communications option card).
Terminal Board Communications Error
CPF07
A communication error occurred at the terminal board.
There is a fault connection between the
Turn the power off and reconnect the control circuit terminals.
terminal board and control board.
EEPROM Serial Communication Fault
CPF08
EEPROM communications are not functioning properly.
Terminal board or control board is not
Turn the power off and check the control terminal connections.
connected properly.
CPF11 RAM Fault
Hardware is damaged. Replace the drive.
FLASH Memory Fault
CPF12
Problem with the ROM (FLASH memory).
Watchdog Circuit Exception
CPF13
Self-diagnostics problem.
Control Circuit Fault
CPF14
CPU error (CPU operates incorrectly due to noise, etc.)
6.4 Fault Detection

Clock Fault
CPF16
Standard clock error.
Timing Fault
CPF17
A timing error occurred during an internal process.
CPF18
CPU error. Non-Maskable Interrupt (An unusual interrupt was triggered by noise, etc.)
CPF19
CPU error (Manual reset due to noise, etc.)
One of the following faults occurred: RAM fault, FLASH memory error, watchdog circuit exception,
clock error
or • RAM fault.
CPF20 or CPF21
• FLASH memory error (ROM error).
• Watchdog circuit exception (self-diagnostic error).
• Clock error.
A/D Conversion Fault
CPF22
A/D conversion error.
• Cycle power to the drive. Refer to Diagnosing and Resetting Faults on page 273.
Control circuit is damaged.
• If the problem continues, replace the drive.
PWM Feedback Fault
CPF23
PWM feedback error.
Troubleshooting
Drive Capacity Signal Fault
CPF24
Entered a capacity that does not exist. (Checked when the drive is powered up.)
LED Operator Display Fault Name 6
Speed Deviation (for Simple V/f with PG)
dEv According to the pulse input (RP), the speed deviation is greater than the setting in F1-10 for longer
than the time set to F1-11.
Load is too heavy. Reduce the load.
Acceleration and deceleration times are set
Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08).
too short.
The load is locked up. Check the machine.
Parameters are not set appropriately. Check the settings of parameters F1-10 and F1-11.
Motor brake engaged. Ensure the motor brake releases properly.
6.4 Fault Detection

Option Card External Fault
EF0
An external fault condition is present.
An external fault was received from the
PLC with other than F6-03 = 3 “alarm only” • Remove the cause of the external fault.
(the drive continued to run after external • Remove the external fault input from the PLC.
fault).
Problem with the PLC program. Check the PLC program and correct problems.
External Fault (input terminal S1)
EF1
External fault at multi-function input terminal S1.
EF2
EF3
EF4
EF5
EF6
EF7
External fault at multi-function input terminal S7
An external device has tripped an alarm
Remove the cause of the external fault and reset the fault.
function.
• Ensure the signal lines have been connected properly to the terminals assigned for external fault
Wiring is incorrect. detection (H1- = 20 to 2F).
• Reconnect the signal line.
Incorrect setting of multi-function contact • Check if the unused terminals set for H1- = 20 to 2F (External Fault).
inputs. • Change the terminal settings.
EEPROM Write Error
Err
Data does not match the EEPROM being written to.
• Press the button.

-
• Correct the parameter settings.
• Cycle power to the drive. Refer to Diagnosing and Resetting Faults on page 273.
Excessive PID Feedback
FbH PID feedback input is greater than the level set b5-36 for longer than the time set to b5-37. To enable
fault detection, set b5-12 = “2” or “5”.
Parameters are not set appropriately. Check the settings of parameters b5-36 and b5-37.
Wiring for PID feedback is incorrect. Correct the wiring.
There is a problem with the feedback • Check the sensor on the control side.
sensor. • Replace the sensor if damaged.
PID Feedback Loss
This fault occurs when PID Feedback Loss Detection is programmed to fault (b5-12 = 2) and the PID
FbL
Feedback < PID Feedback Loss Detection Level (b5-13) for the PID Feedback Loss Detection Time
(b5-14).
Parameters are not set appropriately. Check the settings of parameters b5-13 and b5-14.
Wiring for PID feedback is incorrect. Correct the wiring.
There is a problem with the feedback
Check the sensor on the controller side. If damaged, replace the sensor.
sensor.
6.4 Fault Detection

Ground Fault
GF • Current shorted to ground exceeded 50% of rated current on output side of the drive.
• Setting L8-09 to 1 enables ground fault detection in models 5.5 kW or larger.
• Check the insulation resistance of the motor.
Motor insulation is damaged.
• Replace the motor.
• Check the motor cable.
A damaged motor cable is creating a short • Remove the short circuit and turn the power back on.
circuit. • Check the resistance between the cable and the ground terminal .
• Replace the cable.
The leakage current at the drive output is • Reduce the carrier frequency.
too high. • Reduce the amount of stray capacitance.
• The value set exceeds the allowable setting range while the drive automatically adjusts the current
offset (this happens only attempting to restart a PM motor that is coasting to stop).
The drive started to run during Current
• Enable Speed Search at start (b3-01 = 1).
Offset Fault or while coasting to a stop.
• Perform Speed Search 1 or 2 (H1- = 61 or 62) via one of the external terminals. Note: Speed
Search 1 and 2 are the same when using PM OLV.
Hardware problem. • Replace the drive.
Output Phase Loss
LF • Phase loss on the output side of the drive.
• Phase Loss Detection is enabled when L8-07 is set to “1” or “2”.
• Check for wiring errors and ensure the output cable is connected properly.
The output cable is disconnected.
• Check the resistance between motor lines.
The motor winding is damaged.
• Replace the motor if the winding is damaged.
• Apply the tightening torque specified in this manual to fasten the terminals.
The output terminal is loose.
Refer to Wire Size and Torque Specifications on page 63.
The motor being used is less than 5% of the
Check the drive and motor capacities.
drive rated current.
An output transistor is damaged. Replace the drive.
A single-phase motor is being used. The drive being used cannot operate a single phase motor.
Output current imbalance
LF2
One or more of the phases in the output current is lost.
Phase loss has occurred on the output side • Check for faulty wiring or poor connections on the output side of the drive.
of the drive. • Correct the wiring.
Terminal wires on the output side of the Apply the tightening torque specified in this manual to fasten the terminals. Refer to Wire Size and
drive are loose. Torque Specifications on page 63.
Troubleshooting
No signal displays from the gate driver
Replace the drive. Contact Yaskawa for assistance.
board.
Motor impedance or motor phases are • Measure the line-to-line resistance for each motor phase. Ensure all values are the same.
uneven. • Replace the motor. Contact Yaskawa for assistance.
<1> nSE CANopen Node Setup Error 6
Node setup digital input was activated
Perform node setup when no Run command is active.
during Run.
Overcurrent
oC
Drive sensors have detected an output current greater than the specified overcurrent level.
The motor has been damaged due to
• Check the insulation resistance.
overheating or the motor insulation is
• Replace the motor.
damaged.
6.4 Fault Detection
• Check the motor cables.

One of the motor cables has shorted out or • Remove the short circuit and power the drive back up.
there is a grounding problem. • Check the resistance between the motor cables and the ground terminal .
• Replace damaged cables.
• Measure the current flowing into the motor.
• Replace the drive with a larger capacity unit if the current value exceeds the rated current of the
The load is too heavy. drive.
• Determine if there is sudden fluctuation in the current level.
• Reduce the load to avoid sudden changes in the current level or switch to a larger drive.
• Calculate the torque needed during acceleration relative to the load inertia and the specified
acceleration time.
The acceleration or deceleration times are • If the right amount of torque cannot be set, make the following changes:
too short. • Increase the acceleration time (C1-01, C1-03, C1-05, C1-07)
• Increase the S-curve characteristics (C2-01 through C2-04)
• Increase the capacity of the drive.
The drive is attempting to operate a • Check the motor capacity.
specialized motor or a motor larger than the • Ensure that the rated capacity of the drive is greater than or equal to the capacity rating found on
maximum size allowed. the motor nameplate.
Magnetic contactor (MC) on the output side
Set up the operation sequence so that the MC is not tripped while the drive is outputting current.
of the drive has turned on or off.
• Check the ratios between the voltage and frequency.
• Set parameter E1-04 through E1-10 appropriately. Set E3-04 through E3-10 when using a second
V/f setting is not operating as expected.
motor.
• Lower the voltage if it is too high relative to the frequency.
• Check the amount of torque compensation.
Excessive torque compensation.
• Reduce the torque compensation gain (C4-01) until there is no speed loss and less current.
Drive fails to operate properly due to noise • Review the possible solutions provided for handling noise interference.
• Review the section on handling noise interference and check the control circuit lines, main circuit
interference. lines and ground wiring.
• Check if fault occurs simultaneously to overexcitation function operation.
Overexcitation gain is set too high.
• Consider motor flux saturation and reduce the value of n3-13 (Overexcitation Deceleration Gain).
Try either the following:
Run command applied while motor was • Enable Speed Search at start (b3-01 = 1).
coasting. • Activate Speed Search via one of the multi-function input terminals (requires that H1- be set
to 61 or 62).
The wrong motor code has been entered for
PM Open Loop Vector (Yaskawa motors Enter the correct motor code to E5-01 to indicate that a PM motor is connected.
only).
The motor control method and motor do not Check which motor control method the drive is set to (A1-02).
• For IM motors, set A1-02 = “0” or “2”.
match. • For PM motors, set A1-02 = “5”.
The motor cable is too long Use a larger drive.
Option Card Fault (Port A)
oFA00
The option card is incompatible with the drive.
The option card is incompatible with the
Use a compatible option card.
drive.
oFA01
Replace the option card.
The option card is not connected properly to
Turn the power off and reconnect the option card.
the drive.
oFA03
Option Card Self-diagnostic Error
oFA04
An error occurred attempting to write to the option card memory.
to oFA30 to oFA43
Communication ID error
Option card or hardware is damaged. Replace the option card. Contact Yaskawa for consultation.
6.4 Fault Detection

Heatsink Overheat
oH The temperature of the heatsink exceeded the value set to L8-02 (90-100°C). Default value for L8-02
is determined by drive capacity (o2-04).
• Check the temperature surrounding the drive. Verify temperature is within drive specifications.
• Improve the air circulation within the enclosure panel.
Surrounding temperature is too high.
• Install a fan or air conditioner to cool the surrounding area.
• Remove anything near the drive that might be producing excessive heat.
• Measure the output current.
Load is too heavy. • Decrease the load.
• Lower the carrier frequency (C6-02).
• Replace the cooling fan. Refer to Cooling Fan Replacement on page 292.
Internal cooling fan is stopped.
• After replacing the drive, reset the cooling fan maintenance parameter (o4-03 = “0”).
Overheat 1 (Heatsink Overheat)
oH1
The temperature of the heatsink has exceeded the default of L8-02 (About 10°C).
• Check the temperature surrounding the drive.
Surrounding temperature is too high.
• Install a fan or air conditioner to cool the surrounding area.
• Remove anything near the drive that might be producing excessive heat.
• Measure the output current.
Load is too heavy. • Lower the carrier frequency (C6-02).
• Reduce the load.
• Check the maintenance time for the cooling fan (U4-04).
The internal cooling fan has reached its
• If U4-04 exceeds 90%, replace the cooling fan. Refer to Cooling Fan Replacement on page 292.
performance life or has malfunctioned.
• After replacing fan, reset the fan maintenance time (o4-03 = “0”).
Current flowing to control circuit terminal • Check the current level of the terminal.
+V exceeded the tolerance level. • Set the current to the control circuit terminal to be 20 mA or less.
Motor Overheat Alarm (PTC Input)
oH3 • The motor overheat signal to analog input terminal A1 or A2 exceeded the alarm detection level.
• Detection requires multi-function analog input H3-02 or H3-10 be set to “E”.
• Check the size of the load, the accel/decel times and the cycle times.
• Decrease the load.
• Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08).
• Adjust the V/f pattern (E1-04 through E1-10). This will mainly involve reducing E1-08 and E1-10.
Motor has overheated • Be careful not to lower E1-08 and E1-10 excessively, as this reduces load tolerance at low speeds.
• Check the motor-rated current.
• Enter the motor-rated current as indicated on the motor nameplate (E2-01).
• Ensure the motor cooling system is operating normally.
Troubleshooting
• Repair or replace the motor cooling system.
Motor Overheat Fault (PTC Input)
oH4 • The motor overheat signal to analog input terminal A1 or A2 exceeded the fault detection level.
• Detection requires that multi-function analog input H3-02 or H3-10 = “E”.
Cause Possible Solution 6
• Check the size of the load, the accel/decel times and the cycle times.
Be careful not to lower E1-08 and E1-10 excessively because this reduces load tolerance at low
Motor has overheated.
speeds.
• Enter the motor-rated current as indicated on the motor nameplate (E2-01).
6.4 Fault Detection

Motor Overload
oL1
The electrothermal sensor tripped overload protection.
Cycle times are too short during
Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08).
acceleration and deceleration.
• Drive overloaded at low speeds.
• Overload may occur at low speeds when
• Increase the speed.
using a general-purpose motor, even if
• If the drive is supposed to operate at low speeds, either increase the motor capacity or use a motor
operating within the rated current
specifically designed to operate with the drive.
limitation.
Although a special type of motor is being
used, the motor protection selection is set Set L1-01 = “2”.
for a general-purpose motor (L1-01 = 1).
• Adjust the user set V/f patterns (E1-04 through E1-10). Parameters E1-08 and E1-10 may need to
Voltage is too high for the V/f
be reduced.
characteristics.
• If E1-08 and E1-10 are set too high, there may be very little load tolerance at low speed.
The wrong motor-rated current is set to E2- • Check the motor-rated current.
01. • Enter the value written on the motor nameplate to parameter E2-01.
The maximum frequency for the drive input • Check the rated frequency indicated on the motor nameplate.
power is set too low. • Enter the rated frequency to E1-06 (Base Frequency).
Multiple motors are running off the same
Disable the Motor Protection function (L1-01 = “0”) and install a thermal relay to each motor.
drive.
The electrical thermal protection • Check the motor characteristics.
characteristics and motor overload • Correct the value set to L1-01 (Motor Protection Function).
characteristics do not match. • Install an external thermal relay.
The electrical thermal relay is operating at • Check the current rating listed on the motor nameplate.
the wrong level. • Check the value set for the motor-rated current (E2-01).
• Overexcitation increases the motor losses and the motor temperature. If applied too long, motor
Motor overheated by overexcitation damage can occur. Prevent excessive overexcitation operation or apply proper cooling to the motor
operation. • Reduce the excitation deceleration gain (n3-13).
• Set L3-04 (Stall Prevention during Deceleration) to a value other than 4.
• Check values set to Speed Search related parameters.
Speed Search related parameters are not set • Adjust the Speed Search current and Speed Search deceleration times (b3-02 and b3-03
to the proper values. respectively).
• After Auto-Tuning, enable Speed Estimation Type Search (b3-24 = “1”).
Output current fluctuation due to input
Check the power supply for phase loss.
phase loss
Drive Overload
oL2
The thermal sensor of the drive triggered overload protection.
Cycle times are too short during
Increase the settings for the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08).
acceleration and deceleration.
Voltage is too high for the V/f
• Be careful not to lower E1-08 and E1-10 excessively because this reduces load tolerance at low
characteristics.
speeds.
Drive capacity is too small. Replace the drive with a larger model.
• Reduce the load when operating at low speeds.
Overload occurred when operating at low
• Replace the drive with a model that is one frame size larger.
speeds.
Excessive torque compensation. Reduce the torque compensation gain (C4-01) until there is no speed loss but less current.
• Check the settings for all Speed Search related parameters.
Speed Search related parameters are not set • Adjust the current used during Speed Search and the Speed Search deceleration time (b3-03 and
correctly. b3-02 respectively).
• After Auto-Tuning the drive, enable the Speed Search Estimation Type (b3-24 = “1”).
Output current fluctuation due to input
Check the power supply for phase loss.
phase loss
6.4 Fault Detection

Overtorque Detection 1
oL3 The current has exceeded the value set for torque detection (L6-02) for longer than the allowable
time (L6-03).
Parameter settings are not appropriate for
Check the settings of parameters L6-02 and L6-03.
the type of load.
There is a fault on the machine side (e.g.,
Check the status of the load. Remove the cause of the fault.
the machine is locked up).
Overtorque Detection 2
oL4 The current has exceeded the value set for Overtorque Detection 2 (L6-05) for longer than the
allowable time (L6-06).
the type of load.
External Digital Operator Connection Fault
• The external operator has been disconnected from the drive.
oPr Note: An oPr fault will occur when all of the following conditions are true:
• Output is interrupted when the operator is disconnected (o2-06 = 1).
• The run command is assigned to the operator (b1-02 = 0 and LOCAL has been selected).
• Check the connection between the operator and the drive.
External operator is not properly connected • Replace the cable if damaged.
to the drive. • Turn off the drive input power and disconnect the operator. Next reconnect the operator and turn
the drive input power back on.
Overspeed (Simple V/f with PG)
oS
Pulse input (RP) indicates that motor speed feedback exceeded F1-08 setting.
• Adjust the gain by using the pulse train input parameters (H6-02 through H6-05).
Overshoot or undershoot is occurring. • Increase the settings for C5-01 (Speed Control Proportional Gain 1) and reduce C5-02 (Speed
Control Integral Time 1).
Set the H6-02 (Pulse Train Input Scaling) = 100%, the number of pulses during maximum motor
Incorrect PG pulse settings.
revolutions.
Check the setting for the overspeed detection level and the overspeed detection time (F1-08 and F1-
Inappropriate parameter settings.
09).
Overvoltage
Voltage in the DC bus has exceeded the overvoltage detection level.
ov
• For 200 V class: approximately 410 V
Troubleshooting
• For 400 V class: approximately 820 V (740 V when E1-01 is less than 400)
• Increase the deceleration time (C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, C1-08).
Deceleration time is too short and
• Install a braking resistor or a dynamic braking resistor unit.
regenerative energy flows from the motor
• Enable stall prevention during deceleration (L3-04 = “1”).
into the drive.
Stall prevention is enabled as the default setting. 6
• Check if sudden drive acceleration triggers an overvoltage alarm.
Fast acceleration time causes the motor to
• Increase the acceleration time.
overshoot the speed reference.
• Use longer S-curve acceleration and deceleration times.
The braking torque was too high, causing regenerative energy to charge the DC bus.
Excessive braking load.
Reduce the braking torque, use a braking option, or lengthen decel time.
Install a DC reactor.
Surge voltage entering from the drive input
Note: Voltage surge can result from thyristor convertor and phase advancing capacitor using same
power.
drive main input power supply.
Ground fault in the output circuit causing • Check the motor wiring for ground faults.
the DC bus capacitor to overcharge. • Correct grounding shorts and turn the power back on.
6.4 Fault Detection
• Check the settings for Speed Search related parameters.

Improper Setting of Speed Search related • Enable Speed Search Retry function (b3-19 greater than or equal to 1 to 10).
parameters. (Includes Speed Search after a • Adjust the current level during Speed Search and the deceleration time (b3-02 and b3-03
momentary power loss and after a fault respectively).
restart.) • Perform Line-to-Line Resistance Auto-Tuning and then enable Speed Estimation Type Speed
Search (b3-24 = “1”).
Excessive regeneration when overshoot • Enable the Overvoltage Suppression function (L3-11 = “1”).
occurs after acceleration. • Lengthen the S-curve at acceleration end.
• Check the voltage.
Drive input power voltage is too high.
• Lower drive input power voltage within the limits listed in the specifications.
The dynamic braking transistor is damaged. Replace the drive.
• Check braking transistor wiring for errors.
The braking transistor is wired incorrectly.
• Properly rewire the braking resistor device.
• Review the list of possible solutions provided for controlling noise.
Drive fails to operate properly due to noise
• Review the section on handling noise interference and check the control circuit lines, main circuit
interference.
lines and ground wiring.
• Check the load inertia settings when using KEB, overvoltage suppression or Stall Prevention
Load inertia has been set incorrectly. during deceleration.
• Adjust S6-03 (Load Inertia Ratio) in accordance with the load.
Braking function is being used in PM Open
Connect a braking resistor.
Loop Vector Control.
• Adjust the parameters that control hunting.
• Set the hunting prevention gain (n1-02).
Motor hunting occurs. • Adjust the AFR time constant (n2-02 and n2-03) when in OLV Control.
• Use parameters n8-45 (PM Speed Feedback Detection Suppression Gain) and n8-47 (Pull-In
Current Compensation Time Constant).
Input Phase Loss
PF Drive input power has an open phase or has a large imbalance of voltage between phases. Detected
when L8-05 = 1 (enabled).
• Check for wiring errors in the main circuit drive input power.
There is phase loss in the drive input power.
• Ensure the terminals are tightened properly.
There is loose wiring in the drive input
• Apply the tightening torque specified in this manual to fasten the terminals. Refer to Wire Gauges
power terminals.
and Tightening Torque on page 56
• Check the voltage from the drive input power.
• Review the possible solutions for stabilizing the drive input power.
There is excessive fluctuation in the drive
• Disable Input Phase Loss Detection (L8-05 = “0”). PF is detected if DC bus ripple is too high. If it
input power voltage.
is disabled, there is no fault but the ripple is still too high, thereby the capacitors are stressed more
and lose lifetime.
There is poor balance between voltage
• Stabilize drive input power or disable phase loss detection.
phases.
• Check the maintenance time for the capacitors (U4-05).
• Replace the drive if U4-05 is greater than 90%.
• Check for anything wrong with the drive input power.
The main circuit capacitors are worn. • If nothing is wrong with the drive input power, try the following solutions if the alarm continues:
• Disable Input Phase Loss Protection selection (L8-05 = “0”). PF is detected if DC bus ripple is too
high. If it is disabled, there is no fault but the ripple is still too high, thereby the capacitors are
stressed more and lose lifetime.
• Replace the drive.
PG Disconnect (for Simple V/f with PG)
PGo
No PG pulses are received for longer than the time set to F1-14.
Pulse input (RP) is disconnected. Reconnect the pulse input (RP).
Pulse input (RP) wiring is wrong. Correct the wiring.
Motor brake engaged. Ensure the motor brake releases properly.
6.4 Fault Detection

Braking Resistor Overheat
rH Braking resistor protection was triggered.
Fault detection is enabled when L8-01 = 1 (disabled as a default).
• Check the load, deceleration time and speed.
Deceleration time is too short and excessive
regenerative energy is flowing back into the
drive.
• Replace the braking option with a larger device that can handle the power that is discharged.
Recalculate braking load and braking power. Then try reducing the braking load and checking the
Excessive braking inertia.
braking resistor settings and improve braking capacity.
The proper braking resistor has not been • Check the specifications and conditions for the braking resistor device.
installed. • Select the optimal braking resistor.
Note: The magnitude of the braking load trips the braking resistor overheat alarm, NOT the surface temperature. Using the braking resistor more
frequently than its rating trips the alarm even when the braking resistor surface is not very hot.
Dynamic Braking Transistor
rr
The built-in dynamic braking transistor failed.
The braking transistor is damaged. • Cycle power to the drive and check if the fault reoccurs. Refer to Diagnosing and Resetting Faults
on page 273.
The control circuit is damaged. • Replace the drive if the fault continues.
Too Many Speed Search Restarts
SEr
The number of speed search restarts exceeded the number set to b3-19.
• Reduce the detection compensation gain during Speed Search (b3-10).
Speed Search parameters are set to the • Increase the current level when attempting Speed Search (b3-17).
wrong values. • Increase the detection time during Speed Search (b3-18).
• Repeat Auto-Tuning.
The motor is coasting in the opposite
Enable Bi-directional Speed Search (b3-14 = “1”).
direction of the run command.
Motor Pull Out or Step Out Detection
STO
Motor pull out or step out has occurred. Motor has exceeded its pull out torque.
• Enter the correct motor code for the PM being used into E5-01.
The wrong motor code has been set
• For special-purpose motors, enter the correct data to all E5 parameters according to the Test Report
(Yaskawa motors only).
provided for the motor.
• Increase the value set to n8-55 (Load Inertia for PM).
• Increase the value set to n8-51 (Pull-In Current during Accel/Decel for PM).
Load is too heavy.
Troubleshooting
• Increase the motor or drive capacity.
Load inertia is too heavy. Increase n8-55 (Load Inertia for PM).
Acceleration and deceleration times are too • Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08).
short. • Increase the S-curve acceleration and deceleration times (C2-01).
Undertorque Detection 1 6
UL3 The current has fallen below the minimum value set for torque detection (L6-02) for longer than the
the type of load.
There is a fault on the machine side. Check the load for any problems.
6.4 Fault Detection

Undertorque Detection 2
UL4 The current has fallen below the minimum value set for torque detection (L6-05) for longer than the
the type of load.
There is a fault on the machine side. Check the load for any problems.
DC Bus Undervoltage
One of the following conditions occurred while the drive was in operation:
• Voltage in the DC bus fell below the undervoltage detection level (L2-05).
Uv1
• For 200 V class: approximately 190 V (160 V for single phase drives)
• For 400 V class: approximately 380 V (350 V when E1-01 is less than 400) The fault is output
only if L2-01 = 0 or L2-01 = 1 and the DC bus voltage is under L2-05 for longer than L2-02.
• The main circuit drive input power is wired incorrectly.
Input power phase loss.
• Ensure there are no loose terminals.
One of the drive input power wiring
• Apply the tightening torque specified in this manual to fasten the terminals. Refer to Wire Gauges
terminals is loose.
and Tightening Torque on page 56
There is a problem with the voltage from • Check the voltage.
the drive input power. • Correct the voltage to within range listed in drive input power specifications.
The power has been interrupted. Correct the drive input power.
Drive internal circuitry has become worn.
• Replace the drive if U4-05 exceeds 90%.
The drive input power transformer is not
large enough and voltage drops after Check the capacity of the drive input power transformer.
switching on power.
Air inside the drive is too hot. Check the drive internal temperature.
Problem with the CHARGE indicator. Replace the drive.
Control Power Supply Voltage Fault
Uv2
Voltage is too low for the control drive input power.
L2-02 changed from its default value in
drive that is 7.5 kW or smaller without
Correct parameter L2-02 setting or install optional Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru unit.
installing a Momentary Power Loss Ride-
Thru.
The wiring for the control power supply is • Cycle power to the drive. Check if the fault reoccurs.
damaged. • Replace the drive if the fault continues to occur.
• Cycle power to the drive. Check if the fault reoccurs.
Internal circuitry is damaged.
• Replace the drive if the fault continues to occur.
Undervoltage 3 (Inrush Prevention Circuit Fault)
Uv3
The inrush prevention circuit has failed.
• Cycle power to the drive. Check if the fault reoccurs.
The contactor on the inrush prevention • Replace the drive if the fault continues to occur.
circuit is damaged. • Check monitor U4-06 for the performance life of the inrush prevention circuit.
<1> This fault is valid from software version 6000 or later.
6.5 Alarm Detection
6.5 Alarm Detection

Alarms are drive protection functions that do not operate the fault contact. The drive will return to original status when
the cause of the alarm has been removed.
During an alarm condition, the Digital Operator display flashes and an alarm output is generated at the multi-function
outputs (H2-01 to H2-03), if programmed.
Investigate the cause of the alarm and Refer to Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions on page 261 for the
appropriate action.
◆ Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions

Table 6.10 Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
LED Operator Display Minor Fault Name
Baseblock
bb
Drive output interrupted as indicated by an external baseblock signal.
Minor Fault
Cause Possible Solutions
(H2- = 10)
External baseblock signal entered via
Check external sequence and baseblock signal input timing. No output
multi-function input terminal (S1 to S7).
Option Communication Error
bUS • After initial communication was established, the connection was lost.
• Assign a run command frequency reference to the option card.
Minor Fault
(H2- = 10)
• Check for faulty wiring.
Connection is broken or master
• Correct the wiring. YES
controller stopped communicating.
• Repair ground wiring or disconnected cables.
If there are no problems with the wiring and the fault continues to occur, replace the
Option card is damaged. YES
option card.
• The connector pins on the option card are not properly lined up with the connector
The option card is not properly
pins on the drive. YES
connected to the drive.
• Reinstall the option card.
• Check options available to minimize the effects of noise.
• Take steps to counteract noise in the control circuit wiring, main circuit lines and
ground wiring.
• Try to reduce noise on the controller side.
• Use surge absorbers on magnetic contactors or other equipment causing the
A data error occurred due to noise. YES
disturbance.
• Use cables recommended by Yaskawa, or another type of shielded line. The shield
should be grounded on the controller side or on the drive input power side.
Troubleshooting
• All wiring for communications devices should be separated from drive input power
lines. Install an EMC noise filter to the input side of the drive input power.
Serial Communication Transmission Error
CALL
Communication has not yet been established.
Minor Fault
(H2- = 10)
6
Communications wiring is faulty, there is • Check for wiring errors.
a short circuit, or something is not • Correct the wiring. YES
connected properly. • Remove and ground shorts and reconnect loose wires.
Programming error on the master side. Check communications at start-up and correct programming errors. YES
• Perform a self-diagnostics check.
Communications circuitry is damaged. YES
• Replace the drive if the fault continues to occurs.
The terminal slave drive must have the internal terminal resistance switch set
Terminal resistance setting is incorrect. YES
correctly. Place DIP switch S2 to the ON position.
6.5 Alarm Detection

MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error
CE
Control data was not received correctly for two seconds.
Minor Fault
(H2- = 10)
• Check options available to minimize the effects of noise.
• Counteract noise in the control circuit wiring, main circuit lines and ground wiring.
• Reduce noise on the controller side.
• Use surge absorbers on magnetic contactors or other equipment causing the
A data error occurred due to noise. disturbance. YES
• Use cables recommended by Yaskawa or another type of shielded line. The shield
should be grounded on the controller side or on the drive input power side.
• Separate all wiring for communications devices from drive input power lines. Install
an EMC noise filter to the input side of the drive input power.
Communication protocol is • Check the H5 parameter settings as well as the protocol setting in the controller.
YES
incompatible. • Ensure settings are compatible.
The CE detection time (H5-09) is set • Check the PLC.
shorter than the time required for a • Change the software settings in the PLC. YES
communication cycle to take place. • Set a longer CE detection time (H5-09).
Incompatible PLC software settings or • Check the PLC.
YES
there is a hardware problem. • Remove the cause of the error on the controller side.
Communications cable is disconnected • Check the connector for a signal through the cable.
YES
or damaged. • Replace the communications cable.
Can Not Reset
CrST
During a fault, the fault reset signal was entered while a Run command was activated.
Minor Fault
Cause Possible Solutions Output
(H2- = 10)
• Ensure that a Run command cannot be entered from the external terminals or option
A fault reset was being executed while
card during fault reset. YES
the Run command was still enabled.
• Turn off the Run command.
Speed Deviation (for Simple V/f with PG)
dEv According to the pulse input (RP), the speed deviation is greater than the setting in F1-10 for a time
longer than the setting in F1-11.
Minor Fault
(H2- = 10)
Load is too heavy Reduce the load. YES
Acceleration and deceleration times are
Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08). YES
set too short.
The load is locked up. Check the machine. YES
Parameter settings are inappropriate. Check the settings of parameters F1-10 and F1-11. YES
The motor brake engaged. Ensure the brake releases properly. YES
Forward/Reverse Run Command Input Error
EF
Both forward run and reverse run closed simultaneously for over 0.5 s.
Minor Fault
(H2- = 10)
Check the forward and reverse command sequence and correct the problem.
Sequence error YES
Note: When minor fault EF detected, motor ramps to stop.
6.5 Alarm Detection

Option Card External Fault
EF0
An external fault condition is present.
Minor Fault
(H2- = 10)
An external fault was received from the
PLC with F6-03 = 3 (causing the drive to • Remove the cause of the external fault.
YES
continue running when an external fault • Remove the external fault input from the PLC.
occurs).
There is a problem with the PLC
Check the PLC program and correct problems. YES
program.
External fault (input terminal S1)
EF1
EF2
EF3
EF4
EF5
EF6
EF7
Minor Fault
(H2- = 10)
An external device has tripped an alarm
Remove the cause of the external fault and reset the multi-function input value. YES
function.
• Ensure the signal lines have been connected properly to the terminals assigned for
Wiring is incorrect. external fault detection (H1- = 20 to 2F). YES
• Reconnect the signal line.
Multi-function contact inputs are set • Check if the unused terminals have been set for H1- = 20 to 2F (External Fault).
YES
incorrectly. • Change the terminal settings.
Excessive PID Feedback
FbH The PID feedback input is higher than the level set in b5-36 for longer than the time set in b5-37, and
b5-12 is set to 1 or 4.
Minor Fault
Troubleshooting
(H2- = 10)
Parameters settings for b5-36 and b5-37
Check parameters b5-36 and b5-37. YES
are incorrect.
PID feedback wiring is faulty. Correct the wiring. YES
Feedback sensor has malfunctioned. Check the sensor and replace it if damaged. YES
Feedback input circuit is damaged. Replace the drive. YES 6
PID Feedback Loss
FbL The PID feedback input is lower than the level set in b5-13 for longer than the time set in b5-14, and
b5-12 is set to 1 or 4.
Minor Fault
(H2- = 10)
Parameters settings for b5-13 and b5-14
Check parameters b5-13 and b5-14. YES
are incorrect.
PID feedback wiring is faulty. Correct the wiring. YES
Feedback sensor has malfunctioned. Check the sensor and replace it if damaged. YES
Feedback input circuit is damaged. Replace the drive. YES
6.5 Alarm Detection

Safe Disable Signal Input
Hbb
Safe Disable Input channel is open.
Minor Fault
(H2- = 10)
Check if external safety circuit tripped and disabled the drive. If the Safe Disable
There is no signal at terminal H1. YES
function is not utilized, check if the terminals HC and H1are linked.
Internally, both Safe Disable channels
Replace the drive. YES
are broken.
Safe Disable Signal Input
HbbF
One of the Safe Disable input channels is open.
Minor Fault
(H2- = 10)
One of the Safe Disable channels is
Replace the drive. YES
faulty.
Current Alarm
HCA
Drive current exceeded overcurrent warning level (150% of the rated current).
Minor Fault
(H2- = 10)
• Measure the current flowing through the motor.
Load is too heavy. YES
• Reduce the load or increase the capacity of the drive.
• Calculate the torque required during acceleration and for the inertia moment.
Acceleration and deceleration times are • If the torque level is not right for the load, take the following steps:
YES
too short. • Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08).
• Increase the capacity of the drive.
A special-purpose motor is being used,
• Check the motor capacity.
or the drive is attempting to run a motor
• Use a motor appropriate for the drive. Ensure the motor is within the allowable YES
greater than the maximum allowable
capacity range.
capacity.
The current level increased due to Speed
Search after a momentary power loss or The alarm will appear only briefly. There is no need to take action to prevent the alarm
YES
while attempting to perform a fault from occurring in such instances.
restart.
Heatsink Overheat
oH
The temperature exceeded the maximum allowable value.
Minor Fault
(H2- = 10)
• Check the surrounding temperature.
Surrounding temperature is too high YES
• Install a fan or air conditioner to cool surrounding area.
• Remove anything near drive that may cause extra heat.
• Replace the cooling fan. Refer to Cooling Fan Replacement on page 292.
Internal cooling fan has stopped. • After replacing the drive, reset the cooling fan maintenance parameter to (o4-03 = YES
“0”).
• Provide proper installation space around the drive as indicated in the manual. Refer
to Installation Orientation (Heatsink-Cooled Drive, Finless Drive) on page 35.
YES
• Allow for the specified space and ensure that there is sufficient circulation around
Airflow around the drive is restricted. the control panel.
• Check for dust or foreign materials clogging cooling fan.
YES
• Clear debris caught in the fan that restricts air circulation.
6.5 Alarm Detection

Drive Overheat Warning
oH2
“Drive Overheat Warning” was input to a multi-function input terminal, S1 through S7 (H1-= B)
Minor Fault
(H2- = 10)
An external device triggered an overheat • Search for the device that tripped the overheat warning.
YES
warning in the drive. • Solving the problem will clear the warning.
Motor Overheat
oH3 The motor overheat signal entered to a multi-function analog input terminal exceeded the alarm level
(H3-02 or H3-10 = E).
Minor Fault
(H2- = 10)
Motor thermostat wiring is fault (PTC
Repair the PTC input wiring. YES
input).
There is a fault on the machine side (e.g., • Check the status of the machine.
YES
the machine is locked up). • Remove the cause of the fault.
• Check the load size, accel/decel times, and cycle times.
• Increase accel and decel times (C1-01 to C1-08).
• Adjust the V/f pattern (E1-04 through E1-10). This will mainly involve reducing E1-
08 and E1-10. Note: Do not lower E1-08 and E1-10 excessively, because this reduces
Motor has overheated. YES
load tolerance at low speeds.
• Enter motor-rated current on motor nameplate (E2-01).
Overtorque 1
oL3
Drive output current (or torque in OLV) was greater than L6-02 for longer than the time set in L6-03.
Minor Fault
(H2- = 10)
Inappropriate parameter settings. Check parameters L6-02 and L6-03. YES
There is a fault on the machine side (e.g., • Check the status of the machine.
YES
Overtorque 2
oL4
Drive output current (or torque in OLV) was greater than L6-05 for longer than the time set in L6-06.
Minor Fault
Troubleshooting
(H2- = 10)
Parameter settings are not appropriate. Check parameters L6-05 and L6-06. YES
There is a fault on the machine side (e.g., • Check the status of the machine being used.
YES
Overspeed (for Simple V/f with PG) 6
oS
Pulse input (RP) indicates that motor speed feedback exceeded F1-08 setting.
Minor Fault
(H2- = 10)
• Adjust the gain by using the pulse train input parameters (H6-02 through H6-05).
• Adjust the speed feedback accuracy.
Overshoot or undershoot is occurring. YES
• Increase the settings for C5-01 (Speed Control Proportional Gain 1) and reduce C5-
02 (Speed Control Integral Time 1).
Set the H6-02 (Pulse Train Input Scaling) = 100%, the number of pulses during
PG pulse settings are incorrect. YES
maximum motor revolutions.
Check the setting for the overspeed detection level and the overspeed detection time
Parameter settings are inappropriate. YES
(F1-08 and F1-09).
6.5 Alarm Detection

DC Bus Overvoltage
The DC bus voltage exceeded the trip point.
ov
For 200 V class: approximately 410 V
For 400 V class: approximately 820 V (740 V when E1-01 < 400)
Minor Fault
(H2- = 10)
• Install a DC reactor or an AC reactor.
Surge voltage present in the drive input
• Voltage surge can result from a thyristor convertor and a phase advancing capacitor YES
power.
operating on the same drive input power system.
• The motor is short-circuited.
• Check the motor power cable, relay terminals and motor terminal box for short
• Ground current has over-charged the
circuits. YES
main circuit capacitors via the drive
• Correct grounding shorts and turn the power back on.
input power.
• Review possible solutions for handling noise interference.
• Review section on handling noise interference and check control circuit lines, main
Noise interference causes the drive to circuit lines and ground wiring. YES
operate incorrectly. • If the magnetic contactor is identified as a source of noise, install a surge protector to
the MC coil.
Set number of fault restarts (L5-01) to a value other than 0. YES
PASS MEMOBUS/Modbus Comm. Test Mode Complete
Minor Fault
(H2- = 10)
MEMOBUS/Modbus test has finished
This verifies that the test was successful. No output
normally.
PG Disconnect (for Simple V/f with PG)
PGo
Detected when no PG pulses received for a time longer than setting in F1-14.
Minor Fault
(H2- = 10)
Pulse input (RP) is disconnected. Reconnect the pulse input (RP). YES
Pulse input (RP) wiring is wrong. Correct the wiring. YES
Motor brake is engaged. Ensure the brake releases properly YES
Motor Switch during Run
rUn
A command to switch motors was entered during run.
Minor Fault
(H2- = 10)
A motor switch command was entered Change the operation pattern so that the motor switch command is entered while the
YES
during run. drive is stopped.
SE MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Test Mode Error
Minor Fault
(H2- = 10)
A digital input programmed to 67H
(MEMOBUS/Modbus test) was closed Stop the drive and run the test again. No output
while the drive was running.
6.5 Alarm Detection

UL3
Drive output current (or torque in OLV) less than L6-02 for longer than L6-03 time.
Minor Fault
(H2- = 10)
Load has dropped or decreased
• Check for broken parts in the transmission system. YES
significantly.
UL4
Drive output current (or torque in OLV) less than L6-05 for longer than L6-06 time.
Minor Fault
(H2- = 10)
The load has dropped or decreased
• Check for broken parts in the transmission system. YES
significantly.
Undervoltage
One of the following conditions was true when the drive was stopped and a run command was entered:
• DC bus voltage dropped below the level specified in L2-05.
Uv
• Contactor to suppress inrush current in the drive was open.
• Low voltage in the control drive input power. This alarm outputs only if L2-01 is not 0 and DC bus
voltage is under L2-05.
Minor Fault
(H2- = 10)
Phase loss in the drive input power. Check for wiring errors in the main circuit drive input power. Correct the wiring. YES
• Ensure the terminals have been properly tightened.
Loose wiring in the drive input power
• Apply the tightening torque specified in this manual to fasten the terminals. Refer to YES
terminals.
Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque on page 56
• Check the voltage.
There is a problem with the drive input
• Lower the voltage of the drive input power so that it is within the limits listed in the YES
power voltage.
specifications.
Drive internal circuitry is worn. YES
The drive input power transformer is not • Check for a tripped alarm when the magnetic contactor, line breaker and leakage
large enough and voltage drops when the breaker are turned on. YES
power is switched on. • Check the capacity of the drive input power transformer.
Air inside the drive is too hot. • Check the temperature inside the drive. YES
The CHARGE indicator light is broken
• Replace the drive. YES
or disconnected.
Troubleshooting
6.6 Operator Programming Errors

An Operator Programming Error (oPE) occurs when an inappropriate parameter is set or an individual parameter setting
is inappropriate.
The drive will not operate until the parameter is set correctly; however, no alarm or fault outputs will occur. If an oPE
occurs, investigate the cause and Refer to oPE Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions on page 268 for the appropriate
action. When an oPE error is displayed, press the ENTER button to display U1-18 (oPE fault constant). This monitor
displays the parameter causing the oPE error.
◆ oPE Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions

Table 6.11 oPE Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
LED Operator Display Error Name
Drive Capacity Setting Fault
oPE01
Drive capacity and the value set to o2-04 do not match.
The drive capacity setting (o2-04) and the actual capacity of the drive are
Correct the value set to o2-04.
not the same.
Parameter Range Setting Error
oPE02
Use U1-18 to find parameters set outside the range.
Parameters were set outside the possible setting range. Set parameters to the proper values.
Note: Other errors are given precedence over oPE02 when multiple errors occur at the same time.
Multi-Function Input Selection Error
oPE03 A contradictory setting is assigned to multi-function contact inputs
H1-01 to H1-07.
• The same function is assigned to two multi-function inputs. • Ensure all multi-function inputs are assigned to different functions.
• Excludes “Not used” and “External Fault.” • Re-enter the multi-function settings to ensure this does not occur.
The Up command was set but the Down command was not, or vice versa
(settings 10 vs. 11).
Assign functions to the input terminals so that settings do not contradict
The Run command (for 2-wire sequence 2) and a FWD/REV run one another.
command 2 (for 2-wire sequence 2) were entered at the same time (H1-
= 42 and 43).
Two of the following settings are assigned to the input terminals:
• Up/Down Command (10 vs. 11) • Check the input terminal settings for any contradictory functions.
• Hold accel/decel stop (setting A) • Correct settings for multi-function input terminals.
• Offset frequency 1, 2, or 3 (settings 44 to 46)
The Up/Down command (10, 11) is enabled at the same time as PID
Disable control PID (b5-01 = “0”) or disable the Up/Down command.
control (b5-01).
The following contradictory functions are assigned to the input
terminals:
• External Search Command 1 and External Search Command 2
• Check the input terminal settings for any contradictory functions.
(settings 61 and 62)
• Correct settings for multi-function input terminals.
• Fast Stop N.O. and N.C. (settings 15 and 17)
• A FWD/REV run command (settings 40 and 41) along with FWD/
REV run command 2 for a 2-wire sequence (settings 42 and 43)
While an input terminal was set to switch between external reference 1
and 2 (H1- = 2), one of the following contradictory setting was also
present:
• The pulse train input was set for frequency reference 2 (b1-15 = 4)
while the pulse train input was not assigned to act as the frequency
reference (H6-01) ≠ 0).
• An option card is not connected, although the frequency reference and
• Check the input terminal settings for any contradictory functions.
Run command are assigned to be given from an option card (b1-15 = 3
• Correct settings for multi-function input terminals.
and b1-16 = 3).
• Though frequency reference 2 is set to be given from an analog input
(b1-15 = 1), an analog input terminal has not been assigned to the speed
reference (H3-02 or H3-10 = 0).
• Though the drive is not set for Simple PG feedback in V/f Control
(H6-01 = 3), an input terminal is assigned for FWD/REV detection
with Simple PG (H1- = 7E).

oPE04 Initialization required.
The drive, control board, or terminal board has been replaced and the To load the parameter settings to the drive that are stored in the terminal
parameter settings between the control board and the terminal board no board, set A1-03 to 5550. Initialize parameters after drive replacement
longer match. by setting A1-03 to 1110 or 2220.
oPE05 Run Command/Frequency Reference Source Selection Error
Frequency reference is assigned to an option card (b1-01 = 3) that is not
Reconnect the option card to the drive.
The Run command is assigned to an option card (b1-02 = 3) that is not
Frequency reference is assigned to the pulse train input (b1-01 = 4), but
Set H6-01 to “0”.
terminal RP is not set for pulse train input (H6-01 > 0)
Multi-Function Analog Input Selection Error
oPE07 A contradictory setting is assigned to multi-function analog inputs
H3-02 through to H3-10 and PID functions conflict.
Change the settings to H3-02 and H3-10 so that functions no longer
H3-02 and H3-10 are set to the same value. conflict. Note: Both 0 (primary analog frequency reference) and F (Not
Used) can be set to H3-02 and H3-10 at the same time.
The following simultaneous contradictory settings: H3-02 or H3-10 = B
(PID Feedback) H6-01 (Pulse Train Input) = 1 (PID Feedback)
The following simultaneous contradictory settings: H3-02 or H3-10 = C
(PID Target Value) H6-01 = 2 (pulse train input sets the PID target value)
Disable one of the PID selections.
(PID Target Value) b5-18 = 1 (enables b5-19 as the target PID value)
(PID Target Value) b5-18 = 1 (enables b5-19 as the target PID value)
Parameter Selection Error
oPE08 A function has been set that cannot be used in the motor control method
selected.
Attempted to use a function available only in Open Loop Vector Control,
Check the motor control method and the functions available.
though the drive is set for V/f Control.
To use Simple V/f with PG, ensure the motor control method has been
Simple V/f with PG was enabled while not in V/f Control (H6-01 = 3).
set to V/f Control (A1-02 = “0”).
In Open Loop Vector Control, n2-02 is greater than n2-03 Correct parameter settings so that n2-02 is less than n2-03.
In Open Loop Vector Control, C4-02 is greater than C4-06 Correct parameter settings so that C4-02 is less than C4-06. Troubleshooting
The Disturb waveform function can only be used when running V/f If using the Disturb function, make sure the drive is set for V/f Control
Control. (A1-02 = 0).
• Set the correct motor code in accordance with the motor being used
In PM Open Loop Vector Control, parameters E5-02 to E5-07 are set to (E5-01).
0. • When using a special-purpose motor, set E5- in accordance with 6
the Test Report provided.
The following conditions are true in PM Open Loop Vector Control:
• Set E5-09 or E5-24 to the correct value, and set the other to “0”.
• E5-03 does not equal 0
• Set the motor-rated current for PM to “0” (E5-03).
• E5-09 and E5-24 are both equal to 0, or neither equals 0
Note: Use U1-18 to find which parameters are set outside the specified setting range. Other errors are given precedence over oPE08 when multiple
errors occur at the same time.

PID Control Selection Fault
oPE09 PID control function selection is incorrect. Requires that PID control is
enabled (b5-01 = 1 to 4).
The following simultaneous contradictory settings:
• Set b5-15 to another value besides 0.
• b5-15 not 0.0 (PID Sleep Function Operation Level)
• Set the stopping method to coast to stop or ramp to stop (b1-03 = “0”
• The stopping method is set to either DC injection braking or coast to
or “1”).
stop with a timer (b1-03 = 2 or 3).
PID control is set to b5-01 = 1 or 2, but the lower limit for the frequency
reference (d2-02) is not set to 0 while reverse output is enabled (b5-11 =
1). Correct the parameter settings.
PID control is set to b5-01 = 3 or 4, but the lower limit for the frequency
reference (d2-01) is not 0.
V/f Data Setting Error
The following setting errors have occurred where: E1-04 is greater than
or equal to E1-06 is greater than or equal to E1-07 is greater than or
oPE10 equal to E1-09.
Or the following setting errors have occurred: E3-04 is greater than or
equal to E3-06 is greater than or equal to E3-07 is greater than or equal
to E3-09.
Correct the settings for E1-04, E1-06, E1-07, and E1-09 (or E3-04, E3-
—
06, E3-07, and E3-09 for motor 2).
Carrier Frequency Setting Error
oPE11
The carrier frequency is set to the wrong value.
The following simultaneous contradictory settings: C6-05 is greater than
6 and C6-04 is greater than C6-03 (carrier frequency lower limit is
greater than the upper limit). If C6-05 is less than or equal to 6, the drive Correct the parameter settings.
operates at C6-03.
Upper and lower limits between C6-02 and C6-05 contradict each other.
Pulse Monitor Selection Error
oPE13
Incorrect setting of monitor selection for Pulse Train (H6-06).
Scaling for the Pulse Train monitor is set to 0 (H6-07 = 0) while H6-06 is Change scaling for the Pulse Train monitor or set H6-06 to 000, 031,
not set to 000, 031, 101, 102, 105, or 116. 101, 102, 105, or 116.
6.7 Auto-Tuning Fault Detection

Auto-Tuning faults are shown below. When the following faults are detected, the fault is displayed on the Digital
Operator and the motor coasts to a stop. No fault or alarm outputs will occur
◆ Auto-Tuning Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions

Table 6.12 Auto-Tuning Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
End1 Excessive V/f Setting. Displayed after Auto-Tuning is complete.
The torque reference exceeded 20% • Before Auto-Tuning the drive, verify the information written on the motor nameplate and enter that
during Auto-Tuning. data to T1-03 through T1-05.
The no-load current exceeded 80% of the • Enter proper information to parameters T1-03 to T1-05 and repeat Auto-Tuning.
drive rated current during Auto-Tuning. • If possible, disconnect the motor from the load and perform Auto-Tuning.
Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient. Detected only during Rotational Auto-Tuning and displayed
End2
after Auto-Tuning is complete.
• Motor data entered to the T1 parameters does not match the information written on the motor
Motor data entered during Auto-Tuning
nameplate.
was incorrect.
• Restart Auto-Tuning and enter the correct information.
Auto-Tuning calculated values outside
the parameter setting range, assigning • Check and correct faulty motor wiring.
the iron-core saturation coefficient • Disconnect the motor from machine and perform Rotational Auto-Tuning.
(E2-07 and E2-08) a temporary value.
End3 Rated Current Setting Alarm (displayed after Auto-Tuning is complete)
• The motor line-to-line resistance and
the motor-rated current are not
consistent with one another. • Check the setting of parameter T1-04.
• The correct current rating printed on • Check the motor data and repeat Auto-Tuning.
the nameplate was not entered into
T1-04.
Er-01 Motor Data Error
• Check that the motor data entered to T1 parameters matches motor nameplate input before Auto-
Motor data or data entered during
Tuning.
Troubleshooting
Auto-Tuning was incorrect.
• Start Auto-Tuning over again and enter the correct information.
Motor output and motor-rated current • Check the drive and motor capacities.
settings (T1-02 and T1-04) do not match. • Correct the settings of parameters T1-02 and T1-04.
Motor output and no-load current
settings (T1-04 and E2-03) do not match. • Check the motor-rated current and no-load current.
Data required when Auto-Tuning for • Correct the settings of parameters T1-04 and E2-03.
OLV Control or Stationary Auto-Tuning.
6
Base frequency and base motor rotations
Set T1-05 and T1-07 to the correct value.
(T1-05 and T1-07) do not match.
Er-02 Minor Fault
• Motor data entered to the T1 parameters does not match the information written on the motor
Incorrect motor data entered during
nameplate. Enter the correct data.
Auto-Tuning.
• Start Auto-Tuning over again and enter the correct information.
The wiring is faulty. • Check the wiring and correct defective connections.
• Check around the machine.
Load is too heavy. • Check the load.

Er-03 STOP Button Input
Auto-Tuning canceled by pressing STOP
Auto-Tuning did not complete properly and will have to be performed again.
button.
Er-04 Line-to-Line Resistance Error
Motor data entered during Auto-Tuning • Motor data entered to T1 parameters does not match motor nameplate. Enter the correct data.
was incorrect. • Start Auto-Tuning over again and enter the correct information.
Auto-Tuning did not complete within
designated time frame. • Check and correct faulty motor wiring.
Drive-calculated values outside • Disconnect the motor from machine and perform Rotational Auto-Tuning.
parameter setting range.
Er-05 No-Load Current Error
was incorrect. • Restart Auto-Tuning and enter the correct information.
designated time frame. • Check and correct faulty motor wiring.
Drive-calculated values outside • Disconnect the motor from machine and perform Rotational Auto-Tuning.
parameter setting range.
Er-08 Rated Slip Error
was incorrect. • Restart Auto-Tuning and enter the correct information.
designated time frame.
• Check and correct faulty motor wiring.
Values calculated by the drive are • Disconnect the motor from machine and perform Auto-Tuning.
outside the allowable parameter setting
ranges.
Er-09 Acceleration Error (detected only during Rotational Auto-Tuning)
The motor did not accelerate for the • Increase the acceleration time (C1-01).
specified acceleration time. • Check if it is possible to disconnect the machine from the motor.
Torque limit when motoring is too low • Check the settings of parameters L7-01 and L7-02.
(L7-01 and L7-02). • Increase the setting.
Er-11 Motor Speed Fault (detected only when Auto-Tuning is enabled)
Torque reference is too high. (Enabled in • Increase the acceleration time (C1-01).
OLV only.) • Disconnect the machine from the motor, if possible.
Er-12 Current Detection Error
One of the motor phases is missing
Check motor wiring and correct problems.
(U/T1, V/T2, W/T3).
Current exceeded the current rating of • Check the motor wiring for a short between motor lines.
the drive. • If a magnetic contactor is used between motors, ensure it is on.
The current is too low. • Replace the drive.
Attempted Auto-Tuning without motor
Connect the motor and perform Auto-Tuning.
Current detection signal error. Replace the drive.
6.8 Diagnosing and Resetting Faults

When a fault occurs and the drive stops, follow the instructions below to remove whatever conditions triggered the fault,
then restart the drive.
◆ Fault Occurs Simultaneously with Power Loss

WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Ensure there are no short circuits between the main circuit terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) or
between the ground and main circuit terminals before restarting the drive. Failure to comply may result in serious injury or death and
will cause damage to equipment.
1. Turn on the drive input power.

2. Use monitor parameters U2- to display data on the operating status of the drive just before the fault
occurred.
3. Remove the cause of the fault and reset.
Note: To find out what faults were triggered, check U2-02 (Fault History). Information on drive status when the fault occurred such as
the frequency, current and voltage, can be found in U2-03 through U2-17. Refer to Viewing Fault Trace Data After Fault on
page 273 for information on how to view fault trace data.
Note: When the fault continues to be displayed after cycling power, remove the cause of the fault and reset.
◆ If the Drive Still has Power After a Fault Occurs

1. Look at the LED operator for information on the fault that occurred.
2. Refer to Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions on page 249
3. Reset the fault. Refer to Fault Reset Methods on page 274.
◆ Viewing Fault Trace Data After Fault

Step Display/Result
1. Turn on the drive input power. The first screen displays.

STOP
2. Press until the monitor screen is displayed.
3. Press to display the parameter setting screen.
4. Press and > until U2-02 (Fault History) is

displayed.
5. Press
Troubleshooting
to view the previous fault (here, EF3).
6. Press to view drive status information when fault

occurred.
Parameters U2-03 through U2-17 help determine cause of
7. to
fault.
6
◆ Fault Reset Methods

After the Fault Occurs Procedure
Fix the cause of the fault, restart the

drive, and reset the fault Press on the digital operator.
STOP
Close then open the fault signal digital input via Drive
Fix the cause of the fault, resetting Fault Reset Switch
terminal S4. S4 is set fault reset as default S4 Fault Reset Digital Input
via Fault Reset Digital Input S4
(H1-04 = 12) SC Digital Input Common
2 ON
If the above methods do not reset the fault, turn off the drive main power supply.
Reapply power after LED operator display is out.
1 OFF
6.9 Troubleshooting without Fault Display

This section describes troubleshooting problems that do not trip an alarm or fault.
◆ Cannot Change Parameter Settings

The drive is running the motor (i.e., the Run • Stop the drive and switch over to the Programming Mode.
command is present). • Most parameters cannot be edited during run.
The Access Level is set to restrict access to
• Set the Access Level to allow parameters to be edited (A1-01 = 2).
parameter settings.
• See what mode the LED parameter is current set for.
The operator is not in the Parameter Setup Mode
• Parameters cannot be edited when in the Setup Mode (“STUP”). Switch modes so that
(the LED screen will display “PAr”).
“PAr” appears on the screen.
A multi-function contact input terminal is set to
• When the terminal is open, parameters cannot be edited.
allow or restrict parameter editing (H1-01 through
• Turn on the multi-function contact input set to 1B.
H1-07 = 1B).
• If the password entered to A1-04 does not match the password saved to A1-05, then drive
settings cannot be changed.
• Reset the password.
If you cannot remember the password:
The wrong password was entered.
• Display parameter A1-04. Press the STOP button while pressing at the same
time. Parameter A1-05 will appear.
• Set a new password to parameter A1-05.
• Check the drive input power voltage by looking at the DC bus voltage (U1-07).
Undervoltage was detected.
• Check all main circuit wiring.
◆ Motor Does Not Rotate Properly after Pressing RUN Button or after Entering
External Run Command
■ Motor Does Not Rotate

• Check if the DRV light on the LED operator is lit.
The drive is not in the Drive
• Enter the Drive Mode to begin operating the motor. Refer to The Drive and Programming Modes on
Mode.
page 82.
Stop the drive and check if the correct frequency reference source is selected. If the operator keypad shall be
the source, the LO/RE button LED must be on, if the source is REMOTE, it must be off.
Take the following steps to solve the problem:
The button was pushed.
• Push the button.
• If o2-01 is set to 0, then the LO/RE button will be disabled.
Troubleshooting
• When Auto-Tuning has completed, the drive is switched back to the Programming Mode. The Run
Auto-Tuning has just completed. command will not be accepted unless the drive is in the Drive Mode.
• Use the LED operator to enter the Drive Mode. Refer to The Drive and Programming Modes on page 82.
A Fast-Stop was executed and has
Reset the Fast-Stop command.
not yet been reset.
Check parameter b1-02 (Run Command Source 1). 6
Set b1-02 so that it corresponds with the correct run command source.
Settings are incorrect for the
0: LED/LCD operator
source that provides the run
1: Control circuit terminal (default setting)
command.
2: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications
3: Option card
• Check for a short-circuit between terminals H1 and HC.
One of the Safety Inputs is open. • See if one of the Safety Inputs is open.
• Correct any faulty wiring.
• Check the wiring for the control terminal.
There is faulty wiring in the
• Correct wiring mistakes.
control circuit terminals.
• Check the input terminal status monitor (U1-10).

Check parameter b1-01 (Frequency Reference Source 1).
Set b1-01 to the correct source of the frequency reference.
The drive has been set to accept 0: LED operator
the frequency reference from the 1: Control circuit terminal (default setting)
incorrect source. 2: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications
3: Option card
4: Pulse train input (RP)
The terminal set to accept the main If the frequency reference is set at terminal A1, check parameter H3-01 for the correct signal level selection. If
speed reference is set to the terminal A2 is used, check DIP switch S1. Then select the correct input level for terminal A2 in parameter
incorrect voltage and/or current. H3-08. Refer to DIP Switch S1 Analog Input Signal Selection on page 68.
Selection for the sink/source mode
Check DIP switch S3. Refer to Sinking/Sourcing Mode Switch on page 66.
is incorrect.
• Check the frequency reference monitor (U1-01).
Frequency reference is too low.
• Increase the frequency by changing the maximum output frequency (E1-09).
• Check the multi-function analog input settings.
Multi-function analog input is set • Check if analog input A1 or A2 is set for frequency reference gain (H3-02 and H3-10 = 1). If so, check if the
up to accept gain for the frequency correct signal is applied to the terminal. The gain and the frequency reference will be 0 if no signal is applied
reference, but no voltage (current) to the gain input.
has been provided. • Check if H3-02 and H3-10 have been set to the proper values.
• Check if the analog input value has been set properly.
• When the STOP button is pressed, the drive will decelerate to stop.
The STOP button was pressed
• Switch off the run command and then re-enter a run command.
when the drive was started from a
REMOTE source. • The STOP button is disabled when o2-02 is set to 0.
Ensure the selected V/f pattern corresponds with the characteristics of the motor being used.
Motor is not producing enough
Increase the frequency reference so that it is higher than the minimum frequency reference (E1-09).
torque in the V/f motor control
method. Perform Line-to-Line Resistance Auto-Tuning when using particularly long motor cables.
Increase the torque compensation gain (C4-01).
• Execute Rotational Auto-Tuning.
• If the motor cables are replaced with longer cables after Rotational Auto-Tuning was performed,
Motor is not producing enough Auto-Tuning may need to be repeated due to voltage drop across the line.
torque in Open Loop Vector
• Check if the torque limit parameters have been set too low (L7-01 through L7-04).
Control.
• Reset the torque limit back to its default setting (200%).
Increase both the minimum and mid output frequency voltages (E1-08 and E1-10).
• The drive is set for a 3-Wire sequence when one of parameters H1-03 through H1-07 is set to 0.
The drive is set for both 2-Wire
• If the drive is supposed to be set up for a 2-Wire sequence, then ensure parameters H1-03 through H1-07 are
and 3-Wire sequence at the same
not set to 0.
time.
• If the drive is supposed to be set up for a 3-Wire sequence, then H1- must be set to 0.
■ Motor Rotates in the Opposite Direction from the Run Command

• Check the motor wiring.
• Switch two motor cables (U, V, and W) to reverse motor direction.
Phase wiring between the drive and motor is
• Connect drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3 in the right order to the
incorrect.
corresponding motor terminals U, V, and W.
• Change the setting of parameter b1-14.
Typically, forward is designated as being counterclockwise when looking from the motor
shaft (refer to the figure below).
1
The forward direction for the motor is setup
incorrectly.
2
1. Forward Rotating Motor (looking down the motor shaft)
2. Motor Shaft
The motor is running at almost 0 Hz and the Speed
• Disable bi-directional search (b3-14 = “0”) so that Speed Search is performed only in the
Search estimated the speed to be in the opposite
specified direction.
direction.
Note: Check the motor specifications for the forward and reverse directions. The motor specifications will vary depending on the
manufacturer of the motor.
■ Motor Rotates in One Direction Only

• Check parameter b1-04.
The drive prohibits reverse rotation.
• Set the drive to allow the motor to rotate in reverse (b1-04 = “0”).
A Reverse run signal has not been entered, although • Make sure that one of the input terminals S3 to S7 used for the 3-Wire sequence has been
3-Wire sequence is selected. set for reverse.
■ Motor is Too Hot

If the load is too heavy for the motor, the motor will overheat as it exceeds its rated torque
value for an extended period of time.
Keep in mind that the motor also has a short-term overload rating in addition to the possible
solutions provided below:
The load is too heavy. • Reduce the load.
• Increase the acceleration and deceleration times.
• Check the values set for the motor protection (L1-01, L1-02) as well as the motor rated
current (E2-01).
• Increase motor capacity.
• Check the ambient temperature.
The air around the motor is too hot.
• Cool the area until it is within the specified temperature range.
• Perform Auto-Tuning.
The drive is operating in a vector control mode but
• Calculate the motor value and reset the motor parameters.
Auto-Tuning has not yet been performed.
• Change the motor control method to V/f Control (A1-02 = “0”).
When the motor is connected to terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3, voltage surges occur
between the motor coils and drive switching.
Normally, surges can reach up to three times the drive input power supply voltage (600 V
Insufficient voltage insulation between motor
for 200 V class, and 1200 V for 400 V class).
phases.
• Use a motor with voltage tolerance higher than the max voltage surge.
• Use a motor designed to work specifically with a drive when using a 400 V class unit.
• Install an AC reactor on the output side of the drive.
The motor fan has stopped or is clogged. Check the motor fan.
■ Drive Does Not Allow Selection of Rotational Auto-Tuning

The drive is in the incorrect motor
• Check if the drive is set to V/f Control by accident (A1-02 = 0).
control method for Rotational
• Change the motor control method to Open Loop Vector Control (A1-02 = “2”).
Auto-Tuning.
■ Motor Hunting Occurs at Low Speeds

• Excess load inertia can cause motor hunting in Open Loop Vector Control due to slow
Troubleshooting
motor response.
Excessive load inertia in Open Loop Vector Control. • Increase the speed feedback detection control time constant (n2-02) from its default value
of 50 ms to an appropriate level between 200 and 1000 ms. Adjust this setting in
combination with n2-03 (Feedback Detection Control Time Constant 2).
◆ oPE02 Error Occurs When Lowering the Motor Rated Current Setting 6
• The user is trying to set the motor rated current in E2-01 to a value lower than the no-load
current set in E2-03.
Motor rated current and the motor no-load current
• Make sure that value set in E2-01 is higher than E2-03.
setting in the drive are incorrect.
• If it is necessary to set E2-01 lower than E2-03, first lower the value set to E2-03, then
change the setting in E2-01 as needed.
■ Overvoltage Occurs When Running at a Constant Speed

• Loads with a lot of inertia (fans, etc.) can trigger an overvoltage fault when operating in
Excessive load inertia in Open Loop Vector Control. • Switch to the V/f motor control method.
• Adjust the values set for the speed feedback detection control time constant (n2-02 and
n2-03).
■ Motor Stalls During Acceleration or With Large Loads

Take the following steps to resolve the problem:
• Increase the acceleration time.
Load is too heavy. • Increase motor capacity.
• Although the drive has a Stall Prevention function and a Torque Compensation Limit
function, accelerating too quickly or trying to drive an excessively large load can exceed
the capabilities of the motor.
■ Motor Will Not Accelerate or the Acceleration Time is Too Long

• Check the maximum output frequency (E1-04).
• Increase E1-04 if it is set too low.
Frequency reference is too low. Check U1-01 for proper frequency reference.
Check if a frequency reference signal switch has been set to one of the multi-function input terminals.
Check for low gain level set to terminals A1 or A2 (H3-03 or H3-11).
• Reduce the load so that the output current remains within the motor-rated current.
Load is too heavy.
• Check if the mechanical brake is fully releasing as it should.
The torque limit function is
• Check the torque limit setting. It may be too low. (L7-01 through L7-04).
operating in Open Loop Vector
• Reset the torque limit to its default value (200%).
Control.
Acceleration time has been set too
Check if the acceleration time parameters have been set too long (C1-01, C1-03, C1-05, C1-07).
long.
Motor characteristics and drive
• Set the correct V/f pattern so that it matches the characteristics of the motor being used.
parameter settings are incompatible
• Check V/f Pattern.
with one another in V/f Control.
The right combination of motor
characteristics have not been set in Execute Rotational Auto-Tuning.
• Check the multi-function analog input settings.
• Check if multi-function analog input terminal A1 or A2 is set for frequency gain (H3-02 or H3-10 = “1”). If
Incorrect frequency reference
so, the frequency reference will be 0 if there is no voltage (current) input provided.
setting.
• Ensure H3-02 and H3-10 are set to the proper values.
• Ensure the analog input value is set to the right value (U1-13 and U1-14).
The Stall Prevention level during • Check the Stall Prevention level during acceleration (L3-02).
acceleration and deceleration set • If L3-02 is set too low, acceleration will take a fair amount of time.
too low. • Increase L3-02.
• Check the Stall Prevention level during run (L3-06).
The Stall Prevention level during
• If L3-06 is set too low, speed will drop as the drive outputs torque.
run has been set too low.
• Increase the setting value.
Although the drive is operating in
Open Loop Vector motor control
• Calculate motor data and reset motor parameters.
method, Auto-Tuning has not been
• Switch to the V/f motor control method (A1-02 = “0”).
performed.
• The motor cable may be long enough (over 50 m) to require Auto-Tuning for line-to-line resistance.
Drive reached the limitations of the
• Be aware that V/f Control is comparatively limited when it comes to producing torque at low speeds.
V/f motor control method.
• Consider switching to Open Loop Vector Control.
■ Drive Frequency Reference Differs from the Controller Frequency Reference Command

• Check the main speed frequency reference terminal input gain level assigned to terminals
The analog input frequency gain and bias are set to A1 and A2, as well as the frequency reference input bias to terminals A1 and A2
incorrect values. (parameters H3-03, H3-04, and H3-12).
• Set these parameters to the appropriate values.
• If multi-function analog input terminals A1 and A2 are set for frequency reference (H3-02
A frequency bias signal is being entered via analog = 0 and H3-10 = 0), the addition of both signals builds the frequency reference.
input terminals A1 or A2. • Ensure that H3-02 and H3-10 are set appropriately.
• Check the input level set for terminals A1 and A2 (U1-13 and U1-14).
■ Poor Speed Control Accuracy

• Check the slip compensation limit (C3-03).
Drive reached the slip compensation limit.
• Increase the value set to C3-03.
• The input voltage for the drive determines the maximum output voltage. A drive with an
input of 200 Vac can only output a maximum of 200 Vac. Open Loop Vector Control
Motor-rated voltage is set too high in Open Loop sometimes calculates an output voltage reference value that exceeds the maximum drive
Vector Control. output voltage level, resulting in a loss of speed control accuracy.
• Use a motor with a lower voltage rating (a vector control motor).
• Increase the input power voltage.
Auto-Tuning did not complete properly for Open
• Perform Auto-Tuning again.
Loop Vector Control.
■ Deceleration Takes Longer Than Expected with Dynamic Braking Enabled

• Check the Stall Prevention Level during deceleration (L3-04).
L3-04 is set incorrectly. • If a braking resistor option has been installed, disable Stall Prevention during deceleration
(L3-04 = “0”).
The deceleration time is set too long. Set deceleration to more appropriate time (C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, C1-08).
• Assuming parameter settings are normal and that no overvoltage occurs when there is
insufficient torque, it is likely that the demand on the motor has exceeded the motor
Insufficient motor torque.
capacity.
• Use a larger motor.
• Check the settings for the torque limit (L7-01 through L7-04).
• If the torque limit is enabled, deceleration might take longer than expected because the
drive cannot output more torque than the limit setting. Ensure the torque limit is set to a
large enough value.
Reaching the torque limit. • Increase the torque limit setting.
• If multi-function analog input terminal A1 or A2 is set to torque limit (H3-02 or H3-10
equals 10, 11, 12, or 15), ensure that the analog input levels are set to the correct levels.
Troubleshooting
• Ensure H3-02 and H3-10 are set to the right levels.
• Ensure the analog input is set to the correct value.
Load exceeded the internal torque limit determined
Switch to a larger capacity drive.
by the drive rated current.
■ Motor Hunting Occurs When Operating With a Light Load

6
Carrier frequency is too high. Lower the carrier frequency setting C6-02.
Large V/f setting value at low speeds triggers Use parameters E1-04 through E1-10 to set the V/f pattern in relation to the load
overexcitation. characteristics.
The maximum output frequency and the base
Set the proper values for the maximum output frequency and base frequency (E1-04 and E1-
frequency reference are not set properly in
06).
relationship to each other.
• Enable Hunting Prevention by setting n1-01 = “1”.
Hunting Prevention is disabled (V/f control only). • (OLV only) Increase the speed feedback detection control gain and time constant (n2-01
and n2-02).
■ Load Falls When Brake is Applied

Use frequency reference detection for closing and releasing the brake.
• At start: Release the brake after creating enough torque.
• At stop: Close the brake when the motor still produces torque.
Make the following setting changes to hold the brake:
• Set the frequency detection inactive during baseblock (L4-07 = 0).
The timing for the brake to close and release is not • Multi-function contact output terminal will switch on when the output frequency is greater
set properly. than the frequency detection level set in L4-01. Set L4-01 between 1.0 and 3.0 Hz.
• Slipping may occur when stopping because hysteresis is used in Frequency Reference 2
(where the frequency agree setting in L4-02 is 2.0 Hz). To prevent this, change the setting
to 0.1 Hz).
• Do not use the multi-function contact output setting “During Run” (H2-01 = 0) for the
brake signal.
Insufficient DC Injection Braking. Increase the amount of DC Injection Braking (b2-02).
■ Noise From Drive or Output Lines When the Drive is Powered On

• Install a noise filter on the input side of drive input power.
Relay switching in the drive • Install a noise filter on the output side of the drive.
generates excessive noise. • Place the wiring inside a metal conduit to shield it from switching noise.
• Ground the drive and motor properly.
• Separate the main circuit wiring and the control lines.
■ Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Trips During Run

• Increase the GFCI sensitivity or use GFCI with a higher threshold.
Excessive leakage current trips • Lower the carrier frequency (C6-02).
MCCB. • Reduce the length of the cable used between the drive and the motor.
• Install a noise filter or reactor on the output side of the drive.
■ Connected Machinery Vibrates When Motor Rotates

Excessive Motor Oscillation and Erratic Rotation

Poor balance between motor phases. Check drive input power voltage to ensure that it provides stable power.
Unexpected Noise from Connected Machinery

The carrier frequency is at the resonant frequency of
Adjust the carrier frequency using parameters C6-02 through C6-05.
the connected machinery.
■ Oscillation or Hunting

Adjust the following parameters in the order listed.
An increase in gain should be followed with an increase in the primary delay time constant.
• C4-02 (Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time)
Insufficient tuning in Open Loop Vector Control • n2-01 (Speed Feedback Detection Control [AFR] Time Constant 1)
• C3-02 (Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time)
The response for torque compensation and slip compensation will drop as the time constant
is increased.
Perform Auto-Tuning.
Auto-Tuning has not yet been performed (required
Set motor parameters after calculating the proper values.
for Open Loop Vector Control).
Change the motor control method to V/f Control (A1-02 = “0”).
Reduce the gain.
Insufficient tuning in V/f Control. • n1-02 (Hunting Prevention Gain Setting)
• n1-03 (Hunting Prevention Time Constant Setting)
Gain is too low when using PID control. Check the period of oscillation and adjust P, I, and D settings accordingly.

• Ensure that noise is not affecting the signal lines.
The frequency reference is assigned to an external • Separate main circuit wiring and control circuit wiring.
source and the signal is noisy. • Use twisted-pair cables or shielded wiring for the control circuit.
• Increase the analog input time filter constant (H3-13).
The cable between the drive and motor is too long.
• Reduce the length of the cable.
■ PID output fault

• Check the multi-function analog input terminal settings.
• Set multi-function analog input terminal A1 or A2 for PID feedback (H3-02 or H3-10 =
“B”).
• A signal input to the terminal selection for PID feedback is necessary.
No PID feedback input.
• Check the connection of the feedback signal.
• Check the various PID-related parameter settings.
• No PID feedback input to the terminal causes the value detected to be 0, causing a PID fault
and the drive to operate at max frequency.
• PID control keeps the difference between target and detection values at 0. Set the input
The level of detection and the target value do not
level for the values relative to one another.
correspond with each other.
• Use analog input gains H3-03 or H3-11 to adjust PID target and feedback signal scaling.
Reverse drive output frequency and speed
detection. When output frequency rises, the sensor Set PID output for reverse characteristics (b5-09 = “1”).
detects a speed decrease.
■ Insufficient Motor Torque

Auto-Tuning has not yet been performed (required
Perform Auto-Tuning.
for OLV Control).
The control mode was changed after performing
Perform Auto-Tuning again.
Auto-Tuning.
Only Line-to-Line Resistance Auto-Tuning was
Perform Rotational Auto-Tuning.
performed.
■ Motor Rotates After the Drive Output is Shut Off

• Adjust the DC Injection braking settings.
Low DC Injection Braking and the drive cannot
• Increase the value of b2-02 (DC Injection Braking Current).
decelerate properly.
• Increase the b2-04 (DC Injection Braking Time at Stop).
■ ov or Speed Loss Occurs When Starting into a Rotating Load
Troubleshooting
• Stop the motor using DC Injection braking. Restart the motor.
• Increase the value of b2-03 (DC Injection Braking Time at start).
The load is already rotating when the drive is trying
• Enable Speed Search at start (b3-01 = “1”).
to start it.
• Set a multi-function input terminal for external Speed Search command (H1-=“61” or
“62” during restart). 6
■ Output Frequency is not as High as Frequency Reference

• Set the maximum output frequency and the upper limit for the frequency reference to more
Upper limit for the frequency reference has been appropriate values (E1-04 and d2-01).
exceeded. • The following calculation yields the upper value for the output frequency = E1-04 x d2-01
/ 100
Large load triggered Stall Prevention function • Reduce the load.
during acceleration. • Adjust the Stall Prevention level during acceleration (L3-02).
■ Buzzing Sound from Motor at 2 kHz

• If the output current rises too high at low speeds, the carrier frequency automatically
reduces and causes a whining or buzzing sound.
Exceeded 110% of the rated output current of the
• If the sound is coming from the motor, disable carrier frequency derating (L8-38 = “0”).
drive while operating at low speeds.
• Disabling the automatic carrier frequency derating increases the chances of an overload
fault (oL2). Switch to a larger capacity motor if oL2 faults occur too frequently.
■ Unstable Motor Speed when Using PM or IPM

The motor code for PM (E5-01) is set incorrectly.
Set parameter E5-01 in accordance with the motor being used.
(Yaskawa motors only)
The drive is operating at less than 10% of the speed Consult with Yaskawa about using a different type of motor when attempting to operate at
reference. 10% of the speed reference.
Set and carefully adjust the following parameters in the order listed:
• n8-45 (Speed Feedback Detection Suppression Gain)
Motor hunting occurs.
• n8-55 (Load Inertia for PM Motors)
• C4-02 (Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time)
Hunting occurs at start. Increase the S-curve time at the start of acceleration (C2-01).
• If using a PM motor, set the correct motor code to E5-01.
Too much current is flowing through the drive. • If using a specialized motor, set parameter E5- to the correct value according to the
Motor Test Report.
■ Motor Does Not Operate When the RUN Button on the Digital Operator is Pressed

The LOCAL/REMOTE mode is not selected Press the LOCAL/REMOTE button to switch. The LO/RE LED should be on for LOCAL
properly. mode.
The drive is not in drive mode. A run command will not be issued. Exit to the drive mode and cycle the run command.
• If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output
The frequency reference is too low. Frequency), the drive will not operate.
• Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.
■ Motor Does Not Operate When an External Run Command is Input

The LOCAL/REMOTE mode is not selected Press the LOCAL/REMOTE button to switch. The LO/RE LED should be off for REMOTE
properly. mode.
The drive is not in Drive Mode. A run command will not be issued. Exit to the Drive mode and cycle the run command.
• If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output
The frequency reference is too low. Frequency), the drive will not operate.
• Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.
■ Motor Stops During Acceleration or When a Load is Connected

• The load is too heavy.
• The limit of motor response may be reached
Increase the acceleration time (C1-01) or reduce the motor load. Also, consider increasing
during rapid acceleration. This may be a result of
the motor size and/or drive size.
improper stall prevention or automatic torque boost
function adjustment.
■ Motor Rotates in One Direction Only

"Reverse run prohibited" is selected. If b1-04
(Reverse Prohibit Operation) is set to 1 (reverse run
Set b1-04 = “0” to allow reverse run operation.
prohibited), the drive will not accept a reverse run
command.
■ Motor Operates at a Higher Speed than the Speed Command

PID is enabled. If the PID mode is enabled (b5-01 =
1 to 4), the drive output frequency will change to
regulate the process variable to the target setpoint. If PID operation is not target, disable PID by setting b5-01 = “0”.
The PID can command a speed up to maximum
output frequency (E1-04).
■ Poor Speed Control Accuracy Above Base Speed in Open Loop Vector Motor Control
Method
The maximum output voltage of the drive is
determined by its input voltage. Vector control uses
voltage to control the currents within the motor. If
the vector control voltage reference value exceeds Use a motor with a lower rated voltage compared to the input voltage.
the drive output voltage capability, the speed
control accuracy will decrease because the motor
currents cannot be properly controlled.
■ Peripheral Devices Affected by Drive Operation

• Change the Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency. This will
help to reduce the amount of transistor switching noise.
• Install an Input Noise Filter at the input power terminals.
Radio frequency interference may be generated by
• Install an Output Noise Filter at the motor terminals.
drive output PWM waveform.
• Use conduit. Metal can shield electrical noise.
• Ground the drive and motor.
• Separate main circuit wiring from control wiring.
■ Ground Fault Interrupter Activates When Drive is Running

The output of the drive is a series of high frequency • Change to a ground fault interrupter with a higher leakage current detection level (such as,
pulses (PWM), so there is a certain amount of a sensitivity current of 200 mA or greater per Unit, with an operating time of 0.1 s or more),
leakage current. This may cause the ground fault or one that incorporates high-frequency corrective actions.
interrupter to operate and cut off the drive input • Change the Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency.
power. Note: Leakage current increases in proportion to cable length.
Troubleshooting
7
Periodic Inspection & Maintenance
This chapter describes the periodic inspection and maintenance of the drive to ensure that it
receives the proper care to maintain overall performance.
7.1 SECTION SAFETY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

7.2 INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
7.3 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
7.4 DRIVE COOLING FANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
7.5 DRIVE REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
7.1 Section Safety
7.1 Section Safety

DANGER
WARNING
installation, adjustment, and maintenance of AC drives.
work on the drive.
confirm safe level.
Fire Hazard
7.1 Section Safety
WARNING
NOTICE
Failure to comply may cause electrical interference resulting in poor system performance. Use shielded, twisted-pair
devices.

Maintenance
7.2 Inspection
7.2 Inspection
Power electronics have limited life and may exhibit changed characteristics or performance deterioration after years of
use under normal conditions. To help avoid such problems, it is important to perform preventive maintenance and
periodic inspection on the drive.
Drives contain a variety of power electronics such as power transistors, semiconductors, capacitors, resistors, fans, and
relays. The electronics in the drive serve a critical role in maintaining proper motor control.
Follow the inspection lists provided in this chapter as a part of a regular maintenance program.
Note: The drive will require more frequent inspection if it is placed in harsh environments, such as:
• High ambient temperatures
• Frequent starting and stopping
• Fluctuations in the AC supply or load
• Excessive vibrations or shock loading
• Dust, metal dust, salt, sulfuric acid, chlorine atmospheres
• Poor storage conditions.
Perform the first equipment inspection 3 months after installation.
◆ Recommended Daily Inspection

Table 7.1 outlines the recommended daily inspection for Yaskawa drives. Check the following items on a daily basis to
avoid premature deterioration in performance or product failure. Copy this checklist and mark the “Checked” column
after each inspection.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on. Failure to comply can result in serious
personal injury. Before servicing the drive, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after
the power supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc. To prevent electric
shock, wait at least five minutes after all indicators are OFF and measure the DC bus voltage level to confirm safe level.
Table 7.1 General Recommended Daily Inspection Checklist

Inspection Category Inspection Points Corrective Action Checked
• Check the load coupling.
• Inspect for abnormal oscillation or noise coming
Motor • Measure motor vibration.
from the motor.
• Tighten all loose components.
• Check for excessive load.
• Inspect for abnormal heat generated from the drive • Loose connections
Cooling
or motor and visible discoloration. • Check for dirty heatsink or motor.
• Ambient temperature
• Check for clogged or dirty fan.
Cooling Fan • Inspect drive cooling fan operation.
• Check fan operation drive parameter.
• Verify the drive environment complies with the
• Eliminate the source of contaminants or correct
Environment specifications listed in the Installation section of this
poor environment.
manual.
• The drive output current should not be higher than
• Check for excessive load.
Load the motor or drive rating for an extended period of
• Check the motor parameter settings of the drive.
time.
• Correct the voltage or power supply to within
Power Supply Voltage • Check main power supply and control voltages. nameplate specifications.
• Verify all main circuit phases.
◆ Recommended Periodic Inspection

Table 7.2 outlines the recommended periodic inspections for Yaskawa drive installations. Periodic inspections should
generally be checked every 3-6 months; however, the drive may require more frequent inspection due to poor
environments or rigorous use. Operating and environmental conditions, along with experience in each application, will
determine the actual inspection frequency for each installation. Periodic inspection will help to avoid premature
deterioration in performance or product failure. Copy this checklist and mark the “Checked” column after each
inspection.
7.2 Inspection
■ Periodic Inspection
Table 7.2 Periodic Inspection Checklist

Inspection Area Inspection Points Corrective Action Checked
Main Circuit Periodic Inspection
• Overall check of the main power circuit and ground Take appropriate actions (e.g., tightening loose
terminals connections).
• Inspect equipment for discoloration from • Replace damaged components as required.
overheating or deterioration. • The drive has few serviceable parts and may
• Inspect for damaged or deformed parts. require complete drive replacement.
General
• Inspect enclosure door seal if present. Replace
components if cleaning is not possible.
• Inspect for dirt, foreign particles, or dust collection
• Use dry air to clear away foreign matter. Use a
on components.
pressure of 39.2 x 104 to 58.8 x 104 Pa (4 - 6 kg •
cm2).
• Inspect wiring and connections for discoloration,
Conductors and
damage, or heat stress. • Repair or replace damaged wiring.
Wiring
• Inspect wire insulation and shielding for wear.
• Inspect terminals for stripped, damaged, or loose • Tighten loose screws and replace damaged
Terminals
connections. screws or terminals.
• Inspect contactors and relays for excessive noise • Check coil voltage for over or under voltage
Relays and during operation. conditions.
Contactors • Inspect coils for signs of overheating such as • Replace damaged removable relays contactors
melted or cracked insulation. or circuit board.
• Minor discoloration may be acceptable.
• Inspect for discoloration of heat stress on or around
Braking Resistors • If discoloration exists check for loose
resistors.
connections.
Motor Periodic Inspection
• Stop the motor and contact qualified
Operation Check • Check for increased vibration or abnormal noise.
maintenance personnel as required.
Control Circuit Periodic Inspection
• Tighten loose screws and replace damaged
• Inspect terminals for stripped, damaged or loose
screws or terminals.
General connections.
• If terminals are integral to a circuit board then
• Check for tightness.
board or drive replacement may be required.
Cooling System Periodic Inspection
• Replace as required.
• Check for abnormal oscillation or unusual noise. • Refer to Drive Cooling Fans on page 292 for
Cooling Fan
• Check for damaged or missing fan blades. information on cleaning or replacing the cooling
fan.
• Use dry air to clear away foreign matter. Periodic Inspection &
• Inspect for dust or other foreign material collected
Heatsink • Use a pressure of 39.2 x 104 to 58.8 x 104 Pa (4 -
on the surface.
6 kg • cm2).
Maintenance
• Visually inspect the area.

• Inspect air intake and exhaust openings. They must
Air Duct • Clear obstructions and clean air duct as
be free from obstruction and properly installed.
required.
LED Periodic Inspection
• Make sure the LED lights correctly. • Contact your Yaskawa representative if there is 7
LEDs • Inspect for dust or other foreign material that may any trouble with the LED or keypad.
have collected on surrounding components. • Clean the LED.
Note: Periodic inspections should be performed every one or two years. The drive, however, may require more frequent inspection due
to poor environments or rigorous use.
7.3 Periodic Maintenance

The drive has various "maintenance monitors." This feature provides advance maintenance warning and eliminates the
need to shut down the entire system for unexpected problems. The drive allows the user to check the following
maintenance periods.
• Cooling Fan
• Electrolytic Capacitors (Main Circuit)
• Inrush Prevention Circuit
• IGBT
◆ Replacement Parts
Table 7.3 contains the estimated performance life of components that require replacement during the life of the drive.
Only use Yaskawa replacement parts for the appropriate drive model and revision.
Table 7.3 Estimated Performance Life
Component Estimated Performance Life
Cooling Fan 10 years
Electrolytic Capacitors (Main Circuit) 10 years <1>
<1> The drive has few serviceable parts and may require complete drive replacement.
NOTICE: Estimated performance life based on specific usage conditions. These conditions are provided for the purpose of replacing
parts to maintain performance. Some parts may require more frequent replacement due to poor environments or rigorous use. Usage
conditions for estimated performance life:
• Ambient temperature: Yearly average of 40°C for the heatsink-cooled drive, 35°C for the Finless Drive
• Load factor: 80% maximum
• Operation time: 24 hours a day
• Airborne dust, oil, and higher temperatures may shorten the drive's expected performance life.
■ Performance Life Monitors

The drive calculates the maintenance period for components that may require replacement during the life of the drive. A
percentage of the maintenance period is displayed on the LED digital operator by viewing the appropriate monitor
parameter.
When the maintenance period reaches 100%, there is increased risk that the drive may malfunction. Yaskawa
recommends checking the maintenance period regularly to ensure maximum performance life.
Refer to Recommended Periodic Inspection on page 288 for more details.
Table 7.4 Performance Life Monitors Used for Component Replacement
Parameter Component Contents
Displays the accumulated operation time of the cooling fan, from 0 to 99999 hours. This
U4-03
value is automatically reset to 0 once it reaches 99999.
Cooling Fan
Displays the accumulated cooling fan operation time as a percentage of the specified
U4-04
maintenance period.
Main Circuit (DC bus) Displays the accumulated time the capacitors are used as a percentage of the specified
U4-05
Electrolytic Capacitors maintenance period.
Displays the number of times the drive is powered up as a percentage of the performance life
U4-06 Inrush (pre-charge) relay
of the inrush circuit.
U4-07 IGBT Displays the percentage of the maintenance period reached by the IGBTs.
■ Related Drive Parameters

Table 7.5 Maintenance Parameter Settings
Parameter Parameter Name Function
o4-03 <1> <2> Cooling Fan Operation Time Sets the value of starting the fan operation time monitor in units of 10 h.
o4-05 <2> Capacitor Maintenance Setting Sets the value of the capacitor maintenance time monitor as a percentage of U4-05.
Soft Charge Bypass Relay Sets the value of the Soft Charge Bypass Relay Maintenance monitor as a percentage
o4-07 <2>
Maintenance Setting of U4-06.
o4-09 <2> IGBT Maintenance Setting Sets the value of the IGBT Maintenance monitor as a percentage of U4-07.
<1> Set in units of 10 hours. Setting o4-03 to 30 will have the start counting the cooling fan operation time from 300 hours, and U4-03 will display
300H.
<2> Maintenance time periods will vary depending on the operation environment.
NOTICE: After replacing parts or drive, reset the appropriate maintenance parameters (o4-03, o4-05, o4-07, and o4-09) to 0. If these
parameters are not reset, the function will continue to count down the performance life of the new replaced components.

Maintenance
7.4 Drive Cooling Fans

NOTICE: Follow cooling fan replacement instructions. The cooling fan cannot operate properly when installed incorrectly and could
seriously damage the drive. To ensure maximum useful product life, replace all cooling fans when performing maintenance.
Contact your Yaskawa representative or supplier to order replacement cooling fans as required.
Some drive models have multiple cooling fans.
For drives with multiple cooling fans, replace all the fans when performing maintenance to ensure maximum useful
product life.
Table 7.6 Number of Cooling Fan
Single-Phase 200 V Three-Phase 200 V Three-Phase 400 V
CIMR-T Cooling Fan CIMR-T Cooling Fan CIMR-T Cooling Fan
BV0001B – 2V0001B – 4V0001B –
BV0002B – 2V0002B – 4V0002B –
BV0003B – 2V0004B – 4V0004B –
BV0006B – 2V0006B 1 4V0005B 1
BV0010B 1 2V0008B 1 4V0007B 1
BV0012B 1 2V0010B 1 4V0009B 1
– – 2V0012B 1 4V0011B 1
– – 2V0018B 1 4V0018B 2
– – 2V0020B 1 4V0023B 2
– – 2V0030B 2 4V0031B 2
– – 2V0040B 2 4V0038B 2
– – 2V0056B 2 – –
– – 2V0069A 2 – –
Note: Finless- drive models (CIMR-TBV0001J to BV0012J, 2V0001J to 2V0056J, 2V0069L, and 4V0001J to 4V0038J) do not have
a cooling fan.
◆ Cooling Fan Replacement

The cooling fan is installed on the top of the drive. The cooling fan can easily be replaced without tools or removal of the
drive or enclosure parts.
CAUTION! Burn Hazard. Do not touch a hot drive heatsink. Failure to comply could result in minor or moderate injury. Shut off the
power to the drive when replacing the cooling fan. To prevent burns, wait at least 15 minutes and ensure the heatsink has cooled
down.
■ Removing the Cooling Fan

1. Depress the right and left sides of the fan cover tabs and pull upward. Remove the fan cover from the top of the
drive. The following figure illustrates a drive with a single cooling fan.
A
B
Figure 7.1
A – Fan cover C – Tab

B – Cooling fan
Figure 7.1 Remove the Cooling Fan Cover
2. Remove the fan cable carefully, disconnect the pluggable connector and remove the fan.
■ Installing the Cooling Fan

NOTICE: Prevent Equipment Damage. Follow cooling fan replacement instructions. Improper cooling fan replacement could result in
damage to equipment. When installing the replacement cooling fan into the drive, make sure the fan is facing upwards. To ensure
maximum useful product life, replace all cooling fans when performing maintenance.
1. Install the replacement cooling fan into the drive, ensuring the alignment pins line up, as shown in the figure
below:
Figure 7.2

Maintenance
C
7
A – Label facing up C – Front

B – Back
Figure 7.2 Cooling Fan Orientation
2. Ensure the connectors are properly connected and place the cable back into the recess of the drive.
Figure 7.3
A – Push the connectors together so no space remains between them.

Figure 7.3 Connectors
Note: Ensure that the left and right tabs are locked back into place.
3. Align the left and right cover tabs to install the fan cover back on the top of the drive.
7.5 Drive Replacement

◆ Serviceable Parts
The drive contains few serviceable parts. The following parts are considered replacement parts on the drive:
• Main control board and I/O Terminal board I/O PCBs.
• Cooling fan(s)
• Front cover
Replace the drive if the main power circuitry is damaged. Contact your local Yaskawa representative before replacing
parts if the drive is still under warranty. Yaskawa reserves the right to replace or repair the drive according to Yaskawa
warranty policy.
◆ Terminal Board Overview

The drive has a modular I/O terminal block that facilitates quick drive replacement. The terminal board contains on-
board memory that stores all drive parameter settings and allows the parameters to be saved and transferred to the
replacement drive by disconnecting the terminal board from the damaged drive then reconnecting the terminal board to
the replacement drive. There is no need to manually reprogram the replacement drive.
Note: When transferring the removable terminal block with back-up memory to a drive that has a different voltage class or output
capacity during drive replacement, initialize the drive by setting A1-03 = 2220 after the terminal block has been installed.
Figure 7.4
A – Charge LED C – Removable Terminal Board

B – Terminal Board Locking Pin
Figure 7.4 Terminal Board
◆ Replacing the Drive

WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Never connect or disconnect wiring, remove connectors or option cards, or replace the cooling Periodic Inspection &
fan while the power is on. Failure to comply may result in serious injury. Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. The
internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off.
Maintenance
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not allow unqualified personnel to perform work on the drive. Failure to comply could result in
serious injury. Installation, maintenance, inspection and servicing must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar with
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and circuit
boards. Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry. 7
1. Loosen the screw on the front of the drive and remove the front cover.
Figure 7.5
Figure 7.5 Remove Front Cover

2. Pull the pin on the ground terminal out of the removable terminal block.
Figure 7.6
Pull out the

ground terminal
pin in the direction
indicated by
the arrow.
Cable
Terminal
Figure 7.6 Depress Plastic Tab

3. Push down the installation pin on the terminal board with a screwdriver
Push down
the terminal
board locking
pin with a
screwdriver.
4. While holding down the locking pin from step 3, slide the removable terminal block in the direction of the arrows
in Figure 7.7.
Figure 7.7
Figure 7.7 Removing the Terminal Board
Figure 7.8
Figure 7.8 Removable Terminal Board disconnected from the drive
■ Terminal Board Replacement

1. Replace the removable terminal block on the drive according to Figure 7.9
Figure 7.9
Place the terminal board below the

guide tracks in the plastic case of the
drive. Then push it gently down and
slide it toward the keypad until the
locking pin clicks into place.
Figure 7.9 Terminal Board Replacement

2. Ensure the terminal block is firmly fastened to the connector.
Figure 7.10
Connector

Maintenance
Figure 7.10 Terminal Board Installed

3. Put the lower cover and the terminal cover back in place.
4. Once the drive has been replaced, check the drive unit selection setting in o2-04. For more information, refer to
o2-04: Drive Model Selection on page 221. 7
5. An oPE04 error may occur when replacing the drive or the removable terminal block. If the data on saved to the
terminal block is compatible, then set A1-03 = 5550. This will write the parameter settings stored in the terminal
block to the new drive.
Reset the appropriate Maintenance Monitors using parameters o4-01 through o4-13.
8
Peripheral Devices & Options
This chapter explains the installation of available peripheral devices and options for the drive.
8.1 SECTION SAFETY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

8.2 DRIVE OPTIONS AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
8.3 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL DEVICES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
8.4 INSTALLING PERIPHERAL DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
8.5 COMMUNICATION OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
8.1 Section Safety
8.1 Section Safety

DANGER
Disconnect all power to the drive, wait at least five minutes after all indicators are off, measure the DC bus voltage to
confirm safe level, and check for unsafe voltages before servicing to prevent electric shock. The internal capacitor
remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus
voltage is below 50 Vdc.
WARNING
WARNING
confirm safe level.
Installation, maintenance, inspection and servicing must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar with
work on the drive.
8.1 Section Safety
WARNING
Do not change wiring or remove option unit while power is running through the drive.
Disconnect all power to the drive and check for unsafe voltages before servicing.
NOTICE

Options
8.2 Drive Options and Peripheral Devices

The following table of peripheral devices lists the names of the various devices/options available for Yaskawa drives.
Contact Yaskawa or your Yaskawa agent to order these peripheral devices.
• Peripheral Device Selection: Refer to Yaskawa catalog for selection and part numbers.
• Peripheral Device Installation: Refer to option manual for option installation instructions.
Table 8.1 Available Peripheral Devices
Option Model Number Description
Power Options
DC Reactor UZDA Series DC reactor to improve power factor
AC Reactor UZBA Series AC reactor to improve power factor
Braking Resistor ERF-150WJ Series 3% ED, 150 W braking resistor
Braking Resistor Unit LKEB Series Braking resistor
Braking Unit CDBR Series External braking transistor
Circuit breaker for short circuit or over load

protection
Note: Yaskawa recommends installing an MCCB
Molded Case Circuit Breaker
NF Series to the power supply side to protect drive wiring
(MCCB)
and prevent other damage in the event of
component failure. Install an MCCB if permitted
by the power system.
Provides protection against potentially harmful
leakage current.
Note: Yaskawa recommends installing an ELCB
Earth Leakage Circuit
NV, EG, or SG Series to the power supply side to protect drive wiring
Breaker (ELCB)
and prevent other damage in the event of
component failure. An MCCB can also be used if
permitted by the power system.
Ensures that power to drive is completely shut
off when necessary, preventing potential damage
to the braking resistor and other internal circuitry.
Install an MCCB when using a braking resistor to
Magnetic Contactor (Input) SC Series prevent the braking resistor from overheating.
To protect internal components from sudden high
levels of input current, the MC should be wired
so that it opens when a fault output terminal is
triggered.
200 V class: DCR2-A Suppresses surge voltage caused by switching
Surge Absorber
400 V class: RFN3AL-504KD magnetic contactors
Zero Phase Reactor F6045GB Reduces electromagnetic noise
Reduces electromagnetic noise flowing back

Input Noise Filter LNFB, LNFD Series
from the drive into power supply
Reduces electromagnetic noise generated by the

Output Noise Filter LF-310 Series
drive output
Isolates the drive control I/Os for improved noise

— Isolator DGP--
resistance
Momentary Power Loss 200 V class: P0010
— —
Recovery Unit 400 V class: P0020
Reference Setting / Monitor Options
External meter for displaying the output
— Frequency Meter / Ammeter DCF-6A frequency or current using an analog signal from
the drive
Frequency Meter Scaling External potentiometer for adjusting the
— RH000850
Resistor (20 kOhm) frequency meter scaling
External meter for displaying the output voltage
— Voltmeter SDF-12
using an analog signal from the drive
Frequency Reference Setting External potentiometer for setting the frequency
— RH000739
Potentiometer (2 kOhm) reference by an analog input
Frequency Reference
— CM-3S Knob for frequency reference potentiometer
Potentiometer Knob
Plate with scale for frequency reference setting
— Meter Plate NPJT41561-1
potentiometer
Interface Options
Remote operator with 8 languages clear text
Remote LCD Operator JVOP-180 LCD display and copy function; Cable length
max. 3 m
Allows the user to copy and verify parameter
USB/Copy Unit JVOP-181 settings between drives. Can also be used as
YASKAWA
USB Copy Unit
ERR
COM
JVOP-181
LOCK
py rify ad
Co Ve Re
adapter to connect the drive to a PC USB port

Cable to connect the drive to a serial port of a PC
— PC Serial Cable WV103
(3m)
Extension cable (1 m or 3 m) to connect an
External Operator Cable WV001 / WV003
external operator to the drive
Mechanical Options
Installation kit for mounting the drive with the
Heatsink External Mounting
— EZZ020568 heatsink outside of the panel (side-by-side
Attachment
mounting possible)
Installation kit for mounting the drive on a DIN
— DIN Rail Attachment 100-035-0 or EZZ08122
rail
Others
Provides power to the control circuit and option
boards in the event of power loss. Allows the
24 V Power Supply Option PS-V10S or PS-V10M user to still monitor drive settings and fault
information even if the main circuit has no
power.
DriveWizard PC tool for drive setup and parameter
Drive Wizard Plus —
management
Communication Options
Options
PROFIBUS-DP SI-P3/T <1> Connects to a PROFIBUS-DP network.

8
CC-Link SI-C3/T <1> Connects to a CC-Link network
DeviceNet SI-N3/T <1> Connects to a DeviceNet network
CANopen SI-S3/T <1> Connects to a CANopen network
<1> Under development
8.3 Connecting Peripheral Devices
8.3 Connecting Peripheral Devices

Figure 8.1 illustrates how the drive and motor connect together with various peripheral devices.
• Refer to peripheral device option manual for detailed installation instructions.
Figure 8.1
Engineering software tools

DriveWizard
Power
supply
<1>
Line
breaker
(MCCB) PC
or
Leakage
breaker Drive 24V option
B1 B2 connector
Magnetic
contactor
(MC)
Surge 24V power supply
option
absorber
AC reactor
Thermal relay
Zero phase Braking resistor unit
reactor or breaking resistor
DC Reactor
Fuse
Ground
Input Side +1 +2
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
Noise Filter
Output Side
Noise Filter Motor
Magnetic Contactor Zero phase

(switches to line power) reactor
Ground
Figure 8.1 Connecting Peripheral Devices
<1> Never connect the comm. port on the drive to the LAN port on a PC. This can damage the drive and the PC.
Note: Note that if the drive is set to trigger a fault output whenever the fault restart function is activated (L5-02 = 1), then a sequence to
interrupt power when a fault occurs will result in shutting off the power to the drive as the drive attempts to restart itself. The
default setting for L5-02 is 0 (fault output active during restart attempt).

Options
8.4 Installing Peripheral Devices

This section describes the proper steps and precautions to take when installing or connecting various peripheral devices
to the drive.
• Refer to peripheral device manual for detailed installation instructions.
NOTICE: Use a class 2 power supply (UL standard) when connecting to the control terminals. Improper application of peripheral
devices could result in drive performance degradation due to improper power supply.
◆ Installing a Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) or Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker
(ELCB)
Install a MCCB or ELCB for line protection between the power supply and the main circuit power supply input terminals
R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3. This protects the main circuit and devices wired to the main circuit while also providing overload
protection.
Consider the following when selecting and installing an MCCB or ELCB:
• The capacity of the MCCB or ELCB should be 1.5 to 2 times the rated output current of the drive. Use an MCCB or
ELCB to keep the drive from faulting out instead of using overheat protection (150% for one minute at the rated output
current).
• If several drives are connected to one MCCB or ELCB that is shared with other equipment, use a sequence that shuts
the power OFF when errors are output by using magnetic contactor (MC) as shown in the following figure.
Figure 8.2
Drive
MCCB or ELCB MC
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Power MC
Supply MB
SA
MC
MC
Figure 8.2 Connecting an MCCB or ELCB
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Disconnect the MCCB (or ELCB) and MC before wiring terminals. Failure to comply may result in
serious injury or death.
■ Installing a Leakage Breaker

Residual currents occurring in drive installations can contain AC, DC and high frequency components that may prevent a
normal ELCB from tripping. If an ELCB is required in the installation, always use an all current sensitive ELCB (Type B
according to IEC 60755) to ensure proper ground fault interruption.
Leakage currents generated by the drive during normal operation may trip an ELCB even if a ground fault is not present.
Factors that influence the leakage current are:
• Size of the AC drive
• AC drive carrier frequency
• Motor cable type and length
• EMI/RFI filter
If the ELCB trips spuriously consider changing these items or use an ELCB with a higher trip level.
◆ Installing an Input-side Magnetic Contactor

■ Disconnecting the Power Supply
The drive should be shut off in the case of a fault in external equipment such as braking resistors through use of a
Magnetic Contactor (MC).
NOTICE: Install a MC on the input side of the drive when the drive should not automatically restart after power loss. To get the full
performance life out of the electrolytic capacitors and circuit relays, refrain from switching the MC more than once every 30 minutes.
Frequent use can damage the drive. Use the drive to stop and start the motor.
■ Protecting the Braking Resistor or Braking Resistor Unit

Use an MC on the input side of the drive to protect a braking resistor or braking resistor unit from overheat or fire.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. When using a braking unit, use a thermal relay on the braking resistors and configure a fault contact output
for the braking resistor unit to disconnect drive main power via an input contactor. Inadequate braking circuit protection could result in
death or serious injury by fire from overheating resistors.
◆ Connecting an AC or DC Reactor
AC and DC reactors suppress surges in current and improve the power factor on the input side of the drive.
Use a DC reactor or AC reactor or both:
• To suppress harmonic current or improve the power factor of the power supply.
• When using a phase advancing capacitor switch.
• With a large capacity power supply transformer (over 600 kVA).
Note: Use an AC or DC reactor when also connecting a thyristor converter (such as a DC drive) to the same power supply system,
regardless of the conditions of the power supply.
■ Connecting an AC Reactor
Figure 8.3
C D
A B
U X R/L1
V Y S/L2
W Z T/L3
A – Power supply C – AC reactor

B – MCCB D – Drive
Figure 8.3 Connecting an AC Reactor

Options
■ Connecting a DC Reactor
Ensure the jumper between terminals +1 and +2 (terminals are jumpered for shipment) is removed when connecting a
DC reactor. The jumper must be installed if no DC reactor is used. Refer to Connecting an AC Reactor on page 307 for
an example of DC reactor wiring.
Figure 8.4
C
A B
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
+1 +2
A – Power supply C – Drive

B – MCCB D – DC reactor
Figure 8.4 Connecting a DC Reactor
◆ Connecting a Surge Absorber

A surge absorber suppresses surge voltage generated from switching an inductive load near the drive. Inductive loads
include magnetic contactors, relays, valves, solenoids and brakes. Always use a surge absorber or diode when operating
with an inductive load.
Note: Never connect a surge absorber to the drive output.
◆ Connecting a Noise Filter

■ Reducing Radiated, Conducted, and Induced Noise
Drives generate noise that can potentially affect surrounding devices like PLCs, etc.
• Radiated Noise: Electromagnetic waves noise throughout the radio bandwidth radiated from the drive and cables.
• Conducted Noise: Noise generated by the drive and emitted to through the power lines.
• Induced Noise: Noise generated by electromagnetic induction can affect control signal lines.
Take the following measurements to prevent noise causing malfunction of other drives or devices:
• Install all components on a well grounded metal plate.
• Keep the motor cable as short as possible.
• Use noise filters on the input side of the drive to reduce conducted noise.
• Install noise filters on the input and output side of the drive, install the drive in a metal enclosure panel and use a
shielded motor cable to reduce radiated noise.
• Use shielded motor and control circuit lines and lay control circuit lines at least 30 cm away from power lines in order
to prevent malfunction due to induced noise.
Figure 8.5
A
C D E
B MCCB F G
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 V/T2 M
T/L3 W/T3
H
I
J
A – Metal enclosure F – Shielded motor cable
B – Power supply G – Motor
C – Input noise filter H – Separate at least 30 cm
D – Drive I – Control signal lines
E – Output noise filter J – Controller
Figure 8.5 Reducing Radio Frequency Noise
■ Input-Side Noise Filter

Drive outputs generate noise as a result of high-speed switching. This noise flows from inside the drive back toward the
power supply, possibly affecting other equipment. Installing a noise filter to the input side of the drive can reduce the
amount of noise flowing back into the power supply. This also prevents noise from entering the drive from the power
supply.
• Use a noise filter specifically designed for AC drives.
• Install the noise filter as close as possible to the drive.
Figure 8.6
B C
A MCCB
1 3 R/L1
2 4 S/L2
MCCB

B – Input-side noise filter D – Other control device
(Model: LNFB-)
Figure 8.6 Input-Side Noise Filter (Single-Phase 200 V)
Figure 8.7
B C
MCCB
A R U R/L1
S/L2
S V
T/L3
T W
E
Options
MCCB
D
8
B – Input-side noise filter D – Other control device
(Model: LNFD-)
Figure 8.7 Input-Side Noise Filter (Three-Phase 200/400 V)
Refer to EMC Filter Installation on page 422 for details about EMC filter selection and installation in order to make the
drive compliant with European standards EN61800-3 and the EMC guidelines.
■ Output-Side Noise Filter

A noise filter on the output side of the drive reduces inductive noise and radiated noise. Figure 8.8 illustrates an example
of output-side noise filter wiring.
NOTICE: Do not connect phase-advancing capacitors or LC/RC noise filters to the output circuits. Improper application of noise filters
could result in damage to the drive.
Figure 8.8
B C
A MCCB
R/L1 U/T1 1 4
S/L2 V/T2 2 5 D
T/L3 W/T3 3 6
A – Power supply C – Output-side noise filter

B – Drive D – Motor
Figure 8.8 Output-Side Noise Filter
◆ Fuses
To protect the drive and avoid damage from a short-circuit, a fuse should be installed to the input side of the drive.
Use the table below to select the right input fuse to match the drive model used in the application.
Table 8.2 Fuse Selection
Non-Time Delay Class-T Fuse Type
Drive Model Fuse Type (Manufacturer:
Fuse Ampere Rating (A) Fuse Ampere Rating (A)
CIMR-T (Manufacturer: Ferraz) Bussmann)
600 Vac, 200 kAIR 500 Vac, 200 kAIR
Single-Phase 200 V Class
BV0001 A6T6 6 FWH-25A14F 25
BV0002 A6T10 10 FWH-25A14F 25
BV0003 A6T20 20 FWH-60B 60
BV0006 A6T40 40 FWH-80B 80
BV0010 A6T40 40 FWH-100B 100
BV0012 A6T50 50 FWH-125B 125
Three-Phase 200 V Class
2V0001 A6T3 3 FWH-25A14F 25
2V0002 A6T6 6 FWH-25A14F 25
2V0004 A6T15 15 FWH-25A14F 25
2V0006 A6T20 20 FWH-25A14F 25
2V0008 A6T25 25 FWH-70B 70
2V0010 A6T25 25 FWH-70B 70
2V0012 A6T30 30 FWH-70B 70
2V0018 A6T40 40 FWH-90B 90
2V0020 A6T40 40 FWH-90B 90
2V0030 FWH-100B 100
2V0040 FWH-200B 200
Not Available
2V0056 FWH-200B 200
2V0069 FWH-200B 200
4V0001 A6T3 3 FWH-40B 40
4V0002 A6T6 6 FWH-40B 40
4V0004 A6T15 15 FWH-50B 50
4V0005 A6T20 20 FWH-70B 70
4V0007 A6T25 25 FWH-70B 70
4V0009 A6T25 25 FWH-90B 90
4V0011 A6T30 30 FWH-90B 90
4V0018 FWH-80B 80
4V0023 FWH-100B 100
Not Available
4V0031 FWH-125B 125
4V0038 FWH-200B 200
◆ External Heatsink Attachment

An external heatsink attachment makes it possible to place the heatsink used to cool the drive and components outside
Options
the enclosure panel. It may still be necessary to allow for airflow around the drive case.
Contact your Yaskawa representative or Yaskawa directly for questions on the external heatsink attachment.
8
◆ EMC Filter Installation
This drive is tested according to European standards EN61800-3 and it complies with the EMC guidelines. Refer to
EMC Filter Installation on page 422 for details about EMC filter selection and installation.
◆ Zero-Phase Reactor
A zero-phase reactor can be used to reduce the noise on the input and output sides of the drive.
Figure 8.9
Close-up of V/T2-phase wiring

D
C E
B
A R/L1 U/T1
1st pass
2nd pass
S/L2 V/T2 F
3rd pass
T/L3 W/T3
4th pass
Pass each wire (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3)

through the core 4 times.
A – Power supply D – Drive

B – MCCB E – Zero-phase reactor on output side
C – Zero-phase reactor on input side F – Motor
Figure 8.9 Zero-Phase Reactor
◆ Installing a Motor Thermal Overload (oL) Relay on the Drive Output

Motor thermal overload relays protect the motor by disconnecting power lines to the motor due to a motor overload
condition.
Install a motor thermal overload relay between the drive and motor:
• When operating multiple motors on a single AC drive.
• When using a power line bypass to operate the motor directly from the power line.
It is not necessary to install a motor thermal overload relay when operating a single motor from a single AC drive. The
AC drive has UL recognized electronic motor overload protection built into the drive software.
Note: Disable the motor protection function (L1-0 1 = “0”) when using an external motor thermal overload relay. The relay should shut
off main power on the input side of the main circuit when triggered.
■ General Precautions when Using Thermal Overload Relays

The following application precautions should be considered when using motor thermal overload relays on the output of
AC drives in order to prevent nuisance trips or overheat of the motor at low speeds:
• Low speed motor operation
• Use of multiple motors on a single AC drive
• Motor cable length
• Nuisance tripping resulting from high AC drive carrier frequency
Low Speed Operation and Motor Thermal oL Relays
Generally, thermal relays are applied on general-purpose motors. When general-purpose motors are driven by AC drives,
the motor current is approximately 5 to 10% greater than if driven by the commercial power supply. In addition, the
cooling capacity of a motor with a shaft-driven fan decreases when operating at low speeds. Even if the load current is
within the motor rated value, motor overheating may occur. A thermal relay cannot effectively protect the motor due to
the reduction of cooling at low speeds. For this reason, apply the UL recognized electronic thermal overload protection
function built into the drive whenever possible.
UL recognized electronic thermal overload function of the drive: Speed-dependent heat characteristics are simulated
using data from standard motors and force-ventilated motors. The motor is protected from overload using this function.
Using One Drive with Multiple Motors
Turn off the electronic thermal overload function. Please refer to the appropriate product instruction manual to determine
which parameter disables this function.
The UL recognized electronic thermal overload function of the drive cannot be applied when using multiple motors on
one drive.
Long Motor Cables

When long motor cables and high carrier frequency are used, nuisance tripping of the thermal relay may occur due to
increased leakage current. Therefore, reduce the carrier frequency or increase the tripping level of the thermal overload
relay.
Nuisance Tripping Resulting from High AC Drive Carrier Frequency
Current waveforms generated by high carrier frequency PWM drives tend to create additional temperature rise in
overload relays. Therefore, it may be necessary to increase the trip level setting when encountering nuisance triggering of
the relay.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Confirm an actual motor overload condition is not present prior to increasing the thermal oL trip setting.
Check local electrical codes before making adjustments to motor thermal overload settings.

Options
8.5 Communication Options
8.5 Communication Options

Table 8.3 gives detailed information about the available options that allow Yaskawa drives to connect to communication
networks. A host controller can control and monitor the drive, read and change parameters by using a option. Contact
Yaskawa or your Yaskawa agent to order options.
• Option Selection: Refer to Yaskawa catalog for more details on option card selection and part numbers.
• Option Installation: Refer to option unit manual for option unit installation instructions.
Table 8.3 Available Communication Options
Option Model Function
PROFIBUS-DP SI-P3/T <1> Connects to a PROFIBUS-DP network
CC-Link SI-C3/T <1> Connects to a CC-Link network
DeviceNet SI-N3/T <1> Connects to a DeviceNet network
CANopen SI-S3/T <1> Connects to a CANopen network
<1> Under development
Appendix: A
Specifications
A.1 HEAVY DUTY AND NORMAL DUTY RATINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

A.2 SINGLE/THREE-PHASE 200 V CLASS DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
A.3 THREE-PHASE 400 V CLASS DRIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
A.4 DRIVE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
A.5 DRIVE WATT LOSS DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
A.6 DRIVE DERATING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
A.1 Heavy Duty and Normal Duty Ratings
A.1 Heavy Duty and Normal Duty Ratings

The capacity of the drive is based on two types of load characteristics: Heavy Duty (HD) and Normal Duty (ND).
Refer to Selecting the Appropriate Load Rating on page 316 for the differences between HD and ND. Specifications for
capacity ratings are listed on the following pages.
Table A.1 Selecting the Appropriate Load Rating
Setting Parameter Rated Output Current Overload Tolerance Default Carrier Frequency
C6-01
0: Heavy Duty HD Rating varies by model <1> 150% rated output current for 60 s 8/10 kHz varies by model
1: Normal Duty
ND Rating varies by model <1> 120% rated output current for 60 s varies by model 2 kHz
(default)
<1> The following pages list information on rating changes based on drive model.
TERMS HD and ND: HD refers to applications requiring constant torque output, while ND refers to
applications with variable torque needs.
Note: Differences between HD ratings and ND ratings for the drive include rated input and output current, overload capacity, carrier
frequency, and current limit. The default setting is for ND (C6-01 = 1).
A.2 Single/Three-Phase 200 V Class Drive

Table A.2 Power Ratings
Item Specification
Three-Phase: CIMR-T2V 0001 0002 0004 0006 0008 0010 0012 0018 0020
Single-Phase: CIMR-TBV <1> 0001 0002 0003 0006 – 0010 0012 – –
ND Rating 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3.0 3.7 5.5
Maximum Motor Size Allowed (kW) <2>
HD Rating 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3.0 3.7
ND Rating 1.1 1.9 3.9 7.3 8.8 10.8 13.9 18.5 24.0
Three-Phase
Input Current HD Rating 0.7 1.5 2.9 5.8 7.0 7.5 11.0 15.6 18.9
Input
(A) <3> ND Rating 2.0 3.6 7.3 13.8 – 20.2 24.0 – –
Single-Phase
HD Rating 1.4 2.8 5.5 11.0 – 14.1 20.6 – 35.0
Rated Output Capacity ND Rating 0.5 0.7 1.3 2.3 3.0 3.7 4.6 6.7 7.5
(kVA) <4> HD Rating 0.3 0.6 1.1 1.9 2.6 3.0 4.2 5.3 6.7
3.5
ND Rating <5> 1.2 1.9 6.0 8.0 9.6 12.0 17.5 19.6
Output Current (A) (3.3)
HD Rating 0.8 <6> 1.6 <6> 3.0 <6> 5.0 <6> 6.9 <7> 8.0 <7> 11.0 <7> 14.0 <7> 17.5 <7>
Output ND Rating: 120% of rated output current for 1 minute
Overload Tolerance HD Rating: 150% of rated output current for 1 minute
(Derating may be required for applications that start and stop frequently)
Carrier Frequency 2 kHz (user-set, 2 to 15 kHz)
Max Output Voltage (V) Three-phase 200 to 240 V (proportional to input voltage)
Max Output Frequency (Hz) 400 Hz (user-adjustable)
Rated Voltage Three-phase power: Three-phase 200 to 240 V 50/60 Hz
Power Rated Frequency Single-phase power: 200 to 240 V 50/60 Hz
Supply Allowable Voltage Fluctuation -15 to 10%
Allowable Frequency Fluctuation ±5%
Harmonic Corrective
DC Reactor Optional
Actions
ND Rating 13.0 17.1 29.4 44.7 68.6 77.5 91.7 133.9 145.0
Three-Phase
HD Rating 11.6 16.7 27.6 43.3 70.9 78.6 100.7 131.4 153.8
Total Loss (W)
ND Rating 13.5 17.3 29.0 49.5 – 81.5 98.4 – –
Single-Phase
HD Rating 11.7 16.8 27.6 50.5 – 80.7 104.8 – –
<1> Drives with a single-phase power supply input output three-phase power, and cannot run a single-phase motor.
<2> The motor capacity (kW) refers to a Yaskawa 4-pole motor. The rated output current of the drive output amps should be equal to or greater than
the motor rated current.
<3> Input current rating varies depending on the power supply transformer, input reactor, wiring connections, and power supply impedance.
<4> Rated motor capacity is calculated with a rated output voltage of 220 V.
<5> Carrier frequency is set to 2 kHz. Current derating is required in order to raise the carrier frequency.
Note: Differences between Heavy Duty (HD) ratings and Normal Duty (ND) ratings for the drive include rated input and output
current, overload capacity, carrier frequency and current limit. Set parameter C6-01 to “0” for HD or “1” for ND (default).
Specifications
Table A.3 Power Ratings Continued

Item Specification
Three-Phase: CIMR-T2V 0030 0040 0056 0069
Single-Phase: CIMR-TBV <1> – – – –
ND Rating 7.5 11.0 15.0 18.5
Maximum Motor Size Allowed (kW) <2>
HD Rating 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0
ND Rating 37.0 52.0 68.0 80.0
Input Three-Phase
HD Rating 24.0 37.0 52.0 68.0
Input Current
ND Rating – – – –
(A) <3> Single-Phase
HD Rating – – – –
Rated Output Capacity ND Rating 11.4 15.2 21.3 26.3
(kVA) <4> HD Rating 9.5 12.6 17.9 22.9
ND Rating <5> 30.0 40.0 56.0 69.0
Output Current (A)
HD Rating 25.0 <7> 33.0 <7> 47.0 <7> 60.0 <7>
ND Rating: 120% of rated output current for 1 minute
Output
Overload Tolerance HD Rating: 150% of rated output current for 1 minute
Carrier Frequency 2 kHz (user-set, 2 to 15 kHz)
Max Output Voltage (V) Three-phase 200 to 240 V (proportional to input voltage)
Max Output Frequency (Hz) 400 Hz (user-adjustable)
Rated Voltage Three-phase power: Three-phase 200 to 240 V 50/60 Hz
Power Rated Frequency Single-phase power: 200 to 240 V 50/60 Hz
Supply Allowable Voltage Fluctuation -15 to 10%
Harmonic Corrective
DC Reactor Optional
Actions
ND Rating 324.0 375.3 503.1 663.1
Three-Phase
HD Rating 281.4 319.1 461.4 630.6
Total Loss (W)
ND Rating – – – –
Single-Phase
HD Rating – – – –
<1> Drives with single-phase power supply input will output three-phase power and cannot run a single-phase motor.
<3> Input current rating varies depending on the power supply transformer, input reactor, wiring connections, and power supply impedance.
A.3 Three-Phase 400 V Class Drives

Table A.4 Power Ratings
Item Specification
CIMR-T4V 0001 0002 0004 0005 0007 0009 0011
Maximum Applicable Motor Capacity ND Rating 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.0 3.7 5.5
(kW) <1> HD Rating 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.0 3.7
ND Rating 1.2 2.1 4.3 5.9 8.1 9.4 14.0
Input Input Current (A) <2>
HD Rating 1.2 1.8 3.2 4.4 6.0 8.2 10.4
ND Rating <4> 0.9 1.6 3.1 4.1 5.3 6.7 8.5
Output Current (kVA) <3>
HD Rating <5> 0.9 1.4 2.6 3.7 4.2 5.5 7.0
ND Rating <4> 1.2 2.1 4.1 5.4 6.9 8.8 11.1
Output Current (A)
HD Rating <5> 1.2 1.8 3.4 4.8 5.5 7.2 9.2
ND Rating: 120% of rated output current for 60 s
Output
Overload Tolerance HD Rating: 150% of rated output current for 60 s
Carrier Frequency 2 kHz (user-adjustable from 2 to 15 kHz)
Maximum Output Voltage (V) Three-phase: 380 to 480 V (proportional to input voltage)
Maximum Output Frequency (Hz) 400 Hz (user-adjustable)
Rated Voltage Rated Frequency Three-phase: 380 to 480 V 50/60 Hz
Power
Allowable Voltage Fluctuation -15 to 10%
Supply
Harmonic Corrective Actions DC Reactor Optional
ND Rating 19.6 32.4 47.3 66.3 87.0 95.1 127.7
Total Loss (W)
HD Rating 30.6 43.8 60.2 96.9 111.7 117.5 148.7
<2> Input current rating varies depending on the power supply transformer, input reactor, wiring conditions, and power supply impedance.
Specifications
Table A.5 Power Ratings Continued

Item Specification
CIMR-T4V 0018 0023 0031 0038
ND Rating 7.5 11.0 15.0 18.5
Maximum Applicable Motor Capacity (kW) <1>
HD Rating 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0
ND Rating 20.0 24.0 38.0 44.0
Input Input Current (A) <2>
HD Rating 15.0 20.0 29.0 39.0
ND Rating <4> 13.3 17.5 23.6 29.0
Output Current (kVA) <3>
HD Rating <5> 11.3 13.7 18.3 23.6
ND Rating <4> 17.5 23.0 31.0 38.0
Output Current (A)
HD Rating <5> 14.8 18.0 24.0 31.0
ND Rating: 120% of rated output current
for 60 s
Output HD Rating: 150% of rated output current
Overload Tolerance
for 60 s
(Derating may be required for applications
that start and stop frequently)
Carrier Frequency 2 kHz (user-adjustable from 2 to 15 kHz)
Three-phase: 380 to 480 V (proportional to
Maximum Output Voltage (V)
input voltage)
Maximum Output Frequency (Hz) 400 Hz (user-adjustable)
Rated Voltage Rated Frequency Three-phase: 380 to 480 V 50/60 Hz
Power Supply Allowable Voltage Fluctuation -15 to 10%
Harmonic Corrective Actions DC Reactor Optional
ND Rating 259.6 315.2 426.9 458.0
Total Loss (W)
HD Rating 227.7 282.1 369.0 434.5
<2> Input current rating varies depending on the power supply transformer, input reactor, wiring conditions, and power supply impedance.
A.4 Drive Specifications

Note: Perform rotational Auto-Tuning to obtain OLV performance specifications.
Note: For optimum performance life of the drive, install the drive in an environment that meets the environmental conditions.
Item Specification
The following control methods are available:
Control Method Open Loop Vector Control (current vector), V/f Control, and PM Open Loop Vector for
(for use with SPM and IPM)
Frequency Control Range 0.01 to 400 Hz
Digital input: within ±0.01% of the max output frequency (-10 to +50 °C)
Frequency Accuracy
Analog input: within ±0.5% of the max output frequency (25 °C ±10 °C)
Digital inputs: 0.01 Hz
Frequency Setting Resolution
Analog inputs: 1/1000 of maximum output frequency
Output Frequency Calculation
1/220 x Maximum output frequency (E1–04)
Resolution
Main frequency reference: 0 to +10 Vdc (20 kΩ), 4 to 20 mA (250 Ω), 0 to 20 mA
Frequency Setting Signal (250 Ω)
Main speed reference: Pulse Train Input (max 32 kHz)
200%/0.5 Hz (Open Loop Vector Control, HD rating, IM of 3.7 kW or smaller), 50%/6
Starting Torque
Hz (PM Open Loop Vector Control)
1:100 (Open Loop Vector Control), 1:40 (V/f Control), 1:10 (PM Open Loop Vector
Speed Control Range
Control)
Speed Control Accuracy ±0.2% in Open Loop Vector Control <1>
5 Hz (25 °C ±10 °C) in Open Loop Vector Control
Speed Response
(excludes temperature fluctuation when performing Rotational Auto-Tuning)
Torque Limit Open Loop Vector Control only. Adjustable in 4 quadrants.
Accel/Decel Time 0.00 to 6000.0 s (allows four separate settings for accel and decel)
Control Instantaneous Average Decel Torque <2>: 0.1/0.2 kW: over 150%, 0.4/0.75 kW: over
Characteristics 100%, 1.5 kW: over 50%, 2.2 kW and above: over 20%
Braking Torque
Continuous Regen Torque: 20%,
125% with a Braking Resistor Unit <3>: (10% ED) 10 s with an internal braking resistor.
V/f Characteristics User-set program available.
Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru
Speed Search
Over/Undertorque Detection
Torque Limit, Multi-Step Speed (9 steps max)
Accel/Decel Time Switch
S-Curve Accel/Decel
3-Wire Sequence
Rotational Auto-Tuning
Stationary Auto-Tuning of Line-to-Line Resistance
Dwell
Functions Cooling Fan ON/OFF
Slip Compensation
Torque Compensation
Frequency Reference Upper/Lower Limit
DC Injection Braking (start and stop)
PID Control (with Slip Function)
Energy Saving
MEMOBUS/Modbus (RS-485/422 Max 115.2 kbps)
Fault Reset
Specifications
Parameter Copy
Disturb Function
Item Specification
Motor Protection Motor overheat protection via output current sensor
Overcurrent Protection Drives stops when output exceeds 200% of the rated current (Heavy Duty)
Overload Protection A stop command will be entered after operating at 150% for 60 s (Heavy Duty) <4>
Drive stops when DC bus voltage falls below the levels indicated: <5>
Low Voltage Protection 190 V (3-phase 200 V), 160 V (single-phase 200 V), 380 V (3-phase 400 V), 350 V (3-
phase 380 V)
3 selections available: Ride-Thru disabled (stops after 15 ms), time base of 0.5 s, and
continue running as long as the drive control board is powered up. <6>
Protection
Heatsink Overheat Protection Protected by thermistor
Functions
Braking Resistor Overheat
Overheat input signal for braking resistor (Optional ERF-type, 3% ED)
Protection
Stall prevention is available during acceleration, deceleration, and during run. Separate
Stall Prevention settings for each type of stall prevention determine the current level at which stall
prevention is triggered.
Cooling Fan Failure Protection Circuit protection (“fan-lock” sensor)
Ground Protection Electronic circuit protection <7>
DC Bus Charge LED Remains lit until DC bus voltage falls below 50 V
Storage/Installation Area Indoors
-10 to +50 °C (heatsink-cooled drive)
-10 to +50 °C (finless drive)
Ambient Temperature If using the heatsink-cooled drive in temperatures greater than 50 °C and finless drive
in temperature greater than 35 °C, either takes steps to ensure proper airflow around the
unit or derate drive capacity. Refer to Temperature Derating on page 324 for details.
Humidity 95% RH or less with no condensation
Storage Temperature -20 to +60 °C allowed for short-term transport of the product
Altitude 1000 m or less
10 to 20 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
Environment Shock, Impact
20 to 55 Hz: 5.9 m/s2
Install the drive in an area free from:
• oil mist and dust
• metal shavings, oil, water or other foreign materials
• radioactive materials
Surrounding Area • combustible materials
• harmful gases and liquids
• excessive vibration
• chlorides
• direct sunlight
Orientation Install the drive vertically to maintain maximum cooling effects
Two Safe Disable inputs and one EDM output according to ISO13849-1 Cat. 3 PLd,
Safety Regulations and Standards
IEC61508 SIL2; Time from input open to drive output stop is less than 1 ms.
IP20/IP00 heatsink-cooled drive
Protective Enclosure
IP20/IP00 finless drive
CIMR-TBV0001 to 0006: self-cooled
CIMR-TBV0010 to 0012: cooling fan
CIMR-T2V0001 to 0004: self-cooled
Cooling Method
CIMR-T2V0006 to 0069: cooling fan
CIMR-T4V0001 to 0004: self-cooled
CIMR-T4V0005 to 0038: cooling fan
<1> Speed control accuracy varies somewhat according to the type of motor and drive settings.
<2> Instantaneous deceleration torque refers to the torque required to slow the uncoupled motor from 60 Hz in the shortest time possible (this varies
by motor characteristics).
<3> Ensure that Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration is disabled (L3-04 = 0) or set to 3 when using a braking resistor or the Braking
Resistor Unit. The default setting for the stall prevention function will interfere with the braking resistor.
<4> Overload protection may be triggered when operating with 150% of the rated output current if the output frequency is less than 6 Hz.
<5> Parameter settings allow up to 150 V.
<6> A Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru Unit is required for 200/400 V class drives 7.5 kW and less if the application needs to continue running
during a momentary power loss up to 2 seconds.
<7> Ground protection cannot be provided under the following circumstances when a ground fault is likely in the motor windings during run: Low
ground resistance for the motor cable and terminal block; low ground resistance for the motor cable and terminal block; or the drive is powered
up from a ground short.
Note: Drive output is shut off within 1 ms once the Safe Disable input has been triggered.
A.5 Drive Watt Loss Data
A.5 Drive Watt Loss Data

Table A.6 Watt Loss 200 V Class Single-Phase Models
Heavy Duty (Carrier Frequency 8 kHz) Normal Duty (Carrier Frequency 2 kHz)
Model Number
CIMR-T Rated Amps Heatsink Interior Unit Total Loss Rated Amps Heatsink Interior Unit Total Loss
(A) Loss (W) Loss (W) (W) (A) Loss (W) Loss (W) (W)
BV0001 0.8 4.3 7.4 11.7 1.2 5.0 8.5 13.5
BV0002 1.6 7.9 8.9 16.8 1.9 7.6 9.7 17.3
BV0003 3.0 16.1 11.5 27.6 3.3 14.6 14.4 29.0
BV0006 5.0 33.7 16.8 50.5 6.0 30.1 19.4 49.5
BV0010 8.0 54.8 25.9 80.7 9.6 51.7 29.8 81.5
BV0012 11.0 70.7 34.1 104.8 12.0 61.3 37.1 98.4
Table A.7 Watt Loss 200 V Class Three-Phase Models

Model Number
2V0001 0.8 4.3 7.3 11.6 1.2 5.0 8.0 13.0
2V0002 1.6 7.9 8.8 16.7 1.9 7.6 9.5 17.1
2V0004 3.0 16.1 11.5 27.6 3.5 15.8 13.6 29.4
2V0006 5.0 27.4 15.9 43.3 6.0 27.5 17.2 44.7
2V0008 6.9 48.7 22.2 70.9 8.0 44.6 24.0 68.6
2V0010 8.0 54.8 23.8 78.6 9.6 51.7 25.8 77.5
2V0012 11.0 70.7 30.0 100.7 12.0 61.3 30.4 91.7
2V0018 14.0 92.6 38.8 131.4 17.5 89.8 44.1 133.9
2V0020 17.5 110.5 43.3 153.8 19.6 98.7 46.3 145.0
2V0030 25.0 213.3 68.1 281.4 30.0 238.2 85.8 324.0
2V0040 33.0 239.5 79.6 319.1 40.0 266.7 108.6 375.3
2V0056 47.0 347.6 113.8 461.4 56.0 357.9 145.2 503.1
2V0069 60.0 473.9 156.7 630.6 69.0 477.3 185.8 663.1
Table A.8 Watt Loss 400 V Class Three-Phase Models

Model Number
4V0001 1.2 19.2 11.4 30.6 1.2 10.0 9.6 19.6
4V0002 1.8 28.9 14.9 43.8 2.1 18.5 13.9 32.4
4V0004 3.4 42.3 17.9 60.2 4.1 30.5 16.8 47.3
4V0005 4.8 70.7 26.2 96.9 5.4 44.5 21.8 66.3
4V0007 5.5 81.0 30.7 111.7 6.9 58.5 28.5 87.0
4V0009 7.2 84.6 32.9 117.5 8.8 63.7 31.4 95.1
4V0011 9.2 107.2 41.5 148.7 11.1 81.7 46.0 127.7
4V0018 14.8 166.0 61.7 227.7 17.5 181.2 78.4 259.6
4V0023 18.0 207.1 75.0 282.1 23.0 213.4 101.8 315.2
4V0031 24.0 266.9 102.1 369.0 31.0 287.5 139.4 426.9
4V0038 31.0 319.1 115.4 434.5 38.0 319.2 138.8 458.0
Specifications
A.6 Drive Derating Data

Derating allows the drive to operate in conditions above the rated specifications, such as ambient temperature, altitude,
and default carrier frequency. Derating a drive with a rated output current of 10 A down to 8 A, for example, makes it
possible to run the same drive continuously at hotter temperatures.
◆ Carrier Frequency Derating

As the carrier frequency of the drive is increased above the factory setting the drive capacity should be derated according
to Figure A.1.
Figure A.1
Drive Rated
Current
Carrier Frequency Derating
ND
HD
200 V Class:
80% of HD
400 V Class:
60% of HD
0
2 10 (8) 15
Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02)
Figure A.1 Carrier Frequency Derating
◆ Temperature Derating
As the ambient temperature for the drive is increased above the drive specification the drive should be derated.
Additionally parameter L8-35 Installation Method Selection on page 324 should be set according to enclosure type and
mounting method as illustrated in Figure A.2 on page 325.
■ Output Current Derating Due to Ambient Temperature
If the ambient temperature is above the drive specification or if drives are side-by-side mounted in a cabinet, the
parameters L8-12 and L8-35 must be set according to the installation conditions. The output current is derated as shown
in Figure A.2.
No. Name Description Range Def.

Ambient Adjust the drive overload (oL2) protection level when the drive is
L8-12 40 to 60 40 °C
Temperature Setting installed in an environment that exceeds its ambient temperature rating.
0: Heatsink-Cooled Drive
Installation Method 1: Side-by-Side Mounting
L8-35 0 to 3 0
Selection 2: NEMA Type 1 Drive
3: Finless Drive or External Heatsink Installation
Installation Type Temperature Derating

Heatsink-Cooled Drive –10 to 50°C = 100%
NEMA Type 1 Drive –10 to 40°C = 100%. Derating from 100% at 40°C to 85% at 50°C.
Side-by-Side Mounting –10 to 30°C = 100%. Derating from 100% at 30°C to 70% at 50°C.
Finless Drive or External Heatsink Installation –10 to 35°C = 100%. Derating from 100% at 35°C to 80% at 50°C. <1>
<1> To use finless drive or external heatsink installation between –10 to 50°C without current derating,
• Set L8-35 to 0
• Ensure airflow of 0.5 m/s around the drive
Figure A.2
L8-35 = 0 (Heatsink-Cooled Drive)

100 L8-35 = 2
85 (NEMA Type 1 Drive)
80
Drive 70
L8-35 = 3
Rating (Finless Drive or External
(%) 50 Heatsink Installation)
L8-35 = 1
(Side-by-side Mounting)
0 Ambient temp (°C) L8-12

30 35 40 50
Figure A.2 Ambient Temperature and Installation Method Derating
Specifications
Appendix: B
Parameter List
This appendix contains a full listing of all parameters and settings available in the drive.
B.1 UNDERSTANDING THE PARAMETER TABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

B.2 PARAMETER GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
B.3 PARAMETER TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
B.4 CONTROL MODE DEPENDENT PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUES . . . . . . . . . . 375
B.5 V/F PATTERN DEFAULT VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
B.6 DEFAULTS BY DRIVE MODEL SELECTION (O2-04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
B.7 E5-01 (PM MOTOR CODE SELECTION) DEPENDENT PARAMETERS . . . . . . . 385
B.8 C6-02 (CARRIER FREQUENCY SELECTION) DEPENDENT PARAMETERS . . . 388
B.1 Understanding the Parameter Table
B.1 Understanding the Parameter Table

Lists the initial setting when the
drive is first shipped from the
Contains a brief description factory. Note that this setting Lists the register address used
of each parameter and can vary based on the control when running MEMOBUS
the settings available. mode selected for the drive. communications.
Control
Mode Addr.
No. Name Description Range Def. Hex Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
Selects the stopping method when the run command is 0 to 3 0 S S S 182 107
removed.
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop DC Injection Braking at Stop cannot be
b1-03 Stopping Method Selection
2: DC Injection Braking to Stop selected when using Open Loop Vector for
3: Coast with Timer PM motors.
(A new run command is ignored if received before the
timer expires)
Indicates the control modes where each parameter

is available, and whether the setting value for that
parameter can be edited (write) or only viewed
(read).
Parameter
Access Set Up Mode
Setting Mode
Level
Write Read Only Write Read Only
S
Note: For a description of each control mode, refer to The Drive and Programming Modes on page 82. Parameters displaying "S" for
the access level can be both viewed and edited (i.e., both read and write commands are possible).
B.2 Parameter Groups
B.2 Parameter Groups

Parameter Parameter
Name Page Name Page
Group Group
A1 Initialization Parameters 330 L1 Motor Protection 353
A2 User Parameters 330 L2 Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru 354
b1 Operation Mode Selection 331 L3 Stall Prevention 354
b2 DC Injection Braking 332 L4 Speed Detection 354
b3 Speed Search 332 L5 Fault Restart 356
b4 Delay Timers 333 L6 Torque Detection 357
b5 PID Control 333 L7 Torque Limit 358
b6 Dwell Function 335 L8 Drive Protection 358
b8 Energy Saving 335 n1 Hunting Prevention 360
Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR)
C1 Acceleration and Deceleration Times 336 n2 360
Tuning
C2 S-Curve Characteristics 336 n3 Overexcitation Deceleration 361
C3 Slip Compensation 337 n8 PM Motor Control Tuning 361
C4 Torque Compensation 337 n9 Hardware Settings 362
C5 Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR) 338 o1 Digital Operator Display Selection 363
C6 Carrier Frequency 338 o2 Digital Operator Keypad Functions 363
d1 Frequency Reference 339 o3 Copy Function 364
d2 Frequency Upper/Lower Limits 339 o4 Maintenance Monitor Settings 364
d7 Offset Frequency 339 S1 Disturb Function 365
E1 V/f Pattern for Motor 1 340 S2 Frequency Reference Gain Settings 365
E2 Motor 1 Parameters 340 S3 Braking Transistor and V/f Ratio Gain 365
E3 V/f Characteristics for Motor 2 341 S4 KEB Mode Selection 365
E4 Motor 2 Parameters 342 S5 KEB Accel/Decel Setting 366
E5 PM Motor Settings 342 S6 Power KEB Function 367
F1 PG Speed Control Card Settings 343 T1 Motor Tuning 367
F6 Communication Option Card 344 U1 Operation Status Monitors 368
H1 Multi-Function Digital Inputs 346 U2 Fault Trace 370
H2 Multi-Function Digital Outputs 348 U3 Fault History 370
H3 Multi-Function Analog Inputs 350 U4 Maintenance Monitors 371
H4 Multi-Function Analog Outputs 351 U5 PID Monitors 373
MEMOBUS/Modbus Serial
H5 351 U6 Operation Status Monitors 373
Communication
H6 Pulse Train Input/Output 352 U9 KEB Voltage Monitors 374
Parameter List
B.3 Parameter Table
B.3 Parameter Table

◆ A: Initialization Parameters
The A parameter group creates the operating environment for the drive. This includes the parameter Access Level, Motor
Control Method, Password, User Parameters and more.
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
No. Name Description Range Def. Hex
V/f OL P
V M
A1: Initialization Parameters
Use A1 parameters to configure the basic environment for drive operation.
0: English
1: Japanese
2: German
A1-00
3: French 0
<15> Language Selection 0 to 7 A A A 100 108
4: Italian <35>
<18>
5: Spanish
6: Portuguese
7: Chinese
Selects which parameters are accessible via the digital operator.
0: Operation only
A1-01
Access Level Selection 1: User Parameters (access to a set of parameters selected by the 0 to 2 2 A A A 101H 108
<15>
user)
2: Advanced Access Level
Selects the Control Method of the drive.
Auto-Tuning must be performed when selecting A1-02 = 2, 5.
A1-02 Control Method
0: V/f Control without PG 0, 2, 5 0 S S S 102 108
<18> Selection
2: Open Loop Vector (OLV)
5: PM Open Loop Vector (PM)
Resets all parameters to factory default settings. (Initializes the 0 to 5550 0 A A A 103 109
drive then returns A1-03 to 0)
0: No Initialize
1110: User Initialize The following parameters are not reset when
A1-03 Initialize Parameters (First set user parameter values must be stored using parameter the performing initialization: A1-00, A1-02,
o2-03) A1-07, E1-03, F6-08, L8-35, o2-04, and o2-
2220: 2-Wire Initialization 09.
3330: 3-Wire Initialization
5550: oPE04 Error Reset
A1-04 Password 0 to 9999 0 A A A 104 110
0 to 9999 0 A A A 105 110
When the value set into A1-04 does not match the value set into This parameter is hidden from view.
A1-05, parameters A1-01 through A1-03, and A2-01 through To access A1-05, first display A1-04.
A1-05 Password Setting A2-32 cannot be changed. Then press the STOP key while –
holding down the up arrow key.
Parameter A1-05 will appear.
A2: User Parameters
Use A2 parameters to program the drive.
Parameters that were recently edited are listed here. The user can
A2-01 to User Parameters 1 to A1-00 to 106 to
also select parameters to appear here for quick access. – A A A 111
A2-32 32 o2-08 125
Parameters will be stored here for quick access when A1-01 = 1.
0: Parameters A2-01 through A2-32 are reserved for the user to
create a list of User Parameters.
User Parameter
A2-33 1: Save history of recently viewed parameters. Recently edited 0,1 1 A A A 126 111
Automatic Selection
parameters will be saved to A2-17 through A2-32 for quick
access.
<15> Parameter can be changed during run.
<18> Parameter setting value is not reset to the default value during drive initialization, A1-03 = 1110, 2220, 3330.
B.3 Parameter Table
◆ b: Application
Application parameters configure the Run Command Source, DC Injection Braking, Speed Search, Timer functions, PID
control, the Dwell function, Energy Savings and a variety of other application-related settings.
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
b1: Operation Mode Selection
Use b1 parameters to configure the operation mode.
Selects the frequency reference input source.
0: Operator - Digital preset speed d1-01 to d1-08, d1-17.
Frequency Reference 1: Terminals - Analog input terminal A1 or A2.
b1-01 0 to 4 1 S S S 180 113
Source 1 2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option PCB
4: Pulse Input (Terminal RP)
Selects the run command input source.
0: Operator - RUN and STOP keys on the digital operator.
b1-02 Run Command Source 1 1: Digital input terminals 0 to 3 1 S S S 181 115
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option PCB
Selects the stopping method when the run command is 0 to 3 0 S S S 182 116
removed.
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop DC Injection Braking at Stop cannot be
b1-03 Stopping Method Selection
2: DC Injection Braking to Stop selected when using Open Loop Vector for
3: Coast with Timer PM motors.
(A new run command is ignored if received before the
timer expires)
Permits or prohibits reverse operation.
b1-04 Reverse Operation Selection 0: Reverse enabled. 0,1 0 A A A 183 118
1: Reverse disabled.
Determines the operation when the Run command source is
switched from LOCAL to REMOTE or between Run
source 1 and 2 while an external Run command is active at
LOCAL/REMOTE Run the new source.
b1-07 0,1 0 A A A 186 118
Selection 0: External Run command has to be cycled at the new
source to be activated.
1: External Run command at new source is accepted
immediately.
Run Command Selection 0: Run command accepted only in the operation menu.
b1-08 while in Programming 1: Run command accepted in all menus. 0 to 2 0 A A A 187 119
Mode 2: Prohibit entering Programming Mode during Run
Sets the phase order for drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2
and W/T3.
b1-14 Phase Order Selection 0,1 0 A A A 1C3 119
0: Standard
1: Switch phase order
Selects the frequency reference input source.
0: Operator - Digital preset speed d1-01 to d1-08, d1-17.
Frequency Reference 1: Terminals - Analog input terminal A1 or A2
b1-15 0 to 4 0 A A A 1C4 119
Source 2 2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option PCB
4: Pulse Input (Terminal RP)
Parameter List
Selects the run command input source.

0: Operator - RUN and STOP keys on the digital operator.
b1-16 Run Command Source 2 1: Digital input terminals 0 to 3 0 A A A 1C5 119
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option PCB
Determines the operation when a Run command is active at B
power up of the drive.
b1-17 Run Command at Power Up 0,1 0 A A A 1C6 120
0: Run command not issued, needs to be cycled
1: Run command issued, motor operation start
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
b2: DC Injection Braking
Use b2 parameters to configure DC Injection Braking operation
Sets the frequency at which DC Injection Braking starts
DC Injection Braking Start 0.5
b2-01 when Ramp to Stop (b1-03 = 0) is selected. If b2-01< E1- 0.0 to 10.0 A A A 189 120
Frequency Hz
09, DC Injection Braking starts at E1-09.
b2-02 DC Injection Braking Sets the DC Injection Braking current as a percentage of
0 to 75 50% A A A 18A 121
<15> Current the drive rated current.
b2-03 DC Injection Braking Time Sets DC Injection Braking time at start. Disabled when set 0.00 to 0.00 s
A A A 18B 121
<15> at Start to 0.00 seconds. 10.00 <2>
Sets DC Injection Braking time at stop.

When b1-03 = 2, actual DC Injection time is calculated as
follows:
b2-04 DC Injection Braking Time 0.00 to 0.50 s
(b2-04) x 10 x (Output Freq)/(E1-04). When b1-03 = 0, this A A − 18C 121
<15> at Stop 10.00 <2>
parameter sets the amount of DC Injection time applied to
the motor at the end of the decel ramp. Disabled when set to
0.00.
Magnetic Flux Sets the magnetic flux compensation as a percentage
b2-08 0 to 1000 0% − A − 190 121
Compensation Value of the no-load current value (E2-03).
Set as a percentage of the drive rated current.
DC Injection Braking An input terminal set for DC Injection Braking 2 (H1-
b2-10 0 to 100 50% A A − 1FB 121
Current 2 = 60) will make the drive use the current level set in b2-10
for DC Injection.
Short Circuit Brake Time at Sets the time for Short-Circuit brake operation at start. 0.00 to
b2-12 0.00 s A − A 1BA 121
Start Disabled when set to 0.00. <22> 25.50
Sets the Short-Circuit brake operation time at stop. Used to
Short Circuit Brake Time at 0.00 to
b2-13 stop a motor rotating due to inertia. Disabled when set to 0.50 s A − A 1BB 122
Stop 25.50
0.00 seconds. <22>
b3: Speed Search
Use b3 parameters to configure Speed Search function operation.
Enables/disables the Speed Search function at start.
0: Disabled - Speed Search is not automatically performed
Speed Search Selection at
b3-01 at start. 0 to 1 0 A A A 191 125
Start
1: Enabled - Speed Search is automatically performed at
start.
Sets the current level at which the speed is assumed to be
b3-02 Speed Search Deactivation 120%
detected and Speed Search is ended. Set as a percentage of 0 to 200 A A − 192 125
<15> Current <2>
the drive rated current.
Sets the time constant used to reduce the output frequency
b3-03 Speed Search Deceleration
during Speed Search. Related to a change from max. output 0.1 to 10.0 2.0 s A A − 193 125
<15> Time
frequency to 0.
In order to lower the output current when performing Speed
b3-04 V/f Gain during Speed Search, this parameter determines what percentage the V/f
10 to 100 100% A − − 194 126
<15> Search ratio should be reduced. The output voltage during Speed
Search becomes V/f x b3-04.
Delays the Speed Search operation after a momentary
b3-05
Speed Search Delay Time power loss to allow time for an external output contactor to 0.0 to 100 0.2 s A A A 195 126
<15>
close.
Sets the current injected to the motor at the beginning of
b3-06 Output Current 1 during
Estimation type Speed Search. Set as a factor of the motor 0.0 to 2.0 <33> A A − 196 126
<15> Speed Search
rated current.
Sets the gain which is applied to the speed detected by
b3-10 Speed Search Detection Speed Estimation Speed Search before the motor is 1.00 to
1.05 A A − 19A 126
<15> Compensation Gain reaccelerated. Increase this setting if ov occurs when 1.20
performing Speed Search.
Selects if Speed Search detects the motor rotation direction
Bi-Directional Speed Search during Speed Search.
b3-14 0,1 0 A A − 19E 126
Selection 0: Disabled–Frequency reference direction used
1: Enabled–Detected direction used
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
b3-17 Speed Search Restart Sets the Speed Search restart current level as a percentage
0 to 200 150% A A − 1F0 127
<15> Current Level of the drive rated current.
b3-18 Speed Search Restart Sets the time in seconds for Speed Search restart to be 0.00 to
0.10 s A A − 1F1 127
<15> Detection Time detected. 1.00
Number of Speed Search Sets the number of restarts possible for Speed Search
b3-19 0 to 10 3 A A − 1F2 127
Restarts restart operations.
Sets the Speed Search detection mode.
Speed Search Method
b3-24 0: Current Detection Type 0,1 0 A A − 1C0 127
Selection
1: Speed Estimation Type
b3-25
Speed Search Wait Time Sets the wait time before Speed Search restarts. 0 to 30.0 0.5 s A A A 1C8 127
<15>
b4: Delay Timers

Use b4 parameters to configure timer function operation.
Used in conjunction with a multi-function digital input
(H1- = 18) and a multi-function digital output (H2-
Timer Function On-Delay 0.0 to
b4-01 = 12) programmed for the timer function. This sets the 0.0 s A A A 1A3 127
Time 300.0
amount of time between digital input closure and digital
output activation.
Used in conjunction with a multi-function digital input
(H1- = 18) and a multi-function digital output
Timer Function Off-Delay 0.0 to
b4-02 programmed for the timer function. This sets the amount of 0.0 s A A A 1A4 127
Time 300.0
time the output remains activated after the digital input is
opened.
b5: PID Control
Use b5 parameters to configure the PID control drive function.
Sets the PID control mode.
0: Disabled
1: Enable (PID output = freq. ref., PID input is D-
controlled)
b5-01 PID Function Setting 2: (PID output = freq. ref., PID feedback is D-controlled) 0 to 4 0 A A A 1A5 131
3: Enable (PID output added to freq. ref., PID input is D-
controlled)
4: Enable (PID output added to freq. ref., PID feedback is
D-controlled)
b5-02 Proportional Gain Setting Sets the proportional gain of the PID controller. A setting of 0.00 to
1.00 A A A 1A6 131
<15> (P) 0.00 disables P control. 25.00
b5-03 Sets the integral time for the PID controller. A setting of 0.0 0.0 to
Integral Time Setting (I) 1.0 s A A A 1A7 131
<15> s disables integral control. 360.0
b5-04 0.0 to 100.0
Integral Limit Setting Sets the maximum output possible from the integrator. A A A 1A8 131
<15> 100.0 %
b5-05 Sets D control derivative time. A setting of 0.00 s disables 0.00 to
Derivative Time (D) 0.00 s A A A 1A9 132
<15> derivative control. 10.00
b5-06 Sets the maximum output possible from the entire PID 0.0 to 100.0
PID Output Limit A A A 1AA 132
<15> controller. 100.0 %
b5-07 -100.0 to
PID Offset Adjustment Applies an offset to the PID controller output. 0.0% A A A 1AB 132
<15> +100.0
b5-08 PID Primary Delay Time Sets the amount of time for the filter on the output of the 0.00 to
0.00 s A A A 1AC 132
<15> Constant PID controller. 10.00
Sets the PID controller output direction.
b5-09 PID Output Level Selection 0: Normal Output (direct acting) 0,1 0 A A A 1AD 132
Parameter List
1: Reverse Output (reverse acting)

b5-10 0.00 to
PID Output Gain Setting Sets the gain applied to the PID output. 1.00 A A A 1AE 132
<15> 25.00
Sets the drive operation with negative PID output.
0: Drive stops with negative PID output
b5-11
PID Output Reverse
1: Rotation direction reverses with negative PID output. 0,1 0 A A A 1AF 132
B
Selection
When using setting 1 make sure, reverse operation is
permitted by parameter b1-04.
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
Configures the PID feedback loss detection. With all setting
a digital output programmed for H2-01, H2-02, H2-03 =
3E/3F (PID feedback low/PID feedback high) is operated
when the detection condition becomes true.
0: Digital output only.
1: Feedback loss detected when PID enabled. Alarm
output, operation is continued without triggering a fault
contact.
PID Feedback Loss
b5-12 2: Feedback loss detected when PID enabled. Fault output, 0 to 5 0 A A A 1B0 133
Detection Selection
operation is stopped and a fault contact is triggered.
3: Feedback loss detection even when PID is disabled by
digital input. No alarm/fault output.
4: PID Feedback error detection even when PID is disabled
by digital input. An alarm is triggered and the drive
continues to run.
5: PID Feedback error detection even when PID is disabled
by digital input. Fault is triggered and output is shut off.
b5-13 PID Feedback Low
Sets the PID feedback loss detection level. 0 to 100 0% A A A 1B1 134
<15> Detection Level
b5-14 PID Feedback Loss Sets the PID feedback loss detection delay time in terms of
0.0 to 25.5 1.0 s A A A 1B2 134
<15> Detection Time seconds.
b5-15 PID Sleep Function Start Sets the sleep function start frequency. 0.0 to 0.0
A A A 1B3 135
<15> Level Note: Also enabled when PID is not active. 400.0 Hz
b5-16
PID Sleep Delay Time Sets the sleep function delay time. 0.0 to 25.5 0.0 s A A A 1B4 135
<15>
b5-17
PID Accel/Decel Time Applies an accel/decel time to the PID setpoint. 0 to 255 0s A A A 1B5 135
<15>
Selects b5-19 as PID setpoint value.

b5-18 PID Setpoint Selection 0: Disabled 0,1 0 A A A 1DC 135
1: Enabled, b5-19 becomes PID target
b5-19 0.00 to
PID Setpoint Value Sets the PID target value when b5-18 = 1. 0.00% A A A 1DD 136
<15> 100.00
Sets the units for b5-19, and for parameter monitors U5-01
(PID Feedback) and U5-04 (PID Setpoint).
0: 0.01Hz units
b5-20 PID Setpoint Scaling 0 to 3 1 A A A 1E2 136
1: 0.01% units (100% = max output frequency)
2: r/min (number of motor poles must be set up)
3: User-set (set to b5-38 and b5-39)
b5-34 -100.0 to
PID Output Lower Limit Sets the minimum output possible from the PID controller. 0.0% A A A 19F 136
<15> +100.0
b5-35 Limits the PID control input (deviation signal). Acts as a 0.0 to 1000.
PID Input Limit A A A 1A0 136
<15> bipolar limit. 1000.0 0%
b5-36 PID Feedback High
Sets the PID feedback high detection level. 0 to 100 100% A A A 1A1 134
<15> Detection Level
b5-37 PID Feedback High
Sets the PID feedback high level detection delay time. 0.0 to 25.5 1.0 s A A A 1A2 134
<15> Detection Time
Sets the display value of U5-01 and U5-04 when the
maximum frequency is output. Changeable only if b5-20 =
b5-38 PID Setpoint User Display 1 to 60000 <4> A A A 1FE 136
3.
0 to 60000: User-Set Display if b5-20 = 3
Sets the number of digits of U5-01 and U5-04. Changeable
only if b5-20 = 3.
0: No decimal places
b5-39 PID Setpoint Display Digits 0 to 3 <4> A A A 1FF 136
1: One decimal places
2: Two decimal places
3: Three decimal places
0: Display the frequency reference (U1-01) after PID
Frequency Reference compensation has been added.
b5-40 0, 1 0 O O O 17F 137
Monitor Content during PID 1: Display the frequency reference (U1-01) before PID
compensation has been added.
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
b6: Dwell Function
Use b6 parameters to configure dwell function operation.
The Dwell function is used to temporarily hold the 0.0 to 0.0
b6-01 Dwell Reference at Start A A A 1B6 137
frequency when driving a motor with a heavy load. 400.0 Hz
b6-02 Dwell Time at Start Parameters b6-01 and b6-02 set the frequency to hold and 0.0 to 10.0 0.0 s A A A 1B7 137
the time to maintain that frequency at start. 0.0 to 0.0
b6-03 Dwell Reference at Stop Parameters b6-03 and b6-04 set the frequency to hold and A A A 1B8 137
400.0 Hz
the time to maintain that frequency at stop.
Run command
OFF
ON
b6-04 Dwell Time at Stop Output

Frequency 0.0 to 10.0 0.0 s A A A 1B9 137
b6-01 b6-03
Time
b6-02 b6-04
b8: Energy Saving

Use b8 parameters to configure the energy saving/conservation drive function.
Selects the Energy Savings function.
Energy Saving Control
b8-01 0: Disabled 0,1 0 A A − 1CC 138
Selection
1: Enabled
b8-02 Sets energy savings control gain when in Open Loop Vector
Energy Saving Gain 0.0 to 10.0 0.7 − A − 1CD 138
<15> Control.
b8-03 Energy Saving Control Sets energy saving control filter time constant when in 0.00 to
0.50 s − A − 1CE 138
<15> Filter Time Constant Open Loop Vector Control. 10.00
Energy Saving Coefficient Sets the Energy Saving coefficient and is used to fine 0.0 to <33>
b8-04 A − − 1CF 138
Value adjustments in V/f Control. 655.00 <28>
Sets a filter time for the Power Detection used by Energy

b8-05 Power Detection Filter Time 0 to 2000 20 ms A − − 1D0 138
Savings in V/f Control.
Sets the limit for the voltage search operation performed by
Search Operation Voltage
b8-06 Energy Savings in V/f Control. Set as a percentage of the 0 to 100 0% A − − 1D1 139
Limit
motor base voltage. Disabled when set to 0%.
<2> Default setting is determine by the control mode set in parameter A1-02. The value shown is for A1-02 = 0-V/f Control.
<4> Default setting is dependent on parameter b5-20, PID Setpoint Scaling.
<22> A coasting motor may require a braking resistor circuit to bring the motor to a stop in the required time.
<28> Parameter value is changed if E2-11 is manuallychanged or changed by Auto-Tuning.
<33> Default setting is determined by the drive model selection set in parameter o2-04 and C6-01, Drive Duty Selection.
Parameter List
B.3 Parameter Table
◆ C: Tuning
C parameters are used to adjust the acceleration and deceleration times, S-curves, slip and torque compensation functions
and carrier frequency selections.
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
C1: Acceleration and Deceleration Times
Use C1 parameters to configure motor acceleration and deceleration.
C1-01 Sets the time to accelerate from 0 to maximum
Acceleration Time 1 S S S 200 140
<15> frequency.
C1-02 Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to
Deceleration Time 1 S S S 201 140
<15> 0.
Sets the time to accelerate from 0 to maximum
C1-03
Acceleration Time 2 frequency when Accel/Decel times 2 are selected by a A A A 202 140
<15>
digital input.
Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to
C1-04
Deceleration Time 2 0 when Accel/Decel times 2 are selected by a digital A A A 203 140
<15>
input.
0.0 to
C1-05 Acceleration Time 3 (Motor 6000.0 10.0 s
frequency when Accel/Decel times 3 are selected by a A A A 204 140
<15> 2 Accel Time 1) <5>
digital input.
C1-06 Deceleration Time 3 (Motor
0 when Accel/Decel times 3 are selected by a digital A A A 205 140
<15> 2 Decel Time 1)
input.
C1-07 Acceleration Time 4 (Motor
frequency when Accel/Decel times 4 are selected by a A A A 206 140
<15> 2 Accel Time 2)
digital input.
C1-08 Deceleration Time 4 (Motor
0 when Accel/Decel times 4 are selected by a digital A A A 207 140
<15> 2 Decel Time 2)
input.
0.0 to
0 for the multi-function input fast-stop function.
C1-09 Fast-Stop Time 6000.0 10.0 s A A A 208 141
Note: This parameter is also used by selecting “Fast-
<5>
Stop” as a Stop Method when a fault is detected.
Sets the resolution of C1-01 to C1-09.
Accel/Decel Time Setting
C1-10 0: 0.01 s (0.00 to 600.00 s) 0, 1 1 A A A 209 141
Units
1: 0.1 s (0.0 to 6000.0 s)
Sets the frequency for automatic acceleration/
deceleration switching.
Accel/Decel Time Below set frequency: Accel/Decel Time 4 0.0 to 400.0
C1-11 0.0 Hz A A A 20A 142
Switching Frequency Above set frequency: Accel/Decel Time 1 Hz
The multi-function input “Accel/Decel Time 1” or
“Accel/Decel Time 2” take priority.
C2: S-Curve Characteristics
Use C2 parameters to configure S-curve operation.
C2-01 S-Curve Characteristic at The S-curve can be controlled in the four points shown 0.00 to 0.20 s
A A A 20B 142
<15> Accel Start below. 10.00 <2>
C2-02 S-Curve Characteristic at

0.00 to 10.0 0.20 s A A A 20C 142
<15> Accel End Run ON OFF
command
C2-03 S-Curve Characteristic at Output
0.00 to 10.0 0.20 s A A A 20D 142
<15> Decel Start frequency C2-02 C2-03
C2-04
C2-01
C2-04 S-Curve Characteristic at Time
0.00 to 10.0 0.00 s A A A 20E 142
<15> Decel End S-curve is used to further soften the starting and
stopping ramp. The longer the S-curve time, the softer
the starting and stopping ramp.
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
C3: Slip Compensation
Use C3 parameters to configure the slip compensation function.
Sets the slip compensation gain. Decides for what
C3-01 amount the output frequency is boosted in order to 0.0
Slip Compensation Gain 0.0 to 2.5 A A − 20F 143
<15> compensate the slip. <2>
Note: Adjustment is not normally required.
Adjusts the slip compensation function delay time.
Decrease the setting when the slip compensation
2000
C3-02 Slip Compensation Primary response is too slow, increase it when the speed is not
0 to 10000 ms A A − 210 143
<15> Delay Time stable.
<2>
Disabled when Simple V/f Control with PG (H6-01 = 3)
is used.
Sets the slip compensation upper limit. Set as a
C3-03 Slip Compensation Limit percentage of motor rated slip (E2-02). Disabled when 0 to 250 200% A A − 211 143
Simple V/f Control with PG (H6-01 = 3) is used.
Selects slip compensation during regenerative operation.
0: Disabled
Slip Compensation
1: Enabled
C3-04 Selection during 0,1 0 A A − 212 143
Using the Slip Compensation function during
Regeneration
regeneration may require a braking option to handle
momentary increasing regenerative energy.
Selects if the motor magnetic flux is reduced during
Output Voltage Limit output voltage saturation.
C3-05 0,1 0 − A − 213 144
Operation Selection 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
C4: Torque Compensation
Use C4 parameters to configure Torque Compensation function.
V/f Control: Sets the gain for the automatic torque
(voltage) boost function and helps to produce better
starting torque.
Increase this setting when using a long motor cable or
when the motor is significantly smaller than the drive
C4-01 1.00
Torque Compensation Gain capacity. 0.00 to 2.50 A A A 215 144
<16> <2>
Decrease this setting when motor oscillation occurs. Set
the value so that the current at low speed does not
exceeds the drives rated current.
Open Loop Vector: Sets the torque compensation
function gain. Normally no change is required.
Sets the torque compensation filter time.
Torque Compensation Increase this setting when motor oscillation occurs. 200 ms
C4-02 0 to 60000 A A A 216 144
Primary Delay Time Reduce the setting if there is not enough response from <2>
the motor.
Torque Compensation at Sets torque compensation at forward start as a
C4-03 0.0 to 200.0 0.0% − A − 217 145
Forward Start percentage of motor torque.
Torque Compensation at Sets torque compensation at reverse start as a percentage -200.0 to
C4-04 0.0% − A − 218 145
Reverse Start of motor torque. 0.0
Sets the time constant for torque compensation at
Torque Compensation Time
C4-05 forward start and reverse start (C4-03 and C4-04). The 0 to 200 10 ms – A – 219 145
Constant
filter is disabled if the time is set to 4 ms or less.
Sets the torque compensation time 2. When an ov fault
occurs with sudden load changes or at the and of an
Torque Compensation
C4-06 acceleration, increase the setting. 0 to 10000 150 ms – A – 21AH 145
Parameter List
Primary Delay Time 2

Note: Adjustment is not normally required. If adjusted
then AFR time 2 (n2-03) should be adjusted too.
C5: Automatic Speed Regulator
Use C5 parameters to configure the Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR).
C5 parameters are available only when using V/f Control with Simple PG Feedback (H6-01 = 3).
C5-01 Sets the proportional gain of the speed control loop 0.00 to
B
ASR Proportional Gain 1 0.20 A – – 21B 146
<15> (ASR). 300.00
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
C5-02 0.000 to
ASR Integral Time 1 Sets the integral time of the speed control loop (ASR). 0.200 s A – – 21C 146
<15> 10.000
C5-03 Sets the speed control gain 2 of the speed control loop 0.00 to
ASR Proportional Gain 2 0.20 A − − 21D 147
<15> (ASR). 300.00
C5-04 0.000 to
ASR Integral Time 2 Sets the integral time 2 of the speed control loop (ASR). 0.500 s A 21E 147
<15> 10.000
– –
Sets the upper limit for the speed control loop (ASR) as
C5-05 ASR Limit 0.0 to 20.0 5.0% A 21F 147
a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04).
C6: Carrier Frequency
Use C6 parameters to configure the carrier frequency drive settings.
Selects the load rating for the drive.
0: Heavy Duty (HD) for constant torque applications.
C6-01 Duty Mode Selection 1: Normal Duty (ND) for variable torque applications. 0,1 1 S S S 223 147
This setting affects the Rated output current and
overload tolerance of the drive.
Selects the carrier frequency
1: 2.0 kHz
2: 5.0 kHz
3: 8.0 kHz
C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection 1 to 6, F <3> S S S 224 147
4: 10.0 kHz
5: 12.5 kHz
6: 15.0 kHz
F: User defined (determined by C6-03 through C6-05)
Carrier Frequency Upper These parameters are available when C6-02 = F.
C6-03 1.0 to 15.0 <7> A A A 225 148
Limit Open Loop Vector: C6-03 defines the fixed carrier
frequency.
V/f Control: C6-03 and C6-04 set upper and lower limits
for the carrier frequency.
carrier frequency
C6-03
C6-04 output frequency

Carrier Frequency Lower × (C6-05) × K
C6-04 output 0.4 to 15.0 <7> A – – 226 148
Limit (V/f Control only) E1-04 frequency
max output
frequency
The coefficient K depends on C6-03:
C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K = 3
10.0 kHz > C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz: K = 2
5.0 kHz > C6-03: K = 1
When C6-05 ≤ 6, C6-04 is disabled (makes the carrier
frequency C6-03 value).
Carrier Frequency
Sets the relationship of output frequency to carrier
C6-05 Proportional Gain (V/f 00 to 99 <7> A – – 227 148
frequency when C6-02 = F.
Control only)
Determines what type of PWM modulation to use.
0: 2 phase, 3 phase modulation
C6-06 PWM Method 1: 2 phase modulation 0 to 2 <7> A A A 228 149
2: 3 phase modulation
C6-06 is enabled only when C6-02 = F.
<1> Default setting is determine by the control mode set in parameter A1-02. The value shown is for OLV (A1-02 = 2).
<3> Default setting value is dependent on parameters o2-04, Drive Model Selection, A1-02, Control Method Selection and C6-01, Normal/Heavy
Duty selection.
<5> Setting range value is dependent on parameter C1-10, Accel/Decel Time Setting Units. When C1-10 = 0 (units of 0.01 seconds), the setting
range becomes 0.00 to 600.00 seconds.
<7> Default setting value is dependent on parameter C6-02, Carrier Frequency Selection.
<11> Default setting is determined by the drive model selection set in parameter o2-04.
<16> Parameter cannot be changed during run when parameter A1-02 = 5-PM OLV Control.
B.3 Parameter Table
◆ d: References
Reference parameters are used to set the various frequency reference values during operation.
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
d1: Frequency Reference
Use d1 parameters to configure the drive frequency reference.
d1-01 0.00
Frequency Reference 1 Frequency reference S S S 280 150
<15> Hz
d1-02 Frequency reference when digital input "Multi-Step Speed 0.00
Frequency Reference 2 S S S 281 150
<15> Reference 1" (H1- = 3) is on. Hz
<15> Reference 2” (H1- = 4) is on. Hz
d1-04 Frequency reference when digital inputs "Multi-Step Speed 0.00
<15> Reference 1, 2" (H1- = 3 and 4) are on. Hz
Frequency Reference 5 0.00 to A A A 284 150
<15> Reference 3" (H1- = 5) is on. Hz
400.00 Hz
Frequency Reference 6 <10> <13> A A A 285 150
<15> Reference 1, 3 " (H1- = 3 and 5) are on. Hz
Frequency Reference 7 A A A 286 150
<15> Reference 2, 3" (H1- = 4 and 5) are on. Hz
d1-08 Frequency reference when multi-function input "Multi-Step 0.00
Frequency Reference 8 A A A 287 150
<15> speed reference 1, 2, 3" (H1- = 3, 4, 5) are on. Hz
Frequency reference when digital inputs "Jog Frequency
d1-17 Reference", "Forward Jog" or "Reverse Jog." are on. "Jog 6.00
Jog Frequency Reference S S S 292 150
<15> Frequency Reference" has priority over "Multi-Step Speed Hz
Reference 1 to 8”.
d2: Frequency Upper and Lower Limits
Use d2 parameters to configure the frequency reference limits.
Sets the frequency reference upper limit as a percentage of
Frequency Reference maximum output frequency (E1-04). Output speed is limited 0.0 to 100.0
d2-01 A A A 289 151
Upper Limit to this value even if the frequency reference is higher. This 110.0 %
limit applies to all frequency reference sources.
Sets the frequency reference lower limit as a percentage of
d2-02 Frequency Reference maximum output frequency (E1-04). Output speed is limited 0.0 to
0.0% A A A 28A 152
<15> Lower Limit to this value even if the frequency reference is lower. This 110.0
Sets the minimum frequency reference lower limit if the
d2-03 Master Speed Reference frequency reference is input using an analog input. Set as a 0.0 to
0.0% A A A 293 152
<15> Lower Limit percentage of maximum output frequency (E1-04). The 110.0
higher of both values d2-01 and d2-03 will be the lower limit.
Sets the frequency reference 2 upper limit as a percentage of
d2-04 Frequency Reference 2 maximum output frequency (E1-04). Output speed is limited 0.0 to 100.0
A A A 2A8 152
<15> Upper Limit to this value even if the frequency reference 2 is higher. This 110.0 %
Sets the frequency reference 2 lower limit as a percentage of
d2-05 Frequency Reference 2 maximum output frequency (E1-04). Output speed is limited 0.0 to
0.0% A A A 2A9 152
<15> Lower Limit to this value even if the frequency reference 2 is lower. This 110.0
d7: Offset Frequency
Parameter List
Use d7 parameters to set the offset frequency.

d7-01 Added to the frequency reference when the digital input -100.0 to
Offset Frequency 1 0.0% A A A 2B2 153
<15> “Frequency Offset 1” (H1- = 44) is switched on. +100.0
d7-02 Added to the frequency reference when the digital input -100.0 to
Offset Frequency 2 0.0% A A A 2B3 153
d7-03
Offset Frequency 3
Added to the frequency reference when the digital input -100.0 to
0.0% A A A 2B4 153 B
<10> Default setting value is dependent on parameter o1-03, Digital Operator Display Selection.
<13> Range upper limit is dependent on parameters E1-04, Maximum Output Frequency, and d2-01, Frequency Reference Upper Limit.
B.3 Parameter Table
◆ E: Motor Parameters
Control
Mode
No. Name Description Range Def. Addr. Hex Pg.
V/f OL PM
V
E1: V/f Pattern for Motor 1
Use E1 parameters to set V/f characteristics for the motor.
This parameter must be set to the power supply voltage.
WARNING! Drive input voltage (not motor voltage)
E1-01 Input Voltage
must be set in E1-01 for the protective features of the 155 to 255 200 V S S S 300 154
<17> Setting
drive to function properly. failure to do so may result in
equipment damage and/or death or personal injury.
V/f Pattern F: Custom V/f. E1-04 through E1-13 settings define the
E1-03 F F A A − 302 154
Selection V/f pattern.
40.0 to 60.0 Hz
Maximum Output
E1-04 400.0 <2> <9> S S S 303 154
Frequency
<14> <37>
E1-05 200.0 V
Maximum Voltage To set linear V/f characteristics, set the same values for 0.0 to 255.0 S S S 304 154
<17> <2> <9>
E1-07 and E1-09. In this case, the setting for E1-08 will
60.0 Hz
be disregarded. When E1-13 = 0.0 V, then the drive uses 0.0 to E1-
E1-06 Base Frequency <2> <9> S S S 305 154
the value set to E1-05 to control the voltage level. Ensure 04
<37>
that the four frequencies are set according to these rules:
Middle Output 0.0 to E1- 3.0 Hz
E1-07 A A − 306 154
Frequency E1-04 ≥ E1-06> E1-07 ≥ E1-09 04 <2> <37>
E1-08 Middle Output 16.0 V

0.0 to 255.0 A A − 307 154
<17> Frequency Voltage VACrms Out(V) <2>
E1-05
E1-12 1.5 Hz
Minimum Output 0.0 to E1-
E1-09 <2> <9> S S S 308 154
Frequency E1-13 04
<37>
E1-10 Minimum Output 9.0 V

E1-08 0.0 to 255.0 A A − 309 154
<17> Frequency Voltage <2>
E1-11 Middle Output 0.0 to E1- 0.0 Hz

E1-10 A A − 30A 154
<19> Frequency 2 04 <2>
E1-09 E1-07 E1-06 E1-11 E1-04
Middle Output Frequency (Hz)
E1-12 0.0 V
Frequency Voltage 0.0 to 255.0 A A − 30B 154
<17> <19> <2>
2
E1-13 0.0 V
Base Voltage 0.0 to 255.0 A S − 30C 154
<17> <2>
E2: Motor Parameters

Use E2 parameters to set motor-related data.
10 to 200%
Sets the motor nameplate full load current in amperes of drive
E2-01 Motor Rated
(A). rated <33> S S − 30E 155
<34> Current
Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. current
<20>
Sets the motor rated slip in Hertz. 0.00 to

E2-02 Motor Rated Slip <33> A A − 30F 156
Automatically set during rotational Auto-Tuning. 20.00
Motor No-Load Sets the magnetizing current of the motor in Ampere. 0 to less
E2-03 <33> A A − 310 156
Current Automatically set during rotational Auto-Tuning. than E2-01
Number of Motor Sets the number of motor poles. Automatically set during
E2-04 2 to 48 4 poles A A − 311 156
Poles Auto-Tuning.
0.000 to
Motor Line-to-Line Sets the phase-to-phase motor resistance in ohms.
E2-05 65.000 <33> A A − 312 156
Resistance Automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
<23>
Sets the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as

Motor Leakage
E2-06 a percentage of motor rated voltage. 0.0 to 40.0 <33> A A − 313 156
Inductance
Automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
Motor Iron-Core
Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 50% of
E2-07 Saturation 0.00 to 0.50 0.50% − A − 314 157
magnetic flux. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
Coefficient 1
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
Mode
V/f OL PM
V
Motor Iron-Core
Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 75% of [E2-07] to
E2-08 Saturation 0.75% − A − 315 157
magnetic flux. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. 0.75
Coefficient 2
Sets the motor mechanical loss as a percentage of motor
rated power (kW). Adjust in the following circumstances:
Motor Mechanical
E2-09 When there is a large amount of torque loss due to motor 0.0 to 10.0 0.0% − A − 316 157
Loss
bearing friction.
When there is a large amount of torque loss.
Motor Iron Loss
E2-10 for Torque Sets the motor iron loss in watts (W). 0 to 65535 <33> A − − 317 157
Compensation
Sets the motor rated power in kilowatts (kW).
0.00 to
E2-11 Motor Rated Power Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. (1 HP = 0.746 <33> S S − 318 157
650.00
kW).
Motor Iron-Core Set to the motor iron saturation coefficient at 130% of
E2-12 Saturation magnetic flux. 1.30 to 5.00 1.30 − A − 328 157
Coefficient 3 Automatically set during rotational Auto-Tuning.
E3: V/f Characteristics for Motor 2
Use E3 parameters to set the V/f pattern for a second motor.
0: V/f Control
Motor 2 Control 2: Open Loop Vector (OLV)
E3-01 0 or 2 0 A A − 319 158
Mode Selection Motor 2 cannot be a PM motor. Motor overload (oL1)
protection for motor 2 is set using parameter L1-01.
Motor 2 Max 40.0 to 60.0 Hz
E3-04 A A − 31A 158
Output Frequency 400.0 <30> <37>
E3-05 Motor 2 Max 200.0 V

0.0 to 255.0 A A − 31B 158
<17> Voltage These parameters set the V/f pattern for motor 2. <30>
Motor 2 Base To set linear V/f characteristics, set the same values for 0.0 to 60.0 Hz
E3-06 A A − 31C 158
Frequency E3-07 and E3-09. In this case, the setting for E3-08 will be [E3-04] <30> <37>
Motor 2 Mid disregarded. Ensure that the four frequencies are set 0.0 to 3.0 Hz
E3-07 A A − 31D 158
Output Frequency according to these rules or oPE10 fault will occur: [E3-04] <30> <37>
Motor 2 Mid
E3-08 E3-04 ≥ E3-06 > E3-07 > E3-09 16.0 V
Output Frequency 0.0 to 255.0 A A − 31E 158
<17> <30>
Voltage
Motor 2 Minimum 0.0 to 1.5 Hz
E3-09 VACrms Out (V)
A A − 31F 158
Output Frequency E3-05 [E3-04] <30> <37>
E3-12
Motor 2 Minimum
E3-10 E3-13 12.0 V
Output Frequency 0.0 to 255.0 A A − 320 158
<17> <30>
Voltage
Motor 2 Mid E3-08 0.0 to
E3-11
Output Frequency [E3-04] 0.0 Hz A A − 345 158
<19>
2 E3-10
<30>
Motor 2 Mid E3-09 E3-07 E3-06 E3-11 E3-04

E3-12 Frequency (Hz) 0.0 to 255.0
Output Frequency 0.0 V A A − 346 158
<17> <29> <17>
Voltage 2
E3-13 Motor 2 Base 0.0 to 255.0
0.0 V A S − 347 158
<17> Voltage <17>
E4: Motor 2 Parameters

Use E4 parameters to control a second motor operating on the same drive.
Parameter List
10 to 200%
Motor 2 Rated Sets the motor 2 nameplate full load current in amperes of drive
E4-01 <33> A A − 321 159
Current (A). This value is automatically set during Auto-Tuning. rated
current
Sets the motor 2 rated slip in Hz. Automatically set 0.00 to
E4-02 Motor 2 Rated Slip <33> A A − 322 159
during Auto-Tuning. 20.00
B
0 to
Motor 2 Rated No- Sets the magnetizing current of motor 2 in Ampere.
E4-03 [E4-01] <33> A A − 323 159
Load Current Automatically set during Rotational Auto-Tuning.
<20>
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
Mode
V/f OL PM
V
Motor 2 Motor Sets the number of poles of motor 2. This value is
E4-04 2 to 48 4 poles A A − 324 159
Poles automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
0.000 to
Motor 2 Line-to- Sets the phase-to-phase resistance of motor 2 in ohms.
E4-05 65.000 <33> A A − 325 159
Line Resistance Automatically during Auto-Tuning.
<23>
Sets the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as

Motor 2 Leakage
E4-06 a percentage of rated voltage of motor 2. Automatically 0.0 to 40.0 <33> A A − 326 160
Inductance
set during Auto-Tuning.
E4-10 Motor 2 Iron Loss Sets the motor iron loss in watts. 0 to 65535 <33> Α − − 340 160
Motor 2 Rated Sets the motor rated capacity in kW. Automatically set 0.00 to
E4-11 <33> A A − 327 160
Power during Auto-Tuning. 650.00
Motor 2 Slip Sets the slip compensation gain for motor 2. The function
E4-14 0.0
Compensation is the same as C3-01 for motor 1. Refer to C3-01: Slip 0.0 to 2.5 A A − 341 160
<15> <30>
Gain Compensation Gain on page 143.
Motor 2 Torque Sets the torque compensation gain for motor 2. The
E4-15
Compensation function is the same as C4-01 for motor 1. Refer to C4- 1.00 to 2.50 1.00 A A − 341 160
<15>
Gain 01: Torque Compensation Gain on page 144.
E5: PM Motor Settings
Enter the Yaskawa motor code for the PM motor being
used. Various motor parameters are automatically set
based on the value of this parameter.
Note: Set to FFFF when using a specialized, custom, or
non-Yaskawa motor. For all other motors:
0000
E5-01 PM Motor Code 0000 to
Motor Voltage Class
<11> <24> − − S 329 160
<18> Selection and Capacity
FFFF
0: Pico Motor 0: 1800 r/min Series
(SMRA Series) 1: 3600 r/min Series
1: Derated Torque for IPM 2: 1750 r/min Series
Motors 3: 1450 r/min Series
(SSR 1 Series) 4: 1150 r/min Series
F: Special Motor
All motor parameters are reinitialized to factory settings

when this parameter is set.
E5-02
Motor Rated Power Sets the rated capacity of the motor. 0.10 to 18.5 <9> − − S 32A 161
<18>
10 to 200%
of drive
E5-03 Motor Rated
Sets the motor rated current in amps. rated <9> − − S 32B 161
<18> Current
current
<20>
E5-04 Number of Motor

Sets the number of motor poles. 2 to 48 <9> − − S 32C 161
<18> Poles
E5-05 Motor Stator Set the resistance for each motor phase in units of 0.000 to
<9> − − S 32D 161
<18> Resistance 0.001 Ω. 65.000
E5-06 Motor d-Axis 0.00 to
Sets the d axis inductance in units of 0.01 mH. <9> − − S 32E 161
<18> Inductance 300.00
E5-07 Motor q-Axis 0.00 to
Sets the q axis inductance in units of 0.01 mH. <9> − − S 32F 162
<18> Inductance 600.00
Set the induced phase peak voltage in units of 0.1 mV
(rad/s) [electrical angle].
Set this parameter when using a Yaskawa SSR1 series
E5-09 Motor Induction PM motor with derate torque, or a Yaskawa SST4 series 0.0 to
<9> − − S 331 162
<18> Voltage Constant 1 motor with constant torque. 2000.0
When setting this parameter, E5-24 should be set to 0. An
alarm will be triggered if both E5-09 and E5-24 are set to
0, or if neither parameter is set to 0.
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
Mode
V/f OL PM
V
Set the induced phase-to-phase rms voltage in units of 0.1
mV/(r/min) [mechanical angle].
Set this parameter when using a Yaskawa SMRA Series
SPM Motor.
E5-24 Motor Induction When setting this parameter, E5-09 should be set to 0. An 0.0 to
<9> − − S 353 162
<18> Voltage Constant 2 alarm will be triggered if both E5-09 and E5-24 are set to 2000.0
0, or if neither parameter is set to 0.
If E5-03 (Motor Rated Current) is set to 0, however, then
an alarm will not be triggered when both E5-09 and E5-
24 are set to 0.
<9> Default setting is determined by the motor code set to parameter E5-01.
<14> Upper limit of the setting range is determined by the rated current for motor 2 set to E4-01.
<17> Values shown here are for 200 V class drives. Double the value when using a 400 V class drive.
<19> Parameter ignored when E1-11, Motor 1 Mid Output Frequency 2, and E1-12, Motor 1 Mid Output Frequency Voltage 2, are set to 0.0.
<20> Setting units vary by the maximum allowable motor capacity, which is determined by C6-01 and o2-04. Drives up to 11 kW display a two-
digit value, while drives 11 kW and larger display a single-digit value.
<23> Setting range becomes 0.00 to 130.00 for drives 0.2 kW and smaller.
<24> If using a Yaskawa SMRA Series SPM Motor, the default setting is 1800 r/min.
<29> Parameter ignored when E3-11, Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency 2, and E3-12, Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency Voltage 2, are set to 0.
<30> Default setting depends on the control mode for motor 2 set in parameter E3-01. The given value is for V/f Control.
<34> The motor rated current must be set higher than the motor no-load current (E2-01 > E2-03).
page 376.
◆ F: Options
F parameters are used to program the drive for PG feedback and to function with option cards.
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
F1: PG Speed Control Card Settings
Use F1 parameters to set up the drive for V/f Control with Simple PG Feedback. These parameters are enabled only when H6-01 = 03
Sets stopping method when a PG open circuit fault (PGO)
occurs. Refer to parameter F1-14.
0: Ramp to Stop - Decelerate to stop using the active
deceleration time.
F1-02 PG 1 Pulses Per Revolution 0 to 3 1 A − − 381 163
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-stop - Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time
in C1-09.
3: Alarm only - Drive continues operation.
Sets the stopping method when an overspeed (OS) fault
occurs. Refer to F1-08 and F1-09.
0: Ramp to stop - Decelerate to stop using the active
Operation Selection at deceleration time.
F1-03 0 to 3 1 A − − 382 163
Overspeed (oS) 1: Coast to stop
Parameter List
in C1-09.
3: Alarm Only - Drive continues operation.
Sets the stopping method when a speed deviation (DEV)
fault occurs. Refer to F1-10 and F1-11.
0: Ramp to stop - Decelerate to stop using the active
Operation Selection at deceleration time.
F1-04
Deviation (dEv) 1: Coast to stop
0 to 3 3 A − − 383 163 B
in C1-09.
3: Alarm only - Drive continues operation.
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
Sets the speed feedback level which has to be exceeded for
the time set in F1-09 before an OS fault will occur.
F1-08 Overspeed Detection Level 0 to 120 115% A − − 387 163
Set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-
04).
Sets the time in seconds for which the speed feedback has
Overspeed Detection Delay
F1-09 to exceed the overspeed detection level F1-08 before an OS 0.0 to 2.0 1.0 A − − 388 163
Time
fault will occur.
Sets the allowable deviation between motor speed and
frequency reference before a speed deviation fault (DEv) is
Excessive Speed Deviation
F1-10 triggered. 0 to 50 10% A − − 389 164
Detection Level
Set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-
04).
Sets the time in seconds for which a deviation between
Excessive Speed Deviation motor speed and frequency reference has to exceed the 0.0 to
F1-11 0.5 s A − − 38A 164
Detection Delay Time speed deviation detection level F1-10 before a DEV fault 10.0
will occur.
PG Open-Circuit Detection Sets the time for which no PG pulses must be detected 0.0 to
F1-14 2.0 s A − − 38D 164
Time before a PG Open (PGO) fault is triggered. 10.0
F6: Communication Option Card
Use F6 parameters to program the drive for serial communication.
Selects the operation after a communications error
occurred.
Communications Error 0: Ramp to stop using current accel/decel time
F6-01 0 to 3 1 A A A 3A2 164
operation Selection 1: Coast to stop
2: Fast-stop using C1-09
3: Alarm only
Sets when an external fault from a comm option is
External Fault from Comm. detected.
F6-02 0 or 1 0 A A A 3A3 164
Option Detection Selection 0: Always detected
1: Detection during Run only
Selects the operation after an external fault set by a
communication option (EF0).
External Fault from Comm. 0: Ramp to stop using current accel/decel time
F6-03 0 to 3 1 A A A 3A4 164
Option Operation Selection 1: Coast to stop
3: Alarm only
NetRef/ComRef Function 0: Multi-step reference disabled (same as F7)
F6-07 0, 1 0 A A A 3A8 164
Preselection Capability 1: Multi-step reference enabled (same as V7)
0: Communication-related parameters (F6-) are not
F6-08 reset when the drive is initialized using A1-03.
Comm. Parameter Reset 0 to 1 0 A A A 36A 165
<18> 1: Reset all communication-related parameters (F6-)
when the drive is initialized using A1-03.
F6-10 CC-Link Node Address Sets the node address if a CC-Link is installed. 0 to 63 0 A A A 3E6 −
0: 156 Kbps
1: 625 Kbps
CC-Link Communication
F6-11 2: 2.5 Mbps 0 to 4 0 A A A 3E7 −
Speed
3: 5 Mbps
4: 10 Mbps
Selects if a BUS fault can be automatically reset.
F6-14 bUS Error Auto Reset 0: Disabled 0 or 1 0 A A A 3BB −
1: Enabled
PROFIBUS-DP Node
F6-30 Sets the node address for a PROFIBUS. 0 to 125 0 A A A 3CB −
Address
Selects the operation when a "Clear Mode" command is
PROFIBUS-DP Clear Mode received.
F6-31 0 or 1 0 A A A 3CC −
Selection 0: Resets drive operation.
1: Maintains the previous operation state.
PROFIBUS-DP Data 0: PPO Type
F6-32 0 or 1 0 A A A 3CD −
Format Selection 1: Conventional
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
CANopen Node ID
F6-35 Sets the Node ID for a CANopen. <47> 99 A A A 3D0 −
Selection
0: Auto-adjust
1: 10 kbps
2: 20 kbps
3: 50 kbps
CANopen Communication
F6-36 4: 125 kbps 0 to 8 <48> A A A 3D1 −
Speed
5: 250 kbps
6: 500 kbps
7: 800 kbps
8: 1 Mbps
F6-50 DeviceNet MAC Address Selects the drives MAC address for DeviceNet. 0 to 64 0 A A A 3C1 −
0: 125 kbps
1: 250 kbps
Device Net
F6-51 2: 500 kbps 0 to 64 0 A A A 3C2 −
Communications Speed
3: Adjustable from Network
4: Detect automatically
F6-52 DeviceNet PCA Setting I/O Polled Consuming Assembly Data Instance 0 to 255 21 A A A 3C3 −
F6-53 DeviceNet PPA Setting I/O Polled Producing Assembly Data Instance 0 to 255 71 A A A 3C4 −
Selects if a EF0 fault is detected when no data are received
DeviceNet Idle Mode Fault from the master.
F6-54 0 or 1 0 A A A 3C5 −
Detection 0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Used to verify the baud rate running on the network.
DeviceNet Baud Rate 0: 125 kbps
F6-55 0 to 2 0 A A A 3C6 −
Monitor 1: 250 kbps
2: 500 kbps
Sets the scaling factor for the speed monitor in DeviceNet
F6-56 DeviceNet Speed Scaling -15 to 15 0 A A A 3D7 −
Class ID 2AH Object.
Sets the scaling factor for the output current monitor in
F6-57 DeviceNet Current Scaling -15 to 15 0 A A A 3D8 −
DeviceNet Class ID 2AH Object.
Sets the scaling factor for the torque monitor in DeviceNet
F6-58 DeviceNet Torque Scaling -15 to 15 0 A A A 3D9 −
Sets the scaling factor for the power monitor in DeviceNet
F6-59 DeviceNet Power Scaling -15 to 15 0 A A A 3DA −
Sets the scaling factor for the voltage monitor in DeviceNet
F6-60 DeviceNet Voltage Scaling -15 to 15 0 A A A 3DB −
Sets the scaling factor for the time monitor in DeviceNet
F6-61 DeviceNet Time Scaling -15 to 15 0 A A A 3DC −
DeviceNet Heartbeat
F6-62 Sets the heartbeat interval for DeviceNet communications. 0 to 10 0 A A A 3DD −
Interval
DeviceNet Network MAC
F6-63 Used to verify the MAC ID the drive has been assigned. 0 to 63 0 A A A 3DE −
ID
F6-64 to 3DF to
−
F6-69 Dynamic Assembly 0 to 3E4
Reserved for Dynamic I/O Assembly Parameters. 0 A A A
F6-70 to Parameters (Reserved) FFFFH 3C7,
−
F6-71 3C8
<47> Setting range varies by the software version the drive is running.
Software versions 6002 or later: 0 to 126
Software versions 6001 or earlier: 0 to 127
Parameter List
<48> Default setting is determined by the initialize mode the drive is set for (o2-09).
B.3 Parameter Table
◆ H Parameters: Multi-Function Terminals

H parameters assign functions to the multi-function input and output terminals.
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
H1: Multi-Function Digital Inputs
H1 parameters to assign functions to the multi-function digital input terminals. Unused terminals should be set to "F".
Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S1 Function 40 (F)
H1-01 A A A 438 166
Selection 1 to 7E <12>
Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S2 Function <26> 41 (F)

H1-02 A A A 439 166
Selection <12>
Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S3 Function

H1-03 Assigns a function to the multi- 24 A A A 400 166
Selection
function digital inputs.
Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S4 Function
H1-04 Refer to H1 Multi-Function Digital 14 A A A 401 166
Selection
Input Selections on page 346 for a
Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S5 Function description of setting values. 0 to 7E 3 (0)
H1-05 A A A 402 166
Selection <26> <12>
Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S6 Function 4 (3)

H1-06 A A A 403 166
Selection <12>
Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S7 Function 6 (4)

H1-07 A A A 404 166
Selection <12>
<12> Parenthetical value is the default when parameter A1-03 = 3330 3-Wire Initialization.
<26> The availability of certain functions depends on the control method used.
H1 Multi-Function Digital Inputs Settings

Control
H1- Mode
Function Description Pg.
Setting
V/f OL PM
V
Closed: Reverse rotation (only if the drive is set up for 3-Wire
0 3-Wire Sequence O O O 167
sequence)
Open: REMOTE, Reference 1 or 2 (b1-01 and b1-02, or b1-15 and b1-
1 LOCAL/REMOTE Selection 16) O O O 167
Closed: LOCAL, LED operator is run and reference source
Open: Run and frequency reference source 1 (b1-01 and b1-02)
2 External Reference 1/2 O O O 167
Closed: Run and frequency reference source 2 (b1-15 and b1-16)
3 Multi-Step Speed Reference 1 O O O 168
4 Multi-Step Speed Reference 2 Used to select Multi-Step Speeds set in d1-01 to d1-08 O O O 168
5 Multi-Step Speed Reference 3 O O O 168
Open: Selected speed reference
6 Jog Reference Selection Closed: Jog Frequency reference (d1-17). Jog has priority over all other O O O 168
reference sources.
7 Accel/Decel Time 1 Used to switch between Accel/Decel. Time 1/2 O O O 168
Open: Normal operation
8 Baseblock Command (N.O.) O O O 168
Closed: No drive output
Open: No drive output
9 Baseblock Command (N.C.) O O O 168
Closed: The drive pauses during acceleration or deceleration and
A Accel/Decel Ramp Hold O O O 168
maintains the output frequency.
B Drive Overheat Alarm (oH2) Closed: Displays an oH2 alarm O O O 168
Open: Terminal A1/A2 disabled
C Terminal A1/A2 Enable O O O 168
Closed: Terminal A1/A2 enabled
Select this setting when not using the terminal or when using the
F Not used O O O 169
terminal in a pass-through mode.
Open: Maintains the current frequency reference
10 Up Command O O O 169
Closed: Increases or decreases the current frequency reference.
Ensure that the increase and decrease commands are set in conjunction
11 Down Command O O O 169
with one another.
B.3 Parameter Table

Control
H1- Mode
Setting
V/f OL PM
V
12 Forward Jog Closed: Runs forward at the Jog Frequency d1-17. O O O 170
13 Reverse Jog Closed: Runs reverse at the Jog Frequency d1-17. O O O 170
Closed: Resets faults if the cause is cleared and the Run command is
14 Fault Reset O O O 170
removed.
Closed: Decelerates at the Fast-Stop time C1-09.
15 Fast-Stop (N.O.) O O O 170
To restart the Fast-Stop input must be released and Run must be cycled.
Open: Motor 1 (E1-, E2-)
16 Motor 2 Selection O O – 171
Closed: Motor 2 (E3-, E4-)
17 Fast-stop (N.C.) Open: Decelerates according to C1-09 (Fast-stop Time) O O O 170
Set the timer delay using parameters b4-01 and b4-02.
18 Timer Function Input Ensure this function is set in conjunction with the multi-function output O O O 171
timer (H2- = 12).
19 PID Disable Closed: PID control disabled O O O 171
1A Accel/Decel Time Selection 2 Switches Accel/Decel times. O O O 171
Open: Parameters can not be edited. (except U1-01 if reference source is
1B Program Lockout set for operator) O O O 171
Closed: Parameters may be edited and saved.
20: N.O., Always Detected, Ramp To Stop
21: N.C., Always Detected, Ramp To Stop
22: N.O., During Run, Ramp To Stop
23: N.C., During Run, Ramp To Stop
24: N.O., Always Detected, Coast To Stop
25: N.C., Always Detected, Coast To Stop
26: N.O., During Run, Coast To Stop
27: N.C., During Run, Coast To Stop
20 to 2F External Fault O O O 172
28: N.O., Always Detected, Fast-stop
29: N.C., Always Detected, Fast-stop
2A: N.O., During Run, Fast-stop
2B: N.C., During Run, Fast-stop
2C: N.O., Always Detected, Alarm Only (continue running)
2D: N.C., Always Detected, Alarm Only (continue running)
2E: N.O., During Run, Alarm Only (continue running)
2F: N.C., During Run, Alarm Only (continue running)
30 PID Integral Reset Closed: Resets the PID control integral value. O O O 172
31 PID Integral Hold Closed: Maintains the current PID control integral value. O O O 172
34 PID Soft Starter Closed: Disables the PID soft starter b5-17. O O O 172
35 PID Input Switch Closed: Inverses the PID input signal O O O 172
Open: Stop
Forward Run Command (2-Wire
40 Closed: Forward run O O O 172
sequence)
Note: Can not be set together with Settings 42 or 43.
Open: Stop
Reverse Run Command (2-Wire
41 Closed: Reverse run O O O 172
sequence)
Open: Stop
42 Run Command (2-Wire sequence 2) Closed: Run O O O 173
Open: Forward
FWD/REV Command (2-Wire
43 Closed: Reverse O O O 173
sequence 2)
Parameter List

44 Offset Frequency 1 Addition Closed: Adds d7-01 to the frequency reference. O O O 173
47 <49> Node Setup Closed: Set up the node address. O O O 173
Open: Disturb function output is active.
B
50 Disturb Function Cancel O O O 173
Closed: Cancels the Disturb function.
Closed: Assigns the same accel/decel times to all motors in the line so
51 Synchronous Accel/Decel O O O 173
that they reach the desired frequency at the same time.
B.3 Parameter Table

Control
H1- Mode
Setting
V/f OL PM
V
53 Energy Saving On/Off Closed: Enables the Energy Saving function. O O × 173
59 DC Injection Braking 1 Command Closed: Triggers DC Injection Braking 1 (b2-02) O O × 173
60 DC Injection Braking 2 Command Closed: Triggers DC Injection Braking 2 (b2-10) O O – –
Closed: Activates Current Detection Speed Search from the maximum
61 External Speed Search Command 1 O O O 174
output frequency (E1-04).
Closed: Activates Current Detection Speed Search from the frequency
62 External Speed Search Command 2 O O O 174
reference.
Open: KEB 1 enabled
65 KEB 1 (N.C.) O O O 174
66 KEB 1 (N.O.) O O O 174
Closed: KEB 1 enabled
67 Communications Test Mode Tests the MEMOBUS/Modbus RS-485/422 interface. O – – 174
7C Short-Circuit Braking (N.O.) O – O 174
Closed: Short-Circuit Braking
Open: Short-Circuit Braking
7D Short-Circuit Braking (N.C.) O – O 174
7E Forward/Reverse Detection Direction of rotation detection (for V/f with Simple PG Feedback) O O O 175
<49> This setting is valid from software versions 6000 or later.
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
H2: Multi-Function Digital Outputs
Use H2 parameters to assign functions to the multi-function digital outputs.
Terminal MA, MB and MC Function
H2-01 E A A A 40B 175
Selection (relay)
Refer to H2 Multi-Function Digital Output
Terminal P1-PC Function Selection (open- 0 to 152
H2-02 Settings on page 348 for a description of 0 A A A 40C 175
collector) <26>
setting values.
Terminal P2-PC Function Selection (open-
H2-03 2 A A A 40D 175
collector)
Determines the unit for the watt hour output
signal (H2- = 39). If a digital output is
set to this function, a 200 ms pulse signal is
output when the what hour counter increases
according to the unit selected. Intended to
drive a counter, meter or PLC for logging
H2-06 Watt Hour Output Unit Selection kWh. 0 to 4 0 A A A 437 184
0: 0.1 kWh units

1: 1 kWh units
2: 10 kWh units
3: 100 kWh units
4: 1000 kWh units
H2 Multi-Function Digital Outputs Settings

Control
H2- Mode
Setting
V/f OL P
V M
0 During Run Closed: A Run command is active or voltage is output. O O O 175
1 Zero Speed Closed: Output frequency is 0. O O O 176
Closed: Output frequency equals the speed reference (plus or minus the hysteresis
2 Speed Agree 1 O O O 176
set to L4-02).
B.3 Parameter Table

Control
H2- Mode
Setting
V/f OL P
V M
Closed: Output frequency and speed reference equal the value in L4-01 (plus or
3 User Set Speed Agree 1 O O O 176
minus the hysteresis of L4-02).
Closed: Output frequency is less than or equal to the value in L4-01 with hysteresis
4 Frequency Detection 1 O O O 177
determined by L4-02.
Closed: Output frequency is greater than or equal to the value in L4-01, with
hysteresis determined by L4-02.
Closed: Drive Ready. The drive is powered up, not in a fault state, and in the Drive
6 Drive Ready O O O 178
mode.
7 DC Bus Undervoltage Closed: DC bus voltage is below the Uv trip level set in L2-05. O O O 178
8 During Baseblock (N.O.) Closed: There is no output voltage O O O 178
Open: External Reference 1 or 2 supplies the frequency reference
9 Frequency Reference Source O O O 178
Closed: Digital operator supplies the frequency reference.
Open: External Reference 1 or 2 supplies the Run command
A Run Command Source O O O 178
Closed: Digital operator supplies the Run command.
Closed: Output current/torque exceeds the torque value set in parameter L6-02 for
B Torque Detection 1 (N.O.) O O O 179
longer than the time set in parameter L6-03.
C Frequency Reference Loss Closed: Loss of the analog frequency reference detected. Enabled when L4-05 = 1. O O O 179
Closed: Braking resistor or transistor is overheated or faulted out. This selection
D Braking Resistor Fault O O O 179
requires that braking resistor protection parameter be set for ERF (L8-01 = “1”).
E Fault Closed: Fault occurred (other than CPF00 and CPF01). O O O 179
Set this value when the terminal is not used, or when using the terminal in the pass-
F Not used/Through Mode O O O 179
through mode.
10 Minor Fault Closed: An alarm is triggered. O O O 179
11 Reset Command Active Closed: Reset command to the drive is active. O O O 179
Timer output, controlled by b4-01 and b4-02. Used in conjunction with the digital
12 Timer Output O O O 179
input (H1- = 18 “timer function”).
13 Speed Agree 2 Closed: When drive output frequency equals the frequency reference +/- L4-04. O O O 179
Closed: When the drive output frequency is equal to the value in L4-03 (plus or
14 User Set Speed Agree 2 O O O 180
minus L4-04).
Closed: When the drive output frequency is less than or equal to the value in L4-03
with the hysteresis determined by L4-04.
Closed: When the output frequency is greater than or equal to the value in L4-03
with the hysteresis determined by L4-04.
Open: When the output current/torque exceeds the value set in parameter L6-02 for
17 Torque Detection 1 (N.C.) O O O 179
more time than is set in parameter L6-03.
Closed: When the output current/torque exceeds the value set in parameter L6-05
18 Torque Detection 2 (N.O.) O O O 179
for more time than is set in parameter L6-06.
Open: Output current/torque exceeds the value set in parameter L6-05 for more
19 Torque Detection 2 (N.C.) O O O 179
time than is set in parameter L6-06.
1A Reverse Direction Closed: Drive is running in the reverse direction. O O O 182
1B During Baseblock (N.C.) Open: Drive is in Baseblock condition. Output is disabled. O O O 182
1C Motor 2 Selection Closed: Motor 2 is selected by a digital input (H1- = 16) O O − 182
1E Restart Enabled Closed: An automatic restart is performed O O O 182
1F Overload Alarm oL1 Closed: oL1 is at 90% of its trip point or greater. O O O 182
20 oH Pre alarm Closed: Heatsink temperature exceeds the parameter L8-02 value. O O O 182
30 During Torque Limit Closed: When the torque limit has been reached. − O − 182
Parameter List
Closed: Frequency is output

37 During Frequency Output Open: Operation stopped, Baseblock, DC Injection Braking, or Initial Excitation is O O O 182
being performed.
Output units are determined by H2-06, outputs 200 ms pulse for each incremented
39 Watt Hour Pulse Output O O O 183
kWh count.
3C LOCAL/REMOTE Status
Closed: LOCAL
O O O 183
B
Open: REMOTE
3D Speed Search Closed: Speed search is being executed. O O O 183
B.3 Parameter Table

Control
H2- Mode
Setting
V/f OL P
V M
Closed: PID Feedback Loss Low.
3E PID Feedback Loss Low PID feedback value is below the level set to b5-13 for longer than the time set in b5- O O O 183
14.
Closed: PID Feedback Loss High.
3F PID Feedback Loss High PID feedback value exceeds the level set to b5-36 for longer than the time set to b5- O O O 183
37.
4A KEB Operation Closed: KEB is being performed. O O O 183
4B Short-Circuit Brake Closed: Short-Circuit Braking is active. O − O 183
4C During Fast-stop Closed: Fast-stop command is entered O O O 183
Closed: Disturb waveform acceleration
50 Disturb increase O O O 183
Open: Disturb waveform deceleration
Closed: Disturb waveform is active
51 During Disturb output O O O 183
Open: Disturb waveform is not being output
52 Uv during KEB Closed: DC bus voltage has fallen below L2-05 during KEB O O O 184
Reserved Output Switching
100 to 10D O O O
of 0 to D
10F to 11B O O O
of F to 1B
11E to 120 O O O
of 1E to 20
137, 138 O O O
of 37 and 38
13C to 13E O O O
of 3C to 3E Inverts the output switching of the multi-function output functions.
184
Reserved Output Switching Set the last two digits of 1 to reverse the output signal of that specific function.
14A × × O
of 4A
14B, 14C O O O
of 4B and 4C
14F O O O
of 4F
150, 151 O × ×
of 50 and 51
152 O O O
of 52
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
H3: Multi-Function Analog Inputs
Use H3 parameters to set the multi-function analog input terminals.
Sets the input level for terminal A1.
Terminal A1 Signal Level
H3-01 0: 0 to +10 V (lower limit) 0, 1 0 A A A 410 184
Selection
1: 0 to +10 V (no lower limit)
Sets the function of terminal A1.
Terminal A1 Function 0 to 1F
H3-02 When terminal A1 is not used or is used as a through 0 A A A 434 185
Selection <26>
terminal, this parameter must be set to “F”.
H3-03 Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-02 when 10 -999.9 to 100.0
Terminal A1 Gain Setting A A A 411 185
<15> V is input at terminal A1. 999.9 %
H3-04 Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-02 when 0 -999.9 to
Terminal A1 Bias Setting 0.0% A A A 412 185
<15> V is input at terminal A1. 999.9
Sets the input signal level for terminal A2. 0 to 3 2 A A A 417 186
0: 0 to +10 V (with lower limit)
Terminal A2 Signal Level Switch between current or voltage inputs by
H3-09 1: 0 to +10 V (no lower limit)
Selection using DIP switch S1-2 switch on the terminal
2: 4 to 20 mA
3: 0 to 20 mA board.
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
Sets the function of terminal A2.
Terminal A2 Function 0 to 1F
H3-10 When terminal A2 is not used or is used as a through 0 A A A 418 187
Selection <26>
terminal, this parameter must be set to “F”.
H3-11 Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-10 when 10 -999.9 to 100.0
Terminal A2 Gain Setting A A A 419 187
<15> V (20 mA) is input at terminal A2. 999.9 %
H3-12 Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-10 when 0 -999.9 to
Terminal A2 Bias Setting 0.0% A A A 41A 187
<15> V (0 or 4 mA) is input at terminal A2. 999.9
Analog Input Filter Time Sets the primary delay filter time constant for terminals 0.00 to 0.03
H3-13 A A A 41B 187
Constant A1 and A2. Used for noise filtering. 2.00 s
<26> The availability of certain parameters depends on the control method used.
H3 Multi-Function Analog Inputs Settings

Control
H3- Mode
Function Maximum Input Level Possible Pg.
Setting
V/f OL PM
V
Max output frequency (E1-04).
0 Frequency Bias O O O 187
Same value can be set using H3-02 and H3-10.
1 Frequency Gain 10 V = 100% O O O 188
Auxiliary Frequency Reference (used as a
2 Maximum output frequency (E1-04) O O O 188
Multi-Step Speed 2)
4 Output Voltage Bias Voltage class (200 V or 400 V) O – − 188
Open Loop Vector: Motor rated torque
7 Overtorque/Undertorque Detection Level O O O 188
V/f Control: Drive rated current
B PID Feedback 10 V = 100% O O O 188
C PID Set Point 10 V = 100% O O O 188
E Motor Temperature (PTC input) 10 V = 100.00% O O O 188
F Not used/Through Mode – O O O 188
10 FWD Torque Limit Motor rated torque − O − 189
11 REV Torque Limit Motor rated torque − O − 189
12 Regenerative Torque Limit Motor rated torque − O − 189
15 FWD/REV Torque Limit Motor rated torque − O − 189
16 Differential PID Feedback 10 V = 100% O O O 189
1F Not used/Through Mode – O O O 188
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
H4: Multi-Function Analog Outputs
Use H4 parameters to configure the multi-function analog output terminals.
Selects the data to be output through multi-function analog
output terminal AM.
Multi-Function Analog
Set the desired monitor parameter to the digits available in 000 to 999
H4-01 Output Terminal AM 102 A A A 41D 189
U-. For example, enter “103” for U1-03. <26>
Monitor Selection
When using this terminal in through mode or when not
using it at all, set “000” or “031”.
Parameter List
H4-02 Multi-Function Analog Sets terminal AM output gain. -999.9 to 100.0

S S S 41E 189
<15> Output Terminal AM Gain Maximum output voltage is 10 V. 999.9 %
H4-03 Multi-Function Analog -999.9 to
Sets terminal AM output bias. 0.0% A A A 41F 189
<15> Output Terminal AM Bias 999.9
H5: MEMOBUS/Modbus Serial Communication
Use H5 Parameters to connect the drive to a MEMOBUS/Modbus network.
B
Selects drive station node number (address) for
H5-01
Drive Node Address MEMOBUS/Modbus terminals R+, R-, S+, S-. Cycle 0 to FF H 1F A A A 425 398
<25>
power for the setting to take effect.
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
Selects the baud rate for MEMOBUS/Modbus terminals
R+, R-, S+ and S-. Cycle power for the setting to take
effect.
0: 1200 bps
1: 2400 bps
Communication Speed 2: 4800 bps
H5-02 0 to 8 3 A A A 426 398
Selection 3: 9600 bps
4: 19200 bps
5: 38400 bps
6: 57600 bps
7: 76800 bps
8: 115200 bps
Selects the communication parity for MEMOBUS/Modbus
terminals R+, R-, S+ and S-. Cycle power for the setting to
Communication Parity take effect.
H5-03 0 to 2 0 A A A 427 398
Selection 0: No parity
1: Even parity
2: Odd parity
Selects the stopping method when a communication time-
out fault (CE) is detected.
Stopping Method after 0: Ramp to stop
H5-04 0 to 3 3 A A A 428 398
Communication Error (CE) 1: Coast to stop
2: Fast-stop
3: Alarm only
Enables or disables the communications time-out fault
(CE) detection.
Communication Fault
H5-05 0: Disabled 0,1 1 A A A 429 399
Detection Selection
1: Enabled - If communication is lost for more than two
seconds, a CE fault will occur.
H5-06 Drive Transmit Wait Time Set the wait time between receiving and sending data. 5 to 65 5 ms A A A 42A 399
Selects "request to send" (RTS) control:
H5-07 RTS Control Selection 0: Disabled - RTS is always on. 0,1 1 A A A 42B 399
1: Enabled - RTS turns on only when sending.
Sets the time required to detect a communications error. 0.0 to 10.0
H5-09 CE Detection Time 2.0 s A A A 435 399
Adjustment may be need when networking several drives. s
Selects the units used for MEMOBUS/Modbus register
Unit Selection for
0025H (Output Voltage Reference Monitor).
H5-10 MEMOBUS/Modbus 0, 1 0 A A A 436 399
0: 0.1 V units
Register 0025H
1: 1 V units
Select the function for the enter command that saves
parameter data to the drive.
0: Parameter changes are activated when ENTER
Communications ENTER
H5-11 command is entered. 0, 1 <48> A A A 43C 400
Function Selection
1: Parameter changes are activated immediately without
ENTER command (compatible with Varispeed VS606-
V7).
Run Command Method 0: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP Method
H5-12 0, 1 0 A A A 43D 400
Selection 1: RUN/STOP, FWD/REV Method
H6: Pulse Train Input/Output
Use H6 parameters to configure Pulse Train I/O operation.
Selects pulse train input function.
0: Frequency reference
Pulse Train Input Terminal 1: PID feedback value
H6-01 0 to 3 0 A A A 42C 190
RP Function Selection 2: PID setpoint value
3: V/f Control with Simple PG Feedback (can be set only
when using motor 1 in V/f Control)
H6-02 Sets the terminal RP input signal frequency that is equal to 100 to 1440
Pulse Train Input Scaling A A A 42D 191
<15> 100% of the value selected in H6-01. 32000 Hz
H6-03 Sets the level of the value selected in H6-01 when a 0.0 to 100.0
Pulse Train Input Gain A A A 42E 191
<15> frequency with the value set in H6-02 is input. 1000.0 %
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
H6-04 Sets the level of the value selected in H6-01 when 0 Hz is -100.0 to
Pulse Train Input Bias 0.0% A A A 42F 191
<15> input. +100.0
H6-05 Pulse Train Input Filter 0.00 to
Sets the pulse train input filter time constant. 0.10 s A A A 430 191
<15> Time 2.00
Select the pulse train monitor output function (value of the
- part of U-). 000, 031,
H6-06 Pulse Train Monitor Refer to U: Operation Status Monitors on page 368 for 101, 102,
102 A A A 431 191
<15> Selection the list of U monitors. 105, 116,
Example: To select U5-01, set “501. ”When not using this 501, 502
parameter or when using in the through mode, set “000”.
Sets the terminal MP output signal frequency when the
H6-07 monitor value is 100%. Set H6-06 to “102” and H6-07 to 1440
Pulse Train Monitor Scaling 0 to 32000 A A A 432 191
<15> “0”, to make the pulse train monitor output equal to the Hz
output frequency.
Pulse Train Input Minimum Sets the minimum frequency for the pulse train input to be 0.1 to 0.5
H6-08 A A A 43F 191
Frequency detected. Enabled when H6-01 = 0, 1, or 2. 1000.0 Hz
<25> If this parameter is set to 0, the drive will be unable to respond to MEMOBUS/Modbus commands.
<48> Default setting is determined by the initialize mode the drive is set for (o2-09).
Note: Cycle power to the drive to enable MEMOBUS/Modbus settings.
◆ L: Protection Function
L parameters provide protection to the drive and motor, such as: control during momentary power loss, Stall Prevention,
frequency detection, fault restarts, overtorque detection, torque limits and other types of hardware protection.
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
L1: Motor Protection
Use L1 parameters to configure motor protective functions.
Sets the motor thermal overload protection (oL1) based on
the cooling capacity of the motor.
0: Disabled
1: Standard Fan Cooled (speed range < 10:1)
Motor Overload Protection 2: Standard Blower Cooled (speed range ≥ 10:1) 1
L1-01 0 to 4 S S S 480 192
Selection 3: Vector Motor (speed range 100:1) <2>
4: PM motor with variable torque
NOTICE: When using a single drive to operate multiple
motors, set L1-01 to 0 and ensure each motor has a thermal
relay installed.
Sets the motor thermal overload protection (oL1) time.
A larger L1-02 time will increase the time for an oL1 fault
Motor Overload Protection to occur. 1.0
L1-02 0.1 to 5.0 A A A 481 194
Time This parameter does not typically require adjustment. min
Should be set in accordance with the overload tolerance of
the motor.
Sets operation when the motor temperature analog input
Parameter List
(H3-02 and H3-10 = E) exceeds the oH3 alarm level (PTC

Motor Overheat Alarm input level: Tr-5°C).
L1-03 Operation Selection (PTC 0: Ramp to Stop 0 to 3 3 A A A 482 195
input) 1: Coast to Stop
3: Alarm Only (“oH3” will flash) B
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
Sets stopping method when the motor temperature analog
input (H3-02 and H3-10 = E) exceeds the oH4 fault level
Motor Overheat Fault
(PTC input level: Tr-5°C).
L1-04 Operation Selection (PTC 0 to 2 1 A A A 483 195
0: Ramp to Stop
input)
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-stop
This parameter adjusts the filter on the motor temperature
Motor Temperature Input 0.00 to
L1-05 analog input (H3-02 or H3-10 = E). Increase to add 0.20 s A A A 484 195
Filter Time (PTC input) 10.00
stability, decrease to improve response.
Determines whether or not to hold the electrothermal value
Continuous Electrothermal when the power supply is interrupted.
L1-13 0 to 1 1 A A A 46D 196
Operation Selection 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
L2: Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru
Use L2 parameters to configure drive functions for momentary power loss conditions.
Enables and disables the momentary power loss function. 0 to 2 0 A A A 485
0: Disabled - Drive trips on (Uv1) fault when power is lost.
Momentary Power Loss 1: Power Loss Ride-Thru Time - Drive will restart if power For a restart to occur, the run
L2-01 196
Operation Selection returns within the time set in L2-02. command must be maintained
2: CPU Power Active - Drive will restart if power returns throughout the Ride-Thru period.
as long as the CPU is working.
Momentary Power Loss Sets the Power Loss Ride-Thru time. Only effective when
L2-02 0.0 to 25.5 <11> A A A 486 196
Ride-Thru Time L2-01 = 1.
Sets the minimum wait time for residual motor voltage
Momentary Power Loss decay before the drive output reenergizes after power loss
L2-03 0.1 to 5.0 <33> A A A 487 196
Minimum Baseblock Time Ride-Thru. If L2-03 is greater than L2-02, operation
resumes after the time set in L2-03.
Momentary Power Loss
Sets the time for the output voltage to return to the V/f
L2-04 Voltage Recovery Ramp 0.0 to 5.0 <33> A A A 488 197
pattern during Speed Search.
Time
L2-05 Undervoltage Detection Sets the DC Bus undervoltage trip level. This setting rarely <8>
150 to 210 A A A 489 197
<17> Level (Uv1) needs to be changed from the default value. <11>
L3: Stall Prevention

Use L3 parameters to configure the Stall Prevention function.
Selects the Stall Prevention method used to prevent
excessive current during acceleration.
0: Disabled - Motor accelerates at active acceleration rate.
The motor may stall if load is too heavy or accel time is too
short.
Stall Prevention Selection 0 to 2
L3-01 1: General Purpose - When output current exceeds L3-02 1 A A A 48F 197
during Acceleration <21>
level, acceleration stops. Acceleration will continue when
the output current level falls below the L3-02 level.
2: Intelligent - The active acceleration rate is ignored.
Acceleration is completed in the shortest amount of time
without exceeding the current value set in L3-02.
Used when L3-01 = 1 or 2.
L3-02 Stall Prevention Level 100% is equal to the drive rated current. 0 to 150
<6> A A A 490 198
<15> during Acceleration Decrease the set value if stalling or excessive current <6>
occurs with default setting.
Sets Stall Prevention lower limit during acceleration when
Stall Prevention Limit
L3-03 operating in the constant power range. Set as a percentage 0 to 100 50% A A A 491 199
during Acceleration
of the drive's rated current.
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
When using a braking resistor, use setting "0". Setting "3"
is used in specific applications.
0: Disabled - The drive decelerates at the active
deceleration rate. If the load is too large or the deceleration
time is too short, an ov fault may occur.
1: General Purpose - The drive decelerates at the active
deceleration rate, but if the main circuit DC bus voltage
reaches the Stall Prevention level, deceleration will stop.
Stall Prevention Selection Deceleration will continue once the DC bus level drops 0 to 4
L3-04 1 S S S 492 199
during Deceleration below the Stall Prevention level. <27>
2: Intelligent - The active deceleration rate is ignored and
the drive decelerates as fast as possible without hitting ov
fault level.
3: Stall Prevention with Braking Resistor - Stall Prevention
during deceleration is enabled in coordination with
dynamic braking.
4: Overexcitation Deceleration - Decelerates with the flux
level determined by n3-13 (Overexcitation Gain).
Selects the Stall Prevention method to use to prevent drive
faults during run.
0: Disabled - Drive runs a set frequency. A heavy load may
cause the drive to trip on an oC or oL fault.
1: Decel Time 1 - The drive will decelerate at Decel Time 1
(C1-02) if the output current exceeds the level set by L3-
Stall Prevention Selection
L3-05 06. Once the current level drops below the L3-06 level, the 0 to 2 1 A − A 493 200
during Run
drive will accelerate back to its frequency reference at the
active acceleration rate.
2: Decel Time 2 - Same as setting 1 except the drive
decelerates at Decel Time 2 (C1-04).
When output frequency is 6 Hz or less, Stall Prevention
during run is disabled regardless of the setting in L3-05.
Enabled when L3-05 is set to "1" or "2". 100% is equal to
L3-06 Stall Prevention Level the drive rated current. 30 to 150
<6> A − A 494 200
<15> during Run Decrease the set value if stalling or excessive current <6>
occurs with the default settings.
Sets the level of Stall Prevention during deceleration as a
percentage of the overvoltage level.
L3-10 Stall Prevention Level 92%
If the DC bus voltage rises above the level set in L3-10 80 to 95 A A A 498 201
<15> during Deceleration <8>
during deceleration, the drive will stop.
Disabled if L3-04 is set to 2.
Enables or disables ov suppression function, which allows
the drive to change the output frequency as the load
changes, thus preventing an ov fault.
0: Disabled
Overvoltage Suppression
L3-11 1: Enabled 0, 1 0 A A A 4C7 201
Function Selection
Note: The frequency reference and motor speed diverge as
the regenerative energy begins to flow back into the DC
bus and triggers the ov suppression function. Disable this
function when using a braking resistor.
Target DC Bus Voltage for Sets the desired value for the DC bus voltage during
L3-17 150 to 400 370 V
Overvoltage Suppression overvoltage suppression and Stall Prevention during A A A 462 202
<15> <17> V <8>
and Stall Prevention deceleration. Enabled only when L3-04 = 2 or L3-11 = 1.
Parameter List
Sets the deceleration time used for Stall Prevention during

Deceleration Time at Stall
L3-22 acceleration in Open Loop Vector Control for PM motors. 0.0 to
Prevention during 0.0 s − − A 4F9 199
<15> When set to 0, the drive decelerates at the normal 6000.0
Acceleration
deceleration time.
0: Sets the Stall Prevention level throughout the entire
Automatic Reduction frequency range to the value in parameter L3-06. B
L3-23 Selection for Stall 1: Automatically lowers the Stall Prevention level in the 0, 1 0 A A Α 4FD 201
Prevention during Run constant output range. The lower limit value is 40% of L3-
06.
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
L4: Speed Detection
Use L4 parameters to configure frequency detection operation.
L4-01 Speed Agreement Detection These parameters configure the multi-function output (H2- 0.0 to
0.0 Hz A A A 499 202
<15> Level = 2, 3, 4, 5) settings "Speed Agree 1", "User Set Speed 400.0
Agree 1", "Frequency Detection 1," and "Frequency
L4-02 Speed Agreement Detection detection 2".
0.0 to 20.0 2.0 Hz A A A 49A 202
<15> Width Parameter L4-01 sets the level while parameter L4-02 sets
the hysteresis for the Speed Detection Output Function.
L4-03 Speed Agreement Detection These parameters configure the Multi-Function Output -400.0 to
0.0 Hz A A A 49B 202
<15> Level (+/-) (H2- = 13, 14, 15, 16) settings "Speed Agree 2", "User +400.0
Set Speed Agree 2", "Frequency Detection 3," or
Speed Agreement Detection "Frequency Detection 4".
L4-04 Parameter L4-03 sets the level while parameter L4-04 sets 0.0 to 20.0 2.0 Hz A A A 49C 202
Width (+/-)
the hysteresis for the Speed Detection Output Function.
Sets operation when the frequency reference is lost
(reference drops 90% or more within 400 ms).
Frequency Reference Loss
L4-05 0: Stop - Drive will stop. 0,1 0 A A A 49D 202
Detection Selection
1: Run at L4-06 Level - Drive will run at the percentage set
in L4-06 of the frequency reference before loss.
Sets the frequency reference when a reference loss was
Frequency Reference at 0.0 to
L4-06 detected and L4-05 = 1. Reference will be: Fref = Fref at 80.0% A A A 4C2 203
Reference Loss 100.0
time of loss x L4-06.
Speed Agreement Detection 0: No detection during baseblock.
L4-07 0 to 1 0 A A A 470H 203
Selection 1: Enable frequency detection during baseblock (BB).
L5: Fault Restart
Use L5 parameters to configure Automatic Restart after fault.
Sets the counter for the number of times the drive attempts
to restart when one of the following faults occurs: GF, LF,
oC, ov, PF, rH, rr, oL1, oL2, oL3, oL4, Uv1.
Number of Auto Restart
L5-01 Parameter L5-05 determines the how the restart counter is 0 to 10 0 A A A 49E 204
Attempts
incremented.
When the drive operates without fault for 10 minutes, the
counter will be reset.
Sets fault contact (H2- = E) activation during
Auto Restart Fault Output automatic restart attempts.
L5-02 0,1 0 A A A 49F 204
Operation Selection 0: Fault output not active.
1: Fault output active during restart attempt.
Sets the amount of time to wait between performing fault 0.5 to
L5-04 Fault Reset Interval Time 10.0 s A A A 46C 205
restarts. Enabled when L5-05 is set to 1. 600.0 s
Selects the method of incrementing the restart counter.
0: Continuously attempt to restart and increment counter
Fault Reset Operation after successful restart (same as Varispeed VS616-F7/G7)
L5-05 0 to 1 0 A A A 467 205
Selection 1: Attempt to restart with the interval time set in L5-04.
Every trial increments the counter. (same as Varispeed
VS606-V7)
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
L6: Torque Detection
Use L6 parameters to configure overtorque detection.
Selects the overtorque/undertorque operation. overtorque
and undertorque are determined by the settings in
parameters L6-02 and L6-03. The multi-function output
settings (H2-= B and 17) are also active if
programmed.
0: Disabled
1: oL3/oL4 at Speed Agree - Alarm (overtorque detection
only active during Speed Agree and operation continues
after detection).
2: oL3/oL4 at RUN - Alarm (overtorque detection is
always active and operation continues after detection).
3: oL3/oL4 at Speed Agree - Fault (overtorque detection
only active during Speed Agree and drive output will shut
Torque Detection Selection
L6-01 down on an oL3 fault). 0 to 8 0 A A A 4A1 205
1
4: oL3/oL4 at RUN - Fault (overtorque detection is always
active and drive output will shut down on an oL3 fault).
5: UL3/UL4 at Speed Agree - Alarm (undertorque
detection is only active during Speed Agree and operation
continues after detection).
6: UL3/UL4 at RUN - Alarm (undertorque detection is
always active and operation continues after detection).
7: UL3/UL4 at Speed Agree - Fault (undertorque detection
only active during Speed Agree and drive output will shut
down on an oL3 fault).
8: UL3/UL4 at RUN - Fault (undertorque detection is
always active and drive output will shut down on an oL3
fault).
Sets the overtorque/undertorque detection level. 100% is
L6-02
Torque Detection Level 1 equal to the motor rated current in V/f Control and the 0 to 300 150% A A A 4A2 207
<15>
motor rated torque in Open Loop Vector Control.
L6-03 Sets the length of time an overtorque/undertorque
Torque Detection Time 1 0.0 to 10.0 0.1 s A A A 4A3 207
<15> condition must exist before Torque Detection 1 is triggered.
Sets the response to an overtorque/undertorque condition.
Overtorque and undertorque are determined by the settings
in parameters L6-05 and L6-06. The multi-function output
settings (H2- = 18 and 19).
0: Disabled
1: oL4 at Speed Agree - Alarm (overtorque Detection only
active during Speed Agree and Operation continues after
detection).
2: oL4 at RUN - Alarm (overtorque Detection is always
active and operation continues after detection).
3: oL4 at Speed Agree - Fault (overtorque Detection only
active during Speed Agree and drive output will shut down
Torque Detection Selection
L6-04 on an oL4 fault). 0 to 8 0 A A A 4A4 206
2
4: oL4 at RUN - Fault (overtorque Detection is always
5: UL4 at Speed Agree - Alarm (undertorque Detection is
only active during Speed Agree and operation continues
after detection).
Parameter List
6: UL4 at RUN - Alarm (undertorque Detection is always

active and operation continues after detection).
7: UL4 at Speed Agree - Fault (undertorque Detection only
active during Speed Agree and drive output will shut down
on an oL4 fault).
8: UL4 at RUN - Fault (undertorque Detection is always B
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
Sets the overtorque/undertorque detection level. 100% is
L6-05 equal to the motor rated current in V/f Control or PM OLV
Torque Detection Level 2 0 to 300 150% A A A 4A5 207
<15> and equal to the motor rated torque in Open Loop Vector
Control.
Sets the length of time an overtorque/undertorque
L6-06
Torque Detection Time 2 condition must exist before torque detection 2 is 0.0 to 10.0 0.1 s A A A 4A6 207
<15>
recognized by the drive.
L7: Torque Limit
Use L7 parameters to configure the torque limit function.
L7-01 Sets the torque limit value as a percentage of the motor
Forward Torque Limit 0 to 300 200% − A − 4A7 207
<15> rated torque. Four individual quadrants can be set.
L7-02 output torque
Reverse Torque Limit 0 to 300 200% − A − 4A8 207
<15> positive torque
L7-01
L7-03 Forward Regenerative L7-04 motor 0 to 300 200% − A − 4A9 207
<15> Torque Limit regeneration r/min
REV FWD
regeneration
L7-04 Reverse Regenerative
L7-03 0 to 300 200% − A − 4AA 207
<15> Torque Limit L7-02
negative torque
L7-06 Torque Limit Integral Time 200

Sets the integral time constant for the torque limit. 5 to 10000 − A − 4AC 207
<15> Constant ms
Selects the method of torque limit control during accel/
decel.
0: Proportional Control (change to integral controls at fixed
speeds). Use this setting when acceleration to the desired
Torque Limit Control
speed has priority over torque limitation.
L7-07 Method Selection during 0, 1 0 − A − 4C9 207
1: Integral Control. Use this setting if the torque limitation
Accel/Decel
has priority.
When torque limit is applied to the motor, accel/decel time
may increase and motor speed may not meet the speed
reference.
L8: Drive Protection
Use L8 parameters to configure hardware protection functions.
Selects the Braking resistor when using a 3% duty cycle
Internal Dynamic Braking heatsink mounted braking resistor. This parameter does not
L8-01 Resistor Protection enable or disable the braking transistor of the drive. 0,1 0 A A A 4AD 208
Selection (ERF type) 0: Resistor overheat protection disabled
1: Resistor overheat protection enabled
Sets the temperature for the heatsink overheat alarm oH.
If the heatsink temperature exceeds the value set to L8-02,
L8-02 Overheat Alarm Level 50 to 130 <11> A A A 4AE 208
an output terminal set for the oH alarm (H2- = 20) will
close.
Determines the action the drive should take when the
heatsink overheat alarm oH is triggered.
0: Ramp to Stop using the active decel time.
1: Coast to Stop.
Overheat Pre-Alarm
L8-03 2: Fast-stop using the time set in C1-09. 0 to 3 3 A A A 4AF 208
Operation Selection
3: Alarm Only. Drive continues running, but displays an
alarm.
Settings 0 through 2 trigger a fault relay if the heatsink
becomes too hot.
Selects the detection of input current phase loss, power
supply voltage imbalance, or main circuit electrolytic
Input Phase Loss Protection 0
L8-05 capacitor deterioration. 0,1 A A A 4B1 209
Selection <36>
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
Selects the output phase loss detection.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (triggered by a single phase loss)
Output Phase Loss 2: Enabled (triggered when two phases are lost)
L8-07 0 to 2 1 A A A 4B3 209
Protection Selection Output phase loss is detected when operating with less than
5% of the drive rated current. Detection can mistakenly
occur if the motor is too small relative to the drive capacity
rating (this parameter should be disabled in such cases).
Selects the output ground fault detection.
Output Ground Fault
L8-09 0: Disabled 0, 1 <11> A A A 4B5 209
Detection Selection
1: Enabled
Controls the heatsink cooling fan operation.
0: Fan On-Run Mode - Fan will operate only when the
Heatsink Cooling Fan
L8-10 drive is running and for L8-11 seconds after stop. 0, 1 0 A A A 4B6 210
Operation Selection
1: Fan always on - Cooling fan operates whenever the drive
is powered up.
Heatsink Cooling Fan Off- This parameter sets the delay time for the cooling fan to
L8-11 0 to 300 60 s A A A 4B7 210
Delay Time shut off after the run command is removed when L8-10 = 0.
Ambient Temperature Used to input the ambient temperature. This value adjusts
L8-12 -10 to 50 40 °C A A A 4B8 210
Setting the drives oL2 detection level.
Sets the oL2 characteristics at output frequencies below 6
Hz.
oL2 Characteristics
L8-15 0: No oL2 level reduction below 6 Hz. 0, 1 1 A A A 4BB 210
Selection at Low Speed
1: oL2 level is reduced linearly below 6 Hz. It is halved at 0
Hz.
Selects the software current limit function. Typically no
Software Current Limit adjustment is required. 1
L8-18 0, 1 A A − 4BE 210
Selection 0: Disabled <1>
1: Enabled
Selects the detection of unbalanced output currents caused
Current Unbalance by faulty devices in the output circuit.
L8-29 0 to 1 1 − − A 4DF 211
Detection (LF2) 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Selects the installation type:
L8-35 Installation Method 0: Heatsink-Cooled Drive
0 to 2 <11> Α Α A 4ECH 211
<18> Selection 1: Side-by-Side Mounting
2: NEMA Type 1 Drive
Provides protection to the IGBTs by reducing the carrier
frequency at low speeds.
Carrier Frequency
L8-38 0: Disabled 0 to 2 <11> A A A 4EF 211
Reduction Selection
1: Enabled below 6 Hz
2: Enabled for the whole speed range
Sets the time for that the drive continues running with
reduced carrier frequency after the carrier reduction
Carrier Frequency 0.00 to
L8-40 condition has gone (see also L8-38). 0.50 A A A 4F1 212
Reduction Off-Delay Time 2.00
A setting of 0.00 s disables the carrier frequency reduction
time.
Configures an alarm when the output current exceeds
High Current Alarm 150% of the drive rated current.
L8-41 0, 1 0 A A A 4F2 212
Selection 0: Alarm disabled.
1: Alarm enabled.
Parameter List
Allows the drive to automatically adjust the drive output

voltage.
L8-46 AVR Function Selection 0, 1 1 A A A 4FA 212
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Sets the STo detection level as a percentage of the motor
L8-51
STo Level rated current. If set to zero, then the drive will
0.0 to
0.0% − − A 471 B
<40> 150.0%
automatically calculate an appropriate detection level.
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
Enables and disables a deviation detection of STo
L8-54 STo Bias Detection detection. This setting is rarely needs to be changed.
0,1 1 − − A 474
<40> Selection Setting 0: No deviation detection
Setting 1: Deviation detection is enabled
<1> Default setting is determine by the control mode set in parameter A1-02. The value shown is for OLV (A1-02 = 2).
<6> The upper limit of the setting range is determined by the values set to C6-01 and L8-38.
<8> Default setting value is dependent on parameter E1-01, Input Voltage Setting.
<21> Setting value 2 is not available A1-02 = 5-PM OLV Control. When enabled, the drive stops accelerating when it exceeds the value of L3-02,
Stall Prevention Level. The drive decelerates after 100 ms and begins accelerating again after restoring the current level.
<27> The setting range depends on the control mode set in A1-02. For PM OLV Control the setting range is 0 to 2.
<40> This parameter is valid from software version 6002 or later. This setting rarely needs to be changed from its default value.
◆ n: Advanced Performance Set-Up

The n parameters are used to adjust more advanced performance characteristics such as hunting prevention and speed
feedback detection.
Control
Mode Addr.
No. Name Description Range Def. Pg.
OL P Hex
V/f V M
n1: Hunting Prevention
Use n1 parameters to configure hunting prevention operation.
If the motor vibrates while lightly loaded, Hunting
Prevention may reduce the vibration.
Hunting Prevention 0: Disabled
n1-01 0,1 1 A − − 580 213
Selection 1: Enabled
When quick response is needed disable Hunting
Prevention.
Sets the gain for the Hunting Prevention Function.
If the motor vibrates while lightly loaded and n1-01 = 1,
n1-02 Hunting Prevention Gain 0.00 to
increase the gain by 0.1 until vibration ceases. 1.00 A − − 581 213
<15> Setting 2.50
If the motor stalls while n1-01 = 1, decrease the gain by 0.1
until the stalling ceases.
n1-03 Hunting Prevention Time
Sets the time constant used for hunting prevention. 0 to 500 <11> A − − 582 213
<15> Constant
Sets the gain used for Hunting Prevention.
n1-05 Hunting Prevention Gain 0.00 to
When set to 0, the gain n1-02 is used for operation in 0.00 A − − 530 213
<15> while in Reverse 2.50
reverse direction.
n2: Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Tuning
Use n2 parameters to configure the Speed Feedback Detection Control function operation.
Sets the internal speed feedback detection control gain in 0.00 to
<11> − A − 584 213
the automatic frequency regulator (AFR). 10.00
n2-01 Speed Feedback Detection This parameter does not typically require adjustment.
<15> Control (AFR) Gain Adjust this parameter as follows: Adjust the setting by 0.05 units at a time,
If hunting occurs, increase the set value. while checking the response.
If response is low, decrease the set value.
Speed Feedback Detection
n2-02
Control (AFR) Time Sets the AFR time constant 1. 0 to 2000 50 ms − A − 585 214
<15>
Constant 1
Speed Feedback Detection Sets the AFR time constant 2. Increase the setting if
n2-03 750
Control (AFR) Time overvoltage occurs during sudden load changes or the 0 to 2000 − A − 586 214
<15> ms
Constant 2 speed overshoots during fast acceleration.
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
Mode Addr.
OL P Hex
V/f V M
n3: Overexcitation Deceleration
Use n3 parameters to configure the Overexcitation Deceleration braking function.
Applies a gain to the V/f pattern during deceleration (L3-04
= 4). Returns to normal values after ramp to stop or at re-
n3-13 Overexcitation Deceleration 1.00 to
acceleration. 1.10 A A − 531 214
<15> Gain 1.40
To increase the braking power of overexcitation, increase
the gain by 1.25 to 1.30.
If overcurrent or overload occur during overexcitation
Overslip Suppression
n3-21 deceleration, reduce the overslip suppression current level. 0 to 150 100% A A − 579 215
Current Level
Set as a percentage of the drive rated current.
0: Enabled in both directions
Overexcitation Operation
n3-23 1: Enabled only when rotating forward 0 to 2 0 A A − 57B 215
Selection
2: Enabled only when in reverse
n8: PM Motor Control Tuning
Use n8 parameters to control the PM motor control.
Sets the gain for internal speed feedback detection control.
n8-45 Speed Feedback Detection This parameter does not typically require adjustment. 0.00 to
0.80 − − A 538 215
<15> Control Gain Increase this setting if hunting occurs. 10.00
Decrease to lower the response.
Sets the time constant to make the pull-in current and actual
Pull-In Current current value agree.
0.0 to
n8-47 Compensation Time Decrease the value if the motor begins to oscillate. 5.0 s − − A 53A 215
100.0 s
Constant Increase the value if it takes too long for the current
reference to equal the output current.
Defines the amount of current provided to the motor during
no-load operation at a constant speed.
n8-48
Pull-In Current Set as a percentage of the motor rated current. Increase this <41> 30% − − A 53B 215
<15>
setting when hunting occurs while running at a constant
speed.
n8-49 d-Axis Current for High Sets the amount of d-axis current when using Energy 0%
<42> − − A 53C 216
<15> Efficiency Control Saving control. <9>
Sets the pull-in current during acceleration as a percentage

n8-51 Acceleration/Deceleration
of the motor rated current (E5-03). Set to a high value when 0 to 200% 50% − − A 53E 216
<15> Pull-In Current
more starting torque is needed.
Sets the time constant for voltage error compensation.
Adjust the value when
n8-54 Voltage Error Compensation hunting occurs at low speed. 0.00 to
1.00 s − − A 56D 216
<15> Time Constant hunting occurs with sudden load changes. Increase in steps 10.00 s
of 0.1 or disable the compensation by setting n8-45 to 0.
oscillations occur at start. Increase the value in steps of 0.1.
Sets the ratio between motor and machine inertia.
0: less than 1:10.
n8-55 Load Inertia 1: between 1:10 to 1:30. 0 to 3 0 − − A 56E 216
2: between 1:30 to 1:50.
3: higher than 1:50.
Sets the limit for the output voltage. Adjustment is
n8-62 0.0 to 200
Output Voltage Limit normally needed only if the input voltage is below the n8- - - A 57D 217
<17> 230.0 Vac
62 set value. In this case set n8-62 to the input voltage.
n8-63 0.00 to
Output Voltage Limit Output Voltage Limit Gain 1 1.00 − − A 57E 217
<40> 100.00
Parameter List
Speed Feedback Detection

Sets the gain used for internal speed feedback detection 0.00 to
n8-65 Control Gain during ov 1.50 - - A 65C 217
during ov Suppression 10.00
Suppression
n8-68
Output Voltage Limit Gain 2 Determines a second gain level applied to the input voltage. 0,1 0.95 − − A 237 217
<40>
n8-87 Output Voltage Limit

Sets how the output voltage limit should be used. 0,1 0 − − A 2BC 217
B
<40> Selection
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
Mode Addr.
OL P Hex
V/f V M
Sets the current level to switch the output voltage limit
sequence. Set as a percentage of the motor rated current 0 to 400% 400% − − A 2BD 217
<40> Switch Current Level
(E5-03).
Sets hysteresis used for the current level that switches the
output voltage limit sequence. Set as a percentage of the 0 to n8-88 3% − − A 2BE 217
<40> Switch Hysteresis Width
motor rated current (E5-03).
Sets the speed level for switching the output voltage limit
sequence. Set as a percentage of the maximum output 0 to 200% 200% − − A 2BF 218
<40> Switch Speed
frequency (E1-04).
Sets the limit value for the ld operation of the feedback type
n8-91 Output Voltage Limit ld 0 to -
output voltage limitation. This setting is available only at -50% − − A 2F7 218
<40> Limit 200%
n8-87 = 0.
n9: Hardware Settings
Using these parameters, drive output voltage can be adjusted.
0.0 to 1.0
n9-10 AVR Time Constant Sets a delay time for output voltage compensation. A A A SD9 217
100.0 ms
On-Delay Compensation 0.00 to
n9-12 Sets the time value used for IGBT On-delay compensation. <11> A A A SDB 217
Time 20.00
0.0 to
On-Delay Compensation Sets the frequency at which the drive begins to compensate 0.0
n9-62 [E1-04] A A A 64F 217
Derating Start Frequency the output voltage for the IGBT On-Delay. Hz
Hz
0.0 to
On-Delay Compensation Sets the frequency at which the drive stops compensating 0.0
n9-63 [E1-04] A A A 650 217
Disable Frequency the output voltage for the IGBT On-Delay. Hz
Hz
<40> This parameter is valid from software version 6002 or later. This setting rarely needs to be changed from its default value.
<41> Setting range varies by the software version the drive is running. Software versions 6002 or later allow this value to be changed during run.
Software versions 6002 or later: 0%, 20 to 200%
Software versions 6001 or earlier: 20 to 200%
<42> Setting range varies by the software version the drive is running. Software versions 6002 or later allow this value to be changed during run.
Software versions 6002 or later: -200.0 to 200.0%
Software versions 6001 or earlier: -200.0 to 0.0%
B.3 Parameter Table
◆ o: Operator Related Parameters

o parameters are used to set up the LED digital operator displays.
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
o1: Digital Operator Display Selection
Use o1 parameters to configure the digital operator display.
When the drive is first switched on, the frequency reference 104 to 903 106 A A A 500
appears on the digital operator screen. Scrolling through Set to U1-06 as a default (Output
the operator display will show the direction of the motor, Voltage Reference).
followed by the output frequency, output voltage, and then NOTE: Setting range varies by the
the user specified monitor (U1-). software version the drive is running.
o1-01 Drive Mode Unit Monitor
o1-01 selects the content to display the output voltage in Software versions 6002 or later allow 219
<15> Selection
this sequence. this value to be changed during run.
o1-02 selects the monitor to display upon power-up. To Software versions 6002 or later: 104 to
select a different monitor, set 1 to o1-01 where the 903
desired monitor is expressed as U1-. Note that the Software versions 6001 or earlier: 104
control mode determines which monitors are available. to 621
Selects the monitor to display upon power-up.
1: Frequency Reference (U1-01)
o1-02 User Monitor Selection 2: Forward/Reverse
1 to 5 1 A A A 501 219
<15> after Power Up 3: Output Frequency (U1-02)
4: Output Current (U1-03)
5: User Monitor (set by o1-01)
Sets the units to display the frequency reference and output
frequency.
0: Hz
Digital Operator Display
o1-03 1: % (100% = E1-04) 0 to 3 0 A A A 502 219
Selection
2: r/min (enter the number of motor poles into E2-04, E4-
04, or E5-04)
3: User defined by parameters o1-10 and o1-11
User-Set Display Units These settings define the display values when o1-03 is set
o1-10 1 to 60000 <10> A A A 520 220
Maximum Value to 3.
o1-10 sets display values when operating at the maximum
User-Set Display Units
o1-11 output frequency. 0 to 3 <10> A A A 521 220
Decimal Display
o1-11 sets the position of the decimal positions.
o2: Digital Operator Keypad Functions
Use o2 parameters to configure LED digital operator key functions.
Enables/Disables the digital operator LO/RE key.
LO/RE Key Function
o2-01 0: Disabled 0,1 1 A A A 505 220
Selection
1: Enabled
Enables/Disables the operator panel STOP key when the
STOP Key Function drive is operated form external sources (not operator).
o2-02 0,1 1 A A A 506 220
Selection 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Allows storing of parameter settings as a User Initialization
Selection (value 1110 for A1-03). The value returns to 0
after entering 1 or 2.
User Parameter Default
o2-03 0: No Change 0 to 2 0 A A A 507 221
Value
1: Set Defaults - Saves current parameter settings as user
initialization.
Parameter List
2: Clear All - Clears the currently saved user initialization.

Sets the drive model.
o2-04
Drive Model Selection This parameter only needs to be set when installing a new 0 to FF <11> A A A 508 221
<18>
control board. Do not change for other reason.
Selects if the ENTER key must be pressed when inputting
the frequency reference by the operator keypad. B
Frequency Reference 0: Data/Enter key must be pressed to enter a frequency
o2-05 0, 1 0 A A A 509 221
Setting Method Selection reference.
1: Data/Enter key is not required. The frequency reference
is adjusted by the UP and DOWN keys.
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
Sets drive action when the digital operator is removed in
LOCAL mode or with b1-02 = 0.
Digital Operator
o2-06 0: The drive will continue operation 0, 1 0 A A A 50A 222
Disconnection Operation
1: The drive will trigger a fault (oPR) and the motor will
coast to stop
0: Forward
o2-07 Motor Direction at Power 1: Reverse
0 to 1 0 A A A 527 222
<18> Up when Using Operator This parameter requires that drive operation be assigned to
the digital operator.
o2-09 Reserved – – – – – – 50D –
o3: Copy Function
Use o3 parameters to Read, Copy and Verify the parameter settings to and from the drive.
Selects the copy function operation.
0: No action
1: READ
2: COPY
o3-01 Copy Function Selection 0 to 3 0 A A A 515 222
3: VERIFY
NOTE: When using the copy function, the drive model
number (o2-04) and the software number (U1-14) must
match or an error will occur.
Locks the READ operation to prevent accidental
overwriting of the data stored in the LED operator.
o3-02 Copy Allowed Selection 0, 1 0 A A A 516 222
0: READ operation prohibited
1: READ operation allowed
o4: Maintenance Monitor Settings
Use o4 parameters to perform maintenance.
Cumulative Operation Time Sets the value for the cumulative operation time of the
o4-01 0 to 9999 0 A A A 50B 223
Setting drive in units of 10 h.
Determines, how the cumulative operation time (U4-01) is
counted.
Cumulative Operation Time
o4-02 0: Logs power-on time 0 to 1 0 A A A 50C 223
Selection
1: Logs operation time when the drive output is active
(output operation time).
Cooling Fan Operation Sets the value of the fan operation time monitor U4-03 in
o4-03 0 to 9999 0 A A A 50E 223
Time Setting units of 10 h. <43>
Capacitor Maintenance Sets the value of the capacitor maintenance time monitor
o4-05 0 to 150 0% A A A 51D 223
Setting U4-05.
DC Bus Pre-charge Relay Sets the value of the Soft Charge Bypass Relay
o4-07 0 to 150 0% A A A 523 223
Maintenance Setting Maintenance monitor U4-06.
o4-09 IGBT Maintenance Setting Sets the value of the IGBT Maintenance monitor U4-07. 0 to 150 0% A A A 525 224
Selects if U2- (Fault Trace), U3- (Fault History)
monitors are reset at drive initialization.
0: Save the contents of the U2- and U3-
o4-11 U2, U3 Initialization 0 to 1 0 A A A 510 224
parameters.
1: Reset the contents of the U2- and U3-
parameters.
Selects if U4-10 and U4-11 (kWh monitor) are reset at
drive initialization.
o4-12 kWh Monitor Initialization 0 to 1 0 A A A 512 224
0: Save the contents of U4-10 and U4-11.
1: Reset the contents of U4-10 and U4-11.
Selects if the Run command counter (U4-02) is reset at
Number of Run Commands drive initialization.
o4-13 0 to 1 0 A A A 528 224
Counter Initialization 0: Save the motor speed monitor (U4-02).
1: Reset the motor speed monitor (U4-02).
<10> Default setting value is dependent on parameter o1-03, Digital Operator Display Selection.
<43> This parameter is valid from software versions 6002 and later. Set in units of 10 hours. Setting o4-03 to 30 will have the start counting the
cooling fan operation time from 300 hours, and U4-03 will display 300H. Earlier software versions set the cooling fan operation time in 1 hour
units.
B.3 Parameter Table
◆ S: Functions for Textile Applications

The S parameters are designed specifically for textile applications. They set and adjust the Disturb function, gain levels
for the frequency reference, braking transistor characteristics, and various aspects of KEB.
Control
No. Mode
Name Description Range Def. Addr Pg.
V/f OL PM . Hex
V
S1: Disturb Function
Various aspects of the Disturb function are determined by the S1 parameters
0: Disabled
S1-01 Disturb Function 1: Enabled
0 to 2 0 A − − 680 226
<15> Selection 2: Enabled, outputs the Disturb waveform during accel/
decel
S1-02 Disturb Function Set the amplitude of the Disturb waveform as a 0.00 to
0.00% A − − 681 226
<15> Amplitude percentage of the frequency reference. 20.00
Sets the step applied at the end of disturb acceleration or
S1-03
Disturb Step deceleration as a percentage of the Disturb amplitude in 0 to 50 0% A − − 682 226
<15>
S1-02.
S1-04 Disturb Deceleration 0.0 to
Sets the deceleration time for the Disturb function. 0.0 s A − − 683 226
<15> Time 120.0
S1-05 Disturb Acceleration 0.0 to
Sets the acceleration time for the Disturb function. 0.0 s A − − 684 226
<15> Time 120.0
S2: Frequency Reference Gain Settings
S2 parameter determines how much to reduce or amplify the frequency reference.
Determines how much to reduce or amplify the
S2-01 Frequency Reference 0.00 to
frequency reference. The frequency reference cannot 100.00% A A A 690 226
<15> Gain 1000.00
exceed the upper limit set to d2-01.
S2-02 Frequency Reference Determines the time required to accelerate from 0.00% 0.0 to
0.0 s A A A 691 226
<15> Gain Change Ramp to the gain level set in S2-01. 600.0
S3: Braking Transistor and V/f Ratio Gain
Use S3 parameters to add gain to the braking transistor or V/f ratio.
Braking Transistor 0: During run only
S3-01 0, 1 0 A A A 6A0 227
Operation Selection 1: Always enabled
S3-02 Braking Transistor Sets the voltage level that triggers drive built-in the
300 to 400 380 Vdc A A A 6A1 227
<17> Operation Voltage Level braking transistor.
Enables and disables the V/f gain setting in MEMOBUS
register 03H.
S3-03 V/f Gain Enable/Disable 0, 1 0 A − − 6A2 227
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
S3-04 Sets the drive uses to change the V/f gain set in
V/f Gain Change Time 0.0 to 10.0 0.5 s A − − 6A3 227
<15> MEMOBUS register 03H.
S4: KEB Mode Selection
S4 parameters define the condtions for how the KEB function operate.
0: KEB disabled
1: DC bus voltage control (KEB 1)
S4-01 KEB Mode Selection 0 to 3 0 A A A 6B0 230
2: Synchronous accel/decel (KEB 2)
3: Power KEB (KEB 3)
Determines how the KEB start and end voltage in
parameters S4-03 and S4-06 are set.
S4-02
KEB Start/End Voltage 0: Set as a Percentage of E1-01 0, 1 0 A A A 6B1 230
<15>
1: Set as a percentage of the DC bus voltage before KEB
was triggered.
Parameter List
Determines the voltage level in the DC bus that will

S4-03 trigger KEB. The setting value depends on the selection 0.0 to
KEB Start Voltage 200.0% A A A 6B2 230
<15> in parameter S4-02. A setting of 200.0% essentially 200.0
disables S4-03.
S4-04 Sets the level of voltage fluctuation in the DC bus that
<15>
KEB Start dV/dt Level
triggers KEB.
0 to 10000 0 Vdc/s A A A 6B3 230 B
S4-05 Sets the time required for the voltage fluctuation level
KEB Start dV/dt filter 0 to 50 20 ms A A A 6B4 230
<15> defined in S4-04 to trigger KEB.
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
No. Mode
V/f OL PM . Hex
V
Sets the DC bus voltage level at that the drive assumes
the power supply has returned. If this level is exceeded
S4-06 0.0 to
KEB End Voltage for longer than S4-07 the drive starts reaccelerating to 200.0% A A A 6B5 231
<15> 200.0
the set frequency reference. The setting value depends
on the selection in parameter S4-02.
Sets the time for that the DC bus voltage must exceed
S4-07 KEB End Detection
the level set in S4-06 in order to end the KEB function 0 to 2000 0 ms A A A 6B6 231
<15> Time
and reaccelerate to the set frequency reference.
S4-08 KEB 1 Phase Loss Defines the DC bus voltage ripple that indicates a one
0 to 800 0V A A A 6B7 231
<15> Detection Level phase loss, thus triggering the KEB function.
S4-09 KEB 1 Phase Loss Sets the sampling time used to detect one input phase
0 to 3000 0 ms A A A 6B8 231
<15> Sampling Time loss.
Sets the time that the ripple in the DC bus voltage must
S4-10 KEB 1 Phase Loss
exceed the level set in S4-08 to trigger one phase loss 0 to 10 10 ms A A A 6B9 231
<15> Detection Time
detection.
When KEB 1 or KEB 3 is selected and S4-02 is set to 0,
S4-11 0.80 to
KEB Target Voltage the drive attempts to keep the DC bus voltage at the 1.35 A A A 6BA 231
<15> 1.50
traget voltage defined in S4-11 multiplied by E1-01.
S4-12 Once KEB is complete, S4-12 sets the time to hold the
KEB Hold Time 0.0 to 10.0 0.0 s A A A 6BB 231
<15> frequency reference before reacceleration.
S4-13 KEB Minimum Sets the minimum operation time for KEB once it is
0 to 2000 50 ms A A A 6BC 232
<15> Operation Time triggered.
Sets the frequency level to prohibit re-acceleration after
S4-14 KEB Reacceleration the power returned. If the drive output frequency fell 0.0 to
0.0% A A A 6BD 232
<15> Prohibit Frequency below S4-14 during KEB operation the drive will 100.0
decelerate the motor to stop, even if the power returns.
S5: KEB Accel/Decel Settings
S5 parameters govern acceleration and deceleration when performing KEB 1 and KEB 2.
S5-01 Sets decel time 1 for the start of KEB. S5-01 is enabled 0.0 to
KEB Decel Time 1 0.0 s A A A 6C0 232
<15> when the output frequency is greater than S5-03. 200.0
S5-02 Sets decel time 2 for the start of KEB. S5-02 is enabled 0.0 to
KEB Decel Time 2 0.0 s A A A 6C1 232
<15> when the output frequency is less than or equal to S5-03. 200.0
S5-03 KEB Decel Time Sets the frequency for KEB to switch between KEB 0.0 to
0.0% A A A 6C2 232
<15> Switching Frequency decel time 1 and KEB decel time 2. 100.0
S5-04 KEB Decel Time Sets the time constant used to switch over from
0.0 to 10.0 0.0 s A A A 6C3 232
<15> Switching Time deceleration time 1 to deceleration time 2 during KEB.
Sets time to accelerate from the frequency after KEB to
S5-05 KEB Synchronous the set frequency reference. This setting can be used to 0.0 to
0.0 s A A A 6C4 233
<15> Acceleration Time let multiple drives accelerate synchronously back to the 200.0
set speed after power loss.
S5-06 S-Curve at KEB Sets the S-curve time when KEB begins decelerating the 0.00 to
0.20 s A A A 6C5 233
<15> Deceleration Start drive. 2.50
Sets the output frequency reduction step applied when
Frequency Gain at KEB
S5-07 power loss is detected during constant speed operation
Start during Constant 0 to 300 100% A A A 6C6 233
<15> and then KEB starts. Percent of frequency reduction =
Speed
(slip frequency just before KEB) × S5-07 × 2
S5-08 power loss is detected during acceleration and then KEB
Start during 0 to 300 100% A A A 6C7 233
<15> starts. Percent of frequency reduction = (slip frequency
Acceleration
just before KEB) × S5-08 × 2
S5-09 power loss is detected during deceleration and then
Start during 0 to 300 100% A A A 6C8 233
<15> KEB starts. Percent of frequency reduction = (slip
Deceleration
frequency just before KEB) × S5-09 × 2
Enables or disables overvoltage prevention during
Synchronous
synchronous KEB operation (S4-01 = 2).
S5-10 Deceleration ov 0, 1 0 A A A 6C9 233
0: Disabled (requires a braking option)
Prevention
1: Enabled
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
No. Mode
V/f OL PM . Hex
V
S6: Power KEB Function
S6 parameters determine how the Power KEB type of KEB operates.
S6-01 DC Bus Capacity Sets the size of any external capacitors that were added. 0 to 65000 <11> A A A 6D0 234
The time required for the motor to accelerate from zero
up to the maximum frequency at the rated torque. If E2- <9>
Motor Acceleration 0.001 to
S6-02 11 is changed by the user or by performing Auto- <28> A A A 6D1 234
Time 10.000
Tuning, then S6-02 will automatically be set to the value <33>
of a Yaskawa 4-pole motor.
Enter the ratio between the inertia of the load and the 0.0 to
S6-03 Load / Inertia Ratio 1.0 A A A 6D2 234
inertia of the motor the drive is running. 1000.0
Sets the gain to keep the voltage in the DC bus at the
DC Bus Adjustment target level. If overvoltage or undervoltage is a problem 0.00 to 1.00
S6-04 A A A 6D3 234
Gain at the start of Power KEB, gradually increasing S6-04 in 5.00 <2>
increments of 0.1 may help.
Sets the gain used to calculate the acceleration and
Accel/Decel Calculation deceleration rates used for Power KEB, overvoltage 0.00 to 1.00
S6-05 A A A 6D4 235
Gain suppression, and “intelligent” method of Stall 200.00 <2>
Prevention during deceleration (L3-04 = 2).
<28> Parameter value is changed if E2-11 is manually changed or changed by Auto-Tuning.
<33> Default setting is determined by the drive model selection set in parameter o2-04. and C6-01, Drive Duty Selection.
◆ T: Motor Tuning
Enter data into the following parameters to tune the motor and drive for optimal performance
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
Selects which set of motor parameters are used and set during
Auto-Tuning. If Motor 2 selection (H1- = 16) is not
selected, this parameter will not be displayed.
Motor 1/Motor 2
T1-00 1: 1st Motor - E1 to E2 1, 2 1 A A − 700 98
Selection
2: 2nd Motor - E3 to E4 (this selection is not displayed if motor
2 has not been selected)
2: 2nd Motor - E3 to E4
2 or 3 in
Selects the Auto-Tuning mode.
V/f
0: Rotational Auto-Tuning
Auto-Tuning Mode 0, 2, 3 0 or 2 in
T1-01 2: Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance A A − 701 98
Selection <31> OLV
3: Rotational Auto-Tuning for V/f Control (necessary for
2 in
Energy Savings and Speed Estimation type Speed Search)
Motor 2
Sets the motor rated power in kilowatts (kW).
0.00 to
T1-02 Motor Rated Power Note: If motor power is given in horsepower, power in kW can <33> A A − 702 98
650.00
be calculated using the following formula: kW = HP x 0.746.
T1-03 Motor Rated 0.0 to
Sets the motor rated voltage in volts (V). 200.0 V A A − 703 98
Parameter List
<17> Voltage 255.5

10 to 200%
Motor Rated of drive
T1-04 Sets the motor rated current in amperes (A). <33> A A − 704 99
Current rated
current
T1-05
Motor Rated
Sets the base frequency of the motor in Hertz (Hz).
0.0 to 60.0 Hz
A A − 705 99 B
Frequency 400.0 <38>
Number of Motor
T1-06 Sets the number of motor poles. 2 to 48 4 A A − 706 99
Poles
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
Mode Addr. Pg.
V/f OL P
V M
Sets the base speed of the motor in revolutions per minute r/min 1750 r/
T1-07 Motor Rated Speed 0 to 24000 A A − 707 99
(RPM). min <39>
Provides the iron loss for determining the Energy Saving 14 W A − − 70B 99
coefficient.
These values differ depending on
T1-11 Motor Iron Loss The value set to E2-10 (motor iron loss) when the power is 0 to 65535
the motor code value and motor
cycled. If T1-02 is changed, an initial value valid for the
parameter settings.
selected capacity will be shown.
<31> The available tuning methods depend on control mode. Select values 2 or 3 in V/f Control, 0 or 2 in OLV control, and 2 for Motor 2 control.
Setting 60.0 Hz: Japan (Model code: CIMR-TAV) and Asia (Model code: CIMR-TTV)
Setting 50.0 Hz: China (Model code: CIMR-TBV)
Setting 1750 r/min: Japan (Model code: CIMR-TAV) and Asia (Model code: CIMR-TTV)
Setting 1450 r/min: China (Model code: CIMR-TBV)
◆ U: Operation Status Monitors

Monitor parameters allow the user to view drive status, fault information, and other information about drive operation.
Control
Analog Output Unit Mode Addr.
No. Name Description Level OL P Hex
V/f V M
U1: Operation Status Monitors
Use U1 monitors to display the operation status of the drive.
10 V: Max 0.01
U1-01 Frequency Reference Monitors the frequency A A A 40
frequency Hz
Displays the output frequency. Display units are 10 V: Max 0.01
U1-02 Output Frequency A A A 41
determined by o1-03. frequency Hz
10 V: Drive rated <44>
U1-03 Output Current Displays the output current. A A A 42
current <46>
Control method set in A1-02.

0: V/f without PG No output signal
U1-04 Control Method – A A A 43
2: Open Loop Vector (OLV) available
5: PM Open Loop Vector (PM)
Displays the motor speed feedback. Display units are 10 V: Maximum 0.01
U1-05 Motor Speed A A – 44
determined by o1-03. speed Hz
10 V: 200 Vrms
U1-06 Output Voltage Reference Displays the output voltage. 0.1 V A A A 45
(400 Vrms)
10 V: 400 V (800
U1-07 DC Bus Voltage Displays the DC bus voltage. 1V A A A 46
V)
10 V: Drive
Displays the output voltage (this value is determined capacity (kW)
U1-08 Output Power <44> A A A 47
internally). (rated motor
capacity)
Monitor of internal torque reference value for Open Loop 10 V: Motor rated
U1-09 Torque Reference 0.1% – A – 48
Vector (OLV) control torque
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
V/f V M
Displays the input terminal status.
Digital input terminal

S1 enabled
S2 enabled
Digital input terminal No output signal
U1-10 Input Terminal Status S3 enabled – A A A 49
available
S4 enabled
S5 enabled
S6 enabled
S7 enabled
Displays the output terminal status.
Multi-Function
Digital Output (fault) No output signal
U1-11 Output Terminal Status (terminal MA/MB-MC) – A A A 4A
available
Multi-Function
Digital Output 1
(terminal P1) enabled
Multi-Function
Digital Output 2
(terminal P2) enabled
Verifies the drive operation status.
During run
During zero-speed
During REV No output signal
U1-12 Drive Status – A A A 4B
During fault reset available
signal input
During speed agree
Drive ready
During alarm
detection
During fault detection
U1-13 Terminal A1 Input Level Displays analog input A1 level: 100% when input is 10 V. 10 V: 100% 0.1% A A A 4E
U1-14 Terminal A2 Input Level Displays analog input A1 level: 100% when input is 10 V. 10 V: 100% 0.1% A A A 4F
Output Frequency after Soft Displays output frequency with ramp time and S-curves. 10 V: Max 0.01
U1-16 A A A 53
Starter Units determined by o1-03. frequency Hz
Displays parameter no. for oPE or Err where error No output signal
U1-18 OPE Fault Parameter – A A A 61
occurred. available
Displays the contents of a MEMOBUS/Modbus error.
CRC Error
Data Length Error
MEMOBUS/Modbus Error No output signal
Parameter List
Not Used
U1-19 – A A A 66
Code Parity Error available
Overrun Error
Framing Error
Timed Out
Not Used
B
U1-24 Input Pulse Monitor Displays the Pulse Train input RP frequency. 32000 Hz A A A 7D
No signal output
U1-25 Software Number (Flash) Flash ID – A A A 4D
avail.
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
V/f V M
No signal output
U1-26 Software Number (ROM) ROM ID – A A A 5B
avail.
U2: Fault Trace
Use U2 monitor parameters to view fault trace data. <18>
No signal output
U2-01 Current Fault Display of the current fault. – A A A 80
avail.
No signal output
U2-02 Previous Fault Display of the previous fault. – A A A 81
avail.
Frequency Reference at No signal output 0.01
U2-03 Displays the frequency reference at the previous fault. A A A 82
Previous Fault avail. Hz
Output Frequency at No signal output 0.01
U2-04 Displays the output frequency at the previous fault. A A A 83
Previous Fault avail. Hz
Output Current at Previous No signal output <44>
U2-05 Displays the output current at the previous fault. A A A 84
Fault avail. <46>
Motor Speed at Previous No signal output 0.01

U2-06 Displays the motor speed at the previous fault. Α A − 85
Fault avail. Hz
Output Voltage at Previous No signal output
U2-07 Displays the output voltage at the previous fault. 0.1 V A A A 86
Fault avail.
DC Bus Voltage at Previous No signal output
U2-08 Displays the DC bus voltage at the previous fault. 1V A A A 87
Fault avail.
Output Power at Previous No signal output 0.1
U2-09 Displays the output power at the previous fault. A A A 88
Fault avail. kW
Torque Reference at No signal output
U2-10 Displays the torque reference at the previous fault. 0.1% − Α − 89
Previous Fault avail.
Input Terminal Status at Displays the input terminal status at the previous fault. No signal output
U2-11 – A A A 8A
Previous Fault Displayed as in U1-10. avail.
Output Terminal Status at Displays the output status at the previous fault. Displays No signal output
U2-12 – A A A 8B
Previous Fault the same status displayed in U1-11. avail.
Drive Operation Status at Displays the operation status of the drive at the previous No signal output
U2-13 – A A A 8C
Previous Fault fault. Displays the same status displayed in U1-12. avail.
Cumulative Operation Time Displays the cumulative operation time at the previous No signal output
U2-14 1H A A A 8D
at Previous Fault fault. avail.
Soft Starter Speed Displays the speed reference for the soft starter at the No signal output 0.01
U2-15 A A A 7E0
Reference at Previous Fault previous fault. avail. Hz
Motor q-Axis Current at Displays the q-axis current for the motor at the previous No signal output
U2-16 0.10% − A A 7E1
Previous Fault fault. avail.
Motor d-Axis Current at Displays the d-axis current for the motor at the previous No signal output
U2-17 0.10% − A A 7E2
Previous Fault fault. avail.
U3: Fault History
After 10 faults have occurred, the oldest fault saved to the fault history (U3-10) is deleted, and the most recent fault is displayed in U3-01. <18>
No signal output 90
U3-01 Most Recent Fault Displays the most recent fault. – A A A
avail. (800)
No signal output 91
U3-02 2nd Most Recent Fault Displays the second most recent fault. – A A A
avail. (801)
No signal output 92
U3-03 3rd Most Recent Fault Displays the third most recent fault. – A A A
avail. (802)
No signal output 93
U3-04 4th Most Recent Fault Displays the fourth most recent fault. – A A A
avail. (803)
No signal output
U3-05 5th Most Recent Fault Displays the fifth most recent fault. – A A A 804
avail.
No signal output
U3-06 6th Most Recent Fault Displays the sixth most recent fault. – A A A 805
avail.
No signal output
U3-07 7th Most Recent Fault Displays the seventh most recent fault. – A A A 806
avail.
No signal output
U3-08 8th Most Recent Fault Displays the eighth most recent fault. – A A A 807
avail.
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
V/f V M
No signal output
U3-09 9th Most Recent Fault Displays the ninth most recent fault. – A A A 808
avail.
No signal output
U3-10 10th Most Recent Fault Displays the tenth most recent fault. – A A A 809
avail.
Cumulative Operation Time Displays the cumulative operation time at the most recent No signal output 94
U3-11 1h A A A
at Most Recent Fault fault. avail. (80A)
Cumulative Operation Time Displays the cumulative operation time at the second No signal output 95
U3-12 1h A A A
at 2nd Most Recent Fault most recent fault. avail. (80B)
Cumulative Operation Time Displays the cumulative operation time at the third most No signal output 96
U3-13 1h A A A
at 3rd Most Recent Fault recent fault. avail. (80C)
Cumulative Operation Time Displays the cumulative operation time at the fourth most No signal output 97
U3-14 1h A A A
at 4th Most Recent Fault recent fault. avail. (80D)
Cumulative Operation Time Displays the cumulative operation time at the fifth most No signal output
U3-15 1h A A A 80E
at 5th Most Recent Fault recent fault. avail.
Cumulative Operation Time Displays the cumulative operation time at the sixth most No signal output
U3-16 1h A A A 80F
Cumulative Operation Time Displays the cumulative operation time at the seventh No signal output
U3-17 1h A A A 810
at 7th Most Recent Fault most recent fault. avail.
Cumulative Operation Time Displays the cumulative operation time at the eighth most No signal output
U3-18 1h A A A 811
Cumulative Operation Time Displays the cumulative operation time at the ninth most No signal output
U3-19 1h A A A 812
Cumulative Operation Time Displays the cumulative operation time at the tenth most No signal output
U3-20 1h A A A 813
U4: Maintenance Monitors
Use U4 parameters to display drive maintenance information.
Displays the cumulative operation time of the drive. The
value for the cumulative operation time counter can be
reset in parameter o4-01. Use parameter o4-02 to
No signal output
U4-01 Cumulative Operation Time determine if the operation time should start as soon as the 1h A A A 4C
avail.
power is switched on or only while the run command is
present. The maximum number displayed is 99999, after
which the value is reset to 0.
Displays the number of times the run command is
entered. Reset the number of run commands using No signal output
U4-02 Number of Run Commands – A A A 75
parameter o4-13. This value will reset to 0 and start avail.
counting again after reaching 65535.
Displays the cumulative operation time of the cooling
Cooling Fan Operation fan. The default value for the fan operation time is reset in No signal output
U4-03 1h A A A 67
Time parameter o4-03. This value will reset to 0 and start avail.
counting again after reaching 99999.
Displays main cooling fan usage time in as a percentage
No signal output
U4-04 Cooling Fan Maintenance of their expected performance life. Parameter o4-03 can 1% A A A 7E
avail.
be used to reset this monitor.
Displays main circuit and control capacitor usage time in
as a percentage of their expected performance life. As the
ambient temperature affects the lifespan of these No signal output
U4-05 Capacitor Maintenance 1% A A A 7C
capacitors, the temperature must be set to parameter L8- avail.
12. The maintenance of the capacitors is needed when
U4-05 = 100%. Reset U4-05 using parameter o4-05. <45>
Parameter List
Displays the soft charge bypass relay maintenance time as

Soft Charge Bypass Relay No signal output
U4-06 a percentage of the estimated product life. Parameter o4- 1% A A A 7D6
Maintenance avail.
07 can be used to reset this monitor.
Displays IGBT usage time as a percent of expected
No signal output
U4-07 IGBT Maintenance performance life. Parameter o4-09 can be used to reset 1% A A A 7D7
this monitor. <45>
avail. B
No signal output
U4-08 Heatsink Temperature Displays the heatsink temperature. 1 °C A A A 68
avail.
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
V/f V M
Lights all segments of the LED to verify that the display No signal output
U4-09 LED Check – A A A 3C
is working properly. avail.
U4-10 kWh, Lower 4 Digits Monitors the drive output power. The value is shown as a kWh A A A 5C
9 digit number displayed across two monitor parameters,
U4-10 and U4-11.
No signal output
Example:
U4-11 kWh, Upper 5 Digits avail. MWh A A A 5D
12345678.9 kWh is displayed as:
U4-10: 678.9 kWh
U4-11: 12345 MWh
10 V: Motor rated 0.01A
U4-13 Peak Hold Current Displays the peak hold current during run. A A A 7CF
current <46>
Peak Hold Output Displays the output frequency when operating at the peak 10 V: Max 0.01H
U4-14 A A A 7D0
Frequency hold current. frequency z
Motor Overload Estimate 100% = oL1
U4-16 100% = oL1 detection level 0.1% A A A 7D8
(oL1) detection level
Displays the source for the frequency reference as XY-nn.
X: indicates which reference is used:
1 = Reference 1 (b1-01)
Y-nn: indicates the reference source
0-01 = Operator (d1-01)
Frequency Reference 1-01 = Analog (terminal A1)
U4-18 – – A A A 7DA
Source Selection 1-02 = Analog (terminal A2)
2-02 to 17 = Multi-step speed (d1-02 to 8, 17)
3-01 = MEMOBUS/Modbus comm.
4-01 = Option
5-01 = Pulse Input
6-01 = Not used
7-01 = Not used
Frequency Reference from
Displays the frequency reference provided by
U4-19 MEMOBUS/Modbus – – A A A 7DB
MEMOBUS/Modbus (decimal).
Comm.
Option Frequency Displays the frequency reference input by an option card
U4-20 – – A A A 7DD
Reference (decimal).
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
V/f V M
Displays the source for the Run command as XY-nn.
X: Indicates which Run source is used:
Y: Input power supply data
0 = Operator
1 = External terminals
2 = Not used
3 = MEMOBUS/Modbus communications
4 = Option
5 = Not used
6 = Not used
7 = Not used
nn: Run command limit status data
00: No limit status.
Run Command Source 01: Run command was left on when stopped in the PRG
U4-21 – – A A A 7DD
Selection mode.
02: Run command was left on when switching from
LOCAL to REMOTE operation.
03: Waiting for the soft charge bypass contactor after the
power is switched on (Uv or Uv1 flashes after 10
seconds).
04: Waiting for “Run Command Prohibited” time period
to end.
05: Fast-stop (digital input (H1- = 15), operator)
06: b1-17 (run command given at power-up).
07: During Baseblock while coast to stop with timer
08: Frequency reference is below minimal reference
during Baseblock
09: Waiting for Enter command
10: Run command enabled while copying parameter
settings
Displays the drive control data set by MEMOBUS/
MEMOBUS/Modbus
U4-22 Modbus communications register No. 0001H as a 4 digit — — A A A 7DE
Communications Reference
hexadecimal number.
Communication Option Displays drive control data set by an option card as a 4
U4-23 — — A A A 7DF
Card Reference digit hexadecimal number.
U5: PID Monitors
Use U5 parameters to view application-specific settings.
U5-01 PID Feedback Displays the PID feedback value in. 0.01% A A A 57
Displays the amount of PID input (deviation between PID
U5-02 PID Input 0.01% A A A 63
target and feedback).
U5-03 PID Output Displays PID control output. 0.01% A A A 64
10 V: 100% (max.
U5-04 PID Setpoint Displays the PID setpoint. freq.) 0.01% A A A 65
Displays the 2nd PID feedback value if differential
U5-05 PID Differential Feedback 0.01% A A A 7D2
feedback is used.
Displays the subtraction value of both feedback values if
U5-06 PID Adjusted Feedback 0.01% A A A 7D3
differential feedback is used.
U6: Operation Status Monitors
Use U6 parameters to display drive control information.
Motor Secondary Current
Parameter List
U6-01 Displays the value of the motor secondary current (Iq). 10 V: 100% 0.1% A A A 51
(Iq)
Motor Excitation Current Displays the value calculated for the motor excitation
U6-02 10 V: 100% 0.1% − A A 52
(ld) current (Id).
Displays the ASR input value if V/f Control with Simple 10 V: 100% (max.
U6-03 ASR Input 0.1% A − − 54
PG Feedback is enabled. freq.)
Displays the ASR output value if V/f Control with Simple 10 V: 100% (max.
B
U6-04 ASR Output 0.1% A − − 55
PG Feedback is enabled. freq.)
Output Voltage Reference 10 V: 200 V (400 0.1
U6-05 Output voltage reference (Vq). (q-axis) − A A 59
(Vq) V) Vac
B.3 Parameter Table
Control
V/f V M
Output Voltage Reference 10 V: 200 V (400 0.1
U6-06 Output voltage reference (Vd). (d-axis) − A A 5A
(Vd) V) Vac
Displays the current control (ACR) output of for the
U6-07 q-axis ACR Output 10 V: 100% 0.1% − A − 5F
motor secondary current (Iq).
Displays the current control (ACR) output of for the
U6-08 d-Axis ACR Output 10 V: 100% 0.1% − A − 60
motor excitation current (Id).
Displays the frequency added to the main frequency 10 V: max.
U6-21 Offset Frequency 0.1% A A A 7D5
reference. frequency
Fixed monitors U6-80 to U6-99 for comm. options.
Monitor content will vary based on the communication
U6-80 to 7B to
Option Monitors 1 to 20 option card connected to the drive. For more information, – – A A A
U6-99 7F9
refer to the instruction manual included with the
communication option card or to the Technical Manual.
U9: KEB Voltage Monitors
U9 monitors display data regarding the DC bus voltage while KEB is performed.
U9-01 KEB Start Voltage DC bus voltage when KEB was triggered. – – A A A 820
U9-02 KEB End Voltage DC bus voltage at the end of KEB. – – A A A 821
Displays a 5 digit number if the DC bus voltage exceeds
the drive's internal voltage limit at the start or end of
KEB Function Limit KEB. If the first is “1”, then the voltage setting at the start
U9-03 – – A A A 822
Monitor of KEB exceeded the 150 - 400 V internal limit. If the
second digit is "1", then the voltage setting at the end of
KEB exceeded the the internal limit of 150 - 400 V.
<44> This value's number of decimal places depends on the drive model (o2-04). The value will have two decimal places (0.01 A) for drives smaller
than 11 kW and one decimal place (0.1 A) for drives 11 kW and higher.
<45> Once a Maintenance Monitor reaches 100%, the possibility of the drive malfunctioning increases greatly. It is strongly recommended that the
user periodically check Maintenance Monitor values.
<46> While the value displayed in U1-03, U2-05, and U4-13 appear on the digital operator in amperes, viewing the value via MEMOBUS/Modbus
will display the value as percentage of 8192 (the maximum display value for MEMOBUS/Modbus). To convert this value to amperes, simply
divide the value displayed by 8192, and then multiply by the drive rated current.
B.4 Control Mode Dependent Parameter Default Values
B.4 Control Mode Dependent Parameter Default Values

The tables below list parameters that depend on the control mode selection (A1-02 for motor 1, E3-01 for motor 2).
These parameters are initialized to the shown values if the control mode is changed.
Table B.1 A1-02 (Motor 1 Control Mode) Dependent Parameters and Default Values
Control Modes (A1-02)
Parameter Description Setting Range Resolution
V/f (0) OLV (2) PM (5)
b2-03 DC Injection Braking Time at Start 0.00 to 10.00 0.01 s 0.00 0.00 –
b2-04 DC Injection Braking Time at Stop 0.00 to 10.00 0.01 s 0.50 0.50 0.00
b3-02 Speed Search Deactivation Current 0 to 200 1% 120 100 –
C2-01 S-Curve Characteristic at Accel Start 0.00 to 10.00 0.01 s 0.20 0.20 1.00
C3-01 Slip Compensation Gain 0.0 to 2.5 0.1 0.0 1.0 –
C3-02 Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time 0 to 10000 1 ms 2000 200 –
C4-01 Torque Compensation Gain 0.00 to 2.50 0.01 1.00 1.00 0.00
C4-02 Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time 0 to 10000 1 ms 200 20 100
C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection 1 to 6, F 1 <11> <11> 2
E1-04 Maximum Output Frequency 40.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz 60.0 <37> 60.0 <37> <9>
E1-05 Maximum Voltage <17> 0.0 to 255.0 0.1 V 200.0 200.0 <9>
E1-06 Base Frequency 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz 60.0 <37> 60.0 <37> <9>
E1-07 Middle Output Frequency 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz 3.0 <37> 3.0 <37> –
E1-08 Middle Output Frequency Voltage <17> 0.0 to 255.0 0.1 V 16.0 12.0 –
E1-09 Minimum Output Frequency 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz 1.5 <37> 0.5 <37> <9>
E1-10 Minimum Output Frequency Voltage <17> 0.0 to 255.0 0.1 V 12.0 2.5 –
E1-11 Middle Output Frequency 2 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz 0.0 0.0 –
E1-12 Mid Output Frequency Voltage 2 <17> 0.0 to 255.0 0.1 V 0.0 0.0 –
E1-13 Base Voltage <17> 0.0 to 255.0 0.1 V 0.0 0.0 –
L1-01 Motor Overload Protection Selection 0 to 4 - 1 1 4
L8-18 Software Current Limit Selection 0, 1 1 1 1 –
S6-04 Main Circuit Voltage Adjustment Gain 0.00 to 5.00 0.01 1.00 0.30 0.65
S6-05 Accel/Decel Calculation Gain 0.00 to 200.00 0.01 1.00 1.00 2.50
page 376.
Table B.2 E3-01 (Motor 2 Control Mode) Dependent Parameters and Default Values
Control Modes (E3-01)
Parameter Description Setting Range Resolution
V/f (0) OLV (2)
E3-04 Motor 2 Max Output Frequency 40.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz 60.0 <37> 60.0 <37>
E3-05 Motor 2 Max Voltage <17> 0.0 to 255.0 0.1 V 200.0 200.0
E3-06 Motor 2 Base Frequency 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz 60.0 <37> 60.0 <37>
E3-07 Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz 3.0 <37> 3.0 <37>
E3-08 Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency Voltage <17> 0.0 to 255.0 0.1 V 16.0 12.0
E3-09 Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz 1.5 <37> 0.5 <37>
E3-10 Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency Voltage <17> 0.0 to 255.0 0.1 V 12.0 2.5
E3-11 Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency 2 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz 0.0 0.0
E3-12 Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency Voltage 2 <17> 0.0 to 255.0 0.1 V 0.0 0.0
Parameter List
E3-13 Motor 2 Base Voltage <17> 0.0 to 255.0 0.1 V 0.0 0.0
E4-14 Motor 2 Slip Compensation Gain 0.0 to 2.5 0.1 0.0 1.0
page 376. B
Note: Motor 2 cannot be a PM motor.
B.5 V/f Pattern Default Values
B.5 V/f Pattern Default Values

The tables below show the V/f pattern settings default values depending on the Control Method Selection (A1-02).
Table B.3 V/f Pattern Selection for Drive Capacity: CIMR-TBV0001 to CIMR-TBV0010;
CIMR-T2V0001 to CIMR-T2V0010; CIMR-T4V0001 to CIMR-T4V0005
No. Unit V/f OLV PM
E1-03 − F <32>
E1-04 Hz 60.0 <37> 60.0 <37> <9>
E1-05 <17> V 200 200 <9>
E1-06 Hz 60.0 <37> 60.0 <37> <9>
E1-07 Hz 3.0 <37> 3.0 <37> –

E1-08 <17> V 16.0 12.0 –
E1-09 Hz 1.5 <37> 0.5 <37> <9>
E1-10 <17> V 12.0 2.5 –

<32> Numbers appearing in this column are the default values set to parameters E1-04 through E1-10 and E2-04 through E2-10.
page 376.
Table B.4 V/f Pattern Selection for Drive Capacity: CIMR-TBV0012

CIMR-T2V0012 to CIMR-T2V0069; CIMR-T4V0007 to CIMR-T4V0038
No. Unit V/f OLV PM
E1-03 − F <32>
E1-04 Hz 60.0 <37> 60.0 <37> <9>
E1-05 <17> V 200 200 <9>
E1-06 Hz 60.0 <37> 60.0 <37> <9>
E1-07 Hz 3.0 <37> 3.0 <37> –

E1-08 <17> V 14.0 11.0 –
E1-09 Hz 1.5 <37> 0.5 <37> <9>
E1-10 <17> V 7.0 2.0 –

<32> Numbers appearing in this column are the default values set to parameters E1-04 through E1-10 and E2-04 through E2-10.
page 376.
Table B.5 Default Values of the China Localized Drive: CIMR-TBV

Control Mode (A1-02, E3-01)
Parameter Description
V/f OLV PM
E1-04 Maximum Output Frequency 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz <9>
E1-06 Base Frequency 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz <9>
E1-07 Middle Output Frequency 2.5 Hz 3.0 Hz –

E1-09 Minimum Output Frequency 1.3 Hz 0.5 Hz <9>
E3-04 Motor 2 Max Output Frequency 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz –

E3-06 Motor 2 Base Frequency 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz –
E3-07 Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency 2.5 Hz 3.0 Hz –
E3-09 Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency 1.3 Hz 0.5 Hz –
B.6 Defaults by Drive Model Selection (o2-04)

Table B.6 Single-Phase, 200 V Class Drives Default Settings by Drive Model Selection
No. Description Unit Default Settings
− Model CIMR-T − BV0001 BV0002 BV0003
HD ND HD ND HD ND
C6-01 Duty Mode Selection −
0 1 0 1 0 1
o2-04 Drive Model Selection Hex. 30 31 32
E2-11
(E4-11, Motor rated power kW 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.75
T1-02)
Output Current 1 during Speed
b3-06 − 1 1 1 1 1 1
Search
b8-04 Energy Saving Coefficient Value − 481.7 356.9 356.9 288.2 288.2 223.7
C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection − 4 1 4 1 4 1
E2-01
Motor Rated Current A 0.6 1.1 1.1 1.9 1.9 3.3
(E4-01, T1-04)
E2-02
Motor Rated Slip Hz 2.5 2.6 2.6 2.9 2.9 2.5
(E4-02)
E2-03
Motor No-Load Current A 0.4 0.8 0.8 1.2 1.2 1.8
(E4-03)
E2-05
Motor Line-to-Line Resistance Ω 35.98 20.56 20.56 9.842 9.842 5.156
(E4-05)
E2-06
Motor Leakage Inductance % 21.6 20.1 20.1 18.2 18.2 13.8
(E4-06)
E2-10 Motor Iron Loss for Torque
W 6 11 11 14 14 26
(E4-10) Compensation
E5-01 PM Motor Code Selection hex FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF 0002 0002
L2-02 s 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
Time
Momentary Power Loss Minimum
L2-03 s 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.3
Baseblock Time
Momentary Power Loss Voltage
L2-04 s 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Recovery Ramp Time
L2-05 Undervoltage Detection Level (Uv1) V dc 160 160 160 160 160 160
L8-02 Overheat Alarm Level °C 115 115 115 115 110 110
Output Ground Fault Detection
L8-09 − 0 0 0 0 0 0
Selection
L8-35 Installation Method Selection − 0 0 0 0 0 0
Carrier Frequency Reduction
L8-38 − 1 1 1 1 1 1
Selection
n1-03 Hunting Prevention Time Constant ms 10 10 10 10 10 10
n9-12 On-Delay Compensation Time ms 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50
S6-01 DC Bus Capacity μF 220 220 330 330 610 610
S6-02 Motor Acceleration Time s 1.78 1.78 1.78 1.78 1.78 1.42
Parameter List

− Model CIMR-T − BV0006 BV0010 BV0012
HD ND HD ND HD ND
0 1 0 1 0 1
E2-11
T1-02)
b3-06 − 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Search
E2-01
Motor Rated Current A 3.3 6.2 6.2 8.5 8.5 11.4
(E4-01, T1-04)
E2-02
Motor Rated Slip Hz 2.5 2.6 2.6 2.9 2.9 2.7
(E4-02)
E2-03
Motor No-Load Current A 1.8 2.8 2.8 3 3 3.7
(E4-03)
E2-05
(E4-05)
E2-06
Motor Leakage Inductance % 13.8 18.5 18.5 18.4 18.4 19
(E4-06)
W 26 53 53 77 77 91
E5-01 PM Motor Code Selection hex 0003 0003 0005 0005 0006 0006
L2-02 s 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.5
Time
Momentary Power Loss Minimum
L2-03 s 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5
Baseblock Time
L2-04 s 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Recovery Ramp Time
L2-05 Undervoltage Detection Level (Uv1) V dc 160 160 160 160 160 160
L8-09 − 0 0 0 0 0 0
Selection
L8-38 − 1 1 1 1 1 1
Selection
n1-03 Hunting Prevention Time Constant ms 10 10 10 10 10 10
Table B.7 Three-Phase, 200 V Class Drives Default Settings by Drive Model Seletion
− Model CIMR-T − 2V0001 2V0002 2V0004 2V0006 2V0008
HD ND HD ND HD ND HD ND HD ND
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
o2-04 Drive Model Selection Hex. 60 61 62 63 64
E2-11
(E4-11, Motor rated power kW 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.75 0.75 1.1 1.1 1.5
T1-02)
b3-06 − 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Search
b8-04 Energy Saving Coefficient Value − 481.7 356.9 356.9 288.2 288.2 223.7 223.7 196.6 196.6 169.4
C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection − 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 3 1
E2-01
(E4-01, Motor Rated Current A 0.6 1.1 1.1 1.9 1.9 3.3 3.3 4.9 4.9 6.2
T1-04)
E2-02
Motor Rated Slip Hz 2.5 2.6 2.6 2.9 2.9 2.5 2.5 2.6 2.6 2.6
(E4-02)
E2-03
Motor No-Load Current A 0.4 0.8 0.8 1.2 1.2 1.8 1.8 2.3 2.3 2.8
(E4-03)
E2-05
Motor Line-to-Line Resistance Ω 35.98 20.56 20.56 9.842 9.842 5.156 5.156 3.577 3.577 1.997
(E4-05)
E2-06
Motor Leakage Inductance % 21.6 20.1 20.1 18.2 18.2 13.8 13.8 18.5 18.5 18.5
(E4-06)
W 6 11 11 14 14 26 26 38 38 53
E5-01 PM Motor Code Selection hex FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF 0002 0002 0003 0003 FFFF FFFF
Momentary Power Loss Ride-
L2-02 s 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.3
Thru Time
L2-03 s 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.4
Minimum Baseblock Time
L2-04 s 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Recovery Ramp Time
Undervoltage Detection Level
L2-05 V dc 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 190
(Uv1)
L8-02 Overheat Alarm Level °C 110 110 110 110 115 115 100 100 100 100
L8-09 − 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Selection
L8-35 Installation Method Selection − 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
L8-38 − 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Selection
Hunting Prevention Time
n1-03 ms 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Constant
n9-12 On-Delay Compensation Time ms 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 1.80 1.80
S6-01 DC Bus Capacity μF 220 220 220 220 220 220 330 330 800 800
S6-02 Motor Acceleration Time s 1.78 1.78 1.78 1.78 1.78 1.42 1.42 1.42 1.42 1.66
Parameter List

− Model CIMR-T − 2V0010 2V0012 2V0018 2V0020
HD ND HD ND HD ND HD ND
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
o2-04 Drive Model Selection Hex. 65 66 67 68
E2-11
(E4-11, Motor rated power kW 1.5 2.2 2.2 3.0 3.0 3.7 3.7 5.5
T1-02)
b3-06 − 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Search
b8-04 Energy Saving Coefficient Value − 169.4 156.8 156.8 136.4 136.4 122.9 122.9 94.75
C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection − 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1
E2-01
(E4-01, Motor Rated Current A 6.2 8.5 8.5 11.4 11.4 14 14 19.6
T1-04)
E2-02
Motor Rated Slip Hz 2.6 2.9 2.9 2.7 2.7 2.73 2.73 1.5
(E4-02)
E2-03
Motor No-Load Current A 2.8 3.0 3.0 3.7 3.7 4.5 4.5 5.1
(E4-03)
E2-05
Motor Line-to-Line Resistance Ω 1.997 1.601 1.601 1.034 1.034 0.771 0.771 0.399
(E4-05)
E2-06
Motor Leakage Inductance % 18.5 18.4 18.4 19 19 19.6 19.6 18.2
(E4-06)
W 53 77 77 91 91 112 112 172
E5-01 PM Motor Code Selection hex 0005 0005 0006 0006 FFFF FFFF 0008 0008
L2-02 s 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.5 1 1 1 1
Thru Time
L2-03 s 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.7
L2-04 s 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Recovery Ramp Time
L2-05 V dc 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 190
(Uv1)
L8-02 Overheat Alarm Level °C 100 100 100 100 110 110 110 110
L8-09 − 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Selection
L8-35 Installation Method Selection − 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
L8-38 − 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Selection
n1-03 ms 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Constant
n9-12 On-Delay Compensation Time ms 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.60 1.60 1.60 1.60
S6-01 DC Bus Capacity μF 800 800 1100 1100 2100 2100 2100 2100
S6-02 Motor Acceleration Time s 1.66 1.45 1.45 1.45 1.45 1.54 1.54 1.68

− Model CIMR-T − 2V0030 2V0040 2V0056 2V0069
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
o2-04 Drive Model Selection Hex. 6A 6B 6D 6E
E2-11
T1-02)
Output Current 1 during
b3-06 − 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Speed Search
Energy Saving Coefficient
b8-04 − 94.75 72.69 72.69 70.44 70.44 63.13 63.13 57.87
Value
E2-01
(E4-01, Motor Rated Current A 19.6 26.6 26.6 39.7 39.7 53 53 65.8
T1-04)
E2-02
(E4-02)
E2-03
(E4-03)
E2-05 Motor Line-to-Line
Ω 0.399 0.288 0.288 0.230 0.230 0.138 0.138 0.101
(E4-05) Resistance
E2-06
Motor Leakage Inductance % 18.2 15.5 15.5 19.5 19.5 17.2 17.2 15.7
(E4-06)
W 172 262 262 245 245 272 272 505
E5-01 PM Motor Code Selection hex FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF
L2-02 s 1 1 1.0 1.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
Ride-Thru Time
L2-03 s 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.0
L2-04 Voltage Recovery Ramp s 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.6 0.6
Time
Undervoltage Detection
L2-05 V dc 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 190
Level (Uv1)
Output Ground Fault
L8-09 − 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Detection Selection
Installation Method
L8-35 − 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Selection
Carrier Frequency
L8-38 − 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Reduction Selection
n1-03 ms 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Constant
On-Delay Compensation
n9-12 ms 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
Time
Parameter List
Table B.8 Three-Phase 400 V Class Drives Default Settings by Drive Model Selection
− Model CIMR-T − 4V0001 4V0002 4V0004 4V0005
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
o2-04 Drive Model Selection Hex. 91 92 93 94
E2-11
T1-02)
b3-06 − 1.0 1.0 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Search
E2-01
(E4-01, Motor Rated Current A 0.6 1 1 1.6 1.6 3.1 3.1 4.2
T1-04)
E2-02
Motor Rated Slip Hz 2.5 2.9 2.9 2.6 2.6 2.5 2.5 3
(E4-02)
E2-03
(E4-03)
E2-05
(E4-05)
E2-06
(E4-06)
W 12 14 14 26 26 53 53 77
L2-02 s 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.3
Thru Time
L2-03 s 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.5
L2-04 s 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Recovery Ramp Time
L2-05 V dc 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380
(Uv1)
L8-09 − 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Selection
L8-38 − 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Selection
n1-03 ms 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Constant
No. Description Unit Setting Range

− Model CIMR-T − 4V0007 4V0009 4V0011
HD ND HD ND HD ND
0 1 0 1 0 1
E2-11
T1-02)
b3-06 − 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Search
E2-01
(E4-01, Motor Rated Current A 4.2 5.7 5.7 7 7 9.8
T1-04)
E2-02
Motor Rated Slip Hz 3 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 1.5
(E4-02)
E2-03
Motor No-Load Current A 1.5 1.9 1.9 2.3 2.3 2.6
(E4-03)
E2-05
(E4-05)
E2-06
Motor Leakage Inductance % 18.7 19 19 19.3 19.3 18.2
(E4-06)
W 77 105 105 130 130 193
E5-01 PM Motor Code Selection hex FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF
L2-02 s 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Thru Time
L2-03 s 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.7
L2-04 s 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Recovery Ramp Time
L2-05 V dc 380 380 380 380 380 380
(Uv1)
L8-09 − 0 0 0 0 0 0
Selection
L8-38 − 1 1 1 1 1 1
Selection
n1-03 ms 10 10 10 10 10 10
Constant
Parameter List
No. Description Unit Setting Range

− Model CIMR-T − 4V0018 4V0023 4V0031 4V0038
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
o2-04 Drive Model Selection Hex. 99 9A 9C 9D
E2-11
T1-02)
b3-06 − 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Search
E2-01
(E4-01, Motor Rated Current A 9.8 13.38 13.3 19.9 19.9 26.5 26.5 32.9
T1-04)
E2-02
(E4-02)
E2-03
(E4-03)
E2-05
(E4-05)
E2-06
(E4-06)
W 193 263 263 385 385 440 440 508
L2-02 s 0.8 0.8 1 1 2 2 2 2
Thru Time
L2-03 s 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.0
L2-04 s 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.6 0.6 0.6
Recovery Ramp Time
L2-05 V dc 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380
(Uv1)
L8-09 − 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Selection
L8-38 − 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Selection
n1-03 ms 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Constant
B.7 E5-01 (PM Motor Code Selection) Dependent Parameters

The following tables show parameters and default settings that change with the PM Motor Code Selection E5-01 when
Open Loop Vector for PM motors is used.
◆ Yaskawa SMRA Series SPM Motor

Table B.9 1800 rpm Type Yaskawa SMRA Series SPM Motor Settings
Par. Description Unit Default Settings
PM Motor Code Selection − 0002 0003 0005 0006 0008
Voltage class − 200 Vac 200 Vac 200 Vac 200 Vac 200 Vac
E5-01
Rated power − 0.4 kW 0.75 kW 1.5 kW 2.2 kW 3.7 kW
Rated speed r/min 1800 1800 1800 1800 1800
E5-02 Motor Rated Power kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7
E5-03 Motor Rated Current A 2.1 4.0 6.9 10.8 17.4
E5-04 Number of Motor Poles – 8 8 8 8 8
E5-05 Motor Stator Resistance W 2.47 1.02 0.679 0.291 0.169
E5-06 Motor d-Axis Inductance mH 12.7 4.8 3.9 3.6 2.5
E5-07 Motor q-Axis Inductance mH 12.7 4.8 3.9 3.6 2.5
E5-09 Motor Induction Voltage Constant 1 mVs/rad 0 0 0 0 0
E5-24 Motor Induction Voltage Constant 2 mV/(r/min) 62.0 64.1 73.4 69.6 72.2
E1-04 Maximum Output Frequency Hz 120 120 120 120 120
E1-05 Maximum Voltage V 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
E1-06 Base Frequency Hz 120 120 120 120 120
E1-09 Minimum Output Frequency Hz 6 6 6 6 6
d-Axis Current for High Efficiency
n8-49 % 0 0 0 0 0
Control
S6-02 Motor Acceleration Time s 0.064 0.066 0.049 0.051 0.044
Table B.10 3600 rpm Type Yaskawa SMRA Series SPM Motor Settings
PM Motor Code Selection − 0103 0105 0106 0108
Voltage class − 200 Vac 200 Vac 200 Vac 200 Vac
E5-01
Rated power − 0.75 kW 1.5 kW 2.2 kW 3.7 kW
Rated speed r/min 3600 3600 3600 3600
E5-02 Motor Rated Power kW 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7
E5-03 Motor Rated Current A 4.1 8.0 10.5 16.5
E5-04 Number of Motor Poles – 8 8 8 8
E5-05 Motor Stator Resistance W 0.538 0.20 0.15 0.097
E5-06 Motor d-Axis Inductance mH 3.2 1.3 1.1 1.1
E5-07 Motor q-Axis Inductance mH 3.2 1.3 1.1 1.1
E5-09 Motor Induction Voltage Constant 1 mVs/rad 0 0 0 0
E5-24 Motor Induction Voltage Constant 2 mV/(r/min) 32.4 32.7 36.7 39.7
E1-04 Maximum Output Frequency Hz 240 240 240 240
E1-05 Maximum Voltage V 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
E1-06 Base Frequency Hz 240 240 240 240
E1-09 Minimum Output Frequency Hz 12 12 12 12
n8-49 % 0 0 0 0
Control
Parameter List
S6-02 Motor Acceleration Time s 0.064 0.066 0.049 0.051
◆ SS5 Motor: Yaskawa SSR1 Series IPM Motor

Table B.11 200 V, 1750 rpm Type Yaskawa SSR1 Series Motor
E5-01
Rated speed r/min 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750
E5-09 Motor Induction Voltage Constant 1 mVs/rad 233.0 229.5 250.9 247.9 248.6
E1-04 Maximum Output Frequency Hz 87.5 87.5 87.5 87.5 87.5
E1-06 <1> Base Frequency Hz 87.5 87.5 87.5 87.5 87.5
E1-09 <2> Minimum Output Frequency Hz 4.4 4.4 4.4 4.4 4.4
n8-49 % –7.2 –10.8 –11.1 –17.8 –17.5
Control

PM Motor Code Selection − 120A 120B 120D 120E
E5-01
Rated power − 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 11 kW 15 kW
Rated speed r/min 1750 1750 1750 1750
E5-02 Motor Rated Power kW 5.5 7.5 11.0 15
E5-09 Motor Induction Voltage Constant 1 mVs/rad 249.6 269.0 249.3 266.6
E1-04 Maximum Output Frequency Hz 87.5 87.5 87.5 87.5
E1-06 <1> Base Frequency Hz 87.5 87.5 87.5 87.5
E1-09 <2> Minimum Output Frequency Hz 4.4 4.4 4.4 4.4
n8-49 % –22.0 –17.3 –10.1 –10.3
Control
<1> Default setting value varies by the drive model (o2-04).
<2> Default setting is 75% of the drive rated current.
Table B.12 400 V, 1750 rpm Type Yaskawa SSR1 Series Motor
E5-01
Rated speed r/min 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750
E5-09 Motor Induction Voltage Constant 1 mVs/rad 466.0 459.0 501.8 485.7 498.7
E1-04 Maximum Output Frequency Hz 87.5 87.5 87.5 87.5 87.5
E1-06 <1> Base Frequency Hz 87.5 87.5 87.5 87.5 87.5
E1-09 <2> Minimum Output Frequency Hz 4.4 4.4 4.4 4.4 4.4
n8-49 % –7.2 –10.7 –11.1 –8.9 –7.9
Control

PM Motor Code Selection − 123A 123B 123D 123E
E5-01
Rated power − 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 11 kW 15 kW
Rated speed r/min 1750 1750 1750 1750
E5-02 Motor Rated Power kW 5.5 7.5 11.0 15
E5-09 Motor Induction Voltage Constant 1 mVs/rad 498.0 541.7 508.7 531.9
E1-04 Maximum Output Frequency Hz 87.5 87.5 87.5 87.5
E1-06 <1> Base Frequency Hz 87.5 87.5 87.5 87.5
E1-09 <2> Minimum Output Frequency Hz 4.4 4.4 4.4 4.4
n8-49 % –10.2 –17.4 –15.8 –12.6
Control
<1> Default setting value varies by the drive model (o2-04).
<2> Default setting is 75% of the drive rated current.
Parameter List
B.8 C6-02 (Carrier Frequency Selection) Dependent Parameters
B.8 C6-02 (Carrier Frequency Selection) Dependent Parameters

The following tables show parameters and default settings that change with the carrier frequency selection (C6-02).
Table B.13 C6-02 (Carrier Frequency Selection) Dependent Parameters
C6-02 C6-03 C6-04 C6-05

Setting Description Default Settings
1 2.0 kHz 2.0 2.0 0
2 5.0 kHz 5.0 5.0 0
3 8.0 kHz 8.0 8.0 0
4 10.0 kHz 10.0 10.0 0
5 12.5 kHz 12.5 12.5 0
6 15 kHz 15.0 15.0 0
The following tables show
parameters and default
F settings that change with Setting Setting Setting
the carrier frequency
reduction selection (L8-38).
Appendix: C
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications
C.1 SECTION SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

C.2 MEMOBUS/MODBUS CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
C.3 COMMUNICATION SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
C.4 CONNECTING TO A NETWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
C.5 MEMOBUS/MODBUS SETUP PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
C.6 DRIVE OPERATIONS BY MEMOBUS/MODBUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
C.7 COMMUNICATIONS TIMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
C.8 MESSAGE FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
C.9 MESSAGE EXAMPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
C.10 MEMOBUS/MODBUS DATA TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
C.11 ENTER COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
C.12 COMMUNICATION ERRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
C.13 SELF-DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
C.1 Section Safety
C.1 Section Safety

DANGER
Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power
supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc. To prevent
electric shock, wait at least one minute after all indicators are OFF and measure the DC bus voltage level to confirm
safe level.
WARNING
work on the drive.
Do not allow unqualified personnel to use equipment.
Maintenance, inspection and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar with
Before wiring terminals, disconnect all power to the equipment.
The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED will
extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc. To prevent electric shock, wait at least one minute after all
indicators are OFF and measure the DC bus voltage level to confirm safe level.
Fire Hazard
CAUTION
Crush Hazard
C.1 Section Safety
NOTICE
devices.
MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communications
C.2 MEMOBUS/Modbus Configuration
C.2 MEMOBUS/Modbus Configuration

Drives can be controlled from a PLC or other master device via serial communications using the MEMOBUS/Modbus
protocol.
MEMOBUS/Modbus communication can be configured using one master (PLC) and a maximum of 255 slaves. The
drive has slave functionality only, meaning that serial communication is normally initiated from the master and
responded to by the slaves.
The master performs serial communications with only one slave at a time. The address or node for each slave must be set
beforehand so that the master can communicate with the slave at that address. A slave that receives a command from the
master will perform the specified function and then send a response back to the master.
Figure C.1
Master (PLC or other)
DRIVE DRIVE DRIVE
Figure C.1 Connecting Multiple Drives to a PLC
C.3 Communication Specifications
C.3 Communication Specifications

MEMOBUS/Modbus specifications appear in the following table:
Item Specifications
Interface RS-422, RS-485
Communications Cycle Asynchronous (Start-stop synchronization)
Communication Speeds
1.2; 2.4; 4.8; 9.6; 19.2; 38.4; 57.6; 76.8; 115.2 kbps
Available
Communication Data length 8 bit (fixed)
Parameters
Parity Select even, odd, or none
Stop bit 1 bit (fixed)
Protocol MEMOBUS/Modbus (using RTU mode only)
Max Number of Slaves 31 drives (using RS-485 only)
MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communications
C.4 Connecting to a Network

This section explains the connection of a drive to a MEMOBUS/Modbus network and the network termination.
◆ Network Cable Connection

Follow the instructions below to connect the drive to a MEMOBUS/Modbus network.
1. With the power shut off, connect the communications cable to the drive and the master. Use the terminals shown
in the figure below for network cable connections.
Figure C.2
R+ R- S+ S- IG
R+ R− S+ S− IG
R+ Receive (+)
MA MB MC
R- Receive (-)
S+ Send (+)
S- Send (-)
IG Shield Ground
Figure C.2 Serial Communications Cable Connection Terminals

Note: Separate the communications cables from the main circuit cables and other wiring and power cables. Use shielded cables for the
communications cables, and properly shielded clamps to prevent problems with noise. When using RS-485 communications,
connect S+ to R+, and S- to R- as shown in the diagram below.
2. Check or set the terminating resistance at all slaves. Use the description in Network Termination on page 397
for slaves that are T1000V drives.
3. Switch the power on.
4. Set the parameters needed for serial communications (H5-01 through H5-12) using the LED operator.
5. Shut the power off and wait until the display on the LED operator goes out completely.
6. Turn the power back on.
7. The drive is now ready to begin communicating with the master.
◆ Connecting Multiple Drives

The wiring diagram below shows how multiple drives are connected when using MEMOBUS.
■ Using 2-Wire RS-485
Figure C.3
R+ R+
R– Drive
R–
PLC IG S+ S2
S+ S–
S– IG OFF ON
R+
R– Drive
S+ S2
S–
IG OFF ON
R+
R– Drive
S+ S2
S–
IG OFF ON
Figure C.3 Wiring for RS-485

Note: 1. Make sure the terminal resistor is switched on for the final drive in the comm. chain (DIP switch S2).
2. Set drive parameter H5-07 = 1 when using RS-485.
■ Using 4-Wire RS-422

Figure C.4
S+ R+
S– R– Drive
PLC IG S+ S2
R+ S–
R– IG OFF ON
R+
R– Drive
S+ S2
S–
IG OFF ON
R+
R– Drive
S+ S2
S–
IG OFF ON
Figure C.4 Wiring for RS-422

Note: 1. Make sure the terminal resistor is switched on for the final drive in the comm. chain.
2. Set drive parameter H5-07 = 0 when using RS-422.
MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communications
◆ Wiring Diagram for Multiple Connection

Figure C.5 and Figure C.6 explain the wiring diagrams for multiple connections using MEMOBUS/Modbus
communication.
■ RS-485 Interface
Figure C.5
Drive
S+ R+ SI-485/J
S– R–
PLC IG IG S2
R+ S+
Terminating
R– S– Register
OFF
Drive
R+ SI-485/J
R–
IG S2
S+
Terminating
S– Register
OFF
Drive
R+ SI-485/J
R–
IG S2
S+
Terminating
S– Register
ON
Figure C.5 RS-485 Interface

Note:
• Turn on the DIP switch at the SI-485/J that is located at the end of the network. Turn it off at all other slaves.
• Set H5-07 to “1” when using the RS-485 interface.
■ RS-422 Interface
Figure C.6
Drive
S+ R+ SI-485/J
S– R–
PLC IG IG S2
R+ S+
Terminating
R– S– Register
OFF
Drive
R+ SI-485/J
R–
IG S2
S+
Terminating
S– Register
OFF
Drive
R+ SI-485/J
R–
IG S2
S+
Terminating
S– Register
ON
Figure C.6 RS-422 Interface

Note:
• Turn on the DIP switch at the SI-485/J that is located at the end of the network. Turn it off at all other slaves.
• Set H5-07 to “0” when using the RS-485 interface.
◆ Network Termination
The two ends of the MEMOBUS/Modbus network line have to be terminated. The drive has a built in terminating
resistance that can be enabled or disabled using DIP switch S2. If a drive is located at the end of a network line, enable
the terminating resistance by setting DIP switch S2 to the ON position. Disable the terminating resistance on all slaves
that are not located at the network line end. Figure C.7 illustrates the setting of DIP switch S2.
Figure C.7
DIP switch S2 S+ +
(in the ON position)
OFF ON -
S-
RS-422A
or
R+ R− S+ S− IG
R+
RS-485
DIP
MA MB MC
switch
R+ R- S+ S- IG R- S2
terminal resistance (1/2 Ω , 120 Ω)
Figure C.7 Serial Communications Terminal and DIP Switch S2
MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communications
C.5 MEMOBUS/Modbus Setup Parameters

◆ MEMOBUS/Modbus Serial Communication
This section describes parameters necessary to set up MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.
■ H5-01: Drive Slave Address
Sets the drive slave address used for MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.
Note: After changing this parameter, the power must be cycled to enable the new setting.

H5-01 Drive Slave Address 0 to 20 H <1> 1F
<1> If the address is set to 0, no response will be provided during communications.
For serial communications to work, each individual slave drive must be assigned a unique slave address. Setting H5-01
to any value besides 0 assigns the drive its address in the network. Slave address don't need to be assigned in sequential
order, but each address needs to be unique so that no two drives have the same address.
■ H5-02: Communication Speed Selection
Sets the MEMOBUS/Modbus communications speed.

H5-02 Communication Speed Selection 0 to 5 3
H5-02 Communication Speed H5-02 Communication Speed

0 1200 bps 5 38400 bps
1 2400 bps 6 57600 bps
2 4800 bps 7 76800 bps
3 9600 bps 8 115200 bps
4 19200 bps
■ H5-03: Communication Parity Selection

Sets the parity used for MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.

H5-03 Communication Parity Selection 0 to 2 0
Setting 0: No Parity
Setting 1: Even Parity
Setting 2: Odd Parity
■ H5-04: Stopping Method after Communication Error
Selects the stopping method after a communications error (CE) has occurred.

H5-04 Stopping Method after Communication Error 0 to 3 3

■ H5-05: Communication Fault Detection Selection

Enables or disabled the communication error (CE) detection for MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.

H5-05 Communication Fault Detection Selection 0 or 1 1
Setting 0: Disabled
No error detection. The drive continues operation.
Setting 1: Enabled
If the drive does not receive data from the master for longer than the time set to H5-09, then a CE fault will be triggered
and the drive will operate as determined by parameter H5-04.
■ H5-06: Drive Transmit Wait Time
Sets the time the drive waits after receiving data from a master until responding data.

H5-06 Drive Transmit Wait Time 5 to 65 ms 5 ms
Figure C.8
PLC→Drive Drive→PLC PLC→Drive
Command message Response message Command message Time
24 bit length H5-06 setting
Figure C.8 Drive Transmit Wait Time Setting
■ H5-07: RTS Control Selection

Enables or disables RTS control.

H5-07 RTS Control Selection 0 or 1 1
Setting 0: Disabled - RTS is Always ON

Use this setting when using RS-485 signals for communications (1:1).
Setting 1: Enabled - RTS Turns ON when Sending
Use this setting when using RS-422 signals for communications (1:N).
■ H5-09: CE Detection Time
Sets the time the communications must be lost before the drive triggers a CE fault.

H5-09 CE Detection Time 0.0 to 10.0 s 2.0 s
■ H5-10: Unit Selection for MEMOBUS/Modbus Register 0025H

Sets the unit for the output voltage monitor value in MEMOBUS/Modbus register 0025H.
MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communications

H5-10 Unit Selection for MEMOBUS/Modbus Register 0025H 0 or 1 0
Setting 0: 0.1 V Units

Setting 1: 1 V Units
C
■ H5-11: Communications Enter Function Selection

Selects if an Enter command is needed to change parameter values via MEMOBUS/Modbus communications. Refer to
Enter Command on page 416.

Determined by
H5-11 Communications Enter Function Selection 0 or 1
o2-09
Setting 0: Enter Command Necessary

Parameter changes become effective after an Enter command. An Enter command must only be sent after the last
parameter change, not for each single parameter (such as in Varispeed F7).
Setting 1: Enter Command not Necessary
Parameter value changes become effective immediately without the need to send an Enter command (such as in
Varispeed VS606-V7)
■ H5-12: Run Command Method Selection
Selects the type of sequence used when the Run command source is set to MEMOBUS/Modbus communications (b1-02
or b1-16 = 2).

H5-12 Run Command Method Selection 0 or 1 0
Setting 0: FWD/Stop, REV/Stop

Setting bit 0 of MEMOBUS/Modbus register will start and stop the drive in the forward direction. Setting bit 1 will start
and stop the drive in reverse.
Setting 1: Run/Stop, FWD/REV
Setting bit 0 of MEMOBUS/Modbus register will start and stop the drive. Setting bit 1 changes the direction.
C.6 Drive Operations by MEMOBUS/Modbus
C.6 Drive Operations by MEMOBUS/Modbus

The drive operations that can be performed by MEMOBUS/Modbus communication depend on drive parameter settings.
This section explains the functions that can be used and related parameter settings.
◆ Observing the Drive Operation

A PLC can perform the following actions with MEMOBUS/Modbus communications at any time regardless of
parameter settings (except H5-).
• Observe drive status and drive control terminal status from a PLC.
• Read and write parameters.
• Set and reset faults.
• Set multi-function inputs. Inputs settings from the input terminals S and from MEMOBUS/Modbus communications
are both linked by an OR operation.
◆ Controlling the Drive

To start and stop the drive or set the frequency reference using MEMOBUS/Modbus communications, an external
reference must be selected and the parameters listed below must be adjusted accordingly.
Table C.1 Setting Parameters for Drive Control from MEMOBUS/Modbus
Reference Source Parameter Name Required Setting
b1-01 Frequency Reference Source 1 2
External Reference 1
b1-02 Run Command Source 1 2
b1-15 Frequency Reference Source 2 2
External Reference 2
b1-16 Run Command Source 2 2
Refer to b1-01: Frequency Reference Source 1 on page 113 and Refer to b1-02: Run Command Source 1 on page 115
for details on external reference parameter selections. Refer to Setting 2: External Reference 1/2 Selection on page 167
for instructions on how to select external reference 1 and 2.
MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communications
C.7 Communications Timing
C.7 Communications Timing

To prevent overrun in the slave drive, the master should wait a certain time between sending messages to the same drive.
In the same way, the slave drive must wait before sending response messages to prevent an overrun in the master. This
section explains the message timing.
◆ Command Messages from Master to Drive

In order to prevent overrun and data loss, the master must wait between receiving a response and sending the same type
of command as before to the same slave drive. The minimum wait time depends on the command as shown in the table
below.
Table C.2 Minimum Wait Time for Sending Messages
Command Type Example Minimum Wait Time
• Control command (Run, Stop)
1 • Set inputs/outputs 5 ms
• Read monitors and parameter values
H5-11 = 0: 50 ms
2 • Write parameters
H5-11 = 1: 200 ms <1>
200 ms to 2 s, depending on the
3 • Save changes using an Enter command
number of changed parameters <1>
<1> If the drive receives command type 1 data during the minimum wait time, it will perform the command and then respond. However, if it
receives a command type 2 or 3 during that time, either a communication error will result or the command will be ignored.
Figure C.9
Master Send
24 bit length
Wait Time
Figure C.9 Minimum Wait Time for Sending Messages

A timer should be set in the master to check how long it takes for the slave drive(s) to respond to the master. If no
response is received within a certain amount of time, the master should try resending the message.
◆ Response Messages from Drive to Master

If the drive receives a command from the master, it will process the data received and wait for the time set in H5-06 until
it responds. Increase H5-06 if the drive response causes overrun in the master.
Figure C.10
24 bit length H5-06

setting
Figure C.10 Minimum Response Wait Time
C.8 Message Format
C.8 Message Format

◆ Message Content
In MEMOBUS/Modbus communications, the master sends commands to the slave, and the slave responds. The message
format is configured for both sending and receiving as shown below, and the length of data packets depends on the
command (function) content.
SLAVE ADDRESS
FUNCTION CODE
DATA
ERROR CHECK
◆ Slave Address
The slave address in the message defines the note the message is sent to. Use addresses between 0 and 20H. If a message
with slave address 0 is sent (broadcast), the command from the master will be received by all slaves. The slaves do not
provide a response to a broadcast type message.
◆ Function Code
The three types of function codes are shown in the table below.
Data Length (bytes)

Function Function Name Command Message Response Message
Code
Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
03H Read MEMOBUS/Modbus registers 8 8 7 37
08H Loopback test 8 8 8 8
10H Write to multiple MEMOBUS/Modbus registers 11 41 8 8
◆ Data
Configure consecutive data by combining the MEMOBUS/Modbus register address (test code in case of a loopback test)
and the data the register contains. The data length changes depending on the command details.
A drive MEMOBUS/Modbus register always has a data length of two bytes. Therefore data written into drive registers
must also always have a length of two bytes. Register data read out from the drive will always consist of two bytes.
◆ Error Check
The drive uses a CRC-16 (cyclic redundancy check, checksum method) for checking data validity. Use the procedure
described below when calculating the CRC-16 checksum for command data or when verifying response data.
■ Command Data
When the drive receives data, it calculates the CRC-16 checksum from the data and compares it to the CRC-16 value
received within the message. Both must match before a command is processed.
An initial value of FFFFH (i.e., all 16 bits equal 1) must be used for CRC-16 calculations for the MEMOBUS/Modbus
protocol.
MEMOBUS/Modbus
Calculate the CRC-16 checksum using the following steps:

Communications
• The starting value is FFFFH.

• Perform an XOR operation of this value and the slave address.
• Right shift the result.
• When the overflow bit of the shift operation becomes 1, perform an XOR operation of the result from step 3 above and
the fix value A001H.
• Repeat steps 3 and 4 until eight shift operations have been performed.
C
C.8 Message Format
• After eight shift operations, perform an XOR operation with the result and the next data in the message (function code,
register address, data). Continue with steps 3 to 5 until the last data has been processed.
• The result of the last shift or XOR operation is the checksum.
The example in Table C.3 shows the CRC-16 calculation of the slave address 02H and the function code 03H, yielding
the result D140H.
Note: This example does not show the calculation for a complete MEMOBUS/Modbus command. Normally data would follow in the
calculation.
Table C.3 CRC-16 Checksum Calculation Example
Description Calculation Overflow Description Calculation Overflow
Initial Value (FFFFH) 1111 1111 1111 1111 Function Code 03H 0000 0000 0000 0011
Address 02H 0000 0000 0000 0010 XOR w result 1000 0001 0011 1101
XOR w initial value 1111 1111 1111 1101 Shift 1 0100 0000 1001 1110 1
Shift 1 0111 1111 1111 1110 1 XOR w A001H 1010 0000 0000 0001
XOR w A001H 1010 0000 0000 0001 XOR result 1110 0000 1001 1111
XOR result 1101 1111 1111 1111 Shift 2 0111 0000 0100 1111 1
Shift 2 0110 1111 1111 1111 1 XOR w A001H 1010 0000 0000 0001
XOR result 1100 1111 1111 1110 Shift 3 0110 1000 0010 0111 0
Shift 3 0110 0111 1111 1111 0 Shift 4 0011 0100 0001 0011 0
Shift 4 0011 0011 1111 1111 1 XOR w A001H 1010 0000 0000 0001
XOR result 1001 0011 1111 1110 Shift 5 0100 1010 0000 1001 0
Shift 5 0100 1001 1111 1111 0 Shift 6 0010 0101 0000 0100 1
Shift 6 0010 0100 1111 1111 1 XOR w A001H 1010 0000 0000 0001
XOR result 1000 0100 1111 1110 Shift 7 0100 0010 1000 0010 1
Shift 7 0100 0010 0111 1111 0 XOR w A001H 1010 0000 0000 0001
Shift 8 0010 0001 0011 1111 1 XOR result 1110 0010 1000 0011
XOR w A001H 1010 0000 0000 0001 Shift 8 0111 0001 0100 0001 1
XOR result 1000 0001 0011 1110 XOR w A001H 1010 0000 0000 0001
XOR result 1101 0001 0100 0000
1101 0001 0100 0000
Perform operations with next data (function code) CRC-16
D140H
Continue from here with next data.
■ Response Data
To be sure that the data is valid, perform a CRC-16 calculation on the response message data as described above.
Compare the result to the CRC-16 checksum that was received within the response message. Both should match.
C.9 Message Examples

Below are some examples of command and response messages.
◆ Reading Drive MEMOBUS/Modbus Register Contents

Using the function code 03H (Read), a maximum of 16 MEMOBUS/Modbus registers can be read out at a time.
The following table shows message examples when reading status signals, error details, data link status, and frequency
references from the slave 2 drive.
Command Message Response Message (normal) Response Message (fault)

Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H
Function Code 03H Function Code 03H Function Code 83H
Upper 00H Data Quantity 08H Error Code 03H
Starting No.
Lower 20H 1st storage Upper 00H Upper F1H
CRC-16
Upper 00H register Lower 65H Lower 31H
Data Quantity
Lower 04H Next storage Upper 00H
Upper 45H register Lower 00H
CRC-16
Lower F0H Next storage Upper 00H
register Lower 00H
Next storage Upper 01H
register Lower F4H
Upper AFH
CRC-16
Lower 82H
◆ Loopback Test
Function code 08H performs a loopback test. This test returns a response message with exactly the same content as the
command message and can be used to check the communications between the master and slave. User-defined test code
and data values can be set.
The following table shows a message example when performing a loopback test with the slave 1 drive.

Upper 00H Upper 00H Error Code 01H
Test Code Test Code
Lower 00H Lower 00H Upper 86H
CRC-16
Upper A5H Upper A5H Lower 50H
Data Data
Lower 37H Lower 37H
Upper DAH Upper DAH
CRC-16 CRC-16
Lower 8DH Lower 8DH
MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communications
◆ Writing to Multiple Registers

Function code 10h allows the user to write multiple drive MEMOBUS/Modbus registers with one message. This process
works similar to reading registers, i.e., the address of the first register that is to be written and the data quantity must be
set in the command message. The data to be written must be consecutive so that the register addresses are in order,
starting from the specified address in the command message. The data order must be high byte, then lower byte.
The following table shows an example of a message where a forward operation has been set with a frequency reference
of 60.0 Hz for the slave 1 drive.
If parameter values are changed using the Write command, depending on the setting of H5-11, an Enter command will be
necessary to activate the data or save them. Refer to H5-11: Communications Enter Function Selection on page 400
and Refer to Enter Command on page 416 for detailed descriptions.

Upper 00H Upper 00H Error Code 02H
Starting No. Starting No.
Lower 01H Lower 01H Upper CDH
CRC-16
Upper 00H Upper 00H Lower C1H
Data Quantity Data Quantity
Lower 02H Lower 02H
Number of Bytes 04H Upper 10H
CRC-16
Upper 00H Lower 08H
Starting Data
Lower 01H
Upper 02H
Next Data
Lower 58H
Upper 63H
CRC-16
Lower 39H
Note: For the number of bytes in the command message, take double the number of the data quantity.
C.10 MEMOBUS/Modbus Data Table

Table below lists all MEMOBUS/Modbus data. There are three types of data: command data, monitor data, and
broadcast data.
◆ Command Data
It is possible to both read and write command data.
Note: Bits that are not used should be set to 0. Refrain from writing to reserved registers.
Register No. Contents

0000H Reserved
Operation Signals and Multi-function Inputs
H5-12 = 0: Forward Run Command (0 = Stop, 1 = Forward Run)
bit 0
H5-12 = 1: Run Command (0 = Stop, 1 = Run)
H5-12 = 0: Reverse Run Command (0 = Stop, 1 = Reverse Run)
bit 1
H5-12 = 1: Forward/Reverse (0 = Forward, 1 = Reverse)
bit 2 External Fault (EF0)
bit 3 Fault Reset
Multi-Function Input 1
bit 4
0001H Function is ComRef when H1-01 = 40 (Forward/Stop).
Multi-Function Input 2
bit 5
Function is ComCtrl when H1-02 = 41 (Reverse/Stop).
bit 6 Multi-Function Input 3
bit A Multi-Function Input 7
bit B to bit F Reserved
0002H Frequency Reference Units are determined by parameter o1-03.
0003H V/f Gain, 2.0% to 200.0%
0004H, 0005H Reserved
0006H PID Target, 0.01% units, signed
0007H Analog Output Terminal AM Setting (10 V / 4000 H)
0008H Reserved
Settings for Multi-Function Digital Outputs
bit 0 Contact Output (terminal MA/MB-MC)
0009H bit 1 Photocoupler Output 1 (terminal P1-PC)
bit 2 Photocoupler Output 2 (terminal P2-PC)
bit 3 to bit F Reserved
000AH Pulse Output Terminal MP Setting, 1 Hz units, Setting Range: 0 to 32000
000BH to 000EH Reserved
Control Selection Setting
bit 0 Reserved
bit 1 PID Target Input
bit 2 to bit B Reserved
000FH
bit C Enable Terminal S5 Input for Broadcast Data
bit D Enable Terminal S6 Input for Broadcast Data
bit E Enable Terminal S7 Input for Broadcast Data
MEMOBUS/Modbus
bit F Reserved
Communications
◆ Monitor Data
Monitor data can be read only.

Drive Status 1
bit 0 During Run
bit 1 During Reverse
bit 2 Drive Ready
bit 3 Fault
bit 4 Data Setting Error
0020H
bit 5 Multi-Function Contact Output (terminal MA/MB-MC)
bit 6 Multi-Function Photocoupler Output 1 (terminal P1 - PC)
bit 8 to bit D Reserved
bit E ComRef status
bit F ComCtrl status
Fault Contents 1
bit 0 Overcurrent (oC), Ground fault (GF)
bit 1 Overvoltage (ov)
bit 2 Drive Overload (oL2)
bit 3 Overheat 1 (oH1), Drive Overheat Warning (oH2)
bit 4 Dynamic Braking Transistor Fault (rr), Braking Resistor Overheat (rH)
bit 5 Reserved
bit 6 Overcurrent (oC), Ground Fault (GF)
bit 7 EF0 to 7: External Fault
0021H bit 8 CPF: Hardware Fault (includes oFx)
Motor Overload (oL1), Overtorque Detection 1/2 (oL3/oL4), Undertorque Detection 1/2
bit 9
(UL3/UL4)
bit A PG Disconnected (PGo), Overspeed (oS), Excessive Speed Deviation (dEv),
bit B Main Circuit Undervoltage (Uv)
Undervoltage (Uv1), Control Power Supply Undervoltage (Uv2), Soft Charge Circuit Fault
bit C
(Uv3)
bit D Output Phase Loss (LF), Input Phase Loss (PF)
bit E MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error (CE), Option Communication Error (bUS)
bit F Operator Connection Fault (oPr)
Data Link Status
bit 0 Writing data or switching motors
bit 1
Reserved
bit 2
0022H
bit 3 Upper or lower limit error
bit 4 Data conformity error
bit 5 Writing to EEPROM
0023H Frequency Reference, <1>
0024H Output Frequency, <1>
0025H Output Voltage Reference, 0.1 V units (units are determined by parameter H5-10)
0026H Output current (0.1 A units) <2>
0027H Output Power
0028H Torque Reference (OLV only)
Fault Contents 2
bit 0 Reserved
bit 1 Ground Fault (GF)
bit 2 Input Phase Loss (PF)
0029H bit 3 Output Phase Loss (LF)
bit 4 Braking Resistor Overheat (rH)
bit 5 Reserved
bit 6 Motor Overheat 2 (PTC input) (oH4)

Alarm Contents1
bit 0 to bit 1 Reserved
bit 2 Run Command Input Error (EF)
bit 3 Drive Baseblock (bb)
bit 4 Overtorque Detection 1 (oL3)
bit 5 Heatsink Overheat (oH)
bit 7 Undervoltage (Uv)
002AH
bit 8 Cooling Fan Error (FAN)
bit 9 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error (CE)
bit A Option Communication Error (bUS)
bit B Undertorque Detection 1/2 (UL3/UL4)
bit C Motor Overheat (oH3)
bit D PID Feedback Loss (FbL, FbH)
bit E Reserved
bit F Serial Communication Transmission Error (CALL)
Input Terminal Status
bit 0 Terminal S1 Closed
002BH bit 3 Terminal S4 Closed
Drive Status 2
bit 0 During Run
bit 1 Zero Speed
bit 2 Speed Agree
bit 3 User Speed Agree
bit 4 Frequency Detection 1
bit 5 Frequency Detection 2
bit 6 Drive Ready
002CH bit 7 During Undervoltage
bit 8 During Baseblock
bit 9 Frequency Reference from Operator Keypad
bit A Run Command from Operator Keypad
bit B Over/Undertorque 1, 2
bit C Frequency Reference Loss
bit D During Fault Restart
bit E Fault
bit F Communication Timeout
Output Terminal Status
bit 0 Multi-Function Contact Output (terminal MA/MB-MC)
002DH bit 1 Multi-Function Photocoupler Output 1 (terminal P1 - PC)
002EH to 0030H Reserved
0031H DC Bus Voltage, 1 Vdc units
0032H Torque Monitor, 1% units
MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communications
0033H Reserved
0034H Product Code 1 [ASCII], Product Type (T0 for T1000V)
0035H Product Code 2 [ASCII], Region Code
0036H, 0037H Reserved
0038H PID Feedback, 0.1% units, unsigned, 100% / max. output frequency
0039H PID Input, 0.1% units, signed, 100% / max. output frequency
003AH PID Output, 0.1% units, signed, 100% / max. output frequency C
003B to 003CH Reserved

Communications Error Contents <3>
bit 0 CRC Error
bit 1 Data Length Error
bit 2 Reserved
003DH bit 3 Parity Error
bit 4 Overrun Error
bit 5 Framing Error
bit 6 Timeout
003EH r/min <4>
Output Frequency
003FH 0.01% units
0040H to 004AH Used for various monitors U1-. Refer to U: Operation Status Monitors on page 368 for parameter details.
Drive status (U1-12)
bit 0 During Run
bit 1 During Zero Speed
bit 2 During Reverse Run
bit 3 During Fault Reset Signal Input
bit 4 During Speed Agree
bit 5 Drive Ready
004BH bit 6 Alarm
bit 7 Fault
bit 8 During Operation Error (oPE)
bit 9 During Momentary Power Loss
bit A Motor 2 selected
bit B Reserved
bit E ComRef status, NetRef status
bit F ComCtrl status, NetCtrl status
Used for various monitors U1-, U4-, U5-, U6-, and U9-. Refer to U: Operation Status Monitors on
004CH to 007EH
page 368 for parameter details.
007FH Alarm Code, Refer to Alarm Register Contents on page 415 for alarm codes.
Used for monitors U2-, U3-. Refer to U: Operation Status Monitors on page 368 for parameter details and Refer
0080H to 0097H
to Fault Trace Contents on page 414 for register value descriptions.
0098H High Word of Accumulated Operation Time Monitor (U4-01)
0099H Low Word of Accumulated Operation Time Monitor (U4-01)
009AH High Word of Cooling Fan Operation Time Monitor (U4-03)
009BH Low Word of Cooling Fan Operation Time Monitor (U4-03)
00ABH Drive Rated Current <2>
00ACH Motor Speed (Open Loop r/min units <4>
00ADH Vector only) 0.01% units
Register contains ASCII code of 3rd and 4th digit of the option card type number. Example:
00B0H Option Code
Register value is 5343H for “P3” if a SI-P3 option card is installed.
00B5H Frequency Reference After r/min units <4>
00B6H Soft-starter 0.01% units
00B7H r/min <4>
Frequency Reference
00B8H 0.01% units
00BFH oPE Error Number

Fault contents 3
bit 0 Reserved
bit 1 Undervoltage (Uv1)
bit 2 Control Power Supply Undervoltage (Uv2)
bit 3 Soft Charge Circuit Fault (Uv3)
bit 4 Reserved
bit 5 Ground Fault (GF)
bit 6 Overcurrent (oC)
00C0H bit 7 Overvoltage (ov)
bit 9 Heatsink Overheat (oH1)
bit A Motor Overload (oL1)
bit B Drive Overload (oL2)
bit C Overtorque Detection 1 (oL3)
bit D Overtorque Detection 2 (oL4)
bit E Dynamic Braking Transistor Fault (rr)
bit F Braking Resistor Overheat (rH)
Fault contents 4
bit 0 External Fault at input terminal S3 (EF3)
bit 5, 6 Reserved
bit 7 Overspeed (oS)
00C1H
bit 8 Excessive Speed Deviation (dEv)
bit 9 PG Disconnected (PGo)
bit A Input Phase Loss (PF)
bit B Output Phase Loss (LF)
bit C Motor Overheat (PTC input) (oH3)
bit D Digital Operator Connection Fault (oPr)
bit E EEPROM Write Error (Err)
bit F Motor Overheat Fault (PTC input) (oH4)
Fault contents 5
bit 1 Option Communication Error (bUS)
bit 2, bit 3 Reserved
bit 4 Control Fault (CF)
bit 5 Reserved
00C2H
bit 6 Option External Fault (EF0)
bit 7 PID Feedback Loss (FbL)
bit 8 Undertorque Detection 1 (UL3)
bit 9 Undertorque Detection 2 (UL4)
bit A to bit E Reserved
bit F Hardware fault (includes oFx)
Fault contents 6
bit 0 to 4 Reserved
bit 5 Output Current Imbalance (LF2)
bit 6 Pullout Detection (Sto)
00C3H
MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communications
bit 8, 9 Reserved
bit A Too many speed search restarts (SEr)
bit B to F Reserved

Fault contents 7
bit 0 PID Feedback Loss (FbH)
bit 1 External Fault 1, input terminal S1 (EF1)
00C4H bit 2 External Fault 2, input terminal S2 (EF2)
bit 5 Current Offset Fault (CoF)
Alarm contents 2
bit 0 Undervoltage (Uv)
bit 3 Drive Overheat (oH2)
bit 4 Overtorque 1 (oL3)
bit 5 Overtorque 2 (oL4)
bit 6 Run Commands Input Error (EF)
00C8H
bit 7 Drive Baseblock (bb)
bit A External Fault 5, input terminal S5 (EF5)
bit B External Fault 6, input terminal S6 (EF6)
bit C External Fault 7, input terminal S7 (EF7)
bit D, bit E Reserved
bit F Overspeed (oS)
Alarm contents 3
bit 0 Excessive Speed Deviation (dEv)
bit 2 Digital Operator Connection Fault (oPr)
bit 4 Option Communication Error (bUS)
bit 5 Serial Communication Transmission Error (CALL)
bit 6 Motor Overload (oL1)
00C9H bit 7 Drive Overload (oL2)
bit 8 Reserved
bit 9 Option Card External fault (EF0)
bit A Motor 2 Switch command input during run (rUn)
bit B Reserved
bit C Serial Communication Transmission Error (CALL)
bit D Undertorque Detection 1 (UL3)
bit E Undertorque Detection 2 (UL4)
bit F MEMOBUS/Modbus Test Mode Fault (SE)
Alarm contents 4
bit 0 Reserved
bit 1 Motor Overheat 1 (PTC Input) (oH3)
00CAH bit 6 PID Feedback Loss (FbL)
bit 7 PID Feedback Loss (FbH)
bit 9 Reserved
bit A PG Disconnected (PGo)
bit B to F Reserved

Alarm contents 5
bit 3 High Current Alarm (HCA)
bit 7 Reserved
bit 8 External Fault 1 (input terminal S1) (EF1)
00CBH bit 9 External Fault 2 (input terminal S2) (EF2)
bit A Safe Disable Input (HbbF)
bit B Safe Disable Input (Hbb)
bit C Mechanical Weakening Detection 1
bit D Mechanical Weakening Detection 2
bit E, bit F Reserved
CPF Contents 1
bit 2 A/D Conversion Error (CPF02)
bit 3 PWM Data Fault (CPF03)
bit 6 Drive specification mismatch during Terminal Board or Control Board replacement (CPF06)
bit 7 Terminal Board Communications Fault (CPF07)
00D0H
bit 8 EEPROM Serial Communications Fault (CPF08)
bit 9, bit A Reserved
bit B RAM Fault (CPF11)
bit C FLASH Memory Fault (CPF12)
bit D Watchdog Circuit Exception (CPF13)
bit E Control Circuit Fault (CPF14)
bit F Reserved
CPF Contents 2
bit 0 Clock Fault (CPF16)
bit 1 Timing Fault (CPF17)
bit 2 Control Circuit Fault (CPF18)
bit 3 Control Circuit Fault (CPF19)
00D1H bit 4 Hardware fault at power up (CPF20)
bit 5 Hardware fault at communication start up (CPF21)
bit 6 A/D Conversion Fault (CPF22)
bit 7 PWM Feedback Fault (CPF23)
bit 8 Drive capacity signal fault (CPF24)
Option Card Fault Contents
bit 0 Option Compatibility Error (oFA00)
bit 1 Option not properly connected (oFA01)
00D8H
bit 3 Option Self-diagnostics Error (oFA03)
bit 4 Option Flash Write Mode Error (oFA04)
00FBH Output current, <2>
0820H to 0822H Used for various monitors U9-. Refer to U: Operation Status Monitors on page 368 for parameter details.
<1> Units are determined by parameter o1-03.
<2> 0.01 A units for drives set to 11 kW in Heavy or Normal Duty and 0.1 A units for drives set to 15 kW and above.
<3> The contents of a communication error are saved until the fault is reset.
<4> Depending on the motor used the correct motor pole number must be set to parameter E2-04, E4-04 or E5-05.
MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communications
◆ Broadcast Messages
Data can be written from the master to all slave devices at the same time.
The slave address in a broadcast command message must be set to 00H. All slaves will receive the message, but will not
respond.

Digital Input Command
bit 0 Forward Run (0: Stop 1: Run)
bit 1 Direction Command (0: Forward, 1: Reverse)
bit 4 External Fault
0001H bit 5 Fault Reset
bit 6 to bit B Reserved
bit C Multi-function digital input S5 (enabled when bit C in register 000FH is on)
bit D Multi-function digital input S6 (enabled when bit D in register 000FH is on)
bit E Multi-function digital input S7 (enabled when bit E in register 000FH is on)
bit F Reserved
0002H Frequency Reference 30000/100%
◆ Fault Trace Contents

The table below shows the fault codes that can be read out by MEMOBUS/Modbus commands from the U2-
monitor parameters.
Note: Uv1 and Uv2 faults are not saved to the fault history.
Table C.4 Fault Trace/History Register Contents
Fault Code Fault Name Fault Code Fault Name
0002H Undervoltage (Uv1) 0029H Undertorque Detection 1 (UL3)
0003H Control Power Supply Undervoltage (Uv2) 002AH Undertorque Detection 2 (UL4)
0004H Soft Charge Circuit Fault (Uv3) 0030H Hardware Fault (including oFx)
0006H Ground Fault (GF) 0036H Output Current Imbalance (LF2)
0007H Overcurrent (oC) 0037H Pullout Detection (Sto)
0008H Overvoltage (ov) 0038H PG Disconnected (PGo)
0009H Heatsink Overheat (oH) 003BH Too many speed search restarts (SEr)
000AH Heatsink Overheat (oH1) 0041H PID Feedback Loss (FbH)
000BH Motor Overload (oL1) 0042H External Fault 1, input terminal S1 (EF1)
000CH Drive Overload (oL2) 0043H External Fault 2, input terminal S2 (EF2)
000DH Overtorque Detection 1 (oL3) 0046H Current Offset Fault (CoF)
000EH Overtorque Detection 2 (oL4) 0083H A/D Conversion Error (CPF02)
000FH Dynamic Braking Transistor (rr) 0084H PWM Data Fault (CPF03)
Drive specification mismatch during Terminal Board
0010H Braking Resistor Overheat (rH) 0087H
or Control Board replacement (CPF06)
0011H External Fault at input terminal S3 (EF3) 0088H Terminal Board Communication Fault (CPF07)
0012H External Fault at input terminal S4 (EF4) 0089H EEPROM Serial Communication Fault (CPF08)
0013H External Fault at input terminal S5 (EF5) 008CH RAM fault (CPF11)
0014H External Fault at input terminal S6 (EF6) 008DH Flash memory circuit exception (CPF12)
0015H External Fault at input terminal S7 (EF7) 008EH Watchdog circuit exception (CPF13)
0018H Overspeed (oS) 008FH Control Circuit Fault (CPF14)
0019H Excessive Speed Deviation (dEv) 0091H Clock Fault (CPF16)
001AH PG Disconnect (PGo) 0092H Timing Fault (CPF17)
001BH Input Phase Loss (PF) 0093H Control Circuit Fault (CPF18)
001CH Output Phase Loss (LF) 0094H Control Circuit Fault (CPF19)
001DH Motor Overheat (PTC input) (oH3) 0095H Hardware fault at power up (CPF20)
001EH Digital Operator Connection (oPr) 0096H Hardware fault at communication start up (CPF21)
001FH EEPROM Write Error (Err) 0097H A/D Conversion Fault (CPF22)
Fault Code Fault Name Fault Code Fault Name

0020H Motor Overheat (PTC input) (oH4) 0098H PWM Feedback Fault (CPF23)
0021H MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error (CE) 0099H Drive capacity signal fault (CPF24)
0022H Option Communication Error (bUS) 0101H Option compatibility error (oFA00)
0025H Control fault (CF) 0102H Option not properly connected (oFA01)
0027H Option Card External Fault (EF0) 0104H Option Self-diagnostics Error (oFA03)
0028H PID Feedback Loss (FbL) 0105H Option Flash Write Mode Error (oFA04)
◆ Alarm Register Contents

The table below shows the alarm codes that can be read out from MEMOBUS/Modbus register 007FH.
Table C.5 Alarm Register 007FH Contents
Alarm Code Fault Name Alarm Code Fault Name
0001H Undervoltage (Uv) 0015H Option Communication Error (bUS)
0002H Overvoltage (ov) 0016H Serial Communication Transmission Error (CALL)
0003H Heatsink Overheat (oH) 0017H Motor Overload (oL1)
0004H Drive Overheat (oH2) 0018H Drive Overload (oL2)
0005H Overtorque 1 (oL3) 001AH Option Card External Fault (EF0)
0006H Overtorque 2 (oL4) 001BH Motor Switch command input during run (rUn)
0007H Run commands input error (EF) 001DH Serial Communication Transmission Error (CALL)
0008H Drive Baseblock (bb) 001EH Undertorque Detection 1 (UL3)
0009H External Fault 3, input terminal S3 (EF3) 001FH Undertorque Detection 2 (UL4)
000AH External Fault 4, input terminal S4 (EF4) 0020H MEMOBUS/Modbus Test Mode Fault (SE)
000BH External Fault 5, input terminal S5 (EF5) 0022H Motor Overheat (oH3)
000CH External Fault 6, input terminal S6 (EF6) 0027H PID Feedback Loss (FbL)
000DH External Fault 7, input terminal S7 (EF7) 0028H PID Feedback Loss (FbH)
000FH Cooling Fan Error (FAN) 002BH PG Disconnected (PGo)
0010H Overspeed (oS) 0034H High Current Alarm (HCA)
0011H Excessive Speed Deviation (dEv) 0039H External Fault (input terminal S1) (EF1)
0012H PG Disconnected (PGo) 003AH External Fault (input terminal S2) (EF2)
0013H Digital operator connection fault (oPr) 003BH Safe Disable Input (HbbF)
0014H MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error (CE) 003CH Safe Disable Input (Hbb)
MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communications
C.11 Enter Command
C.11 Enter Command

When writing parameters to the drive from the PLC using MEMOBUS/Modbus communication it depends on the setting
of parameter H5-11 if an Enter command must be used to enable these parameters or not. This sections explains Enter
commands.
◆ Enter Command Types

The drive supports two types of Enter commands as shown in the table below. An Enter command is enabled by writing
0 to register number 0900H or 0910H. These registers can be written to only. An error will occur if the user attempts to
read from these registers.
Table C.6 Enter Command Types
Register No. Description
Writes data into the EEPROM (non-volatile memory) of the drive and enables the data in RAM at the same time. Parameter
0900H
changes remain even if the power supply is cycled.
0910H Writes data in the RAM only. Parameter changes are lost when the drive is shut off.
Note: 1. Because the EEPROM can be written to a maximum of 100,000 times, refrain from writing to the EEPROM too often. The Enter
command registers are write-only. Consequently, if these registers are read, then the register address will be invalid (Error code:
02H). An Enter command is not required if reference or broadcast data are sent to the drive.
2. Parameter data cannot be written to EEPROM during undervoltage (Uv), even when using 0900H.
3. If undervoltage Uv occurs when making several parameter changes issued with a single ENTER command, the writing process may
be aborted before all of the new changes have been written. Because all of the data has not yet been written, the EEPROM data error
CPF06 will be displayed the next time power to the drive is cycled. To prevent this problem, wait about 5 seconds after issuing the
ENTER command before shutting off drive power.
◆ Enter Command Settings when Upgrading the Drive

When replacing earlier Yaskawa drive models with T1000V and keeping the MEMOBUS/Modbus communications
settings, parameter H5-11 needs to be set in accordance with how the Enter command functions in the older drive. H5-11
determines if an Enter command is needed or not in order to activate parameter changes in the drive.
• If upgrading from a G7 or F7 series drive to T1000V, set parameter H5-11 to 0.
• If upgrading from a V7 series drive to T1000V, set parameter H5-11 to 1.
■ H5-11 and the Enter Command
H5-11 Settings H5-11 = 0 H5-11 = 1

Drive being replaced G7, F7 V7
How parameter settings are
When the Enter command is received from the master. As soon as the value is changed.
enabled
Upper/lower limit check is performed taking the The upper/lower limit of the changed parameter is
Upper/lower limit check
settings of related parameters into account. checked only.
Default value of related Not affected. The settings of related parameters remain The default settings of related parameters are changed
parameters unchanged. They must be changed manually if needed. automatically.
Data is accepted even if one setting is invalid. The
Error handling when setting Error occurs if only one setting is invalid. All data sent
invalid setting will be discarded. No error message
multiple parameters are discarded.
occurs.
C.12 Communication Errors
C.12 Communication Errors

◆ MEMOBUS/Modbus Error Codes
A list of MEMOBUS/Modbus errors appears below.
When an error occurs, remove whatever caused the error and restart communications.
Error Name
Error Code
Cause
Function Code Error
01H
• Attempted to set a function code from a PLC other than 03H, 08H, and 10H.
Register Number Error
02H • A register number specified in the command message does not exist.
• Attempted to send a broadcast message using other register numbers than 0001H or 0002H.
Bit Count Error
• Read data or write data is greater than 16 bits. Invalid command message quantity.
03H
• In a write message, the “Number of Data Items” contained within the message does not equal twice the amount of data
words (i.e., the total of Data 1+ Data 2, etc.).
Data Setting Error
21H • Control data or parameter write data is outside the allowable setting range.
• Attempted to write a contradictory parameter setting.
Write Mode Error
• Attempted to write while the drive was operating to a parameter that cannot be written to during run.
22H • During an EEPROM data error (CPF06), the master attempted to write to a parameter other than A1-00 to A1-05, E1-03,
or o2-04.
• Attempted to write to read-only data.
DC Bus Undervoltage Write Error
23H • Attempted to write from the master during an undervoltage fault (Uv1).
• Attempted to execute and Enter command during Uv1.
Write Error During Parameter Process
24H
• Master attempted writing to the drive while the drive was processing parameter data.
◆ Slave Not Responding

In the following situations, the slave drive will ignore the command message sent from the master, and not send a
response message:
• When a communications error (overrun, framing, parity or CRC-16) is detected in the command message.
• When the slave address in the command message and the slave address in the drive do not match (remember to set the
slave address for the drive using H5-01).
• When the gap between two blocks (8 bit) of a message exceeds 24 bits.
• When the command message data length is invalid.
Note: If the slave address specified in the command message is 00H, all slaves execute the write function, but do not return response
messages to the master.
MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communications
C.13 Self-Diagnostics
C.13 Self-Diagnostics
The drive has a built-in self-diagnosing function of the serial communication interface circuits. To perform the self-
diagnosis function, use the following procedure.
DANGER! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on. Failure to comply will result in death or
serious injury. Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power
supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc. To prevent electric shock, wait
at least one minute after all indicators are OFF and measure the DC bus voltage level to confirm safe level.
1. Turn on the power to the drive.

2. Note the present terminal S6 function selection setting (H1-06) and set it for the communications test mode (H1-
06 = 67).
3. Turn off the power to the drive.
4. With the power off, wire the drive as shown in the following figure:
Figure C.11
R+ R㧙 S+ S㧙 IG
R+ R㧙 S+ S㧙 IG
P1 P2 PC A1 A2 +V AC AM AC MP S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 HC SC H1 RP
MA MB MC
Figure C.11 Terminal Connections for Communication Self-Diagnostics

5. Check and note the setting of DIP switch S3. Set it to NPN if it is in the PNP position.
6. Turn the power to the drive back on.
7. During normal operation, the drive will display PASS. This indicates that the communications test mode is
operating normally.
When a fault occurs, the drive will display “CE” on the keypad display.
8. Turn off the power supply.
9. Remove the wire jumpers from terminal R+, R-, S+, S- and, S6-SC and set back DIP switch S3 to its original
position. Set terminal S6 to its original function.
10. Return to normal operation.
Appendix: D
Standards Compliance
This appendix explains the guidelines and criteria for maintaining CE and UL standards.
D.1 SECTION SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

D.2 EUROPEAN STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
D.3 UL STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
D.4 SAFE DISABLE INPUT PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
D.1 Section Safety
D.1 Section Safety

DANGER
WARNING
confirm safe level.
WARNING
work on the drive.
D.1 Section Safety
WARNING
Fire Hazard
NOTICE
Yaskawa is not responsible for modification of the product made by the user. This product must not be modified.
Check all the wiring to ensure that all connections are correct after installing the drive and connecting other
devices.
Compliance
Standards
D
D.2 European Standards

Figure D.1
Figure D.1 CE Mark

The CE mark indicates compliance with European safety and environmental regulations and is required for engaging in
business and commerce in Europe.
European standards include the Machinery Directive for machine manufacturers, the Low Voltage Directive for
electronics manufacturers and the EMC guidelines for controlling noise.
This drive displays the CE mark based on the EMC guidelines and the Low Voltage Directive.
• EMC Guidelines: Devices used in combination with this drive must also be CE certified and display the CE mark.
When using drives displaying the CE mark in combination with other devices, it is ultimately the responsibility of the
user to ensure compliance with CE standards. After setting up the device, verify that conditions meet European
standards.
• Low Voltage Directive: 73/23/EEC, 93/68/EEC
◆ CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance

This drive has been tested according to European standard EN50178, and it fully complies with the Low Voltage
Directive.
To comply with the Low Voltage Directive, be sure to meet the following conditions when combining this drive with
other devices:
■ Area of Use
Do not use drives in areas with pollution higher than severity 2 and overvoltage category 3 in accordance with IEC664.
■ Installing Fuses on the Input Side
Connect a UL-compliant fuse to the drive input to prevent damage from a short circuit. Refer to Table D.4 for UL
compliance. Refer to on page Appendix Cover for drive input current and output current data.
■ Guarding Against Harmful Materials
When installing IP20/IP00 drives, use an enclosure that prevents foreign material from entering the drive from above or
below.
■ Grounding
The drive is designed to be used in T-N (grounded neutral point) networks. If installing the drive in other types of
grounded systems, contact your dealer or Yaskawa for instructions.
◆ EMC Guidelines Compliance

This drive is tested according to European standards EN61800-3 and it complies with the EMC guidelines.
■ EMC Filter Installation
The following conditions must be met to ensure continued compliance with guidelines. Refer to EMC Filters on
page 425 for EMC filter selection.
Installation Method
Verify the following installation conditions to ensure that other devices and machinery used in combination with this
drive also comply with EMC guidelines.
1. Install an EMC noise filter to the input side specified by Yaskawa for compliance with European standards.
2. Place the drive and EMC noise filter in the same enclosure.
3. Use braided shield cable for the drive and motor wiring or run the wiring through a metal conduit.
4. Keep wiring as short as possible. Ground the shield on both the drive side and the motor side.
Figure D.2
A D C
U/T1 U
V/T2 V
M
W/T3 W
E
A – Drive D – Metal conduit
B – 20 m max cable length between drive and motor E – Ground wire should be as short as possible.
C – Motor
Figure D.2 Installation Method
5. Ground the largest possible surface area of the shield to the metal conduit when using braided shield cable.
Yaskawa recommends using a cable clamp.
Figure D.3
C B
A – Braided shield cable C – Cable clamp (conductive)
B – Metal panel
Figure D.3 Ground Area
Three-Phase 200 V / 400 V Class
Figure D.4
L2
L3 L1
PE
PE
B
D C
E
L3 L2 L1
J
E
H F
A
G
Compliance
Standards
D
A – Ground the cable shield F – Motor cable (braided shield cable, max. 20 m)
B – Enclosure panel G – Motor
C – Metal plate H – Cable clamp
D – Grounding surface (remove any paint or sealant) I – Max. distance between drive and noise filter
E – Drive J – EMC noise filter
Figure D.4 EMC Filter and Drive Installation for CE Compliance (Three-Phase 200 V / 400 V Class)
Figure D.5
N
L1
PE PE
B
C
D
N L1
J
E
H F
A
G
A – Ground the cable shield F – Motor cable (braided shield cable, max. 20 m)
B – Enclosure panel G – Motor
C – Metal plate H – Cable clamp
D – Grounding surface (remove any paint or sealant) I – Wiring distance as short as possible
E – Drive J – EMC noise filter
Figure D.5 EMC Filter and Drive Installation for CE Compliance (Single-Phase 200 V Class)
■ EMC Filters
The drive should be installed with the EMC filters listed below in order to comply with the EN 61800-3, category C1
requirements.
Note: If the Safe Disable function of the drive is part of the safety concept of a machine or installation and used for a safe stop
according to EN60204-1, stop category 0, use only filters manufactured by Schaffner as listed below.
Table D.1 EN 61800-3 Category C1 Filters
Filter Data (Manufacturer: Schaffner)
Drive Rated Dimensions Drive Filter
CIMR-T Type Weight Dimensions
Current [W x L x H] Mounting Mounting
(kg) YxX
(A) (mm) Screw A Screw
200 V Single-Phase Units
BV0001 FS23638-10-07 10 0.44 71 x 169 x 45 51 x 156 M4 M5
BV0002 FS23638-10-07 10 0.44 71 x 169 x 45 51 x 156 M4 M5
BV0003 FS23638-10-07 10 0.44 71 x 169 x 45 51 x 156 M4 M5
BV0006 FS23638-20-07 20 0.75 111 x 169 x 50 91 x 156 M4 M5
BV0010 FS23638-20-07 20 0.75 111 x 169 x 50 91 x 156 M4 M5
BV0012 FS23638-30-07 30 1.1 144 x 174 x 50 120 x 161 M4 M5
200 V Three-Phase Units
2V0001 FS23637-4-07 4 0.4 71 x 169 x 40 51 x 156 M4 M5
2V0002 FS23637-4-07 4 0.4 71 x 169 x 40 51 x 156 M4 M5
2V0004 FS23637-4-07 4 0.4 71 x 169 x 40 51 x 156 M4 M5
2V0006 FS23637-4-07 4 0.4 71 x 169 x 40 51 x 156 M4 M5
2V0008 FS23637-14-07 14 0.58 111 x 169 x 45 91 x 156 M4 M5
2V0010 FS23637-14-07 14 0.6 111 x 169 x 45 91 x 156 M4 M5
2V0012 FS23637-14-07 14 0.6 111 x 169 x 45 91 x 156 M4 M5
2V0018 FS23637-24-07 24 0.9 144 x 174 x 50 120 x 156 M4 M5
2V0020 FS23637-24-07 24 0.9 144 x 174 x 50 120 x 161 M4 M5
2V0030 FS23637-52-07 52 2.0 137 x 304 x 56 100 x 289 M5 M5
2V0040 FS23637-52-07 52 2.0 137 x 304 x 56 100 x 289 M5 M5
2V0056 FS23637-68-07 68 2.6 175 x 340 x 65 130 x 325 M5 M6
2V0069 FS23637-80-07 80 3.1 212 x 393 x 65 167 x 378 M6 M8
4V0001 FS23639-5-07 5 0.5 111 x 169 x 45 91 x 156 M4 M5
4V0002 FS23639-5-07 5 0.5 111 x 169 x 45 91 x 156 M4 M5
4V0004 FS23639-5-07 5 0.5 111 x 169 x 45 91 x 156 M4 M5
4V0005 FS23639-10-07 10 0.7 111 x 169 x 45 91 x 156 M4 M5
4V0007 FS23639-10-07 10 0.7 111 x 169 x 45 91 x 156 M4 M5
4V0009 FS23639-10-07 10 0.7 111 x 169 x 45 91 x 156 M4 M5
4V0011 FS23639-15-07 15 0.9 144 x 174 x 50 120 x 161 M4 M5
4V0018 FS23639-30-07 30 1.8 137 x 304 x 56 100 x 289 M5 M5
4V0023 FS23639-30-07 30 1.8 137 x 304 x 56 100 x 289 M5 M5
4V0031 FS23639-50-07 50 2.7 175 x 340 x 65 130 x 325 M5 M6
4V0038 FS23639-50-07 50 2.7 175 x 340 x 65 130 x 325 M5 M6
Note: EMC filters for models CIMR-T2V0030 through 0069 are in compliance with IEC61800–3, Category 2. All other models
comply with Category 1.
Compliance
Standards
D
Figure D.6
W
Y H
LINE
X
L
LOAD
A
PE
Figure D.6 EMC Filter Dimensions
■ DC Reactors for EN 61000-3-2 Compliance

Table D.2 DC Reactors for Harmonics Reduction
Drive Model DC Reactor

CIMR-T Model Rating
200V Three-Phase Units
2V0004
UZDA-B 5.4 A 8 mH
2V0006
4V0002
UZDA-B 3.2 A 28 mH
4V0004
Note: Models not listed in the Table D.2 do not require a DC reactor for EMC compliance.
D.3 UL Standards
D.3 UL Standards
The UL/cUL mark applies to products in the United States and Canada indicates that UL has performed product testing
and evaluation and determined that their stringent standards for product safety have been met. For a product to receive
UL certification, all components inside that product must also receive UL certification.
Figure D.7
Figure D.7 UL/cUL Mark
◆ UL Standards Compliance
This drive is tested in accordance with UL standard UL508C and complies with UL requirements. The following
conditions must be met to maintain compliance when using this drive in combination with other equipment:
■ Installation Area
Do not install the drive to an area greater than pollution severity 2 (UL standard).
■ Main Circuit Terminal Wiring
Yaskawa recommends using UL-listed copper wires (rated at 75 °C) and closed-loop connectors or CSA-certified ring
connectors sized for the selected wire gauge to maintain proper clearances when wiring the drive. Use the correct crimp
tool to install connectors per manufacturer recommendation. Table D.3 lists a suitable closed-loop connector
manufactured by JST Corporation.
Table D.3 Closed-Loop Crimp Terminal Size (JIS C 2805) (same for 200 V and 400 V)
Wire Gauge Terminal Crimp Terminal Tightening Torque
mm2 (AWG) Screws Model Numbers N m (lb to in.)
M3.5 R1.25-3.5 0.8 to 1.0 (7.1 to 8.9)
0.75 (18)
M4 R1.25-4 1.2 to 1.5 (10.6 to 13.3)
M3.5 R1.25-3.5 0.8 to 1.0 (7.1 to 8.9)
1.25 (16)
M4 R1.25-4 1.2 to 1.5 (10.6 to 13.3)
M3.5 R2-3.5 0.8 to 1.0 (7.1 to 8.9)
M4 R2-4 1.2 to 1.5 (10.6 to 13.3)
2 (14)
M5 R2-5 2.0 to 2.5 (17.7 to 22.1)
M6 R2-6 4.0 to 5.0 (35.4 to 44.3)
M4 R5.5-4 1.2 to 1.5 (10.6 to 13.3)
M5 R5.5-5 2.0 to 2.5 (17.7 to 22.1)
3.5/5.5 (12/10)
M6 R5.5-6 4.0 to 5.0 (35.4 to 44.3)
M8 R5.5-8 9.0 to 11.0 (79.7 to 97.4)
M4 8-4 1.2 to 1.5 (10.6 to 13.3)
M5 R8-5 2.0 to 2.5 (17.7 to 22.1)
8 (8)
M6 R8-6 4.0 to 5.0 (35.4 to 44.3)
M8 R8-8 9.0 to 11.0 (79.7 to 97.4)
M4 14-4 <1> 1.2 to 1.5 (10.6 to 13.3)
M5 R14-5 2.0 to 2.5 (17.7 to 22.1)
14 (6)
M6 R14-6 4.0 to 5.0 (35.4 to 44.3)
M8 R14-8 9.0 to 11.0 (79.7 to 97.4)
M6 R22-6 4.0 to 5.0 (35.4 to 44.3)
22 (4)
M8 R22-8 9.0 to 11.0 (79.7 to 97.4)
30/38 (3/2) M8 R38-8 9.0 to 11.0 (79.7 to 97.4)
<1> Use the specified crimp terminals (Model 14–NK4) when using CIMR-T2V0030, T2V0040, and T4V0023 with 14 mm2 (6 AWG).
Compliance
Note: Use crimp insulated terminals or insulated shrink tubing for wiring connections. Wires should have a continuous maximum
Standards
allowable temperature of 75 °C 600 Vac UL-approved vinyl-sheathed insulation.
D
D.3 UL Standards
Use UL compliant fuses listed in the following table when wiring the main circuit. Branch circuit protection shall be
provided by any of the following:
• Non-time delay Class J, T, or CC fuses sized at 300% of the drive input rating
Note: Exceptional models are A6T6 with 2V0002, A6T15 with 2V0004 or 4V0004, A6T20 with 4V0005, and A6T25 with 4V0007.
• Time delay Class J, T, or CC fuses sized at 175% of the drive input rating
• Time-delay Class RK5 fuses sized at 225% of the drive input rating
Table D.4 Recommended Input Fuse Selection
Non-Time Delay Class-T Fuse Type
Fuse Type Fuse Ampere Rating (Manufacturer: Bussmann) Fuse Ampere Rating
Drive Model CIMR-T (Manufacturer: Ferraz) (A) (A)
500 Vac, 200 kAIR
600 Vac, 200 kAIR
BV0001 A6T6 6 FWH-25A14F 25
BV0002 A6T10 10 FWH-25A14F 25
BV0003 A6T20 20 FWH-60B 60
BV0006 A6T40 40 FWH-80B 80
BV0010 A6T40 40 FWH-100B 100
BV0012 A6T50 50 FWH-125B 125
2V0001 A6T3 3 FWH-25A14F 25
2V0002 A6T6 6 FWH-25A14F 25
2V0004 A6T15 15 FWH-25A14F 25
2V0006 A6T20 20 FWH-25A14F 25
2V0008 A6T25 25 FWH-70B 70
2V0010 A6T25 25 FWH-70B 70
2V0012 A6T30 30 FWH-70B 70
2V0018 A6T40 40 FWH-90B 90
2V0020 A6T40 40 FWH-90B 90
2V0030 FWH-100B 100
2V0040 FWH-200B 200
Not Available
2V0056 FWH-200B 200
2V0069 FWH-200B 200
4V0001 A6T3 3 FWH-40B 40
4V0002 A6T6 6 FWH-40B 40
4V0004 A6T15 15 FWH-50B 50
4V0005 A6T20 20 FWH-70B 70
4V0007 A6T25 25 FWH-70B 70
4V0009 A6T25 25 FWH-90B 90
4V0011 A6T30 30 FWH-90B 90
4V0018 FWH-80B 80
4V0023 FWH-100B 100
Not Available
4V0031 FWH-125B 125
4V0038 FWH-200B 200
■ Low Voltage Wiring for Control Circuit Terminals

Wire low voltage wires with NEC Class 1 circuit conductors. Refer to national state or local codes for wiring. Use a class
2 (UL regulations) power supply for the control circuit terminal.
Table D.5 Control Circuit Terminal Power Supply
Input / Output Terminal Signal Power Supply Specifications
Open Collector Outputs P1, P2, PC Requires class 2 power supply.
S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6, S7, SC, Use the internal LVLC power supply of the drive. Use class 2 for external
Digital Inputs / Outputs
HC, H1, RP, MP power supply.
Use the internal LVLC power supply of the drive. Use class 2 for external
Analog Inputs / Outputs +V, A1, A2, AC, AM
power supply.
D.3 UL Standards
■ Drive Short-Circuit Rating

This drive is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 600 V
ac maximum (Up to 240 V in 200 V class drives, up to 480 V for 400 V class drives), when protected by fuses as
specified in Table D.4.
◆ Drive Motor Overload Protection

Set parameter E2-01 (motor rated current) to the appropriate value to enable motor overload protection. The internal
motor overload protection is UL listed and in accordance with the NEC and CEC.
■ E2-01 Motor Rated Current
Setting Range: Model Dependent
Default Setting: Model Dependent
Parameter E2-01 (motor rated current) protects the motor if parameter L1-01 is not set to 0 (default is 1, standard
induction motor protection enabled).
If Auto-Tuning has been performed successfully, the motor data that was entered in T1-04 is automatically written into
parameter E2-01. If Auto-Tuning has not been performed, manually enter the correct motor rated current in parameter
E2-01.
■ L1-01 Motor Overload Protection Selection
The drive has an electronic overload protection function (oL1) based on time, output current and output frequency, which
protects the motor from overheating. The electronic thermal overload function is UL-recognized, so it does not require an
external thermal overload relay for single motor operation.
This parameter selects the motor overload curve used according to the type of motor applied.
Table D.6 Overload Protection Settings
Setting Description
0 Disabled
1 Standard fan cooled motor (default)
2 Drive duty motor with a speed range of 1:10
3 Vector motor with a speed range of 1:100
4 Permanent magnet motor with variable torque
Disable the electronic overload protection (L1-01 = 0: Disabled) and wire each motor with its own motor thermal
overload when connecting the drive to more than one motor for simultaneous operation.
Enable the motor overload protection (L1-01 = “1”, “2”, “3”, or “4”) when connecting the drive to a single motor unless
there is another means of preventing motor thermal overload. The electronic thermal overload function causes an oL1
fault, which shuts off the output of the drive and prevents additional overheating of the motor. The motor temperature is
continually calculated as long as the drive is powered up.
Setting L1-01 = 1 selects a motor with limited cooling capability below rated (base) speed when running at 100% load.
The oL1 function derates the motor when it is running below base speed.
Setting L1-01 = 2 selects a motor capable of cooling itself over a 10:1 speed range when running at 100% load. The oL1
function derates the motor when it is running at 1/10 or less of its rated speed for variable torque.
Setting L1-01 = 3 selects a motor capable of cooling itself at any speed — including zero speed — when running at 100%
load. The oL1 function does not derate the motor at any speed.
Setting L1-01 = 4 selects protection for a PM motor for derated torque.
Compliance
Standards
D
D.3 UL Standards
■ L1-02 Motor Overload Protection Time

Setting Range: 0.1 to 5.0 Minutes
Factory Default: 1.0 Minutes
The L1-02 parameter sets the allowed operation time before the oL1 fault occurs when the drive is running at 60 Hz and
150% of the full load amp rating (E2-01) of the motor. Adjusting the value of L1-02 can shift the set of oL1 curves up the
Y-axis of the diagram below but will not change the shape of the curves.
Figure D.8
Time (min)
10
7
3
Cold Start
1
0.4
Hot Start
0.1 Motor Current (%)

0 100 150 200 (E2-01=100 %)
Figure D.8 Motor Overload Protection Time
■ L1-03 Motor Overload Alarm Operation Selection
Setting Description
0 Ramp to Stop
1 Coast to Stop
2 Fast-Stop
3 Alarm Only (factory default)
■ L1-04 Motor Overload Fault Operation Selection
Setting Description
0 Ramp to Stop
1 Coast to Stop (factory default)
2 Fast-Stop
D.4 Safe Disable Input Precautions

◆ Specifications
Two Safe Disable inputs and one EDM output according to ISO13849-1 Cat. 3 PLd,
Inputs / Outputs
IEC61508 SIL2.
Operation Time Time from input open to drive output stop is less than 1 ms.
Demand Rate Low PFD = 1.24E-10
Failure Probability Demand Rate High or
PFH = 5.17E-10
Continuous
◆ Precautions
DANGER! Improper use of the Safe Disable function can result in serious injury or even death.
Make sure the whole system or machinery that the Safe Disable function is used in complies with safety requirements. When
implementing the Safe Disable function into the safety system of a machine, a thorough risk assessment for the whole system has to
be carried out to assure it complies with relevant safety norms (e.g., EN954-1, Safety Category 3, IEC61508, SIL2, and EN62061).
DANGER! When using a PM motor, even if the drive output is shut off by the Safe Disable function, a break down of two output
transistors can cause current to flow through the motor winding, resulting in a rotor movement for a maximum angle of 180 degree
(electrically). Make sure such a situation would have no effect on the safety of the application when using the Safe Disable function.
This is not a concern with induction motors.
DANGER! The Safe Disable function can switch off the drive output, but does not cut the drive power supply and cannot electrically
isolate the drive output from the input. Always shut off the drive power supply when performing maintenance or installations on the
drive input side as well as the drive output side.
DANGER! When using the Safe Disable inputs, make sure to remove the wire links between terminals H1 and HC that were installed
prior to shipment. Failing to do so will keep the Safe Disable circuit from operating properly and can cause injury or even death.
DANGER! All safety features (including Safe Disable) should be inspected daily and periodically. If the system is not operating
normally, there is a risk of serious personal injury.
DANGER! Only a qualified technician with a thorough understanding of the drive, the instruction manual, and safety standards should
be permitted to wire, inspect, and maintain the Safe Disable input.
NOTICE: From the moment terminal H1 has opened, it takes up to 1 ms for drive output to shut off completely. The sequence set up to
trigger terminal H1 should make sure that terminal H1 remains open for at least 1 ms in order to properly interrupt drive output.
NOTICE: When utilizing the Safe Disable function, use only the EMC filters recommended in EMC Filter Installation on
page 422.
◆ Safe Disable Function Description

Safe Disable inputs have been designed to meet the requirements of the ISO13849-1, Category 3 PLd, and IEC61508,
SIL2.
Opening the connection between terminal HC and H1 disables the drive output, i.e. the power supply to the motor is cut
by stopping the switching of the output transistors in a safe way. “Hbb” is shown on the display. Safe Disable is
applicable for induction and permanent magnet motors.
Compliance
Standards
D
◆ Installation
If the Safe Disable function is utilized, the wire link between the terminals HC and H1 that is installed at shipment must
be removed entirely.
Connect the drive to an EN954-1, Safety Category 3 interrupting device so that in case of a Safe Disable request the
connection between the terminals HC and H1 is opened.
Figure D.9
Power Supply
Drive
EN954-1 Safety
Cat, 3 Device
HC Controller
H1
Figure D.9 Safe Disable Wiring Example
■ Installation Precautions
• To ensure the Safe Disable function appropriately fulfills the safety requirements of the application, a thorough risk
assessment for the safety system must be carried out.
• The drive must be installed in an enclosure with a protection degree of at least IP54 in order to maintain EN954-1,
safety category 3 compliance.
• If the safety device and the drive are installed in separate cabinets, install the Safe Disable wires in a manner
preventing short circuits.
• The Safe Disable function does not cut the power supply to the drive and does not provide electrical isolation. Before
any installation or maintenance work is done, the power supply of the drive must be switched off.
• Consider the following when using PM motors: When the Safe Disable function is active, a failure in two of the drive
power devices can occur and current will continue to flow through the motor winding. This failure will not produce
torque in an induction motor, however, when occurring in a PM motor, torque will be produced and cause an alignment
of the rotor magnets, which may cause the rotor to turn up to 180 degrees electrically. Ensure that this possible failure
mode is not safety-critical for the application.
• The wiring distance for the Safe Disable inputs should not exceed 30 m.
• The time from opening the Safe Disable input until the drive output is switched off is less than 1 ms.
• When utilizing the Safe Disable function use the recommended EMC filters manufactured by Schaffner only.
Appendix: E
Quick Reference Sheet

This section provides tables to keep record of the drive specification, motor specification and
drive settings. Fill in the data after commissioning the application and have them ready when
contacting Yaskawa for technical assistance.
E.1 DRIVE AND MOTOR SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

E.2 BASIC PARAMETER SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
E.3 USER SETTING TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
E.1 Drive and Motor Specifications
E.1 Drive and Motor Specifications

◆ Drive Specifications
AC drive model MODEL : CIMR-TA2V0004BMA

IND.CONT.EQ.
Output specifications OUTPUT : AC3PH 0-240V 0-400Hz 3.5A / 3.0A 7J48 B
Lot number O/N :
Serial number S/N :

PASS
Items Value
Model CIMR-T
Serial Number
Software Version (PRG)

Options used (Option cards, braking
transistor, etc.)
◆ Motor Specifications
■ Induction Motor
Items Value Items Value

Motor Rated Current
Manufacturer A
(T1-04)
Motor Base Frequency
Model Hz
(T1-05)
Number of Motor Poles
Motor Rated Power (T1-02) kW (T1-06)
Motor Rated Voltage (T1-03) V Motor Rated Speed (T1-07) r/min
Note: 1. These values must be entered as part of the Auto-Tuning process.

2. Auto-Tuning for the permanent magnetic motor such as IPM or SPM motor is not available.
E.2 Basic Parameter Settings

Use these tables to keep record of the most important parameters. Have these data available when contacting the
technical support.
◆ Basic Setup
Item Setting Value Memo Item Setting Value Memo
Frequency Reference
Control Mode A1-02 = b1-01 =
Source
Normal/Heavy Duty Run Command
C6-01 = b1-02 =
Selection Source
◆ V/f Pattern Setup

V/f Pattern Selection E1-03 = Middle Output Frequency E1-07 =
Max. Output Frequency E1-04 = Mid. Output Freq. Voltage E1-08 =
Maximum Voltage E1-05 = Min. Output Frequency E1-09 =
Base Frequency E1-06 = Min. Output Freq. Voltage E1-10 =
◆ Motor Setup
Motor Rated Current E2-01 = Number of Motor Poles E2-04 =
Induction
Motor Rated Slip E2-02 = Line-to-Line Resistance E2-05 =
Motor
Motor No-Load Current E2-03 = Motor Leakage Inductance E2-06 =
Motor Code Selection E5-01 = Motor d-Axis Inductance E5-06 =
Motor Rated Power E5-02 = Motor q-Axis Inductance E5-07 =
PM
Motor Rated Current E5-03 = Induction Volt. Const.1 E5-09 =
Motor
Number of Motor Poles E5-04 = Induction Volt. Const. 2 E5-24 =
Motor Stator Resistance E5-05 =
◆ Multi-Function Digital Inputs

Termin Input Setting Value and Memo Termin Input Setting Value and Memo
al Used Function Name al Used Function Name
S1 H1-01 = S5 H1-05 =
S2 H1-02 = S6 H1-06 =
S3 H1-03 = S7 H1-07 =
S4 H1-04 =
◆ Pulse Train Input/Analog Inputs

Terminal Input Used Setting Value and Function Name Memo
RP H6-01 =
A1 H3-02 =
A2 H3-10 =
Quick Reference
Sheet
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710606 38B YASKAWA AC Drive - T1000V Technical Manual 435 E
◆ Multi-Function Digital Outputs

Terminal Output Used Setting Value and Function Name Memo
MA/MB/
H2-01 =
MC
P1-C1 H2-02 =
P2-C2 H2-03 =
◆ Monitor Outputs
Terminal Output Used Setting Value and Function Name Memo
AM H4-01 =
MP H6-06 =
E.3 User Setting Table

Use the Verify Menu to see which parameters have been changed from their original default settings.
• The diamond below the parameter number indicates that the parameter setting can be changed during run.
• Parameter names in bold face type are included in the Setup Group of parameters.
User User
No. Name No. Name
Setting Setting
A1-00 b3-18
Language Selection Speed Search Restart Detection Time

A1-01 b3-19 Number of Speed Search Restarts
Access Level Selection
b3-24 Speed Search Method Selection
A1-02 Control Method Selection b3-25
Speed Search Wait Time
A1-03 Initialize Parameters
A1-04 Password b4-01
Timer Function On-Delay Time
A1-05 Password Setting
A2-02 to b4-02
User Parameters 1 to 32 Timer Function Off-Delay Time
A2-32
A2-33 User Parameter Automatic Selection b5-01 PID Function Setting
b1-01 Frequency Reference Source 1 b5-02
Proportional Gain Setting (P)
b1-02 Run Command Source 1
b1-03 Stopping Method Selection b5-03
Integral Time Setting (I)

b1-04 Reverse Operation Selection
b5-04
b1-07 LOCAL/REMOTE Run Selection Integral Limit Setting

Run Command Selection while in
b1-08 b5-05
Programming Mode Derivative Time (D)

b1-14 Phase Order Selection
b5-06
b1-15 Frequency Reference Source 2 PID Output Limit

b1-16 Run Command Source 2 b5-07
PID Offset Adjustment
b1-17 Run Command at Power Up
b2-01 b5-08
DC Injection Braking Start Frequency PID Primary Delay Time Constant

b2-02 b5-09 PID Output Level Selection
DC Injection Braking Current
b5-10
PID Output Gain Setting
b2-03
DC Injection Braking Time at Start
b5-11 PID Output Reverse Selection
b2-04 b5-12 PID Feedback Loss Detection Selection
DC Injection Braking Time at Stop

b5-13
b2-08 Magnetic Flux Compensation Value PID Feedback Low Detection Level

b2-10 DC Injection Braking Current 2 b5-14
PID Feedback Loss Detection Time
b2-12 Short Circuit Brake Time at Start
b2-13 Short Circuit Brake Time at Stop b5-15
PID Sleep Function Start Level
b3-01 Speed Search Selection at Start
b3-02 b5-16
Speed Search Deactivation Current PID Sleep Delay Time

b3-03 b5-17
Speed Search Deceleration Time PID Accel/Decel Time

b3-04 b5-18 PID Setpoint Selection
V/f Gain during Speed Search
b5-19
PID Setpoint Value
b3-05
Speed Search Delay Time
b5-20 PID Setpoint Scaling
b3-06 b5-34
Output Current 1 during Speed Search PID Output Lower Limit

b3-10 b5-35
Speed Search Detection Compensation Gain PID Input Limit

b3-14 Bi-Directional Speed Search Selection b5-36
Quick Reference
PID Feedback High Detection Level

b3-17
Speed Search Restart Current Level

Sheet
User User
No. Name No. Name
Setting Setting
b5-37 C4-05 Torque Compensation Time Constant
PID Feedback High Detection Time
C4-06 Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time 2
b5-38 PID Setpoint User Display C5-01
ASR Proportional Gain 1
b5-39 PID Setpoint and Display Digits
Frequency Reference Monitor Content during C5-02
b5-40 ASR Integral Time 1
PID
b6-01 Dwell Reference at Start C5-03
ASR Proportional Gain 2
b6-02 Dwell Time at Start
b6-03 Dwell Reference at Stop C5-04
ASR Integral Time 2
b6-04 Dwell Time at Stop
b8-01 Energy Saving Control Selection C5-05 ASR Limit
b8-02 C6-01 Duty Mode Selection
Energy Saving Gain C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection

b8-03 C6-03 Carrier Frequency Upper Limit
Energy Saving Control Filter Time Constant
Carrier Frequency Lower Limit (V/f Control
C6-04
b8-04 Energy Saving Coefficient Value only)
b8-05 Power Detection Filter Time Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain (V/f
C6-05
b8-06 Search Operation Voltage Limit Control only)
C1-01 C6-06 PWM Method
Acceleration Time 1 d1-01
Frequency Reference 1
C1-02
Deceleration Time 1 d1-02
C1-03
Acceleration Time 2 d1-03
C1-04
Deceleration Time 2 d1-04
C1-05
Acceleration Time 3 (Motor 2 Accel Time 1) d1-05
C1-06
Deceleration Time 3 (Motor 2 Decel Time 1) d1-06
C1-07
Acceleration Time 4 (Motor 2 Accel Time 2) d1-07
C1-08
Deceleration Time 4 (Motor 2 Decel Time 2) d1-08
C1-09 Fast Stop Time
C1-10 Accel/Decel Time Setting Units d1-17
Jog Frequency Reference

C1-11 Accel/Decel Time Switching Frequency
d2-01 Frequency Reference Upper Limit
C2-01
S-Curve Characteristic at Accel Start d2-02
Frequency Reference Lower Limit

C2-02
S-Curve Characteristic at Accel End d2-03
Master Speed Reference Lower Limit

C2-03
S-Curve Characteristic at Decel Start d2-04
Frequency Reference 2 Upper Limit

C2-04
S-Curve Characteristic at Decel End d2-05
Frequency Reference 2 Lower Limit

C3-01
Slip Compensation Gain d7-01
Offset Frequency 1

C3-02
Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time d7-02
Offset Frequency 2

C3-03 Slip Compensation Limit
d7-03
Slip Compensation Selection during Offset Frequency 3
C3-04
Regeneration
E1-01 Input Voltage Setting
C3-05 Output Voltage Limit Operation Selection
E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection
C4-01
Torque Compensation Gain E1-04 Maximum Output Frequency

C4-02 Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time E1-05 Maximum Voltage
C4-03 Torque Compensation at Forward Start E1-06 Base Frequency
C4-04 Torque Compensation at Reverse Start E1-07 Middle Output Frequency
User User
No. Name No. Name
Setting Setting
E1-08 Middle Output Frequency Voltage F1-10 Excessive Speed Deviation Detection Level
E1-09 Minimum Output Frequency Excessive Speed Deviation Detection Delay
F1-11
E1-10 Minimum Output Frequency Voltage Time
E1-11 Middle Output Frequency 2 F1-14 PG Open-Circuit Detection Time
E1-12 Mid Output Frequency Voltage 2 F6-01 Communications Error Operation Selection
E1-13 Base Voltage External Fault from Comm. Option Detection
F6-02
E2-01 Motor Rated Current Selection
E2-02 Motor Rated Slip External Fault from Comm. Option Operation
F6-03
Selection
E2-03 Motor No-Load Current
NetRef/ComRef Function Preselection
E2-04 Number of Motor Poles F6-07
Capability
E2-05 Motor Line-to-Line Resistance
F6-08 Reset Communication Parameters
E2-06 Motor Leakage Inductance
F6-10 CC-Link Node Address
E2-07 Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient 1
F6-11 CC-Link Communications Speed
F6-14 bUS Error Auto Reset
E2-09 Motor Mechanical Loss
F6-30 PROFIBUS-DP Node Address
E2-10 Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation
F6-31 PROFIBUS-DP Clear Mode Selection
E2-11 Motor Rated Power
F6-32 PROFIBUS-DP Data Format Selection
F6-35 CANopen Node ID Selection
E3-01 Motor 2 Control Mode Selection
F6-36 CANopen Communication Speed
E3-04 Motor 2 Max Output Frequency
F6-50 DeviceNet MAC Address
E3-05 Motor 2 Max Voltage
F6-51 Device Net Communications Speed
E3-06 Motor 2 Base Frequency
F6-52 DeviceNet PCA Setting
E3-07 Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency
F6-53 DeviceNet PPA Setting
E3-08 Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency Voltage
F6-54 DeviceNet Idle Mode Fault Detection
E3-09 Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency
F6-55 DeviceNet Baud Rate Monitor
E3-10 Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency Voltage
F6-56 DeviceNet Speed Scaling
E3-11 Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency 2
F6-57 DeviceNet Current Scaling
E3-12 Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency Voltage 2
F6-58 DeviceNet Torque Scaling
E3-13 Motor 2 Base Voltage
F6-59 DeviceNet Power Scaling
E4-01 Motor 2 Rated Current
F6-60 DeviceNet Voltage Scaling
E4-02 Motor 2 Rated Slip
F6-61 DeviceNet Time Scaling
E4-03 Motor 2 Rated No-Load Current
F6-62 DeviceNet Heartbeat Interval
E4-04 Motor 2 Motor Poles
F6-63 DeviceNet Network MAC ID
E4-05 Motor 2 Line-to-Line Resistance
F6-64 to
E4-06 Motor 2 Leakage Inductance Dynamic Assembly Parameters (Reserved)
F6-71
E4-10 Motor 2 Iron Loss Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S1
H1-01
E4-11 Motor 2 Rated Power Function Selection
E4-14 Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S2
Motor 2 Slip Compensation Gain H1-02
Function Selection
E4-15 Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S3
Motor 2 Torque Compensation Gain H1-03
Function Selection
E5-01 PM Motor Code Selection Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S4
H1-04
E5-02 Motor Rated Power Function Selection
E5-03 Motor Rated Current Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S5
H1-05
E5-04 Number of Motor Poles Function Selection
E5-05 Motor Stator Resistance Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S6
H1-06
Function Selection
E5-06 Motor d-Axis Inductance
Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S7
E5-07 Motor q-Axis Inductance H1-07
Function Selection
E5-09 Motor Induction Voltage Constant 1
Terminal MA, MB and MC Function Selection
E5-24 Motor Induction Voltage Constant 2 H2-01
(relay)
F1-02 PG 1 Pulses Per Revolution Terminal P1-PC Function Selection (open-
F1-03 Operation Selection at Overspeed (oS) H2-02
collector)
Quick Reference
F1-04 Operation Selection at Deviation (dEv) Terminal P2-PC Function Selection (open-
H2-03
F1-08 Overspeed Detection Level collector)
F1-09 Overspeed Detection Delay Time H2-06 Watt Hour Output Unit Selection
Sheet
User User
No. Name No. Name
Setting Setting
H3-01 Terminal A1 Signal Level Selection Momentary Power Loss Minimum Baseblock
L2-03
H3-02 Terminal A1 Function Selection Time
H3-03 Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery
Terminal A1 Gain Setting L2-04
Ramp Time
H3-04 L2-05 Undervoltage Detection Level (Uv1)
Terminal A1 Bias Setting
L3-01 Stall Prevention Selection during Acceleration
H3-09 Terminal A2 Signal Level Selection L3-02
Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration
H3-10 Terminal A2 Function Selection
H3-11 L3-03
Terminal A2 Gain Setting Stall Prevention Limit during Acceleration

H3-12 Stall Prevention Selection during
Terminal A2 Bias Setting L3-04
Deceleration
H3-13 Analog Input Filter Time Constant L3-05 Stall Prevention Selection during Run
Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal AM L3-06
H4-01 Stall Prevention Level during Run
Monitor Selection
H4-02 Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal L3-10
Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration
AM Gain
H4-03 Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal AM L3-11 Overvoltage Suppression Function Selection
Bias L3-17 Target DC Bus Voltage for Overvoltage
H5-01 Drive Node Address Suppression and Stall Prevention
H5-02 Communication Speed Selection L3-22 Deceleration Time at Stall Prevention during
H5-03 Communication Parity Selection Acceleration
Stopping Method after Communication Error Automatic Reduction Selection for Stall
H5-04 L3-23
(CE) Prevention during Run
H5-05 Communication Fault Detection Selection L4-01
Speed Agreement Detection Level

H5-06 Drive Transmit Wait Time
L4-02
H5-07 RTS Control Selection Speed Agreement Detection Width

H5-09 CE Detection Time
L4-03
Unit Selection for MEMOBUS/Modbus Speed Agreement Detection Level (+/-)
H5-10
Register 0025H
L4-04
H5-11 Communications ENTER Function Selection Speed Agreement Detection Width (+/-)

H5-12 Run Command Method Selection L4-05 Frequency Reference Loss Detection Selection
Pulse Train Input Terminal RP Function L4-06 Frequency Reference at Reference Loss
H6-01
Selection
L4-07 Speed Agreement Detection Selection
H6-02
Pulse Train Input Scaling L5-01 Number of Auto Restart Attempts

L5-02 Auto Restart Fault Output Operation Selection
H6-03
Pulse Train Input Gain L5-04 Fault Reset Interval Time

H6-04 L5-05 Fault Reset Operation Selection
Pulse Train Input Bias L6-01 Torque Detection Selection 1

H6-05 L6-02
Pulse Train Input Filter Time Torque Detection Level 1

H6-06 L6-03
Pulse Train Monitor Selection Torque Detection Time 1

H6-07 L6-04 Torque Detection Selection 2
Pulse Train Monitor Scaling
L6-05
Torque Detection Level 2
L1-01 Motor Overload Protection Selection
L1-02 Motor Overload Protection Time L6-06
Torque Detection Time 2
Motor Overheat Alarm Operation Selection
L1-03 L7-01
(PTC input) Forward Torque Limit
Motor Overheat Fault Operation Selection
L1-04 L7-02
(PTC input) Reverse Torque Limit
Motor Temperature Input Filter Time (PTC
L1-05 L7-03
input) Forward Regenerative Torque Limit
Continuous Electrothermal Operation
L1-13 L7-04
Selection Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit
L2-01 Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection
L2-02 Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru Time
User User
No. Name No. Name
Setting Setting
L7-06 n8-88 Output Voltage Limit Switch Current Level
Torque Limit Integral Time Constant
n8-89 Output Voltage Limit Switch Hysteresis Width
Torque Limit Control Method Selection during n8-90 Output Voltage Limit Switch Speed
L7-07
Accel/Decel n8-91 Output Voltage Limit ld Limit
Internal Dynamic Braking Resistor Protection n9-10 AVR Time Constant
L8-01
Selection (ERF type)
n9-12 On-Delay Compensation Time
L8-02 Overheat Alarm Level
On-Delay Compensation Derating Start
L8-03 Overheat Pre-Alarm Operation Selection n9-62
Frequency
L8-05 Input Phase Loss Protection Selection n9-63 On-Delay Compensation Disable Frequency
L8-07 Output Phase Loss Protection Selection o1-01
L8-09 Output Ground Fault Detection Selection Drive Mode Unit Monitor Selection

L8-10 Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Selection o1-02
User Monitor Selection after Power Up
L8-11 Heatsink Cooling Fan Off-Delay Time
L8-12 Ambient Temperature Setting o1-03 Digital Operator Display Selection
L8-15 oL2 Characteristics Selection at Low Speed o1-10 User-Set Display Units Maximum Value
L8-18 Software Current Limit Selection o1-11 User-Set Display Units Decimal Display
L8-29 Current Unbalance Detection (LF2) o2-01 LO/RE Key Function Selection
L8-35 Installation Method Selection o2-02 STOP Key Function Selection
L8-38 Carrier Frequency Reduction Selection o2-03 User Parameter Default Value
L8-40 Carrier Frequency Reduction Off-Delay Time o2-04 Drive Model Selection
L8-41 High Current Alarm Selection Frequency Reference Setting Method
o2-05
L8-46 AVR Function Selection Selection
L8-51 STo Level o2-06 Digital Operator Disconnection Operation
L8-54 STo Bias Detection Selection Motor Direction at Power Up when Using
o2-07
n1-01 Hunting Prevention Selection Operator
n1-02 Hunting Prevention Gain Setting o3-01 Copy Function Selection
n1-03 Hunting Prevention Time Constant o3-02 Copy Allowed Selection
n1-05 o4-01 Cumulative Operation Time Setting
Hunting Prevention Gain while in Reverse o4-02 Cumulative Operation Time Selection

n2-01 Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) o4-03 Cooling Fan Operation Time Setting
Gain o4-05 Capacitor Maintenance Setting
n2-02 Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) o4-07 DC Bus Pre-charge Relay Maintenance Setting
Time Constant 1 o4-09 IGBT Maintenance Setting
n2-03 Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) o4-11 U2, U3 Initialization
Time Constant 2 o4-12 kWh Monitor Initialization
n3-13 Number of Run Commands Counter
Overexcitation Deceleration Gain o4-13
Initialization
n3-21 Overslip Suppression Current Level S1-01
n3-23 Overexcitation Operation Selection Disturb Function Selection

n8-45 S1-02
Speed Feedback Detection Control Gain Disturb Function Amplitude

n8-47 Pull-In Current Compensation Time Constant S1-03
Disturb Step
n8-48
Pull-In Current
S1-04
Disturb Deceleration Time
n8-49
d-Axis Current for High Efficiency Control
S1-05
Disturb Acceleration Time
n8-51
Acceleration/Deceleration Pull-In Current
S2-01
Frequency Reference Gain
n8-54
Voltage Error Compensation Time Constant
S2-02
Frequency Reference Gain Change Ramp
n8-55 Load Inertia
n8-62 Output Voltage Limit S3-01 Braking Transistor Operation Selection
n8-63 Output Voltage Limit Gain 1 S3-02 Braking Transistor Operation Voltage Level
Speed Feedback Detection Control Gain S3-03 V/f Gain Enable/Disable
n8-65
Quick Reference
during ov Suppression S3-04

n8-68 Output Voltage Limit Gain 2 V/f Gain Change Time

n8-87 Output Voltage Limit Selection S4-01 KEB Mode Selection
Sheet
User User
No. Name No. Name
Setting Setting
S4-02 T1-11 Motor Iron Loss
KEB Start/End Voltage
U1-01 Frequency Reference
S4-03 U1-02 Output Frequency
KEB Start Voltage

U1-03 Output Current
S4-04
KEB Start dV/dt level U1-04 Control Method

S4-05 U1-05 Motor Speed
KEB Start dV/dt filter
U1-06 Output Voltage Reference
S4-06 U1-07 DC Bus Voltage
KEB End Voltage

U1-08 Output Power
S4-07
KEB End Detection Time U1-09 Torque Reference

S4-08 U1-10 Input Terminal Status
KEB 1 Phase Loss Detection Level
U1-11 Output Terminal Status
S4-09 U1-12 Drive Status
KEB 1 Phase Loss Sampling Time

U1-13 Terminal A1 Input Voltage
S4-10
KEB 1 Phase Loss Detection Time U1-14 Terminal A2 Input Voltage

S4-11 U1-16 Output Frequency after Soft Starter
KEB Target Voltage
U1-18 OPE Fault Parameter
S4-12 U1-19 MEMOBUS/Modbus Error Code
KEB Hold Time

U1-24 Input Pulse Monitor
S4-13
KEB Minimum Operation Time U1-25 Software Number (Flash)

S4-14 U1-26 Software Number (ROM)
KEB Reacceleration Prohibit Frequency
U2-01 Current Fault
S5-01 U2-02 Previous Fault
KEB1 Decel Time 1
U2-03 Frequency Reference at Previous Fault
S5-02
KEB1 Decel Time 2 U2-04 Output Frequency at Previous Fault

S5-03 U2-05 Output Current at Previous Fault
KEB1 Decel Time Switching Frequency U2-06 Motor Speed at Previous Fault

S5-04 U2-07 Output Voltage at Previous Fault
KEB1 Decel Time Switching Time
U2-08 DC Bus Voltage at Previous Fault
S5-05
KEB1 Synchronous Acceleration Time U2-09 Output Power at Previous Fault

U2-10 Torque Reference at Previous Fault
S5-06
S-Curve at KEB Deceleration Start U2-11 Input Terminal Status at Previous Fault

S5-07 Frequency Gain at KEB Start during Constant U2-12 Output Terminal Status at Previous Fault
Speed U2-13 Drive Operation Status at Previous Fault
S5-08 Frequency Gain at KEB Start during U2-14 Cumulative Operation Time at Previous Fault
Acceleration
U2-15 Soft Starter Speed Reference at Previous Fault
S5-09 Frequency Gain at KEB Start during
Deceleration U2-16 Motor q-Axis Current at Previous Fault
S5-10 Synchronous Deceleration ov Prevention U2-17 Motor d-Axis Current at Previous Fault
S6-01 DC Bus Capacity U3-01 Most Recent Fault
S6-02 Motor Acceleration Time U3-02 2nd Most Recent Fault
S6-03 Load/Inertia Ratio U3-03 3rd Most Recent Fault
S6-04 Main Circuit Voltage Adjustment Gain U3-04 4th Most Recent Fault
S6-05 Accel/Decel Calculation Gain U3-05 5th Most Recent Fault
T1-00 Motor 1 / Motor 2 Selection U3-06 6th Most Recent Fault
T1-01 Auto-Tuning Mode Selection U3-07 7th Most Recent Fault
T1-02 Motor Rated Power
U3-08 8th Most Recent Fault
T1-03 Motor Rated Voltage
T1-04 Motor Rated Current
T1-05 Motor Rated Frequency
T1-06 Number of Motor Poles Cumulative Operation Time at Most Recent
U3-11
Fault
T1-07 Motor Rated Speed
User User
No. Name No. Name
Setting Setting
Cumulative Operation Time at 2nd Most U6-07 q-axis ACR Output
U3-12
Recent Fault U6-08 d-Axis ACR Output
Cumulative Operation Time at 3rd Most
U3-13 U6-21 Offset Frequency
Recent Fault
U6-80 to
Cumulative Operation Time at 4th Most Option Monitors 1 to 20
U3-14 U6-99
Recent Fault
U9-01 KEB Start Voltage
Cumulative Operation Time at 5th Most
U3-15 U9-02 KEB End Voltage
Recent Fault
Cumulative Operation Time at 6th Most U9-03 KEB Function Limit Monitor
U3-16
Recent Fault
U3-17
Recent Fault
U3-18
Recent Fault
U3-19
Recent Fault
U3-20
Recent Fault
U4-01 Cumulative Operation Time
U4-02 Number of Run Commands
U4-03 Cooling Fan Operation Time
U4-04 Cooling Fan Maintenance
U4-05 Capacitor Maintenance
U4-06 Soft Charge Bypass Relay Maintenance
U4-07 IGBT Maintenance

U4-08 Heatsink Temperature
U4-09 LED Check
U4-10 kWh, Lower 4 Digits
U4-11 kWh, Upper 5 Digits
U4-13 Peak Hold Current
U4-14 Peak Hold Output Frequency
U4-16 Motor Overload Estimate (oL1)
U4-18 Frequency Reference Source Selection
Frequency Reference from MEMOBUS/
U4-19
Modbus Comm.
U4-20 Option Frequency Reference
U4-21 Run Command Source Selection
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications
U4-22
Reference
U4-23 Communication Option Card Reference
U5-01 PID Feedback
U5-02 PID Input
U5-03 PID Output
U5-04 PID Setpoint
U5-05 PID Differential Feedback
U5-06 PID Adjusted Feedback
U6-01 Motor Secondary Current (Iq)
U6-02 Motor Excitation Current (ld)
U6-03 ASR Input
U6-04 ASR Output
Quick Reference
U6-05 Output Voltage Reference (Vq)

U6-06 Output Voltage Reference (Vd)
Sheet
B
B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
B2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Index Backing Up Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Base Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Base Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Symbols Baseblock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Basic Auto-Tuning Preparations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
– ................................................. 56
Basic Start-up and Motor Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
+1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
bb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
+2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Before Auto-Tuning the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
+V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Bi-Directional Speed Search Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Numerics Bottom Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 31
1800 rpm Type Yaskawa SMRA Series SPM Motor Settings . 385 Braking Resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 302
200 V, 1750 rpm Type Yaskawa SSR1 Series Motor . . . . . . . . 386 Braking Resistor Overheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
24 V Power Supply Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Braking Resistor Overheat Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
2-Wire Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Braking Resistor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3600 rpm Type Yaskawa SMRA Series SPM Motor Settings . 385 Braking Resistor Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
3-Wire Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Braking Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
3-Wire Sequence Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Braking Transistor Operation Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
400 V, 1750 rpm Type Yaskawa SSR1 Series Motor . . . . . . . . 387 Braking Transistor Operation Voltage Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
A Braking Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
A/D Conversion Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Broadcast Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
A/D Conversion Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 bUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249, 261
A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 C
A1-02 (Motor 1 Control Mode) Dependent Parameters . . . . . 375 Cable Length Between Drive and Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 CALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Can Not Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
AC Reactor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 CANopen Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Accel/Decel Calculation Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Capacitor Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Accel/Decel Switching Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Capacitor Maintenance Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Accel/Decel Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Carrier Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147, 317
Accel/Decel Time Setting Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Carrier Frequency Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Acceleration Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Carrier Frequency Lower Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Acceleration Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Acceleration/Deceleration Pull-In Current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Carrier Frequency Reduction Off-Delay Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Access Level Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 108 Carrier Frequency Reduction Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
AFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Carrier Frequency Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Alarm Register 007FH Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Carrier Frequency Setting Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
ALM LED Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Carrier Frequency Upper Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Altitude. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 30, 31
AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 CC-Link Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Ambient Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 CE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249, 262
Ambient Temperature and Installation Method Derating. . . . . 325 CE Detection Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Ambient Temperature Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Ammeter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 CF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Analog Input Filter Time Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Changing Parameter Settings or Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Analog Input Signal Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Checking and Monitoring Heatsink Plate Temperature . . . . . . . 42
Analog Input Torque Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Clock Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Applicable Motor Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Clock Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Application Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Closed-Loop Crimp Terminal Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Coast to Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
ASR Integral Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Coast to Stop with Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
ASR Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 CoF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
ASR Proportional Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Comm Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 30, 31
Auto Restart Fault Output Operation Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Command Messages from Master to Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Automatic Reduction Selection for Communication Fault Detection Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Stall Prevention during Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Communication Option Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Automatic Speed Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Communication Option Card Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Auto-Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Communication Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Auto-Tuning Error Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Communication Parity Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Auto-Tuning Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Communication Speed Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Auto-Tuning Interruption and Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Communications Enter Function Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Auto-Tuning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Communications Error Operation Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
AVR Function Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Communications Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
AVR Time Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Component Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Conducted Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 DC Bus Undervoltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Connecting a Braking Resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 DC Injection Braking Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Connecting a DC Reactor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 DC Injection Braking Current 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Connecting a Noise Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 DC Injection Braking Start Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Connecting a Suppression Diode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 DC Injection Braking Time at Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Connecting a Surge Absorber. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 DC Injection Braking Time at Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Connecting an AC Reactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 DC Injection Braking to Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Connecting Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 DC Reactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Connection of a Motor PTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 DC Reactors for EN 61000-3-2 Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Continuous Electrothermal Operation Selection . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Deceleration Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Control Circuit Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Deceleration Time at Stall Prevention during Acceleration . . . 199
Control Circuit Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250, 251 Defaults by Drive Model Selection (o2-04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Control Circuit Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Delay Timers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Control Circuit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Derivative Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Control Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 dEv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251, 262
Control Method Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 DeviceNet Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Diagnosing and Resetting Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Control Mode Dependent Parameter Default Values . . . . . . . . 375 Digital Input and Output Operation During Auto-Tuning . . . . . 94
Control Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Digital LED Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Control Power Supply Voltage Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Digital LED Operator Screen Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 30, 31 Digital Multi-Function Input Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Cooling Fan Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Digital Operator Display Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Cooling Fan Operation Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Digital Operator Keypad Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Cooling Fan Operation Time Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Digital Text Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Cooling Fan Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Copy Allowed Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 DIN Rail Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Copy Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 222 DIP Switch S1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 68
Copy Function Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 DIP Switch S2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 69
CPF02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 DIP switch S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
CPF03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 DIP Switch S3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 66
CPF06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Disturb Acceleration Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
CPF07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Disturb Deceleration Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
CPF08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Disturb Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
CPF11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Disturb Function Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
CPF12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Disturb Function Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
CPF13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Disturb Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
CPF14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Down Arrow Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
CPF16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Drive Capacity Setting Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
CPF17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Drive Capacity Signal Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
CPF18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Drive Cooling Fans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
CPF19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Drive Derating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
CPF20 or CPF21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Drive Duty Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
CPF22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Drive Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
CPF23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Drive Mode Unit Monitor Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
CPF24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Drive Model Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
CRC-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Drive Motor Overload Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
CRC-16 Checksum Calculation Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Drive Overheat Alarm (oH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
CrST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Drive Overheat Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Cumulative Operation Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Drive Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Cumulative Operation Time Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Drive Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Cumulative Operation Time Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Drive Short-Circuit Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Current Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Drive Slave Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Current Detection Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Drive Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Current Detection Type Speed Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Drive Standard Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Current Offset Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Drive Transmit Wait Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Current Unbalance Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Drive Watt Loss Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Cyclic Redundancy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Drive Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
D Drive Wizard Plus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
DRV LED Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
d Axis Current for High Efficiency Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
During Frequency Output Time Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
D Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
During Run Time Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Daily Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Dwell Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Data Required for Heatsink Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Dwell Reference at Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
DC Bus Adjustment Gain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Dwell Reference at Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
DC Bus Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Dwell Time at Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
DC Bus Overvoltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Dwell Time at Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
DC Bus Pre-charge Relay Maintenance Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Dynamic Braking Transistor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
E Fault Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
E3-01 (Motor 2 Control Mode) Dependent Parameters. . . . . . 375 Fault History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 370
E5-01 (PM Motor Code Selection) Dependent Parameters . . . 385 Fault Reset Interval Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
EEPROM Data Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Fault Reset Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
EEPROM Serial Communication Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Fault Reset Operation Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
EEPROM Write Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Fault Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
EF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Fault Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 273, 370
EF0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 263 Fault Trace/History Register Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
EF1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 263 Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
EF2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 263 FbH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 263
EF3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 263 FbL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 263
EF4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 263 Ferrule Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
EF5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 263 Ferrule Terminal Types and Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
EF6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 263 Ferrule-Type Wire Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
EF7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 263 Fine Tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Electrical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 FJOG/RJOG Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
EMC Filter and Drive Installation for CE Compliance . . . . . . 424 FLASH Memory Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
EMC Filter Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 FLASH Memory Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
EMC Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Formula to Calculate the Amount of Voltage Drop . . . . . . . . . . 56
EMC Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Forward Regenerative Torque Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
EMC Guidelines Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Forward Torque Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
EN 61800-3 Category C1 Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Forward/Reverse Run Command Input Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Enclosure Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 FOUT LED Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
End1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Frequency Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
End2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Frequency Control Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
End3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Frequency Detection 1 Time Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Energy Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Frequency Detection 2 Time Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Energy Saving Coefficient Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Frequency Detection 3 Example with Positive L3-04 Value . . 181
Energy Saving Control Filter Time Constant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Frequency Detection 4 Example with Positive L3-04 Value . . 181
Energy Saving Control Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Frequency Gain at KEB Start during Acceleration . . . . . . . . . 233
Energy Saving Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Frequency Gain at KEB Start during Constant Speed . . . . . . . 233
Enter Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Frequency Gain at KEB Start during Deceleration . . . . . . . . . 233
Enter Command Necessary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Frequency Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Enter Command not Necessary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Frequency Meter Scaling Resistor (20 kOhm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Enter Command Settings when Upgrading the Drive . . . . . . . 416 Frequency Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Enter Command Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Frequency Reference 2 Lower Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Enter Data from the Motor Nameplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Frequency Reference 2 Upper Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
ENTER Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Frequency Reference at Reference Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Er-01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Frequency Reference from MEMOBUS/Modbus Comm. . . . . 372
Er-02. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Frequency Reference Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Er-03. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Frequency Reference Gain Change Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Er-04. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Frequency Reference Loss Detection Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Er-05. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Frequency Reference Lower Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Er-08. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Frequency Reference Monitor Content During PID . . . . . . . . 137
Er-09. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Frequency Reference Potentiometer Knob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Er-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Frequency Reference Setting Hierarchy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Er-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Frequency Reference Setting Method Selection . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Err. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Frequency Reference Setting Potentiometer (2 kOhm) . . . . . . 303
ESC Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Frequency Reference Source 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
European Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Frequency Reference Source 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Excessive PID Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 263 Frequency Reference Source Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Excessive Speed Deviation Detection Delay Time . . . . . . . . . 164 Frequency Reference Upper Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Excessive Speed Deviation Detection Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Frequency Setting Resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Excessive V/f Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Frequency Setting Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Front Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 30, 31
External Digital Operator Connection Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Front Cover Screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 30, 31
External Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 263 Function Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
External Fault from Comm. Option Detection Selection. . . . . 164 Functions for Terminals S1 to S7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
External Fault from Comm. Option Operation Selection . . . . 164 Functions for Textile Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
External Heatsink Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Fuse Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
External Heatsink Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
External Operator Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 G
F GF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Fan Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 30, 31 Ground Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Fast Stop Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Ground Terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Fast-stop Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Ground Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Grounding Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 KEB 1 Phase Loss Detection Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
H KEB 1 Phase Loss Sampling Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
KEB 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
KEB 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Hbb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
KEB End Detection Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
HbbF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
KEB End Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231, 374
HC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
KEB Function Limit Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
HCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
KEB Hold Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
KEB Minimum Operation Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
HD and ND. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
KEB Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227, 230
Heatsink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 30, 31
KEB Reacceleration Prohibit Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Heatsink Cooling Fan Off-Delay Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
KEB Start dv/dt Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
KEB Start dv/dt Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Heatsink External Mounting Attachment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
KEB Start Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230, 374
Heatsink Overheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255, 264
KEB Start/End Voltage Setting Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Heatsink Overheat Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
KEB Synchronous Acceleration Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Heatsink Plate Installation Screw Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
KEB Target Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Heatsink Plate Temperature (Finless Drive). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
KEB Voltage Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 374
Heatsink Selection Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Keys and Displays on the LED Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Heatsink Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
kWh. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Heavy Duty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 147, 316
kWh Monitor Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
High Current Alarm Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
High Performance Operation Using L
Open Loop Vector Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Language Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Holding Brake Time Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 LCD Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 303
Humidity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 LED Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Hunting Prevention. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 LED Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 30, 31, 78
Hunting Prevention Gain Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 LED Screen Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Hunting Prevention Gain while in Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 LF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Hunting Prevention Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 LF2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211, 253
Hunting Prevention Time Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Line-to-Line Resistance Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
I LO/RE (LOCAL/REMOTE) Key Function Selection . . . . . . . 220
LO/RE LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
I Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
LO/RE Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
IG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
LO/RE Selection Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
IGBT Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Load Inertia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
IGBT Maintenance Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Load/Inertia Ratio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Induced Noise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
LOCAL/REMOTE Run Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Loopback Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Initialization Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Loss of Reference Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Initialize Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Low Voltage Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Input Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Low Voltage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Input Noise Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Low Voltage Wiring for Control Circuit Terminals . . . . . . . . . 428
Input Phase Loss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Input Voltage Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 M
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 MA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Magnetic Contactor (Input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Installation Method Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Magnetic Flux Compensation Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Installation Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Main Circuit Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Installation to an External Heatsink (Finless Drive) . . . . . . . . . 41 Main Circuit Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Installing a Leakage Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Main Circuit Terminal Block Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Installing a Magnetic Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Main Circuit Terminal Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Installing a Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) . . . . . . . . . 306 Main Circuit Terminal Power Supply and Motor Wiring. . . . . . 59
Installing a Motor Thermal Overload (oL) Relay on the Main Circuit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Drive Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Main Frequency Reference Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Installing Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Maintenance Monitor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Installing the Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Maintenance Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 290, 371
Integral Limit Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Master Speed Reference Lower Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Integral Time Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Max Output Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Internal Dynamic Braking Resistor Protection Selection Max Output Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
(ERF type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Maximum Motor Size Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Maximum Output Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
J Maximum Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Jog Frequency Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
MC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
K Mechanical Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
KEB 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 MECHATROLINK Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
KEB 1 Phase Loss Detection Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 MEMOBUS/Modbus Comm. Test Mode Complete. . . . . . . . . 266
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error . . . . . . . . . . 249, 262 Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Test Mode Error . . . . . 266 Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications Reference . . . . . . . . . 373 Motor Leakage Inductance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
MEMOBUS/Modbus Data Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Motor Line-to-Line Resistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
MEMOBUS/Modbus Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Motor Mechanical Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
MEMOBUS/Modbus Setup Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Motor No-Load Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
MEMOBUS/Modbus specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Motor Overheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
MEMOBUS/Modbus Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Motor Overheat Alarm (PTC Input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
MEMOBUS/Modbus Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Motor Overheat Alarm Operation Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Menu Structure for Digital LED Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Motor Overheat Fault (PTC Input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Message Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Motor Overheat Fault Operation Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Meter Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Motor Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Middle Output Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Motor Overload Estimate (oL1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Middle Output Frequency 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Motor Overload Protection Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192, 429
Middle Output Frequency Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Motor Overload Protection Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194, 430
Middle Output Frequency Voltage 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Motor Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Minimum Output Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Motor Performance Fine Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Minimum Output Frequency Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Motor Protection Using a Positive Temperature Coefficient . . 194
Minimum Wait Time for Sending Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Motor PTC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Minor Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Motor Pull Out or Step Out Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Minor Fault and Alarm Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Motor q-Axis Inductance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Minor Faults and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245, 247 Motor Rated Current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 155, 161, 429
Model Number and Nameplate Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Motor Rated Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Molded Case Circuit Breaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Motor Rated Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 157, 161
Momentary Power Loss Minimum Baseblock Time . . . . . . . . 196 Motor Rated Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Motor Rated Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Momentary Power Loss Recovery Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Motor Rated Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196, 322 Motor Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Motor Speed Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time . . . . . 197 Motor Stator Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Monitor Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Motor Switch during Run. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Monitor Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Motor Temperature Input Filter Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Monitor Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Mounting Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 30, 31
Motor 1 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 MP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Motor 1/Motor 2 Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Multi-Function Analog Input Selection Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Motor 2 Base Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Multi-Function Analog Input Terminal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Motor 2 Base Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Multi-Function Analog Input Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Motor 2 Control Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal AM Bias . . . . . . . . . 189
Motor 2 Iron Loss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal AM Gain . . . . . . . . . 189
Motor 2 Leakage Inductance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal AM
Motor 2 Line-to-Line Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Monitor Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Motor 2 Max Output Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Multi-Function Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Motor 2 Max Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Multi-Function Digital Inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 166
Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Multi-Function Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Multi-Function Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Multi-Function Input Selection Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency Voltage 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Multi-Function Output Terminal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Multi-Function Photocoupler Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Multi-Step Speed Enable/Disable Selection when
Motor 2 Motor Poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 NefRef/ComRef is Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Motor 2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Multi-Step Speed Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Motor 2 Rated Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 N
Motor 2 Rated No-Load Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Nameplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Motor 2 Rated Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Navigating the Drive and Programming Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Motor 2 Rated Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
ND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Motor 2 Slip Compensation Gain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Network Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Motor 2 Torque Compensation Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
No-Load Current Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Motor Acceleration Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
No-Load Operation Test Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Motor Data Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Normal Duty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 147, 316
Motor d-Axis Inductance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Notes on Controlling the Brake for the Hoist Application. . . . 203
Motor Direction at Power Up when Using Operator . . . . . . . . 222
Notes on Motor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Motor Induction Voltage Constant 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Notes on Rotational Auto-Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Motor Induction Voltage Constant 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Notes on Stationary Auto-Tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Motor Iron Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
nSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Number of Auto Restart Attempts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Output Phase Loss Protection Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Number of Motor Poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 156, 161 Output Voltage Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Number of Run Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Output Voltage Limit Operation Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Number of Run Commands Counter Initialization . . . . . . . . . 224 ov . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257, 266
Number of Speed Search Restarts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Overcurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
O Overcurrent Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Overexcitation Deceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
oC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Overexcitation Deceleration Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
oFA00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Overexcitation Operation Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
oFA01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Overheat 1 (Heatsink Overheat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
oFA03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Overheat Alarm Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
oFA04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Overheat Pre-Alarm Operation Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
oFA30 to oFA43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Overload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Offset Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Overload Tolerance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
oH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208, 255, 264
Overslip Suppression Current Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
oH1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Overspeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
oH2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Overspeed (Simple V/f with PG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
oH3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255, 265
Overspeed Detection Delay Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
oH4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Overspeed Detection Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
oL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Overtorque 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
oL2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210, 256
Overtorque 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
oL2 Characteristics Selection at Low Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Overtorque Detection 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
oL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257, 265
Overtorque Detection 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
oL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257, 265
Overtorque Detection Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
On-Delay Compensation Derating Start Frequency. . . . . . . . . 218
Overvoltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
On-Delay Compensation Disable Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Overvoltage Suppression Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
On-Delay Compensation Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Overvoltage Suppression Function Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
oPE01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
oPE02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 P
oPE03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 P Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
oPE04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
oPE05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
oPE07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Parameter Access Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
oPE08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Parameter Range Setting Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
oPE09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Parameter Selection Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
oPE10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Parameters Available in the Setup Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
oPE11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 PASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
oPE13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 110
Operation at PG Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Password Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Operation Error Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Operation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245, 248 PC Serial Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Operation Selection at Deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Peak Hold Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Operation Selection at Overspeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Peak Hold Output Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Operation Selection at PG Open Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Performance Life Monitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Operation Selection when Digital LCD Operator is Periodic Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Disconnected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Periodic Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Operation Status Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 368, 373 Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Operation with Permanent Magnet Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 PF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Operator Related Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 PG Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258, 266
oPr. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 PG Open-Circuit Detection Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Option Caed External Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 PG Speed Control Card Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Option Card Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 PGo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163, 258, 266
Option Card External Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Phase Order Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Option Card Fault (Port A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 PID Accel/Decel Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Option Communication Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249, 261 PID Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Option Frequency Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 PID Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Option Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 PID Control Selection Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Optional 24 V DC Power Supply Connector Cover. . . . 29, 30, 31 PID Feedback High Detection Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 PID Feedback High Detection Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
oS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257, 265 PID Feedback Input Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Output Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 PID Feedback Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 263
Output Current 1 During Speed Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 PID Feedback Loss Detection Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Output Current Imbalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 PID Feedback Loss Detection Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Output Frequency Calculation Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 PID Feedback Low Detection Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Output Ground Fault Detection Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 PID Function Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Output Noise Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 PID Input Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Output Phase Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 PID Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 373
PID Offset Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Reset Communication Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
PID Output Gain Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 RESET Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
PID Output Level Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Response Messages from Drive to Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
PID Output Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 REV LED Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
PID Output Lower Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Reverse Direction Output Example Time Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . 182
PID Output Reverse Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Reverse Operation Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
PID Primary Delay Time Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
PID Setpoint Display Digits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Reverse Torque Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
PID Setpoint Input Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 rH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
PID Setpoint Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Rotational Auto-Tuning for OLV Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
PID Setpoint Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Rotational Auto-Tuning for V/f Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
PID Setpoint User Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 RP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
PID Setpoint Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 rr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
PID Sleep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 RS-422 Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
PID Sleep Delay Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 RS-485 Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
PID Sleep Function Start Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 RTS Control Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
PM Motor Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 rUn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
PM Motor Code Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160, 385 Run Command at Power Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
PM Motor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Run Command Method Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Power Detection Filter Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Run Command Selection while in Programming Mode. . . . . . 119
Power KEB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Run Command Source 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Power KEB Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Run Command Source 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Power Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Run Command Source Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Powering Up the Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Run Command/Frequency Reference Source Selection Error . 269
Preparing the Ends of Shielded Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 RUN Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Preset Reference Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 RUN LED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
PROFIBUS-DP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 RUN LED and Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Programming Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 RUN LED Status and Meaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Proportional Gain Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 RUN Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Protective Cover to Prevent Miswiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 S
Protective Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
S– . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
PTC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
S+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Pull-In Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
S/L2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Pull-In Current Compensation Time Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
S1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Pulse Monitor Selection Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Pulse Train Input Bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
S3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Pulse Train Input Filter Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
S4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Pulse Train Input Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
S5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Pulse Train Input Minimum Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
S6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Pulse Train Input Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
S7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Pulse Train Input Terminal RP Function Selection . . . . . . . . . 190
Safe Disable Function Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Pulse Train Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Safe Disable Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Pulse Train Monitor Scaling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Safe Disable Input Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Pulse Train Monitor Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Safe Disable Signal Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
PWM Data Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Safe Disable Wiring Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
PWM Feedback Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Safety Regulations and Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
PWM Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
R S-Curve at KEB Deceleration Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
R– . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 S-Curve Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
R+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 SE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
R/L1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Search Operation Voltage Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Radiated Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Selecting an External Heatsink (Finless Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
RAM Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250, 251 self-diagnosing function of the serial communication
Ramp to Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 interface circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Rated Current Depending on Carrier Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . 149 SEr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Rated Current Setting Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Serial Communication Transmission Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Rated Output Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Serial Communications Cable Connection Terminals . . . . . . . 394
Rated Slip Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Serial Communications Terminal and DIP Switch S2 . . . . . . . 397
READ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Serviceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Reading Drive MEMOBUS/Modbus Register Contents . . . . . 405 Setup Group Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Reattaching the Protective Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Setup Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Removable Control Circuit Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Short Circuit Brake Time at Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Removing the Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Short Circuit Brake Time at Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Removing the Protective Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Side-by-Side Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Side-by-Side Mounting with Heatsink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Replacing the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Simple Motor Setup with Energy Savings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Sinking Mode: Sequence from NPN Transistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Switching Between LOCAL and REMOTE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Sinking/Sourcing Mode Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Synchronous Deceleration ov Prevention. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Slave Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 T
Slip Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
T/L3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Slip Compensation Gain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Target DC Bus Voltage for Overvoltage Suppression and
Slip Compensation Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Stall Prevention. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Temperature Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Slip Compensation Selection during Regeneration . . . . . . . . . 143
Terminal A1 Bias Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Soft Charge Bypass Relay Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Terminal A1 Function Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Software Current Limit Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Terminal A1 Gain Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Software Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Terminal A1 Signal Level Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Source Mode: Sequence from PNP Transistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Terminal A2 Bias Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Space Between Drives (Side-by-Side Mounting). . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Terminal A2 Function Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Space Requirements for Multiple Drives in
Terminal A2 Gain Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
an Enclosure Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Terminal A2 Signal Level Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Speed Agree 1 Time Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Terminal Block Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Speed Agree 2 Time Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Terminal Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 30, 31, 295
Speed Agreement Detection Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Terminal Board Communications Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Speed Agreement Detection Level (+/–) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Terminal Board Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Speed Agreement Detection Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Terminal Board Wiring Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Speed Agreement Detection Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Terminal Connections for Communication Self-Diagnostics. . 418
Speed Agreement Detection Width (+/–) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Terminal Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 30, 31, 32
Speed Control Accuracy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Terminal MA, MB and MC Function Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Speed Control Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Terminal P1-PC Function Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Speed Deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251, 262
Terminal P2-PC Function Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Speed Estimation Type Speed Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Terminating Resistor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Gain . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Test Run Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Time Constant 1 . . 214
Test Run with Load Connected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Time Constant 2 . . 214
Thermal Compound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Tuning . . . . . . . . . 213
Tightening Torque. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 63
Speed Feedback Detection Control Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Tightening Torque (Finless Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Speed Feedback Detection Control Gain during
Timer Function Off-Delay Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
ov Suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Timer Function On-Delay Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Speed Feedback for V/f Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Timing Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Speed Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Too Many Speed Search Restarts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Speed Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Torque Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Speed Search Deactivation Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Torque Compensation at Forward Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Speed Search Deceleration Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Torque Compensation at Reverse Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Speed Search Delay Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Torque Compensation Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Speed Search Detection Compensation Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Speed Search Method Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Speed Search Restart Current Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Torque Compensation Time Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Speed Search Restart Detection Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Torque Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Speed Search Selection at Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Torque Detection Level 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Speed Search Using V/f Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Torque Detection Level 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Speed Search Wait Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Torque Detection Selection 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Stall Prevention. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Torque Detection Selection 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Torque Detection Time 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Torque Detection Time 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Stall Prevention Level during Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Torque Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Stall Prevention Limit during Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Torque Limit Control Method Selection during Accel/Decel . 207
Stall Prevention Selection during Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Torque Limit Integral Time Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Torque Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Stall Prevention Selection during Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Transistor Input Signal Using +24 V Common/Source Mode . . 67
Starting Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Transistor Input Signal Using 0 V Common/Sink Mode . . . . . . 66
Start-up Flowcharts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance. . . . . . . . . 94
Troubleshooting without Fault Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Tuning Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
STO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Tuning Mode Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
STOP Button Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Types of Alarms, Faults, and Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
STOP Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Types of Auto-Tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
STOP Key Function Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Stopping Method after Communication Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 U
Stopping Method Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 U/T1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Stopping Methods for PGo, oS, dEv Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 U2, U3 Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Storage Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 UL Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Surge Absorber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 UL Standards Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
UL3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259, 267
UL4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260, 267
Undertorque Detection 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259, 267
Undertorque Detection 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260, 267
Undertorque Detection Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Undervoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Undervoltage 3 (Inrush Prevention Circuit Fault) . . . . . . . . . . 260
Undervoltage Detection Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Unit Selection for MEMOBUS/Modbus Register 0025H . . . . 399
Up Arrow Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Up/Down Command Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
USB/Copy Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 303
User Monitor Selection after Power Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
User Parameter Automatic Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 111
User Parameter Default Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
User Parameters 1 to 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 111
User Set Speed Agree 1 Time Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
User Set Speed Agree 2 Example with Positive L3-04 Value . 180
User-Set Display Units Decimal Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
User-Set Display Units Maximum Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Uv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Uv1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Uv2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Uv3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
V
V/f Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
V/f Data Setting Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
V/f Gain Change Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
V/f Gain During Speed Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
V/f Gain Enable/Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
V/f Pattern Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
V/f Pattern for Motor 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
V/f Pattern for Motor 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
V/f Pattern Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
V/f Pattern Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
V/T2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
VERIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Verify Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Verifying Parameter Changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Voltage Error Compensation Time Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
W
W/T3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Watchdog Circuit Exception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250, 251
Watt Hour Output Unit Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Wire Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Wire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Wiring Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Wiring Diagram for 2-Wire Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Wiring Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Wiring Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Wiring the Frequency Reference to the Control
Circuit Terminals (External Reference) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
WRITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Writing to Multiple Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Z
Zero Phase Reactor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Zero-Phase Reactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Zero-Speed Time Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Revision History
The revision dates and the numbers of the revised manuals appear on the bottom of the back cover.
MANUAL NO. SIEP C710606 38B‫ޓ‬

Published in Japan December 2010 08-12 1
Revision number
Date of Date of original
publication publication
Date of Publication Revision Number Section Revised Content

Front cover Revision: Format
Revision: ･ Reviewed and corrected entire documentation.
All
･ Upgraded the software version to S6002.
December 2010 1 Chapter 2 Revision: Therminal Compound
Change: Updated recommended input fuse list for compliance with standards outside the country
Appendix D
where the product was purchased.
Back cover Revision: Adress, format
December 2008 − − First Edition
YASKAWA AC Drive T1000V
AC Drive for Textile Applications
Technical Manual
DRIVE CENTER (INVERTER PLANT)

2-13-1, Nishimiyaichi, Yukuhashi, Fukuoka, 824-8511, Japan
Phone: 81-930-25-3844 Fax: 81-930-25-4369
http://www.yaskawa.co.jp
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION

New Pier Takeshiba South Tower, 1-16-1, Kaigan, Minatoku, Tokyo, 105-6891, Japan
Phone: 81-3-5402-4502 Fax: 81-3-5402-4580
http://www.yaskawa.co.jp
YASKAWA AMERICA, INC.

2121 Norman Drive South, Waukegan, IL 60085, U.S.A.
Phone: (800) YASKAWA (927-5292) or 1-847-887-7000 Fax: 1-847-887-7310
http://www.yaskawa.com
YASKAWA ELÉTRICO DO BRASIL LTDA.

Avenda Fagundes Filho, 620 Bairro Saude, São Paulo, SP04304-000, Brasil
Phone: 55-11-3585-1100 Fax: 55-11-5581-8795
http://www.yaskawa.com.br
YASKAWA EUROPE GmbH

Hauptstrasse 185, 65760 Eschborn, Germany
Phone: 49-6196-569-300 Fax: 49-6196-569-398
http://www.yaskawa.eu.com
YASKAWA ELECTRIC UK LTD.

1 Hunt Hill Orchardton Woods, Cumbernauld, G68 9LF, United Kingdom
Phone: 44-1236-735000 Fax: 44-1236-458182
http://www.yaskawa.co.uk
YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION

7F, Doore Bldg. 24, Yeoido-dong, Yeoungdungpo-gu, Seoul, 150-877, Korea
Phone: 82-2-784-7844 Fax: 82-2-784-8495
http://www.yaskawa.co.kr
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD.

151 Lorong Chuan, #04-01, New Tech Park, 556741, Singapore
Phone: 65-6282-3003 Fax: 65-6289-3003
http://www.yaskawa.com.sg
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SHANGHAI) CO., LTD.

No. 18 Xizang Zhong Road, 17F, Harbour Ring Plaza, Shanghai, 200001, China
Phone: 86-21-5385-2200 Fax: 86-21-5385-3299
http://www.yaskawa.com.cn
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SHANGHAI) CO., LTD. BEIJING OFFICE

Room 1011, Tower W3 Oriental Plaza, No. 1 East Chang An Ave.,
Dong Cheng District, Beijing, 100738, China
Phone: 86-10-8518-4086 Fax: 86-10-8518-4082
YASKAWA ELECTRIC TAIWAN CORPORATION

9F, 16, Nanking E. Rd., Sec. 3, Taipei, 104, Taiwan
Phone: 886-2-2502-5003 Fax: 886-2-2505-1280
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
In the event that the end user of this product is to be the military and said product is to be employed in any weapons systems or the manufacture
thereof, the export will fall under the relevant regulations as stipulated in the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Regulations. Therefore, be sure
to follow all procedures and submit all relevant documentation according to any and all rules, regulations and laws that may apply.
Specifications are subject to change without notice for ongoing product modifications and improvements.
© 2008-2010 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
MANUAL NO. SIEP C710606 38B

Published in Japan December 2010 08-12 1 -0
10-10-6

YASKAWA AC Drive T1000V: Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

YASKAWA AC Drive T1000V: Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

YASKAWA AC Drive T1000V: Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

YASKAWA AC Drive T1000V

AC Drive for Textile Applications

Drive a Synchronous PM Motor

Check the Maintenance Period Using Drive Monitors

Drive or Motor Faults are Displayed on a Digital Operator

I. PREFACE & GENERAL SAFETY ....................................................................... 13

2. MECHANICAL INSTALLATION .......................................................................... 33

4. START-UP PROGRAMMING & OPERATION .................................................... 75

5. PARAMETER DETAILS..................................................................................... 107

7. PERIODIC INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE ................................................... 285

8. PERIPHERAL DEVICES & OPTIONS .............................................................. 299

C. MEMOBUS/MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS...................................................... 389

D. STANDARDS COMPLIANCE ............................................................................ 419

E. QUICK REFERENCE SHEET ............................................................................ 433

Index ............................................................................................................................ 444

T1000V Series AC Drive Technical Manual

T1000V Series AC Drive Quick Start Guide

WARNING Risk of electric shock.

operation, refer to the Technical Manual.

TERMS Indicates a term or definition used in this manual.

◆ Terms and Abbreviations

i.2 General Safety

4000 Power supply harmonics

Figure i.1 Installing a Reactor

◆ Notes on Motor Operation

25% ED (or 15 min)

Frequency (Hz) YEC

◆ Drive Label Warnings

WARNING Risk of electric shock.

Figure i.3 Warning Information

T1000V Freq Reference : (Hz)

WARNING Risk of electric shock.

Figure i.4 Warning Information Position

1.1 SECTION SAFETY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

1.1 Section Safety

1.2 Model Number and Nameplate Check

AC drive model MODEL : CIMR-TA2V0004BMA

FILE NO : E131457 IP20

Figure 1.1 Nameplate Information (Heatsink-Cooled Drive)

AC drive model MODEL : CIMR-TA2V0004JMA

FILE NO : E131457 IP00

Figure 1.2 Nameplate Information (Finless Drive)

No. Region No. Voltage Class No. Enclosure No. Environmental

Normal Duty Heavy Duty

Normal Duty Heavy Duty

<1> IP00 is available for CIMR-T2V0069 only.

1.3 Drive Models and Enclosure Types

1.4 Component Names

◆ Single-Phase AC200 V CIMR-TBV0001 to 0003

A – Fan cover <1> G – Front cover screw

◆ Single-Phase AC200 V CIMR-TBV0006 to 0012

A – Fan cover <1> H – Front cover

◆ Three-Phase AC200 V CIMR-T2V0030 to 0069

A – Fan cover <1> H – Front cover screw

CIMR-T 2V0006 CIMR-T 2V0012

A – Terminal board connector F – Ground terminal

2.1 SECTION SAFETY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

2.1 Section Safety

2.2 Mechanical Installation

<1> IP00 is available for CIMR-T2V0069 only.

◆ Single-Phase AC200 V CIMR-TBV0001 to 0003

◆ Single-Phase AC200 V CIMR-TBV0006 to 0012

◆ Three-Phase AC200 V CIMR-T2V0030 to 0069

◆ Single-Phase 200 V Class (CIMR-TBV0001 to 0012)

◆ Three-Phase 200 V Class (CIMR-T2V0001 to 0069);